JP2020108470A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: When identification information for indicating a discrimination result by discrimination means is dynamically displayed in display means by dynamic display means, and identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed, a privileged game advantageous to a player is executed by privileged game execution means. One performance is determined from a plurality of types of performances by determination means as a performance executed by performance execution means. A privilege to create a state advantageous to the player is imparted by privilege imparting means based on the order of the one performance determined by the determination means. Thereby, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are capable of executing a plurality of games with different degrees of advantage for the player, and aiming to improve the interest of the player in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various games. is there.

JP 2001-038007 A

However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is capable of dynamically performing discrimination, and dynamic information capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. A plurality of types of privilege display means and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Effect execution means capable of executing one effect from effects, determination means capable of determining the one effect executed by the effect execution means, and order of the one effect determined by the determination means And a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a discriminator capable of discriminating, and a dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying on the display unit identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminator. A privilege game executing unit capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, and one effect from a plurality of kinds of effects Based on the order of the one effect determined by the determining means and the determining means capable of determining the one effect executed by the effect executing means, And a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a person.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a front view of a receiving member and a distribution device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the special jackpot type And, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. It is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the operation pattern of the opening-and-closing board of the variable winning a prize device of the 1st round in each jackpot type, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of a distribution device. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit which shows an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the first operation unit in the production standby state. It is a rear view of the first operation unit in the production standby state. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit in the arrow XLII direction view of FIG. It is a front view of the first motion unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a rear view of the first operation unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a projecting state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in a projecting state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the displacement amount and displacement angle of a supported member accompanying rotation displacement of a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement by the driven side of a to-be-supported member when a rotation member rotates in the tilt direction in a mode with a constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle with rotation of a rotation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. 28A is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 28. is there. 33A is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. is there. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit and center frame in the LIVa-LIVa line of FIG. 30, and (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit and center frame in the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. is there. It is an exploded front perspective view of the up-down flip production device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevation reversing effect device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. 57A is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertical inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57A, and FIG. It is a sectional view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside-down member, a middle arm member, a direct-acting plate member, and an axis rotation member in a LVIIIb-LVIIIb line of (b). (A) to (c) are front views of the rendering device. It is a partial disassembled front perspective view of the structure of a 3rd operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a part of composition of the 3rd operation unit. It is a partial disassembled front perspective view of the structure of a 3rd operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a part of composition of the 3rd operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the drive mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in time series. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. (A)-(d) is a front schematic diagram of the operation|movement unit which illustrates typically the example of the combination operation|movement of each operation|movement unit along a time series. (A)-(d) is a front schematic diagram of the operation|movement unit which illustrates typically the example of the combination operation|movement of each operation|movement unit along a time series. It is a front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along the line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 73. FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, the slide displacement member, the lower member, and the detection sensor of the distribution device taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. (A)-(d) is a front perspective view of the inside member of a distribution apparatus. It is a top view of a middle member, a state switching device, a slide displacement member, and a lower member. 78A is a sectional view of the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. FIG. 79C is a sectional view of the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. (A) And (b) is a side view of a slide displacement member and a sphere which rides on the upper side of a sphere guide part. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). Is. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a guide long hole, a dish-shaped lid part, an extension part of a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a guide long hole, a dish-shaped lid part, an extension part of a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. It is a rear view of the guide elongated hole, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extended portion of the transmission gear cam. It is a front perspective view of the 1st decoration rotation member and the 2nd decoration rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram which shows typically a guide long hole, a rectangular box part, and a projecting decoration part. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram which shows typically a guide long hole, a rectangular box part, and a projecting decoration part. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically a guide long hole, a rectangular box part, and an overhanging decoration part. It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation unit in the XCIII-XCIII line of FIG. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in a projecting state. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along the line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. It is a front perspective view of a lift reversing effect production device. (A) is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, (b) is a rear perspective view of an intermediate arm member. It is a schematic diagram of the 3rd operation unit which shows the displacement of a metal rod and a middle arm member typically. It is a front schematic diagram of a 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. It is a front view of a 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit taken along the line CVI-CVI of FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit taken along the line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a model of the 3rd flow path structure part which shows the structure of the downstream side of the 3rd flow path structure part in 4th Embodiment typically, a probability change detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member. It is a top view. 110A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path constituent portion, the probability variation detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110A, and FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path constituent portion, the probability variation detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIb-CXIb in FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the distribution apparatus in 5th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the distribution device in a 7th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the CXV-CXV line of FIG. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and a rotation member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the elongate guide hole and a rotation member in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A), (b) is the figure which shows one example of the display aspect of the big hit mid effect which is executed during the big hit game. (A), (b) is the figure which shows one example of the display aspect of the big hit mid effect which is executed during the big hit game. (A), (b) is the figure which shows one example of the display aspect of the big hit mid effect which is executed during the big hit game. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the winning rate UP zone production performed after the jackpot game end. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the winning rate UP zone production performed after the jackpot game end. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode production. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode production. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode production. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode production. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of operation production. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of operation production. (A) ~ (e) is a diagram showing the flow of the big hit ~ big hit game and subsequent effects. (A) ~ (d) is a diagram showing the flow of the big hit ~ big hit game and subsequent effects. (A)-(d) is a figure showing the flow of the production mode of operation production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents typically, (c) it is the figure which shows the regulation contents of the 1st hit classification selection table which is set to ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example, (b) is the main control unit in the 1st control example 5C is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of FIG. 6C, and FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the normal table in the first control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the various data tables which the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 1st control example has. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the fluctuation pattern scenario selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of RAM of the main control device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp controller in the first control example. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the winning rate selection table set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the display control device in the example of the 1st control. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flow chart which showed the press production setting processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a hit related process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production mode change processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the hit production production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prize sphere related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the additional production mode setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a battle variation display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time saving production mode setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning rate UP zone production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the production setting process after the first time performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a final win rate determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the battle production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing. 6 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example 7 is a flowchart showing an error command process performed. It is the flowchart which showed the number addition related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A), (b), it is the figure which shows one example of the indicatory aspect of the big hit mid effect which is executed during the big hit game in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp controller in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp controller in the second control example. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the additional production selection table set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production renewal processing 2 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production timer renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the additional production mode setting processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big hit middle production performed during the big hit game in a 3rd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big hit middle production performed during the big hit game in a 3rd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit production setting process 3 which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round production setting processing 3 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the additional production mode setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the production performed in the winning rate UP zone in the 4th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the production performed during the winning rate UP zone in the 4th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the production renewal processing 4 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the production performed in the battle mode in a 5th control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the production performed in the battle mode in a 5th control example. It is the figure which showed the flow of the production control in the example of the 5th control typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the confirmation process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the time saving production mode setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display point setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number addition related command processing 5 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the production performed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the production performed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the production performed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the production performed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a V winning device in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a V winning device in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the movable induction member in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the change mode which does not become pseudo continuation displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation mode which does not become a pseudo-link displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the change mode of pseudo run 1 displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in an A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the variation mode of the button production at the time of pseudo continuous development displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation mode of the button production at the time of pseudo continuous development displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the change mode when a V attacker opens immediately after a symbol stop displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation mode when a V attacker opens immediately after the symbol stop displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents typically, (c) is the figure which shows the regulation contents of the special design 2 random number table in 1st A1 execution form, (d) in the 1st A1 execution form It is the figure which showed the regulation contents of the normal design random number table typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of a main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the selection table, and (c) is a figure showing typically the regulation content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 1 small hit type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents of the selection table typically, (c) it is the figure which shows the regulation contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table in A1 execution form typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a fluctuation pattern table set in a ROM of a main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a prescribed content of a normal use fluctuation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a time saving variation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. , Is a diagram illustrating each hit type and operation contents of a hit game in the A1 embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the big hit scenario table in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) was the figure which showed the definition content of the small hit scenario table in 1st A1 embodiment typically. And (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario a in the A1 embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario a in 1st A1 embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario b in 1st A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario c in 1st A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp controller in the A1 embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing a small hit V passage in the A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing a small hit V non-passage in the A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing a big hit V passage in the A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing a big hit V non-passage in the A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control device in A1 embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot ending control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit ending control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in an A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in an A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring/effect process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in an A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows boot processing performed by MPU in a display control device in an A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart which is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows stop classification command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing error command processing performed by the MPU in the display control device according to Embodiment A1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in an A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 8 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process according to the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in an A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A2 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the distribution apparatus in A2 embodiment. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the inside of the distribution apparatus B700 in A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the clune member in A3 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A4 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow path unit in A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an A4 embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in an A4 embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing a roulette display timing when passing a small hit V in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing a roulette display timing when passing a big hit V in the A4 embodiment. Is. (A) is a timing chart showing a roulette display timing when a small hit V is not passed in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is a roulette display timing when a big hit V is not passed in the A4 embodiment. It is a timing chart. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an A4 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the conditional device judgment processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A4 embodiment. It is a figure showing a V winning device in an A5 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific jackpot control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A5 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an A5 embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th example of control. It is the transition diagram which showed typically the transfer of the game state of the pachinko machine in the 5th example of control. (A) And (b) is a timing chart which showed the game content in the 5th control example, and the production mode of a series of productions. (A) And (b) is a timing chart which showed the game content in the 5th control example, and the production mode of the final change production. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed one example of the production aspect of general figure fluctuation production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode in which the universal figure fluctuation production is performed in the main display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 5th control example. It is the figure which shows one example of the production aspect of the picture per normal picture which is indicated in the 3rd design indicator. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode at the time of the special 2 change during the special 1 displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production mode of the special 2 fluctuation production (challenge game) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode when the small hit is won by the special 2 fluctuation displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 5th control example. It is the figure which shows one example of the production aspect when the big hit is acquired in the small hit which is indicated in the 3rd design display. (A) is a figure showing an example of the production mode at the time of the special 2 non-fluctuation special 2 prize displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production mode when the small hit is won with the special 2 fluctuation which is indicated in the 3rd design indicator in in. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode at the time of 1 second per game from the start of the universal figure displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 5th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production mode when the ball does not win the 2nd winning a prize mouth during the game per normal figure which is indicated in the 3rd design indicator in in. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode in 3 seconds after the small hit game start displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 5th control example, and (b) is a 5th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production mode when the ball does not win the V winning opening during the small hit game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a figure showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is an effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed one example of the production aspect of the time saving final fluctuation which is indicated. (A) is a figure showing an example of an effect mode of the first half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production mode of the latter half production of the time saving final variation displayed on the display device. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the production mode which shows the production result of the latter half production of the time saving final change displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 5th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of the production mode at the time of special 2 hit after the time saving end displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and (b) is the 5th in the 5th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final fluctuation production displayed on the 3 symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the production mode which shows the end of the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example. It is a figure showing an outline of various counters in the 5th example of control. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is an example of the content of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 5 table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 5 table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special symbol 2 random number 5 table in the fifth control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol per random symbol 5 table. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit type selection 5 table in a 5th control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the special figure 2 jackpot classification selection 5 table in a 5th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the general-purpose figure per kind selection 5 table in a 5th control example, (b) is the opening of the electric auditors object based on general figure per classification and a game state. It is a figure showing operation contents. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the small hit type selection 5 table in a 5th control example, (b) is the special figure 1 small hit type selection 5 table in a 5th control example typically It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table in a 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table in a 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern 5 table for time savings which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table in the 5th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM content of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is the content of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part of FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table in the 5th control example, (b) showed typically the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table for time saving final in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving updating processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure prefetching process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows the winning a prize status distinction processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the fifth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit related command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the MPU in the voice lamp controller in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal small hitting process performed. It is a flow chart which shows a series of small hitting processing for production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows stop command processing 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows hit variation production setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows production renewal processing 5 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows a series production renewal processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 5th example of control. (A) is a flowchart showing a per-universal-game per-game update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which shows the small hitting game update processing which is executed by MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the final fluctuation production renewal processing which is performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the front view which showed typically the game board of the pachinko machine in the 6th control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the production mode during the final reduction in time saving in the sixth control example, and (b) is the production during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the main control apparatus in the 6th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the type selection 6 table per universal figure in the 6th control example, and (b) is the electric role based on the type per universal figure and the game state in the 6th control example It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening operation of an object typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the fluctuation pattern 6 table for normal in the 6th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the universal figure fluctuation pattern table in the 6th control example, (b) showed typically the universal figure fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the universal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving B in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 6 for universal figures performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 6th control example. It is the front view which showed typically the game board of the pachinko machine in the example of the 7th control. It is the enlarged view which expanded the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example typically. It is the enlarged view which expanded the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example typically. (A) And (b) is a timing chart which showed typically the flow of the effect of the pachinko machine in a 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the main control apparatus in the 7th control example, (b) of the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the fluctuation pattern 7 table in the 7th control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the normal fluctuation pattern 7 table in the 7th control example typically. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows set production setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 7th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure set production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flow chart which shows production renewal processing 7 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 7th example of control. It is the figure which showed the setting method of the series production in the 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example, (b) is the content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the universal figure scenario table in an 8th control example. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which scenario 2 per ordinary drawing is set as a series of production scenarios in the eighth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow in which scenario 4 per ordinary drawing is set as a series of production scenarios in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows a series production distinction processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of the 8th control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the per-universal figure related command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the performance setting process during constant monitoring performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation production setting process 8 for general figures performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in an 8th control example. It is a flow chart which shows a series production prediction setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an example of the 8th control. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example, (b) is the content of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part of FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the final variation production|generation table in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the hitting final table in the 9th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the removal final table in the 9th control example. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the final production change setup table in the 9th control example, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the hit setting table in the 9th control example typically. .. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the setting table for disconnections in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart which shows the final winning a prize process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example 9 of control. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving effect setting process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart which shows final fluctuation production renewal processing 9 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th example of control. It is the front view which showed typically the game board of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the right-handed notification screen in the 1st notification mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 10th control example, and (b) is the 3rd in the 10th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the right-handed notification screen in the 2nd notification mode displayed on a symbol display device. It is the front view which showed typically the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 7th example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the flow of the production of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 7th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 71, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the drawing being the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing being the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 in front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray (not shown) is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails for guiding balls (illustrated below the center frame 86 and in the upper half of the game area). (Not shown) and a wind turbine (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 on the back side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws, etc. from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by.

The base plate 60 may be formed of a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it is possible to shield various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 invisible to the player.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first winning The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a deviating symbol by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device makes a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is carried out when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 4R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a certainty jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "4R regular jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 4 rounds and becomes a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in the present embodiment), the jackpot probability is increased, and the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased to the second. The state of the game in which the ball easily wins the winning opening 140 is included. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of big jackpot is not occurring, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is odd. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) of the “low probability state” is that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 140. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a state of a game that is neither probable change nor time saving (state where neither big hit probability nor hit probability of second symbol is up).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later in the first round of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game is changed by 100. During the number of times, the high probability state is entered. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game is 100 times shorter than the game state.

During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning a prize port 140 is opened is changed. Then a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 as compared to when the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or the number of times when the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit is not adjusted, but the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window portion of the base plate 60. It is set up. That is, in a front view, it seems that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and rear. Has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display with a size of 9 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle, and lower. The three symbol columns of are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is for a predetermined time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the probability change and time reduction, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many chances of opening the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball shot on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is carried out by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of the through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 140 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high during the probability change and the shortening of the time period as compared with the normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 140 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a type of jackpot when the jackpot is a jackpot is higher when the ball is placed in the second winning opening 140 than when the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 140 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, so that the player can aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second winning opening 140 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probability change, during the time saving, or during the normal), how to shoot the ball to the player. It is not necessary to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed". Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more plural pieces (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. It is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). (See) A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side with the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via an input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 631, 731, 782 and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6(a) illustrates a closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to regulate the flow of the ball to the specific winning port 65a. In FIG. 6(b), to the specific winning port 65a. The open/close plate 65b is opened so that the flow of the ball is allowed to open. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6.

In the open state of the open/close plate 65b (see FIG. 6(b)), the variable winning a prize device 65 receives the ball landing on the open/close plate 65b and is in the open state of the open/close plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. In, the plate upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed so as to incline downward toward the back side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right central portions of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the sphere landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to the sphere that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. .. That is, the landing of the sphere on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the central portion on the left and right, but mainly on the portion on the left and right outside of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the spheres landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

The arrangement of the balls after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the sphere flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, it may occur that the sphere is arranged near the left/right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the side of the opening/closing plate 65b (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) Is formed as a curved surface that projects downward from the lower end of the front end portion that is arranged to face the rear surface side), the bounced sphere near the left and right center positions of the opening/closing plate 65b becomes the front design member 141. It is possible to reduce the degree to which the collision causes a drop in momentum. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the sphere is arranged near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the left and right direction.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower portion of the front design member 141 may be arranged in either the front or back. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is formed so as to be arranged on the lower front side, so that a larger space on the side of the opening/closing plate 65b can be secured. Further, the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left-right width becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left and right ends, so that a space can be easily secured between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no leakage. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that descends and is inclined rearward is arranged at a vertical position so that the ball can be guided to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the balls rolled to the left and right outside by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. Guide plates 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163 toward the front side and the left and right inner sides, and the front end surface is an inclined surface that is displaced rearward toward the left and right inner side. It is formed.

As a result, when the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts on the front end face of the guide plate portion 163a2, it is possible to guide the downflow of the ball along the inclination of the inclined surface. 163a1 can be guided with less resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur even if the ball is arranged on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of hindrance can be reduced.

That is, for example, the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball thrown backward by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces on the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction (front side) for opening the opening/closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b opens unintentionally, or a malfunction occurs.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed by a rising operation. That is, since the ball landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball landing on the opening/closing plate 65b does not move to the left/right position of the ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b. The riding ball is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no leakage.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged to the outside on the left and right or the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 and the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, the flow of the sphere guided to the specific winning port 65a is retained. Therefore, the swiftness of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

Further, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed in a flat shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in an open state, the ball landed on the opening/closing plate 65b once flows backward, and then is flowed in the left-right direction by the action of the shape of the receiving member 163 and guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls once move in parallel rearward, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b has a laterally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a and a lateral flow is formed on the rolling ball, the opening/closing plate 65b is formed. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movement of the ball becomes irregular, it is possible to prevent unintended malfunction.

The receiving member 163 is provided with a contact surface portion 163a3 that abuts on the pivoting front end portions of the left and right end portions of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to enhance the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. There is. The abutting surface portions 163a3 are formed in a pair of left and right, and are formed to be surface contact instead of point contact due to the shape design according to the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is easy to stabilize the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b, In addition, since stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, durability can be improved.

Further, below the contact surface portion 163a3, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed that has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b that is arranged to face it, with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe when the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b have a bad contact for some reason.

In the present embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the sphere is arranged on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and basically the ball is configured not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, when the rotating front end of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is chipped, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-rear width portion and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 at the left and right end portions of the opening/closing plate 65b. It is designed to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b by causing surface contact with the. Thereby, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state can be improved.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape is normal, there is a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated, but the area for distributing the load can be increased, and thus the opening/closing plate 65b can be expanded. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with.

When the opening/closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball that is being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner of being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above. ..

That is, in the state of being received (for example, in a state where the ball slides sideways by being sandwiched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a), the ball hits the lower shape of the front design member 141. When they come into contact with each other, they can be made to flow into the specific winning port 65a by guiding the curved shape. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming unit 336, and thus it is easy to secure a view to the third flow path forming unit 336. can do.

Since the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is left/right outside of the electric accessory 140a. Limited to

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed can be limited to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. Thereby, below the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to secure the field of view at positions inside the left and right sides of the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration on the downstream side of the specific winning port 65a (the side on which the ball that has passed the specific winning port 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. 7 and 8 show a state in which components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the configuration arranged on the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear side of the variable winning device 65 on the back surface side of the base plate 60, the balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2). A collecting gutter 150 is provided in which a path for flowing the water to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

The collecting trough 150 includes a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and a front side portion facing the base plate 60 is opened in the groove-shaped portion. By closing the open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path for a ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form flow paths for the balls entering the general winning openings 63 arranged on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path that inclines to the lower left from the rear position of the first winning opening 64, and the second flow path portion 152 inclines to the lower right from the rear position of the second winning opening 140. Configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, in a front view, the flow of the balls entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is configured while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the game area. The gathering gutter 150 brings the center of the left and right sides outward. As a result, a space can be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 9 and 10, only the lower half portion of the base plate 60 is shown, the other portions are not shown, and the illustration of other components assembled to the base plate 60 is also omitted. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of description, the center frame 86 is illustrated in a state of being assembled to the base plate 60.

Fixation of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the back side of the game board 13.

Then, in the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper portion, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting trough 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 according to the present embodiment can be used as they are, depending on whether the sorting device 300 is provided or not. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 can be shared.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive a ball from the game area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution device 300 constitutes a flow-down path through which the ball received by the variable winning device 65 flows. In the present embodiment, the profit obtained by the player is controlled so as to change based on the detection result of the sphere flowing through the downflow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later in detail.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 is a fixed member 161 fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13, and a fixed member arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 that is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and a receiving member 163 that is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and that is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 and that can receive a ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a. And an intervening member 164 disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and interposed as a connecting portion with the distribution device 300, and disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163, the receiving member 163. And a state switching device 165 that is configured to be fastened and fixed to the open/close plate 65b so that the open/close state of the open/close plate 65b can be switched depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and the shape on the front side thereof is a flat surface except for a through hole for screw insertion, a fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. .. On the other hand, the shape of the back side of the fixed member 161 is a three-dimensional shape that projects to the back side inside the thin portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 at the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated elliptical frame shape, and a through hole having a size capable of disposing the boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161 a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, the specific winning opening 65a and a horizontally long plate shape extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. And a pair of left and right extending support plates 161b each having a vertically long plate-like portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the portion and the horizontally long plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the range behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow-down path of the distribution device 300 described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from a horizontally long plate-shaped portion of the extended support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from a vertically elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, and a lower edge of the boundary portion 161a. The projecting support part 161e projecting from the upper surface of the part and the projecting support part 161e have a function as a part for supporting the sorting device 300, which will be described later in detail.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f, which is symmetrically protruded below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction, contacts the ball flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the flow down of the ball. Have a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h having female screw portions for screwing the fastening screws inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

The to-be-fastened portion 161i having a female screw portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the interposition member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at the break (left and right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, a connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the fastened part 161i is disposed.

The front design member 162 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is uniform. In the range on the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161, the sphere can flow down.

On the rear surface side of the front design member 162, a plurality of female screw portions are provided which are arranged at positions matching the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161, and which are formed so that the fastening screws inserted in the through holes 161g can be screwed therein. The fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c that extend to the back side in a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from the upper side.

Since the extending portions 162b and 162c can prevent a ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, the durability of the fastened portion 162a can be improved. Can be improved.

Furthermore, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c are formed as inclined surfaces, the flow path of the sphere can be restricted. That is, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that descend downward toward the left and right sides, It is possible to prevent the ball on the portion 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a side. That is, the ball riding on the extending portion 162b drops downward on the left and right outer sides of the extending portion 162b, and then flows down toward the outlet 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

Further, since the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two locations at both the left and right ends) extended to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that descend and incline toward the left and right inner sides, a ball flowing on the extension portion 162c can be formed. The flow-down path can be put together with the flow-down path of the ball on the extension 162b. As a result, compared to the number of spheres that flow down, the range in which the spheres that flow down can be arranged can be narrowed (the arrangement density of spheres can be increased), and the part where the visibility is not obstructed by the sphere (the flow-down path is It is possible to secure a space that is not configured).

The front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is described as being plain and has good visibility on the back side, but it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 as being plain. For example, a seal with a pattern or a character may be attached to the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate it, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern and the groove may be irradiated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may stand out and be visually recognized. In addition, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being coated with a solid color or the above-described decoration.

The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is opened from a light-transmissive resin material, and has the above-described guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4. A position that fits the lower surface portion 163a that forms a lower flow surface inside the frame, the ball passage hole 163b that is provided as a through hole through which the ball that flows down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. And a plurality of insertion holes 163c through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female screw portion into which the fastening screws inserted through the intervening member 164 are screwed into the left and right center. A pair of fastened portions 163d disposed on the side, and a plurality of fastened portions 163e each having a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the state switching device 165 is screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that descends toward the left and right outer sides with the left and right center portion as the apex, and the inclined flow that descends backward toward the rear at a position lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so as to pass through the sphere passage hole 163b with a small resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the sphere has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b.

The interposition member 164 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a portion to be fastened to the receiving member 163 that is penetratingly formed in the upper portion of the body portion 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which LEDs are arranged, and left and right end portions on the lower end side of the main body portion 164a. A pair of to-be-fastened portions 164d formed to have a female screw portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened member 161 to be fastened to be penetrated and formed in an upper portion of the main body portion 164a. An insertion hole 164e into which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting board 164c is arranged such that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged is directed obliquely upward and upward. In the assembled state, the position is right above the specific winning opening 65a in front view (see FIG. 6), and the second winning award. It is located directly below the mouth 140. From such an arrangement, the light from the light emitting substrate 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who wants to enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a and gazes at the spot in a diagonally rearward downward direction.

Therefore, by controlling to turn on the LED of the light emitting substrate 164c when a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is detected, a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is controlled. It is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the occurrence has occurred.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the interposition member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed to each other, as compared with the case where only the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are fastened and fixed. Moreover, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the interposition member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be separated from each other. A relative displacement can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a into which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastened portions 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring and for heat dissipation. A lower case part 165b formed in a deep-bottomed box shape with an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, and a plunger that is engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. The sliding portion 165d that slides and displaces, and the rotating tip is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the rotating front end portion protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b. The moving portion 165e and an upper lid portion 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws that are inserted through the plurality of insertion holes 165f are provided.

A rod-shaped portion is provided at the turning tip of the turning portion 165e so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged, and a transmission projection 65c protruding rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b is inserted into the depression. Engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod portion 65d that forms a rotation shaft for the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the distribution device 300. In FIG. 13, a perspective view of the distribution device 300 seen from above is shown, and in FIG. 14, a perspective view of the distribution device 300 seen from below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the interposition member 164 is formed so as to be inserted therethrough. An intermediate member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 which are vertically fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 and through which a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion of the collecting trough 150 can be inserted. A substrate 350 housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and having a light emitting means 351 such as an LED arranged on the front side, and a substrate 350 housed in a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, depending on the presence or absence of energization. A state switching device 360 configured to be switchable, and a slide displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330, which slides back and forth between a front side position and a rear side position when the state of the state switching device 360 is switched. An insertion hole which is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 with the middle member 330 and through which a fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted. And a lower member 380 having 381.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the distribution device 300 will be described. The distribution device 300 is a device that forms a downflow path through which a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path forming portions 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharging passage (not shown).

The ball flowing down the inside of the sorting apparatus 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and due to the flow-down mode, not only a mere effect that the player's eyes are entertained, but also the player can be obtained. The effect related to the game profit such as changing the profit is produced.

The difference in the flow-down mode of the spheres flowing down inside the distribution device 300 is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the position of the slide displacement member 370 when the sphere flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the sphere passes.

Therefore, the player's line of sight easily gathers at the place where the sphere flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the place where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as described later). It has been devised on the premise of concentration.

Next, the details of the configuration of each unit of the distribution device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member formed from a light-transmissive resin material in a top view, and has the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed so as to penetrate the sphere, and a mark. A pair of colored (red in the present embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as, a pair of upper surface portions 314 that extend from the lower edge of the opening portion 312 along the outer peripheral portion to the front side, and the middle member A plurality of insertion tube portions 315 in which through holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into 330 are inserted, and a fastened portion 316 having female threads into which the fastening screws inserted into the intermediate member 330 can be inserted; A pair of front-and-rear long protruding portions 317, which are long portions in the front-rear direction and are provided to project downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310, and are arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. And a pair of left and right inner projecting portions 318 that are long in the left-right direction and are disposed between the pair of front-rear long projecting portions 317, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right outer projecting portions 319 that are projectingly long in the left-right direction and that are disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and a size that allows the upper portion of the substrate 350 to be arranged. And a housing recess 320 formed as a recess.

The opening portion 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that plays a role of receiving the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flowing the sphere downward, and the upper front edge portion has an inclined posture detection sensor SE1 ( (See FIG. 12) The shape is such that it is cut by an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. As a result, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the plate back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening portion 312 is formed with such an opening degree that it does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passage hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the ball passage hole 163b. This can reduce the flow-down resistance when guiding the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b to the opening portion 312.

The seal member 313 receives light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and is visually recognized in a gorgeous manner to function as a member that attracts the attention of the player, which will be described later in detail.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined below the upper member 310 in accordance with the flow path of the sphere. The first upper surface portion 314a arranged on the front side of the opening portion 312 is formed so as to descend and incline toward the front surface side, and is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and arranged on the left and right inner sides. The 314b is formed so as to incline downward toward the left and right sides. Further, the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured such that the left-right interval becomes longer toward the front side, so that it is possible to secure the visual field of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

A counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface side of the insertion cylinder 315. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the screw head of the fastening screw while the fastening screw is inserted from the upper side.

The insertion tube portion 315 is arranged at a position that fits the fastened portion 332d having the female screw portion formed on the middle member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged such that the screw portion faces upward and the screw head faces downward. Therefore, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who is viewed from diagonally above, while the fastening portion 316 is arranged on the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated due to the fastening screw while firmly fixing the upper member 310 and the middle member 330.

The fastened portion 316 is formed only on the right side because the insertion tube portion 315 has already been arranged at two locations on the rear side, so that one fastening point on the front side is sufficient and the screw head faces downward. The reason is that the distribution device 300 has a better appearance if it is unnecessary but is not conspicuous. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side or may be arranged in a pair on the left and right.

The position of the fastened part 316 is set as a position that avoids the downward flow path of the sphere and minimizes the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting apparatus 300, which will be described later in detail.

The lower surface portions of the front-rear length projecting portion 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319 that are formed in each pair are curved so that the positions thereof decrease with distance from the same location with respect to the same location. Formed as a face. The curved surface has different shapes in the front-rear long protruding portion 317, the left and right inner protruding portions 318, and the left and right outer protruding portions 319, and it is intended to control the flow-down mode of the sphere by the difference in this shape.

The middle member 330 includes a pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame-shaped portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box-shaped) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially-shaped) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. (A box shape), a pair of front side frame-shaped portions 333, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are concavely formed on the left and right outer sides of the front side frame-shaped portion 333 to form a downward flow path of the sphere, and the first A pair of second flow path constituent parts 335 which are connected to the front end of the flow path constituent part 334 to form a downward flow path of the sphere and which are recessed on the front side of the front frame part 333, and the second flow path constituent part thereof. And a pair of third flow path forming portions 336 that are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the 335 to form a downward flow path of the sphere and that are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the middle member 330 has a discharge hole 337 that is formed in a left-right elongated shape and penetrates through the lower bottom at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for a sphere, and the discharge hole 337 and the discharge hole 337. A partition plate portion 338 that is formed in a plate shape that is long in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path configuration portion 336 into left and right, and a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right direction from the lower side surface at the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336. And a pair of positioning protrusions 339 protruding as shape protrusions.

The rear-side frame-shaped portion 332 does not form a sphere downflow path unlike the front side portion that forms a downflow path for the sphere, but is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed as a through hole 332a for arrangement in which the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged by penetrating in the vertical direction at the front side end portion of the central portion of the left and right, and a through hole that is long in the left and right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b penetratingly formed in the lower bottom part for guiding the slide displacement of the guided part 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw parts formed so that a fastening screw inserted in the lower member 380 can be screwed therein. The fastened portion 332c and a fastened portion 332d having a columnar shape and having a female screw portion into which the fastening screw inserted in the insertion tubular portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed, are provided at the upper end.

Since the front frame-shaped portion 333 is subjected to the light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, visibility on the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape in a top view, and is a through hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Equipped with.

The first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 are each a part that constitutes a downflow path of the sphere, so that the downflow direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, etc. are different. Although designed, details will be described later.

In addition, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning a prize device 65 can enter the opening portion 335a which is open on the front side at the connection position of the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the third flow passage forming portion 336. It is a void for That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening portion 335a so that it can come into contact with the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by the partition plate portion 338, are formed in a pair of left and right, and are formed in such a size that the balls can be discharged through at least two paths. That is, the length is at least twice as long as the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged according to the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensor SE1. It suffices to design the shape.

The partition plate portion 338 has a function as a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, but the details will be described later. The alignment protruding portion 339 is a portion that is fitted with the protruding portion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid the positional displacement between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, but the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and a concave portion for alignment is provided at the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower portion 353. The unit 354 is provided.

The recessed portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with a portion corresponding to the inner shape of the middle member 330, and the left and right long lower portions 353 are arranged in front of and behind the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. The upper part 352 is housed in the housing recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent the upper member 352 from falling upward so that the arrangement is fixed. Although configured, details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and is a tip of an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. A slide portion 362 that is engaged with and is slidably displaced together with the plunger; and a rotation portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and that rotates with the slide displacement of the slide portion 362. , Is provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to receive the disc portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from the upper side, an overhanging portion 362b that extends rightward from the right side surface, and a lower side surface. And a guided portion 362c which is provided so as to project downward from the front-rear central portion and which is formed in an oval cross section that is long in the left-right direction.

Since the disc portion 361a is configured to support the slide portion 362 from above in the forming direction of the recessed portion 362a, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from dropping upward. Therefore, even if the slide portion 362 is not fixed to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330.

The guided portion 362c is a portion that is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the guide portion 362c and the guide hole 332b are engaged with each other, it is possible to maintain the posture of the slide portion 362 because the guide portion 362c is engaged with the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L shape in a top view, and is formed in a vertically long tubular shape at an L-shaped connecting portion, and has a size that allows insertion of the fastened portion 332 d of the middle member 330. A support cylinder portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylinder portion 363b projecting upward in a cylindrical shape from the L-shaped short side end portion and inserted into a through hole of the projecting portion 362b, and an L-shaped long portion. And a lower columnar portion 363c protruding downwardly from the side tip end portion in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as the central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by the change of the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger is slid to be displaced by the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 is displaced to the left and right, the upper columnar portion 363b inserted into the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced, and accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at the vertical position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the lower bottom portion and the lower member of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. A thin plate portion 371 sandwiched and supported by the 380 from above and below, an upper projecting portion 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair of left and right, and a left and right center behind the upper projecting portion 376. And a recessed portion 378 that is recessed at the protruding end of the protruding portion and that is formed so as to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a supported hole 371a formed through a pair of left and right portions in the rear half portion, and a front-rear length that is shorter in the left-right width than the arrangement interval of the upper protruding portion 376 from the front-side end portion in the left-right center portion. A recessed portion 372 that is recessed, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that are protruded downward in a protrusion shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and a protrusion that extends along the left and right edges of the rear half portion. A plurality of upper and lower projecting ridge portions 374 that are formed in a strip shape and project in both up and down directions; Prepare

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are supposed to face and slide with the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides, and are compared to contact on a flat surface. It is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protruding portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view, and is arranged so as to pass through the arrangement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper protruding portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376.

In other words, the upper projecting portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap on the inside of the left and right sides, and is configured so as to suppress positional displacement in the left-right direction by contact with the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be guided well, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-back direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is necessary to cause the slide displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction. It

The projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured so as to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332, and thus the lower cylinder of the rotating portion 363. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

As described above, the placement through-hole 332a has a shape including the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376, which is to be inserted, and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 includes the insertion hole 381 described above, a plate-shaped portion 382 that is formed in a long thin plate shape on the left and right, and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-shaped portion 382. And a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows the SEs 1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted, upper and lower side surfaces through which a ball passing through a through hole of the detection sensor SE1 passes, and the other portions are closed. Is formed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position matching the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 similarly to the through hole formed in the up-down direction in the sensor holding frame portion 389. At an intermediate position of SE1, a ridge portion 383 is provided which is elongated and protrudes upward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction, and a pair of protrusions which are provided at positions separated from the front end of the ridge portion 383 to the left and right. The installation portion 383a, a pair of guide projections 384 projecting at a position on the rear side of the projection 383 that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide projection 384. A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right outer sides, and an elongated guide elongated hole 386 extending in the same straight line as the protrusion 383 in a top view. And a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape protruding rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed so as to pass through a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330. ..

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a left and right thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the ridge portion 383 between the recessed portions 372. Will be placed. That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction.

The projecting portion 383a is designed such that the left and right inner end portions are at the same positions as the left and right outer end portions of the alignment projecting portion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right inner ends of the pair of protruding portions 383a are fitted in such a manner that the left and right outer ends of the alignment protruding portions 339 are in contact with each other, so that the left and right sides of the middle member 330 with the lower member 380 as a reference. The position of the direction can be appropriately determined. At the same time, by bringing the back side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion that connects the ridge portion 383 and the protruding portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the alignment protruding portion 339 into contact, The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation between the third flow path forming portion 336 as the structure of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as the structure of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long in the left-right direction, is inserted into the supported hole 371 a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 from colliding, so that, for example, the displacement end in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protrusion 383 can be improved as compared with the configuration. Therefore, the guiding effect of the ridge portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

It should be noted that the guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, and functions as a portion for preventing a collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, normally, when the guide protrusion 384 is designed to have a strength that can be used for a set period (for example, 3 years) without being damaged, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the guide protrusion 384 becomes The strength of the guide protruding portion 384 and the protruding portion 383 may be designed in consideration of the use in a state of colliding with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the service life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to be less than the set period (for example, 2 years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide ridges 385 are arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the lateral width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inside of the guide protrusion 385. As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be generated with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the columnar protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 is limited in the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere that flows down below the middle member 330. In the present embodiment, the flow of the ball that has entered the outlet 71 is guided, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being noticeably visible. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the outer side on the left and right and on the back side with respect to the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 388 may block the view of the sphere near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, that is, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed portion 372, and the lower protrusion 373. The protrusion 383, the elongated guide hole 386 for the columnar protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, and the like are guided to displace in the front-rear direction. As a result, the load at the time of guidance can be shared among a plurality of positions, so that it is possible to avoid locally applying the load and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370. You can

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member but is guided by at least a plurality of members including the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper projecting portions 376 is guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided by the projecting ridge portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the displacement is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, in the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, it is preferable that the displacement of the slide member 370 is kept small as a portion that continuously configures the downward flow path of the sphere. It can be guaranteed that the displacement is small.

In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will not be performed well, so that it is possible to detect that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective. It is possible to perform control so that error notification is performed, assuming that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued with the relative disposition of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 being in a poor state, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, details of the internal structure of the distribution device 300 will be described. In addition, here, the configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 and the configuration of entering the flow path side of the sphere will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15.

15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state in which the slide displacing member 370 is disposed at the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere that flows down inside the distribution device 300 will be described.

The ball landed on the open/close plate 65b when the open/close plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path forming unit 334, the subsequent second flow path forming unit 335, and the third flow path forming unit 336 that follows the first flow path forming unit 334 are all configured as inclined flow paths that descend and incline, and are connected to each other. Are formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees in a top view.

That is, the first flow path forming portion 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming portion 335 is based on the flow down direction of the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming portion 334. Is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down in the left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path forming unit 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction with respect to the flow down direction of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming unit 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows a sphere to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction rotated by 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape having a right angle of bending, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow-down velocity of the sphere increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, when the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming section 334 accelerates toward the front side, the subsequent flow down direction in the second flow path forming section 335 does not have a front-back direction component. It is possible to realize the flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration of the component 334 is suppressed. Further, in the third flow path forming section 336 subsequent to the second flow path forming section 335, since the flow is directed backward, which is the reverse of the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming section 334, it is received from the acceleration in the front-back direction. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence is suppressed.

Therefore, for example, unlike a flow-down mode in which the flow is consistently down in the same direction (for example, leftward), it is possible to easily avoid an excessive downflow speed of the sphere on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make the flow velocity of the sphere uniform in the entire flow path, keep the player's attention to the sphere high, and prevent the player from losing sight of the sphere. There is an effect that can be.

Further, for example, although it is possible not to form the second flow path forming section 335, forming the second flow path forming section 335 makes it easier to prevent a ball clogging or backflow. When the second flow path forming part 335 is not formed (when the left-right direction length of the second flow path forming part 335 is 0), that is, the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 are In the case of connection, it is necessary to reverse the downward flow direction of the sphere by 180 degrees from the flow on the front side to the flow on the rear side at the connection point. In this case, since the switching angle of the downflow direction of the sphere is large, and it is particularly necessary to reverse the speed direction back and forth, it is difficult to smoothly flow down the sphere, and retention or clogging of the sphere and backflow are likely to occur. May occur.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when the switching angle in the downward direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in the present embodiment), there is no reversal of the velocity direction of the sphere, so the sphere smoothly flows down. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the retention and clogging of the balls and the backflow.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path forming section 334 to 336 will be described. At the connecting end portion of the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical projecting portion 161f is provided as a portion that guides the downward flow of the sphere in a manner that bends the downward direction of the sphere. To be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed so that the portion arranged on the downstream side of the sphere recedes from the path of the sphere rather than the portion arranged on the upstream side. For example, the left-right width of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other is formed longer than the left-right width of the partition plate portions 338 arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right end sides of the symmetrical projecting portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged on the front side rather than the flow path side surfaces of the second flow path forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

Accordingly, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or causing backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connection end portion of the second flow path forming portion 335 and the first flow path forming portion 334, the side wall parts 334a that are curved and formed at the front left and right end parts of the middle member 330 bend the downward direction of the sphere. In a mode, it is formed as a part that guides the downflow of a sphere.

Further, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming portion 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) whose arrangement decreases toward the front side is provided so as to project upward from the lower flow surface of the first flow path forming portion 334. The curved protruding portion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the downflow of the sphere in a manner of bending the downflow direction of the sphere.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening portion 312 rolls along the curved protrusion 334b, flows down through the first flow path forming portion 334, and comes into contact with the side wall portion 334a during flowing down, so that the flow direction is switched to the second direction. The flow direction is switched by flowing down the flow path forming part 335 and coming into contact with the symmetrical protruding part 161f during the flow down, flowing down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaching the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed into a shape that engages with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161, and can be aligned. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right projecting support portions 161d, and the positional deviation in the left and right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 are aligned in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

The inclination angle in the longitudinal direction and the ratio of the lengths of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 will be described. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming portion 334 has an inclination angle with respect to the horizontal of about 7 degrees, and the second flow path forming portion 335 has an inclination angle with respect to the horizontal of about 5 degrees. The flow path forming section 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming section 334, and the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336 are set to a slightly gentle common inclination angle.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 has the front side frame-shaped portion 333 formed in a square outer shape in the top view as the inner side surface, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front side frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed to have a large square as an outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is set to 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is set to 45 mm. It is formed.

Therefore, since the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the sphere having a diameter of 11 mm that is normally used, the sphere flows down with almost no positional deviation in the width direction. .. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is regulated to be about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and the positional deviation of the falling ball is Can be suppressed.

Of the parts forming the ends of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 arranged on the square surrounding the square front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334 is Since only the curved protrusions 334b that are configured are arranged on the inner side (front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path forming section 334 is divided into the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336. Short compared to.

From the actual measurement value in a top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm at the sphere center interval), and the length thereof is It is about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm at the sphere center interval).

From the above-mentioned inclination angles and length ratios of the respective flow path constituent parts 334 to 336, it can be explained that the time required for the sphere to pass through the respective flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time for passing through the first flow path forming section 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path forming section 335 having the gentle inclination angle and 1.5 times the path length. And the time required to pass through the third flow path forming section 336 is shorter.

In the present embodiment, with this configuration, the arrangement shifts to the back side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and a part is hidden by the non-transparent resin portion of the detection sensor SE1. The ball can be displaced to the front side early from the state in which the visibility of the ball becomes poor, and the state can be switched to a state in which the ball is close to the player and the visibility of the ball is high. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the sphere is high, slowing down the flow speed of the sphere eliminates the need for the player to quickly move the line of sight toward the sphere, thus reducing the player's game burden (moving the eyeball). Eye fatigue due to) can be reduced.

When paying attention to the sphere flowing down through the second flow path forming unit 335 and the third flow path forming unit 336 having high visibility, the sphere flows down along the second flow path forming unit 335 in the left-right direction. Compared with the case, when the sphere flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming portion 336, the displacement amount of the sphere in the front view becomes smaller, so that the player's game load paying attention to the sphere is reduced. , Can be minimized when paying attention to the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming section 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path forming section 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path forming section 336. Are equal to each other, but the amount of displacement of the sphere in the front view is different, and as a result, the apparent velocity of the sphere (the velocity of displacement of the sphere in the front view) flows down the third flow path forming unit 336. The sphere that moves is slower than the sphere that flows down the second flow path forming unit 335.

At the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 in which the game load is minimized and the ball is easy to focus on, the flow path of the ball changes only, and in the other portions, the flow path of the ball is the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. In common. Therefore, the line of sight of the player tends to concentrate on the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, and thus the game burden on the player who concentrates his line of sight can be effectively reduced.

Further, in order to secure the field of view of the player who pays attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, in the present embodiment, the opening portion 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path forming portion 335. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid the line of sight toward the third flow path forming portion 336 being obstructed by the meat portion of the second flow path forming portion 335.

Further, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with a portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of the shape portion is omitted on the upper and lower sides thereof. To be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-shaped portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, as compared with the case where the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed to have a vertical thickness, the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 may be blocked by the symmetrical protruding portion 161f. It can be lowered and the visibility can be improved.

Further, spheres that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 are gathered toward the view side around the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball that enters the outlet 71 flows down below the third flow path forming portion 336, comes into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming the line of sight of the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 from the obliquely upper front side, the sphere entering the out port 71 flows down the inner side of the third flow path forming portion 336. Therefore, the sphere flowing down through the third flow path forming section 336 and the sphere entering the out port 71 are visually recognized as being covered by the front and rear, so pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336. The total number of spheres entering the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether it is a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path forming section 336 or a ball that does not enter the specific winning opening 65a and enters the out opening 71, the ball Enters the visual field of interest at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, regardless of the easiness of the ball to reach the specific winning opening 65a, that is, regardless of the nail configuration (so-called good or bad gauge) implanted in the base plate 60, most of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion (the portion where the player's attention is gathered) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is arranged at the position where the balls excluding the balls entering 64 and 140 gather and the position where the balls are covered in the front-back direction. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the flowing ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, and in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is excluded except for the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336. It is configured to lower.

For example, on the inner side surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processed surface 333b for causing a light diffusion action is formed in a shape following a prism. In FIG. 17, the saw-toothed portion is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed over almost the entire inner circumference of the inner side surface and also up and down.

When the action of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions and the entire surface is visually recognized as if it is shining. Therefore, the visibility on the back side is deteriorated. According to the present embodiment, visibility is deteriorated in the state where light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not emitted, at least compared to the state in which light is emitted. The visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a shield between the light and the light, the shadow of the shield will be visually recognized as a black dot, which makes it easier to determine the position.

A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, the light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side surface of the left and right outer protruding portion 319, the light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side surface of the frame front portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332, and the like (FIG. 17). reference).

In addition, as a processing surface formed in the same shape, a plate-shaped portion extending to the rear surface side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, which is formed on the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include the light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the lid portion, the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower side surface of the front portion of the rear side frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and the like. To be done.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion is performed on the back surface side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow path that is formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336. A processed surface is formed, and the effect of changing the visibility due to light irradiation is achieved.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed from the third flow path forming section 336 to the left-right direction from the front side with the player's eyes paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame portion 333 so that it cannot be seen immediately.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after passing through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame portion 389 and dropping, with the player's eyes visually recognizing the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 in the direction from diagonally above. Even so, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, it is difficult to identify the sphere after passing through the detection sensor SE1 and falling by irradiating the light diffusion processed surface 340 with light. ..

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the profit obtained for the player is controlled depending on how the sphere flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path forming unit 336 in order to grasp how the sphere flows down from the rear end of the third flow path forming unit 336. The attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be further improved.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to form a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily recognized as a black dot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch the visibility of the sphere. Further, depending on whether or not the sphere is arranged on the front side of the black spot, it is possible to configure a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the sphere and a situation in which the black spot appears not to be hidden by the sphere.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336, but the flow formed by the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 is consistently formed. It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the sphere flowing down the path.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 from being scraped by the contact with the sphere, so that the shapes of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 are maintained for a long period of time. Therefore, the action of light diffusion can be maintained.

Further, the contact of the sphere with the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 can prevent the flow down of the sphere or the deceleration of the sphere. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is lowered even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by each of the flow path forming units 334 to 336. You can avoid that.

Note that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 may be intentionally formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, the effect of causing light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the sphere due to collision with the sphere can be produced.

In the front side frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 because of the difficulty of processing, and high visibility is maintained without any measures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility is reduced due to the fastening screw.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used as a blindfold at a location where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and the fastening screw reflects light at a portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the location where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336. For this purpose, in addition to shining brightly, the substrate 350 provided on the back side is provided. And causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), it is possible to prevent the substrate 350 from being blindfolded and to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is accommodated in a manner that it is supported by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, but is arranged in the center of the left and right with a lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 and slides into the gap. The displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position sandwiching the slide displacement member 370 with the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332.

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported so that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the left and right end portions by the rear frame portion 332 from the front and the rear (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f that is made thick (see FIG. 16), and there is no gap in the vicinity of the left-right center position due to this thickness. After that, the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusion processing surface 164f of the interposition member 164 can produce a glittering effect, and further, the back side of the interposition member 164. The visibility in the range can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper side 352 irradiates light to the vicinity of the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f, and the light diffusion processed surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape portion that follows the prism along the surface. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's eyes, it can be made to appear to be emitting light above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In the view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left and right center side position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 hinders the view and is good. Since it cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to obtain a sufficient effect if it is formed in at least the arrangement gap of the pair of detection sensors SE1.

The lower part 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate light toward the seal member 313 and a part provided below the seal member 313 and along which the sphere flows down, which will be described later in detail.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, switching of the flow path of the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 are referred to as appropriate.

19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-section of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is a figure. 19 and 20, the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state in which the slide displacing member 370 is disposed in the rear position.

Here, the left and right four detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and are provided with a probability change detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 which have the same function. The probability change detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction.

The functions of the four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor for paying out prize balls. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 balls for each detection) of prize balls are paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of a prize ball, but a detection sensor that changes the game state after the jackpot game is finished by detecting a ball entered. Function.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 provided in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not there is a transition to the probability changing state, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may be made to function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not the next jackpot is won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so as to cover the thin plate portion 371 on the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Of the sphere to the ground is prevented. Therefore, the sphere passing through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a facing the sphere of the upper protruding portion 376 is formed in an arc shape with the flow path side being concave, the flowing sphere can be smoothly flowed toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. You can

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retracts rearward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Spheres are allowed to pass.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the sphere passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front side position or rear side position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, when the ball is not detected as passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and only passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the gaming state after the jackpot game is in the normal state (or the time saving state). ) To be controlled.

Here, in the present embodiment, it has been described above that the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot are prepared as jackpot types. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as the operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled so as to operate in a movement pattern that allows the sphere to easily pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variation big hit, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the ball moves normally. The operation is controlled so that the probability variation detection sensor SE11 does not easily pass through the through hole and the normal detection sensor SE12 easily passes through the through hole. Details of the control will be described later.

As described above, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit for the player, and the arrangement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, many fraudulent attempts to illegally switch the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 have been discovered, and countermeasures against it have been emphasized.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 can be switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are arranged on the right side by the biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is in front. The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the front position by being arranged on the side.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370 is depressed). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion (inserted into the installation portion 378) to the back side. This is a normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 have a one-to-one correspondence.

A person who performs the above-mentioned dishonest act inserts a fine metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 through a ball payout opening or a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), for example. It is possible that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed toward the back side to illegally create a state in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, since the thin plate portion 371 is arranged below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18 ), the third flow When the slide displacing member 370 is pressed against the slide forming member 370 through the wire forming portion 336 through a thin metal wire, it is difficult to press against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371, and the upper protruding portion 376 is pressed. Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the left and right outside as described above, even if a thin metal wire is pressed, the load can escape to the left and right outside. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear position.

Further, in addition to the route to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but spirally wound, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the back side. Since they are separated (about 10 cm), it is difficult to make the metal thin wire reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

With these configurations, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the related art, in many cases, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by a mechanical device (displacement regulation) of the mechanism that transmits the driving force against the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. Had a limited configuration of the state switching device 360. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load is not applied to the slide displacement member 370 in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be designed freely. You can increase the degree.

In addition, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by the thin metal wire crawling through the third flow path forming section 336, the fine metal wire itself flows down the sphere that tries to flow down the third flow path forming section 336. Therefore, it is difficult to make the sphere reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As described above, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. It is desirable to avoid it.

In the conventional model, the normal change sensor SE12 is normally configured to restrict the entry into the normal detection sensor SE12 when the entry into the probability change detection sensor SE11 is permitted. There is no movable member that restricts the ball entering the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the ball entering the sensor SE11 is allowed (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the ball also enters the normal detection sensor SE12. This is a configuration that can be performed.

Even with this configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the probability variation state after the jackpot game is secured. In the present embodiment, from such an idea, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12. Further, as a result of not disposing the movable member, there is a good effect that maintenance due to the failure or malfunction of the movable member becomes unnecessary, and the number of years of use of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the sphere to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 are provided. The shape and shape have been devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents a sphere larger than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position is fixed to the inside of the flow path (that is, the protrusion). This is realized by the shape of the installation portions 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

First, the device of the flow channel shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal in the lateral direction toward the center side in the left-right direction (partition plate portion 338 side). (See Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set so that the angle and direction are the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path forming section 335, so that the second flow path forming section 335 changes to the third flow path forming section 336. It is possible to reduce the bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (bounce in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338).

Due to the inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be brought close to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, since the sphere that flows down from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the sphere may accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338) while being arranged.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 has the left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path forming section 335. Since the inclination direction is the center side of the left and right (partition plate 338 side), the speed in the left and right direction is generated inward in the left and right direction. This also makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the ball may accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protruding portions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The sphere that has flowed down the third flow path forming portion 336 is first arranged in the vicinity of the left and right inward protruding portion 318. The left and right inner projecting portion 318 is the smallest projecting portion among the projecting portions 317, 318, 319, but is on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is arranged on the front side, the sliding contact with the sphere passing through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 while sliding on the partition plate portion 338.

The projecting tip surfaces of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are configured as concave curved surfaces when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the projecting portion is left and right more than the front end side of the projecting portion. It is formed so as to spread outward and to the lower side, and the front and rear ends are formed to be connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere passing through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and abutting on the left and right inward projecting portions 318 receives the load in the direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed and flows down. ..

On the other hand, since the left and right inward projecting portions 318 are formed in a small size, the downward direction of the ball is not determined by the load received from the left and right inward projecting portions 318 to the downward direction or the left and right outward direction. It functions as an adjunct. Further, since the left and right inward protruding portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum occurs regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The case where the sphere flows down after contacting the left and right inward projections 318 will be described separately. In the state in which the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the ball rolls over the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protruding portion 376 and the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 18). It moves and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The projecting end portion of the front-rear length projecting portion 317 has the same application as the upper projecting portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the falling direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper projecting portion 376 forms a curved surface whose starting point is the inside of the left and right sides and whose ending point is the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in a top view (see FIG. 17). The long projecting portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose end point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction. It is configured (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that descends to the left and right outer sides, and the sphere that is urged to the left and right outer sides by contact with the left and right inward protruding portions 318 makes full use of that momentum. Since it will flow down in the left and right directions, the flow of the sphere can be formed smoothly.

Further, since the left and right outer protruding portions 319 are formed above the sphere that flows down in the left and right outward direction, the ball can be smoothly flowed down also by suppressing the bouncing of the sphere. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protruding portions 319 is not to switch the falling direction of the sphere but to suppress the ball bouncing, the shape thereof is significantly different from that of the front-rear long protruding portion 317, and the protruding end portion has It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the left and right outer protruding portions 319 are disposed on the front side with respect to the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer protruding portions are formed. When the installation portion 319 and the sphere come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is more likely to be arranged on the rear side than the center of the thickness of the left and right outer protruding portion 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protruding portions 319 and the sphere are brought into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a backward component to the sphere, so that the sphere flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent a ball from being clogged or a backflow of the ball when a plurality of balls flow down.

In the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted rearward from the front-rear long projecting portion 317, so that the ball moves in the front-rear long projecting portion 317. Flows in contact with.

The front-rear length projecting portion 317 has a projecting end (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal line passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged right behind the position, it is easy to give a load in which the component in the left-right direction is suppressed to the abutting sphere. This load functions as a load that causes the sphere to flow obliquely forward and downward because the protruding tip of the front-rear length protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that has not reached the right side due to the momentum from the left and right inward projecting portions 318 receives the load from the front and rear long projecting portions 317 in a diagonally forward and downward direction and flows toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Here, there is a concern that the ball may bounce toward the front side (reverse flow may occur) depending on where it hits the front-rear length projecting portion 317, but in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right inward collisions occur. Since it is urged obliquely downward to the left and right due to contact with the installation portion 318, even if the sphere bounces to the front side, the sphere will move to the rear end of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) and Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rear frame-shaped portion 333 only collides with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) and the backflow of the third flow path forming portion 336 occurs.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position and the sphere flows toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 side, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position and the sphere flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side. Similarly to the case, the sphere is displaced outward from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 toward the left and right by the load. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable between the front side position and the rear side position. The slide displacement member 370 is slidable while the sphere flows down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370. When 370 performs the closing operation (the operation from the rear side position to the front side position), there is a possibility that a forward load is applied to the sphere, and a load in the direction (forward direction) that causes the third flow path forming unit 336 to flow backward is applied to the sphere. May be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, by controlling the closing operation to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the ball collides with the slide displacement member 370 in operation, so that the ball can flow backward. Sex can be lowered.

In addition, the front surface of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface that faces the left and right outside, or the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without fail, so that the third The action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right outside can be produced. This makes it possible to prevent backflow of the sphere.

Further, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (the operation from the front side position to the rear side position) is not the operation in the direction opposing the sphere but the side away from the sphere, for example, the sphere moves toward the slide displacement member 370. Even if an operation is executed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, it is difficult to generate a load that pushes the ball back to the front side. Therefore, it is considered that even if the opening operation is controlled at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, the backflow of the balls does not easily occur.

When the sphere rolls forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 and rolls on the thin plate portion 371 (in the previous stage of flowing to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation of the sphere. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the sphere can be stopped, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped to easily move to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is opened while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily avoid that the ball is guided by the normal detection sensor SE12 by the rolling force until then. , It is possible to easily guide the sphere to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment including the above-described distribution device 300, how the distribution device 300 looks from the player's eyes will be described. Hereinafter, as an example, the case where the angles of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction are different will be described separately.

21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16.

As a premise, a player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in a desired posture, except for gripping and rotating the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the game is performed by keeping the head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in the horizontal direction or a direction in which it descends and inclines about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice the small part, while the latter has a narrower field of view, but it is easy to notice the smaller part in the field of view.

FIG. 21 is shown as a reference, and in the following, description will be given mainly by comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. 21 to 23, for convenience, the open/close plate 65b is shown in an open state.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown in phantom. Although the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half portion is shown for easy understanding. Since the function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top is as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half portion arranged at the lower side portion 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates the seal member 313 with light. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed to be transparent in red, so that when the light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can improve the player's attention to the seal member 313 and the periphery thereof. Since the seal member 313 is disposed right above the third flow path forming section 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming section 336 can be focused on.

In addition, on the front surface side of the upper light emitting means 351, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted (see FIG. 18). As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the light emitting unit 351 from being visually recognized as being vertically extended by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and to make the periphery of the seal member 313 shine intensively.

Although the light emission control is not limited at all, for example, during the big hit game, control is performed so that the seal member 313 is irradiated with light in a situation where the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming unit 336 is desired to be focused on. By doing so, the seal member 313 can be noticed and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 arranged below the seal member 313.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, when the sphere enters the probability change detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 emits light while the sphere controls the normal detection sensor SE12. When the player has entered the ball, by controlling the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light, the player can be notified of the passage point of the ball.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light-emitting means 351 on the left-right center side is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting unit 351 and is formed as a range having a vertical spread (as a vertically extending band-shaped light. Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The angle (5 degrees) of descending inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path forming unit 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, in the directional view at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrowed, so that compared with the directional view in FIG. As a result, it becomes more difficult to confirm the switching of the flow-down mode of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path forming unit 336. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Since the placement through hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size sufficient to allow the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass therethrough, the inside of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged in the position can be hidden so that it is hard to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of spheres are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down through the respective flow path components 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the line of sight toward the sphere on the back side may be obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path forming section 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the back side is hidden by the ball on the front side.

Further, when the sphere flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side, it flows from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right outward direction. Since the visibility is deteriorated by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame portion 333 after being separated from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, the movement of the sphere in the process of being separated from the third flow path structure part 336 in the left-right direction. Where it is preferable to grasp the above, the inflow is made from the downstream end position (the position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly deviated from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left-right direction), the sphere hides the sphere that is in the process of coming off from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, to know whether the sphere has flown to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, whether the sphere has flowed down to the outer right or left at the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 or not. This is possible by visual observation, and it suffices to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the periphery of the right edge portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connecting position of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the second flow path forming portion 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and the right side of the third flow path forming portion 336 are arranged. It is configured such that the sphere can flow down along a path including the periphery of the edge (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the upstream side, there may occur a situation in which it is not possible to grasp whether the spheres flow to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

Also, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the sphere flowing through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path forming portion 335 are clearly separated by the arrangement in the vertical direction. It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow channel visually recognized at the rear end portion of the third flow channel configuration unit 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere visually recognizable in the direction is reduced.

In particular, as described above, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 flows toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 after flowing down obliquely rightward regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. The downflow path or the downflow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12 is switched. Therefore, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than that in the case where the sphere flows down right below or is switched depending on whether the downflow direction of the sphere is switched to the right as the downflow path of the sphere.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the more upstream side, as in the case where the downward flow path of the sphere flows down directly or switches to the right. For example, in the case where the left and right inward projecting portions 318 are not formed and the sphere heading toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 flows down from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. The position is behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming section 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere is positioned below the lower bottom of the third flow path forming section 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming portion 336 itself has a spherical shape. In addition to the effect of hiding a part of the ball, the ball is displaced to the left and right outside of the range visually recognized through the third flow path forming portion 336, so that the ball is hidden in the front frame portion 333.

Therefore, the area of the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, which can be visually recognized from the player's eyes, becomes small, and it is difficult to grasp which downflow path the sphere has flowed down. Become. As a result, it is possible to further improve the focus of attention on the sphere flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views described as the directional views for identifying the downflow direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming section 336 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). , Both have their advantages and disadvantages. As a result, even if the distribution device 300 is visually recognized, the player can adjust and select a desired visual recognition method without requesting the player to perform a devoted game, and the game mode can be widened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Although the visibility of the player can be secured by various methods, in the present embodiment, particularly, the third flow path forming portion is formed by forming the gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310. Since the roof portion of 336 can be in a state of being removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily visually recognized.

Regarding the directional views of FIGS. 22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the distribution device 300 will be described. Although illustration is omitted in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the distribution device 300, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are transparent depending on the thickness of the members. Since less light is emitted, the field of view is blocked.

As the range in which the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is narrowed, it is possible to more easily visually recognize the sphere flowing down inside the distribution device 300 in the directional view of FIG. 23 than in the directional view of FIG. There is a nature.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light does not easily occur (see FIG. 12 ). This can prevent the visibility of the sorting apparatus 300 from being deteriorated.

Functionally, even a portion that cannot be formed into a flat shape is formed so that the influence on visibility is reduced. For example, the projecting support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 do not obstruct the player's line of sight directed obliquely downward, so that the player views the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. Are arranged outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right side lower portions).

Further, for example, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thin with the minimum necessary thickness for strength (see FIG. 18). Thereby, even if the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so that the ball flowing down the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The visibility of can be secured.

A ball that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65a flows down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flows down toward the out opening 71. The influence of the sphere flowing down toward the out port 71 on the visual field will be described.

22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of the spheres flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the balls flowing down from above the opening/closing plate 65b will be guided to the specific winning opening 65a side by riding on the opening/closing plate 65b. It becomes a sphere that deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extending portion 162b and the extending portion 162c, are guided by the inner rail 61, and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is lower than the respective flow passage constituent parts 334 to 336. It is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the visibility of the sphere flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the flow down of the sphere flowing down the inner rail 61 is a mode in which it flows toward the center side in the left-right direction of the game area at a gentle angle, similarly to the flow down of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In the same manner as the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the game area is produced. This effect guides the line of sight of the player to the outlet 71 and also to the third flow path forming unit 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are set to the same position (the left and right center position), the player moves the line of sight up and down, so that the out port 71 and the third flow path. The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the components 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the game area can efficiently enter the specific winning port 65a easily (whether the number of wasted balls during the big hit game is small) or the extended portion 162b and the extended portion The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path forming unit 336 by the flowing ball regardless of whether the ball flowing down between the 162c and the ball frequently occurs (whether the useless ball in the big hit game frequently occurs). Can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third passage forming section 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming section 335, and the ball moves to the specific winning opening 65a. When deviating from, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

The ball toward the outlet 71 normally does not cause any effect in the game as a useless ball, but in the present embodiment, the configuration as described above allows the ball toward the outlet 71 to be seen by the player. Can be provided to the third flow path forming section 336.

In addition, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sphere flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes the front side of the second flow path forming unit 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path forming unit 335. There is a nature.

On the other hand, the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a are disposed above the center position of the specific winning port 65a in the left-right direction, and the third flow path forming section 336 is disposed below the center position of the specific winning port 65a in the left-right direction. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down on the front side of the third flow path forming unit 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the periphery of the rear end portion is deteriorated due to the sphere flowing down on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. We are trying to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path forming portion 336. Is formed short.

Not only that, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged on the lower rear side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. 23, the line of sight directed obliquely downward to the rear side frequently occurs as the player's eyes. In, the external appearance of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized as being arranged so as to be close to the external shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the downward flow path of the sphere that has entered the specific winning opening 65a formed in the left-right elongated shape and has passed through the sphere passage holes 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at the left and right ends thereof has symmetrical flow path configurations. It is collected under the left and right center sides of the specific winning opening 65a via the parts 334 to 336. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened as compared with the case where the ball flows down in the left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required as the flow path of the sphere can have a structure in which the left and right lengths become shorter toward the lower side, it is possible to facilitate the arrangement near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. it can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is a design concept in which the specific winning opening 65a is arranged in the vicinity of the outlet 71, but the structure is not a structure in which a sphere flows down from the right and left inner end portions of the second flow path forming portion 335 to a position directly below. By adopting a structure in which the sphere flows down backward from the left and right inner end portions of the flow path forming section 335 by the third flow path forming section 336, it is arranged on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387. Opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path forming portion 335. As a result, the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71 is shortened.

As described above, the vertical winning width and the horizontal width of the specific winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 in the player's eyes can be shortened, so that in the design of the game area where the size in the front view is limited to a certain standard, Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, since the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow of the ball after entering the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable winning object (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow will be described.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down through the first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily, but in the present embodiment, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 in about 0.3 seconds. Is designed.

That is, after entering the specific winning opening 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path forming section 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration unit 336.

Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, it is arranged at the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 for 0.9 seconds. The sphere does not reach the detected detection sensor SE1. Accordingly, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball cannot pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370. The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of a wrong ball winning.

Therefore, for example, a control for releasing the opening/closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent an erroneous winning of the V winning sensor, which is generally found in a pachinko machine equipped with a V-probability attacker. Control with naturalness) can be dispensed with. As a result, the operation mode of the opening and closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine provided with the V-probability variation attacker in the above example, a ball entering immediately after opening the V-probability variation attacker was apt to cause a wrong winning. However, in the variable winning device 65 of the present case, as will be described later, immediately after opening. On the contrary, the sphere entering the ball has a desirable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the sphere), and thus it is not necessary to devise a device for preventing the ball from entering immediately after the opening. ..

The time required for the sphere to pass can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, the shape of the flow path inner wall portion (whether smooth or uneven).

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is updated regularly (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first per random number counter obtained based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the jackpot type. , And the special winning combination that is the trigger for the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 9". Is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24B).

When the jackpot A1 is reached, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in a first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is an operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 19”, the big hit A2 is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24B).

When the big hit A2, the four round big hit game is executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 in the operation pattern Y (details described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 39”, the big hit B1 is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 24B).

When the big hit B1 is reached, four rounds of big hit games are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in an operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

The jackpot B2 is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “40 to 49” (see 202b4 in FIG. 24B).

When the big hit B2 is reached, four rounds of big hit games are executed in a second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is an operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, the big hit C1 is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 24B).

When the jackpot C1 is reached, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is an operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the big hit C2 is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 24B).

When the jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is an operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when the jackpot is won by the lottery for the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), in any case, the four-round jackpot game is selected. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls as compared with the case where the special symbol 2 to be described later is a big hit. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, so that the ball hitting for the subsequent jackpot can be started early.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on entering the second winning opening 140) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", a big hit a is associated and defined (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

When it becomes a big hit a, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed by the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is an operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when the jackpot is won by the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 140), in any case, the 15-round jackpot game is selected. Therefore, the person who wins the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 can obtain a large amount of payout prize balls as compared to the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1, so that the player can obtain the special symbol. It is possible to increase the motivation for performing the game for performing the lottery of 2 (the game for shooting a ball so as to enter the second winning opening 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not secured, the possibility that the player will be disadvantageous is less likely to increase. Therefore, there is a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but there is an advantage that a ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a. When there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, the special symbol 2 is drawn. By setting the operation pattern of the jackpot variable winning device 65 in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and highlight only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened. ..

That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is delayed, and thus it is possible to realize the jackpot game that is comfortable to the player (the time efficiency of paying out the prize balls is good).

In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small ratio (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that the player can be prevented from casually playing the jackpot game. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 and to make the player happy and disappointed at the timing of the displacement operation, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the ordinary symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second×2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 140, the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easy. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability changing state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit a (profit-balanced big hit). As a result, the player can easily obtain a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which normal symbol hit determination values are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is hit. It is determined whether or not The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the first-round variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in each jackpot type.

MPU201 (refer to FIG. 4) starts the control of the big hit game (of the decided type) after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect) when the big hit is decided in the special figure hit determination. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described. Note that in the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 is referred to as appropriate.

In the present control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and in the second and subsequent rounds, the driving mode is common. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of the big hit A1 or the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state so that the specific winning opening 65a can be opened. The first open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time by driving and controlling the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is executed at intervals of 1.0 second.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game ball is continuously fired, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls are won. ) Is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is finished.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. It is a setting of an opening time for preventing a plurality of balls continuously entering the right and left sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as "ball entering in continuous ball"). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball reaches each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at one time.

In the case of the big hit A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set with reference to the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). ..

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the left and right flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is limited to one, visibility is not deteriorated by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set with reference to the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. The drive is controlled to be displaced to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is drive controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, so that before the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, the sphere that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes over the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). ..

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the left and right flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is limited to one, visibility is not deteriorated by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The idea that 0.8 seconds, which is the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through the respective flow path forming sections 334 to 336, and the sphere is the third flow path forming section. It is set from the idea that it is longer than the time required to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path forming unit 335 and reaches the third flow path forming unit 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a. Even when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member reaches the third flow path forming section 336. The 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336 regardless of the ball entering timing ( (See FIG. 22). As a result, the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being conspicuous, and attention can be paid to a sphere that flows down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as a sphere entering the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be generated before the sphere reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility that the line of sight is blocked by the sphere is low, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is low. Can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is arranged in the vicinity of the front plate portion of the fixed member 161, and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the line of sight of the player. Tends to collect on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. That is, by paying attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming unit 335 (for example, by displaying “Attention to the flowing sphere!” on the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. Can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the respective flow path forming sections 334 to 336 are configured to be divided at the left and right center, if the specific winning opening 65a is on the left or right side, a ball is generated. By paying attention to the rear side of the third flow path forming portion 336 on the non-opening side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the flowing ball (see FIG. 22 ).

As described above, in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the number of spheres arranged in each of the left and right flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is limited to one, and the attention to the sphere is improved. At the same time, the player can easily see whether the ball passes the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the big hit B1 or the big hit B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state so that the specific winning opening 65a can be opened. The first open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time by driving and controlling the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the opening operation for 1.0 second is executed at 1.0 second intervals.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game ball is continuously fired, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls are won. ) Is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is finished.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. The opening time is set to allow a plurality of balls to continuously enter the right and left sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as "continuously entering ball").

In this control example, since the interval between spheres is set to 0.6 seconds, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened once in 1.0 second even when the interval between spheres is not changed from that at the time of launch. While playing, two balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path forming sections 334 to 336, the next sphere is changed to the respective flow path forming section 334. Entry into ~336 can be regulated.

In the case of the big hit B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the sphere that has passed each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the sphere that has passed each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

At this time, the way in which the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 are viewed differs depending on whether the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one or two. When the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the game The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, in the case where two (or more) spheres are arranged in each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the sphere on the upstream side should be arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the sphere on the downstream side. Therefore, the visibility of the ball on the downstream side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down through each of the flow path components 334 to 336. ..

When the jackpot C1, the jackpot C2, or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 holds an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the specific winning opening 65a can be entered. The opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls are won. ) Is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is finished.

In the present control example, since the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state during the first round game R, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a in a continuous ball. On the other hand, since the opening distance of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path forming sections 334 to 336, the next sphere is It may occur that the ball enters the flow path forming sections 334 to 336. Therefore, as compared with the second operation pattern, the visibility of the spheres arranged on the downstream side of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 is higher than that of the sphere arranged on the upstream side in the third operation pattern. The situation where it falls easily occurs.

In the case of the big hit C1 or the big hit a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C1 or the big hit a, the spheres that have passed the respective flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 pass the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit C2, the spheres that have passed the respective flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 are usually It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

As described above, the control mode maintains the open/close plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required to reach the position is controlled from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball biting can be eliminated.

At this time, the way in which the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 are viewed differs depending on whether the number of spheres arranged on each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one. When the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the game The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, in the case where two spheres are arranged in each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the sphere on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the sphere on the downstream side. The visibility of the sphere on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down through each of the flow path components 334 to 336. ..

In the third operation pattern, since there is no limit to the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a can be entered in the first round game R, there is no limit to the timing of the second operation pattern. The arrangement of spheres tends to be disordered. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a can enter the ball has an effect that the round game R can be advanced at an early stage. That is, a predetermined number of balls as a round end condition (elapse of round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls) It is easy to meet the winnings early, and it is possible to avoid the jackpot game being delayed.

In particular, in the case of the jackpot of the special symbol 2, since the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled with the operation pattern X with a probability of 100%, if the ball is passed through the specific winning port 65a, the ball will pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low in the first place.

Therefore, even if the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to worsen, priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game being delayed, thereby achieving the jackpot game in a short time. By doing so, the player's interest in jackpot games can be improved.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round game R is finished, the timer means is an electromagnetic solenoid so as to hold the opening/closing plate 65b in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. 165c is driven and controlled, and after the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similar to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the specific winning opening. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to open 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. From the second round onward, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so that the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see FIG. 17).

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly to the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (the fourth round) is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the opening/closing plate 65b. Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

In the present control example, the case where the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in a round other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

As described above, according to the present control example, the manner in which the balls enter the opening/closing plate 65b is changed according to the difference in the opening pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b (first operation pattern to third operation pattern). The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the path forming units 334 to 336 and the third flow path forming unit 336 can be made different. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player, who pays attention to the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow path forming unit 336, to devise the firing mode of the ball.

For example, the decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of spheres being simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336, and therefore, if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally widening the firing intervals of the spheres (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the first operation pattern, since the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is limited, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, it is possible to allow the player to select how to play the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which the extension of the round game R is avoided.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R, a certain period (for example, 1.0 seconds) is vacated so that the specific winning opening 65a is allowed to enter. Is also good. In this case, the situation in which the ball is arranged in the third flow path forming unit 336 is avoided at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (the timing when 0.8 seconds has elapsed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the sphere.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is released is extended, the period until the specified number of balls are inserted into the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, it is possible to allow the player to select how to play the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which the extension of the round game R is avoided.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured to be bilaterally symmetrical, and the ball can be entered through the specific winning opening 65a from either the left or right side.

That is, for example, the above-described firing mode that widens the firing interval of the sphere, and the firing mode in which a period until the sphere is fired are maintained in the ball entering on the left side, and the ball firing is performed in any firing mode for the ball entering on the right side. Even if the game is shot, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, as a launch mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into left and right, at least the first ball is launched to the right, and the number of balls (for example, the second ball) is launched. To the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, by not paying attention to the sphere flowing down the right side flow path as each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336, and focusing on the sphere flowing down the left side flow path, it is possible to avoid the line of sight being blocked by another sphere. However, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the sphere flowing down the left-hand side passage passes the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are continuously fired toward the right side portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until a specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to prevent the round game R from being extended.

It should be noted that this separate firing of the balls to the left and right is not intended to make only one ball entering the left channel. In particular, it is only necessary to limit the number of spheres arranged in each of the left flow passage constituent parts 334 to 336 to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres of the left flow passage completely passes, and other periods In the above, it is sufficient to strike the balls so that they can enter the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a or the arrangement of nails (see FIG. 2), there are a small number of paths for entering balls. Even in the case of being limited to the above), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls spills to the outside of the specific winning opening 65a. Although the nail arrangement is left-right asymmetrical in FIG. 2, it may be left-right symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. Note that, in FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operating unit 500 includes a bottom case 511 and a rear case 510 formed in a box shape, the front side of which is open from an outer wall 512 which is provided upright from the outer edge of the bottom wall 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The rear case 510 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and the game board 13 is surfaced in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). The support plate part 513 which supports is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning projection 513a protruding toward the front side in a shape capable of fitting with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed so that the fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted therethrough.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap is large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. In addition, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the positioning convex portion 513a also has a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 arranged on the inner right side of the rear case 510, and a second operation unit 700 arranged on the lower inside of the rear case 510. And a third operation unit 800 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510. It should be noted that on the inner left portion of the rear case 510, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED, and a light transmissive material that is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side and is formed by light diffusion processing over the entire surface. A diffusion decoration plate LB1 to be formed is arranged.

Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is located at the right side of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is located above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the production standby state is illustrated, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operation unit 600 is changed from the production standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the projecting state is illustrated. In FIG. 30, a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the projecting state is illustrated.

Note that, in FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front side of the covering member 787 is different from the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Although the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be seen well inside this, it can be said that the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member outside the center frame 86. The visual field is easily blocked by the nails, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc. arranged on the base plate 60, the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, in the state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operation unit 500, the role thereof is the same. Further, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is a curved shape that projects downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, and the center frame is not curved. On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed to project so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the frame upper part (the outer frame upper part) of the actual center frame 86 is the third motion. The unit 800 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side to the left and right.

31 and 32, a state in which the third operation unit 800 changes from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the projecting state is illustrated. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side, and the individual operation state of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operation unit 800 is shown. The combined state is shown.

Since the displacement for switching between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode in which a linear displacement and a rotational displacement are combined, when executed in the production standby state of the third operation unit 800, the surrounding decorative member and Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other to cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in the projecting state (or in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced downwardly from the production standby state by a degree sufficient to avoid the collision of the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative member. On the assumption that the displacements of 870 and 880 are allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) performs the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). It is controlled, but details will be described later.

In FIG. 33, the third operation unit 800 in the extended state and the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly displaced from the extended state are shown, and in FIG. 34, the first operation unit from the state in FIG. 33. A state in which 600 is displaced to the intermediate effect state is illustrated, and in FIG. 35, a state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced to the effect standby state and the first operation unit 600 is displaced to the projecting state from the state of FIG. 33 is shown. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operation unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first operation unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operation unit 700 partially overlap with each other in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes its state from the production standby state while the third operation unit 800 is in the projecting state (see FIG. 31 ), there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the production standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state, or the third operation is performed. By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the production standby state to be executable under the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the production standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are separated. It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can be improved (the front and rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the projecting state is controlled to be executable under the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the production standby state, By setting the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 when the third operation unit 800 is in the projecting state to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operation unit 700 is in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. It is possible to avoid visual overlap. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 can be improved (the front and rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of visual confirmation states: a case where the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a projecting state closer to the opening 511a; By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 performs a displacement operation on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotation member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a facing diagonally leftward in the effect standby state and its first effect. A second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b are provided. The effect surfaces 661a to 661c are optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

In the production standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, at a location where the visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first effect surface 661a is obliquely directed to the player side (the surface on the front side is inclined 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with respect to the arrow FB), the third effect is obtained. From the inside of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86, the first in the player's eyes to visually recognize the second decorative rotation member 660 in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 projects to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player visually recognizes the inside of the center frame 86. Face up. In this case, since the second decorative rotation member 660 is in a posture in which the second effect surface 661b is directed directly in front, the visibility of the second effect surface 661b from the player's eyes when visually recognizing the second decorative rotation member 660. Can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotation member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and the visibility of each effect surface 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) but also to change the angle intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the player's line of sight becomes the front-back direction, and it is easier to face the player's line of sight. Therefore, it is possible to improve visibility when the effect surface faces the front direction (arrow F direction). Since the line of sight of the player tends to be inclined as it is arranged near the frame of the center frame 86, it is possible to improve the visibility by inclining the production surface to face the line of sight.

With the displacement of the second decorative rotation member 660, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is interlocked and displaced. The overhanging decoration portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the rear case 510 is covered. By being placed in the upper right corner, it is hidden so that it cannot be seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 28), the projecting decoration portion 652b of the center frame 86 overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. It is configured to be visible to the player by being arranged inside the frame.

In this state, the outer right end portion of the projecting decoration portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by using the decoration on the plate front of the overhanging decoration portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible is defined in the first operation unit 600, and in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotation member. The left edge of the first effect surface 661a of 660 and the area right end RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized are substantially matched.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the projecting decoration portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration of the plate front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b, it is as if the display region of the third symbol display device 81 is the region right end RE1. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it as if it has expanded beyond. As a result, an unexpected effect can be realized.

As an example of matching the above display with the decoration, for example, an example in which a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the decoration on the plate front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the same polka dot pattern, With a typeface similar to the typeface of numbers (for example, numbers for notifying the success or failure of the lottery) that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a certain number is written on the front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b. An example of doing so is illustrated.

As an example of associating the above display with the decoration, for example, six colors out of seven colors forming the rainbow color are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the plate front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b remains. An example of being colored with one color or a wooden stick arranged so that the right end is aligned with the right end RE1 of the area is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example in which ignition is associated with the first operation unit 600 in the projecting state is illustrated by the decoration.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the overhanging decoration portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of kinds of effect modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decoration portion 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decoration portion 652b, it is possible to change the display of the liquid crystal device by a plurality of types, so that the region right edge RE1 is exceeded. It is possible to avoid limiting the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when enlarging the display area.

Further, the object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b is not limited to the display, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, the covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. The decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b and the decorations formed on the members (for example, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880) of the third operation unit 800 (the decoration of the first covering portion 875 and the second covering). The decoration of the installation portion 885) may be associated therewith.

36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotation member 660 rotates while changing its posture. At the same time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotation member 650 has the second decorative rotation member 660. By making relative displacement with reference to, the player can be made to visually recognize a different appearance before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, and a rotating member 620 that is rotatably supported by the fixed means 610. A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating front end of the rotating member 620. A first decorative rotation member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotation member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotation member 650. The decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixed means 610 includes a base member 611 that is arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction, and a base member 611 that is arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and creates a space. And a front lid member 612 fastened and fixed to.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion thereof. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Prepare

The guide elongated hole 616 is formed in a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and the details and operation will be described later.

The rotating member 620 is disposed in one end (lower end) of the main body 621 formed in the shape of a long plate, and is externally fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixing means 610. A cylindrical portion 622, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in an intermediate portion of the main body portion 621 as an elongated hole extending in a linear direction, and the other end portion (upper end portion) of the main body portion 621 in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622. A circular through hole 624 formed as a circular hole in a direction parallel to the hole, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624. Prepare

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is in contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is in contact with the projecting piece of the front lid member 612, and the rotation member 620 is raised (front direction). A biasing force is generated in the clockwise direction).

In the axial support of the tubular portion 622, with the support fastening portion 615 inserted in the tubular portion 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. It As a result, the rotating member 620 is axially supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The transmission elongated hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted. However, details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 that is fixed to a drive shaft that is projected to the rear side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 that is axially supported by the tubular portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam that is axially supported by the tubular portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634 and.

It should be noted that, with the tubular portions 613b and 613c inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the tubular portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are axially supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front lid member 612 is formed with an arcuate hole 613d penetratingly formed along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and the arcuate hole 613d has a front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted therethrough.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member that includes a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and extends in a plate shape in the outer radial direction from the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. And an installation portion 634b.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission long hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extended portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 that is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Accordingly, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can be configured to grasp the posture of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes an elongated main body portion 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the back side of the main body portion 641 into a circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 and having a cylindrical cross section, and a cylindrical portion 642. A tubular portion 643 protruding in parallel with the tubular portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be meshable with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being axially supported by the tubular portion 643. , A bottomed cylindrical portion 645 formed in a large-diameter cylindrical shape having a bottom with a hole on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 is arranged. An extension support portion 646 that extends to the front side of the section.

With the above-described configuration, the driving force can be transmitted between the gear teeth 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

It should be noted that with the tubular portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the tubular portions 642 and 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported by the main body 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged such that the back surface side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge portion of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth 654a of the first decorative rotation member 650 can mesh with each other on the front surface side of the bottom portion. The opening 645a is formed in the peripheral surface portion so as to have the following shape, and the insertion hole 645b that is formed so as to pass through in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical center so that the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. The details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably pivoting the second decorative rotation member 660, which will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotation member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming orthogonal rotation axes, a front rotation member 652 axially supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed tubular portion 645, and the front rotation member 652. An ornamental substrate 653 fixed to the rear side of the decorative portion 652b and provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side, and a rear rotation member 654 coaxially fastened and fixed to the rear side of the front rotation member 652, A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space for wiring, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and is inserted into the main body member 651 from the rear side. A front decoration portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 that is externally fitted and axially supported by a cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651 are provided.

The main body member 651 is provided with a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a pair of female screw portions 651b at the diameter position of the tip end thereof. A cutout portion 651c that is cut so as to reduce the wall portion is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows an electric wire to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c has a function as an opening portion for securing an inlet of the electric wire.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, in order from the base end side, the center hole of the front rotation member 652, the center hole of the rear rotation member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed tubular portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1 and the front lid. The fastening screw inserted into the guide elongated hole 616 of the member 612 and inserted into the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is screwed into the female screw portion 651b at the tip end of the member 612, whereby the member 612 is fastened and fixed.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, the bottomed tubular portion 645, the collar C1 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction and guided. It is configured to be displaceable along the long hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of a circumferential portion thereof, and the opening C2a is arranged so as to face the cutout portion 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state, so that the electric wiring is routed. To form.

As for this electric wiring, a part of the wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the decorative board 662. Further, the other wires are formed between the body member 651 and the wire receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side opposite to the body member 651 on the opposite side of the half-cylindrical portion 655a). It is guided to the back of the overhanging decoration portion 652b through the gap), and the terminal is connected to the connector of the decorative board 653.

The rear rotation member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end portion, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so that they can mesh with each other. It should be noted that the gear teeth 654a are formed not only over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The front rotation member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and an overhanging decorative portion 652b that projects radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the overhanging decoration portion 652b, and an effect of lighting or blinking the overhanging decoration portion 652b is performed by light from a light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653. Made possible.

Since the front rotation member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotation member 654, the rear rotation member 654 and the front rotation member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the half-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the half-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and the gear of the front rotation member 652 is provided. Gear teeth 657a are formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotation member 652. That is, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 work together, but the details of the operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed not only over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotation member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657, an electric circuit board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. And a wiring retaining plate 663 which is disposed between the rotary member 657 perpendicular to the axis and fastened and fixed to the tip ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In the present embodiment, since the decorative board 662 is also rotationally displaced with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described later, the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are guided by the connector of the decorative board 662. Where there is a possibility that the electric wiring passing between the wirings may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the wiring is twisted or disordered due to the function of the wiring retaining plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily fixing the wiring. I am trying to avoid it from being placed in.

In this embodiment, since the electric wiring is fixed to the decorative board 662, it is unavoidable that the electric wiring is twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotation member 660 is not caused by the rotation of one rotation or more, but is the rotation displacement of reversing at the rotation angle of 135 degrees. It is possible to avoid a situation where the wiring is broken.

The second decorative rotation member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. It

The wiring member 663 functions as a retaining member and the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are supported so as not to fall off. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from coming off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The decorative board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 coincide with each other. On the side surface of the decorative substrate 662 in the thickness direction, the first effect surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side and the optical axis of which faces the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side of which the optical axis faces the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and having an optical axis in the width direction. Be done.

In this way, the light emitting means provided on the decorative board 662 functions to individually illuminate each effect surface 661a to 661c, but the LED illuminating the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (the second effect surface 661b. Since the second effect surface 661b is disposed on the front side (the projecting state of the first operation unit 600), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated by being disposed on the illuminating side). When the LED is caused to emit light, it is possible to illuminate the second effect surface 661b with light that advances at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LED is arranged behind the illumination board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so that the light that illuminates the third production surface 661c causes the second production surface 661b. Can also illuminate. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effect modes that illuminate the second effect surface 661b and improve the brightness of the second effect surface 661b during light emission effect.

The decoration fixing member 670 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material so that the characters and figures for decoration can be visually recognized by the player, and includes an electric circuit board 671 that irradiates light obliquely left front from the back side. .. The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always the line of sight inclined to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the player's eyes are easily placed.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion that are raised on the back side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the production standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the production standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of arrow XLII of FIG. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit 600. It should be noted that the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screw are not shown for easy understanding of the shape.

In the production standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. Accordingly, the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding in the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of displacement, inertial assistance cannot be obtained compared to during displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large. Therefore, the displacement resistance is reduced as in the present embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

Further, the same thing is configured so as to be established in the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the projecting state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634 a arranged in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions (position in the production standby state, position in the extended state) of the rotating member 620 is the transmission elongated hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions is started.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotation member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth portion 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are designed. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 and the rotation angle are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be changeable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotation member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotation member 652 is orthogonal to the rotation axis. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotation member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotation member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is The rotation angle is the same as that generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the production standby state will be described in time series. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and the fastening screw are not shown for easy understanding of the shape.

The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the production standby state and the intermediate production state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate production state and the extended state. Is set to.

In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotation member 660 is in a posture in which the narrow third effect surface 661c is directed to the front side. In the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 has a straight line portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion and a curved line (substantially arcuate shape) connected to the lower end portion of the straight line portion 616a. And a curved portion 616b formed in.

In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the production standby state and the intermediate production state becomes a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate production state and the extended state is a curved portion. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured to be able to change the state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620. ..

Therefore, without any measures, the displacement resistance generated between the guide elongated hole 616 and the guide elongated hole 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide elongated hole 616. The guide elongated hole 616 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 616 extends along the displacement direction, thereby suppressing the problem.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, but the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, when the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the projecting state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises obliquely upward to the right, the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed so as to extend obliquely upward to the right. Has been done.

In this way, by arranging the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 and the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 along, the displacement resistance of the portion (and the axis O1) that displaces inside the guide elongated hole 616 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 will be described including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b) show the rotating member. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a magnitude relationship of a displacement amount of a supported member 640 on a driven side when 620 rotates in a tilting direction with a constant angular velocity. In addition, the positive and negative of the numerical values are shown by positive as a downward displacement amount and by negative as an upward displacement amount, and in FIG. 48B, the numerical values of FIG. 48A are shown as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support position of the supported member 640 in accordance with the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 at intervals of 10 degrees. The rotating member 620 in the posture in the extended state is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is shown as an angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the tubular portion 622. There is.

The guide slot 616 functions as a slot for guiding the end of the supported member 640 in which the axis O1 is arranged. The displacement in the guide long hole 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 as the rotating member 620 rotates. Hereinafter, the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as a main driving side of the supported member 640, and the end portion of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as a driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The up-and-down displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is due to the up-and-down displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. The resulting vertical displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is a result of being summed up.

In the production standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in the vertical posture, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the rotation arm is arranged 45 degrees from the vertical to the left and right). Range). That is, the conditions for reducing the vertical displacement are doubled.

Both of them are opposite in the projecting state, and the condition that the displacement in the vertical direction becomes large is doubled. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement, and the speed is high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, when the elongated guide hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 be stopped in the intermediate effect state (midway position of tilt displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a mode is adopted in which the curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a. Accordingly, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight on the linear portion 616a and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. This makes it easy to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from dropping vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

The displacement of the linear portion 616a on the driven side of the supported member 640 will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the main driving side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the production standby state, the driving side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate production state, the driving side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. It is arranged (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocally displaced while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing the direction.

As a result, the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the size of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 has a linear portion. While being disposed at 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement mode as if the supported member 640 is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, it is possible to generate the slide displacement in the left-right direction by utilizing the run by the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side. The load required for the displacement can be suppressed to a low level as compared with the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required at the time of starting the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be reduced. As a result, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the driven side displacement of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small level, the displacement of the main driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 on the basis of the main driving part is maintained counterclockwise in the rear view (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the orientation change direction of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotation member 660 are maintained without being switched (not inverted).

Accordingly, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 are reciprocating (returning), and the second decorative rotation member 660 can be prevented. The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently secured, the displacement direction of the main moving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component, Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 is low. can do. As a result, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The action produced by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state to the intermediate production state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the curved portion 616b approximately corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, it is not necessary to adopt a curved portion for the guide elongated hole 616. That is, as described above, the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured by only a linear portion regardless of whether or not a portion that bends to increase the displacement resistance is adopted in the intermediate effect state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by intentionally adopting the curved portion 616b, it is intended to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be described below.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 coupled to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. The downward displacement is the same.

The difference is that in the case of being guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ), a curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided by displacement, and in the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is oriented along the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 ( The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the leftward direction.

Accordingly, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the main driving side becomes large (tilt start side), the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is swung to the left and right, so that the supported member is supported. A large displacement speed of the driven side of 640 can be secured.

This can prevent the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced from a specific initial position to a final position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results obtained by integrating the vertical velocities are equal, If the displacement starts slowly at the beginning of displacement, the displacement speed increases at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. And becomes maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared with the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period. The quantity UE1 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, and when performing an effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the displacement lower end, the first operation unit 600 is operated. It adversely affects the performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b in the guide elongated hole 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is set to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. It is intended that the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 be made uniform.

The homogenization in this case means not only that the velocities are made to be the same over the entire range of displacement, but also that the magnitude of the velocities is suppressed. Particularly, in the present embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the entry start side to the curved portion 616b, and enters the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b. The displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

Further, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the displacement amount required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised). Since the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 at the time of starting the driving in the case of (operation) can be reduced, the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotation member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in the angle θ [degree] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotation member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decoration rotation member 660. That is, the size of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is defined according to the size of the angle θ.

In the present embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotation member 650, and the gear tooth 652a and the gear of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657. The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 are the same, a change in the angle θ can be grasped as a change in the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660.

The change of the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and the intermediate effect of the first action unit 600 is changed. The state from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the production standby state, the second decorative rotation member 660 is in a posture in which the first production surface 661a is tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third production surface 661c is rotated to the right by 45 degrees). Accordingly, every time the state is sequentially switched to the intermediate presentation state and the overhang state, the second decorative rotation member 660 rotates by 45 degrees so that the third production surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second. The effect surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by the design of the guide elongated hole 616 for defining the posture of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 according to the angle θ.

Accordingly, even when only the sensor that detects the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotation member 660 of the second decoration rotation member 660 is based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The placement and orientation can be determined by the voice lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620, the arrangement and the posture of the second decoration rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of.

Here, the change amount of the angle θ is not proportional to the turning angle amount of the turning member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. Further, by this, even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 from becoming constant. This will be described below.

The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. That is, compared to the angle change from the production standby state to the intermediate production state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate production state to the overhang state is generally larger. Large (about 20 degrees while the rotation member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state is gradually reduced from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It becomes less than the level of the angle change to the state (it decreases to about 7 degrees).

In this manner, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle is changed depending on the magnitude, so that the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is changed similarly. Can be configured to. That is, when the value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is likely to be small, and the posture thereof can be easily maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation member 660 is rotated. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to be large, and the surfaces (effect surfaces 661a to 661c) facing the player side can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-described configuration, it is possible to form a gradual movement in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660, as described above, the arrangement change and the attitude change associated with the displacement of the supported member 640 and the center of the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are formed. The rotational displacement about the rotation axis and the displacement are executed at the same time.

Regarding the rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement about the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It becomes noticeably larger at the timing of entry.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state is slightly moved up and down (rebounded) from the driven side arrangement. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the second decorative rotation member 660 in a state in which the third effect surface 661c is directed to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed increases, and the posture change in the rotation direction changes. Visibly noticeable. That is, the player can visually recognize that the second decorative rotation member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In the present embodiment, the second effect surface 661b of the second decorative rotation member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotation member 620, and the second fixing surface 661b is arranged close to the decoration fixing member 670. It is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of the displacement in view of being integrally viewed (see FIG. 28 ).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide elongated hole 616 as described above, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that the rotating member 620 is It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the state of being disposed at the lower end of the displacement from becoming excessively high, and to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speeds, the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the cylindrical portion 643). Is configured to come closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pivoting tip of the pivoting member 620 from violently moving due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotary member 660 supported on the pivoting tip side of the pivoting member 620. The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b is rebounded (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the displacement lower end of the rotating member 620. Is preferably configured to interfere with the displacement of the. That is, in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the direction inclining to the upper left is the lateral direction, and the displacement of the driven member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. Rebound of the member 640 can be prevented.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the supported side of the supported member 640, and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the displacement end And the driven-side displacement direction of the supported member 640 is different.

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 will be displaced to the lower left along the main body side displacement direction (the rotation direction of the rotation member 620), but in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole is used. By being guided by the guide slot 616, it is slightly swung in the left-right direction along the guide slot 616 and is displaced downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular orbit centered on the main driving side of the supported member 640, and therefore the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the lateral direction of the guide slot 616. As a result, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and rebound of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. In the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the projecting state to the production standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required for displacing the rotating member 620 upright (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640. The rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moved upward, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is rotated.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660, the more the load required to raise and rotate the rotation member 620 can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, in proportion to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 at the time when the rotation member 620 starts the rotation displacement from the extended state of the first operation unit 600. It is designed so that the value of the angle .theta. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 around the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( It is placed in a vertical position).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotary member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotary member 620, the load applied to the rotary member 620 as an inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotary member 660 is reduced. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load in which the moving member 620 is twisted about the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand a small elastic displacement locally by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotation member 620 in a front view, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the rotation member 620 is broken and broken. .. In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and a load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is resisted by elastic deformation of the front cover member 612. Therefore, the rotation member 620 can be prevented from being damaged.

The displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decoration portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and the rotation angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the arrangement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is small, such as the change from the production standby state to the projecting state, the projecting decoration portion 652b rotates if the angle θ changes. ..

The change in the angle θ from the production standby state to the projecting state is about 135 degrees, and the projecting decoration portion 652b rotates at about 45 degrees. Here, when the projecting decoration portion 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the production standby state, it feels as if it collides with another operation unit 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, the posture of the supported member 640 itself, which serves as a reference for the rotation of the overhanging decoration portion 652b, changes in the clockwise direction, so that the other operation unit 800 (the left and right fixed decoration members) is changed. It is possible to avoid a collision.

In other words, since the projecting decoration portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with the supported member 640 as a reference, the space required for the displacement of the projecting decoration portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, when the projecting decoration portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with the supported member 640 as a reference in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is arranged from the projecting state to the production standby state. When it changes to, the projecting decoration portion 652b projects to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operation unit 800, and partially hides the projecting display to the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is a possibility that it may have an adverse effect on the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with the driven side of the supported member 640 as a reference, the supported member is supported. When 640 overhangs to the side of the third symbol display device 81, it interlocks and overhangs, and when the supported member 640 is displaced to the side of retracting from the third symbol display device 81, it retracts in conjunction. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the projecting decoration portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 as the player's eyes can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, the difference is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into the angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and the angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the posture of the supported member 640. The difference between the change and is obtained as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decoration portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 becomes equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular velocity of rotation of the overhanging decoration portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, for the player, the overhanging decoration portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means different from the drive motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620. Can be visually confirmed.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 as a reference may be a slide movement section or a rotation movement section from the player's perspective. It can be seen, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decoration portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This action is realized by separately designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement in the sliding direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the protruding decoration portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. However, from the player's perspective, the displacement of the protruding decoration portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640. As will be influenced by the dominant side.

Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement in the sliding direction, and it can be visually recognized in a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement in the sliding direction. The decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as if it is slidingly displaced.

As described above, the rotation member 620 is configured to be rotationally displaceable so as to form the production standby state, the intermediate production state, and the extended state, and the case where the rotation member 620 is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end is described. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to be displaced in the opposite direction at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

For example, after the rotational member 620 is rotationally displaced from the production standby state to the intermediate production state, the driving direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the production standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 while descending, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stop position accurate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state as compared with the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660, as described above.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the rotation amount of the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, the amount of the driving force distributed to the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, so that the rotation member 620 relatively moves. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, since the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced as the rotation amount of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if this is not done, the rotating member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is the field of view of the player who sees the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). In order to secure the effect, the production standby state of retracting below the opening 511a (see FIG. 28), the overhanging state (see FIG. 30) arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracting attention, and in between. The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of.

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. 50 and 51, the peripheral members of the up/down reversing effect device 770 are mainly illustrated in a disassembled state, and the up/down reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 that is fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, and between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510. A rotation arm member 720 arranged and rotatable about the cylindrical protruding portion 511b of the rear case 510; and a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotation arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 configured such that a tip end portion of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be guided so as to be movable up and down, and a left rear part that is fastened and fixed to a lower left corner portion of the rear case 510 on a rear side of the elevating plate member 740. The plate member 750, a set of right and left front plate members 710 and a pair of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the left rear plate member 750, and fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 at the front side of the metal rod 702. The blind decorative member 768, and the lifting/reversing effect device 770 configured to be displaceable in a mode in which the lifting plate member 740 and the front support member 760 are combined with lifting displacement and longitudinal displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge portion and forms a gap between the rear case 510, A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection sensors 713 arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a mode in which the front side is advanced toward the upper side on the left side front side. A front upper inclined portion 714 that is formed so as to be inclined and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the lifting/reversing effect producing device 770, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw that is inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. And a plurality of fastened parts 718.

As the detection sensor 713, a plurality of photocoupler-type sensors are arranged at intervals such that the detection groove is arranged at a position where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each of the detection sensors 713 has a position of the detected portion 735 in the production standby state of the second operation unit 700, a position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operation unit 700, and an extension of the second operation unit 700, respectively. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the production standby state, the intermediate production state, or the projecting state, and from the output result, the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) is capable of grasping the state of the second operation unit 700.

The rotating arm member 720 is axially supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a long plate shape having a V shape in a front view. Main body 721 and a supporting tubular portion 722 that is cylindrically protruded rearward in a bent portion of the main body 721 and has an inner peripheral side shape formed to have a size capable of inserting the cylindrical protrusion 511b. And a long hole portion 723 formed in a long hole shape along the long direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 721, and a front side (a protruding direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 711a) at the left end portion of the main body portion 721. (In a direction parallel to the direction) and a cylindrical fastened portion 724 having a female thread formed on the inner peripheral side and protruding in a cylindrical shape, and at the intermediate position between the fastened cylindrical portion 724 and the support tubular portion 722. In the ascending direction (left side portion) between the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 725, which is protruded in a cylindrical shape and has an internal thread formed on the inner peripheral side thereof, and the rear case 510, which is wound around the supporting tubular portion 722. And a torsion spring SP2 that applies a biasing force in the direction of lifting the.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that the arrangement is shifted to the front side as compared with the base end side of the support cylinder 722, and the support plate is provided in the gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is provided.

The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and includes an arc-shaped elongated hole portion 701a that is formed so as to guide the cylindrical fastening portion 725. A fastening screw inserted through the elongated hole 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastening target portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 supports the supporting plate through the cylindrical fastening target portion 725. It is irremovably supported by 701.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the left side portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the rotating arm member 720 from tilting to the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotating arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

The right side portion of the main body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylindrical portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is oriented in the lengthwise direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotation direction of the rotation arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force via the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 that is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731 thereof. A drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive gear, a transmission gear 733 engaged with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 engaged with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are axially supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a that project in a cylindrical shape on the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protruding portion 711a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. When these fastening screws are screwed and fixed, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are axially supported by the cylindrical protruding portion 711a so as not to fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical protruding portion 711 a and an arcuate hole 711 b formed in an arc shape centering on the cylindrical protruding portion 711 a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 has a circular arc shape centered on the rotation shaft portion, and a detected portion 735 protruding toward the front side and formed so as to be inserted into the circular arc hole 711b, and extended so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. The extended portion 736 and the cylindrical protruding portion 736a that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the extended portion 736 to the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the posture of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the output from the detection sensor 713 and the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). Is configured as a part for making it detectable.

The cylindrical protruding portion 736a is formed so as to be inserted into the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the elongated hole portion 723. To be done.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. When the fastening screw is screwed and fixed, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protruding portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that is displaced up and down in accordance with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720. The elevating plate member 740 is disposed on the left end side and is guided in the up and down direction, and on the lower end side of the guided member 741. The laterally long members 742 that are fastened to the left and right are provided.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted therethrough, and can be vertically displaced along the metal rod 702. When the tip ends of the ridges protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear surface contact the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the axial rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

With the stabilized posture of the guided member 741, the posture of the laterally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The laterally elongated member 742 includes an elongated hole portion 743 formed in an oval shape that is long in the vertical direction and has an upper and lower width through which the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, and an upper side of the elongated hole portion 743. In the above, a cylindrical portion 744 which is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front side and a pair of guide portions 745 which are arranged below the bottom portion at positions equidistant to the left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744 are provided. Prepare

A fastening screw that is inserted into the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 is rotated through the cylindrical fastening portion 724. It is irremovably supported by the member 720.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion tubular portion 773 of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is inserted and which supports the up/down reversing effect device 770 in a displaceable manner in the longitudinal direction. That is, the lifting/reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the lifting plate member 740 but is disposed on the front side of the lifting plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

The coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tubular portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction in which the lift plate member 740 and the lift reversing effect device 770 are separated from each other.

The guide part 745 is composed of a pair of left and right parts, and a long plate part 745a in the front and rear direction, and a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts projecting from the plate part 745a to the outside in the left and right directions. And a portion 745b.

The rotating tube portion 745b rotates when the above-described up/down reversing effect device 770 is displaced forward and backward, and functions as a portion that guides displacement in the forward and backward directions, which will be described in detail later.

Similarly to the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750 is inclined and formed such that the front side of the right front portion increases toward the front side. A front upper inclined portion 751 formed so as to be capable of guiding and a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the back side of the back case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decoration member 768 includes a three-dimensional decoration portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmissive resin material, and a substrate on which LEDs are fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. , The three-dimensional decoration portion 768a can be illuminated with the light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front support members 760 is provided with a fixing plate portion 761 configured to have an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and adjacent to the fixing plate portion 761 on the left and right sides of the fixing plate portion 761, and the plate back surface faces upward. And a receiving inclined portion 762 that is formed so as to incline toward the front side.

The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted from the front side into the insertion hole into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a plate part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving sloped portion 762 and the front upper sloped portions 714 and 751, and the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is guided to this guide path, so that the up/down reversing effect device 770 moves in the front-rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. The vertical displacement will be described below.

52A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52B is the second operation unit 700 taken along the line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 86. FIG. 52A and 52B, the production standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53B is a second operation unit 700 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 86. FIG. 53(a) and 53(b), the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown.

54A is a sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54B is a second operation unit 700 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 86. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

The up/down displacement of the up/down reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIG. 52 to FIG. 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of the driving force when the up/down reversing effect device 770 is displaced up/down will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the time of starting the transmission of the driving force from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance generated at the start of rotation of the gear cam member 734. Further, the same thing holds true in the overhang state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is orthogonal to the lengthwise direction of the long hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 is received from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotation direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

As shown in FIG. 52 to FIG. 54, the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is arranged on the rear side below the center frame 86 and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-back direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is such that the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the upper front inclined parts 714, 751 and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the up/down inversion effect device 770. The second horizontal plate 774c is guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740, so that the number is reduced.

That is, the pair of rotating tubular portions 774e are provided with the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is disposed on the left side not shown in FIG. It is designed to line up in parallel with the inclination angle of (see reference numeral), and the rotating tubular portion 774e rolls around the tubular portion 774d to perform displacement along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Further, by arranging the front and rear rotary cylinders 745b to be arranged slightly forward, the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed, and thus the rotary cylinder 745b arranged in the front-rear direction can be rotated. The tubular portion 774e avoids applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the upper front inclined portion 714, 751.

That is, in the present embodiment, the design is such that the center of gravity position (rotational axis position) of the rendering device 780 is located slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. Biased in the direction. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first lateral plate 774b and the second lateral plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b, which is arranged closely when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is arranged slightly above, and when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised, it is arranged closely. The rear rotary cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, since the front rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap formed between it and the second horizontal plate 774c, it stably causes rolling between the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b. Since there is a gap between the rear rotary cylinder 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b, rolling between the rear rotary cylinder 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c can be stably generated. As a result, rolling of the rotating tubular portion 745b can be normally caused, and displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the up/down reversing effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2, in addition to the above-mentioned shape guide. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the front-rear direction displacement can be reduced when the ascending/descending reversing effect device 770 is displaced upward as it is displaced to the front side, compared to when it is displaced downward.

The vertical displacement of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In vertical displacement, the load of displacement in the ascending direction becomes relatively large due to the need to resist gravity, but the displacement in the front-back direction in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force required for upwardly displacing the up/down reversing effect device 770 from becoming excessive.

The coil spring CS2 is set to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 53) of the second operation unit 700. That is, when the up/down reversing effect device 770 is arranged below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 causes the driving force of the drive motor 731 to displace the up/down reversing effect device 770 in the front-rear direction. While acting in the assisting direction, when the up/down reversing effect device 770 is arranged above the disposition in the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up/down reversing effect device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversing effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is drive-controlled from the production standby state of the second operation unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stop-controlled so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate production state, the stop timing is slightly smaller than the ideal timing. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced so as to be closer to the intermediate effect state side by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Further, for example, when the stop control is performed similarly, even if the stop timing is slightly delayed from the ideal, the second operation unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descending by the own weight is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second operation unit 700 can be moved closer to the intermediate effect state side and the arrangement can be maintained.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is drive-controlled from the extended state of the second operation unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stop-controlled so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the elevation reversing effect device 770. Since the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the intermediate effect state goes downward, it is possible to easily prevent the downward displacement to a greater extent than in the intermediate effect state. Even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 is applied so that the second operation unit 700 can be moved to the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front-rear direction with the up/down displacement will be described. As a premise, there is known a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the center frame 86 is displaced inside and outside the frame to attract the player's attention and a state in which the player retracts from the player's view.

Most of such movable accessory objects are designed so that the appearance when placed inside the center frame 86 is important, and in the state of retreating to the outside of the center frame 86, the player pays attention. In many cases, the appearance was not taken into consideration under the assumption that it would not be done.

However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is configured to be long, and at the edge of the field of view such as passing through the inside of the center frame 86 and seeing the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since the line of sight reaches the outer position on the rear side of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), if the appearance of the movable accessory in the state retracted to the outer position on the rear side of the center frame 86 is poor, It may reduce interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). After forming decorative surfaces on the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 and the second sub-decoration surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is such that the player side (front side) is the base end toward the rear side. The line that spreads out (inclining downward toward the rear), that is, the displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view, allows each decorative surface to easily fit within the field of view of the player. I am configuring.

As a result, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be easily placed in the player's field of view. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front side surface (the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, which is visible to the player in the projecting state (see FIG. 54), see 54 is the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first sub decorative surface 787a2 or second sub decorative surface 787b2) that is visible to the player in the production standby state (see FIG. 52). The decorative surface 787a2) and the decoration (figure, pattern, character, pattern, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the second decoration in which the first main decoration surface 787a1 and the first sub decoration surface 787a2 are formed as the first decorations that are related to each other, and the second main decoration surface 787b1 and the second sub decoration surface 787b2 are related to each other. And the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper side surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side thereof in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the state of paying attention to the sphere flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the state of paying attention to the display effect developed on the third symbol display device 81 are switched. Moreover, it is easy for the player to come into view when moving his or her eyes.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, “chance”, “big hit”, etc.) that the player can visually recognize through the covering member 787 in the extended state is displayed on the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. It can be visible to the player through the side surface.

As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement in the production standby state so that it can be easily visually recognized, and the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously can continuously attract the attention of the player.

Further, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotationally displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, the content of the decorative surface which the player can visually recognize in the extended state is different. A case can occur.

For example, when the up/down reversing effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (when it is overlooked or when the operation speed is excessively fast), If the composition of the decorative surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the production standby state, so that the player is expanded on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. There is no choice but to pay attention to the liquid crystal effect produced, and the attention to the covering member 787 decreases.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side surface as in the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes the up/down reversing effect device 770 in the effect standby state to cover it in the overhang state. Through the installation member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (information contents, for example, “chance”, “big hit”, etc.) that the player could visually recognize.

As a result, the content that is notified by the state of the covering member 787 to the player who has missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state is displayed on the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. It is possible to continue notification. As a result, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept high regardless of each state such as the production standby state or the overhang state.

In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 moves forward from the rear end surface of the game area from the state of being arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area. The configuration of such displacement will be described.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the production standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the plate back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is on the covering member 787 side. The flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to project from the above.

The flow path forming portion 86a is configured such that a ball that has jumped into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, The rear side part of the guide flow path for swinging the ball that has flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 once to the rear, and again flowing it forward to guide it toward the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game area. (See FIG. 9). That is, the flow path forming portion 86a arranges the rear end surface BE1 of the game area rearward of the plate front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Since the sphere that has flowed down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning opening 64, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. It is easy for the player's line of sight to gather on the flow path forming portion 86a. In the production standby state (see FIG. 52 ), since the production device 780 is arranged directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, it is easy to configure the production device 780 in the production standby state to enter the player's visual field. You can

When the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the covering member 787 is arranged on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), and in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, the covering member 787 is disposed. The front surface portion is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and when the second operation unit 700 is in the projecting state, the front surface portion of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front surface side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front and rear position as the front and rear position of the game area. Therefore, the cover member 787 can be made to appear to the player as if it is riding on the center frame 86 and moving to the front side (close to the player side).

In the second operation unit 700, when the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction along with the up-and-down displacement, the front-rear position of the front end face of the second operation unit 700 is the second decoration in the extended state when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state. It is configured so as to match (coincide with) the front-rear position of the second effect surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in the front view, are provided. Therefore, it is possible to make them easily visible.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the rendering device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate rendering state and the rendering standby state than the arrangement in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared to the extended state. It is possible to separate (independently) the 661 and the rendering device 780 for easy visual recognition.

The up/down reversing rendering device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected to and supported by the lifting plate member 740, and a rendering device 780 configured to be displaceable with the main body member 771 as a reference. Next, with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be described.

55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversing effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversing effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 are referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 that is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and an insertion tubular portion 773 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the lower long portion 772 to the rear side. , A pair of guide extending portions 774 extending from the left and right end portions of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, and a vertically extending connecting portion integrally formed with the left and right central position of the lower long portion 772. A configuration is provided in which the upper long portion 775 formed to be long in the left-right direction and the linear motion plate member 784 of the effect device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 capable of supporting the drive transmission device by being fastened and fixed from the rear side to the left-right center of the upper elongated portion 775, the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion. The light emitting effect means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775.

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a slidable dimensional relationship with the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body is formed by sliding. The member 771 is displaced in the front-back direction. That is, by inserting the insertion tubular portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 with respect to the elevating plate member 740 in the front-rear direction.

The guide extending portion 774 has a vertical plate 774a whose width is oriented in the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width is oriented in the left-right direction, and the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c that is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and has a width direction that faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and a left-right outer surface of the vertical plate 774a that projects leftward and rightward. A pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d are provided, and a rotating tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portion 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a width length that is longer in the left and right direction than the widthwise end of the first horizontal plate 774b. In the assembled state, the expanded portion in the width direction is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the up-down direction, and abuts against each other to suppress tilt displacement in which the guide extending portion 774 tilts forward. That is, by ensuring a width length such that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the main body member 771 tilts forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740. Can be suppressed.

The pair of tubular portions 774d are not arranged in the vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is displaced to the front side compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 is parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e are simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be contacted. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and a local load can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect the pair of left and right tubular portions 776a with a plurality of tubular portions 776a that are arranged on both left and right sides in a manner that the left and right pairs are arranged vertically and female threads are formed on the inner peripheral side. And a plurality of fall prevention plate portions 776b.

The captive plate portion 776b includes insertion holes formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of tubular portions 776a, and a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion holes is screwed into the tubular portion 776a. Is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the tubular portion 776a and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and the insertion hole 777b. Below the insertion hole 777b, a cylindrical protruding portion 777c that is cylindrically protruded on the front side, a pair of insertion holes 777d formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and the rear side is fastened. And a fixed wiring member 777e.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protruding portion 777c, and the fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, so that the vertical reversing member 781 is rotatably supported. It is a part.

Through the insertion hole 777d, a fastening screw to be screwed into a female screw portion 775a formed at a corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 can be inserted, and the fastening screw causes the transmission device holding plate 777 to be inserted into the upper long portion 775. Is fastened and fixed.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and retaining the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777 and the wire retaining member 777e. With this structure, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

The light-emission production means 778 includes two left and right elongated decorative plate-shaped decorative boards 778a on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and light transmission arranged on the front side of the decorative board 778a. A light diffusing member 778b which is a plate member formed of a flexible resin material and on which light diffusion processing is formed.

The upper illuminated substrate 778a includes a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side in an upper and lower direction. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to detect the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the rendering device 780 by disposing the arc-shaped protruding portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and the fastened portions are inserted from the back side into insertion holes formed in the lower elongated portion 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screw is screwed and fixed by fastening, so that the fastening screw is inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the light diffusion member 778b on the upper side is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both left and right sides, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are the female threads of the upper elongated portion 775. The upper light diffusing member 778b is fastened and fixed by being screwed into the portion 775b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without any measures, but in the present embodiment, as described later, the covering member 787 is always on the front side of the insertion hole 778c. The cover member 787 can hide the head portion of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects production. In other words, by designing the cover member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the fastening screw in the insertion direction can be increased.

The rendering device 780 is a device in which an outer shape portion is arranged around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and is a vertical reversing member 781 that is axially supported by the cylindrical protruding portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. And a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the upside-down inverting member 781 is fixed to the drive shaft, and one end of each of the up-down inverting member 781 in the longitudinal direction. A pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported, a pair of linear motion plate members 784 that are pivotally supported at the other end of the intermediate arm members 783, and are guided by the guide portion 776 for lateral displacement. A pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) by a rotary shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotary member 785. A pair of shaft support members 786 that axially cooperates with the member 784, and a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 so as not to fall off while the phases are fixed. And a cover member 787 that is disposed in front of and behind the end plate member 785d and has a left-right length that covers the left and right side portions of the upper elongated portion 775.

The upside-down reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in an elongated plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding in a gear shape on the back side of the center portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c projecting cylindrically from both ends in the scale direction toward the back side, and projectingly provided on the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. And an arcuate protrusion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, the cylindrical protruding portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted through the circular hole, and the fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, The upside-down member 781 is rotatably supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized to rotate the drive gear 782a, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in association with the rotation of the vertical reversing member 781. That is, the upside-down member 781 can be rotationally driven by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protruding portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion where the one side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical protruding portion 781c which is displaced as the vertical inversion member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effect means 778. That is, the arcuate projection 781d can be arranged on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 is determined to be two postures in which the arcuate protruding portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture therebetween (a pair of detection sensors 778d. The posture in which the arcuate protruding portions 781d are not disposed in both of the detection grooves of 1)).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has one side support hole 783a which is bored at one end and axially supported by the cylindrical protruding portion 781c, and one side. A cylindrical other side cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side penetratingly formed at an end portion on the other side opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b. ).

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protruding portion 781c, and a fastening screw that is inserted from the back side into the one side support hole 783a is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the middle arm member 783 is axially supported by the upside-down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The direct-acting plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other-side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783. An arc-shaped plate portion 784b that is projected in an arc shape around the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, and an elliptic hole that extends in parallel in the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a. A pair of elongated hole portions 784c, a pair of upper and lower supporting plate portions 784d arranged in parallel in a position between the elongated hole portions 784c and protruding rearward, and an intermediate portion of the supporting plate portions 784d. A pair of ridges 784e that are formed as ridges that project from the sides facing each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that is open to the rear side at the ends of the support plate 784d and that is the inner peripheral side. A pair of fastened parts 784f in which female threads are formed, a positioning hole 784g penetratingly formed between the cylindrical protruding part 784a and the support plate part 784d, and a ring-shaped member between the shaft support member 786. A ring holding half 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding the metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft supporting member 786 and. , Is provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer peripheral diameter slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. And a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be removed from the cylindrical protruding portion 784a by inserting the fastening screw that is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side into the female screw of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a. Is pivotally supported by.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other side cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to face the other side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction, and the inclination displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis is limited. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a female screw formed on the cylindrical portion 776a is inserted through the insertion hole of the captive plate portion 776b from the rear side. When the screw is screwed in, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

In the supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 is slidable along the forming direction of the long hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress the vertical displacement of the metal rod 785a, and the ridge portion 784e defines the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. , Which will be described later in detail.

The placement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but the details will be described later.

The shaft rotation member 785 is a member that is arranged in a pair on the left and right and is axially supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The metal rod 785a is formed of a metal material in a substantially cylindrical shape, and the length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 which is a member fixed to the metal rod 785a arranged at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with each other are formed, an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a in a manner of being raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed in the left and right inner side portions of the end plate member 785d. And a rotational position stabilizing portion 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed in the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b has a dimensional relationship such that the recessed groove portion 785b is slidable with respect to the ridge portion 784e, and also has a dimensional relationship in which displacement in the left-right direction is restricted with respect to the ridge portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusions 784e.

Accordingly, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the rear surface side of the linear motion plate member 784 in such a manner that the metal rod 785a can be axially rotated and the displacement in the left-right direction is suppressed.

The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. With the bevel tooth member 785c partially entering the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the bevel tooth portion 783c with the bevel tooth member 785c from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784. Be assembled into.

In the assembled state as described above, the bevel tooth member 785c is arranged to enter the arrangement hole 784g, but cannot be detached to the front side because the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The displacement to the back side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed in an inner peripheral side shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross-sectional shape) as a tip end portion of the metal rod 785a. The inner peripheral side shape and the metal rod 785a. It is fitted and fixed by being formed in a dimensional relationship with the tip end portion of the with an interference fit.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like may be used, or by forming a female screw at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female screw, A method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted into the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a is configured to be in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d. Can be easily aligned with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f has a function as a portion where the provided metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786 a formed to allow a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784 f to be inserted therein, and a ring holding member for the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the half 784h and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. And a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape.

When a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened part 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786, the plate portion of the shaft support member 786 is provided with the back side of the metal rod 785a. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h, 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i, 786c.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape in which a pair of front and rear sides are opened in the left and right sides, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotating member 785, and is different on the opposite surface. A decoration is formed that is composed of figures, patterns, characters, or patterns that can be read in a meaningful way.

That is, the covering member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface that is visible to the player in the projecting state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof. The first sub-decoration surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decoration surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and in the production standby state (see FIG. 52) and the back surface thereof And a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 that is formed. The second sub-decoration surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decoration surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the production standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a substantially box-like shape that is formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and that is opened in the left and right inner sides in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). A plurality of extended portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed so as to retreat to the left and right outside in the portion between the extended portions 787c. ..

The extending portions 787c are formed so that the end portions of the extending members 787c are in contact with or close to each other when the covering members 787 are close to each other (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as one body.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion disposed in the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emission effecting means 778 and the upper left and right center of the upper elongated portion 775 when the covering member 787 is disposed in the vicinity (see FIG. 26). Is a portion for visibly opening the circular arc plate portion and the like, and is formed in a recessed shape in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

With the operation of the rendering device 780, the covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first sub decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52), and the second main surface. The decorative surface 787b1 is turned to the front side and the second sub decorative surface 787b2 is turned to the upper side (see FIG. 30) so that the state can be switched. First, a mechanism that constitutes a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. 57A, a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) of the vertical inversion member 781 in which the pair of cylindrical protruding portions 781c is arranged on the same vertical line is illustrated, and FIG. 57A, the upside-down member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise in a front view about the cylindrical protruding portion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) and 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 are not shown for easy understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate protruding portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the upright vertical arrangement state in which the upside down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate protruding portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. It

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured such that the vertical inversion member 781 is switched between the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state, and the output of the detection sensor 778d is controlled by the voice lamp control. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the rendering device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical inversion member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is laterally displaced while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds (proportional) to the rotation angle of the shaft rotation member 785, and the horizontal displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the horizontal displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotation member 785. Corresponding to.

Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is larger, the arrangement in which the linear displacement is larger, and the like.

First, a general description will be given. The configuration of the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the vertical inversion member 781 rotates about the cylindrical protruding portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical protruding portion 781c of the vertical inversion member 781 moves to the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to move in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical protruding portion 777c as viewed. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in the left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left/right direction by a length L1 by about 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left and right width end portions). Is illustrated as.

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57A to FIG. 57B, the posture change centering on the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in the front view, It is suppressed to an angle less than half of 15 degrees, which is an angle as an arrangement interval between adjacent teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (the mesh transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is a mutually opposing position in the front-rear direction, that is, , Occurs on the moving axis HL1 in front view.

58A is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57A, 58B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57B.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the beveled tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (in FIG. 58(b), upward). Is displaced to). Note that, in FIG. 58B, for easy understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c are illustrated as being overlapped with each other, and the overlapping width is the bevel tooth portion 783c. And the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed and absorbed.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. From the state shown in FIG. 57(a), while the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise in a front view, the right-side shaft rotating member 785 rotates in the rearward rotation direction, and the left-side shaft rotating member 785 moves forward. Rotate in the rolling direction.

Note that, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 accordingly. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates about the metal rod 785a is twice the rotation angle about the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the displacement amount of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58A to the state of FIG. 58B is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and the bevel tooth member is It is less than the amount to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the 785c. That is, the amount of displacement required for the representative tooth to come into contact with the adjacent tooth to rotate (when the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation at an angle of 30 degrees). Amount).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in the present embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are made of a resin material, the pressing is not performed. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotation direction of the bevel tooth member 785c changes from the state of FIG. 57(a) to that of FIG. 57(b). ) Is maintained.

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c is due to the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up/down reversing member 781 from the magnet Mg to the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f ( 54) (see FIG. 54).

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to limit the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives a forward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

Further, with respect to the left side shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the front side of the end plate member 785d similarly to the right side, while the magnet Mg is arranged on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives the backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In the present embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) until the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left/right direction. It is designed to be able to generate a load that exceeds.

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c so as to absorb the displacement amount of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). When the displacement is continued beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attraction force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f are separated. When the positions are separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled member 785c released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg are elastically recovered and rotationally displaced.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotation direction, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously improved. This improvement in rotation speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, the operation of the covering member 787 can be moderated without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782, so that the burden of the control design of the driving motor 782 can be reduced and the effect of the covering member 787 can be produced. The effect can be improved.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 occurs due to the attraction force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. ..

The rotational position stabilizing portions 785f that receive the attraction force of the magnet Mg are configured in a pair in the upper and lower sides, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one rotational position stabilizing portion 785f. Is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives the attraction force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52(b) ) Reference, the upper side) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed in the vicinity of the magnet Mg and receives the attraction force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30). It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, the action in which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the upside down member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left/right direction settles down and rotational displacement occurs.

According to the present embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is adopted as described above, the same action occurs. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, since the displacement of the cylindrical protruding portion 781c is large in the horizontal direction and small in the vertical direction, the displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 in the horizontal direction is large and the rotation amount is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the lengthwise direction of the upside-down member 781 is tilted toward the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protruding portion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and becomes larger in the up-down direction. The rotation amount is small and the rotation amount is large. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotation operation of the vertical inversion member 781 which starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, first, the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 becomes large, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 becomes large. The degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Since the linear displacement and the rotational displacement occur in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. It is possible to avoid a collision. Next, a change in appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the effect device 780. FIG. 59(a) to 59(c), the reversing operation of the ascent/descent reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 59(a), the effect device 780 in the upright vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781 is shown, and in FIG. 59(b), the effect device when the vertically inverted member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is shown, and in FIG. 59(c), the effect device 780 is shown with the upside down member 781 in an inverted vertical arrangement.

By rotating the upside-down member 781 by 180 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A), the state is changed to the upright vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is inverted by 180 degrees with reference to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

When the upside down member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view from the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Therefore, in the reversing operation, every time the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so that the vertical reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced by 180 degrees, the state shown in FIG. ), the state can be repeatedly switched.

As described above, while the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57A, the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. To do. Here, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction from the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 faces the second sub decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left covering member 787 faces the first sub decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

Accordingly, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 of the right covering member 787 ( Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) from being visually recognized together.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have a difference in content between the left and right, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the decorative surface. The amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 can be reduced.

As a result, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be reduced. Also, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement is stopped, the game is continued until the rotation of the covering member 787 is stopped. There is an effect that it is easy to maintain the line of sight of the person on the covering member 787.

The rotational displacement is executed in the projecting state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement is stopped, and the decorative surface of the pair of left and right covering members 787 becomes the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state the first sub decorative surface 787a2. It is unlikely that attention will be focused on (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2).

Particularly, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced closer to the second operation unit 700, the view to the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is the third movement. It will be blocked by the unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 52) and the production device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decoration surface 787b2) easily enters the player's visual field.

As described above, in the second operation unit 700, it is possible to prevent the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) from being visually recognized evenly during the rotational displacement in the projecting state, or to the player side. It is formed as a side surface that can be paid attention to by the player in the production standby state by preventing the surface from facing.

As a result, the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, and thus the performance performance against the cost of arranging the second operation unit 700 (occupancy of place, burden of hiding well) becomes excessively low. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of the state.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)) to stabilize the postures of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. Can be promoted.

In this embodiment, since the metal member attracting the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, it is possible to reduce the member cost and improve the maintainability as compared with the case of designing a dedicated metal member. ..

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by the linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, by performing rotational displacement, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right. The decorative member such as 750 and the front support member 760, and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof collides with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30 ), the axial displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be performed by securing a space in the left-right direction.

Therefore, in the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. Is controlled so that it can be executed. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally generated.

The extended portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside-down member 781, and in this state, they are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extending portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, Defect occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extended portions 787c are arranged in close proximity produces an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration necessary for production, It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by the length L1 in advance before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). The linear displacement of the length L1 allows the extension portion 787c to be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the extension portion 787c and the upper long portion 775. It is possible to avoid the problem that the connecting portion of the lower long portion 772 and the lower portion collide with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of horizontal displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be reduced.

As a result, compared with the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a low level and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. As the design of the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2, the design ignoring the appearance during the rotational displacement can be performed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if there is a design change in which the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is increased, the configuration of the rendering device 780 is the same, but the magnet Mg By changing to a magnet having a large attracting force, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c, as in the present embodiment.

As shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is always arranged so as to be hidden by the covering member 787. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered by the fastening screw.

In the present embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical according to the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the decorative board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). Further, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easy to be visually recognized as dark when producing light.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid the bright and conspicuous places, and as a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

In addition, it is naturally permissible to dispose the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, when the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 have the same decoration, the disadvantage of arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically does not occur, and the decorative board The design of 778a can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59B, in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced to the left and right during the reversing operation of the lifting reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extending portion 787c. Even in a state not surrounded by, the mechanical parts such as the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is the front side. It is designed to fit in the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 arranged at. The upside-down member 781 is designed to fit into the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper elongated portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the middle arm member 783 has a displacement locus to fit into the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

This makes it possible to hide the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the rendering device 780 behind the light diffusing member 778b and make it invisible, so that the rendering effect due to the appearance of the rendering device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. Can be avoided.

It returns to FIG. 26 and demonstrates. The third operation unit 800 is arranged on the upper side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the production standby state, and is supported by the tip portions of the pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. The unit is configured to be movable up and down as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 60 and 61, the portion that configures the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative portions arranged on the outside is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder in which a cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 axially supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted through the inner peripheral side, and a main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted through the inner peripheral side. The outer rotating member 840 pivotally supported, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the held member 810 And a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force that displaces the inner rotation member 830, the outer rotation member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disc-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 is provided with a cylindrical fixing portion 812 in which a central portion of the fixed cylindrical member 820 is provided with a recess for holding the cylindrical portion 821, and a through hole through which a fastening screw for fixing is inserted and a through hole through which electric wiring is inserted are formed. A detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with a detection groove facing a side of the outer rotating member 840 that can receive the detected portion 844; and a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical projections 815 projectingly provided on the front side as a cylindrical portion that irremovably supports the transmission gear 863, and a double cylindrical portion that irremovably rotatably supports the load response gear 865 on the front side. And a plurality of double cylindrical projecting portions 816 that are projected.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 formed in the center in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed in such a size that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge of the circular hole 818 when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at an end portion on the front side of the cylindrical portion 821, and a fastening means fixed to the circular plate portion 822 so that a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the front side. A disk-shaped electric decoration substrate 823 to be arranged, and a translucent light formed of an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting resin material capable of covering the electric decoration substrate 823 from the front side. A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the front end portion on the back surface side, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the barrel fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw to thereby fix the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed so as to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylinder fixing portion 812 is laid through the penetrating portion to the front side and disposed behind the decorative board 823. Is connected to the connector.

The illuminated substrate 823 is, as an LED, an apex of a pentagon and an inner light emitting portion 823a arranged at a central position equidistant from the apex, and an outer light emitting portion 823b arranged at 15 positions on the circumference at equal intervals. And The inner light emitting portion 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front side), and the outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the radially outer side (diameter direction).

The outer light emitting section 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting unit 823b is emitted to the plated portions 871a of the first decoration members 870 arranged on the circumference in close contact with each other at equal intervals. The member 870 is irradiated with the light from the three LEDs.

The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the decorative board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since the first decoration members 870 are arranged at equal intervals, the same number of lights (three in the present embodiment) from the LEDs are always emitted from the first decoration members 870 regardless of the posture of the first decoration members 870 in the rotation direction. Can be irradiated.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a change in the light amount of the light LD1 applied to the first decoration member 870 during the rotating operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion is slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion is slidable on the circular flange-shaped portion 831 a of the inner rotating member 830. Is formed.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a tubular portion protruding rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion in a tubular shape. The diameter is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that the inner rotary member 830 is slidably fitted therein.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 is prevented. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the side of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the main body portion 831 which is advantageous in terms of strength. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 are damaged or deformed by the load generated when the sliding failure occurs (when the displacement resistance unintentionally becomes excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 has a cylindrical main body portion 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at its front end portion, and a radial direction in the longitudinal direction at a position where the periphery of the main body portion 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 that are fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a in the aligned posture, and a plurality of metal rods 832 that are formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted and that can be linearly displaced while being guided by the metal rod 832. Of the linear motion member 833, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer side of the linear motion member 833.

The main body portion 831 has a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at angular positions (five locations) between the circular flange portion 831a and the adjacent metal rods 832. A strip portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c that are recessed and formed in the end portion on the opposite side of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction are provided.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, in order to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce the contact friction. The protruding tip has a semicircular cross section.

The disposition of the sliding protrusions 831b is set to an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. In other words, on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with the central axis of the outer rotating member 840 as a reference. It is set to a position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 in the switching rotation operation to be described later, and the outer rotation member 840 axially supported by the intermediate arm member 850 is radially outwardly displaced. Even if the outer rotating member 840 is received, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding ridge portion 831b, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830. Can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted, and by disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the relative rotation of each other is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 is provided with a pair of cylindrical projections 833a and 833b, which are arranged at intervals so as to be aligned in the direction of the linear motion displacement, and are projected rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical projection 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 833c which is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. And a recessed groove 833d that is recessed.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being fitted to the outside as much as possible, the rotating member 834 functions as a groove for displacement restriction that prevents the rotating member 834 from coming off in the radial direction, which will be described later in detail.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in a bevel gear shape and a plurality of cylindrical protruding portions 834b protruding in a cylindrical shape parallel to the linear movement direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) required for the operation.

Female threads are formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decoration members 870, 880 are screwed into the decoration members 870, 880. Although it functions so as to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 is provided with a cylindrical main body portion 841 and a plurality of pieces (five in the present embodiment) extending radially outward at positions where the circumference of the main body portion 841 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. The extended arm portion 842, the gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end portion of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 in such a manner that the main body portion 841 can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. And a detected part 844 extending outward.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a, and the base end of the intermediate arm member 850 is formed. By inserting a fastening screw into the female screw in a state where the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the side rod portion 851, the intermediate arm member 850 is axially supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion for switching the presence/absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described later in detail.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a member formed in a long shape, and has a base end side rod portion 851 whose one end side is axially supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotation member 840, and other base end side rod portion 851. A thickened portion 852 that is thickened toward the front side on the end side, and a tip side rod portion 853 that extends from the front side end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the base end side rod portion 851. , And a rotation transmitting portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship such that the cylindrical projection portion 833a is rotatable with respect to each other. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole formed in an arc shape centering on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical protruding portion 833b in a state of being inserted, and a bevel gear having the supported hole 854a as a central axis. And a bevel tooth portion 854c that is formed into a shape and meshes with a bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

The drive transmission device 860 is driven by a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical projection 815 that is rotatably supported by a cylindrical projection 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 that are meshed with each other so that the driving force can be transmitted through the gears 862, a central annular gear 864 that is meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 that are arranged offset from each other and are rotatably supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. And a torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the central annular gear 864 so that the central annular gear 864 can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. The transmission projection 864a protruding from the bottom plate to the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation portion 831c, and the bottom plate having a coaxial double annular shape arranged on the inner diameter side and the outer diameter side of the transmission projection 864a. And a support annular portion 864b that is provided so as to project from the portion to the front side.

In the assembled state, the rear end of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotation member 830 has an intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c. Alternatively, they are fitted with each other due to the dimensional relationship of the interference fit. Accordingly, the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be integrally rotated.

The arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If the intervals are equal, it is possible to assemble the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864, so that the assembly can be performed quickly. It becomes possible to do it. When the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in shape in the rotation direction (the same at 72-degree intervals) as in the present embodiment, the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are different. Since it is considered that there is little influence due to deviation during assembly, equidistant spacing is effective.

If the intervals are unequal, the man-hours for assembling after adjusting the posture of the central annular gear 864 to the inner rotating member 830 at the time of assembling increases by one, but the number of the transmission projection 864a to the recessed portion 831c is increased. By using the arrangement, the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned with each other.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotation member 840. Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, due to the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotation member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotation member 840, the load response gear 866 is affected. The state in which the rotation of 865 is allowed and the state in which it is restricted (restricted) are configured to be switched.

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect the connection and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In the present embodiment, the device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting the driving force in one direction is composed of one set in which the transmission directions are reversed, and the switching of the driving transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed bidirectionally with high responsiveness. Is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and the illustration of the portion for configuring the displacement is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 includes one of the above-described inner rotating member 830 and one of the cylindrical protruding portions 834b fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b and that covers the cylindrical protruding portion 834b from the side surface on the opposite side of the first decorative member 870 are provided. ..

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed so as to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. , Is provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated, and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 is formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin material, and a figure or a pattern or a pattern of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pattern etc.”) is drawn on the surface thereof. Therefore, when the surface faces the front side, the player visually recognizes the pattern and the like.

In the present embodiment, an independent pattern or the like is drawn on each of the plurality (five) of the first covering portions 875. Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits a strong light by controlling the light emission by the decorative board 823 or changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, a pattern or the like which attracts the attention of the player is made different. It can be done.

For example, from the player's perspective, a display effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to give attention to which first cover portion 875 is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 side, and at the same time, the inner rotation member 830 is executed. If it is controlled to rotate, the first cover portion 875 on the side of the third symbol display device 81 can be continuously changed along with the rotation, so that the player can play the period until the rotation is stopped. Can be collected in the first covering portion 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 that can be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 that covers the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. , Is provided.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

The second cover 885 has a metal screw screwed and fixed at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the second cover 885 adjacent thereto acts. The magnet Mg2 is attracted to the screw to ensure the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the combined state (particularly, one combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, or a pattern of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pattern” or the like) drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is played. Make them visible.

In the present embodiment, the patterns and the like drawn on the plurality (five in the present embodiment) of the second covering portions 885 are composed of a plurality of (at least two, a maximum of five) second covering portions 885. When the five second covering portions 885 are in a united state, each second covering portion 885 is formed into a circle so that it can be visually recognized as a “circular body” when viewed from the front. It is decorated so as to form part of the shape.

The pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the content grasped by the second covering portion 885 in the one union state is the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of the different. In other words, the design does not have clear up, down, left, and right, and the design is such that the change in outer shape is inconspicuous even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, if the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, it is possible to improve performance performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second covering portion 885 side is firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the second covering portion 885 is combined in the front side. It is possible to improve the performance performance in the state.

In each of the second covering portions 885, the magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed in the front-rear direction due to the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw attracted by each magnet Mg2 is merely replaced with the metal screw screwed and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacently provided on the opposite side. Since the parts 885 are annularly arranged, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when they are integrated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not house a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but it is possible to prevent the performance from being deteriorated.

That is, since the independent patterns and the like are drawn on the first covering portion 875, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decoration member 870 is slightly displaced, the game is played. There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the design or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance performance of the performance using the design drawn on the first covering portion 875 from being deteriorated.

Further, since the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, the vibration caused by the up-and-down displacement (stopping from) and the rotational displacement (stopping from the rotation as the integral rotation operation or the switching rotation operation). ), the arrangement of the combined first covering portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be realized by a conventional machine that is composed of a single circular member instead of the divided body, and thus the first covering portion 875 can be displaced. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect produced by the covering portion 875.

Due to the above-mentioned circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is in the front side. The state of turning to is also referred to as one coalition state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual united state and the one united state will be described.

64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b). ), FIG. 67( a) and FIG. 67( b) are front views of the outer rotation member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

64 to 67, the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 that is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) being transmitted and the inner rotation member 830 being rotated relative to the outer rotation member 840. Are illustrated in time series.

That is, they are illustrated in time series in the rear view and the front view, and the manner in which the inner rotation member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual combined state (FIGS. 64A and 66A) is illustrated. ..

64 to 67, the axis line of the metal rod 832 is described as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 from the individual combined state (FIG. 64(a), FIG. 66(a)) is shown as an angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the front in a front view (see FIG. 66) from the individual combined state (this rotating operation is also referred to as “switching rotating operation” below), the intermediate Since the rotation of the arm member 850 is allowed, the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is allowed. In the present embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in the arrangement by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotation member 840.

From the configuration between the members described above, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical protruding portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The layout change of the supported holes 854a corresponds to the layout change of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, is displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation transmitting portion 854 supports the rotation. Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and is also displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes the displacement in the circumferential direction, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto are not fixed in the circumferential direction even at the radial end position. Since the displacement can be maintained, the effect of the effect during the switching rotation operation can be improved as compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the radial direct displacement (for example, the inversion operation described above in the second operation unit 700). Can be kept high.

On the other hand, in the above-described reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a rotating operation with high acceleration is generated by using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , The disposition of the covering member 787 at the outward displacement end of the linear movement direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to be weakened.

That is, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation of the covering member 787. Even in the situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank) continues, the effect of the operation of the covering member 787 is kept high by increasing the rotation speed of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes the radial displacement, a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and a shift of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 may occur. In the embodiment, the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (intervals of 72 degrees) around the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. As a result, the deviation of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 can be suppressed, and thus the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) in the rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while being rotated in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collision with the surrounding decorative member, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the third operation unit 800 is in the projecting state to determine the attitude of the elevating arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

Further, with the above displacement of the rotation transmitting portion 854, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotation member 834 are also similarly arranged in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830. It is displaced, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction.

When the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotation member 834, and the rotation member 834 and the rotation are rotated. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced about the metal rod 832.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with reference to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the rotation direction is increased such that the angle θ32 is separated from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), and is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotating state, the maximum angle θ31E (180° in the present embodiment) as the maximum value of the angle θ31. When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in the present embodiment) as the maximum value due to the rotation of (degrees), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotation member 834 rotates half a turn (rotates 180 degrees). ) Is configured.

That is, the rotation angle of the rotating member 834 about the metal rod 832 is set to be twice the rotation angle about the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike what has been described as the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) causes the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. However, it does not cause the action of delaying the rotation.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between the magnet Mg2 and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. As a result, a suction force may be lost due to the formation of a gap between the adjacent second decorative members 880.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement centering on the metal rod 832 is started, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the magnet member 2 is rotated relative to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centering on the metal rod 832. There is no delaying effect.

Therefore, the driving force required for rotationally displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be downsized.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and ended early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement centered on the metal rod 832 can be lowered.

The swiftness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 to be not constant.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state where the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged in a reduced diameter and is capable of integrally rotating operation is 45 degrees. Angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), the angle θ32 is 27 degrees when the virtual position line 832F is rotated by an angle of 45 degrees (FIG. 67(a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotation member 830 from the state where the integral rotation operation is possible, compared to during the rotation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used for the rotation of the inner rotating member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880. Since it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate the decoration members 870 and 880 at the time of starting the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 from the possible state, the load applied to the drive motor 861 at the time of starting the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 becomes excessive. It is possible to avoid becoming large.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction in a front view, the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement can be suppressed to be low. it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the side surface portion (for example, the connecting surface of the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) of the decorative members 870 and 880 is visually recognized, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are visible. The degree of freedom in designing the side surface of the can be improved.

At the time of the switching rotation operation, the arrangement of the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in a front view. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extended arm portion 842 that is provided adjacent to the extended arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a that supports itself is disposed. Therefore, without any countermeasure, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with the peripheral portion.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 are arranged rearward of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, so that the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side are disposed. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap each other in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Further, the base end side rod portion 851 is arranged on the front side of the extending arm portion 842, and the tip end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 are arranged on the rear side of the extending arm portion 842, whereby the switching rotation operation is performed. At this time, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and a collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individual united state, see FIG. 66). ) Has been described. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that causes resistance via the torque limiter 866 to receive resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 is the above-described reverse direction (clockwise direction in front view in the individual combined state), or the direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed (counterclockwise view in the front view in the individual combined state). If the middle arm member 850 reaches a state in which the rotation is restricted by the rotation in the rotation direction (for example, reaches the one union state from the individual combined state), the rotation is continued in the same direction. A load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the attitude maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. And rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the inner rotation member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continuously regulated in a state in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated regardless of the rotation direction. , The inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the middle arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotating operation will be referred to as “ Also called "integral rotation operation").

The integral rotation operation occurs in a state in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in the present embodiment, it occurs in a combined state in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are arranged close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are displaced in the radial direction, it is not necessary to consider a collision with a surrounding decoration member. The integrated rotation operation can be executed in the state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation is controlled to be executable regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60), the switching rotation operation involving the radial expansion displacement of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880, and the expansion operation. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without any radial displacement, and both motions can be performed in both driving directions. Yes, it is not possible to immediately perform any operation in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front. The rotation operation can be executed, and the integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in the front view. Immediately, the integral rotation operation can be performed by the counterclockwise rotation in the front view. Can not be executed.

In addition, for example, after the inner rotation member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state illustrated in FIGS. 64A and 66A, the state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted is reached. Then, when the inner rotation member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse rotation) in the front view, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and the integral rotation operation is immediately executed in the clockwise rotation in the front view. Can not.

As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the middle arm member 850 is restricted or allowed for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. Control is possible, and the drive motor 861 can be drive-controlled in an appropriate drive direction based on the determination result. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the drive mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in time series. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as effect control of the third operation unit 800.

During the reversal effect, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and during the normal effect, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again due to a sudden power failure, or when the power is turned on in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. After grasping the state of the movable part from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed so as to execute the control during the normal effect. Accordingly, even when the state of the movable portion cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation where the decorative members 870 and 880 accidentally collide with the surrounding decorative members. ..

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. 68. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotation member 830 is rotated clockwise in a front view (a drive mode in which an integral rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual united state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation in 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotation member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state).

First, the drive control during the normal effect before the reverse effect is described. At the time of this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in an individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only normal rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decorative member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while vertically displacing the held member 810 by vertically moving the elevating arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally at the same time as the vertically moving. The movement is controlled so that it can also occur.

As a matter of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be integrally rotated while the lifting arm member 801 is fixedly arranged, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be rotated. The raising/lowering operation of the raising/lowering arm member 801 may be performed in a state where the integral rotation operation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotation member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and it is determined whether the output is switched. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and the driving time from the initial position can be set by a plurality of types, so that the outer rotating member 840 can be set arbitrarily. It can be controlled to stop in this posture.

Next, the drive control during the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of reversal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue forward rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. The reverse rotation drive causes the third operation unit 800 to perform the switching rotation operation. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. It

When the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotation direction, the union state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated. After the start of the integral rotation operation, the outer rotation member 840 also starts rotation in conjunction with the inner rotation member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has started due to switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decorative member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotation member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reversing effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled so as to continue reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in forward rotation. The rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 during the switching rotation operation in the third operation unit 800 by the drive of the normal rotation, but the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. It

Next, the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is performed. After the start of the integral rotation operation, the outer rotation member 840 starts rotating, whereby the detected portion 844 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has started due to switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the normal production is performed again. The limitation on the drive control at the time of the normal effect is the same as the limitation on the drive control described at the time of the normal effect arranged before the above-described reverse effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 determines whether the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 is switched (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for reference determination. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where an individual detection sensor is used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the driving direction of the drive motor 861 to the reverse direction from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, it is possible to execute the switching rotation operation and switch to the one combined state.

Therefore, in the action production, when controlling to switch to the one-allied state at the timing of the big hit notification, it is possible to avoid the player from predicting the presence or absence of the big hit notification from the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

Further, as described above, the decoration in the one union state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not greatly differ depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotation direction. That is, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents recognized by the player as one combined state at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one union state are different in the arrangement in the rotation direction, it is possible to omit the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the one union state, and thus the first decorative member in the individual union state. Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the big hit notification can be the same.

As described above, in this embodiment, both the normal rotation and the reverse rotation as the driving direction of the drive motor 861 can realize both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation. Therefore, as compared with the case where the operation mode is fixed by the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, it is possible to realize a variety of effect modes with the single drive motor 861.

69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the cylinder fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end portion where the decorative board 823 is arranged. The electrical wiring is guided from the rear end portion to the front end portion through this opening, and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the decorative board 823. Electricity is conducted through the electric wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the decorative substrate 823 are configured to be capable of controlling light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a of the decorative substrate 823 acts so as to illuminate the bulging portion 824a bulging to the front side on the central side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player in the central portion of the circle in which the first decoration member 870 or the second decoration member 880 is arranged on the circumference when the decoration members 870 and 880 are united. To do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the decorative substrate 823 is emitted to the inside of the decorative members 870 and 880 (the first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the light LD1 is emitted to the decorative members 870 and 880. It acts to illuminate from the inside.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the individual united state in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 69) and the one union state in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the light LD1 can switch between the case of illuminating the decorative member 870 and the case of illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 which has been subjected to the plating treatment. Accordingly, most of the light LD1 can be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 at the time of irradiation with the light LD1 can be favorably increased.

Here, in the present embodiment, the decorative board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the fixed board 823. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the decoration members 870 and 880 are set. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be emitted to the central portion of the plated portion 871a, and the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be emitted to a position displaced from the central portion of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 due to the light LD1 is easily changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while light is emitted at a constant brightness. It may be difficult to execute the effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a configured to be able to reflect the light LD1 is a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is smaller than the radius of the decorative substrate 823. In addition, the center is designed to be disposed near the center of the first covering portion 875 in a front view.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that its optical axis is directed in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting section 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating section 871a, and thus the center of the radius of curvature thereof. As it progresses toward the side, it illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b. Thereby, the light can be stably radiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion on which the plating treatment is performed in the same manner as the plating treatment on the plating portion 871a, and the outer plating portion 871b arranged outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view is provided. Prepare The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is arranged rearward as compared with the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b The degree of light can be weakened.

This avoids a situation in which the intensity of the light visually recognized outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzling and lowering the visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875. be able to.

The decorative substrate 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but it is not completely blocked at the joint, so that all the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b is inside thereof. It is not what is irradiated.

First, the internal structure can be visually recognized in FIG. 69 between the member edge portion 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second covering portion 885 that is arranged to face the member edge portion 875a. A gap VA1 having a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b projects to the outside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

In addition, between the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885, which face the metal rod 832, the member interference with the metal rod 832 is caused. A large gap VA2 is formed that exceeds the area required for avoiding.

First, the gap VA2 allows a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 to be secured by avoiding a collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and the metal rod 832 allows the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 833 to rotate. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

Secondly, the clearance VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeletons 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834 so that the decorative members 870 and 880 are attached to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembling route of a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

Further, the gap VA2 is thirdly formed for the purpose of ensuring the passage of light for advancing the light passing through the transparent portions of the skeletons 871 and 881. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the positions at equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. To be seen as light.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be similarly rotated. Accordingly, it is unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while all lighting is continued), and the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is emitted. It is possible to execute a light emission effect visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the one union state (see FIG. 32 ), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, so that the reflection action of the light LD1 by the second skeleton portion 881 is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the light in the frame of the second covering portion 885 with the light (weak light) apart from the optical axis in the light LD1, so that the second covering portion 885 can be illuminated. The degree of can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light of the light LD1 in the optical axis direction passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

Inside the frame of the second covering portion 885, a colored (in the present embodiment, set to any color as the color of the circular body) light-transmissive resin material is formed, and a light diffusion process is formed inside. The light-diffusing decorative portion 885c is arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusing decoration portion 885c is refracted and acts so as to cause the entire light diffusing decoration portion 885c to emit surface light.

By this surface emission, the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decoration portions 885c arranged in the circumferential direction can be made uniform, and the respective light diffusion decoration portions of the five second decoration members 880 can be made. The effect that 885c is visually recognized by the player can be produced.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, it is possible to improve the performance performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorations 885c are continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side can be improved.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape that faces the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 of the first covering portion 875 that is close (contact) to the member outer end portion 875b is formed. , The metal rod 832 is disposed on the first decoration member 870 side with reference to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

Thereby, when the third operation unit 800 is viewed in an oblique direction in the one combined state (see FIG. 32 ), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is in the field of view of the player. The degree of entry can be reduced, and the effect on the performance can be reduced.

Accordingly, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored with different shades, the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the tint of the first covering portion 875 from entering the visual field.

In particular, in the state of one alliance, when the third operation unit 800 alone is in the extended state (see FIG. 32), compared with the case where the other operation units 600 and 700 are both in the extended state (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight when viewing the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, without any countermeasure, the side effect of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, so that the effect of the production is easily reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the one combined state, since the end surface 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is arranged closer to the rear side than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, the third motion is seen in the oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as the portion of the second covering portion 885, and the degree of visually recognizing the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. Accordingly, in the one union state, the second covering portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first covering portion 875, and the effect of production can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the one combined state, the inner rotating member 830 is rotated by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 861 to the inner rotating member 830, while the outer rotating member 840 is rotated by the torque limiter. Rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding protrusions 831b, when the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 becomes large, and the torque limiter 866 is increased. Inevitably, the allowable value of the load transmission is increased, and it is easy to prevent the torque limiter 866 from being downsized.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the supporting locations between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation are only the front end contacting the sliding member 825 and the rear end supporting the central annular gear 864. , Other parts are configured to leave a gap. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered that a stopper for suppressing the forward displacement with respect to the central annular gear 864 is necessary. The sliding member 825 fulfills the function of this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has its plate front face in front of and behind the short diameter annular part 822 a of the circular plate part 822. Contact.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at the outermost diameter portion. The ridge portion 822b that is provided on the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the protruding portion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the contact area as compared with the case where the entire rear surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. You can Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotation direction can be reduced.

Since the fastening screw is not used between the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotary member 830 that is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw is increased is reduced accordingly. You can

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In explaining the fixing, FIGS. 62 and 63 are referred to as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 with the female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first covering portion 875. After the first covering portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by being screwed in, the protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is attached. It can be performed by entering the groove 833d (slidably fitted to the outside) and screwing the fastening screw inserted in the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 with the female screw of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885. After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by being screwed into, the protruding portion 883 that projects from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is formed. It can be performed by entering the groove 833d (outer slidably fitted) and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 are associated with the linear displacement or the rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured for linear displacement or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the projecting portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, so that the skeleton portions 871 and 881 are arranged on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) Is defined, and the skeleton portions 871 and 881 can be prevented from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

Further, since the skeletons 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 (the arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined and the rotating member 834 is rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 834 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the assembly of the rotary member 834 to the linear motion member 833, the skeleton portions 871 and 881 in which the portion that defines the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 is fixed to the rotary member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotation member 834 itself, the number of assembling and disassembling steps can be reduced.

That is, for example, at the time of disassembling, by removing the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the skeletons 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, it is possible to cancel the regulation of the arrangement of the skeletons 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833. Not only that, the regulation of the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. As a result, working efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of the operation units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70(a) to 70(d), and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d), an operation unit 500 schematically illustrating a combined operation example of the operation units 600 to 800 in a time series. FIG. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

70 and 71, the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800. The decoration in Fig. 3 is schematically illustrated so that it can be identified by characters or the like.

That is, the characters "Normal" are written vertically on the first rendering surface 661a, the characters "Activate" are written horizontally on the second rendering surface 661b, and in the longitudinal direction on the third rendering surface 661c. The symbols "!" are shown along the respective lines.

In addition, the characters "opened" are displayed on the first main decorative surface 787a1, the characters "pinch is a chance" on the first secondary decorative surface 787a2, and "attack" on the second main decorative surface 787b1. And the characters “Patience!?” are respectively illustrated on the second sub-decoration surface 787b2.

In addition, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 includes five “○”. The “” symbol is shown.

In FIG. 70(a), the respective operation units 600 to 800 are arranged in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). In addition, above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decoration surface 787a2 as a surface which is invisible from the front view but is visible from the player's eyes is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 70B, the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state.

By performing the integrated rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged in the vicinity of the second operation unit 700 can be sequentially replaced. In addition, by continuing the integrated rotation operation or after stopping the first operation unit 600, the third effect surface 661c is projected to the inside of the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800. The movement can be lively.

For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so as to increase the jackpot expectation of the lottery, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600. it can.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decoration surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 arranged in the vicinity of the second operation unit 700. And can be visually recognized integrally.

As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the first decorative member 870 arranged in the vicinity of the second operation unit 700, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 is the third symbol display device. By returning the third operation unit 800 to the production standby state while starting at 81, the line of sight of the player can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged in the vicinity of the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged so that the first decoration member 870 can be irradiated with light, an LED that emits the light LD1 toward the first decoration member 870 side to be noticed. By turning on and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to focus on any first decoration member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched in a state where the integrated rotating operation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integrated rotating operation of the first decorative member 870. ..

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotation direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. The player may visually recognize it as if he or she is doing it. Further, the LED to be turned on is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 sequentially reaches the position where the light is emitted from the LED by the integral rotation operation, so that the first decoration to which the light is emitted is applied. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), both the second decoration rotating member 660 and the decoration fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 are provided with the vertically formed decoration and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface that faces the diagonal direction, like the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, so that the effect of being integrally recognized is enhanced.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 71A, in addition to the displacement of the lower end portion of the second decorative rotation member 660 away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. Since the second decorative rotation member 660 of the unit 600 is a laterally formed decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operation unit 700 having a laterally formed decoration as well. Can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

In FIG. 35, the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown, but as shown in FIG. 71A, if the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the cover member 787 and The vertical distance between the second decoration rotating member 660 and the second decoration rotating member 660 can be further reduced, and the effect of being visually recognized as a unit can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decoration portion 652b is overhanging at a visually recognizable position, and the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized so as to be enlarged to the right of the region right end RE1. Even if the arrangement of the second effect surface 661b is closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from having a cramped impression.

Further, as a result, like the second main decoration surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be made visible to the player as if it is arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second main decoration surface 787b1. It is possible to enhance the effect of integrally visualizing the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b with the content related to the decoration of the second effect surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decoration surface 787b1 (first main decoration surface 787a1), It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are integrally viewed.

In FIG. 70(c) and FIG. 70(d), the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. The inversion operation of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70( d ), but in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 is on the left and right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operation unit 700. Since the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be executed.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the left and right sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are directed to the front side, it has been described above that the state having no distinguishing power can be obtained. In addition, the player may be able to identify the contents by combining different sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the content of "pinch!?", and pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operation unit 700 by stopping the driving of the second operation unit 700 in this state. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operation unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is out of order, control is performed so that the state of FIG. 70(d) is returned to that of FIG. 70(c), and the case where the lottery result is not yet notified or the lottery is a big hit In such a case, the player's line of sight can be gathered in the second motion unit 700 by performing control such that the reversal is continued from the state of FIG. 70(d) and the state shown in FIG. 71(a) is performed.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the projecting state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state. In addition, above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 which is invisible from the front but is visible from the player's eyes is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written in each of them are horizontally written, so that the player can see them integrally. Easy to make. In addition, the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of “attack activation”, and therefore, it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the production standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first operation unit 600 has the first production surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters written in each of them are written vertically. Because of this, it is easy for the player to visually recognize it. Further, since the contents are contents that make up a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize them integrally.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 are integrated with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). I am configuring. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) are different in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 because the third operation unit 800 performs the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is performed in, the player can visually recognize the state as one union state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in arrangement of the first decoration member 870. Thereby, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol change, and thus it is set so as to notify the hit/miss of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to avoid the player from predicting whether or not the jackpot is hit or not from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the final stage of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game of winning or losing the jackpot The expectation of the person can be maintained similarly. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be maintained in a high state.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 is capable of forming a case where the decoration is visually recognized alone and a case where the decoration is visually recognized integrally as a combination. Therefore, the decoration formed on each operation unit 600 to 800 is not designed to be completed only by each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration associated with each other among the operation units 600 to 800.

Whether or not the drive control of each operation unit 600 to 800 is executed is affected by the mutual arrangement. That is, if the operation units 600 to 800 are driven at improper timing, the member operations may collide and cause a failure. Therefore, the drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of other units. To be controlled.

For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the projecting state may be performed when the second operation unit 700 is in any state and the third operation unit 800 is determined to be in the production standby state. It

Regarding the change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state, the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary, the upper and lower arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation does not involve the switching rotation operation. If it is determined, it is controlled to be executed.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the projecting state may be performed in any state of the first operation unit 600, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

Regarding the change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrary, the upper and lower arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation does not involve the switching rotation operation. If it is determined, it is controlled to be executed.

In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation is performed, it is determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined to be the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state.

The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the projecting state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the production standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the production standby state. To be done.

As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not performed at an arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be performed after determining the arrangement of the members of other units.

Next, details of the distribution device 300 according to the first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that in the detailed description of the distribution device 300, FIGS. 1 to 25 are appropriately referred to. First, an example of decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 300. In FIG. 72, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 5, the front design member 162 is provided with a light-transmissive window portion 162d.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the front design member 162 disposed on the front side of the sorting apparatus 300, the front plate is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and the front side plate has a central region in a range closer to the peripheral region than the peripheral region. The window portion 162d is formed as a range having high light transmittance.

In the present embodiment, the light-transmissive seal member SL1 whose central region is cut out according to the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-rear thickness of the window portion 162d becomes thinner than the front-rear thickness of the area around which the seal member SL1 is attached, and the front design member 162 has a different degree of light transmission. Therefore, the light transmittance of the window portion 162d can be increased.

The window portion 162d has a first object to improve the visibility of the sorting device 300 in consideration of the fact that the line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162 when the player views the sorting device 300. The second purpose is to eliminate dissatisfaction from the player that the flow mode of the ball flowing down inside the sorting apparatus 300 cannot be grasped. That is, the window portion 162d is formed in a shape and a size that consider the shape of the distribution device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the peripheral area is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be arranged on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or a plurality of groove patterns may be formed so as to have the same function as the light guide plate, and the front design for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as an LED. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or a pattern may be directly drawn on the front design member 162, or an area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

Further, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various modes are illustrated. For example, it may be formed in a strip shape having the same vertical width and extending in the left-right direction, or a shape in which a portion extending outward in the left-right direction is omitted so that the left-right width is equal to the left-right width in the upwardly projecting range ( The shape may be a pentagonal shape like a home base) or a shape along the shape of the front plate edge portion of the front design member 162.

Further, although the window portion 162d is formed as a single range, the present invention is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the range of high light transmittance may be formed by a combination of a plurality of locations partitioned by a lattice-like portion or a ladder-like portion, or the range may be divided in a mode in which a plurality of small windows are aligned, The range may be partitioned in a manner in which the windows are randomly arranged. Further, the shape of the window may be variable.

The surface shape of the seal member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape obtained by texturing, a large number of groove shapes or ridges may be formed on the surface, or a smooth surface may be formed.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but it may be any mode as long as it can ensure higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the formation range of the seal member SL1), and the above-mentioned seal is used. In addition to the shape similar to the surface shape of the member SL1, various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 21, the front design member 162 is provided with a light transmitting window portion 162d.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and has a main window portion 162d1 that is short in the vertical direction and long in the left and right direction, and a sub-window formed continuously above the left and right central portions of the main window portion 162d1. And a portion 162d2.

In the present embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub window portion 162d2 are made of a colorless and transparent resin material and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed such that the outer edge shape in a front view is a sufficient shape for ensuring the visibility of the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are formed to have the same vertical width as the vertical width of the spherical passages, and the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined. In accordance with the above, it is formed in a V shape that inclines upward toward the left and right.

Accordingly, the sphere flowing down through the second flow path forming unit 335 and the third flow path forming unit 336 can be housed inside the main window portion 162d1 in a front view, and thus the second flow path forming unit 335 and the third flow path forming unit 335 can be housed. It is possible to improve the visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming unit 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right position as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 cannot be seen through the main window portion 162d1, and particularly the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is reduced.

As a result, the degree of freedom in design is improved in the shape design of the side wall portion 334a, as compared with the case where the player is designed to be visually recognized as in the case where a good-looking shape is required. can do.

The sub window portion 162d2 is designed such that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient for ensuring the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the seal member 313.

Thereby, in addition to the visibility of the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming section 336, the player can grasp the state of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow-down mode of the sphere. Since it can be configured to be easy, it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII of FIG. 16, and FIG. 75 is a cross section of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 73. It is a figure. In FIGS. 74 and 75, as a difference from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18, the front design member 162 is provided with a light transmissive window portion 162d.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the distribution device 300 is viewed in a downward direction (angled direction), a part of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the front side position is an opening/closing plate. It is visually recognized under 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protruding portion 376 is hidden behind the opening/closing plate 65b in the direction view of FIG. Therefore, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 as long as the upper protruding portion 376 is visible. can do.

The visibility toward the upper projecting portion 376 is also good because the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left and right outside as it goes to the front side. It is secured in.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 from jumping up, while the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to form the upper protruding portion 376. It avoids unnecessarily obstructing the view to.

In addition, the fact that the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface supplements the disadvantage that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it goes forward. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as the inclined surface as described above, it is possible to increase the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 in the downward direction view (angled direction view) as shown in FIG. While there is an advantage that it is easy to improve the effect of the effect of visually recognizing light through the light diffusion processed surface 314c, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 becomes large, so that the ball flowing down below the player's There is a disadvantage that the area hidden from view may be expanded.

In other words, the fact that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that descends toward the front is advantageous to the light production, but may be disadvantageous to the visibility of the falling ball. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left and right outer sides, so that the sphere enters from the second flow path forming section 335 to the third flow path forming section 336. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced at the location, and the visibility of the sphere flowing down below the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the distribution device 300 is viewed in a downward direction (angled direction), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub window 162d2. In order to visually recognize the state of the member 313, the player is forced to adjust the eye position and the line-of-sight angle so that the seal member 313 can be seen, which may hinder a comfortable game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting unit 351 that directs light to the seal member 313 passes through the seal member 313 and the sub window 162d2, and thus is emitted from the light emitting unit 351. Part of the light reaches the sub window 162d2 after passing through the seal member 313. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is turned on by looking at the sub window 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not light-diffused, the effect of stopping the progress of the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub window 162d2. As a result, when the light emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub window 162d2, so that the sub window 162d2 can be illuminated in red.

This makes it easier to understand the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window 162d2 before the light arrives, and thus the player can easily understand whether or not the light emitting means 351 is turned on. The seal member 313 (or the wall portion where the seal member 313 is provided) may be provided with light diffusion processing. In this case, the sealing member 313 can be made to easily emit light uniformly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap with a sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range in which the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be arranged.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a rides.

Further, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) obstructs the flow of the sphere, so that the falling range of the sphere is within the range of the front design member. It is moved to the left and right outside of the left and right width of 141. Therefore, the sphere flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 can be prevented from overlapping the straight line LL1.

Therefore, on the straight line LL1, a sphere flowing down the front side (for example, a game area) of the base plate 60, a sphere inserted in the specific winning opening 65a, a distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path forming unit 336). ) Is disposed, it is possible to avoid the situation where light is reflected and refracted by the sphere. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 can stably reach the sub-window 162d2 regardless of the flow direction of the sphere.

Note that the arrangement of the seal member 313 in the present embodiment may lead to a benefit to the player that the seal member 313 can be kept in a state in which it is difficult to see unless the player changes his or her eyes.

For example, in the configuration in which the seal member 313 is always in the field of view, the light enters the eyes of the player each time the light emitting unit 351 emits light, so that the player sees the light emitting unit 351 like the present embodiment, even though it feels dazzling. By arranging it with difficulty, it is possible to reduce the glare felt by the player.

Although the case where the light from the light emitting unit 351 reaches the sub window 162d2 has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light may be hard to reach the sub window 162d2 by forming a light diffusion process on the fixed member 161 in a range intersecting the straight line LL1.

In this case, unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 so that the seal member 313 can be directly seen, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 is turned on toward the seal member 313. You can Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not a ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a game preference, if the line of sight shown in FIG. 74 is maintained, the objective is achieved. Therefore, such a game burden on the player can be reduced.

In addition, although the case where the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed to have a smooth surface shape has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub window portion 162d2 may be subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion may be provided inside so as to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light reaching the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light visually recognized through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This allows the player to easily notice that the sub window 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 that directs light to the seal member 313, that is, the light emitted from the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1 among the LEDs that form the light emitting means 351 has been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, light emitted from a plurality of LEDs arranged at the left and right four positions at the bottom will be described.

76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, the lower member 380, and the detection sensor SE1 along the line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is shown in phantom lines.

In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the LEDs arranged on the left and right inside at the bottom are referred to as inner light emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the left and right outside at the bottom are referred to as outer light emitting means 351d. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processed surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emission effect is performed in which the light diffusion processed surface 332e formed in the range extending to the left and right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is a branch point BP1 where the flow of the sphere branches between the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long space left and right continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336). ) Run on the back side.

Therefore, when the sphere flows through the branch point BP1 when the inner light emitting means 351c is turned on, a portion where the sphere flowing on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e that emits light in the range extending to the left and right is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily understand how the ball flows by visually observing the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 75). Further, although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inward projecting portion 318, the light near the optical axis is arranged to pass through, and the projecting ends of the left and right inward projecting portion 318 are viewed in the front-back direction and the vertical direction. Is curved.

Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the inner light emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front-rear length projecting portion 317 and the left and right inner projecting portions 318, so that the light travels obliquely forward and downward. The light can reach the light diffusion processed surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

Since the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed on the entire lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14 ), the light reaches the light diffusion processed surface 340, and thus the third flow path structure is formed. The visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between the sphere flowing down inside the third flow path forming portion 336 and the out sphere passing through the out port 71 (see FIG. 75) and flowing down the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336. can do.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is outside (upper side) the light diffusion processed surface 332e and inside the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b. Will be placed. Therefore, when the light is emitted from the outer light emitting means 351d, a light emission effect in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated is executed.

This light emission effect is a branch point BP1 where the flow of the sphere branches between the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long space left and right continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336). ) Is performed on the upper side and the front side.

Therefore, when the sphere flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b emit light on the upper side and the front side of the branch point BP1 and flow through the branch point BP1. Since the sphere is hidden by the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it becomes difficult for the player to grasp how the sphere flowed through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed vertically, and the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed on the upper side thereof (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 in the front-rear direction, the light-diffusion processed surface 314c is not affected by the line of sight (see FIG. 74) at which the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is looked into from above. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 by light emission.

In addition, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed vertically, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is disposed below the light diffusion processed surface 333b. The light diffusion processed surface 340 is below the second flow path forming portion 335. It is formed up to the side and back surfaces (see FIG. 14). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the second flow path forming section 335 is caused to emit light, and when the ball flows down the second flow path forming section 335, the ball Creates a shadow by blocking the light (the light diffused by the light diffusion processing surface 340), so that the player can easily understand that the sphere is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is disposed on the front side of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 333b, a situation in which light is hidden by a sphere may occur. However, in the present embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction). ) Is arranged outside (upper side) of the range where the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), it is possible to avoid a situation where light is blocked by the sphere arranged at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, by irradiating the outer light emitting means 351d with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b can be illuminated brightly regardless of the flow-down mode of the sphere in the distribution device 300. When the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (see FIG. 17) arranged on the front side thereof blocks a light to generate a shadow. It becomes easy to understand the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming unit 335.

In this embodiment, as a device for avoiding a situation in which light is blocked by the sphere arranged at the branch point BP1, a configuration for smoothing the flow of the sphere is adopted. The configuration will be described.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position (see FIG. 20), the sphere that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down flows down directly and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In the state of being arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, the through hole edge portion 382a of the plate-shaped portion 382 supporting the left and right outer end portions of the slide displacement member 370 is the left and right outer sides of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when the slide displacement member 370 flows down. It is arranged so as to connect the edge portion and the left and right inner edge portions of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that descends and inclines toward the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the upper surface of the through hole edge portion 382a is configured to easily flow down to the outside in the left-right direction.

This facilitates avoiding a situation in which the sphere that has started to flow to the left and right outside along the inclination of the sphere guide portion 371b flows backward and bounces inward in the left and right direction after being bridged by the through hole edge portion 382a. The flow of the ball can be smoothed.

The light diffusion surface 319a is arranged inside the front-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which the sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusion processed surface 319a cannot occur, and therefore, the situation where the light is hidden by the sphere irrespective of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 319a does not occur. Hard to occur.

As described above, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only simply arranged left and right, but also on the front side thereof with the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b. By designing the light emitting means 351c, 351d by intentionally providing a difference in the positional relationship with the optical axis, and making the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b to which the light from the light emitting means 351c, 351d arrives different, The front and rear positions where the light reaches, is diffused and visually recognized can be changed.

In the above description, the case where the inner light emitting means 351c emits light and the case where the outer light emitting means 351d emits light are separately described, and the light emitting means 351c and 351d on the opposite side are turned off. The actual light emission control of each light emitting means 351c, 351d is not performed on one side at a time, but a control mode such as both lighting or both extinguishing may occur. Hereinafter, the light emission control pattern and how the internal flow path of the distribution device 300 is viewed at that time will be described.

77A to 77D are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the distribution device 300. 77(a) to 77(d), the streak as the shape line of the light diffusion processed surface is omitted for easy understanding, and the light emitting means 351c and 351d are turned on and off, respectively. The case where the combinations are different is illustrated, and a range that is brightly illuminated by the light from the light emitting units 351c and 351d is illustrated as a shaded pattern.

That is, in FIG. 77(a), both light emitting means 351c and 351d are both turned off, and in FIG. 77(b), the inner light emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light emitting means 351d is turned off. The internal lighting state is shown. In FIG. 77(c), the internal lighting means 351c is turned off and the external lighting means 351d is turned on. In FIG. 77(d), the lighting means 351c and 351d are turned on. Both lighting states that are both lit are shown.

In both lights off state, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the respective light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b are not illuminated, and the visibility on the back side thereof is secured, but the impression without sharpness is played. Give to others. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between a sphere flowing above the third flow path forming portion 336 and an out sphere flowing down the inner side (lower side) of the third flow path forming portion 336.

In the internal lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77( b ), the light diffusion processed surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path forming section 336 is illuminated, so that the sphere flowing above the third flow path forming section 336 is illuminated. The visibility is maintained high, and the visibility of the out ball flowing down the inner side (lower side) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is reduced.

Further, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the sphere at the branch point BP1 can be improved. In addition, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in a non-illuminated state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the branch point BP1 is blindfolded by light.

That is, in the internally lit state, the range from the third flow path forming portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight of the branch point BP1 through the front frame portion 333 also passes through the branch point. It is possible for the player to easily understand the flow-down mode of the ball in BP1. In addition, since the light is illuminated on the spots to be noticed in grasping the flow-down mode of the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player may miss the spots on the spot and reduce the game stress of the player. it can.

A light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed on the inner side surface of the front side frame-shaped portion 333 over the entire range (see FIG. 13), and it is difficult to visually recognize the back side through the front side frame-shaped portion 333 from the player's perspective. Is configured to be

When viewing the back through the front frame-shaped portion 333, in the front-back direction, the back is viewed through the two side surfaces, which are opposed to each other in the front and back, among the inner side surfaces of the front frame-shaped portion 333. Since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to visually recognize the back side.

In the same manner, the front side frame-shaped portion 333 is seen from the back side through the line of sight inclined from the left and right inner side to the diagonal left and right outer direction (the line of sight inclined from the front left and right center position toward the normal detection sensor SE12). It can be said for the player who does.

That is, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the inner side of the rectangular tubular shape, and on this inclined line of sight, the rear side surface of the front side frame-shaped portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (partition plate) The part 338 and the side surface that is arranged so as to face each other are arranged. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the back side because there are many plates that need to be seen through.

As described above, according to the front side frame-shaped portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front side frame-shaped portion 333 not only in the front-back direction view but also in the diagonal direction view.

In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(c), since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, the sphere that has flowed to the left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light. Visibility is reduced.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed on the inner side (lower side) of the second flow path forming portion 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 is improved. You can That is, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing in the front side is improved, which has the effect of improving the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is lowered.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b are illuminated in a wide range. The situation of being illuminated by light is a combination of an internal lighting state and an external lighting state, and both effects can occur, but they are not only assisted by an advantageous effect.

For example, since the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

Various modes are exemplified as the control mode related to the turning on and off of the light emitting means 351c and 351d. For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game in which a ball may enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), a control is performed to configure an internal lighting state so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1. However, in other round games, it may be controlled to be bright as a whole by configuring an external lighting state or a double lighting state.

Further, for example, regardless of the type of round game, the both lighting state and the both extinguishing state may be alternately switched.

Further, the timing of turning on the light emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to be turned on after the reach is upright while the symbols are changing, or it is detected that the ball has entered the winning openings 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67. Then, the light emitting means may be controlled to turn on the light sources 351c and 351d.

Returning to FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, a configuration for optimizing the flow of the sphere in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described again in detail. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper side surface of the extending portion 162b arranged on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that descends downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the open/close plate 65b is in the open state or in the closed state, a ball that is deflected to the left and right outside of the open/close plate 65b and is on the upper side surface of the extending portion 162b is left/right outside (open/close plate). Since it can be flown to the side opposite to the side where 65b is arranged), it is possible to prevent the ball on the extended portion 162b from flowing down through the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, since most of the balls flowing down to the out-port 71 can be set to the rolling-down mode in which the inner rail 61 rolls, occurrence of a situation where the ball bounces up (bounds high) near the out-port 71. It can be avoided. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path forming portion 336 arranged on the back side thereof from being hidden by the ball that has bounced up, thereby preventing the visibility from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the opened/closed state is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined downward toward the center of the left and right sides (the side of the partition plate 338).

Therefore, the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 becomes longer as the position approaches the left/right center side, so that the ball rolling on the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 are separated from each other. The sphere flowing toward the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily distinguished.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped so that the balls on the upper side surface can be poured into the specific winning opening 65a without leakage, but various geometrical measures are taken to prevent the flow of the balls from being delayed. Has been done.

For example, firstly, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion for contacting a ball flowing backward from the upper side surface of the left and right end portions of the opening/closing plate 65b and guiding the ball inward and leftward. .. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction, but is formed in a plate shape extending in the direction of descending and inclining inward in the left-right direction according to the vertical position displacement of the sphere flowing from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

That is, the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is arranged rearward toward the left and right inner side. The left and right inner side portions with which the spheres transferred to the receiving member 163 having a lower floor surface come in contact with each other extend in a direction inclining so that the position is on the lower side.

This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position (the contact height over the entire length of the ball) of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2, and guide the ball smoothly. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed from the relative relationship with the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that it can contact the ball at the center height position in the entire length of the ball. It

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end portion of the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b (rotation base end side portion) and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway. That is, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower at the left-right center position where the height position of the lower surface portion 163a is the highest, but the lower surface portion 163a is inclined downward as it goes to the left and right sides, and The pair of switching positions EP1 on the outer side in the direction is configured to be turned upside down.

In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has a property as a position for switching the flow-down mode of the sphere between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and the left and right inner side surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the partition plate portion 338). It is designed as a position on the same plane as the side face that is opposed to (the position directly above the front frame portion 333 in FIG. 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the vertical position of the rolling surface of the ball. On the other hand, rolling of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b may occur with low resistance.

For example, even if a ball that bounces backward near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b collides with (the inner rear surface of) the receiving member 163 and bounces forward again, after the ball bounces and starts rolling, It is possible to prevent the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening/closing plate 65b.

The ball rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 side does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts contacting the lower surface portion 163a, the ball moves to the left and right outside along the horizontal inclination of the lower surface portion 163a. Will be washed away.

It should be noted that it is unlikely that the ball falls near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) restricts the ball from falling, and therefore the ball does not bounce. I can say. However, ball bounce may occur due to collision between balls.

In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the range on the left and right outside of the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 (on the side where the ball passage hole 163b is arranged)), from the receiving member 163 due to the vertical position of the rolling surface of the ball. While rolling of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b is suppressed, rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 may occur with low resistance. For example, even if the ball rolling on the lower surface 163a has a forward speed due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the game machine, the ball is prevented from flowing backward to the opening/closing plate 65b. be able to.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 so that the backflow of the ball near the ball passing hole 163b is achieved. By avoiding the problem and making the ball flow down smoothly, the situation where the ball stays is avoided.

In addition, the rolling of the ball backward from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the ball flows to the left and right after the backward flow is completed, rather than the pair of switching positions EP1. The rolling mode is along an oblique straight line connecting the range between the space and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, the flow is not along a path that intersects at right angles, such as in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, but along a hypotenuse that connects the other ends of the front-rear direction straight line and the left-right direction straight line that are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere can be shortened (corresponding to the fact that the length of the hypotenuse is shorter than the total length of the other two sides in the right triangle).

Further, as compared with the case where the ball easily flows backward over the left and right positions of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball should easily flow forward in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 as in the present embodiment. Thus, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the flow of the balls is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the left and right outer range of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), but has a space in the front side in the left and right center side range of the pair of switching positions EP1. The upper surface portion 163f is formed in a plate shape that is inclined upward so as to leave a space.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device for reducing the possibility that the ball will be clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 due to the higher position of the lower surface portion 163a. The vertical width can be secured.

As a result, the ball is prevented from being clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and the ball is caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced while being closed. Can be avoided.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f has a direction extending in the left and right direction along a tilt angle of the second flow path forming portion 335 (a direction inclined by 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction), and rolls along the second flow path forming portion 335. It is arranged at a position (a position that is 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path forming portion 335) that comes into contact with the sphere at a central height position in the entire length of the sphere.

Accordingly, when the formation thickness of the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball comes into contact with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f at a position deviating from the center height of the ball. As a result, rolling of the ball can be made smoother than in the case where a load in the direction of lifting the ball or a load in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is generated on the ball from the symmetrical protruding portion 161f.

In addition, if the visibility of the branch point BP1 is allowed to decrease, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed to have a thickness of about the entire length of the sphere so that the symmetrical position at the position deviated from the center height of the sphere. It is possible to avoid the situation where the protruding portion 161f comes into contact with the ball.

Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described again in detail. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380. In FIG. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is transparently shown by an imaginary line, and the slide displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 is seen through.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1, but its front end portion does not contact the side surface of the discharge hole 337 which is also arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 78), The gap is maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a dimension short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This prevents the front end portion of the slide displacement member 370 from being scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337 while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11. can do.

Further, the front end portion of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed to be inclined such that the arrangement shifts rearward as it goes to the left and right outside. Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid that the sphere is sandwiched and retained between the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337.

That is, even when the sphere is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, since the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, Since the generated load has a directional component directed to the left and right outside, the sphere can be pushed out to the left and right outside. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the profit of the player can be changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 is required to have reproducibility (stability) and smoothness.

79A is a sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 79B is the middle member taken along the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 78. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380, and FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 78. Note that in the description of FIG. 79, FIGS. 13 and 14 are referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper projecting portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface located on the lower left and right sides, and a sphere flows along this inclination. obtain. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the sphere rolling on the inclined surface, the slide displacement member 370 is restrained from changing its posture such that the inclination of the inclined surface changes.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79A, in the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, not only the left and right end portions but also the lower protrusion portion 373 is supported by contacting with the plate portion 382 of the lower member 380. Accordingly, the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into the right and left by the recessed portion 372 can be supported under both sides (supported by both ends), and thus the change in the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. it can.

In other words, even if the loads applied from the balls to the pair of left and right ball guides 371b are different (even if the balls are out of balance), the respective ball guides 371b are supported by the left and right ends. Therefore, the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and the slide displacement member 370 to the left and right (the displacement in the rotation direction about the axis extending in the front-rear direction) can be suppressed.

Further, the edge portion of the recessed portion 372 has the partition plate portion 338 disposed on the upper side, so that the upward displacement is restricted. That is, it is possible to suppress the lifting operation of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction.

Accordingly, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily maintained in an appropriate state, the displacement resistance of the longitudinal displacement can be suppressed, and the malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion that is formed so as to project to the front side on the projecting base end side of the upper projecting portion 376, and the upper side surface on which the ball can roll is inclined so that it goes down to the left and right outside. Formed as a surface.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the ridge portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of hemispherical projecting portions 372a is projected from the recessed portion 372 toward the projecting strip portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the hemispherical projecting portion 372a and the projecting strip portion 372a. 383 is configured to make point contact.

Here, as described above, since the ball guide portion 371b is formed as an inclined surface in which the upper side surface on which the ball can roll is inclined in the left-right direction, the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is higher or lower. The slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the left-right direction (the direction intersecting the front-back direction, which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370) due to the direction component and the left-right direction component.

At this time, it is preferable that the lateral gap between the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 is small in the horizontal direction because the horizontal position of the ball guide portion 371b is easy to stabilize, but contact friction is likely to occur. , Functional problems may occur.

For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction while the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, the front-rear displacement becomes defective (for example, no displacement occurs). there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact between the hemispherical protrusion 372a and the protrusion 383 is point contact, it is possible to reduce the area in which the frictional force is generated and to reduce the contact friction. Can be kept small. Thereby, even when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be favorably displaced in the front-rear direction.

In particular, with respect to the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 from the state in which the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11. Since this is a displacement operation that switches the state to a different state, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player by executing this displacement operation satisfactorily.

In addition, by making the displacement speed of this displacement operation high, it is possible to generate the action of changing the rotation of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball that rides on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. FIG. 80(a) shows a state in which a ball is on the slide displacement member 370 at the front position, and FIG. 80(b) shows a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear position. In FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), an example of the rotation direction of the sphere is shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the rotation direction of the sphere that rolls backward and reaches the slide displacement member 370 is the forward rotation direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear position while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 to the ball. Operates so that the rotation direction (guide direction) of the sphere is the reverse direction (backward direction).

As a result, the rotation of the sphere can be suppressed, so that the sphere can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, and the sphere can be easily dropped right below. Therefore, when the slide displacing member 370 is driven while the sphere is on the slide displacing member 370, the sphere can easily flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The front-rear length projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 to the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the front-rear length projecting portion 317 is not limited to the function of guiding the sphere to the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and does not depend on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 disposed on the upstream side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is configured as a shape that can be properly guided.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position, the sphere contacting the front-rear length projecting portion 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curved line at the end of the front-rear length projecting portion 317 is formed into a substantially arc shape having a width in the front-rear direction that is longer than the width in the up-down direction (see FIG. 18 ), it is The downward component gives a larger load than the directional component. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sphere contacting the front-rear length projecting portion 317 bounces back and forth and flows back through the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the downward direction of the sphere depends on the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In the present embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward in the left and right directions, so that the sphere is guided to the outside in the left and right directions along this curve.

Here, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, when the ball flowing in the front-back direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with the momentum, the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward by the load at the time of the collision. Therefore, it is conceivable that the probability change sensor SE11 may be switched to a state in which the sphere can pass.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected to the lower side by abutting the front-rear length projecting portion 317 before the ball collides with the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Therefore, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly the downward direction, so that it is possible to easily avoid the situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

Further, since the load applied from the sphere in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 rearward becomes small, the biasing force (the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 at the front position is provided. The urging force of the return spring can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against the urging force can be reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position in a state where the ball is arranged at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the ball.

The left and right inward projecting portions 318 contact the ball on the front side of the front displacement end position of the upper projecting portion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed to the outer left and right downward direction. Further, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-rear length projecting portion 317. As a result, the velocity of the sphere in the front-rear direction is suppressed, so that the placement is stabilized by inertia due to its own weight, and it is possible to make the state in which the backflow of the sphere hardly occurs under the load applied from the slide displacement member 370.

Further, the contact between the ball and the upper projecting portion 376 occurs when the ball is lower than the height position where it contacts the front-rear long projecting portion 317, but the ball can contact the upper projecting portion 376. In the state in which the sphere is lowered (see FIG. 80(a)), the portion that comes into contact with the sphere is the sphere guide portion 371b, which is arranged at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper projecting portion 376, considerable energy is required to climb from the upper side surface of the ball guide portion 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a. , The degree of backflow of the ball can be lowered.

Further, the upper protruding portion 376 has an acute-angled front end on the partition plate portion 338 side, which is not a collision mode in which a flat surface collides head-on with the sphere in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper projecting portion 376 is large in the left-right direction and small in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the sphere contacting the upper projecting portion 376 can be smoothly flowed in the laterally outward direction, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position in the state where the sphere is arranged at the branch point BP1. In the case of the control mode to be performed, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a ball is caught between the upper projecting portion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and malfunction occurs.

78, 79(b) and 79(c) will be described again. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to project to the branch point BP1 side (front side), the slide displacement member 370 may be displaced in the forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width length of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper protruding portion 376, that is, the portion where the upper and lower protruding portions 374 are formed on the left and right sides in the front-rear direction, is It is configured to be sufficiently secured and can come into contact with the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 over the front-rear width. As a result, tilt displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper and lower protrusions 374 are formed to be long in the front-rear direction, when the load that tilts and displaces the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction is applied, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 is one point. You can avoid focusing on. Accordingly, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be increased).

Further, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter, also referred to as projecting portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is The partition plate portion 338 comes into contact with the rear side surface.

In other words, in the slide displacement member 370, the front side position is set as the position where the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. For this purpose, a light diffusion processed surface is not formed on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, and a flat surface is formed so as to be opposed to the projecting portion 378a so as to be able to contact each other. This makes it possible to stabilize the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is generated by the front meat portion of the protruding portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the.

In this way, since the position to which the driving force is transmitted is the left and right center portion of the slide displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily prevent the slide displacement member 370 from being deviated in the rotational direction about the vertical axis when it is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 by the surface, so that the attitude of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotation direction about the vertical axis. ..

Here, when the attitude of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained or returned by the contact between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical projecting portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical projecting portion 372a. Is small, the load is locally applied, and the durability of the hemispherical projection 372a may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the front stage in which the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 by the surface, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. Even if there is a problem, due to the transmission of the driving force, it is possible to eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the process in which the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, so that the proper displacement can be achieved. It can be corrected to the posture.

The partition plate portion 338 with respect to the projecting portion 378a functions not only for aligning the slide displacement member 370 by abutting at the time of displacement in the front-rear direction, but also as a portion for receiving a load in the forward tilt direction given to the slide displacement member 370. Have.

That is, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b causes a load in a direction in which the slide displacement member 370 changes its posture in the forward tilt direction, When the protruding portion 378a is displaced (displaced in the forward tilt direction) within the clearance allowed by the displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, a resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the protruding portion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, so that the displacement of the protruding portion 378a is suppressed, so that the posture change of the slide displacement member 370 is suppressed. can do.

Next, the details of the operation units 600, 700 and 800, which have not been fully described, will be described again. First, as a detailed description of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81(c) is an arrow LXXXIc direction of FIG. 81(a). It is a side view of the rotation member 620 in a view.

82 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. 82 and 83 show a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetrical shape in consideration of the load applied to the rotating member 620 when the operation is performed. Hereinafter, the details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described.

The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c are formed in order from the tubular portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is a surface on a base end side protruding portion 617a protruding from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed so that it can come into contact (the shape is designed in relation to the base end side protruding portion 617a). By restricting the displacement of the first side surface 621a to the base end side protruding portion 617a, the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range). ).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising and displacing side of the rotating member 620, and a surface of the second side surface 621b abuts on a tip side protruding portion 617b protruding from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the tip-side protruding portion 617b). By restricting the displacement of the second side surface 621b to the tip side protruding portion 617b, the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range). ..

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and a surface of the third side surface 621c abuts a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a box shape of a substantially rectangular outer shape on the front side of the front lid member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). By restricting the displacement of the third side surface 621c by the rectangular box portion 618, the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

As described above, at the end of the displacement of the rotating member 620, the side surfaces 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 come into contact with the corresponding portions of the front lid member 612, and the displacement is restricted. In particular, a plurality of contact points are formed at the end of the displacement of the rotating member 620 on the rising side.

As described above, for the purpose of forming a plurality of contact points, the load in the rotation direction received at the time of contact is distributed at a plurality of points, and the load in the front-rear direction that can occur in the rotation member 620 is distributed at a plurality of points. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

The load in the front-rear direction that may be generated on the rotating member 620 includes, for example, the load in the forward tilt direction due to the weight of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the twist due to the inertia when the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 is stopped. The load in the direction (the load in the rotation direction about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620) is exemplified.

In particular, the load in the forward leaning direction is a load in the forward tilting direction with the tubular portion 622 as a fulcrum, so by considering the moment of force, the further the contact position receiving the load is from the tubular portion 622, The load generated at the contact position is small. The second side face 621b and the third side face 621c are formed at positions separated from the tubular portion 622, with the sole purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 is a range including the recessed portion 621d which is recessed in the direction of retracting from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and the recessed portion 621d. And a thickened portion 621e that is thickened to include a range that comes into contact with the base end side protruding portion 617a as a rotating portion around the tubular portion 622.

Since the rotation base end side of the rotation member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the recessed portion 621d, breakage due to impact load may occur without any measures, but the thickened portion 621e. By forming the, it is possible to cancel the influence of the recessed portion 621d on the strength surface. Thereby, breakage of the rotating member 620 can be easily avoided.

Further, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion capable of contacting the base end side protruding portion 617a, a shock load that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base end side protruding portion 617a. It is possible to improve the durability of the rotating member 620 against.

84 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. 84 and 85, a state in which the widthwise end of the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 is illustrated.

The extended portion 634b is formed with a width length (circumferential length) that is three times or more as long as the width length of the detection sensor KS1 as viewed from the rear. Here, forming the width of the extended portion 634b to be sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of use for detection.

That is, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating front end of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotation member 660 is arranged on the front side of the supported member 640. Where the rotating member 620 may be applied with a load in the forward tilt direction, the rotating member 620 may be flexibly deformed in the front-rear direction and a malfunction may occur without any countermeasure.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, by forming the extended portion 634b facing the back surface of the fixed means 610 in a wide shape, A load applied to the fixed means 610 from the extending portion 634b through the portion 634a in the forward tilt direction of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angle range of the arcuate hole 613d (the area where the load is generated is large. Can be secured). As a result, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 while avoiding damage to the extending portion 634b.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain a structurally advantageous effect by ensuring a long width of the extension portion 634b, while the end portion of the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Even in the control mode in which the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped in the closed state (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia. The structure is devised to reach it.

For example, firstly, the inertial force of each member is generated in the direction in which the rotating member 620 is displaced to the terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement in which the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 are rotated clockwise in the rear view about the axis O1. Occurs in the direction in which the rotating member 620 is displaced to the terminal position on the initial position side (the direction in which the rotating member 620 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front side rotation member 652 arranged so as to integrally operate with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a forming the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644 (the present embodiment). Then, the same as the center of the overhanging decoration portion 652b) is arranged at a position left and right apart from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear tooth 654a.

Therefore, the own weight of the front rotation member 652 is generated in the direction in which the gear teeth 654a are rotated. In the present embodiment, the gear teeth 654a receive a load in the direction to rotate counterclockwise in rear view due to the weight of the front rotation member 652.

By transmitting this load in order to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625, a load in the counterclockwise direction of the rear view is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear tooth portion 625. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotary displacement of the rotary member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotary member 652 is generated in the direction in which the rotary member 620 is displaced to the end position on the initial position side.

As described above, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the load for rotating the rotating member 620 even after the drive motor 631 is de-energized. Configured to occur.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, the extending portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, and the drive motor 631 is energized in a state where the rotating member 620 has not reached the displacement end position. Even if the cutting is controlled to be cut, the turning displacement of the turning member 620 is continued by the above-mentioned load, and the turning member 620 can reach the displacement end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side.

86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 show the guide elongated hole 616, the dish-shaped lid C2, the detection sensor KS1, and the extended portion of the transmission gear cam 634. FIG. 6B is a rear view of 634b.

In FIGS. 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88, the rotation operation of the transmission gear cam 634 started from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is time-series. It is illustrated by.

86(a) corresponds to the production standby state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87(a) shows the first operation. 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the projecting state of the first operation unit 600.

The arrangement of the electric wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 will be described. An electrical wiring 618d whose end is fixed to a connector 618c provided on a substrate housed in the rectangular box portion 618 is provided so as to enter the second decorative rotation member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electric wiring 618d is arranged so as to bypass the lower side of the partition portion 619 formed to project from the front lid member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b has a length that takes into consideration the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged so as to bend under its own weight between the connector 618c and the opening C2a.

The partition portion 619 includes a columnar portion 619a formed at both upper and lower ends, and a plate-shaped portion 619b protruding in a long plate shape so as to connect the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619a and the plate upper portion 619b contact the front side surface of the base member 611.

A female screw is formed inside the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw passing through an opening formed in the base member 611 at a position corresponding to the columnar portion 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front lid. The member 612 is fastened and fixed. That is, the partition portion 619 can have an effect of not only restricting the arrangement position of the electric wiring 618d but also an effect of ensuring the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front lid member 612.

Next, attention is paid to the movement of the opening C2a in particular, and a device for the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d will be described. First, an explanation will be given focusing on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that starts from FIG. 86(a). The dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced downward in the time series of FIGS. 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88.

In the operation from the production standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state in which the widthwise end of the extending portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the dish-shaped lid is used. While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change significantly, the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starts full-scale downward displacement, the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d near the opening C2a can be moved away from the partition portion 619, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced downward. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring 618d from being sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 during the process.

In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a is oriented so as to face the side (lower side) for retracting the electric wiring 618d from the partition portion 619. ing.

This can prevent the electric wire 618d from being sandwiched between the partition portion 619 and the electric wire 618d is broken even if the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is designed to be arranged close to the partition portion 619. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of such problems.

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotationally displaced counterclockwise as viewed from the rear during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electric wiring 618d is intentionally slackened downward. Thereby, while ensuring the length of the electric wiring 618d, it is possible to avoid unnecessary slack in the electric wiring at the displacement end position (for example, fluttering due to slack in the front-back direction).

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to a length that does not come into contact with the extending portion 634b during the operation of the first operation unit 600. Accordingly, even if a partition is not provided between the extended portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the electrical wiring 618d contacts the extended portion 634b and receives a load.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the dish-shaped lid C2 comes closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extended portion 634b is arranged apart from the connector 618c (the connector 618c with the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as a reference). Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the electric wire 618d, it is possible to secure a large range for arranging the electric wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, and thus to improve the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electric wiring 618d. be able to.

Next, the description will focus on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that starts from FIG. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87(b), 87(a), 86(b), and 86(a).

In the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition portion 619 side from the lower displacement position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid portion C2 comes closest to the partition portion 619. Looking at As a result, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while ensuring the downward slack of the electrical wiring 618d.

The direction of the opening C2a is downward while the dish-shaped lid C2 has passed through the lower end of the partition 619 and is gradually rotated (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is located in the partition 619). The state of being arranged along the longitudinal direction) is maintained (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, with the dish-shaped lid portion C2 sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a posture in which the opening C2a faces the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is It is arranged so as to enter (is housed) between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2.

Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the electric wire 618d is sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 to cause a disconnection, and the electric wiring 618d is moved along with the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the.

In other words, the placement of the electrical wiring 618d is limited by changing the placement of the opening C2a in accordance with the placement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, and the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 are provided. Since the electric wiring 618d is prevented from being arranged between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 when the distance between the electric wiring 618d is narrowed, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed.

Therefore, compared to the case where the electric wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be arranged closer to each other, so that the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are arranged. The degree of freedom of can be improved.

Further, the limitation of the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d is realized not by using another member such as a binding band but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used to fasten and fix the first decorative rotation member 650 to the main body member 651, and also serves to limit the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d.

Thereby, a dedicated member for bundling the electric wiring 618d such as a binding band can be eliminated. Further, unlike the binding band, since the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electric wiring 618d can be arranged on an appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the electric wiring 618d is stretched or bent. It is possible to easily avoid the situation.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening having a central angle of about 110. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the shape adopted as the portion (connection terminal or the like) of the electric wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electric wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be described. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotation member 650 and the second decorative rotation member 660.

In FIG. 89, only the parts necessary for the description are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decoration rotation member 650, the electric decoration substrate 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decoration rotation member 660 are illustrated in solid lines, and a box is included for easy understanding. The member 661 is shown by an imaginary line so that the inside can be visually recognized.

In addition, FIG. 89 illustrates an example of the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d, and illustrates a dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electric wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618d is divided into a wiring connected to the terminal of the decorative board 653 (see FIG. 41) and a wiring connected to the terminal of the decorative board 662 between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. This is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disc-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameters of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and is formed in a long hole shape through which the electric wiring 618d can be inserted. And a pair of insertion holes 663b formed as through holes into which fastening screws can be inserted, on both sides of the insertion hole 663a.

Since the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 (see FIG. 39) from dropping from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This can be prevented by the wiring retaining plate 663.

The fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring fastening plate 663 are screwed into the female screws formed on the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As described above, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the axially right-angled rotating member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition to this, the wiring retaining plate 663 has a function of temporarily retaining the electric wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the inside of the wiring insertion long hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663 and is tentatively held in a mode in which the displacement is suppressed by being sandwiched. In the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the second decorative rotation member 660 is not an operation of one rotation or more, but a rotation operation of less than half a rotation (a rotation operation of about 135 degrees) is a rotation operation performed in the reciprocating direction. Therefore, the second decorative rotation member 660 is configured to rotate a plurality of times and the electric wiring 618d is not completely twisted.

It is considered that the load (load in the twisting direction) applied to the electric wiring 618d when the second decorative rotation member 660 is rotated is increased near the wiring insertion long hole 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in the present embodiment. Since the wiring insertion long hole 663a is formed in a long hole shape and the electric wiring 618d is temporarily held by being sandwiched by the wiring insertion long hole 663a, displacement of the electric wiring 618d within the long hole shape is allowed. ing.

Therefore, even if the electric wire 618d is overloaded in the twisting direction, the load can be released by displacing the electric wire 618d in the wire insertion long hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotating operation of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 has the main body member 651 of the main body member 651. Twisting in the direction of rotation occurs. That is, a twist in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear occurs due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction.

Since the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced counterclockwise as viewed from the rear along with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d by the twisting ( The durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is rotated while being displaced in the vertical direction along the guide elongated hole 616. Here, in the time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state where the slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is large to a state where the slack is small.

Correspondingly, the rotating operation of the decorative board 662 changes from the state (see FIG. 89) in which the terminal of the electric wiring 618d on the decorative board 662 side is arranged on the back side (the main body member 651 side). It is configured as an operation for changing the state to the state of being arranged on the front side (the wiring receiving member 655 side). Therefore, it is possible to change the state of pulling the electric wiring 618d to the front side.

That is, in the time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electric wiring 618d is in a state in which the electric wiring 618d has a large slack inside the main body member 651 (in which the terminals on the side of the decorative substrate 662 are arranged on the back side). ) To a state where the slack is small (the terminal on the side of the decorative substrate 662 is arranged on the front side).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relation of the slack is reversed (balanced) between the relation between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relation inside the main body member 651. As a result, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be described. To do.

In the time-series operation shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, while the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 are connected. The electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged therebetween is twisted in the rotation direction of the decorative board 662 (counterclockwise in a bottom view in FIG. 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the decorative board 662 side)). That is, they are twisted in opposite directions.

In the present embodiment, it is designed to minimize the twist of the electric wire 618d in the production standby state of the first operation unit 600, and to maximize the twist of the electric wire 618d in the projecting state. There is.

As a result, even if the electric wire 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is largely loosened, the electric wire 618d is intentionally loosened in a state where a problem is unlikely to occur (standby standby state, see FIG. 86(a)). In the state where it is preferable to reduce the generated load and to reduce the slack of the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (the projecting state, see FIG. 88), the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the power receiving member 655 are provided. It is possible to maximize the twist due to the rotation operation of the decorative substrate 662 and suppress the loosening of the electric wiring 618d (suppress the displacement of the electric wiring 618d).

As described above, as a means for improving the durability of the electric wiring 618d, a state in which the twist is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which the slack is reduced by the twist and the surrounding member (for example, the extending portion 634b) is electrically connected The state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d is switched.

As another embodiment, in the time-series operation shown in FIGS. 86A to 88, the rotation direction of the decorative board 662 is reversed (from the bottom view in FIG. 89 (from the decorative board 662 side to the insertion hole 663b. May be configured clockwise). In this case, since the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d due to the rotation operation of the decorative board 662 are the same, the twisting of the electric wiring 618d is performed. The deformation can be offset.

Next, characteristics of the overhanging decoration portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. 90(a), FIG. 90(b), FIG. 91(a), FIG. 91(b) and FIG. 92 are front views that schematically show the guide elongated hole 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the overhanging decoration portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

In FIG. 90(a), FIG. 90(b), FIG. 91(a), FIG. 91(b), and FIG. 92, the outer shapes of the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are schematically illustrated, which facilitates understanding. Therefore, in the state where the gear teeth 652a of the front side rotation member 652 are omitted, the displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b from the production standby state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 90(a), an arrangement corresponding to the effect standby state (see FIG. 40) of the first operation unit 600 is shown, and in FIG. 90(b), the widthwise end of the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is shown. The arrangement corresponding to the state (see FIG. 84) arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 91(a), the arrangement corresponding to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 43) of the first operation unit 600 is shown. 91(b), an arrangement corresponding to a state (see FIG. 82) in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 which is displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range is shown, and in FIG. , The arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 45) is illustrated.

In the production standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decoration portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 in a top view. This allows the overhanging decoration portion 652b to be arranged outside the player's field of view (see FIG. 28). Further, in the present embodiment, since the overhanging decoration portion 652b is disposed behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the production standby state, the outer edge member 73 easily blocks the line of sight, and thus the overhanging decoration portion 652b. Visibility can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the projecting decoration part 652b is displaced downward while the projecting decoration part 652b is arranged close to the right so that the projecting decoration part 652b overlaps with the rectangular box part 618 in a top view, the projecting decoration part 652b and the rectangular projecting part 652b are displaced. This causes a collision with the shaped box portion 618 and causes a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decoration portion 652b is changed prior to the downward movement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b or with the downward displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b ( 90(b) and 91(a)). This change in posture occurs as a rotational movement in a direction of retracting from the rectangular box portion 618 (obliquely upper left direction when viewed from the front, a rotation direction around the axis O1), so that the projecting decoration portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 are It is possible to easily avoid the collision.

In the present embodiment, due to this change in posture, the overhanging decoration portion 652b retreats from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91(a)), and then the full-scale dish-like lid portion C2 and overhanging decoration. The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

The downward displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b occurs along with the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the direction in which the axis O1 approaches the rectangular box portion 618 along the shape of the elongated guide hole 616 (rightward) ) (See FIG. 91(b)), the protruding decoration portion 652b may collide with the rectangular box portion 618.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a recessed portion 618a that is recessed and formed along the shape of the elongated guide hole 616 on the left side surface. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is recessed and formed at a position where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at the right side position of the right end portion of the guide elongated hole 616. As described above, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered for the purpose of avoiding a collision between the front rotation member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, since the posture of the overhanging decoration portion 652b continues to change with the downward displacement of the axis O1, the overhanging decoration portion 652b can be displaced in the direction of retracting from the rectangular box portion 618. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) of the overhanging decoration portion 652b to the left is the displacement dimension XR1 to the right of the axis O1. Designed to be greater than or equal to (equal or excess). Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the collision between the overhanging decoration portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618.

In the state shown in FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement associated with the posture change of the overhanging decoration portion 652b are opposite in the left-right direction and thus cancel each other. The lateral displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b was suppressed to be small.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIGS. 91(b) to 92, the displacement in the left/right direction of the axis O1 and the displacement in the left/right direction due to the posture change of the overhanging decoration portion 652b are in the same direction in the left/right direction. By superimposing them on each other, the lateral displacement amount of the overhanging decoration portion 652b increases.

As a result, although the protruding decoration portion 652b is always rotated about the axis O1 as the posture change of the protruding decoration portion 652b, the player can see the protruding decoration portion 652b from FIG. 90(a). Up to FIG. 91(b), it is displaced vertically with a small horizontal displacement (a narrow displacement locus), and from FIG. 91(b) to FIG. 92, it is guided so as to be largely displaced in the left/right direction. I can show you.

Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) for guiding the displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b seen by the player. As a result, an unexpected effect can be executed.

That is, the displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b can be shown to the player as if the overhanging decoration portion 652b jumps out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left side. Therefore, it is possible to show a surprising displacement to the left and right of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30) in the range where the width is narrow and the displacement in the left and right directions cannot be sufficiently secured, which is unexpected. Therefore, the attention to the overhanging decoration portion 652b can be improved.

Although the horizontal displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b are compared for convenience, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a rotation axis that is a part of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the horizontal displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis and the horizontal displacement of the axis O1. The meaning is the same. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b.

93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. In FIG. 93, a cross-sectional view in a plane through which the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotation member 654 is arranged on the bottomed tubular portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged on the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and an opening 645a is formed and communicated. The gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh with each other at a position.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameters of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the wiring clamp plate 663 can regulate the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657.

In the present embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 forms a slight gap between the wiring fastening plate 663 and the stepped portion formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93). It is placed vacant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and stabilize the arrangement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the central axis direction of the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring fastening plate 663 are screwed into the female screws formed on the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As shown in FIG. 93, since the arrangement of the overhanging decoration portion 652b is on the rear side as compared with the second decoration rotation member 660, the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the second decoration rotation member 660. (See FIG. 2) and are arranged close to each other in the front-back direction. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in the front-rear direction.

As a result, as compared with the case where the third symbol display device 81 and the projecting decoration part 652b are arranged apart from each other, the projecting decoration part 652b is overlapped with the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third pattern display device 81. Are arranged (see FIG. 29), and it is possible to facilitate the effect of making the player see (illusion) that the display area is enlarged to the right.

In particular, when the projecting decoration portion 652b and the second decoration rotation member 660 are visually recognized at the same time (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decoration rotation member 660 is arranged away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the front side. And, since it is easy to visually recognize independently of the display of the third symbol display device, conversely, the overhanging decoration portion 652b which is arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 from the front side is used as a part of the display. It is possible to emphasize the effect of showing (illusion) to.

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotation member 660), determination of other configurations (corresponding to the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the projecting decoration portion 652b). The degree is low. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the overhanging decoration portion 652b.

The overhanging decoration portion 652b is a portion formed of a hard resin and its shape cannot be changed in the middle, but the light emission mode (color or brightness) of the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the electric decoration substrate 653 is changed. It is possible to change the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhanging decoration portion 652b by controlling so as to change the (size, etc.).

Therefore, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the decorative board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81. The projecting decoration portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the area right end RE1 of the display area (see FIG. 29), and facilitates the effect of making the player see (illusion) that the display area is enlarged to the right. be able to.

Next, the details of the second operation unit 700 will be described again. 94 is a front view of the second operation unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 taken along the line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94.

In the second operation unit 700, as described above, in the slide displacement, the vertical displacement and the longitudinal displacement are synchronously generated (sliding displacement in the diagonally inclined longitudinal direction). The displacement is designed to occur smoothly so that the displacement is not noticeable.

For example, in the slide displacement of the second operation unit 700, the obliquely tilted longitudinal displacement does not consist of a single displacement, but a combination of vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. It is configured.

That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal rod 702 at the left end so as to be displaced up and down in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal rod 702. At the left end, the left rear plate member 750 and the blind decorative member 768 are also arranged in front of and behind the lifting plate member 740 to prevent the lifting plate member 740 from freely moving in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the displacement direction of the lift plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

The right side of the lift plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720. The right end of the lift plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly fixed via the performance device 780 (the front upper inclined portions 714, 751). And the receiving inclined portion 762) (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end portion of the elevating plate member 740 from freely moving in the front-rear direction, and the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

The effect device 780 supported by the lift plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In this way, when realizing the slidable tilted slide displacement in the front-rear direction, the displacement guides of the elevating plate member 740 and the rendering device 780 as constituent members are configured separately in the gravity direction and the horizontal direction. Has been done.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily configure the displacement resistance to be kept low as compared with the configuration in which the guide is performed in the front-rear direction which is tilted obliquely.

The extended state of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a state in which control is possible so as to execute displacement (see FIG. 57) for switching the state of the covering member 787. That is, in the present embodiment, in other states of the overhang state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 33)) The second operation unit 700 is controlled so that the displacement for switching the state of the installation member 787 does not occur.

By controlling in this way, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are placed at the positions overlapping with the left and right positions reached by the left and right end portions of the covering member 787 when performing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787. Even when the cover member 787 is arranged, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

The devise of the configuration of the rendering device 780 with respect to the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force of the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the effect device 780 (the center of the insertion tubular portion 773 inserted into the cylindrical portion 744). The position where the center is located directly above) is arranged.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the posture of the rendering device 780 from tilting to the left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, and to stabilize the left-right balance of the driving force generated from the drive motor 782.

Further, in the projecting state of the second operation unit 700 capable of executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 95 ), the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 supporting the elevating plate member 740. The left and right position of is the same as the left and right center position of the rendering device 780 or the right side position.

As described above, the right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is supported only by the rotating arm member 720 that allows the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 as the support position to be displaced in the left-right direction, but particularly the arrangement of the rendering device 780. When it is assumed that the position of the covering member 787 is easily changed, that is, when the displacement of switching the state of the covering member 787 is performed, the arrangement of the cylindrical fastening target portion 724 is set to the same as the left-right center position of the rendering device 780 or to the right position. By setting, it is possible to stabilize the arrangement and posture of the rendering device 780.

Note that the control for executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 is switched, It is possible to control the state of the two-action unit 700 to be changed to a production standby state or an intermediate production state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and to set the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is temporarily stretched. As the output state, the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is executed, and then the second operation unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed to be long in the left-right direction so as to overlap the inner end portion of the pair of front-side support members 760 in the front-back direction. As a result, the rotary cylinder 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden so as not to be seen by the player, so that the player can understand the arrangement and shape of the rotary cylinder 774e. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player recognizes that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Further, the light diffusing member 778b is visually recognized as overlapping with the fixed three-dimensional decoration portion 768a in the right and left rows in a front view when the second operation unit 700 is in an extended state (see FIG. 94). The light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a in this state are arranged along the lower edge portion of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, and are arranged along the left and right lengths of the lower edge portion.

Substrates to which LEDs are fixed are arranged on the front sides of the light diffusing members 778b and the three-dimensional decorations 768a, respectively, and the light diffusing members 778b and the three-dimensional decorations 768a are irradiated by the light emitted from the corresponding LEDs. Can be performed. By this light emission effect, the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is made to appear to be separated by light, or the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is lightened by light. Can be directed to.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has a function as a member for hiding the rotating tubular portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member for performing a light emission effect jointly with the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. It can be configured to have both.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally long member 742 is a cover that is provided behind the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a and is spaced apart from the light diffusion member 778b at the front side in a range (left side range) that is deviated from the rear side. An installation cover 742a is provided.

The covering cover 742a is a member for blinding that is formed over the vertical width of the laterally long member 742, and is arranged so as to allow electrical wiring to pass through in a gap between the covering member 742a and the laterally long member 742. That is, electric wiring for energizing the rendering device 780 is guided from the rear of the blindfold decorative member 768 to the rendering device 780 side through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontally long member 742, and the drive motor 782. Also, it is connected to the electric decoration substrate 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

At this time, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged in front of the electric wiring so as to be folded over each other. It can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, by arranging the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a, which are originally provided for light production, in front of the path of the electric wiring in order to function as a blind for the electric wiring, The size of the covering cover 742a required for blindfolding can be suppressed to the minimum size.

Since the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a has a fixed arrangement, it does not overlap with the horizontally long member 742 in the production standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33), so that the electric wiring cannot be hidden. Not available.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the formation range of the laterally long member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b in the front view. Accordingly, since the electric wiring can be hidden by the horizontally long member 742 and the light diffusing member 778, the electric wiring can be achieved regardless of the state of the second operation unit 700 (production standby state, intermediate production state, overhang state). Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. 96 shows a horizontal arrangement state of the vertical reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protruding portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and in FIG. 97, the vertical reversing member 781 is vertically inverted. (See FIG. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, and include a curve forming portion 783d that is formed by curving upward from the lower side surface of the upside-down member 781 in the laterally arranged state. The curve forming portion 783d is formed so as to project in a direction of retracting from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid a collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the drive gear 782a in the vertically arranged state of the upside-down member 781.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the up/down reversing effect device 770. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member is schematically shown in phantom lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member 787.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is arranged near the left and right ends, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly combine the covering members 787, but acts on the pair of covering members 787 independently.

Thereby, for example, when the operation of the one covering member 787 becomes defective, it is possible to avoid the operation of the other covering member 787 also becoming defective due to the malfunction.

Further, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 starts to be displaced in the left-right direction from each other, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the direction opposite to the left-right displacement. That is, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts when the vertical inversion member 781 starts the rotation operation from the upright vertical arrangement state.

This makes it possible to suppress a change in the load applied to the covering member 787 by the magnet Mg when the pair of covering members 787 starts to move away from each other in the left-right direction. Compared with the case where it is necessary to remove the attraction of the magnets, when the pair of covering members 787 starts to displace from each other in the left-right direction, the covering member 787 vibrates or the displacement is not caused due to a sudden change in magnetic force. It becomes stable and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a malfunction occurs.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on the left and right sides on the opposite sides, and this effect will be described. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, which is in contact with the magnet Mg and fixed with a metal screw to which a magnetic force is applied, is arranged on the same side in the front-rear direction (the front side in a vertical arrangement state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is upright, FIG. 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated on the magnet Mg in relation to the metal screw is the same in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides.

More specifically, for example, when the upside down member 781 changes from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)) to the inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)), the cover on the left side in front view is provided. Since the member 787 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the forward movement of the metal screw, which is arranged close to the magnet Mg (arranged on the upper side), in the forward direction as a reaction of the attractive force on the magnet Mg is accompanied by the forward displacement. While a load is generated, the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the backward direction, so that the magnet is moved in accordance with the forward displacement of the metal screw arranged in the vicinity of the magnet Mg (arranged on the lower side). A forward load is generated on Mg as a reaction of the adsorption force.

Further, for example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side in front view is shown. Rotates in the backward direction, a backward load as a reaction of the attractive force is applied to the magnet Mg due to the rearward displacement of the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (arranged on the upper side). On the other hand, since the cover member 787 on the right side in front view rotates in the forward rotation direction, the magnet Mg is moved to the magnet Mg with the rearward displacement of the metal screw arranged in proximity to the magnet Mg (arranged on the lower side). Causes a backward load as a reaction of the attraction force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the covering member 787 that rotates and the main body member 771 and the direct-acting plate member 784 that maintain the posture and support the covering member 787 is the left and right sides. At the same time, the front and rear directions are the same.

Here, in the case where a load is applied in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides (for example, by disposing the left magnet Mg at the lower position, the disposition of the left and right magnets Mg is set at the lower position, and the left shaft rotating member 785 is When the design of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is changed so that the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the magnet Mg and the metal screw move up and down due to a load generated when the metal screw is peeled from the attracted state. The mode of the displacement given to the reversing effect device 770 is a mode in which the ascent/descent reversing effect device 770 is rotated by the rotating shaft extending in the up-down direction.

In this case, the up-down reversing effect device 770 is likely to generate vibration in the rotation direction on the rotation shaft extending in the up-down direction. Particularly, as in the present embodiment, the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of peeling off the attraction of the magnet Mg, and the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c is used after the attraction of the magnet Mg is peeled off. In the configuration in which the cover member 787 is rotationally vigorously rotated, it is assumed that the up/down reversing effect device 770 is likely to generate vibration in the rotation direction on the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it becomes difficult to release the load from the up/down reversing effect device 770, and the up/down reversing effect device 770 may be damaged or the durability of the up/down reversing effect device 770 may be reduced. Therefore, for the purpose of stabilizing the displacement of the lifting/reversing effect production device 770 for a long period of time, it is considered necessary to take measures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state, the covering member 787 that rotates, the main body member 771 that maintains the posture and supports the covering member 787, and the direct member. Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 and the moving plate member 784 is the same in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, the up/down reversal effect is produced by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state. The mode of displacement given to the device 770 can be a mode in which the up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it can be easily offset by the displacement of the up/down reversing effect device 770 (displacement having the front-back direction component), and the up/down reversing effect device 770 is damaged by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state. Can be avoided.

In the second operation unit 700, the slide displacement direction of the rendering device 780 (the direction having the vertical component and the front-back component, that is, the direction in the plane orthogonal to the horizontal direction) and the covering member 787 are arranged close to each other. The displacement start direction (horizontal direction) from the state (vertical arrangement state of the upside-down reversing member 781) is orthogonal.

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid that one displacement is caused by the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when the slide displacement of the rendering device 780 is executed, it is easy to avoid the situation where the displacement (displacement in the direction away from each other) from the state where the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other is unintentionally started. be able to.

Next, the details of the third operation unit 800 will be described again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. FIG. 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), the middle arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion is switched at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is arranged to face the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and the base end side reinforcement portion 852a arranged to face the tip side rod portion 853. And a recessed portion 852b that is formed by thinning from the front side along the axial direction.

The base end side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened similarly to the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is reduced and the deformation resistance is increased. This prevents the deformation amount from becoming excessive even if it comes into contact with the tip side rod portion 853 formed on the rotation tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase. can do.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastically deforming the thickened portion 852. Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the middle arm member 850 can be improved.

A curved shape portion 852c, which is concavely formed in a curved shape, is formed on both side surfaces in the lateral direction of the thickened portion 852. The curved shape portion 852c can smoothly receive the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation proximal end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end portion of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 in the combined state. Formed from various shapes.

In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are adjacently arranged by rotating in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66A) and the one combined state. Since it is reversed, which side surface of the lateral direction of the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged close to the curved shape portion 854d depends on which united state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved shape portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved shape portion 854d can be smoothly received in any combined state. As a result, the state change to the combined state can be executed smoothly.

Further, the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d are designed so that they can come into contact with each other on the surface, so that an excessive load is locally applied between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

The third operation unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by the lifting arm member 801, but the direction of the lifting movement and the start of displacement of the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. The direction and the direction are not necessarily orthogonal to each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), since the virtual position lines 832F recognized as the displacement start directions of the rotating members 834 are set to different directions at 72 degree intervals, the displacement start directions of all the rotating members 834 are the same. , And the direction of the vertical displacement cannot cross at right angles.

Therefore, there is a possibility that a rotation operation (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) may occur unintentionally due to a load or inertia generated when the third operation unit 800 is displaced up and down. A device for countering this malfunction will be described.

FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operation unit 800 schematically showing the displacement between the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, among the virtual position lines 832F of the metal rod 832, the virtual position line 832F extending downward in the individual united state and the angle between the virtual position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are 0.5 degrees. An imaginary position line 832F rotated counterclockwise from the front until it changes is shown.

That is, in FIG. 100, the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the middle arm member 850 slides the rotating member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotating operation of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotating operation. It is configured so that

The amount of change in the angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which the bevel teeth portions 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) are rotated. ..

Here, a backlash (gap) is indispensable for erecting the meshing of gear teeth, and whether the responsiveness of rotation is good or bad changes depending on the size of the gap. Although various modes can be selected for the setting of the backlash, the backlash is set at 0.5 degree in the present embodiment.

That is, before the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is filled, and the meshing rotation is not started. On the other hand, the pivoting distal end side portion of the intermediate arm member 850 is slid outward along the virtual position line 832F in the radial direction of the third operation unit 800.

That is, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individual combined state) is started, the rotation operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and mainly the sliding movement along the metal rod 832 occurs.

FIG. 101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate. In FIG. 101, the third operation unit 800 in the one combined state is illustrated, and the torque limiter 866 and the magnet Mg2 that generate resistance to the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated.

Here, the rotation member 834 is configured so as not to rotate when the inner rotation member 830 slightly rotates with respect to the outer rotation member 840 (for example, about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)). ing.

Thus, as in the present embodiment, the magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decoration members 870 and the second decoration members 880, and the attraction force can be generated in the circumferential direction. Since the displacement of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 from the combined state can be limited to the linear movement displacement, the combination due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be easily maintained.

In other words, when the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 rotate about the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decoration member is in a direction orthogonal to the magnetic force direction. Since the 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, it is considered that the magnetic force is easily lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement at the start of the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is only displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (metal rod 832). The displacement in the sliding direction along) makes it easy to maintain the united state due to the magnetic force.

Accordingly, even when the inner rotation member 830 unintentionally slightly rotates (for example, rotates about 5 degrees) due to an unintentional load or the like, the plurality of first decoration members 870 and the second decoration members 870 and the second decorations are rotated. It is possible to easily maintain the united state of the members 880.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the torque limiter 866 rotates in the positive direction, the torque limiter 866 disconnects when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, and the switching rotation DR1 occurs so as to reduce resistance (idle). In the reverse rotation, the idling rotation AR1 is generated so that the resistance is reduced (idling). The torque limiter 866 is configured by a set of the reverse rotations.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the torque limiter 866 on the left side causes resistance until the applied load reaches a permissible value in the clockwise rotation when viewed from the front, and a switching rotation DR1 that idles when the load exceeds the permissible value. On the other hand, in the rotation direction counterclockwise in the front view, idling rotation AR1 of idling occurs.

Further, the torque limiter 866 on the right side is configured such that idling rotation AR1 of idling occurs in the clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the front, while the applied load becomes an allowable value in the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the front. A switching rotation DR1 is generated in which resistance is generated until reaching the limit, and idling occurs when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this way, the pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, so that the switching rotation operation can be performed in both directions as described above.

Further, in a state where a load exceeding the allowable value in the rotation direction does not occur, resistance in both the forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotation member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) assembled in the torque limiter 866. Thus, it is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to an unintended load (inertial force of up-and-down displacement or impact force when opening and closing the door). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the pair of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and is arranged concentrically in a state where the five second covering portions 885 are combined in an annular shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 which is adjacently arranged.

With this configuration, when the magnets Mg2 are arranged on both sides of the specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (that is, the second magnets adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 are disposed adjacent to each other on both sides). Both of the covering portions 885 are separated from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state as compared with the case where the biasing force in the direction approaching the specific second covering portion 885 is received from the magnet Mg2). It is possible to prevent the gap between the second covering portions 885 from increasing at the position and to make the gaps between all the adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

In addition, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement to the outside in the radial direction, and the combination due to the magnetic force does not occur until the rotation operation around the metal rod 832 is started. Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction of shortening the circumference of the concentric circles in which the second decorative members 880 are aligned (a direction toward the center of the concentric circles) when the magnets are separated to the extent of being released (see FIG. 100), It serves as a resistance against the sliding movement of the second decorative member 880 to the outside in the radial direction.

Further, since this resistance force is generated in the same magnitude from each direction obtained by dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, it is possible to balance the load received by the third operation unit 800 from the magnet Mg2. That is, as compared with the case where the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly, the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be easily stabilized.

The shape of the second decorative member 880 is the same for all five magnets, and the magnets Mg2 are also arranged in the same manner, so that the front and rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. With this, it is possible to prevent the second decorative member 880 from being subjected to a load having a front-back direction component due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, and therefore, the magnetic force at the start of displacement from the united state or immediately before reaching the united state. Can occur in the front-rear direction and the second decorative member 880 can easily be prevented from vibrating in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 102 is a front view of the outer rotation member 840 and the middle arm member 850. In FIG. 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individual united state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated, and for the sake of easy understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated in an imaginary line, and the outer rotation member arranged on the rear side is illustrated. 840 is visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the present embodiment, at least one portion for restricting rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise direction in front view in FIG. 102) can be secured, In many cases, rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two places. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

First, a contact protrusion 845 is provided that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The contact protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers outward in the radial direction at the intermediate angular position of the adjacent extended arms 842, and the inside is lightened in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body 841. ing.

The contact protrusion 845 is arranged to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is arranged to be able to contact the curved shape portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. The intermediate arm member 850 is configured to prevent excessive rotation.

The thickened portion 852 is weakened in elastic deformation resistance by the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the contact protrusion 845 is lightened. As a result, even when the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved shape portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the contact protruding portion 845, the load generated at that time is applied to the contact protruding portion 852. Since it is possible to absorb the elastic deformation of the 845 and the thickened portion 852, it is possible to avoid damage to the contact protruding portion 845 and the thickened portion 852.

The contact protruding portion 845 is not arranged at all positions as the intermediate angular position of the extended arm portion 842, but formation is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. As a result, the contact protruding portion 845 and the detected portion 844 are displaced from each other when viewed in the axial direction, and the drawing direction of the molding die of the outer rotating member 840 can be set to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. .. Therefore, the design of the molding die can be facilitated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted at the cost of facilitating the design of the molding die, but in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted. As the second configuration, the thickened portion 852 is formed with a base end side reinforcing portion 852a.

The base-side reinforcing portion 852a is disposed so as to face the tip-side rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and can come into contact when the tip-side rod portion 853 excessively rotates. By being arranged in the above position, the over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is prevented.

The base end side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened similarly to the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is reduced and the deformation resistance is increased. As a result, even if the rotary arm member 850 comes into contact with the rotation tip side of the rotation arm member 850 where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of deformation.

The curved shape portion 852c is designed so as to be able to come into contact with the curved shape portion 854d in a surface, and an excessive load is locally generated between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in a combined state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

As described above, when the contact protrusions 845 are arranged so as to face each other, the displacement of the rotation arm members 850 is not limited to the contact with the contact protrusions 845, and the adjacent rotation arm members 850 do not move. With the configuration in which the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d can be brought into contact with each other, and the proximal end side reinforcing portion 852a and the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be brought into contact with each other. The excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted.

On the other hand, even when the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted, the curved shape portions 852c and 854d of the adjacent rotating arm members 850 are brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm members are disposed. With the configuration in which the proximal end side reinforcing portion 852a of the 850 and the distal end side rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other, over-rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted.

These abutting configurations are configured such that the five rotating arm members 850 are associated with each other (circularly arranged). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 at one location is omitted, and there is little configuration that restricts the rotation of only the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted location. However, in reality, it is possible to disperse the load at the time of contact by the interaction of the five rotary arm members 850.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the location where the contact protrusion 845 is omitted) from being extremely reduced.

Further, the ring-shaped plate portion 846 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 in a ring-shaped plate shape on a plane along the rear surface side end of the contact protruding portion 845 also forms the contact protruding portion. Similar to the portion 845, it is omitted in a portion that overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction.

The omission of the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as a price for facilitating the design of the molding die, similarly to the omission of the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 described above. The effect produced by the portion 846 is realized by the adjacent rotation arm member 850 (a configuration that supports the adjacent rotation arm member 850) even in the location where the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as correction of the displacement of the front and rear positions of the rotating arm member 850. That is, the turning arm member 850 is displaced radially outward from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) (see FIG. 65(a)), and the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is moved toward the combined state again. Even when the position of the base is unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction, the rear side surface of the base end side rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is disposed so as to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 and can come into contact therewith. By doing so, the front and rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the contact.

This action cannot be achieved because the contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur when the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear side surface of the tip side rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extending arm portion 842, so that the arrangement of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is Even when the position is shifted back and forth, the rear side surface of the tip side rod portion 853 is disposed so as to be opposed to the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 so that it can be contacted, so that rotation can be achieved by the contact. The front-back position of the arm member 850 can be corrected.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the extended arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same action as the annular plate portion 846. Thus, the effect of correcting the front-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be produced in all the rotating arm members 850 while partially omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846.

103A is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the middle arm member 850, and FIG. 103B is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the middle arm member 850. 103(a) and 103(b), the outer rotation member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 are shown in the relative arrangement in the one combined state.

The state illustrated in FIG. 103A is a state in which the virtual position line 832F is rotated up to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in the present embodiment) from the state in FIG. 65B (state in which the switching rotation operation is completed). The state illustrated in FIG. 103(b) corresponds to the state in which the virtual position line 832F is rotated up to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) from the state in FIG. 67(b) (the switching rotation operation is performed). (Completed status).

Comparing the one combined state and the individual combined state (see FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a)), the side in the lateral direction of the intermediate arm member 850, which is close to the outer rotation member 840, is reversed, so that the contact is made. The difference is that the curved shape portion 852c that abuts the protruding portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved shape portion 852c that abuts the curved portion 854d is the opposite.

For the purpose of coping with this difference, the contact protruding portion 845 has a line-symmetrical shape in front view with the radial direction of the main body portion 841 as a reference, and the pair of curved shape portions 852c and 854d are In the front view, the shape is axisymmetric with respect to the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the rotation base end and the supported hole 854a).

Further, the curved shape of the contact projection 845 and the curved shape of the curved shape portion 854d are designed to have the same curved shape in accordance with the shape of the curved shape portion 852c. Thereby, in the individual combined state and the one combined state, the combined state can be configured with the same engagement relationship.

Further, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured so as to be sandwiched between the contact protruding portion 845 and the curved portion 854d from both sides. As a result, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 can be prevented from being displaced in any rotation direction, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained and the united state is maintained. It can be done easily.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operation unit 800. 104 shows a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the one combined state), and FIG. 105 shows the one combined state.

106 is a sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along the line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along the line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104. As the configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front and rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be arbitrarily set.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal rod 832, the player can visually recognize the metal rod 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal rod 832 can be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal rod 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal rod 832 as a supporting member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate arm member 850 as a functional member, not the decorative member, from being conspicuous, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the third operation unit 800.

In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a production member that reflects light due to the gloss of the surface, so that the light production by the light emitted from the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 107) is performed. The staging effect can be improved. That is, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflecting member for light production.

When the middle arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal rod 832, light entering the eyes of the player may be blocked by the middle arm member 850, but in the present embodiment, the middle arm member 850 is the metal rod. Since it is arranged on the back surface side of 832, it is possible to prevent the middle arm member 850 from blocking the light and degrading the appearance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light can be reflected through the metal rod 832 in the state (see FIGS. 104 and 107) during the switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed. , It is possible to extend the range in which the light effect is executed. That is, it is arranged not only in the area behind the light-transmitting decorative member 824 on which the electric-decorative substrate 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged, but also so as to project outward in the radial direction of the light-transmitting decorative member 824 in a front view. Even in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) where the metal rod 832 is exposed and visually recognized, the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player.

As a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a includes a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIG. 106 and FIG. 107) on the inner peripheral surface of which the light diffusion shape is formed in an annular shape. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be emitted to the light diffusing shape portion 824b, and the light diffusing shape portion 824b receiving the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

As a result, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is brightly visible in an annular shape not only in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 but also during the switching rotation operation in which the annular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is released. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the effect of utilizing the annular shape of the third operation unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 includes not only the bulging portion 824a visually recognized in the combined state, but also an extending portion that extends outward in the radial direction from the bulging portion 824a in a front view. It is equipped with 824c.

The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state and thus has a low function as a decorative portion. However, the extended portion 824c has an effect of blinding the mechanical portion during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. ..

That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extending portion 824c is difficult to use for production such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extending arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see FIG. 61). It is formed in such a size that the mechanical portion can be covered and blindfolded.

Since the decorative pattern is provided not only on the bulging portion 824a but also on the front side of the extending portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the range where the mechanical portion is shielded and blindfolded. The effect can be improved.

An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the vertical movement displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the elevation arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

According to the present embodiment, the up-and-down displacement and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 are configured to be independently executable, but, for example, due to the inertial load during the up-and-down displacement of the third operation unit 800, There is a possibility that the third operation unit 800 may be rotationally displaced in association with each other. In this case, the attitude of the third operation unit 800 may change, or the combined state of the third operation unit 800 may be released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced outward in the radial direction against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, the effect of rendering may be reduced.

In order to avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 (in particular, the integral rotation operation) may be controlled to be executed at the same time.

As a result, the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 during the up-and-down displacement can be shown to the player as an effect operation, so that the effect effect can be prevented from lowering. Furthermore, since the load continues to be applied in the direction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced inward in the radial direction during the continuous rotation operation (see FIG. 101 ), the united state of the third operation unit 800 is released. It can be avoided.

In addition, the posture of the third operation unit 800 is set in advance such that the rotation arm member 850 is not likely to be displaced by the upward/downward displacement even if the control for simultaneously performing the up/down displacement and the rotational displacement is not performed. Control may be performed so as to adjust the posture of the unit 800 in the rotation direction.

The detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotation member 840 by the detection sensor 813 changes (see FIG. 68 ), which means that in the present embodiment, the rotation mode of the inner rotation member 830 is executed by the integral rotation operation. means. Therefore, on the premise of this, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are designed in association with each other.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotation member 840 is maintained (the inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid the state where this premise may be broken.

In the present embodiment, when the inner rotation member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotation member 840, so that the outer rotation member 840 is rotated. The posture of 840 is maintained.

Therefore, for example, during execution of the switching rotation operation, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 becomes large, and the operation resistance between the inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 increases. Becomes larger and exceeds the resistance exerted by the torque limiter, the outer rotation member 840 and the inner rotation member 830 may interlock with each other, and the switching rotation operation may not be properly performed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

For example, the displacement direction of the rotation tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 from the combined state is the direction along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, resistance to rotation of the metal rod 832 can be made difficult to occur, and the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, and the rotation member 834 can be prevented. It is possible to reduce the resistance generated between the intermediate arm member 850 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In the state where the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 are arranged at the radially outer end position (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is the metal rod. Since it is along the rotation direction of 832, it is easy to form a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which, after the switching rotation operation is started, the driving is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is achieved, and the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 are radially outer terminal ends. In the state of being arranged in the position (see FIG. 104 ), the decorative members 870 and 880 receive inertia so as to rotate about the metal rod 832.

Under the influence of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870, 880 rotates, and the bevel teeth 834a and the bevel teeth 854c mesh with each other. It passes through the radially outer end position and rotates inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(b) and FIG. 67(b)).

In the state of being displaced from the radially outer end position, the pivoting front end side of the intermediate arm member 850 is easily displaced in the direction along the metal rod 832, and the resistance against the rotational operation of the metal rod 832 can be easily suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reduction of the resistance among the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is achieved by the relationship between the members and the design of the drive control. There is.

Since the posture of the outer rotation member 840 is maintained and the arrangement of the detected portion 844 does not change during the switching rotation operation, the end timing of the switching rotation operation is determined by the change in the detection mode of the detection portion 844 by the detection sensor 813. It cannot be judged.

For example, the control of stopping the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached can be realized by setting a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling the drive at the drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the displacement amount may differ even if the driving time is the same, and before the united state is achieved. The drive may stop. In this case, the effect of rendering may be low.

On the other hand, not the control mode in which the drive motor 861 is stopped at the timing when the united state is reached, but the detection mode of the detected portion 844 by the detection sensor 813 is changed, so that the switching rotation operation ends and the integrated rotation operation is performed. It may be determined that it has started (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 may be stopped after this determination. By this control, it is possible to avoid the situation where the driving of the drive motor 861 is stopped in a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 have not reached the combined state after the execution of the switching rotation operation.

As the drive control, the switching rotation operation is executed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800 as described above, but the integrated rotation operation can be executed regardless of the state of the third operation unit 800. Is.

As the drive control, the switching rotation operation can be executed without being influenced by the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 in the rotation direction. Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 68, it is possible for the player to expect the presence or absence of the jackpot notification. It can be avoided. That is, the state in which the detected portion 844 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66A) is not limited to the state in which the detected portion 844 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can be executed even from.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is executed in the state where the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detected portion 844 is not detected in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the completion of the switching rotation operation. The output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until the vehicle enters, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed in a driving period preset as a driving period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, or the detected portion 844 may be the detection sensor 813. The drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until it enters the detection groove.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation ends, the operation mode shifts to the integral rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative member 870, It can be determined that the 880 is in a coalesced state.

On the other hand, even though the drive motor 861 is driven for a sufficient length of time so that the detected rotation portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by shifting from the switching rotation operation to the integrated rotation operation. If the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined based on the output of the detection sensor 813 that the third operation unit 800 has a malfunction.

Further, in the latter case, the switching rotation operation is executed from an arbitrary rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and in the state where the one combined state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 is detected. The driving is continued until the portion 844 enters.

In the one united state of the third operation unit 800, the appearance is unlikely to be different even if the rotational arrangement is different, as described above. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the one combined state, it is possible to easily avoid a reduction in the effect.

Further, when performing control to return from the reverse effect to the normal effect shown in FIG. 68, since the detected portion 844 is already arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor after completion of the switching rotation operation. The period until the output of 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, since a short drive period in which the detected portion 844 arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 is retracted from the detection groove is sufficient, the length required for control for returning from the reversal effect to the normal effect. Can be minimized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 that starts the switching rotation operation for switching from the normal effect to the reverse effect is improved, and the return operation is normally prolonged. In some cases, the switching rotation operation from the reversing effect as the return operation to the normal effect is shortened.

That is, a part of the return operation (rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) for returning the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 is observed even if the rotational arrangement is different. By performing the operation in the one combined state in which the appearance is difficult to change, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the effect of the third operation unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing a part of the returning operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switching rotation operation as the remaining returning operation.

Among the operation units 600, 700, 800, a configuration commonly used by the plurality of operation units 600, 700, 800 will be described in a cross-sectional manner including the reason for the difference in the adopted mode.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly used in the respective operation units 600, 700, and 800 are confirmed, and their adopted modes (the number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the detected piece) will be described.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device included in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). With respect to a plurality of displacement members including the rotation member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decoration portion 652b, and the second decoration rotation member 660, if the posture of the rotation member 620 is determined, the arrangement and postures of other displacement members are determined. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the arrangement and orientation of the plurality of displacement members based on the detection result of the single detection sensor KS1. As a result, the number of detectors provided can be reduced.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operation unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operation unit 700, and the detected portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50 ), which correspond to the production standby state, the intermediate production state, and the projecting state of the second operation unit 700, respectively. To do.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the production standby state is necessary to determine the return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the overhang state is necessary for determining the arrival at the rising displacement end position, and also for determining the position shift due to the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 and the influence of an unintended load. Will be needed. The detection sensor 713 for determining the intermediate effect state is necessary not only for determining the arrival at the upper and lower positions in the intermediate effect state, but also for determining the position shift due to the influence of unintended load. Hereinafter, the reversing operation and the influence of an unintended load will be described in order.

First, the reversing operation will be described. The second operation unit 700 is configured such that, in addition to the vertical displacement of the up/down reversing effect device 770 that occurs in association with the rotation operation of the gear cam member 734, the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 (see FIG. 59) is possible.

Since the up/down reversing effect device 770 may be displaced in the vertical direction by the reversing operation, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device that determines the effect standby state) is adopted, There is a possibility that a vertical position shift in the intermediate effect state cannot be determined and an appropriate effect operation cannot be executed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the production standby state, the intermediate production state, and the extended state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the up/down reversing effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by reversing the up/down reversing effect device 770 in the extended state, and based on the result of this judgment, the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be properly adjusted. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the correction direction (so that it is in the overhanging state), it is possible to properly maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversing effect device 770.

In the present embodiment, the reversing operation is allowed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the projecting state (when the gear cam member 734 is on the operation end side), so the correction of the positional deviation during the reversing operation is performed by the gear cam. It suffices if the member 734 is rotated to the operation end side, which is easy.

Next, the influence of an unintended load will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 740 that occurs in association with the rotating arm member 720 that is rotated by the rotation operation of the gear cam member 734, the front-back position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting plate member 740 is also provided. The up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced forward and backward based on the up-and-down plate member 740 for displacing (see FIGS. 52 to 54).

Therefore, with the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down reversing effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction, and the up-down position of the up-down reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 fluctuates. The posture of the member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine include a shock load when the player hits the gaming machine, a load when opening and closing the front frame 14, and the like.

Since the up-down reversing effect device 770 may be displaced in the up-down direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the effect standby state) is adopted, There is a possibility that the vertical displacement in the output state and the intermediate effect state cannot be determined, and the up/down reversal effect apparatus 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate arrangement.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the production standby state, the intermediate production state, and the extended state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate effect state and the vertical positions of the up/down reversing effect apparatus 770 and the elevating plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with each other. It is possible to determine that the up/down reversal effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and the drive motor 731 is rotated in a direction in which the posture of the gear cam member 734 is appropriately corrected (in the intermediate effect state) based on the result of the determination. As a result, it is possible to properly maintain the arrangement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770.

In addition, when it is determined that the detected portion 735 is dislocated from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is arranged on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, the present embodiment In the form, it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected part 735 has come off, but the drive motor 731 is controlled so as to drive the effect device 780 in the downward direction first. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation where the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 collide.

In the present embodiment, when the detected part 735 again enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state due to this driving, the detected part 735 is displaced by an unintended load and the effect device 780 is moved upward. It can be understood that the influence has occurred on the side to be driven, and if the drive is stopped at that time, the influence caused by the unintended load can be offset.

Further, due to this driving, when the detected part 735 does not enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state but enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the detected part 735 due to an unintended load. It was found that the displacement of No. 3 occurred on the side where the effect device 780 was displaced downward, and when the detected portion 735 entered the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by continuing the drive so as to displace the effect device again. By stopping the driving, it is possible to cancel the influence caused by the unintended load.

Note that the detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have the structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, so a plate having a width suitable for the detection width of the detection sensor 713 is used. Formed as a profile. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be improved.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the upside-down member 781 of the second operation unit 700, and the arcuate protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), and the up-down member 781 is in the upright vertical arrangement state and the upside-down vertical arrangement state, respectively. And correspond to.

The second operation unit 700 is arranged as a left and right pair in an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)) and an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)) of the upside-down member 781. The covering members 787 that are close to each other are brought into a close-up state.

For example, when only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that reverses the upright vertical arrangement state of the vertical inversion member 781) is employed, the posture deviation of the vertical inversion member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state is detected. Since the determination can be made, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 based on the determination result so as to maintain the united state of the covering member 787. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the posture deviation of the upside down member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the united state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state is a state due to an unintended load or poor control. Even if there is a change, the state change cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the united state has been released continues, which is not desirable for presentation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781 and the upright vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781 is provided. Therefore, the detection sensor 778d can determine that the state change from the united state has occurred regardless of whether the unit is in the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state, and based on the determination result, the state is changed to the united state. By driving and controlling the drive motor 782 on the returning side, the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state. Thereby, the effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have the structural purpose described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore has a width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. Is formed as a plate-shaped portion. As a result, the resolution for detecting the posture of the upside down member 781 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the outer rotation member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detected portion 844 can enter the detection groove (FIG. 60). reference). The third operation unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotation member 840, and this single detection device stops the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotation member 840. The rotation (switching rotation operation) of the inner rotation member 830 in this state is used (combined).

Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have the structural purpose described in the extended portion 634b, and thus has a plate width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. Formed as a profile. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be improved.

The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the posture of the outer rotation member 840, and since the number of detection sensors 813 is as small as one, it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state. For example, even if the detection sensor 813 displaces such that the united state is released when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detected part 844 is not arranged, the detection sensor 813 determines that displacement. I can't.

Therefore, rather than the control of returning to the combined state after determining the deviation from the combined state, the direction of returning the decorative members 870 and 880 to the combined state at a constant time interval (individual combined state (Fig. 66 (a )) in a direction to rotate the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, and in a combined state (see FIG. 103(b)), a drive motor in a direction to rotate the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise in a front view). It is considered preferable to control the 861 so as to rotate it for a fixed time (for example, a short time).

By this control, even when the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is released unexpectedly, the decorative members 870 and 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at a constant time interval. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is maintained for a long period of time while being released.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the action of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the posture of the covering member 787, and in the third operation unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. As described above, similar techniques are adopted, but the design concepts of the directions of the loads generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, and thus the description will be given here.

The second operation unit 700 is designed so that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnet Mg and the metal screw, which are respectively arranged on the left and right, are aligned in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to the plane orthogonal to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the rotating operation of the covering member 787.

In this case, as compared with the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as the resistance of the slide displacement in which the covering members 787 approach and separate from each other can be reduced. Thereby, the operation resistance at the time of starting the operation of the covering member 787 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 disposed on the decoration member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 is five as the rotation axis of the rotation operation of the decoration member 880. It is designed to be arranged on one plane parallel to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can reduce the degree to which the load is applied to the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotational operation direction, the magnetic force facilitates avoiding the malfunction of the decorative members 870 and 880 wobbled in the rotational operation direction. be able to.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, a display on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of integrally visually recognizing the operation units 600, 700, 800 will be described.

In the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decoration portion 652b is arranged so that it can be seen overlapping with the area right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying near the area right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the position corresponding to the projecting decoration portion 652b, the display area and the projecting decoration portion 652b are grouped together. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a display effect of.

In the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 is arranged so as to have the same height between the inner lower edge portion of the center frame 86 and the lower edge portion of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, by displaying near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the position corresponding to the position where the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 is arranged, the display area and the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 are separated. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize as a united display effect.

In the third operation unit 800, each first covering portion 875 that can be visually recognized by the player in the individual united state is provided with a different decoration, and in the projecting state, the third covering unit 875 surrounds the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The display area of the symbol display device 81 is arranged. Therefore, for example, in the area close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, by performing a display corresponding to the position where the first covering portion 875 is arranged, the display area and the first It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the covering portion 875 as a unit of display effect.

Further, if the drive control is performed so that the third operation unit 800 integrally rotates, it is possible to execute a roulette-like operation effect in which each first covering portion 875 rotates. In the area close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the symbol display device 81, the display area and the first covering portion 875 are moved by moving the display so as to run in parallel with the first covering portion 875. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize as a united display effect.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shapes of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 are fixed has been described, but in the distribution device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path forming section 2334 having a variable internal shape. Equipped with. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path forming section 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path forming section 334 in the first embodiment, the structure arranged on the right side will be illustrated and described, but it will be arranged on the left side. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuring unit 2334. The left and right sides may be the first flow path forming section 2334, and the other side may be the first flow path forming section 334, so that the left and right sides may have different configurations.

108 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path forming portion 2334 of the distribution device 2300 has a through hole 2410 formed in the lower part of the curved protrusion 334b in the front-rear direction, and slides back and forth along the through hole 2410. A slide member 2420 guided so as to be displaceable, and a solenoid 2430 arranged inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be able to generate a driving force for slidingly moving the slide member 2420 are provided.

In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 2430 is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide and displace to the rear side arrangement RP.

In the present embodiment, in the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 overhangs the inner side (upper side) of the bottom surface 2334c of the fixed flow path on which the ball can roll, and the rear side. The arrangement RP is configured such that the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 does not project (immerse) inward (upper side) than the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the sphere abuts on the upper side surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear arrangement RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the sphere do not abut.

The upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 occurs while the ball rolls on the bottom surface 2334c, it is possible to suppress the influence of the ball on the flow-down mode.

The flow direction of the sphere rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is the oblique front-down direction, and the slide displacement direction of the slide member 2420 is the front-back direction. Therefore, the slide displacement direction of the slide member 2420 is along the flow direction of the sphere. Therefore, the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 affects the strength of rotation of the sphere.

Since the sphere rolls forward with the bottom surface 2334c, the sphere is rotated forward in the traveling direction (forward). When the slide member 2420 is slid from the front arrangement FP to the rear arrangement RP by energizing the solenoid 2430 from the non-excited state of the solenoid 2430 (see FIG. 108), the upper surface of the slide member 2420 rolls. A backward load (friction force) is generated on the lower end of the moving sphere. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

On the other hand, when the slide member 2420 is slid from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP by changing the state in which the solenoid 2430 is energized to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), the bottom surface 2334b. A forward load (friction force) is generated on the lower end of the rolling ball through the upper surface of the slide member 2420. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward direction is reduced, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Further, since the vertical position of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side FP is on the upper side than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, the load in the direction of pushing the ball upward. Occurs. Therefore, the velocity of the ball rolling downward can be reduced in the vertical direction, so that the flow velocity of the ball can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the sphere rolls on the bottom surface 2334b, the control that causes the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 is performed, so that the sphere flowing down the inside of the sorting apparatus 2300 is flowed down. The speed can be variable. As a result, the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74) can be variably controlled.

In the present embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is arranged rearward of the second flow path forming section 335, it is difficult for the player to understand how the ball is affected by the slide member 2420. be able to.

That is, since the contact between the slide member 2420 and the sphere occurs before the sphere is introduced into the second flow path forming portion 335 that is easily visible to the player and attracts attention, the ball is rotated. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how the player moves or vertically displaces. As a result, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming unit 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the sphere is arranged above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, while the slide member 2420 is displaced above the bottom surface 2334c before and after the displacement (at a stop). The contact load with the slide member 2420 is not applied to the sphere passing through.

Therefore, the sphere arranged above the bottom surface 2334c during the operation of the slide member 2420 and the sphere arranged above the bottom surface 2334c during the stop of the slide member 2420 have a flow-down manner (rotation, change in rotation, flow-down speed). , Change in flow rate, etc.) can be made different.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described. However, in the distribution device 3300 of the third embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is arranged as a normal detection sensor. By being moved to the rear side of SE12, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As a modification example of the arrangements of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, description will be made on the right side of the left and right center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, similar to the first embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side so that the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right of the distribution device 3300. May be configured differently, and the left side and the right side of the distribution device 3300 may be arranged side by side so that the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left side as well, as described in detail below. May be symmetrical.

109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 109(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is not excited and the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front position. In FIG. 109(b), the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. The state where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position is shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 109A and 109B, the guide route of the sphere after flowing through the third flow path forming portion 336 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In this way, the guide path of the sphere is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), in the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300, a rear frame portion 3332 that defines a ball guide path to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. However, it is configured to open from the left side so as to receive a sphere.

The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position. The rear side position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is the right end portion of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 and the rear side frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the sphere to the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The rear inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed on the right side is aligned with the left and right (or the right end portion of the front side surface 376a is disposed slightly on the front side).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this way, if the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the sphere that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 will be on the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. If the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position while being flown to the right while contacting and passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, the sphere that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 of the slide displacement member 3370. It can be configured to flow to the right while coming into contact with the front side surface 376a and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

That is, both the downward flow path of the sphere passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the downward flow path of the sphere passing through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 both flow down to the right after passing through the third flow path forming unit 336. Composed of. The only difference is the front-back position that flows to the right.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball has flown to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 from the player's eyes when visually recognizing the third flow path forming unit 336 from the front side.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 to the front side, an upper front protruding portion 3376b integrally formed with the upper protruding portion 376, And an upper lateral projecting portion 3376c integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376.

The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper side surface flush with the upper surface of the sphere guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair of left and right sides on the left and right sides of the sphere center of the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336. It is configured to be able to be housed on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 by penetrating the front side surface thereof.

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 so that it does not contact the sphere, and the slide displacement member 3370 is formed. Is arranged at the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged over the front-rear direction gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, the lower left and right portions of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be slid and displaced. It is possible to bridge to member 3370.

Thereby, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c can facilitate avoiding erroneous guidance of the falling ball.

Further, the arrangement of the sphere that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 is such that the sphere is on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c that is formed flush with the upper surface of the sphere guide portion 371b. It is possible to avoid a frontal collision with 371b in the front-rear direction. That is, due to the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, the sphere and the sphere guide portion 371b collide head-on and the sphere flows backward, and the sphere is sandwiched between the front side surface of the sphere guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the operation becomes defective.

The upper front protruding portion 3376b has the same shape portion as the front-rear length protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, and has the same relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. This is a shape portion integrally formed with the upper protruding portion 376 in the positional relationship of.

The upper lateral protruding portion 3376c has the same shape portion as the left and right inner protruding portion 318 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, similar to the relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. This is a shape portion integrally formed with the upper front protruding portion 3376b in the positional relationship of.

Thereby, the action of the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c on the abutting sphere is as an action on the sphere flowing down near the upper protruding portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370. Occurs.

In other words, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is fixedly arranged like the front-rear long protrusion 317 and the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18). It is possible to eliminate the action of the portions 3376b and 3376c for urging the ball, which has reached the front position of the upper protruding portion 376, toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described. However, in the distribution device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the arrangement of the normal detection sensor SE12 is the probability variation detection sensor. By being moved to the rear side of SE11, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 110(a) and FIG. 110(b) are a third flow path forming section 336, a probability variation detection sensor SE11, and normal detection that schematically show the downstream side structure of the third flow path forming section 336 in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic top view of the sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370.

111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming section 336, the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110(a), and FIG. FIG. 110B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming section 336, the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIb-CXIb in FIG. 110B. In FIG. 111B, the illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for the sake of easy understanding.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the sphere cannot pass therethrough, and open the other to allow the sphere to pass, and above the probability variation detection sensor SE11. A front slide member 4371 that slides left and right, and a rear slide member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12 are provided.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 are slidably displaced in the left-right opposite directions by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when the front open state shown in FIGS. 110(a) and 111(a) is changed to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110(b) and 111(b), the front slide member 4371 moves to the left. The rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide rightward.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged so as to cover above the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 (see FIG. 17). , And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slid and displaced.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed as an inclined flat surface having the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a can flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4373 and receives a load, and is flowed downward (downward right).

Therefore, when the front open state and the rear open state change, the front slide member 4371 comes into contact with the sphere at different positions, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the sphere in different directions. To be done.

The rear slide member 4375 has a slide plate 4376 arranged to cover the normal detection sensor SE12 and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in a shape similar to that of the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 17). And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally slid and displaced.

The upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined flat surface formed in a shape that is opposite to the front and rear sides of the upper side surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the sphere arranged on the upper side surface 4376a can be made to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 side by the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, and is flown downward.

Therefore, when the front open state and the rear open state change, the rear slide member 4375 comes into contact with the sphere at a different position, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the sphere in different directions. Composed.

With this configuration, a situation may occur in which the sphere that has passed above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 rearward returns to above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere that has passed through the flow path forming unit 336.

As a mode of returning to the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so as to change the state from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward on the upper side surface 4372a. It In this case, the ball rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing the normal detection sensor SE12, flows backward toward the front side along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, the sphere can be returned to the probability change detection sensor SE11 side when the timing at which the sphere passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 and the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370 match. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine configured such that a ball that has passed on the downstream side above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 does not pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, after passing through the third flow path forming portion 336. It is possible to improve the attention to the driving timing of the sphere and the slide displacement member 4370.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the case in which the spherical flow path is common up to the third flow path forming section 336 and the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path forming section 336 has been described. In the distribution device 5300 of the embodiment, the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the upstream side of the third flow path forming section 336, and the flow path of the sphere changes on the upstream side of the third flow path forming section 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

112A and 112B are partial cross-sectional views of the distribution device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 112(a) shows a state in which the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right side position, and the slide displacement member 5370 guides the sphere to the probability change detection sensor SE11. In FIG. 112(b), the slide displacement member 5370 is The state where the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370 is illustrated in the left position.

Further, in FIGS. 112A and 112B, the guide route of the sphere after flowing through the first flow path forming unit 334 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In this way, the guide path of the sphere is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and is provided with a thin plate portion 5371 forming a rolling surface of a sphere and an upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371 projecting upward. And an upper protruding portion 5376.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed to be thin enough to allow a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 to ride on it. Since the left side surface 5376a facing the sphere of the upper projecting portion 5376 is formed in an arc shape having a concave flow path side, the flowing sphere can smoothly flow backward.

According to the present embodiment, as in the distribution device 5300, the front and rear widths of the flow path of the sphere are formed to be long, and the visibility of the sphere flowing down on the front side is higher than that of the sphere flowing down on the rear side. While adopting the configuration, since the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the front side where the visibility of the ball becomes high, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the flow-down mode (flow-down path) of the ball.

In the present embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right side position, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and a ball can enter. On the other hand, the sphere flowing down on the upstream side of the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flows toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path forming section 334.

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow path forming portion 334, it is difficult for the speed to the rear side to be generated in the exact opposite direction, so that the ball does not easily enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the provision of a member for blocking the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted to reduce the member cost.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right flow paths are divided by the partition plate portion 338 and the flow paths do not merge with each other has been described. However, in the distribution device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, the third flow path configuration portion on the right side is provided. A confluence channel 6341 extending from the downstream side of the left curved protrusion 334b to the right side is coupled to 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

113 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the distribution device 6300 is formed from the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the distribution device 6300 is formed by a confluent flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a position where a space for one sphere is provided on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b. The channel 6341 is connected to the third channel forming section 336 serving as the right channel. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sphere flowing down the right flow channel and the sphere flowing down the left flow channel meet at the connection point JP1 to which the flow channels are connected, so that they can collide with each other.

The confluent channel 6341 includes a raised floor portion 6342 at the lower end of the channel. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. This makes it possible to make a difference in height position between the sphere that flows into the connection point JP1 from the confluence channel 6341 and the sphere that flows down the right side channel and flows down the third channel forming portion 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow that occurs when the two collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 makes it possible to delay the flow of the balls as compared with the case where the contact between the balls does not occur. This makes it possible to change the time required for the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) to reach the branch point BP1 depending on whether or not the spheres are in contact with each other.

Since the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entry mode, the slide displacement member 370 can be changed by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1. There is a possibility that the sphere can reach the branch point BP1 when 370 has a different arrangement.

The premise of contact between the spheres is that merging of the spheres occurs, and that there is a sphere flowing down the merging flow path 6341. When the player wants to bring the balls into contact with each other, the player may adjust the firing strength so as to enter the balls into the pair of left and right ball passage holes 163b (see FIG. 74) and play the balls. If you want to avoid the contact, you can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the ball enters only the ball passage hole 163b on one side (right side).

According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the firing strength of the sphere is related to the presence or absence of contact of the sphere at the connection point JP1 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the sphere reaches the branch point BP1. , Directly affect the profits of the player. Therefore, the player's motivation to adjust the firing strength of the ball can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of the continuous ball of the sphere. That is, the two balls contacting at the connection point JP1 can be made to flow down to the branch point BP1 in a state of being arranged closely.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow-down path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path configured by the flow path forming units 334 to 336 has been described, but in the distribution device 7300 of the seventh embodiment, The sphere is configured to be able to flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

114 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 7300 taken along the line CXV-CXV in FIG. 114. As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the distribution device 7300 has a sphere that is formed at a substantially central position in the left and right, in addition to the sphere passage hole 163b, as a path through which the sphere that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. A passage hole 7163b is provided.

The ball passage hole 7163b is the same as the detection sensor SE1 used to detect a ball entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing of changing the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state based on the determination of a predetermined number of balls. It is formed as a sphere passage opening of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of.

On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a tubular flow path 7164 extending in a rectangular tubular cross section in a direction that descends and tilts backward is disposed. The tubular flow path 7164 is formed large enough so that a sphere can flow down inside, and its end portion extends up to the front side upper side of the branch point BP1. That is, the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 7163b is configured to flow down inside the tubular flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The time length required for the sphere to pass through the tubular flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the time length required for the sphere to pass through the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336. It is set to be equivalent to the length of time required for the sphere to pass through 334.

Therefore, for example, when the distribution device 7300 is drive-controlled by the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25 ), as described above, the distribution device 7300 passes through the ball passage hole 163 b and passes through the flow path components 334 to 336. The sphere that can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to the front position, whereas the sphere that has flowed through the cylindrical passage 7164 after passing through the sphere passage hole 7163b is the slide displacement member 370. There is a possibility that the branch point BP1 is reached while the vehicle is arranged at the rear position.

In particular, a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state easily reaches the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position.

That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, whether the ball entering the specific winning port 65a passes through the ball passage hole 163b or the ball passage hole 7163b is detected. It can be configured to change whether or not a sphere passes the sensor SE11. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the flow-down mode of the balls inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the flow path components 334 to 336 is reduced by the tubular flow path 7164 when viewed in a general direction during a game. The arrangement of the tubular flow path 7164 is devised so that it can be avoided.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the branch point BP1 is maintained high, and the number of channels through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, so that the ball reaches the branch point BP1. It is possible to increase the types of required time lengths and improve the player's attention to the specific winning opening 65a.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 is connected to the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one place, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position and the displacement direction of the axis O1. However, in the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated holes 8616 are connected at a plurality of positions (two positions), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to cause the displacement direction. The displacement direction of O1 is switched. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is bent twice to the left and right below the straight portion 616a.

That is, the guide elongated hole 8616 includes the linear portion 616a, the first curved portion 8616b which is connected to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a and is formed on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape), and the first curved portion. A second curved portion 8616c, which is connected to the lower end portion of 8616b and is formed on a curved line (substantially arc-shaped) whose center of curvature radius is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b, is provided.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 is Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In addition, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the first curved section 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved section 8616b and the second curved section 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 can be switched. Therefore, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In this way, since the intermediate position where the axis O1 can be easily stopped can be configured at a plurality of positions, the axis O1 is stopped halfway and the second decorative rotation member 660 (see FIG. 43) stopped halfway is stopped. It is possible to increase the types of postures (variations).

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 is configured with a single path has been described. However, in the first operation unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is linear. A first path including the curved portion 616a and the curved portion 616b and a second path connected to the right side of the first path are provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 117 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 is provided with the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b similarly to the guide elongated hole 616 of the first embodiment, and in addition to the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. An angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends to the right from the connecting portion and a connecting portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b are provided. ..

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is used when the rotating member 620 is rotated to the tilt side from the state (see FIGS. 43 and 44) in which the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting portion of the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. It is formed in the same direction as the displacement locus of the axis O1 on the assumption that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained.

In this way, since the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining unit 9616c, the rotation direction attitude of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotation member 660 is such that the third effect surface 661c faces the front. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced, the box-shaped member 661 that rotates in conjunction with the rotational movement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction. As a rotation mode, it is possible to maintain the posture in which the third effect surface 661c faces the front over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 displaces the connecting portion 9616d, a change in the angle θ associated with the rotation of the rotating member 620 is allowed, so that the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620. ..

On the other hand, even when the tilt angles of the rotating member 620 are the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged in the curved portion 616b and the angle when the axis O1 is arranged in the connecting portion 9616d. Since θ is different from the size of θ, the midway posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is interlocked with the rotation of the rotation member 620 can be changed by changing the path along which the axis O1 is displaced on the left and right.

Further, regardless of whether the axis O1 is displaced on the right or left, the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end are each one type. The posture of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is arranged at the upper end or the lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

In other words, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 related to the arrangement of the axis O1 in the state where the axis O1 is arranged between the ends of the displaceable range (in the middle position) (FIG. 43 and FIG. 44), the displacement speed of the supported member 640 and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotation member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be generated in a plurality of types. it can.

The guide elongated hole 9616 is limited to a plurality of paths, and does not include a mechanism for limiting the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction due to a malfunction of the mechanism that limits the path, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branch of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be described below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced in the tilting direction will be described.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left side path (the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is used so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway. Drive control.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b by the inertia of the displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a, and is displaced to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616 as it is.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the path on the right side (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the rotating member 620 is disposed at the stage where the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting portion of the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. The drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is drive-controlled to stop or decelerate the drive motor, and then the drive motor 631 is drive-controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the linear portion 616a extends (vertical direction) decreases, so the displacement resistance is small in selecting whether the axis O1 displaces the left path or the right path. The side is chosen.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining unit 9616c, the size of the angle θ is maintained, so that the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that meshes with the rotating member 620 or the intermediate gear 644 rotates. Also, it is not necessary to transmit the driving force to the downstream member. That is, since the displacement resistance is correspondingly small, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 is controlled to be stopped midway or not to be stopped so as to select a path along which the axis O1 is displaced. be able to.

Note that in the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 toward the diagonally upper right direction, so that the situation in which the axis O1 is displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d is less likely to occur. The axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In the present embodiment, since the connecting portion between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b, the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced upward (bounced back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624 in a state where the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 causes the sphere to once flow to the front side and then to the rear side is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by forming the path bend a plurality of times and forming the deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball without forming a part that flows down toward the front side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the abutment blocks the flow down of the ball. Any shape is acceptable. For example, it may be formed in an inclined plane shape, or it may be formed so that a large number of fine convex portions project from the plane so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding sphere.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case where the balls flow down the flow path forming units 334 to 336 in order is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the right and left central portions of the specific winning opening 65a, and the sphere may be formed so as to be able to directly flow into the third flow path forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when the balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, the balls can pass through the opening. Is also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

Although the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming section 335. Further, in this case, the order of the first flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335 may be reversed. That is, in the ball entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, branching to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left-right direction, or immediately after flowing down in the front-rear direction (downflow toward the front side). There may be a branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

In the above-described first embodiment, the flow direction and inclination of each flow path forming unit 334 to 336 are described as the characteristics of the distribution device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the flow path direction and the inclination may be designed in consideration of "necks" that are routinely performed.

Nekase means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical posture but is installed in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Normally, a pachinko machine is installed in a posture in which it leans backward (about a quarter) about one degree. Considering an installation angle of about 1 degree as compared with the above description of the distribution device 300 alone (in a state where there is no skein), the first flow path forming unit 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-rear direction. The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the distribution device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming portion 334 inclines downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal, and the third flow path forming portion 336 descends by 5 degrees from the horizontal toward the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, when the installation angle is also considered, both the first flow path forming section 334 and the third flow path forming section 336 similarly form a flow path inclined downward by 6 degrees. .. On the other hand, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is unlikely to be affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, regarding the flow of the sphere in the distribution apparatus 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path forming unit 334 and the acceleration of the sphere in the third flow path forming unit 336 are the same, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path forming unit 335. Get smaller. Therefore, the flow velocity of the sphere in the left-right direction can be reduced, so that the player can easily recognize the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In addition, since the first flow path forming unit 334 is shorter than the third flow path forming unit 336, the first flow path forming unit 334 is shorter than the third flow path forming unit 336. Can be passed between.

In this way, the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 is affected by the sneaking of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-back direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path forming portion 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of bending (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the sphere in the flow path forming portion 334, 336 changes depending on whether the bending is good or bad (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the tilt angle as an angle larger than the reflex angle.

Further, in the configuration in which the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and the flow path is visible, due to a slight difference in the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path, There is a possibility that the degree of sneaking of the pachinko machine 10 may be grasped. If the intention is to grasp the degree of sneaking, the flow path of the distribution device 300 may be made easily visible.

On the other hand, in the above-described first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are provided around the front side of each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 so that the degree of “negate” cannot be grasped from the slight difference in the velocity of the ball. 162 is arranged so as to surround the variable winning device 65 on the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged on the lower side to reduce the visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the spheres flowing down the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 is made poor except for the normal player's eyes (range of 0 degrees to about 30 degrees in front view). As a result, it is possible to avoid the fact that the degree of “sneaking” of the pachinko machine 10 is comprehended by comparing the flow velocities of the spheres that flow down the flow path forming units 334 to 336.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is larger than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of this inclination may be reversed, or the same inclination may be used.

Moreover, although each flow path forming unit 334 to 336 has been described as a linear flow path being bent to form a spiral flow path, the flow path forming sections 334 to 336 are not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may have a meandering flow path shape or a step-like bent flow path shape.

Further, the flow path is configured to be bent at a right angle at the connection points of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, clune may be adopted as each of the flow path forming sections 334 to 336.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required to pass through the third flow path forming unit 336 may be designed to be 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even when the ball enters the distribution device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the upstream ball flowing down the third flow path forming section 336 is set to the downstream side. In, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blind for the ball flowing down.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the passage time of the sphere is ensured by securing the path length of the flow path forming units 334 to 336, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a protrusion formed in a long shape in a direction intersecting with the flow down direction of the game ball from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 and provided alternately with each other is provided, and the protrusion is collided with the game ball. Therefore, the ball may be decelerated. As a result, it is possible to secure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be arranged evenly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, by not forming the protrusions for the first flow path forming unit 334 and the second flow path forming unit 335 and forming the protrusions only in the third flow path forming unit 336, the third flow path forming unit 336 is formed. It is possible to make the sphere reach quickly until the sphere reaches, while the sphere slowly flows down the third flow path forming portion 336.

Further, the projecting direction of the ridges may be such that the projecting lines are alternately projected from the left and right directions toward the inside of the path along the flow path of the sphere, or they are projected from below to above at a predetermined interval. It may be the same direction.

In the case of projecting from the left-right direction, the load applied to the sphere from the ridge has a component in the left-right direction, so it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the sphere is not mistakenly guided to the detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, the load from the protrusion goes toward the partition plate portion 338 side instead of going toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side by projecting from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid that the ball is mistakenly guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of protruding from the lower side to the upper side, since the protrusion itself may function as a blind for the slide displacement member 370, it is preferable to design the formation height and the formation position in consideration of the line of sight of the player. ..

The ridge may be formed so as to be retractable. In this case, the ball may be prevented from flowing down in the outgoing state, and the flow of the ball may be restarted in the case of the sinking state.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the blind is covered by the ball flowing down on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the distribution device 300, and the decorative member may cover the flow path forming units 334 to 336. The decorative member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

Further, in the case where the ball is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized by using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is arranged between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If so, a blindfold function can be generated.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be arranged behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning openings 63 may be blindfolded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 are formed of straight flow paths that can guide the spheres one by one, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches are formed, and there is a large and small flow path width so that spheres are likely to stay at a location where the flow path width is large. It may be configured.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the sphere heading for the slide displacement member 370 produces the blinding effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging a ball that has entered the other winning openings 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and a ball arranged in the discharge path.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively to the second flow path forming section 335 side (front side) through the first flow path forming section 334. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes the spheres is provided on the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the spheres that flow toward the second flow path forming unit 335, thereby The sphere may flow toward the second flow path forming section 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the ball itself, may be driven by a driving device so as to perform a constant operation by opening and closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a certain pattern when the pachinko machine is powered on. May be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, the ball may be controlled to flow to the second flow path forming unit 335 side. For example, in the case of a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, if there is a ball (excess winning) exceeding the count number (10/round), the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming unit 335 side. May be. In this case, the number of balls flowing down on the second flow path forming section 335 side can be collated with the number of paid-out extra prize balls, and the player can grasp the obtained additional profit at an early stage. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and the structure downstream thereof may be maintained or omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if there is a ball when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank), The sphere may be configured to flow toward the second flow path forming section 335 side. In this case, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the sphere flowing on the second flow path forming section 335 side. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and the structure downstream thereof may be maintained or omitted.

When the sphere is displaced by its own weight, the predetermined motion may be repeated each time the sphere arrives, or the sphere may be configured to perform a different motion depending on the number of spheres that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow toward the second flow path forming section 335, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, The sphere may flow toward the second flow path forming section 335 side. The reverse is also possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 arranged on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be different on the left and right sides.

Here, when the flow time of the ball from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be prolonged due to the long ball discharge time. Therefore, for example, by using the distribution mechanism described above, the balls up to the number of spheres that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are caused to flow down to the second flow path forming unit 335 side, and the spheres after that are the second. The discharge may be performed without passing through the flow path forming section 335. As a result, it is not necessary to wait for the balls of the count number to flow down the flow path forming sections 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 is arranged on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81, and the case of flowing the ball toward the front side in the vicinity of the lower end of the game area has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path components 334 to 336 of the sorting device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or in a front view. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned at the front side of a display area.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300 can be set to the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit obtained by the player by the flow of the ball in the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player confirms the display to see whether the profit is large or small. It is possible to easily grasp whether it has been acquired.

Further, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in the front view with reference to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited. For example, the sphere rolling on the inner rail 61 is configured such that the sphere rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 is not displaced vertically in the front view and can be visually recognized in an overlapping manner with reference to the sphere rolling. Is also good. In this case, not only the ball that has entered the distribution device 300, but also the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 can function as a blind for the ball that flows down the third flow path forming portion 336.

In the first embodiment described above, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at the time when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach has been described. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the front flow sphere that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be inserted into the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the preceding flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has entered the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the back-up sphere has a positional relationship that functions as a blind for the front-end sphere, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the front-end sphere switches toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 (downward) to the rear-end sphere. Being hidden makes it invisible. In addition, since the follow-up ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, it is considered that the player thinks that the ball has not entered the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make the sphere appear as if it has not entered the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, so that the player's expectation is maintained in the same manner as the display effect in the time saving state and the probability variation state. In other gaming machines, the effect of the display effect can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inward projecting portions 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side only by the load due to the collision, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protruding portion 318 is configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until being guided to the left and right inner protruding portion 318 can be configured by a plurality of types (for example, the clune). Is increased or the path width is increased to increase the degree of freedom of the ball in the downflow direction), and due to the speed of the ball and the difference in rotation, it is possible to use only the load due to the collision with the left and right inward projecting portions 318. It may be configured so that it can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be protruded from the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by the ball has been described, but the operation pattern Y is not limited to this. For example, the control of causing the LED of the light emitting unit 351 to emit light at the timing of being hidden by the ball may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide elongated hole 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using the magnetic force or the biasing force of the coil spring.

In the above-described first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in a shape that bends at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance of the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change amount of the angle θ during the rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so that the range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be partially formed.

Although the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide elongated holes 616 in which the axis O1 can be moved are formed, and the axis O1 can be moved by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button type switching device that abuts on the rotating member 620 to perform switching). The guide elongated hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured to be changeable in shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed diagonally to the front left side in the state where the second decorative rotation member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not a thing. For example, the effect surface may be configured to be directed diagonally to the front right in a state of being arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or in the case of being arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the effect surface may be configured so as to be directed obliquely to the upper front (lower side).

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of displacement, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a member that is displaced linearly may be arranged on the base end side of displacement. good. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member preferably functions to secure the rotation angles of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the main driving side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1 or the like). Limited to On the other hand, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (the angle b1 and the like) can be used. Note that, regardless of this preferable effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driving side of the supported member 640.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decorative rotation member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and the decoration is applied to the three side surfaces that intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotation member 660 may be formed to have a pentagonal cross-section, and the stop control may be performed in a posture in which each side surface faces the front side.

Although the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member in the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that makes it easy to integrally view the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the component in the front-back direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is arranged in the vicinity of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the magnet is configured to generate an attraction force between the magnet and the magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710. May easily occur in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, the inclined portions 751 and 762 may be formed in a bent shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape instead of being formed linearly. Also, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and the biasing force may be generated with respect to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the beveled tooth portion 783c and the beveled tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described. It is not limited to. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, an allowable value may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a mode in which it projects to the front side by a downward displacement. In this case, the mode may be such that the upper edge of the center frame 86 is crossed from the bottom to the front, or the mode may be projected from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14) to the front side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case in which the discrimination power is reduced by the fact that the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized as a whole due to the rotation of the covering member 787 in the opposite direction has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, instead of rotating the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 while facing the front side, it is also possible to rotate the sub-decorating surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 while facing the right and left outer sides. Further, even in the case of the rotation in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted and the rotation may be performed.

In the first embodiment, the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 are commonly used by utilizing the rotation angle of the link mechanism (the intermediate arm member 783, the intermediate arm member 850) and the shaft rotation member 785 or the rotation member. Although the configuration is such that 834 is rotated (reversed), the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke on a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834, and a projecting piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member may be changed depending on the design of the groove. The rotation timing of 834 can be defined.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case will be described in which control is performed so that it is determined that the output rotation of the detection sensor 813 is switched from the state in which the detected portion 844 is disposed in the detection sensor 813 to the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by detecting that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813 after reversing the driving direction of the drive motor 861 in a state in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation is performed. It may be determined that the operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decoration member 870 and the configuration of the second decoration member 880 are different from each other in some places, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be provided on both the decorative members 870 and 880, or the both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that produces viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of the oil damper, resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode. Therefore, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. Therefore, it is easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but the embodiment is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. While the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the integrated rotation operation, the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. When 833 is arranged at the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the light LD1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (inner side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. Is.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 inclines downward to the left and right is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right. May be. The former can reduce the momentum of the sphere toward the second flow path forming unit 335 as compared with the latter.

Further, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path forming portion 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be inclined downward toward the rear. It may be configured to. The former can reduce the momentum of the sphere toward the third flow path forming portion 336 as compared with the latter.

Further, the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction. In this case, the degree to which the ball is urged toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so that the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or rubbing with the ball can be kept low.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured such that the optical axis passes through the inside of the trajectory of a sphere passing through the branch point (the arrangement position is lowered). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the sphere passing through the branch point overlaps the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be configured to be reflected to the back side. A state (dark state) in which the light diffusion processed surface 333b is not reached can be set.

That is, the outer light emitting means 351d continues to be turned on, the flow-down mode of the sphere at the branch point, and the light diffusion processed surface 333b (and the light diffusion processed surface illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processed surface 333b). 314c, 340) light and dark. Since each light diffusion processed surface 314c, 333b, 340 has a larger area (projected area) in the player's eyes than a sphere, the player can easily understand the flow-down mode of the sphere at the branch point. ..

In the first embodiment described above, the jackpot game is described as the timing for controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351. However, the timing is not limited to this. For example, the light emission control may be performed due to the detection of the winning of the winning opening 63, 64, 140 or the like, or the light emission control may be performed due to the input operation of the frame button 22. However, it is possible to emit light due to the occurrence of winnings exceeding the specified number (the number of winnings that defines the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of times of fluctuations based on the winning of the winning openings 64, 140). It may be controlled.

In the first embodiment, when the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is confirmed because the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective. Thus, the case has been described in which the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined at the manufacturing stage, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, although it did not appear in the manufacturing stage, when the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is deviated due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, the occurrence of the deviation is detected by the operation of the slide displacement member 370. It can be judged by a defect.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the flow direction of the sphere at the branch point BP1 is the linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but the displacement direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotation operation (for example, a roulette type) may be used, or a shape portion (for example, a funnel-shaped clune) that makes the flow of the ball irregular may be provided so that the ball can flow down in a plurality of directions. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is adopted as a device for switching whether the sphere passes either the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning opening (winning holes 64, 140), as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, or another winning opening. Alternatively, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the winning area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 is arranged in the lower corner of the game area has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distribution device 300 may be arranged at the upper corner of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86), or at the left and right corners (on the left and right outside of the left and right edges of the center frame 86). Alternatively, it may be arranged on the center side of the game area. For example, when arranged in the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player looking at the distribution device 300 is inclined obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal plane, so in the flow path portion that is inclined downward toward the front side, The downstream sphere can be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined backward and forward, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the window portion 162d is designed from the shape of the flow path forming portions 335 and 336 in the front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313 has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 (only) can be viewed from the player's eyes (obliquely viewed downward), or the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 may be reduced. Further, the slide displacement member 370 may have a shape that is visible at one of the front side position and the rear side position and invisible at the other side.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 are configured as a pair of left and right sides so that they do not merge, so that the number of balls entering one flow path can be reduced (dispersing the entering balls). The slide displacement member 370 can switch any of the paths of the spheres that have passed through the respective flow paths while producing the effect of making it easy to avoid the ball clogging.

In this respect, the shape of the window portion 162d is such that only one of the pair of left and right configurations of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper protruding portion 376) can be visually recognized and the other cannot be visually recognized. The shape is also acceptable. In this case, since it is possible to make the player predict the flow-down path of the ball on the side that cannot be visually recognized, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is defined as the rear direction (the forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336). The case has been described in which the rotation of the ball in the forward direction is suppressed by sliding, and the amount of rotation of the ball in the state immediately before falling can be suppressed so that the player can see the ball as if the ball is temporarily stopped. It is not limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured as the forward direction (the opposite direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

That is, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 can be opened by displacing the ball guide portion 371b in the forward direction and causing the ball guide portion 371b to enter below the third flow path forming portion 336. The upper protruding portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to project to the branch point BP1 side when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced such that the ball does not ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the upper projecting portion 376 is displaced in the front-rear direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, and the probability change detection sensor SE11. All you have to do is to secure a passageway for the ball.

In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward direction can be accelerated by sliding with the ball when the ball guide portion 371b slides and displaces. It can be shown to the player as if it immediately dropped (smoothly dropped).

In the first embodiment, in controlling the rotating member 620, the extending portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 in consideration of the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is turned off. Therefore, the control mode in which the drive motor 631 is de-energized is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, the drive motor 631 is rotated weakly for a short time, and then stopped. Is also good. As a result, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (position in the production standby state).

In the above-described first embodiment, in the second operation unit 700, the case where the grooves of the front upper sloping portions 714, 751 and the receiving sloping portions 762 are straight tilted grooves has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, by using a groove having a partial curve that curves to the front side at the lower end side, the displacement of the rendering device 780 is combined with the vertical slide displacement, the front and rear slide displacement, and the posture displacement in the front and rear direction. It can be a displacement mode.

Various shapes are exemplified as the shapes of the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762. For example, it may have a V shape (or an inverted V shape) when viewed in the left-right direction, or may have an S-shaped curved shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, the start timing of the reversing operation is delayed by the magnetic force, so that the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member). 787), the case of displacing so as to avoid the collision has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a design method for avoiding collision between members may be set by setting the number of gears of the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the second operation unit 700, the case where the rotation tip of the rotation arm member 720 is arranged at the left and right position that coincides with the left and right center of the rendering device 780 in the projecting state as the upper end position will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation tip of the rotation arm member 720 is arranged to the right of the center of the rendering device 780, so that the metal rod 702 that supports the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the right side of the lifting plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to secure a long support position interval with the rotating arm member 720. Accordingly, the lift plate member 740 can be stably supported.

In the above-mentioned third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion that does not change its shape and is visually recognized by the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individual united state or the one united state. Also, in the state of one union, the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are mutually made by making the bulging portion 824a partly (central portion) visible to the player. The case of designing to have a shape that suppresses discomfort has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in a positional relationship in which the display unit is disposed in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging portion 824a is changed by changing the irradiation state (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the display mode of the display portion of the object visually recognized by the bulging portion 824a is changed. Since it can be changed by switching, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of production.

In addition, for example, with respect to either one of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880, the design of the covering portions 875 and 885 is changed so as to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, and The extended portion may cover the bulging portion 824a. In this case, since the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player in either the individual combined state or the one combined state, the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion The degree of restriction on the design freedom of the portion 885 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 of the third operation unit 800 are attracted by the magnetic force has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the united state may be maintained by the load due to the concave and convex engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the biasing force of the spring member.

In the above-described first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not always the case. Not a thing. For example, by adopting an operation mode that gives momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or more than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an operation mode that gives momentum, for example, as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation), rotation control in the opposite direction may be performed. In this case, it is possible to counteract the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and to generate a load in the direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is released radially outward from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the attraction due to the magnetic force.

In the first embodiment, as a device for suppressing the wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the case where the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to be displaced in the radial direction before the reversing operation has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the action line of the magnetic force can be written on the plane where the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameter of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state Even if the reversing operation occurs before the directional displacement, the magnetic force generated between the plurality of (five) decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so that the wobble that occurs in the third operation unit 800 during the switching rotation operation is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 perform the 180-degree reversing operation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the reversing operation is carried out at 120 degrees so that they are united again. In this case, before and after the switching rotation operation, the viewing sides of the decorative members 870 and 880 are the same in the front view, but the viewing angles of the covering portions 875 and 885 are different (for example, before the operation, the right direction is 60). Degree, 60 degrees left after the operation) can be performed.

Further, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the lengths to be non-common, or forming ranges and shapes of the bevel teeth portion 854c to be non-common, the switching rotation operation is performed 180 times. The decorative members 870 and 880 that reconstruct the united state by the reversing operation of the degree and the decorative members 870 and 880 that reconstruct the united state by the reversing operation of 120 degrees may coexist. For example, among the five decorative members 870 and 880, one decorative member 870 and 880 is configured to be inverted by 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to perform the switching rotation operation. It may be configured to be inverted by 180 degrees.

The angle of the reversing operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It may be 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, 0 degree, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a left-right asymmetrical position above the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 in a left-right pair, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left side, the right side, or the lower side of the outer rotating member 840, which may be arranged symmetrically, or the outer rotating member 840 may be rotated. You may make it arrange|position on the side which opposes on both sides of the axis (opposite side).

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured with a common shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the supported hole 854a and the guide hole 854b in which the linear motion member 833 that slides along the metal rod 832 is disposed have different shapes, and the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rod 832 is determined by the linear motion member. You may make it produce a difference between 833.

For example, by designing the supported hole 854a to be formed as a long hole or a hole having a large diameter, and mixing the intermediate arm member 850 whose design of the guide hole 854b is correspondingly changed, the linear movement in the switching rotation operation is performed. A difference can be provided in the displacement start timing of the member 833.

Thus, the decorative members 870 and 880 are provided with a difference in the displacement timing of the decorative members 870 and 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotary member 834 connected to the linear member 833 from the combined state to the radially outer side. Therefore, the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, since the load for removing the suction can be reduced, the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

Note that the displacement mode in which the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 are attracted to each other by displacement in the shearing direction (radial direction) need not be generated every time. For example, the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shearing direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (outward path), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation reaches the combined state (return path). May be.

For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 is changed from a combined state (a state where the rotating tip is arranged on the rotation shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position. Different manners of the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm part i850 rotates from the state in which the decoration members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position to the combined state. With this configuration, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that causes displacement in the shearing direction (radial direction) at the attraction portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment described above, the number of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 is described for each operation unit 600, 700, 800, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at a position where the extended portion 634b can be detected, or two detection sensors KS1 instead of three detection sensors 713. The following or four or more detection sensors 713 may be adopted. As an arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extended portion 634b can be detected in the intermediate effect state or the extended state of the first operation unit 600 is exemplified.

Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be adopted, and instead of one detection sensor 813, a plurality of detection sensors 813 are arranged at positions where the detected portion 844 can be detected. It may be configured to. As the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging the five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, there are five types of arrangement (rotation) of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state of the third operation unit 800. It is possible to make a determination in five modes, which differ depending on the direction.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rolling of the sphere is continued regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gap between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower side surface of the upper surface 314 of the upper member 310 in the front side arrangement FP may be configured to have a length equivalent to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front side arrangement FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314, so that the deceleration action of the ball is enhanced. Therefore, the retention of the balls can be facilitated.

In the second embodiment described above, although it is not described that the ridge is formed inside the first flow path forming portion 2334, the ridge for decelerating the sphere is provided to protrude in the first flow path forming portion 2334. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the arranging height of the ridges is brought into contact with either the sphere that rides on the slide member 2420 at the front position FP or the sphere that rides on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is located at the rear side BP. Alternatively, the height may be set so as not to contact the other. In this case, the deceleration action due to the protrusion can be generated in either the state where the slide member 2420 is in the front side arrangement FP or the rear side arrangement BP.

In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 has been described as having the thin plate portion 371, the upper front protruding portion 3376b, and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c integrally formed, but the invention is not limited thereto. .. For example, a state in which the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper horizontal projecting portion 3376c, which are separate members, project and retract in the up-down direction in contact with the ball in accordance with the timing when the thin plate portion 371 is arranged at the front position and the rear position. And a state where they do not abut may be configured.

The front and rear arrangements of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are not limited in any way. However, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is erroneous when the rear side is the probability variation detection sensor SE11 as in the present embodiment. It is possible to easily avoid winning.

Although the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described in the fourth embodiment, the invention is not limited to this. For example, these may be configured as separate members and may be configured to perform a synchronous operation (interlocking) at the same timing. In addition, you may comprise so that it may slide-displace in the front-back direction.

In the fourth embodiment described above, when the slide members 4371 and 4375 are slid and displaced at the timing when the sphere passes backward on the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the case where the sphere is returned to the front side due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a has been described. , But not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, when the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 can be guided to the additional incoming ball detection sensor. Profit that the player can get by the ball entering the additional ball detection sensor (for example, as a greater than the right obtained by entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11, multiple wins of big jackpot, The greater the degree of acquisition of the right to transition to the probability change state of the above), the more the attention to the sphere that has passed through the third flow path configuration unit 336 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the confluent flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction has been described, but the flow path is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, in the vicinity of the raised floor portion 6342, the connection point JP1 side may be configured as a curved flow path that faces rearward. Thereby, both of the sphere entering the connecting point JP1 from the raised floor 6342 and the sphere entering the connecting point JP1 from the second flow path forming section 335 can have a backward velocity component, The collision can prevent the occurrence of backflow.

Note that the connection point JP1 may be arranged at the center position on the left and right of the distribution device 6300. Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined backward and forward, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the balls gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down toward the front side, and it is possible to improve attention to the balls flowing down inside the distribution device 6300.

In the ninth embodiment, in the case where the guide slot 9616 is configured as a branch having a branch, and where the axis O1 passes through the guide slot 9616 is switched depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as the elongated hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as the elongated hole. And the case where the long hole is closed may be alternately switched. In this case, the axis O1 can be prevented from displacing along the wrong path, and thus the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can be prevented from displacing in an unintended manner.

For example, the guide elongated hole 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that restricts the displacement path of the axis O1 by closing one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the guide elongated hole 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be limited by the switching valve, so that it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced in an incorrect path, and thus the supported object is supported. It is possible to prevent the member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 194. FIG. 118 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and FIG. 119 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As for the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, each configuration used in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately used.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 that is formed in a shape and that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame 11 is provided. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 118) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 135) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 118) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a “sand beach stage” and a “deep sea stage”. ing. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is produced or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “sand beach stage”→“deep sea stage” is changed. “→Sand beach stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sand beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third pattern display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removing lever 52 for operating the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided at a lower portion of the lower plate 50 when viewed from the front. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, specifically, the configuration necessary for explaining the control example will be mainly described. It should be noted that, in addition to the configuration of which detailed description is omitted in FIG. 2 described above, the configuration already described in FIG. 2 described above will be described again for convenience of description. It is to be noted that, even in portions not described with reference to FIG. 118, elements similar to those in the configuration of FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 118, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls and windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. 118.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 135) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 118) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 118) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. Then, as the type of special symbol, there are provided two types of symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and a lottery for the first special symbol for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. It is executed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed for the entrance of the ball into the second entrance 640. That is, in the present control example, a plurality of special symbol lottery having different execution timings can be executed.

In the lottery of the special symbol (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) that is performed for entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not Along with the hit determination, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 10 times (10 rounds). When balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, a large amount of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount than usual The prize balls will be paid out. There are four types of special symbols, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D", and the added value after the big hit game ends after the big hit game state ends. As a result, a game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entrance is maximum for each special symbol type. It is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, a holding ball based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (first special symbol hold) or a ball entering a second ball entrance 640. If a reserved ball (second special symbol reservation) exists, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started.

In the present control example, when both the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold are present, the special symbol lottery using the second special symbol hold is preferentially executed. doing. In this way, by setting the priority in the order in which the lottery is executed according to the type of the special symbol, it is possible to execute only the special symbol lottery of the type with a high priority, depending on the type of the special symbol Depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, a difference is provided to the privilege given to the player, and, if configured to make the degree of establishment of the execution trigger of each special symbol type different, specifically, the first special symbol The execution timing of the second special symbol lottery is less likely to be established than the execution timing of the lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to give the player a more advantageous privilege than the first special symbol lottery. In the case of the configuration, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, so that the execution opportunity of the lottery advantageous to the player (second special symbol lottery) is also established. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the period in which the lottery advantageous for the player (the second special symbol lottery) is not executed becomes long and the game motivation deteriorates.

As shown in FIG. 118, the game area formed on the game board 13 (the area where the balls can flow down) is a left area (a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) by the variable display unit 80. , A right side area (a game area formed on the right side of the variable unit 80). The left side area is launched when the player plays a left-handed game, that is, a game in which the ball is fired by the firing solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a in a state in which the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1) is suppressed. In the right-side area, which is a game area where the ball can reach, the player uses the right-handed game, that is, the firing solenoid of the bullet firing unit 112a in a state in which the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1) is strengthened. This is a game area where the shot ball can reach when playing a game in which the ball is shot.

A through gate 67 is provided in the left side area, and the sphere flowing down the left side area reaches a lower area formed below the variable display unit 80. In this lower region, a first ball entrance 64 and a second ball entrance means 640 accompanied by an electric accessory 640a are provided. On the other hand, a through gate 67 and a general ball entrance 63 are provided in the right area, and the ball flowing down the right area is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 provided in the lower area. ing.

The first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area is arranged so that a ball flowing down the left side area is easier to enter than a ball flowing down the right side area. Approximately 1 in 15 balls enters the first entrance 64, and the balls that flow down the right side area are placed in positions where 1 in 100 balls can enter the first entrance 64. It is set up. Then, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the second ball entrance 640 provided in the lower region is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (shown in white in FIG. 118), the sphere is When the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 and is in the open state (displayed in black in FIG. 118), the ball is easier to enter the second entrance 640 than in the closed state. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 118, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a pair of blade members, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flowing down the left side area also flows down the right side area. The balls enter the second entering means at the same rate (about 2 out of 3 balls). When a ball enters the second entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

It should be noted that the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) is a position where a ball flowing down the right side region is easier to enter than a ball flowing down the left side region ( It is arranged below the right side region). Therefore, when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640, and as a result, the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is easily performed.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the regular symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next regular symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot D" are provided.

In any of the “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit C”, and “big hit D”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 10 rounds (10R big hit game). Further, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", as a value added after the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). .. The probability change state continues until you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B", as a value added after the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is transitioned to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), The time saving state continues for the first period (the period until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times).

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", as a value added after the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is moved to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), The time saving state continues for a second period (a period until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times) longer than the first period.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot D", as a value added after the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is transferred to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), The time saving state continues for a third period (a period until the special symbol lottery ends 80 times) longer than the second period.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol has increased, in other words, a state of the game that easily transitions to the special gaming state (10R jackpot gaming state). .. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the high probability state of special symbol. In addition, the "high probability state of the ordinary symbol" means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the ordinary symbol hitting game (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, and the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. It is a state in which it is easy to execute a game. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal probability high probability state", it is called the "normal symbol low probability state", and this indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is the normal state (a state lower than the high probability state).

In other words, if the probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set as the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery are usually ( It is a state in which it is higher than (at a low probability), which is the most advantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, if the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) is set as the game state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is low, but the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery Because of the high probability, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

In addition, even when the short-time state is set as the gaming state, the duration (time-short period) for which the time-short state continues is different depending on the selected jackpot type. "D" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types (bonus B to D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and then "bonus C" and "bonus B" are advantageous in that order. It becomes a big jackpot type.

In this control example, the number of times the special symbol changes as a condition for ending the time saving state, that is, the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes is a predetermined number (for example, 30 Although the time saving end condition (special figure variation number end condition) that is satisfied when any of the number of times, 50 times, 80 times) is reached, other time saving end conditions may be provided. For example, among a plurality of special symbol types, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of variation of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number may be provided. By configuring in this way, during the time saving state, that is, when the game is set such that the game per universal symbol is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed, the first special symbol is changed. It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending due to the fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific winning result different from the jackpot win, or when the number of times the specific winning result reaches a predetermined number, a time-saving end condition (lottery result end condition) May be provided. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and thus it is difficult for the player to predict how long the time saving state will continue.

In the present control example, as described above, when the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is configured to continue until the jackpot is won, but is not limited to this, the end condition of the time saving state described above Under the same technical idea as above, a probability variation end condition may be set, for example, a probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number, or a special lottery for ending the probability variation state is performed. The probability variation state may be ended when the lottery result is a lottery result for ending the probability variation state.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present control example, when the same big hit type (big hit A to big hit D) is selected, a short change time is selected as a change time of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the big hit game. A first game state that is easy to be played and a second game state that is easy to select a variation time longer than the first game state are configured to be settable. With this configuration, the number of special symbol lottery per unit time can be changed in the game state set after the jackpot game is over.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the “probable variation state” or the “time saving state” after the jackpot is finished according to the type of jackpot. Is set. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, the period of the "high probability state of ordinary symbols" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the time to open the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is lengthened, or the number of times to release the electric accessory 640a per one ordinary symbol is increased. Is also good.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 118). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the second entry slot 640 (starting winning) is being performed, or the variation is performed. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

When the ball enters the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is held up to a maximum of four times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and depending on the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the second special symbol (first symbol) is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special second separate symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. To be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols that imitate the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), a variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed for each of left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot. Furthermore, when the hit “big hit A” occurs, the same combination of probability variation symbols may be stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols configured with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols". When the 16R normal jackpot "big hit B" occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is always stopped and displayed. Further, even in the case where the "big hit A" is obtained, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be expected that the jackpot A has been achieved.

The manner of variable display of symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, and the number of symbol columns The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and, for example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character and a number are combined may be configured as the third symbol.

A small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front. The small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect for urging the frame button 22 to be pressed is executed. That is the case. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide a more easily understandable effect by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. In addition, by easily displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variable display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 120A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a black circular reserved symbol is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is up to 4 times each. Pending The number of held symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is the same as the number of held balls. In this control example, the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four in the first special symbol and four in the second special symbol, so that a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. It In addition, in FIG. 120(b), an example in which the reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds is shown, but the display position of the reserved symbols is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols are provided in a part of the main display area Ds. You may comprise so that it may be displayed.

In addition, it is not necessary to display all the reserved symbols that are stored on hold, and for example, a high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of a normal symbol that makes it easy to insert a ball into the second entrance 640 is set. If it is, only the reserved symbol of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved symbol) is displayed, and if the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol is set, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol It may be configured to display only (special figure 1 reserved symbol), or the degree of visibility of the reserved symbol corresponding to each special symbol type may be changed according to the game state, for example, of the normal symbol When the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) is set, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol is displayed so that the player can easily see it than the special symbol 1 reserved symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol When (normal state) is set, the special symbol 1 reserved symbol may be configured to be displayed more easily for the player to recognize than the special symbol 2 reserved symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the special symbol type that is mainly executed according to the set game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is made variable in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number. Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed according to the special symbol type so that the player can identify whether the displayed reserved symbol is the special symbol 1 reserved symbol or the special symbol 2 reserved symbol. It may be configured to, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand how many holding symbols corresponding to which special symbol type, each hold in the same display mode (ideally including the completely same display mode) You may comprise so that a design may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 131, various contents of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be described. First, the content of the winning percentage UP effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125.

In this control example, as described above, after the jackpot game is over, the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability change state, time saving state) is configured to be set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In the meantime, the production (battle mode production) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the probability variation state or the time saving state is set is executed. Then, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol can end, that is, the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied in the time saving state where the time saving number is 30 times (30th special figure variation) and the time saving state where the time saving number is 50 times In the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied (50th special figure change) and the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the time saving state where the number of time saving is 80 times (80th special figure change), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is It is configured to execute an effect (battle effect) that indicates whether or not to end.

In this battle production, the ally character and the enemy character battle, and when the ally character is defeated in the battle, it is notified that the high probability state of the normal symbol has ended. In addition, even when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the battle effect is executed, and the effect that the ally character wins the battle is executed. Furthermore, the high-probability state of the normal symbol does not end, and even when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, the battle effect is executed. In this case, the effect result (continuation) in which the teammate character does not win the battle and is not defeated is displayed.

In this way, during the execution period of the battle mode effect (high probability state of the normal symbol), by configuring the battle effect to be executed by various execution triggers, the effect executed during the battle mode effect period On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early. Also, by grasping whether or not the timing at which the battle effect is executed is a timing at which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, it becomes possible to predict the effect result of the current battle effect.

In the above-described battle mode production, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied, the battle production is executed even at the timing when the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied. However, if configured in this way, the high-probability state of ordinary symbols may end every time the battle effect is executed? There was a problem of giving the player a sense of crisis.

On the other hand, in this control example, the player is informed in advance of the winning rate in the battle effect executed during the battle mode effect. Then, the higher the pre-announced win rate, the more difficult it is for the teammate character to lose in the battle production executed during the battle mode production. With such a configuration, the battle effect can be executed while referring to the winning rate notified in advance.

In addition, in the present control example, the value of the winning rate that is notified in advance can be increased during the jackpot game and during a predetermined period (three revolutions of special map) after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Yes (it is configured to be able to execute an effect to increase the winning rate). That is, the effect for notifying the player of the winning rate of the battle effect in advance can be executed before the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. By configuring in this way, for example, when the information indicating the big hit winning is included in the pending symbols obtained at the end of the big hit game (in the case of holding consecutive hits), for example, it is set after the big hit game ends Even when the gaming state is the time saving state (30 times), the effect indicating that the winning rate is high can be executed before the special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is finished.

Here, the definition of the battle win rate in the battle mode production will be described. As described above, in this control example, the battle effect is configured to be executed under various conditions during the battle mode effect, and if the player loses in the battle effect, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, It is configured to shift to the state. In other words, when a short-time state (low probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is over, a battle effect is executed in which the final result of the short-time state is the defeat result. .. On the other hand, when the probability variation state is set, the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol does not end without passing the jackpot winning, so that the production result of the battle production is not defeated.

In addition, in this battle effect, a battle effect in which the effect result is victory when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is executed. In other words, the battle win rate is a numerical value of the expectation for winning the jackpot during the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set (during the battle effect mode). In other words, the battle win rate does not change according to the type of game state (probability change state or time saving state) set after the jackpot game is over, but the battle depends on the length of the period in which the high probability state of ordinary symbols continues. The winning rate will be variable. Therefore, the special symbol lottery is set before the short-time end condition is met, when the short-time short-time state (80 times short-time) is set, rather than the short-time short-time state (30 times short-time) set after the jackpot game is over. Since the probability of winning the jackpot is high, a high winning percentage is easily selected as the battle winning percentage. In addition, when the big hit is consecutive chan (holding continuous), it is confirmed that the big hit is won before the time saving end condition is satisfied, so it is high regardless of the gaming state set after the big hit game ends. The winning rate can be easily selected.

In the winning rate UP effect in this control example, by making it easier to select the battle winning rate corresponding to the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over, it is possible to suggest the gaming state to the player, and a low probability Then, the winning percentage that is different from the battle winning percentage that is actually set by the gaming state can be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player, for example, an effect that displays a low winning rate when the probability variation state is set. In addition, by configuring so that a winning percentage that is different from the battle winning percentage indicated by the actually set gaming state can be selected, the winning state UP effect allows the player to easily determine the set gaming state. Can be suppressed.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, even when the game state set after the jackpot game is the same, the data table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol variation is changed. It is configured to be able to. Then, by changing the data table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol variation, the execution frequency of the battle effect during the battle mode effect is variable. Specifically, as the special symbol variation executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the lottery result is out of place, the variation time (60 seconds) at which the battle effect can be executed is varied. By doing so, the frequency with which the battle effect in which the lottery result is “continued” is executed is made variable.

First, with reference to FIG. 121 to FIG. 123, the content of the winning rate UP effect executed during the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the present control example, the winning rate UP effect is configured to be executed during the jackpot game (first half period) and the predetermined period (second half period) after the jackpot game ends. In this control example, in the first half period (during a big hit game) of the winning rate UP effect, the winning rate UP effect is executed according to the game result of the player. Specifically, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an effect based on that the ball shot during the jackpot game wins the general entrance 63 or the specific winning opening 65a, and the result of the lottery is the effect. In the case of the lottery result indicating that the execution is performed, the winning percentage UP effect is executed.

In this way, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the winning percentage UP effect according to the game result of the player during the jackpot game (whether or not there is a winning in the winning opening) It is possible to enthusiastically perform a game to execute the winning percentage UP effect. Furthermore, in the present control example, when the ball enters the general entrance 63 during the jackpot game, it is easy for the player to interrupt the firing of the ball, that is, during the interval period provided between the round games. The winning percentage UP effect is executed more easily than when the ball enters the general entrance 63 at another timing (during a round game). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously shoot a ball during the jackpot game, and thus the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

In addition, the execution probability of the winning rate UP effect during the next round game is variable according to the number of times the winning rate UP effect is executed during the first round game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends without the win rate UP effect being executed, even though the appropriate game is being played during the jackpot game. ..

In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to enter the ball into the general entrance 63 by a right-handed game for winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game. Although the game board 13 is configured to be, the present invention is not limited to this, and an appropriate game method for causing a ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and an appropriate game method for executing a winning percentage UP effect. The game board 13 may be configured so that and are different. In this case, for example, during a jackpot game, it is easier to put a ball into the specific winning opening 65a when a right-handed game is executed than when a left-handed game is executed, and a left-handed game is a right-handed game. It may be configured so that it is easier to enter the ball into the entrance, which may be a chance to execute the winning rate UP effect, than when the game is executed.

In addition, in the present control example, the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is also configured to be an opportunity to execute the winning rate UP effect, and the ending condition of the round game (10 balls of one round game is performed during one round game. When more balls than "winning prize" win the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over-winning), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the winning percentage UP effect. With such a configuration, in addition to winning a large number of prize balls for the player, it is possible to execute an unprecedented game of aiming for over-winning in order to execute the winning rate UP effect. The interest of can be improved.

121(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is started. As shown in FIG. 121(a), in addition to the display mode showing the information for informing the player during the jackpot game, a display mode showing that the winning rate UP effect is executed is displayed.

Specifically, a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left side of the display screen, and “right hit” is displayed as a guide notification mode for guiding the player how to play the game during the big hit game. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that executing the right hitting game during the jackpot game is an advantageous game method for the player.

In addition, in the small display area Dm2, a round number notification mode is displayed to show how many rounds the round game is being executed, and in the small display area Dm3, the jackpot pattern (3rd stop) that is stopped and displayed this time is displayed. A winning symbol notification mode is displayed to show (stop display mode of symbols). In FIG. 121(a), since the example of the display screen immediately after the start of the first round of the big hit game executed after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed at “222”, “ROUND1” is displayed in the small display area Dm2. “222” is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In this control example, as a stop display mode of the winning symbol for indicating the big hit (stop display mode of the third symbol), an advantageous winning symbol (777) for notifying that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends. And, it is configured to be able to display a normal winning symbol (a square number other than 777 (for example, 222)) in which the player cannot identify the gaming state set after the jackpot game.

When the advantageous hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is confirmed that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, during the jackpot game and after the jackpot game, the winning rate UP effect is not executed and the probability variation state is executed. The effect (confirmation effect) for notifying the player that it is set is set is executed. In this way, by switching the contents of the effect executed during the big hit game according to the type of the winning symbol that is stopped and displayed when the big hit is won, an unnecessary effect for the player, that is, a probability variation state is set. Since it is possible to suppress execution of an effect that suggests whether or not the probability variation state is set after informing that it is easy to understand, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play. You can

In addition, in the present control example, the types of the winning symbols that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning are two types, that is, an advantageous winning symbol and a normal winning symbol, but three or more types of winning symbol may be provided, In this case, the probability variation state is set so that the degree of expectation is different, and the winning symbol type is set, or the probability variation state is set or the time saving state of a specific time saving number is set to the time saving state of the time saving number other than the specific time saving number. It is advisable to provide a winning symbol type so as to notify that there is a high possibility of being hit. With such a configuration, for example, when the winning symbol type that is likely to be set to the probability changing state or the time saving state of 30 times of saving time is stopped and displayed, another winning symbol type (for example, probability changing Compared to the case where the state or the number of times saved is 50 times the time saving state is highly likely to be set, compared to the case where the stop display is displayed, the number of special symbol changes after the jackpot game is over 30 times normal It is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the probability variation state is set when the high probability state of the symbol continues. In this way, by providing a plurality of winning symbol types, the winning symbol type and the gaming situation after the jackpot game are compositely discriminated to predict the currently set gaming state with higher accuracy. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game state.

In the display area HR2, a continuous chan notification mode indicating the number of consecutive chan of the big hit game is displayed, and in the display area HR3 an acquisition information notification mode for indicating information on the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive chan period is displayed. .. The number of consecutive chan is a jackpot that was won during the period (continuation advantageous period) during which the state (time saving state, probability variation state, jackpot gaming state) in which the game can be executed without the game state shifting to the normal state continues It indicates the number of times.

In this control example, the number of jackpots won during the continuous advantage period is cumulatively displayed as the continuous channel notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the continuous advantage period ends. The number of consecutive chan may be accumulated even when the jackpot is won (when the player returns) within a predetermined period (after shifting to the normal state). In this case, as the predetermined period, for example, a period until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 30 times, or a lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (maximum 4 pieces) acquired during the continuous advantageous period ( The period until the end of the special figure 2 lottery) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to add the number of consecutive chans even after the continuous advantageous period ends.

In the present control example, an example in which the number of jackpots is displayed as a number is used as the consecutive-champ notification mode indicating the number of consecutive chunks displayed in the display area HR2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an icon corresponding to the number of jackpots, Enables display of an icon corresponding to one big hit number (for example, a small icon), an icon corresponding to five big hits (for example, an icon), and an icon corresponding to ten big hits (for example, a large icon) Alternatively, the type and number of icons corresponding to the number of consecutive channels may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an icon (special icon) that is not displayed unless the number of consecutive chan reaches a specific number, so that the player is eager to play the game to display the special icon. It can be done.

Further, in the present control example, as a continuous Chan notification mode, it is configured to display the number of big hits (big hit count history) during the continuous advantageous period, but as history information of the game executed during the continuous advantageous period. , May be configured to notify other game history information, for example, past jackpot game type (number of rounds, game state set after the jackpot game end) executed during the continuous advantageous period, or It may be configured to display history information such as the symbol type (advantageous winning symbol, normal winning symbol) and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the big hit game, or the winning percentage displayed in the winning percentage UP effect. (%) history information may be displayed.

In FIG. 121(a), since the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning (first hit) in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is shown as an example, “bonus×1” is displayed in the display area HR2 and the display area HR3. "0010P (points)" is displayed as an acquisition information notification mode for indicating information on the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive Chang period.

Further, in the display area HR1, an effect status notification mode for showing the effect result of the winning rate UP effect is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, as an effect guide notification mode for guiding the effect content being executed, "win rate". To advance the battle to your advantage” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player who is playing the jackpot game that the winning rate UP effect will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner. In the example shown in FIG. 121(a), since the effect in which the winning percentage is added has never been executed, "0% winning percentage" is displayed in the display area HR1.

In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 121(a), the initial value of the winning rate displayed in the display area HR1 is set to “0%”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning jackpot type may be selected. Accordingly, a different value may be set as the initial value of the winning rate, and in this case, a gaming situation in which a high winning rate is likely to be displayed in the winning rate UP effect, that is, a case where the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is finished, It is good to set the initial value of the winning rate to be high. With such a configuration, by grasping the initial value of the winning rate displayed at the start of the winning rate UP effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the game state set after the jackpot game is over.

In this control example, the initial value of the winning rate is displayed immediately after the jackpot game is started (from the start of the first round), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific round of the jackpot game (for example, The winning percentage UP effect may be executed when the fifth round) is reached. Even if the winning percentage UP effect is executed, the initial value of the winning percentage is not displayed, and the initial value of the winning percentage is displayed when the first winning percentage addition condition is satisfied during the winning percentage UP effect. It may be configured to. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while enjoying which value is set as the initial value of the probability, and to display the initial value to the player who does not want to confirm the winning rate. It is possible to execute the jackpot game without any.

Here, in this control example, the game board 13 having the configuration shown in FIG. 118 is used. Then, the variable winning device 65 that is variably operated during the jackpot game is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the right hitting game can enter, and the win rate addition condition during the jackpot game is provided in the right area. It is configured so that it can be established when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63. Therefore, by arranging the variable winning device 65 at a position where both the ball shot by the left-handed game and the ball launched by the right-handed game can be entered (for example, the position below the electric accessory 640a). During the jackpot game, the player who wants to change the winning rate by the winning rate UP effect can perform the right-handed game, and the player who does not want to change the winning rate can perform the left-handed game.

In this way, by allowing the player to select the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the jackpot game, a production performed during the jackpot game while obtaining a predetermined number of prize balls during the jackpot game. By making it possible to make the effect contents of (winning rate UP effect) different, the effect executed during the jackpot game can be the content desired by the player.

In this case, it is advisable to display a display mode for informing the player of the relationship between the game method that can be executed during the jackpot game and the effect contents that are executed during the jackpot game. If you finish the big hit game with a winning percentage?%, the big hit game ends. If you finish the big hit game with the right hitting game, the winning percentage will be displayed.” It is good to display a comment in the sub display area Ds. With this configuration, it is possible to easily understand the game method according to the effect contents desired by the player.

Further, the rate at which the ball fired in the right-handed game wins the variable winning device 65 and the rate at which the ball fired in the left-handed game wins the variable winning device 65 may be different. For example, The right-handed game may be more difficult to win the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game. As a result, when a right-handed game is played than a left-handed game, the jackpot game period can be lengthened, so many balls enter the general entrance 63 before the jackpot game ends. It is possible to make it easier to perform, and it is possible to enhance the effect of winning rate UP effect. Further, the left-handed game may be configured so that it is more difficult for the ball to win the variable winning device 65 than the right-handed game. As a result, when the left-handed game is played rather than the right-handed game, it is disadvantageous to the player, so that the player can be positively made to perform the right-handed game, and as a result, the winning rate UP effect is produced. It is possible to provide a jackpot game in which the winning rate is easily variable. Therefore, the effect of the effect executed during the jackpot game can be enhanced.

In this control example, the content of the winning percentage UP effect executed during the big hit game is configured to be different according to the game method executed during the big hit game, but the game executed during the big hit game. If the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is variable according to the method and the game method is selectable by the player, the player has the same technical idea as this control example.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the content of the winning rate UP effect during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 121(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an effect with a variable winning rate is executed in the winning rate UP effect. In this control example, when a ball enters the general entrance 63 during the jackpot game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, and the result of the lottery is to execute the additional effect. In addition, the additional effect is configured to be executed. Then, as the effect mode of the additional effect, the effect mode in which the winning rate is varied (increased) or the effect mode for bustling is determined.

With such a configuration, for the player who is performing the jackpot game, based on the fact that the ball has entered the general entrance 63 during the jackpot game, other than prize balls (three) Since it is possible to give a privilege, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game during the big hit game. Further, as the effect mode of the additional effect, the effect mode for varying (increasing) the win rate displayed in the win rate UP effect and the effect mode for bustling are selectable (determinable), In the winning percentage UP effect, the winning percentage cannot be varied (increased), for example, even if the preset upper limit value of the winning percentage is reached and the winning percentage cannot be further increased. The additional effect can be continuously executed by using the lively effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being sharply reduced.

As shown in FIG. 121(b), when the ball enters the general entrance 63 during the big hit game, and the additional effect is executed in the effect mode in which the winning rate is variable (information), the capsule 801 is An image which is displayed in the main display area Dm and pops out of the capsule 801 in which the contents 801a indicating the variable winning rate value is displayed is displayed. In FIG. 121(b), the content 801a is displayed in a display mode of "10%" for indicating that the winning rate is increased by 10%. In the sub-display area Ds, the player is informed that an additional effect has been executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 63, and that the winning rate has been changed (increased) by the winning rate UP effect. A comment "Capsule GET!! Win rate 10% GET!!" is displayed as an informing mode for intelligible notification.

The diagram shown in FIG. 121(b) shows the state after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the diagram shown in FIG. 121(a) described above. From the state shown, the state where the number of rounds does not change and three balls newly enter the specific winning opening 65a and one ball enters the general winning opening 63 is shown. Therefore, in the display area HR3, the additional winning portion from the time point shown in FIG. 121(a) (three winning portions to the specific winning opening 65a and the winning portion to the general winning opening 63 are additionally displayed. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(a), the effect contents during the interval period during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 122A is a diagram showing a display screen during the interval period during which the winning percentage UP effect is being executed. In the present control example, it is easier to execute the additional effect by allowing the ball to enter the general entrance 63 during the interval, rather than entering the ball into the general entrance 63 during the round game. Is configured as follows. With such a configuration, during the jackpot game, even during the interval period during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the player is motivated to continue to shoot the ball. The operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved as a result.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), when the interval period is reached, a comment “capsule GET high probability state” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode indicating that it is a period (state) in which additional effects are easily executed. Is displayed. As a result, the player can be urged to shoot the ball eagerly to enter the ball into the general entrance 63 at this timing. In the example shown in FIG. 122(a), it is not that the additional effect is easy to be executed, but of the effect modes that are executed as the additional effect, the specific effect mode (the capsule 801 is displayed to which advantageous information is given to the player is added. The sub-display area Ds indicates that it is easy to execute the effect mode).

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily execute the additional effect internally, and as a result, the additional effect is performed in the specific effect mode (effect mode in which the capsule 801 is displayed) in which information advantageous to the player is given. Even if it is easy to execute, since it is possible to make the player think that the probability that the additional effect is executed in the specific effect mode is high, even during the interval period. , It is possible to have the player enthusiastically play a game to continuously shoot a ball. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific effect mode is more easily selected as an additional effect executed during the interval period than during the period other than the interval period without changing the probability that the additional effect is executed. You may do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(b), description will be given of display contents in the case where a lively effect mode (decorative effect mode) is displayed as an additional effect. FIG. 122(b) is a diagram showing the display content when the decoration effect mode is selected as the effect mode of the additional effect. In the present control example, as the decoration effect mode, an effect mode in which any one character is randomly selected and displayed from the characters simulating nine kinds of animals is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to display different characters even if the specific effect mode is not continuously selected as the additional effect, and thus it is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing. can do.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in the present control example, a process for restricting the same character to be not selected (difficulty) in a predetermined number (three times) continuously is executed as a decoration effect mode. .. The same character can be continuously selected a predetermined number (three times) only when the specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the randomly selected character and enhance the effect of the effect.

Here, as a condition (specific condition) in which the same character can be continuously selected by a predetermined number (three times), the upper limit value (upper limit winning ratio) of the winning ratio set in the winning ratio UP effect is currently displayed. Conditions that are satisfied are set when the difference between the winning rate (display winning rate) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (50%), or when the winning information for jackpot winning is included in the reserved special figure 2 hold. There is. As described above, it is possible to provide advantageous information to the player by using a plurality of decoration production modes used as lively productions during the big hit game without providing advantageous information to the player by itself. Then, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the decoration effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 122B, when the additional effect is executed in the specific effect mode, the elephant character 802 indicating the decorative effect mode is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display area HR4 is formed and displayed. The character history of the selected decoration effect mode is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 122B, in addition to the decoration effect mode (character 802) being displayed, the character history is displayed so that the player can determine the types of the decoration effect modes for the past two times. In FIG. 122(b), since the display screen at the time when the decoration effect mode is first displayed during the big hit game of this time is displayed, "-" is displayed in the character history display for the past two times.

In this control example, the display contents of the character history display is configured to be erased in one big hit game unit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be erased in one round game unit, for example. It may be configured to. In this case, the player cannot obtain the advantageous information using the decoration effect mode unless the additional effect is executed at least three times during one round game, so that the general entrance for the player It is possible to make a game eager to enter the ball into 63. Further, the display contents of the character history display may be maintained over a plurality of jackpot games. With this configuration, for example, when the jackpot game ends when the same character is displayed twice in succession, the same character can be displayed three consecutive times in the next jackpot game. It is possible to let the player play a game with high expectations.

In the present control example, when the same effect mode (character 802) is displayed as the decoration effect mode three times in succession, advantageous information is given to the player, so that the character history is displayed. Although the player is configured to be able to grasp the types of the decoration effect modes for three times, if the conditions for giving advantageous information to the player are changed by using the decoration effect modes, the conditions are changed. The display contents of the character history display may be different so that the player can understand the type of decoration effect mode within the corresponding range.

Further, in the present control example, as a condition for giving advantageous information to the player using the decoration effect mode, a condition is that the same effect mode (character 802) is continuously displayed for a predetermined number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a condition that is satisfied when different characters 802 are displayed in a specific order may be provided. In this case, which type (character 802) is the type of the decoration effect mode set in the additional effect to be executed next, a condition for giving advantageous information to the player using the decoration effect mode. It is advisable to provide a notification (suggestion) means capable of notifying (suggesting) the player whether or not the above condition holds. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Then, when the same effect mode (character 802) is displayed as the decorative effect mode of the additional effect three times in a row, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the win rate is greatly increased as information advantageous to the player. The effect is performed. FIG. 123(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the same character 802 is continuously displayed three times as a decorative effect mode of additional effect.

As shown in FIG. 123(a), a display mode indicating that the elephant character 802 has been displayed three times in a row as the character history display is displayed in the display area HR4, and the decoration is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment of "carabingo achievement" is displayed as an effect result display mode for indicating that the effect has been successful using the effect mode. Then, "+30%" is displayed as the display mode 802a indicating that the winning rate is variable (increased) by 30% as the result of this time, and the already-displayed winning rate is increased by 30% in the display area HR1. 40%" is displayed.

In this control example, the additional effect shown with reference to FIG. 121(b), that is, the additional effect is executed in an effect mode (specific effect mode) in which the winning rate can be varied (increased) as the effect result of one additional effect. 123(a), that is, when the additional win shown in FIG. 123(a), that is, when the winning percentage is varied (increased) based on the results of the additional effects, the winning percentage is increased. Is configured. With such a configuration, even if the additional effect is executed in the decoration effect mode during the jackpot game, it is possible to sufficiently increase the winning rate by the time the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot can be achieved. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game motivation of the player who is playing the game is reduced by the effect contents of the additional effect.

When the final round (10 rounds) of the jackpot game is finished, the ending screen of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed. FIG. 123(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 123(b), in the ending screen of the jackpot game, the main display is a display area HR1 in which the winning percentage increased during the jackpot game, that is, the winning percentage at the end of the first half period of the winning percentage UP effect is displayed. It is formed near the center of the area Dm, and is displayed as "current winning rate 40%" in FIG. 123(b).

Then, the word "winning rate UP zone plunge" is displayed as a guide mode for indicating that the winning rate UP effect continues even after the jackpot game ends (rushes into the second half period). Further, in the small display area Dm1, the character "right hit" is continuously displayed as a guide notification mode for guiding the player to continue executing the right hit game even after the jackpot game is over. .. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game even after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the present control example, when the ball enters the general entrance 63 during the ending period of the jackpot game, the additional effect is not executed. There is. Specifically, the process for setting the presence/absence of the additional effect and the effect mode of the additional effect are executed in the same manner as in the other periods, but the display command for executing the additional effect is set. It is configured not to execute the process. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the winning rate displayed near the center of the main display region HR1 from suddenly increasing, and executing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Regarding the effect mode of the additional effect set during the ending period, the effect may be configured to be displayed as an interrupt in the latter half period of the winning percentage UP effect, or the additional effect set during the ending period. It may be configured such that only the amount of increase in the winning percentage in (1) is determined and the effect corresponding to the determination result is executed in the latter half period of the winning percentage UP effect. With such a configuration, even during the ending period of the jackpot game, it is possible to allow the player to play a game in which the player voluntarily enters the ball into the general entrance 63.

In this control example, the ending period of the jackpot game is used as an example of a period during which the additional effect is not executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the opening period of the jackpot game, or a round game of a specific round. A period in which the additional effect is not executed may be provided in a predetermined period such as a period, or a period in which the additional effect is not executed may be provided within the period in which the specific effect is executed. With such a configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute additional effects at different timings based on the timing of the ball entering the general entrance 63, multiple additional effects are executed in duplicate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production that is difficult for the player to understand from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124 and FIG. 125, the contents of the effect in the winning rate UP zone set after the jackpot game is finished will be described. This winning percentage UP zone is a winning percentage UP effect executed for a period (second half period) after the special jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (3 times) after the jackpot game, and the first half of the winning percentage UP effect. With respect to the winning rate (%) increased during the period, an effect for varying (increasing) the winning rate again is executed.

During this winning rate UP zone, each time one special symbol variation is executed, the effect for changing (increasing) the winning rate (slot effect) is configured to be executed, and three special symbols The effect of changing (increasing) the winning rate up to three times is executed before the change is executed. Further, during the winning rate UP zone, an effect for varying the winning rate in different effect modes according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation is configured to be executed, and a normal variation pattern (variation If the winning rate is variable (increased) when (time 10 seconds) is selected, and if the winning rate is variable (increased), the amount of the variable (increased) is determined by lottery. When a specific variation pattern (variation time of 11 seconds) is selected, it is determined that the winning rate is variable (increased), and only the variable amount is determined by the lottery, and the ascent determination effect is executed. I am configuring. In this way, the control process executed by the main control device 110 (special symbol lottery or variation pattern is configured by varying the effect result of the effect to be executed according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. The control result executed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be increased because it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode set by the voice lamp control device 113, by using the processing result of the control process for selecting the type). It is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, as compared with the case where the presentation mode of the presentation is set only based on the processing result of the processing.

Here, the content of the slot effect executed during the winning rate UP zone will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124(a) is a diagram showing effect contents of slot effects in the winning rate UP zone. As shown in FIG. 124(a), during the winning rate UP zone set after the jackpot game is over, as a guidance notification mode for guiding the fact that the present is in the winning rate UP zone in the sub display area Ds, "winning rate UP" The comment of "Zone" is displayed. Then, the remaining period notification mode for indicating the remaining period of the winning rate UP zone is displayed in the display area HR5. In FIG. 124(a), the period during which the first special symbol variation in the winning rate UP zone is being executed is shown, and in the display area HR5, excluding the effect (special symbol variation) being executed, the second two times. The character "Last twice" is displayed to indicate that the effect (special symbol variation) is executed.

Then, three variation regions (first variation region La, second variation region Lb, third variation region Lc) are formed in the center of the main display region Dm, and the win rate increases for each variation region. Values are dynamically displayed (variable display) from top to bottom. In this slot effect, the display mode (% symbol) that has been dynamically displayed (variable display) in the first variation region La and the third variation region Lc is normally stopped and displayed first. Then, when the display mode (% symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second variable region Lb that is stopped and displayed with a delay, and the same display mode (% symbol) is stopped and displayed in a straight line, the display mode (% symbol) The effect that the winning rate increases by the value indicated by () is executed.

In other words, in this slot effect, the winning rate is variable before the notification of whether or not the winning rate is increased, that is, in the period in which the display mode of at least one of the plurality of changing areas is dynamically displayed. The player is configured to be notified of possible candidates. With such a configuration, when the slot effect is executed, first, the player is expected to display a large value as a value that may rise, and the first variation region La and the third variation area Lc are stopped and displayed, and then the second variation area Lb is stopped and displayed while expecting the winning rate to increase. Therefore, even when a production mode in which the winning percentage is not increased is selected, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the slot production. In addition, since a plurality of values (% symbol) can be displayed as a value (% symbol) in which the winning percentage may increase, a value different from the value (% symbol) in which the winning percentage is actually increased ( % Pattern) can also be displayed. Therefore, for example, by displaying a value (% symbol) that is larger than the value (% symbol) at which the winning percentage is actually increased, the slot effect ends while expecting the player to greatly increase the winning percentage. Up to the player can be interested.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 124(a), "10%" and "20%" are double displayed as the value (% symbol) with which the winning rate may increase. Therefore, when the% symbol indicating “10%” is stopped and displayed at the specific position (the position where the three% symbols are stopped and displayed on the straight line) in the second variation area Lb, the win rate is 10%. If the% symbol indicating "20%" is stopped and displayed, the winning result is increased by 20%, and other symbols (for example,% symbol indicating "30%", When the “off symbol” indicating “off” is stopped and displayed, the effect result of the slot effect this time is an effect result that does not increase the winning rate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(b), description will be made of contents of effects when the effect result of the slot effect is an effect result which does not increase the winning rate. FIG.124(b) is the figure which showed the display screen in case the production result of this time slot production becomes the production result which does not raise a winning rate. As shown in FIG. 124(b), when the effect result of the slot effect is the effect result (out) which does not increase the winning rate, the same% symbol is linearly drawn in the three variable regions (La to Lc). A display mode in which the display is not stopped is displayed, and a comment of "sorry" for notifying that the effect result is off is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, in FIG. 124(b), as the display mode when the effect result is out, an example is shown in which the off pattern of the "cross mark" is stopped and displayed at the specific position of the second variation region Lb. Without limitation, by displaying the% symbol (for example, “80%”) of the type that is not stopped and displayed in the first fluctuation region La and the third fluctuation region Lc at a specific position, the effect result is out. May be indicated.

Further, at a specific position of the second variation area Lb, a composite symbol (for example, “10% and 20%”) in which a plurality of% symbols are compounded may be stopped and displayed, and FIG. In the example shown in ), when this composite symbol (“10% and 20%”) is stopped and displayed, a% symbol indicating 10% and a% symbol indicating 20% are displayed on a straight line. Therefore, the effect of increasing the winning rate by 30% in total is executed. With such a configuration, at the time when the first variation region La and the third variation region Lc are stopped and displayed, if there are a plurality of values that may increase the winning rate, at most all of the values Since it is possible to increase the winning rate by the total value obtained by adding up, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the slot effect. In addition, as the symbols stopped and displayed in the second variation area Lb, a universal symbol (for example, a symbol imitated as “ALL”) compatible with all% symbols may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125(a), the rise confirmation effect executed during the winning rate UP zone will be described. FIG. 125(a) is a diagram showing the display content executed during the rise confirmation effect. This rise confirmation effect is an effect executed when a specific change time (11 seconds) is selected as a change pattern of the special symbol, and is different from the above-described slot effect when the effect is executed. , It is an effect that the winning rate is decided to increase. Therefore, when the rise confirmation effect is executed, the player is first informed that the winning rate will increase, so that the player who cares whether or not the winning rate increases can be relieved. A game can be executed. After that, a suggestion effect that suggests how much the winning rate increases in the current rise confirmation effect is executed.

When the rise confirmation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the character of "winning rate UP confirmation" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying that the probability will increase near the center of the main display area Dm. A suggestive effect mode in which the increase value is variably displayed in the display area HRa is displayed below as a suggestive effect that suggests a value for increasing the probability. In this suggestive presentation mode, a "plus mark" and "%" are fixedly displayed, and a two-digit numerical value is variably displayed in the meantime, and the stopped two-digit numerical value is displayed. It indicates the increase in the winning rate.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this suggestive effect mode, the variable area of 1s and the variable area of 10s are variably displayed in different modes. Specifically, the value that is finally stopped and displayed is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, and a display command including value information indicating the determined value is transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the value information included in the received display command, and determines the variable display mode based on the determination result. More specifically, the value of the tens place and the value of the tens place included in the value information are individually discriminated, and when each value satisfies a predetermined condition, for example, the value of the tens place is 3 or more. Alternatively, when the value of 1 is 6 or more, the variable display mode is determined such that the value on the side that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is stopped and displayed first, or the variable display mode of 1 is selected from a plurality of variable display modes. The variable display mode is determined at random.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of effect patterns until the suggestion effect mode is stopped and displayed on the display control device 114 side, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased. Without, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Then, in the final variation of the winning rate UP zone, while showing the effect result of the winning rate UP effect that has been executed during the big hit game, in the mode according to the effect result, the effect mode executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol Is determined. Here, with reference to FIG. 125(b), the effect contents after the third winning rate increase effect is finished in the final variation of the winning rate UP zone will be described. FIG. 125(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a character to be used in a performance zone to be executed next is selected based on the confirmed winning rate after the winning rate UP effect is finished. is there.

In this control example, as an effect that is executed while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, a battle zone is set after the winning rate UP effect is finished, and an effect in which a ally character and an enemy character develop a battle. (Battle production) is executed. And the above-mentioned winning percentage UP effect is an effect for showing the victory expectation degree of the teammate character in the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), when the winning rate UP effect is finished, a display screen is displayed in which the enemy characters to be played in the battle zone are selected in the next battle zone. A display area HR6 is formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a plurality of enemy characters corresponding to the final display win rate are displayed. Below that, the enemy character of the battle zone to be executed next is selected. As a guide mode for indicating that the player is performing, the character "determine enemy in battle zone" is displayed.

Here, the contents of the display area HR6 will be described in detail. “Monster” is an enemy character ch1 corresponding to a display win rate of 59% or less, and an enemy character corresponding to a display win rate of 60% to 89%. "Rabbit" is displayed as ch2, "turtle" is displayed as the enemy character ch3 corresponding to the display win rate of 90% to 99%, and "carrot" is displayed as the enemy character ch4 corresponding to the display win rate of 100%. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 125(b), since the display win rate displayed in the display area HR1 is "60%", "rabbit" is selected as the enemy character in the display area HR6.

As described above, in this control example, as the effect executed during the winning rate UP zone, the first effect (slot effect) that notifies whether or not the probability increases after informing the value that the probability can increase. And a second effect (an ascertaining effect of rising) that notifies the hit of rising after notifying that the probability increases. Therefore, the content expected by the player can be greatly changed depending on the type of effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the type of effect executed during the winning rate UP zone (slot effect, rise confirmation effect) is configured to be determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effects executed during the winning percentage UP zone without increasing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the present control example, since the type of effect executed in the winning rate UP zone is changed in accordance with the change pattern (change time) of the special symbol change, the effect period of each effect is It is necessary to prepare in advance according to the variation pattern of the corresponding special symbol variation, for example, the variation pattern (variation time) in which the first effect is executed is 10 seconds, and the variation pattern in which the second effect is executed ( (Variation time) is defined as 10.1 seconds, and it is possible to make the production period of the first production the same as the production period of the second production by making it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the length of the variation time. .. With such a configuration, the effect period of the first effect and the effect period of the second effect can be the same, and therefore, when the command indicating the same variation pattern is received from the main control device 110, the sound is output. Even if the lamp control device 113 adds a process for determining the type of effect executed during the winning percentage UP zone, the effect data of the first effect and the effect data of the second effect are produced in the effect period of the same length. Therefore, it is not necessary to generate new effect data or separately provide special effect data. Therefore, the data amount of the effect data can be reduced.

Further, in the present control example, according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol lottery, different effects are configured to be executed, but not limited to this, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery (big hit) , Different effects may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the result of the special symbol lottery depending on the type of effect executed in the winning rate UP zone, and therefore, to execute the effect that further attracts the attention of the player. Is possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126 to FIG. 129, the contents of the effect of the battle mode executed while the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set will be described. The battle mode is an effect mode in which a teammate character and an enemy character repeat a battle, and is a mode effect executed during a high probability state of a normal symbol. In other words, it is a mode effect that can be executed regardless of whether the game state is the time saving state or the probability variation state. While the battle mode is being executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the set game state is the probability change state or the time saving state.

Then, the battle effect is executed during the battle mode, and when the teammate character "defeats", the high probability state of the normal symbol ends at that point and the normal state is entered. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, an effect in which the teammate character "wins" is executed in the battle effect. Furthermore, as a result of the battle production, when the enemy character escapes and "Continue" that does not settle the game is selected, the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot (wins out), and The high probability state of ordinary symbols does not end. In other words, in the state where the ending condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol is not satisfied, even in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery fails to win, the battle effect is executed.

With this configuration, the battle effect can be executed at various occasions, so that it is possible to prevent the situation where the battle effect is not executed at all during the battle mode. Further, when this battle mode is executed, the lucky point is configured to be incremented by 1 each time the special symbol variation is executed, and when the lucky point reaches the specific value (100), It is configured to notify the player that the probability variation state is set as the game state. This lucky point is configured to be able to add a plurality of points during the change effect of the special symbol, in addition to the addition of 1 every time the special symbol change is executed.

That is, since at least at least 1 is added every time the special symbol variation is executed, it is possible to notify that the probability variation state is set without fail when the battle effect continues for 100 variations. In addition, as the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, when the effect to which the lucky points are added is executed a plurality of times, the probability change state is set even if the number of special symbol changes is small. It is possible to notify that. In this way, by differentiating the timing of notifying that the probability variation state has been set, according to the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect to be executed, it is possible to quickly grasp and understand that the current gaming state is the probability variation state. It is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the variable effect to be executed.

FIG. 126(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the battle mode is started. As shown in FIG. 126(a), when the battle mode is executed, “during battle mode” is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the current effect mode in the display area HR7 formed above the main display area Dm. Is displayed, and in the display area HR8 formed therebelow, "rabbit" is displayed as the type of the enemy character to compete during the current battle mode. As shown in FIG. 125( b ), the type of the enemy character who competes during this battle mode is the type of the enemy character selected based on the effect result of the winning percentage UP effect. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 126(a), the display screen is when the enemy character type “rabbit” selected when the display win rate is 60 to 89% is selected.

A display area HR6 is formed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, and "1P" is displayed as the accumulated value of the lucky points. This lucky point is configured so that 1 is added every time the special symbol fluctuation is started, and actually, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the small display area Dm5 is shifted. An effect in which one lucky point is added is executed according to the operation mode. In this way, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol shifts, since the lucky point is configured to be incremented by 1, the lucky point is updated corresponding to the number of times the second special symbol changes. It is possible to make the player easily think of it as something. As a result, by updating the value of the lucky points according to the execution contents of the fluctuation effect, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the accumulated value of the special symbol fluctuations after the battle mode is set, so the game state is a time saving state. Even if is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at which timing the time saving state will end.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment “Probable change confirmation when lucky point reaches 100P?” is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the effect contents of the lucky point acquisition effect among the effect contents in the battle mode. It With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the effect contents when the battle mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 126(b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (disengagement stop) during the battle mode. In this FIG. 126(b), the effect of adding lucky points is executed at the stop display timing of the special symbol, and the character "+2P GET" is displayed in the display area HR9 as a display mode indicating that two lucky points are added. Is displayed, and the total number of lucky points displayed in the display area HR6 is displayed by adding 2. In this way, by making it possible to add a plurality of lucky points in one special symbol change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current number of special symbol changes, so at which timing the time saving state It can be difficult to predict whether it will end.

Next, the content of the battle effect executed during the battle mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127A is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the battle effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 127(a), when the battle effect is executed, the display mode in which the boy 810 who is an ally character and the rabbit 811 which is an enemy character battle is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, The word "Start" is displayed to indicate that the battle will start. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "time saving ends when losing in battle" indicating the effect contents of the battle effect is displayed.

As mentioned above, as the effect result of the battle effect, "win" indicating that the jackpot is won, "defeat" indicating that the time saving state ends, and "continuation" in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol continues There are three types. When "win" is selected as the result of the battle effect, the display mode shown in Fig. 127(b) is displayed. FIG. 127(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the teammate character wins in the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 127(b), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, the characters "Victory!!" are displayed as a result display mode for showing the effect result of the present battle effect. Then, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the boy 810 has won the rabbit 811 is displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "big hit" indicating that the big hit has been won in the special symbol lottery is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stopped display mode (555) showing the big hit. In this case, since the jackpot game is executed, the display area HR6 for indicating the cumulative number of lucky points is not displayed.

On the other hand, when "defeat" is selected as the result of the battle effect, the display mode shown in FIG. 128(a) is displayed. FIG. 128A is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 128(a), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, the word "defeat" is displayed as a result display mode for showing the effect result of the current battle effect, In the center of the main display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the boy 810 is defeated by the rabbit 811 is displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “battle mode end” indicating that the time saving state has ended is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode (361) indicating the missed winning. In this case, since the normal state is set from the next special symbol variation, the display area HR6 for indicating the cumulative number of lucky points is not displayed.

Further, when "continue" is selected as the effect result of the battle effect, the display mode shown in FIG. 128(b) is displayed. FIG. 128B is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the enemy character escapes in the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 128(b), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, the character "CONTINUE" is displayed as a result display mode for showing the effect result of the present battle effect, In the center of the main display area Dm, a display mode in which the rabbit 811 has escaped from the boy 810 is displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "Battle Continuation!!" indicating that the high probability state of the normal symbol continues is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode (361) indicating the missed winning. In this case, since the high probability state of normal symbols continues, the display area HR6 for indicating the cumulative number of lucky points is continuously displayed. Further, when the effect result in the battle mode is “continuation”, an effect in which lucky points are added is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 128B, a display indicating that 5 lucky points are added “+5 PGET” is displayed as the mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(a), description will be made of effect contents executed when the lucky points reach 100P during the battle mode. FIG. 129(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the lucky point reaches 100P in the battle mode. In this control example, the lucky point is configured to reach 100P only when the game state is the probability change state, and when the lucky point reaches 100P, in a state where the teammate character is not defeated in the battle production. Enter the "invincible zone" to indicate that there is something.

In the present control example, as described above, even when the jackpot in which the probability state is set as the gaming state is won, the third symbol showing the jackpot win is stopped in the normal winning symbol other than the advantageous winning symbol (for example, 777). It may be displayed. In this case, as in the case of winning the jackpot in which the time saving state is set, a winning percentage UP effect is executed during the jackpot game, and a battle effect is performed against an enemy character corresponding to the effect result (display winning percentage) of the winning percentage UP effect. Plunge into a battle mode where In other words, during the battle mode, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current game state is the probability change state or the time saving state.

Then, during the battle mode, an effect of adding lucky points is executed. This lucky point has a value of "2P or more" as a part of the first addition effect in which the value is added by "1P" when a new special symbol variation is executed, and a part of the variation effect performed during the special symbol variation. The second addition effect to be added is cumulatively added, and when the cumulative addition number of the lucky points reaches “100P”, the “invincible zone” where it is determined that the probability variation state is set is reached. ..

In other words, when the battle mode is entered in the state where the probability variation state is set, the timing at which the current gaming state is informed as the probability variation state according to the execution frequency of the second addition effect described above ( The timing to enter the invincible zone) will be different. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the battle mode expects that the ally character will not be defeated by the battle effect, and expects that a lot of additional effects are executed so that the lucky point reaches 100P. As a result, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the content of the shortening zone effect executed during the shortening mode will be described. FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the shortened zone effect. This shortening zone is an effect that is executed during the shortening mode, and is a state in which the probability change state is fixed (normal probability is 100 times or more, which is higher than the maximum number of times (80 times) that the state is in the time saving state. It is an effect that is executed in the state (while performing).

In this control example, when the period in which the probability variation state continues for a predetermined period (100 times), the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be switched, It is configured so that the variable time shorter than the data table referred to during the battle mode can be easily selected. Specifically, the variable time of 5 seconds is determined (selected) regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. Thereby, the number of special symbol lottery per unit time can be increased, so that the player can efficiently play the game.

In this shortened zone effect, as shown in FIG. 129(b), an attack standby effect is displayed in which the posture in which the boy 810 mounts an attack on the enemy character 811 of the battle opponent is displayed. That is, in the state in which the shortened zone effect is being executed, the probability variation state is fixed as described above, and thus the battle victory is fixed even if the battle effect is executed. Therefore, the attack standby effect is executed, and the battle effect is won in a short period (5 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, the content of the characteristic effect among the button effects for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 will be described.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 in which an operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by a player is provided, and an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by the player operating the operation means can be executed. Then, as the operation effect, there has been proposed one that allows the player to operate the operation means by various operation methods. For example, an operation effect in which the effect is executed by continuously operating (pressing) the operation means for a predetermined period. There is (long press production etc.).

In this long press effect, the effect lottery is executed when it is determined that the elapsed time after the operation means is pressed has passed the predetermined period, and the effect is executed based on the result of the lottery. In this case, if the player releases the operation means for a moment, the operation duration time of the operation means is reset, so that the operation effect is executed for the player who operated the operation means again. There is a problem that it becomes necessary to wait until the time elapses, and the motivation for operation decreases.

In addition, in such an operation effect, the operation effective period is generally defined as the effect period (a period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means), and the entire operation effective period is defined in the entire operation effective period. In the case where the highest condition of the operation effect is satisfied when the operation means is operated, if the operation means is released even once during the effective operation period, it becomes impossible to satisfy the highest condition. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to operate is significantly reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the operating means is operated at a plurality of timings within the operation valid period, and it is determined that the operating means is operated at that timing. In this case, the production lottery is executed. With such a configuration, as in the past, it is possible to surely perform the effect lottery at all timings for the player who is operating the operation means during the entire operation valid period, and at the same time. Even for a player who has released the operation means, depending on the timing of the release, it is possible to execute the effect lottery at all timings. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the operation means again.

Further, as described above, by configuring whether or not the operation means is operated at a plurality of timings within the operation effective period, the operation means is continuously operated for one operation effective period. To perform the effect (long press effect), to perform the operation means to operate the operation means multiple times (continuous hit effect), to execute the effect to notify the timing of operating the operation means (timing push effect) You can Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect that causes the player to operate the operation means.

Further, in the present control example, when the player interrupts the operation on the operation means during the execution of the long-press effect (when the player releases the frame button 22), the duration of the operation to the operation means and the operation validity Based on the remaining period of the period, different effects can be executed for the remaining operation effective period. Specifically, if the predetermined condition is met when the frame button 22 is released in the middle of the long press effect, the continuous hit effect is executed. As described above, the frame buttons 22 are configured so that the operation effects indicating different operation methods (long press, continuous hit) can be executed within one operation effective period according to the operation content of the operation means by the player. Since a new operation effect can be executed for the player who has released his or her hand, it is possible for the player to easily participate in the operation effect with a new feeling.

FIG. 130(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a long press effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in the normal state. In FIG. 130(a), when the player continuously presses the operating means (frame button 22), the gauge indicating the specific stage information rises, and the gauge is being executed according to the degree of the gauge rise. The operation effect (long press effect) suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the display area HR12 formed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as a guide notification mode for guiding the operation method to the operation means for the operation effect being executed, "hold the spirit to hold. The character “RO” is displayed, and in the long press image NG, a button image simulating the frame button 22, a comment “long press”, and an “arrow image” that schematically shows the operation method for the button image. Is displayed, and a time gauge TG for displaying the length of the effective operation period set for the current long press effect is displayed below the display.

This time gauge TG informs the player of the remaining period of the operation valid period by decreasing the specific display area (displayed in black in the figure), and the display screen of FIG. 130(a) is long-pressed. Most of the time gauge TG is a specific display area (displayed in black in the figure) immediately after the production is started, but as time passes, the specific display area (black in the figure is displayed from left to right). The variable mode in which the (displayed with) decreases is displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining period of the operation valid period in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, of the operation valid period indicated by the time gauge TG, the elapsed period that has already elapsed is displayed in the elapsed display area (displayed in white in the figure). This makes it possible for the player to relatively easily determine how much the remaining period is relative to the entire length of the operation valid period.

Further, in the main display area Dm, a spirit gauge KG and a boy 810 are displayed as display modes in which the display mode is changed based on the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22 as a long press effect. It The spirit gauge KG is a display mode capable of displaying stage information of five stages. On the display screen shown in FIG. 130(a), the spirit gauge KG shows the display mode at the initial stage (displayed in black in the figure), and the variable condition of the display mode is based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. When is satisfied, the display mode of the spirit gauge KG is variably displayed. The variable display mode of the spirit gauge KG will be described later with reference to FIG. The energetic gauge KG is configured so that the display mode can be changed by up to 5 steps, and the upper limit step that can be changed in the operation effect (long press effect) is beforehand according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. Is set.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a result that is advantageous to the player (big hit, etc.), the upper limit step is set so that the number of steps in which the display state of the enthusiastic gauge KG can be easily increased. Is set. With this configuration, when the long press effect is executed, the frame button 22 can be motivated so that the number of times the display state of the spirit gauge KG is changed increases.

In addition, the boy 810 is configured so that the display mode can be changed in correspondence with the degree of change in the display mode of the above-mentioned spirit gauge KG. Specifically, the display mode is changed so that the boy 810 wears an aura, and thereafter, each time the spirit gauge KG rises, the size of the aura increases. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the effect result of this operation effect in a visually easy-to-understand manner.

When the player operates the operation means during the long-press effect, the display modes of the spirit gauge KG and the boy 810 are variably displayed as shown in FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player long presses the frame button 22 during the long press effect.

As shown in FIG. 130(b), if the player long-presses the frame button 22 during the long-press effect, the operation means (frame button 22) is operated at a plurality of timings within the operation valid period. Since the frame button 22 is pressed at the determination timing for determining whether or not it is determined that the operating means is being operated at the determination timing, a variable lottery is performed to determine whether to increase the spirit gauge KG. Done. Then, when the variable lottery is won, a variable effect in which the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG is increased is executed. The example shown in FIG. 130(b) shows a state in which the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG has risen to the second stage. The boy 810 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG.

In addition, the time gauge TG is displayed in a mode indicating that the remaining period of the operation valid period is decreasing (a mode in which the region indicating the remaining period (displayed in black in the figure) is gradually reduced). Here, in this control example, as shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), a mode in which the remaining period of the operation valid period is displayed without changing the size of the display area of the entire time gauge TG. Is configured to reduce. With this configuration, it is possible to display not only the remaining time of the operation valid period but also a mode (displayed in white in the figure) indicating the elapsed time of the operation valid period. Therefore, even when the remaining period of the operation valid period is not indicated by a specific number of seconds, a mode (white display portion) showing the time that has already elapsed with respect to the entire length of the operation valid period set this time is displayed. The remaining time of the operation valid period can be easily understood by the player based on the proportions of the mode indicating the remaining time and the (black display portion).

In addition, as in the present control example, when the progress status of the operation effective period is notified by using the time gauge TG, that is, the operation effective period is changed according to the degree of change in the display mode, not the specific number of seconds. By configuring to notify the player of the remaining period, it is possible to notify the player of different operation effective periods by using the same display mode only by executing the process of changing the variable speed of the display mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control processing for notifying the player of the remaining period of the operation valid period. Also in this case, as in the fifth control example, the elapsed time of the operation valid period can be displayed so that the remaining period of the operation valid period can be displayed to the player in correspondence with the variable speed of the display mode. It can be made easier to grasp.

In this control example, the remaining time until the operation valid period ends is displayed (indicated) by the time gauge TG, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as it is, and the remaining operation valid period may be recognized by the player by having a configuration in which the number is counted down as time passes. In addition, for example, the remaining time may be suggested to the player by changing the color of the button image included in the long-pressed image simulating the frame button 22 according to the remaining operation effective period. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the button image color is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the button image color is green. When the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the button image color is displayed in yellow, and when the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the button image is displayed in orange However, when the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the button image may be displayed in red. The remaining time until the operation valid period ends does not necessarily need to be suggested to the player. Since the display control can be simplified by omitting the indication of the remaining time of the operation valid period, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, when the operation valid period in which the player can operate the operating means is set, the time gauge TG is displayed so that not only the remaining period of the operation valid period but also the operation valid period is set. However, it is not necessary to display the time gauge TG in all cases in which the operation valid period is set, and for example, the operation effect in which the time gauge TG is displayed (normal The operation effect) and the operation effect in which the time gauge TG is not displayed (hidden operation effect) may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, even when the time gauge TG is not displayed, it is possible that the operation valid period is set, so that the player can positively operate the frame button 22.

Further, in the fifth control example, the player can be notified of the entire operation valid period by the time gauge TG, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the operation valid period can be displayed by the time gauge TG. You may comprise so that it may notify. With this configuration, it is possible to leave the possibility that the operation valid period is set even before and after the time gauge TG is displayed. Therefore, the operating means ( The frame button 22) can be operated, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the content of the operation effect executed when the player releases the long-press operation on the frame button 22 during the long-press effect will be described. FIG. 131A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player cancels the long press operation on the frame button 22.

FIG. 131A shows a case where the player cancels the long press operation, that is, releases the hand from the frame button 22 in a state where the remaining operation valid period (10 seconds) during the long press effect is 6 seconds. The display screen is shown. As shown in FIG. 131(a), in the vicinity of the center of the main display area Dm, a continuous hit image RG is displayed instead of the long press image NG (see FIG. 130(a)), and is formed above the continuous hit image RG. In the display area HR12, a character of "remaining continuous hits!" is displayed as a guide notification mode for guiding the operation method of the frame buttons 22 to prompt continuous hitting operation on the frame buttons 22.

By performing such a display, based on the fact that the player cancels the long press operation during the operation valid period, the operation method to be executed by the player during the remaining operation valid period is the long press operation. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the continuous hit operation, which is a different operation method, has been switched to.

Then, in the state shown in FIG. 131(a), that is, in the state where the display mode in which the operation method to be executed by the player is switched from the long-press operation to the continuous hit operation is displayed, the player executes the continuous hit operation, When the operation timing coincides with the determination timing set in plural within the operation valid period, the display screen shown in FIG. 131(b) is displayed. FIG. 131(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the continuous hit operation is performed after the operation content is switched to the continuous hit operation during the long press effect.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), when the variable condition of the display mode is satisfied by the repeated hitting operation, the effect of increasing the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG and the effect of changing the display mode of the boy 810 are long. It is continuously executed from the display mode during the push operation.

In this way, even if the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22) to be executed by the player is changed within one operation effective period, the same display mode is continued based on the operation result. Thus, by variably displaying, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the operation content is changed during a series of operation effects.

As described above, in the first control example, the player releases the long press operation after performing the long press operation on the frame button 22 during the operation valid period set for the long press effect. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the player to perform a continuous hit operation, which is an operation content different from the long press operation.

That is, in the operation effect in which one operation effective period is set, first, the first operation effect that prompts the first operation is executed, and the result of the first operation during the first operation effect and the remaining period of the operation effective period are On the basis of the above, the second operation effect for urging the second operation different from the first operation can be executed within the operation effective period. With this configuration, the player can operate the operation means with a plurality of operation contents within one operation valid period, and thus the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, the second operation effect is configured to be executed when it is determined that the first operation cannot be executed within the operation effective period. With such a configuration, a different operation is prompted to the operating means, compared to the case where the player who has not been able to perform the first operation is repeatedly executed the first operation effect that prompts the first operation. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation means.

In addition, the second operation effect is configured such that the second operation effect can be executed when it is determined that the remaining period of the operation effective period at the time when it is determined that the first operation cannot be performed is a predetermined period or more. There is. As a result, even though the second operation effect has been executed, it is not possible to secure a sufficient operation effective period for causing the player to execute the second operation, which reduces the player's willingness to play. Can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present control example, the determination for changing the display mode is performed at a plurality of timings in the operation valid period, and when it is determined that the operation means is operated at the plurality of timings. The display mode is variable.

With such a configuration, for example, as the first operation effect, an effect that prompts the player to perform a long press operation (first operation) on the operation means (frame button 22) is executed, and as a second operation effect. Even if the player is configured to execute an effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (frame button 22) (second operation), it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is only necessary to perform the process of switching the effect mode of the operation effect from the first operation effect to the second operation effect, and it is possible to share the determination process regarding the operation with respect to the operation means. Therefore, in one operation valid period, it is possible to easily execute the effect of prompting the player to perform different operation contents.

In this control example, it is determined whether or not the operation means is operated at a plurality of specific timings that are defined in advance within the operation valid period, and when it is determined that the operation means is operated, the display is performed. Since the determination for changing the mode is performed, even if the player is continuously operating the operation means (so-called long-press operation), the player operates the operation means. The display mode can be changed even in the state of continuous operation at short intervals (so-called continuous operation). In addition to this, operation in a period other than the specific timing is performed. In the case where a discriminating means (non-timing discriminating means for discriminating an operating situation at a non-specific timing) is provided and the operating means is operated at a specific timing based on the discrimination result of the non-timing discriminating means. The determination content for changing the display mode executed in step 1 may be different.

Specifically, the more the operating means is operated during the non-specific timing, the more easily the display mode can be changed when it is determined that the operating means is operated at the specific timing. With this configuration, the display mode can be changed more easily when the operation means is actively operated within the operation valid period regardless of the specific timing, so that the player can participate in the game. Can motivate.

Further, as described above, the operation valid period is formed so as to include at least the first period which is the specific timing and the second period which is the non-specific timing, and the operation means is operated during the first period. A first operation determination means capable of determining and a second operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means is operated during the second period are provided, and the determination result of the first operation determination means, the second operation determination The degree of change in the display mode may be changed based on the determination result of the means and the content of the operation effect (the operation content urged to the player). While the push operation is being urged, it is easier to change the display mode so that the operation to the operation means is discriminated by the second operation discrimination means, and the timing at which the player operates the operation means only at a specific timing as the operation effect content. During the period of pushing the push operation, it is preferable to make it difficult to change the display mode so that the operation to the operation unit is determined by the second operation determination unit.

With this configuration, the processing for determining the operation status of the player during the operation valid period is made common, and the operation effect content being executed and the operation content to the actual operation means are made to correspond to each other. It is possible to change the degree of change in the display mode.

In other words, since the processing for determining the operation status of the player during the operation valid period is shared, even if the player is performing a long press even during the period in which the effect of prompting the timing pressing operation is being executed. The operation can be executed. However, when the long-press operation is executed so that the first operation determining means can surely determine the operation to the operating means, the second operation determining means also determines the operation to the operating means. Therefore, when the effect of prompting the timing pressing operation is being executed, it is possible to make the display mode variable more easily by executing the corresponding timing pressing operation than by executing the long pressing operation.

Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to eagerly operate the operation means to perform an operation corresponding to the operation content instructed.

Further, when it is determined that the operating means is operated during the non-specific timing, when a process for making it difficult to change the display mode is executed, when the operation on the operating means is determined during the non-specific timing, To execute a performance that imposes a penalty on the player (for example, a performance that reverses the degree of change in the display mode or a performance that indicates that the display mode is difficult to change), and It may be configured to execute an effect that emphasizes and informs. With this configuration, it is possible to easily operate the operation unit with the operation content corresponding to the operation effect performed during the operation effective period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134, a flow of various effects executed in the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 132, the flow of the effect executed when the probability variation jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram schematically showing a flow of effects executed during a period from when the big hit variation in the case where the probability variation big hit is won until the special symbol change is executed a predetermined number of times (about 100 times) after the big hit game is finished. is there.

This first control example, as described above, the third symbol indicating that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot winning (winning jackpot in which the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is won) When it is stopped and displayed with a probability variation pattern (for example, "777") to be notified, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the probability variation jackpot is won or the normal jackpot is won (cannot be) with a regular symbol (for example, "222") It may be stopped.

Then, when the big hit in the normal symbol is won (when the third symbol indicating that the big hit is won is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol), the gaming state set (is done) after the jackpot game is in the definite state. The game state suggesting effect for suggesting whether or not there is a big hit game, or is configured to be executed during a special symbol change after the end of the big hit game. By configuring in this way, even if you hit the big jackpot that the probability variation state is not set after the jackpot game is finished (the time saving state is set), until the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends , It is possible to make a player play a game while expecting that the probability change state is set.

On the other hand, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the probability variation symbol, at that time, that is, before the jackpot game is started, it is informed that the current jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, so the above-mentioned game state suggestion Without executing the performance, during the big hit game, execute the big hit medium performance to congratulate that you have won the probability change big hit, and after the big hit game, execute the game state confirmation effect that informs you that the probability change state is set It is configured to do.

By configuring in this way, despite the fact that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot game is over, the game state suggestion effect will be executed and the player may be confused. Can be suppressed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), the jackpot fluctuation effect executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol, the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game period, and a predetermined after the jackpot game end It is configured to execute the effects of various patterns by changing the effect mode of the first period effect executed in the period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times).

For example, in the case where the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed as the probability variation symbol (777), as in the “effect pattern 1” shown in FIG. 132(b), during the jackpot game. As the effect, an effect of celebrating the probability variation jackpot is executed, and the invincible mode (see “Invincible Zone” in FIG. 129(a)) is set as the first period effect after the jackpot game. Then, after the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (after the end of the first period effect), the shortening mode (see "shortening zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is set.

On the other hand, in the case where the third symbol indicating that the big prize has been won in the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol (222), as in the “effect pattern 2” shown in FIG. 132(c), during the big jackpot game. Point production additional production (see FIG. 121 (b)) is executed as production, and the winning percentage UP zone (see FIG. 124 and FIG. 125) is used by using the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed three times. ) Is set, and then the battle mode (see FIGS. 126 to 128) is set as the first period effect.

And, in the example shown in FIG. 132(c), since the probability variation state is set as the game state, the shortening mode (see “shortening zone” in FIG. 129(b)) is set after the end of the first effect period. Is set. In this way, in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state, there is no loss in the battle mode during the battle mode (the high-probability state of normal symbols ends), so in the jackpot game production and win rate UP zone Therefore, it is easy to execute an effect indicating that the winning rate is high.

Further, in the present control example, the effect (see FIG. 126) in which lucky points are added is executed during the battle mode, and the setting is performed when the lucky points reach a predetermined number (100P). An invincible mode (see "invincible zone" in FIG. 129(a)) indicating that the game state being played is the probability change state is set. In addition, in the effect in which the lucky points are added, the first added effect in which the specific number (1) of the lucky points is added every time the variable effect is started, and the lucky points when the execution lottery is won 2 to 5) The second addition effect of adding is configured to be executable.

Therefore, if the lucky points reach a predetermined number (100P) before the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the jackpot game, as in the “production pattern 3” shown in FIG. 132(d), the battle occurs. The mode (a production mode in which it is difficult to determine whether the set game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state) is switched to the invincible mode (a production mode in which it is determined that the probability variation state is set). Then, after the end of the first effect period, the shortening mode (see "shortening zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is set.

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is won in the normal pattern and the battle mode is set after the jackpot game is over, the player is expected to reach the predetermined number (100P) of lucky points. A game can be played.

Further, in the present control example, when a specific jackpot type is selected among the cases where the probability variation jackpot is won, the probability variation symbol (777) is displayed as a jackpot symbol indicating jackpot winning. .. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery is selected with reference to the same variation pattern table as in the shortening mode.

Here, in the first control example, the battle mode is set after the jackpot game is over, and a game state suggesting effect is provided to suggest to the player whether or not the probability variation state is set during the battle mode. doing. Specifically, when the variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol lottery executed during the battle mode, the battle effect (see FIGS. 127 and 128) is executed, and the result of the battle effect Thus, an effect that suggests a game state to the player is executed.

That is, in order to execute the game state suggesting effect for suggesting whether the game state set after the jackpot game is the probability change state or the time saving state, the variation time of 60 seconds is selected during the battle mode. It was necessary to select the variation time of the special symbol lottery with reference to the variation pattern table to be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present control example, when a certain jackpot type is selected and the winning probability jackpot is won, the player is informed that the jackpot game is a probability variation jackpot by the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the battle mode will not be set later. And, if you win a certain probability jackpot selected a specific jackpot type, you can execute the shortened variation with reference to the variation pattern table referenced during the shortening mode, from the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is over. Is configured.

That is, in the first control example, the type of the fluctuation pattern table referred to during the probability variation state is made different based on the jackpot type of the probability variation big hit. Then, when the jackpot type that refers to the same variation pattern table as when the time saving state is set is selected, a notification that the jackpot game of this time is a probability variation jackpot by the end of the jackpot game When determining whether or not to execute, and performing an effect that notifies that it is a probability variation jackpot, the effect is executed in the flow of FIG. 132(b), and an effect that notifies that it is a probability variation jackpot is executed. If not, the effect is executed according to the flow of FIG. 132(c).

On the other hand, when the jackpot type that refers to the variation pattern table that is not referred to when the time saving state is set is selected, the effect is executed according to the flow of FIG. 132(e). doing. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the time efficiency of the special symbol lottery executed during the probability changing state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the flow of the effect executed when the short-time jackpot is won will be described. FIG. 133(a) schematically shows the flow of effects executed during a period when the special jackpot variation is performed a predetermined number of times (about 100 times) after the jackpot game is finished during the jackpot variation in the case of winning the short-time jackpot. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), even when the short-time jackpot is won, the effect is executed in the same flow as the "effect pattern 2 (see FIG. 132(c))" when the probability variation jackpot is won. In addition, if you win the short-time jackpot, the battle effect that is executed in the final short-time fluctuation (out of the special symbol fluctuations of 30, 50, and 80 times, the number of fluctuations that will be the final short-time fluctuation in the currently-set short-time state In the battle effect) executed, the effect in which the effect result is "defeat" is executed, and then the effect shifts to the normal state, which is different from the effect when the probability variation jackpot is won.

By configuring in this way, with partial production when the probability variation jackpot is won, and production when short-time jackpot is won, after jackpot winning the special symbol lottery, jackpot game period, high probability state of normal symbols It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the short-time jackpot is won or the probability variation jackpot is won over the period until the end.

Next, referring to FIG. 133(c), among the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the relation between the display mode of the winning percentage (display value of the winning percentage) and the internal situation of the game is simple. Explain to. FIG. 133(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the winning percentage (display value of the winning percentage) and the internal situation of the game. As shown in FIG. 133(c), when the winning rate of 100% is displayed, the probability variation state is set as the game state, or the jackpot winning is confirmed (special execution in progress). The symbol lottery is a jackpot win, or the special map 2 hold contains information indicating a jackpot win). Further, when the winning rate of 90 to 99% is displayed, there is a possibility that the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is difficult to occur is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is likely to occur is referred to. The probability that the probability variation state is set (is) as the gaming state is about three times as high as the possibility that the time saving state is (is) set. Becomes

When the winning rate of 60 to 89% is displayed, it is possible that the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is likely to occur is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is difficult to occur is referred to. It is shown that the probability variation is higher than the possibility, and that the probability variation state is (is) set as the gaming state is about twice as much as the possibility that the time saving state is (is) set. ..

If the winning rate of up to 59% is displayed, it is possible that the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is difficult to occur is referred to, or the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is likely to occur is referred to. The probability that the probability variation state is set (is) as the gaming state is equal to the possibility that the time saving state is (is) set.

In this way, the higher the winning percentage is displayed, the higher the possibility of making it easier to win the next big jackpot, so that it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(d), among the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the relationship between the accumulation of lucky points and the internal situation of the game will be briefly described. FIG. 133(d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the accumulation of lucky points and the internal situation of the game. As shown in FIG. 133(d), the degree of accumulation of lucky points is configured to be variable according to the type of game state, and when the short time jackpot is won, the time saving state ends. The execution frequency of the addition effect is changed so that the lucky points reach near the upper limit within the period. Even when the probability variation state is set, the lucky points are accumulated in the same manner as when the time saving state of any one of 30 times saving time, 50 times saving time, and 80 times saving time is set according to the type (addition). As described above), the accumulation condition is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game state from being discriminated by the player depending on how much the lucky points are accumulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the relationship between the determination timing of the operation valid period and the button effect will be described. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the determination timing of the operation valid period and the button effect. In the present control example, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the operation content that allows the player to operate the frame button 22 is changed in the middle according to the operation content on the frame button 22 within one operation valid period. It is configured to be able to.

Here, in the present control example, the operation determination timing is provided at a specific timing within the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation on the frame button 22, and the operation determination timing and the operation timing on the frame button 22 are different from each other. When they match, a lottery (gauge UP lottery) for varying the effect mode of the operation effect can be executed.

Then, when the long press effect (see FIG. 130) is executed as the operation effect and the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a long time with respect to the frame button 22, the operation determination timing and the frame button 22 are selected. Since the operation timing coincides with the operation timing, the gauge UP lottery is repeatedly executed at each operation determination timing. Then, when the player wins in the gauge UP lottery, an effect of increasing the value of the spirit gauge KG is executed.

Here, if the player releases the hand during the operation valid period, the long press effect is finished. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the operation valid period is half or more (5 seconds or more), the continuous striking effect (see FIG. 131(a)) is executed, and the player continuously presses the frame button 22. Will be guided. Then, when the operation timing of the repeated hitting operation (the detection timing of the frame button 22 and the respective operation determination timings match, the gauge UP lottery is executed again, and when winning, the value of the energetic gauge KG increases. The effect is performed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed along with the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, is being performed, and is changed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through the normal entrance 67, a variation in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. The display is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the control example, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. .. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present control example, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of balls passing through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not more than 3 or not less than 5 ( For example, it may be set to 8 times. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after the predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of big hits) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is achieved. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a while opening the opening 65a. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 119, control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 135). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 135). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 135 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 137, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first per random number table 202a, the first per type selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c, and the variation pattern. At least a selection table 202d and a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e are stored.

The first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 137(b)) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per random number counter C1, but the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a. When it matches with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

Specifically, for each symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), the value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined, and if the state of the special symbol is a low probability state, , The value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", when the state of the special symbol is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is for the range of "0-5" , A random number value determined as a big hit (first random number counter value) is defined.

Since the range that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 299", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/300, and is a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of being judged is 6/300 (1/50).

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 137(c)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type. It is defined in association with each other. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery is a big hit (first special symbol, the second special symbol is common), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0-54", a big hit It is judged that it is A1 (10 round probability variation big hit), if it is in the range of "55-59", it is determined to be A2 (10 round probability variation big hit), if it is in the range of "60-64", big hit It is determined to be A3 (10 round probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of "65 to 69", it is determined to be big hit B1 (30 rounds in 10 rounds short time), if it is in the range of "70 to 74". , Jackpot B2 (30 rounds in 10 rounds, 30 big jackpots), and if it is in the range of "75 to 84", jackpot C1 (50 rounds in 10 rounds, 50 big jackpots), and "85-89" If it is in the range, it is determined that it is a big hit C2 (50 rounds in 10 rounds, 50 big hits). If it is in the range of "~99", it is determined that it is a big hit D2 (80 round big hits during 10 rounds) (see FIG. 137(c)).

As described above, in the present control example, a plurality of jackpot types are provided as jackpot types in which the jackpot game content and the gaming state set after the jackpot game are the same. Although details will be described later, in this control example, when selecting the variation time of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state or the probability variation state, a different data table (variation pattern table) is selected according to the selected jackpot type. It is configured to reference.

For example, when winning the "10 round certainty variation round jackpot", the jackpot type "jackpot A1" is configured so that the special symbol variation with a longer variation time is easier to execute than "jackpot A3". ..

In addition, when “big hit A1”, “big hit B1”, and “big hit C1” are selected as big hit types, the same data table (variation pattern table 1) is referred to, and “big hit A2” and “big hit B2” , When the "big hit C2" is selected, the same data table (fluctuation pattern table 2) is referenced, and when the "big hit A3" is selected, a dedicated data table (variation pattern table 3) is referenced. It

With such a configuration, in the period in which the effect mode (winning rate UP zone, battle mode) described above with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128 is executed, it is currently set by the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation. It is possible to prevent the player's playing state from being grasped.

Further, the variation pattern table 1 described above is defined so that the variation time of 60 seconds can be selected more easily than the variation pattern table 2 when the result of the special symbol lottery is off. Is stipulated so that the variation time of 60 seconds is not selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is out. Here, in the present control example, when the variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation, the battle effect is executed.

That is, the battle effect is an effect executed when the special symbol variation of 60 seconds is selected. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in which the variable time of 60 seconds is selected is a big hit, “win” is selected as the effect result of the battle effect, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is out, If the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) that ends the time-saving condition, that is, if the special symbol variation is the number of time-saving end, "defeat" is selected as the effect result of the battle production, and other If it is a special symbol lottery (variation) other than the number of times of time saving end, "continuation" is selected as the effect result of the battle effect.

Therefore, depending on which variation pattern table is used to select the variation time of the special symbol lottery, the selection ratio of the 60-second variation with respect to the missed winning is different, and as a result, the battle effect in the battle mode (rendering result) It is possible to change the appearance frequency of the battle effect), which is "continuation". Thereby, in the battle mode, the number of special symbol lottery that can be executed within the unit period can be changed according to the variation pattern table that is referred to.

In addition, since the number of executions of the battle effect whose effect result is “continuation” can be reduced, it is possible to increase the ratio of selecting “win” or “defeat” when the battle effect is executed. .. As a result, the player can be interested in the effect contents during the battle effect.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern table that is referred to when the "big hit A3" is won, if the result of the special symbol lottery is out of regulation, the variation time of 60 seconds is not selected, and, When the result of the special symbol lottery is out of comparison with other variation pattern tables, a short variation time is easily selected. Thereby, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time can be increased. In addition, when this "big hit A3" is selected, an effect of notifying that the big hit of this time is a probability variation big hit is executed before the special symbol lottery after the big hit game is finished, and after the big hit game is finished. A shortening zone (see FIG. 129(b)) is set.

Specifically, as a stop display mode of the third symbol for notifying that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, a stop display mode of "777" showing a probability variation big hit is displayed, or a win rate executed during a big hit game. In the UP effect, the winning rate may be increased to “100%”, and an effect of notifying that the big hit this time is a probability-change big hit may be executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 138(a)) is a data table in which hit determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 138(a)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 138(a)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is acquired based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 138(b), (c), and FIGS. 139(a) to 139(c)) shows that the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is for each display mode. Is a data table defined in each. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the set gaming state (the jackpot type of the jackpot that was won last time) and after the jackpot game is over. It is a data table that is defined in association with the number of special symbol changes from. By using this variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, it is possible to easily set a specific variation pattern (variation time) for the special symbol variation of a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is over. The detailed content of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. These counters and the like are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for the initial value setting of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 159). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is provided. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the ball timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, to the second ball entrance 640. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c, and stores the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, which are targets for executing the lottery. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a game ball. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203d including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, the sphere is left and right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing when the ball passes through one of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 159).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when the game ball enters the first entrance 64, its value Is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b of RAM 203 (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Is stored.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 137(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value per first random number counter C1. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability of a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special The period is a high probability state of the symbol)) and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

In this control example, the random number value determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol (the value “0” of the first random number counter C1) is determined as the big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. It is used as a random number value, but it is a big hit random number value stored in the first random number table for low probability, and a big hit random number stored in the first random number table for high probability. Random numbers that are jackpots may be defined so that the values do not overlap. With such a configuration, as in the present control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), a disturbance that is a big hit. By changing the numerical value, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball is the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (hereinafter , Also referred to as various starting ball entrances) are stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) corresponding to the timing of winning the prize.

Here, the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in each reserved sphere storage area (first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b) is a random number that becomes a special jackpot. If not, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in each reserved sphere storage area (first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b) is a big number of special symbols. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the first hit type stored in each of the same holding ball storage areas (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) The display mode is indicated by the value of the counter C2.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 137(c), when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", the big hit A1. (10 round probability variation big jackpot), if it is in the range of "55-59", it is determined to be a jackpot A2 (10 round probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of "60-64", a jackpot A3 (10 round probability variation big hit), if it is in the range of "65-69", it is judged that it is a big hit B1 (10 rounds, 30 times big hit), if it is in the range of "70-74", It is determined that it is a big hit B2 (30 rounds in 10 rounds, 50 big hits) if it is in the range of "75 to 84", and it is in the range of "85 to 89" in big hits C1 (50 rounds in 10 rounds is shortened) If it is, it is determined that it is a big hit C2 (50 rounds in 10 rounds, 50 big hits), and if it is in the range of "90 to 94", it is a big hit, D1 (80 rounds in 10 rounds, big hits). If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that it is a big hit D2 (10 rounds, 80 short hits per hour) (see FIG. 137(c)). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example has nine types of wins (big hits A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2) according to the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Is configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (e.g. 98, 99) and "reach other than out of front and rear" (e.g. in the range of 90 to 97) that also stops after the last stop pattern occurs, except before and after the reach pattern, Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely missed" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the first special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. In the sphere storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the sphere wins the second entry slot 640.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front/rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front/rear reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 159) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 138(b), (c), and 139(a)) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) (See (c)) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as described above.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 138(b) and (c) and FIGS. 139(a) to 139(c). As shown in FIG. 138(b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 138(c)), a first time saving/probability change table 202d2 (see FIG. 139(a)), The second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 (see FIG. 139(b)), the probability variation table 202d4 (see FIG. 139(c)), the first specific variation table 202d5 (see FIG. 139(d)), the second And a specific variation table 202d6.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 138(c). FIG. 138(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of special symbol variation when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state. is there.

Specifically, regardless of the symbol type of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol), if the result of the determination is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49". The big hit fluctuation A (30 seconds), the big hit fluctuation B (60 seconds) in the range of "50 to 99", and the big hit fluctuation C (90 seconds) in the range of "100 to 198", respectively. It is defined in association with each other.

Further, when the result of the judgment is “out”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 99”, and the fluctuation A (10 seconds) is out of the range of “100 to 169”. The fluctuation B (30 seconds) and the deviation C (60 seconds) outside the range of "170 to 198" are defined in association with each other.

In this control example, the content of the variation pattern table is defined so that a common variation pattern is selected for the symbol type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Without being limited, the content of the variation pattern table may be defined so that different variation patterns can be selected for each symbol type of the special symbol. Further, in this control example, the content of the variation pattern table is defined so that a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the number of reserved special symbols, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, The larger the number of reserved special symbols, the easier it may be configured to select a variation pattern of a shorter variation time than a small number. As a result, the special symbol will fluctuate for a long time in a state where the number of special symbols held is large (for example, the state where the special symbols hold of the upper limit number is acquired), and a period during which a new special symbols hold cannot be obtained Can be prevented from being set for a long time.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 138(b). FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 138(b), the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1, a first time reduction/probability variation table 202d2, a second time reduction/probability variation table 202d3, a probability variation table 202d4, and a first identification. The variation table 202d5 and the second specific variation table 202d6 are defined.

Next, the contents of the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 is defined as the type of variation pattern (variation time) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol selected in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) as the game state. It is a data table. When the result of the special symbol lottery is a big jackpot, the jackpot variation A (30 seconds) is in the range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 49", and the jackpot variation is in the range of "50 to 99". B (60 seconds), the jackpot variation C (90 seconds) is defined in the range of "100 to 198", and when the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is " Out-of-range fluctuation A (10 seconds) in the range of 0-99", out-of-range fluctuation B (30 seconds) in the range of "100-169", and out-of-range fluctuation C (60 seconds) in the range of "170-198". Is stipulated.

Next, the contents of the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2. This first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 has a variation pattern type (variation time) indicating a lottery result of a special symbol selected in a part of a high probability state of a normal symbol as a game state (time reduction state, probability variation state). The data table is defined, and is referred to based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the jackpot variation B (60 seconds) is defined in the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and the special symbol lottery When the result is out of alignment, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 99", short variation (5 seconds), and out of the range of "100 to 149" variation A (10 seconds). However, the deviation C (60 seconds) is defined in the range of “150 to 198”.

Next, the contents of the second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 139(b). FIG. 139(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second time reduction/probability change table 202d3. This second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 has a variation pattern type (variation time) showing a lottery result of a special symbol selected in a part of a high probability state of a normal symbol as a game state (time reduction state, probability variation state). The data table is defined, and is referred to based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the jackpot variation B (60 seconds) is defined in the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and the special symbol lottery If the result is a deviation, the deviation value counter CS1 has a deviation value of short deviation (5 seconds) in the range of "0 to 196", and an deviation deviation A (10 seconds) of "197" and "198". The deviation fluctuation C (60 seconds) is specified in "."

As described above, the first time reduction/probability variation table 202d2 is defined so that the variation pattern in which the variation time of 60 seconds is set is easier to select than the second time reduction/probability variation table 202d3 at the time of defeat. ing. In this control example, in the battle mode executed during the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the battle effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is selected. That is, the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is a variation pattern table in which the battle effect is more easily executed than the second time saving/probability variation table 202d3.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 139(c). FIG. 139(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the probability variation table 202d4. This probability variation table 202d4, the variation pattern type (variation time) showing the lottery result of the special symbol selected in a part of the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) as a game state. The data table is defined, and is referred to based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e described later.

Specifically, irrespective of the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation value of the variation type counter CS1 has a variation pattern of variation time of 5 seconds (big hit short variation, short deviation short variation) in the entire range of "0 to 198", It is prescribed. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the special symbol lottery with good time efficiency.

Next, the contents of the first specific variation table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 139(d). FIG. 139(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the first specific variation table 202d5. This first specific variation table 202d5 is a variation pattern type indicating the special symbol lottery result selected in a part of the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol as the game state (winning rate UP zone) ( (Variation time) is defined, and is referred to based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the specific variation A (11 seconds) is defined in the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 198”, and the special symbol lottery is performed. If the result is wrong, the specific variation A (11 seconds) is in the range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 2", and the specific variation B (10 seconds) is in the range of "3 to 198". It is prescribed.

Next, the contents of the second specific variation table 202d6 will be described with reference to FIG. 139(e). FIG. 139(e) is a diagram showing the contents of the second specific variation table 202d6. This second specific variation table 202d6 is a variation pattern type (variation time) showing a lottery result of special symbols selected in a part of the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as a game state. ) Is a defined data table, and is referred to based on the scenario defined in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e described later.

Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds is defined in the entire range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". By thus defining the second specific variation table 202d6, when the variation pattern is determined (selected) by referring to the second specific variation table 202d6, the variation time of 60 seconds can be determined without fail. Therefore, the battle effect can be surely executed.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 140, in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the gaming state (the jackpot type of the jackpot that was won last time) and the number of special symbol variations after the jackpot game is over. Has been done.

Specifically, when the game state is normal (normal state), the scenario is defined so that the normal table 202d1 is referred to within the range of "1" in the number of special symbol variations after the jackpot game is over. There is.

If the gaming state is probability change 1 (big hit A1), the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 within the range of the special symbol fluctuation count after the big hit game is "1 to 3" is "4 to 29, 31 to 49, 51. The first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is in the range of "~79,81-100", the second specific variation table 202d6 is in the range of "30,50,80", and the probabilistic variation table 202d4 is in the range of "101-". The scenario is defined as referenced.

In addition, when the game state is probability change 2 (big hit A2), the first specific change table 202d5 within the range of the special symbol change count after the big hit game is “1 to 3” is “4 to 29, 31 to 49. , 51-79, 81-100", the second shortening/probability variation table 202d2, the range of "30, 50, 80" the second specific variation table 202d6, and the probability variation table of "101-". The scenario is defined so that 202d4 is referred to.

When the gaming state is probability variation 3 (big hit A3), the scenario is defined so that the probability variation table 202d4 is referred to within a range of "1" in the number of special symbol variations after the big hit game is over.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short working hour 1 (big hit B1, big hit C1, big hit D1), the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 has a special symbol fluctuation count of “1 to 3” after the big hit game ends in “4”. ~ 29, 31-49, 51-79, 81-100", the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is referred to, and the second specific variation table 202d6 is referred to in the range of "30, 50, 80". Scenarios are specified.

In addition, when the game state is a time saving 2 (big hit B2, big hit C2, big hit D2, the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 within the range of the special symbol fluctuation count "1 to 3" after the big hit game is "4 to 29, 31-49, 51-79, 81-100" in the second short/probability variation table 202d2 and "30, 50, 80" in the range of the second specific variation table 202d6 Is specified.

Returning to FIG. 136, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every time the timer interrupt process is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 138(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second per random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second hit random number table, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal state of the normal symbol), and the high probability of a high probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time (of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

As described above with reference to FIG. 138(a), when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (FIG. 138(a )reference). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second entrance 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. The electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened and closed, but the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds×2 times” may be set.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204” (see FIG. 138(a)). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened “×1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further, the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second entrance 640 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 159).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 135, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 136, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 159) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 158). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 157) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 135, a first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203d, the first Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g, probability variation flag 203h, time saving medium counter 203i, incoming waiting flag 203j, jackpot start flag It has at least 203k and the big hit medium flag 203m.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type The respective values of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

Then, in the main controller 110, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, It is shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a to the execution area 203c, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, only the holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored are shifted.

In this control example, the winning data is not stored in any of the holding areas of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, that is, the special area. Even if the ball is won (starting prize) to the first ball entrance 64 in the state where the symbol variation is not executed, the prize data is temporarily stored in the reserved first area and then the prize data is stored. Is configured to be shifted to the execution area 203c, so that the processing for storing the winning data in the execution area 203c is made common (unified to the processing for storing the winning data stored in the reserved first area). However, the main controller 110 is configured to reduce the processing inability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, the ball enters the first entrance 64. When winning (starting winning), the winning data may be directly stored in the execution area 203c without going through the holding area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of temporarily storing the winning data that is immediately shifted to the execution area 203c in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a.

The second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type The respective values of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, It is shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b to the execution area 203c, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, only the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored are shifted.

Further, in this control example, the winning data is not stored in any of the holding areas of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, and the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, that is, the special Even if the ball wins (start winning) into the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the symbol variation is not executed, the winning data is temporarily stored in the reserved first area and then the winning data is stored. Is configured to be shifted to the execution area 203c, so that the processing for storing the winning data in the execution area 203c is made common (unified to the processing for storing the winning data stored in the reserved first area). However, although it is configured to reduce the processing inability of the main control device 110, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the state where the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, the ball enters the second entrance 640. When winning (starting winning), the winning data may be directly stored in the execution area 203c without going through the holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of temporarily storing the winning data that is immediately shifted to the execution area 203c in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the present first control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery may be simultaneously executed. It is configured not to exist. That is, in a state where the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c (a state where the special symbol lottery is not executed), the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is prioritized over the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is determined whether or not the winning data is stored in the reserved first area, and when it is determined that the winning data is stored, the winning data stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is executed area. Shift to 203c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning data is not stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, next, the winning data in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a Is determined to be stored, and if it is determined to be stored, the winning data stored in the reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area 203c.

In this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery along the predetermined priority order without overlapping the execution period for a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be executed as described above, instead of using an execution area corresponding to each special symbol type, a common one execution area 203c as in this control example may be provided. .. As a result, an abnormality occurs in the processing of the main control device 110, and a situation may occur in which winning data is stored in the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and the execution area corresponding to the second special symbol. Can be reliably prevented.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize. In addition to the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

In addition, the above-described prefetching process uses various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired based on the start winning, and preliminarily determines the information obtained when the special symbol lottery is actually executed. The main control unit 110 is configured to execute the (prefetching) process, and the main control unit 110 is configured to set a winning information command including information indicating the result (preliminary determination result) of the prefetching process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 sets a winning information command including information indicating various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired based on the starting winning, and the winning is performed. In the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 that receives the information command, various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) included in the winning information command may be preread.

With such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute the pre-determination (prefetching) process on the main control device 110 side, and thus the burden on the control process of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In this case, various data (each counter C1 to C3) acquired based on the start winning is not included in the winning information command as it is, but various data (each counter is acquired based on the starting winning). The content of each value of C1 to C3) may be included in the winning information command in a state of being processed to an extent that can be specified by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, the information (random number value) whose value is updated by the update process periodically executed in the main controller 110 is not included in the winning information command as it is, but the processed information is won. By being configured to be included in the information command, even if the command (winning information command) output from the main controller 110 is illegally acquired, it is included in the acquired winning information command. It is possible to prevent the specification of the update process executed by main controller 110 from being analyzed from the information stored.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203d has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the right or left normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding first). Among the vacant areas of 4 areas), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the reserved special area is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which winning data is packed in a holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) ( It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, the maximum value 4 each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases. 1 is added up to (see S404 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 151).

The value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 151). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball counter 203e is changed, the variable display held by the main control device 110 is displayed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is the same function as the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e described above, which is the target switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Reservation ball of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the ball entrance 640 (starting winning) It is a counter that counts the number (the number of times of waiting) up to 4 times. This second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f, the initial value is set to zero, the maximum value 4 each time the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 151).

The value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 151, S411 in FIG. 153). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, every time the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203f is changed, the variable display held in the main control device 110 is displayed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere count symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere count notified by the display holding sphere count command (see FIG. 120(b)). ).

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the normal ball entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 156). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 155).

When the sphere passes through either the normal entrance 67 of the left or right, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203d (S605 of FIG. 156). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the right or left normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d. (S603 of FIG. 156: No).

The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation flag 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 160). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol lottery, it is set to OFF when the start of the big hit is set (see S213 in FIG. 151).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if that state is ON, based on the first random number table for high probability, special symbol lottery is performed, while the state of the probability variation flag 203h If is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 152).

The time saving medium counter 203i is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of a normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203i has an initial value set to zero, a lottery for special symbols is performed in the main control device 110, and if the jackpot (hour saving jackpot) in which the saving time state is set after the jackpot game is won, the player wins. A value indicating the number of times of saving and saving corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot game (see S1013 in FIG. 160). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if a jackpot is obtained by a lottery for special symbols, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

In this control example, there are a plurality of jackpot types with different times, and if you win "B1" and "B2", you win 30 times, "C1" and "C2". In this case, the number of time saving is 50 times, and when the number of “big hit D1” and the “big hit D2” is set, the number of time saving is 80. Therefore, corresponding values are set in the hour saving medium counter 203i. Then, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed (when it is the timing to stop and display the special symbol variation), the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is decremented by 1.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour/hour medium counter 203i and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the hour/time medium counter 203i is 1 or more, or the state of the probability variation flag 203h is turned on. If so, it is determined to be a high probability state of a normal symbol. In this case, the lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second winning random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 155). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, and the state of the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined as a low probability state of a normal symbol, and based on the second random number table for low probability time. The lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 155).

Although the entry waiting flag 203j is not used in this control example, it is a flag for showing a state in which a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode showing a big hit. This ball waiting flag 203j, for example, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode showing the big hit, the big hit game is executed when the ball enters the specific area (actuation winning opening) In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, it is a flag used to indicate that it is in the big hit standby state in which the big hit game is started by putting the ball into a specific area (actuation winning opening). If the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is on, it means that it is in the jackpot waiting state, and if it is off, it means that it is not the jackpot waiting state. The entry waiting flag 203j is a big hit in the special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the big hit has passed. Further, the ball waiting flag 203j is set to OFF when the game ball enters the actuation winning opening in the jackpot waiting state. While the entry waiting flag 203j is on, entry into the actuation winning opening is treated as valid (a big hit is started when an entry is detected).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203k is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when the special symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. The jackpot start flag 203k is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set.

The big hit medium flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit (special game state) is being performed. If this big hit medium flag 203m is on, it means that it is a big hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not a big hit. The big hit medium flag 203m is a big hit by a lottery for special symbols, and is set to ON when the big hit (special game state) is started. Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state). In the special symbol variation process, the big hit medium flag 203m is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Returning to FIG. 135, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side, a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a, etc., and the MPU 201 receives various commands and controls for them via the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Here, with reference to FIG. 142, details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. First, FIG. 142A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a winning percentage selection table 222b, a lucky point selection table 222c, a gauge increase lottery table 222d, and an additional lottery table 222e. There is.

The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the fluctuation effect based on the rough display mode (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation effect selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the main controller 110. To be More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation) from the variation patterns defined in variation pattern table 222a is received. The detailed display mode of the effect is extracted (specified) (see S5205 in FIG. 174). Of the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a, whether or not the above-described battle effect (see FIG. 127 and FIG. 128) is executed is determined for at least the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach whose variation time is 60 seconds. It also contains the information to indicate.

The winning percentage selection table 222b is a data table referred to for determining the upper limit value of the battle winning percentage indicating the effect result of the battle effect executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol. Details of the winning rate selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 143.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the winning percentage selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 143, in this winning percentage selection table 222b, the upper limit of the battle winning percentage is defined in association with the determined jackpot type and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.

Here, the above-mentioned battle effect is executed when the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the period in which the battle mode is set, and the production is different according to the game situation. This is an effect in which the result is displayed. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected for the special symbol lottery that is won the jackpot, the effect result of "win" is variable, and the variation time is 60 for the special symbol lottery that is won. When the second fluctuation pattern is selected, it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the time saving state ends with the special symbol change this time, the performance result of "defeat" is the time saving state. When it is determined that does not end, the effect result of "continue" is displayed.

In other words, in the probability change state, it is configured so that "defeat" is not set as the effect result of the battle effect, and during the time saving state, "defeat" is set in the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change that ends the time saving state. It is configured to be done. In other words, when the probability variation state is set, it is more difficult to select "defeat" as the effect result of the battle effect than when the time saving state is set, and as a result, "win" is more easily set. ..

In this way, depending on the actually set gaming state, whether or not to win (defeat or not) in the battle effect is determined, so the winning rate by the battle effect is determined based on the jackpot type. However, the winning rate addition effect with the determined winning rate as the upper limit value (point acquisition effect during jackpot game (see FIG. 121(b)), winning rate UP effect executed in the winning rate UP zone (see FIGS. 124 and 125). ), it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of predicting a game state set after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in the first control example, the battle effect is executed when the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the battle mode is 60 seconds, and the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e ( By reference to FIG. 140), it is configured to select a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation using a variation pattern table that is different according to the determined jackpot type.

The easiness of selecting the variation pattern having the variation time of 60 seconds is different depending on the type of the variation pattern table that is referred to. That is, when the variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern table in which the variation time is 60 seconds, it is possible to make the battle effect difficult to appear during the battle mode. Further, the variation pattern table in which the variation time of 60 seconds is hard to be selected is more likely to be referred to when the probability variation state is set as the game state than when the time saving state is set. I am configuring. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of predicting a game state set after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the effect that numerically indicates the "winning rate" as information for indicating the degree of expectation that the effect result of the battle effect is "win", but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, it is configured to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the effect result of the battle effect does not become “defeat”, that is, the degree of expectation that the effect result becomes “win” or “continue”. Good, in this case, the battle production in which the production result is "continuation", that is, the state in which the variation pattern table in which the variation pattern of 60 seconds is easily selected in the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is not selected is referred to, A battle effect in which the effect result is "continuation", that is, a higher expectation than a condition in which a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is hard to be selected is referred to due to a special symbol fluctuation that does not satisfy the time saving end condition. It is good to set the content of the performance.

When the details defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario selection table 202e are described in detail, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A1”, that is, when the jackpot type is in the probable variation state and the battle effect is easily executed in the battle mode, "50% or less" as a winning rate (upper limit) in the range of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 39", and "60% to 89%" as a winning percentage (upper limit) in the range of "40 to 79". However, "100%" is defined as the winning rate (upper limit value) in the range of "80 to 94", and "90 to 99%" is defined as the winning rate (upper limit value) in the range of "95" to "99". ..

Further, when the jackpot type is "big hit A2", that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation state and the battle effect is difficult to be executed in the battle mode, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39". "100%" as the (upper limit), "90%-99%" as the winning percentage (upper limit) in the range of "40-79", and "60% as the winning percentage (upper limit) in the range of "80-94". %-89%" and "-59%" are defined as win rates (upper limit values) in the ranges "95"-"99", respectively.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1, C1, D1", that is, when the jackpot type is in a time saving state and the battle effect is easily executed in the battle mode, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39". The winning percentage (upper limit) is "~59%", the winning percentage (upper limit) is "~59%" in the range "40-79", and the winning percentage (upper limit) is "80-94". 60% to 89%" and "90 to 99%" are defined as win rates (upper limit values) in the ranges of "95" to "99", respectively.

Further, when the jackpot type is "big jackpot B2, C2", that is, when the jackpot type is in the time saving state and the battle effect is difficult to be executed in the battle mode, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39". The winning percentage (upper limit) is "~59%", the winning percentage (upper limit) is "60%-89%" in the range "40-79", and the winning percentage (upper limit) is "80-94". Is defined as "90%-99%", and "90-99%" is defined as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "95"-"99".

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “jackpot D2”, that is, when the jackpot type is in a time-saving state and the battle effect is difficult to be executed in the battle mode, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 39”. “Up to 59%” as the (upper limit), “90% to 99%” as the win rate (upper limit) in the range of “40 to 79”, and “90% to 99%” as the win rate (upper limit) in the range of “80 to 94”. 60% to 89%" and "~59%" are defined as win rates (upper limit values) in the ranges of "95" to "99", respectively.

As described above, the winning percentage selection table 222b is configured so that the winning percentage (upper limit) “100%” is selected only for the jackpot type for which the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the result of the battle effect is "defeat" even though 100% is displayed as the battle winning percentage.

In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A2, jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2) in which the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is difficult to execute is referred to is the jackpot type (jackpot in which the fluctuation pattern table in which the battle effect is easily executed is referred to. A1, a big hit B1, a big hit C1, a big hit D1) are configured so that a winning rate (90 to 99% or the like) higher than that can be easily selected. That is, when the jackpot type (jackpot A2, jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2) that refers to the variation pattern table in which the battle rendering is difficult to be executed is selected, the rendering result is compared with the appearance rate of the entire battle rendering. Since the proportion of the battle production in which "is" is "win" is high, it is configured such that a high winning rate is easily selected.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily associate the winning rate displayed at the time when the battle effect is executed with the effect result of the actual battle effect, and thus the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player interested in the effect that the winning rate displayed on the screen increases.

Further, in the present first control example, a higher winning rate (upper limit) is obtained when a big hit (for example, jackpot Dm) with a larger number of time saving times is won than a jackpot with a small number of saved times (for example, big hit B). The value) is configured to be easily selected. In other words, when a long time saving time is set, the number of special symbol lottery executed until the battle effect that the effect result is "defeat" is executed (until the time saving state ends) is increased. In the meantime, the chances of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery are high. Therefore, when the time saving state is set, it is easier to select a higher win rate when the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied than when the time saving end condition is easy to be satisfied, when the time saving end condition is easily satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to easily associate the winning rate displayed at the time when the battle effect is executed with the effect result of the actual battle effect, so that it is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player interested in the production in which the winning rate increases.

In this control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the variable number end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is set, but other time saving end conditions are provided. Alternatively, for example, a lottery result ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes the specific lottery result reaches a predetermined number (for example, two times) may be settable.

In this control example, "big hit A1" to "big hit A3" can be set as the big hit type whose probability variation state is set after the big hit game is finished, but when "big hit A3" is set as the big hit type Is configured to set a production mode (shortening mode) in which the battle production is not executed after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, the winning percentage selection table 222b does not define a value corresponding to "big hit A3".

The lucky point selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to when determining the value of the lucky points additionally displayed during the high probability state of the normal symbol. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the value determined as the upper limit value of the lucky points additionally displayed during the high probability state of the normal symbol this time (the value stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q) and the current display Difference value with the value of the lucky point (the value stored in the display point storage area 223r), the remaining short time count (remaining short time period), and the jackpot type (the jackpot type set when the jackpot was won last time) ) And, the value of the lucky point additionally displayed in the addition display effect is defined.

In this control example, it is configured such that the effect of additionally displaying lucky points is executed during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and when the lucky points reach 100P, the probability change state is The player is informed that the setting has been made. In other words, the lucky point cannot reach 100P when the time saving state is set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lucky point from reaching 100P except when the probability variation state is set.

However, even when the time saving state is set, if the addition display effect is not executed so that the lucky point reaches around 100P during the time saving, the game state currently set for the player is set. There is a problem that it is immediately discriminated whether it is the probability change state or the time saving state, and the effect of the addition display effect in which the addition display of the lucky points is executed is deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present first control example, the value determined as the upper limit value (the value stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q) and the value of the currently displayed lucky point (stored in the display point storage area 223r). The value of the lucky point given in the addition display effect is determined based on the difference value with the value) and the remaining short time count (remaining short time period).

With this configuration, even if the short-time state is set to have a small number of time-savings (for example, 30 times), it is easy to make the lucky point near 100 (up to the upper limit value) during the time-saving state. be able to.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a plurality of time saving states with different numbers of time saving set as in the first control example, the lucky point reaches around 100 (up to the upper limit value) during the time saving. When the effect mode of the addition display effect is determined so as to be easy, the addition display effect in which the addition degree of the lucky points is obviously different is executed according to the set number of time saving. Therefore, there is a possibility that a new problem arises in that the player can easily determine the game state depending on the effect contents of the added display effect that is executed.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the effect pattern can be set in the addition display effect executed when the probability variation state is set. Specifically, even in the probability change state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot winning, it is configured such that a value for performance can be set as the value of the remaining short time count (remaining short time period), and the time reduction count 30 An effect pattern in which lucky points are added with the same degree of addition as the time saving state in which the number of times is set, an effect pattern in which lucky points are added with the same degree of addition as in the time saving state with 50 times saved, and the number of times 80 is reduced. The effect pattern in which the lucky points are added with the same degree of addition as in the time saving state in which the turn is set can be set.

With this configuration, since it is possible to execute the addition display effect in the probability changing state with the same degree of addition (addition mode) as when the time saving state is set, the addition display effect of the addition display effect is given to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current game state based on the effect contents.

In addition, in the first control example, the addition display effect can be executed with an effect pattern that can be executed when a time saving state with a number of time saving times different from the number of time saving times in the time saving state actually set is set. ing. Specifically, when the time saving state is set to 50 times, the production pattern corresponding to the time saving 50 times, that is, the special symbol variation is executed 50 times at a rate of about 80%. The effect pattern of the addition display effect is set so that the lucky point reaches the upper limit value, and the effect pattern corresponding to the time saving time of 30 times is set at about 10% and the time saving time of 80 times is set at about 10%. It is configured such that a corresponding effect pattern is set.

With such a configuration, the addition display effect of adding the lucky points is executed toward a timing different from the timing at which the time saving end condition is actually satisfied, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining time saving number. can do. Furthermore, even if the time saving frequency is set to 50 times, when the additional display effect is executed in the same effect pattern as when the time saving frequency is set to 30 times, the 30th special symbol variation ends. Even after playing, since the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, it is possible to make the player think that the probability variation state is set instead of the time saving state of 30 times. In addition, even if the time saving frequency is set to 50 times, if the addition display effect is executed in the same effect pattern as when the time saving frequency is set to 80 times, the lucky point reaches around 100. Since the time saving state ends before that, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the time saving state ends, and it is possible to provide a surprising effect.

Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, as the upper limit value of the lucky points in the time saving state, a value that is significantly different from 100 (for example, around 50 is set) is set. ) Is set to the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp when the time saving state ends, and it is possible to provide a surprising effect.

The gauge increase lottery table 222d is a data table that is referred to when performing an increase lottery as to whether or not to raise the spirit gauge KG in the operation effect (long press effect) described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. is there. Although detailed illustration is omitted, whether or not to win the ascending lottery is defined in accordance with the obtained value of the effect counter 223f, and when a win is obtained in the ascending lottery, an effect mode for increasing the spirit gauge KG is set. It This gauge increase lottery table 222d shows the value of the effect counter 223f corresponding to the increase lottery, according to the number of stages of the variable mode in the effect being executed, the current variable stage, and the result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not). It has been defined differently, and in the state where the special symbol lottery has been won, and the more stages there are from the current variable stage, the easier it is to win the ascent lottery. There is.

The additional lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the additional effect when the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied during the jackpot game. In the first control example, as an effect mode of the additional effect, the additional effect for bustling (see FIG. 122(b)) and the additional effect for increasing the winning rate of the battle effect to be executed later (FIG. 121(b)). And) are configured to be executable. That is, the privilege (advantage level) given to the player varies depending on the presentation mode of the additional production selected with reference to the additional lottery table 222e.

Next, details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142(b) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a valid value. Period timer 223e, effect counter 223f, effect information storage area 223g, additional effect information storage area 223h, win rate variable flag 223i, upper limit win rate storage area 223j, display win rate storage area 223k, lottery number counter 223m. The confirmation flag 223n, the high probability flag 223p, the upper limit point storage area 223q, the display point storage area 223r, the press timer 223s, the long press flag 223t, the press release flag 223u, the continuous hit effect flag 223v, and the upper limit. At least a gauge amount storage area 223w, a gauge counter 223x, a time saving counter 223y, a state storage area 223aa, and an arrival flag 223ab are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning. From the, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information notified by the prize information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is similar to the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f of the main controller 110, the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device). 81) is a variation effect (variation display) performed in 81), and is a counter that counts the maximum number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and stores the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of 203f cannot be acquired. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the first special symbol fluctuation is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of holding balls is subtracted , The holding ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding of the main control device 110 The value of the sphere number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b (see S4408 in FIG. 166). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to receiving the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number for the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e and the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203f of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4402 in FIG. 166), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S5203 in FIG. 174). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process of the main process executed by the MPU 221 (see S4002 in FIG. 162). It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4405 in FIG. 166), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5217 in FIG. 174). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S5219 in FIG. 174).

The effective period timer 223e is a timer for measuring an operation effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 by the player can be effectively determined. While the effective period timer 223e is measuring the period (while the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0), it means that the operation effective period is in progress, and the effective period timer 223e is measuring the period. If not (when the value of the valid period timer 223e is 0), it means that the operation is not valid. The valid period timer 223e is set to a value corresponding to the operation valid period of the operation effect executed when it is determined that the start timing of the operation effect (long press effect) executed as the variable effect is reached. Then, in the effect update process (see S4011 of FIG. 165) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 162), the value of the effective period timer 223e is updated (subtracted) ( (See S4303 in FIG. 165). Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4007 in FIG. 163), it is referred to when determining whether the current operation is in the valid period (S4101 in FIG. 163).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and is updated by adding 1 to the value each time the main process (see FIG. 162) is executed. .. The effect counter 223f has a separate counter for each effect type.

The effect information storage area 223g is a storage area for temporarily storing the content of the effect executed (set) on the pachinko machine 10, for example, the effect of the effect executed during the jackpot game. Information (effect information) indicating the contents is stored, and is referred to when setting the effect mode after the jackpot game is over.

In the present control example, when the probability variation jackpot is won, a second period after the first period (for example, jackpot game end, depending on the content of the effect executed in the first period (for example, jackpot game) It is configured to determine the effect mode of the effect to be executed later. More specifically, in the case of winning the probability jackpot, if it is informed that this jackpot is a probability jackpot by the end of the jackpot game (until the first period ends), in the second period If the effect that informs the player that it is a probability variation state is executed, and this jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot by the end of the jackpot game (until the first period ends), In the second period, a suggestion effect for suggesting whether or not the current game state is the probability change state is executed.

In this way, according to the content of the effect executed in the first period (for example, during the jackpot game), the effect effect produced in the second period after the first period (for example, after the jackpot game ends). By configuring so as to determine the mode, the content regarding the specific information (information indicating the game state) is executed after the notification effect that clearly informs the player of the content regarding the specific information (information indicating the game state) is executed. It is possible to suppress the execution of the suggestive effect that suggests.

The additional effect information storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the content (type) of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game, and the additional effect is executed during the jackpot game. Each time, the information indicating the content (type) of the additional effect to be executed is stored. Then, when a new additional effect is executed, the information stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h is read, and the newly executed addition is performed based on the read information and a predetermined effect condition. The production mode of the production is determined.

Further, in this control example, when the timing at which the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied is within the period in which the additional effect is already being executed, depending on the content of the additional effect to be executed or the content of the additional effect being executed. , Is configured to regulate the execution of new additional effects. In this case, the content of the additional effect whose execution is restricted is also stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h. That is, the set content (type) of the additional effect is configured to be memorizable by classifying the additional effect that has been executed and the additional effect that has not been executed.

With this configuration, when a new additional effect can be executed, the additional effect based on the information indicating the non-executed additional effect stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h is executed, When the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied, the additional effect can be executed in an effect mode in which the content of the information indicating the non-executed additional effect stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h is also added. ..

The winning rate variable flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the winning rate for the battle effect is variable, and is set to ON when the winning rate is variable (addable). On the other hand, when the winning rate cannot be added, that is, when the winning rate has already reached the upper limit value, it is set to OFF. This makes it possible to properly execute the control for varying the winning rate within a period in which the winning rate can be varied.

The upper limit winning rate storage area 223j is a storage area for storing a displayable upper limit value in the display effect for increasing the winning rate in the battle effect, and is a winning effect that is executed when the jackpot game is started. In the setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the battle effect is executed after the jackpot game is over (S4601: No in FIG. 168), the upper limit determined by referring to the winning percentage selection table 222b The winning rate (upper limit value of display winning rate) is stored (S4605 of FIG. 168).

Then, in the additional effect mode setting process (see S5009 of FIG. 173) executed when the execution condition of the additional effect during the jackpot game is satisfied (S5008: Yes of FIG. 172), the effect mode of the additional effect is determined. The information (upper limit winning rate) stored at that time is referred to. Also, in the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (see S5305 in FIG. 176) executed during the winning rate UP zone after the jackpot game is over, the information stored when determining the effect mode of the additional effect (upper limit winning rate). ) Is referred to.

The display winning percentage storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing information for indicating the variably displayed winning percentage (display winning percentage) during a period in which the winning percentage of the battle effect can be variably displayed. 0% is stored as the value. Then, the additional effect mode setting process (see S5009 of FIG. 173) executed when the execution condition of the additional effect during the jackpot game is satisfied (S5008: Yes of FIG. 172), or the win rate UP zone after the jackpot game is over. The information for indicating the effect mode (winning rate after rising) of the additional effect set in the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (refer to S5305 in FIG. 176) executed in step S4 is stored.

Thereby, the display win rate currently displayed can be managed appropriately. In this control example, the display win rate storage area 223k is configured to store the information indicating the display win rate after raising, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display win rate currently displayed is Information indicating a difference (so-called increase amount) from the next display win rate may be stored in the display win rate storage area 223k.

The lottery number counter 223m is a counter for measuring the number of times of lottery whether or not to execute the additional effect executed during the jackpot game, and when the lottery as to whether or not to execute the additional effect is executed. The counter value is incremented by 1. Then, in the effect mode changing process (see S4508 in FIG. 170) executed when the round game is finished, the value of the counter is read out, and when it is determined that the value of the lottery number counter 223m is less than 1, (S4804 of FIG. 170: Yes), the high probability flag 223p is set to ON. Then, each time the round game is completed, the value of the counter is cleared to 0.

In other words, during one round game, if the lottery for executing the additional effect is not executed even once, the lottery for executing the additional effect is selected during the next round game. If it is executed, it is configured to win with a high probability. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the additional effect is not executed during the jackpot game.

In the present control example, as described above, when the lottery as to whether or not to execute the additional effect is not executed, that is, the ball enters the general entrance 63 provided in the right area during the round game. If the over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a does not occur without the ball, the lottery as to whether or not to execute the additional effect in the next round game is highly likely to be won. However, without being limited to this, for example, in the case where the number of times the effect mode for increasing the winning rate is selected as the effect mode of the additional effect is a predetermined number of times (for example, one time) or less in one round game, It may be configured such that the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect in the round game is won with a high probability, or that the effect mode for increasing the winning rate is easily selected as the effect mode of the additional effect.

Further, in the present control example, the execution probability of the additional effect during the next round game is made variable in accordance with the game content in one round game content, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to perform multiple times. The execution probability of the additional effect during the next round game may be changed according to the game content of the round game. In this case, for example, the value of the lottery counter 223m may not be reset for each round game, but may be reset when a specific round game is finished. Further, in the present control example, when the additional effect is not executed during the big hit game (the number of executions is small), it is possible to create a situation in which the additional effect is easily executed, so that the additional effect is executed during the big hit game. Without suppressing the player's willingness to play, without being limited to this, if the additional effect is executed during the jackpot game (the more executions are performed), the additional effect is executed more. You may make it easy to create an easy situation. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the additional effect.

The confirmation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that it has been notified that the probability variation jackpot has been won, and is set to ON when it is notified that the probability variation jackpot has been won. Specifically, it is set to ON when the probability variation pattern (“777”) that notifies the probability variation big hit as the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, when setting various effects during the jackpot game, the setting status of the confirmation flag 223n is determined, and when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223n is set to ON, a probabilistic jackpot is shown or an effect of celebrating the probable jackpot is produced. Is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is set to OFF, a game state suggesting effect (such as an additional effect for increasing the winning rate) for suggesting the game state set after the jackpot game is finished to the player Executed. Also, in the hitting effect ending process (see S4510 in FIG. 171) for setting the effect mode after the jackpot game is over, the flag setting status is determined and the effect mode according to the setting status is set. Thereby, the aspect of the effect executed after the jackpot game can be set in correspondence with the presence or absence of the probability variation jackpot notification. This confirmation flag 223n is set to OFF after determining (setting) the mode of the effect executed after the jackpot game is over.

The high-probability flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect is in a high-probability winning state, and is set to ON when the winning probability is in a high-probability state. .. On the other hand, when the winning probability is the normal state, it is set to off. In this control example, the execution frequency of the additional effect is configured to be variable according to the game content during the big hit game. Specifically, when the period during which the additional effect is not executed continues for a predetermined period, the additional effect is generated. Is executed easily (the high probability flag 223p is set to ON). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the additional effect is not executed during the jackpot game.

The upper limit point storage area 223q is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value that can be displayed in the added display effect of the lucky points, and is executed in the time saving mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175). In the effect setting process after the first time (see S5309 in FIG. 177), the upper limit number of the lucky points determined is stored (S5508 in FIG. 177). Then, the content of the effect to which the lucky points are added is determined based on the difference value from the value of the currently displayed lucky points.

The display point storage area 223r is a storage area for storing the value of the lucky points displayed (displayed) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by the addition display effect of the lucky points being executed. The value corresponding to the display point added in the time saving effect mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175) is stored. In this control example, the display point storage area 223r has a display point counter, and the value of the display point counter is added and updated in correspondence with the added value. Then, when the period in which the addition display effect of the lucky points is executed ends, the information (the value of the display point counter) stored in the display point storage area 223r is cleared to zero.

The push-down timer 223s is a timer for measuring a period during which the frame button 22 is pushed down, and when the frame button 22 is pushed down, the push-down timer 223s starts measuring. Then, in the effect update process (see S4306 of FIG. 165) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 162), the timer value is updated (S4307 of FIG. 165), When the value of the timer is updated to the value corresponding to 2 seconds, the long press flag 223t indicating that the long press is being performed is set to ON. As described above, it is not determined that the long press operation is performed immediately after the frame button 22 is pressed, but the long press operation is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period. By determining that the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to detect both the long press and the normal press (continuous hit) as an operation to the frame button 22, so that the operation means (the frame button 22 ) Can be used to easily increase the variation of the operation effect.

The long press flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the player is performing a long press operation on the frame button 22, and is set to ON when the long press operation is being performed. Then, when the player releases the frame button 22 while the long press flag 223t is set to ON, that is, when the operation to the frame button 22 is not detected, it is set to OFF.

The press release flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the player has released the operation of the frame button 22 during the long press operation, and the player can set the frame while the long press flag 223t is set to ON. It is set to ON when the button 22 is released. Then, it is referred to when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and is set to OFF when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected while the pressing release flag 223u is set to ON.

In this control example, when the player releases the frame button 22 after the long-press operation is executed within the operation valid period of 1, the effect of urging the long-press operation on the frame button 22 is continued. It is configured to execute an effect that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 by a different operation method, instead of executing the effect. Here, by using the press release flag 223u, it is possible to reliably detect the situation where the player releases the frame button 22 after the long press operation is executed within the operation valid period of one, It is possible to execute an effect that prompts a continuous hit effect.

The continuous hit effect flag 223v is a flag for indicating that an effect prompting the continuous hit effect is being executed in one operation effective period, and is set to ON when the continuous hit effect is being executed. Then, when the operation on the frame button 22 is detected, it is determined whether or not the continuous hit effect flag 223v is set to ON, and when it is set to ON, the operation effect corresponding to the continuous hit effect is executed. It On the other hand, when it is set to OFF, a process for detecting a long press operation (a process of measuring the press time by the press timer 223s) is executed.

The upper limit gauge amount storage area 223w is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value determined as the upper limit amount capable of raising the spirit gauge KG in the operation effect, and the variable display setting process (FIG. 174). If the operation display is included in the variable display mode determined in S4013 of No.), the upper limit amount is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the determined upper limit amount is stored. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to increase the gauge amount during the operation effect.

The gauge counter 223x is a counter for indicating the stage information of the vitality gauge KG that is changed in the operation effect, and the counter value is incremented by 1 every time the display mode of the vitality gauge KG is changed (raised). In this control example, the display mode of the feeling gauge KG can be varied (increased) by up to 5 steps, and the value of the gauge counter 223x is updated to a value corresponding to the variable step number of the feeling gauge KG. (Addition) is possible. As a result, it is possible to properly determine the stage information of the actually displayed spirit gauge KG.

The time saving counter 223y is a counter for measuring the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the value of the counter is usually every time the special symbol variation is executed during the high probability state of the symbol. It is configured so that 1 is added. Then, referring to the value of the hour/hour count counter 223y, the current game state is configured to execute an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the number of times of special symbol variation satisfies the hour/hour end condition. ing.

The state storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the set game state, and when the game state is changed, the changed game state is stored. Then, it is referred to when determining which the current game state is.

The arrival flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the value of the lucky point has reached the predetermined value (100P), and is set to ON when the value of the lucky point has reached the predetermined value (100P). Then, when the jackpot is won, it is set to off. While this arrival flag 223ab is set to ON, the processing for adding the value of the lucky points is skipped.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 166) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 157).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored in the character ROM 234.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids the access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set it once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data while setting the data in one bank while using the other bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, a capacity smaller than that of the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a). 2 kilobytes). In the NOR flash memory 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed first is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 word (1 word=2 bytes) instructions) is stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. Set to the bank and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR flash memory 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the program from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR flash. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are included in the NOR flash of the boot program. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is a control program except the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. A program in the work RAM 233 for each predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a) of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the program or its control program. It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 180) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

Further, as described above, the NOR flash memory 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 149) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect in the case of being performed.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 180).

Here, referring to FIG. 145, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. FIG. 145 shows that immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 145(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 145(c). At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a “special symbol big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if “the special symbol is out”, it is shown in FIG. 145(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area A power-on fluctuation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 145(b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 146, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image will be described. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 146(a) shows “ 146(b) is shown for the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A and B, as shown in FIG. 146, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the positions a and a′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scroll-displayed by such a connection.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 causes the corresponding back image to be initially moved from position a to position a′ in the initial position of the display area. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further the display is performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the beach stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data of the back side A corresponding to the beach stage that is displayed frequently is displayed in the back side image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146( b ), the rear surface B corresponding to the deep-sea stage stores only part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b, as the resident video RAM 235. Stored in the back image area 235c.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data for all the back images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may increase the cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is changed to the position a. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81, or can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

After the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the period. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back side B, the image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back-side image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 144) of the normal-use video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

Further, in the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b′ and the position b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 120) imitating the numbers “0” to “9” which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are adapted to be displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and also informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol time saving period) given to the player after the jackpot is over, or a special symbol that is being held. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit.

By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so the chances of drawing a regular symbol will increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. .. Therefore, the chances that the electric symbol 64a is opened as a jackpot for a normal symbol are increased, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the special symbol is easily drawn. Therefore, the longer the shorter time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, which can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize hole in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, so that the electric symbol 64a is opened and the ball is the first prize. The easier it is to enter the ball entrance 64, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get the expectation that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol consisting of sub-symbols without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Further, the display data table corresponding to each game menu screen is also stored in this data table storage area 233b.

Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table for variation effect (variation display data table) in the display data table. A display data table such as a variable display data table is associated with an address that represents one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time are defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and a character used for various effects is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This rear surface type displays either the rear surface A or B corresponding to the stage (either the "sand beach stage" or the "deep sea stage") selected by the player, or the rear surface different from the rear surface A or B. Information that specifies whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target, among the back surfaces A and B. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. Instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

“Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 147) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 149) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 148). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing in the transfer data table.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data which means that (the address “0002H” in FIG. 148 corresponds) is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 148, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 149) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 148, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is used after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 180). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S9705 of FIG. 192(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 182(b)), and If the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S8308 of FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 182(b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 182(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 188) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 192(a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 192(b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 149) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 149) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 182(b )), the pointer update process (see S9305 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 149), and at the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 149, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,... For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy that information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character (Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern), various comments.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is arranged on the backmost side (the drawing layer at the bottom), and the last drawn sprite is the frontmost side (the drawing layer on the forefront). Can be placed in. The image arranged on the forefront side (the drawing layer at the foreground) when the comment display function is turned on is a character image forming a comment. By arranging the comment at the forefront side (the drawing layer at the forefront), the comment can be visually recognized more clearly by the player.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 182(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S9307 of FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9813 in FIG. 193). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 193). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 194).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has been developed in advance from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 194).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 150 to 160. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is regularly (in this control example, at 2 msec intervals) started. There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present control example, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and first. A start winning process associated with a prize (starting prize) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, so that the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether the jackpot waiting state, or the special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the entry waiting flag 203j and the big hitting flag 203m is on. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot waiting state or the jackpot of the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process is ended.

In the process of S201, even in the jackpot waiting state, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is changed. It is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e (first Acquiring the number of times N1 of suspension of variable display based on lottery of special symbols is acquired (S208), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). ..

In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213, which is executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of this special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the change time counter for measuring the change time is updated (S214), and the change time counter after update is displayed. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol is selected based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2 is determined.

In the present embodiment, in the case of big hit A1, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in case of big hit A2, the red LED is turned on, and in case of big hit A3. , If the green LED is turned on and the jackpot B1 is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on, and if the jackpot B2 is reached, the red LED and the green LED are turned on and the jackpot C1 is reached. In this case, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on, and when the jackpot is C2, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on, and when the jackpot is D1, The blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on, and when the jackpot D2 is reached, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on. If it is out, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S217 is finished, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the result of the lottery this time is a big hit for the special symbol (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF, the value of the hour/hour counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is a value larger than 0 (that is, is it the time saving state of the normal symbol? ) Is determined (S220), and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S220, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203i is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203i after the subtraction is 0 (S222). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0 (S222: Yes), the state command indicating that the game state has been changed from the time saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set (S223). After that, the process proceeds to S224. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203i is not 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

In the process of S224, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, "special jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment determination), and the first symbol This is processing for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c is acquired (S301).

Next, the probability variation flag 203h is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 137(b)). As described above, 20 random numbers "0 to 5" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that the special symbol is not in a probable state of change (a low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And the first hit random number table for low probability time (see FIG. 137(b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability are compared. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, the fluctuation pattern table used this time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 140) (S305), and the process proceeds to S306.

And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 137(c)) to determine what the big hit type is. To do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", it is a big hit A1 (10 round probability variation big hit). It is determined that if it is in the range of “55 to 59”, it is a jackpot A2 (10 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “60 to 64”, it is a jackpot A3 (10 round probability variation jackpot). Judging, if it is in the range of "65-69", it is determined that it is a big hit B1 (30 rounds in 30 rounds, big hits), and if it is in the range of "70-74, big hits B2 (30 rounds in 10 rounds, big hits) ), if it is in the range of "75-84", it is determined that it is a big hit C1 (50 rounds in 10 rounds, 10 big rounds), and if it is in the range of "85-89", it is a big hit C2 (10 rounds). It is determined that it is a big hit 50 times per hour), and if it is in the range of "90 to 94", it is determined to be a big hit D1 (80 times big jackpot in 10 rounds per hour), and if it is in the range of "95 to 99", it is a big hit. It is determined to be D2 (10 rounds, 80 short wins per round) (see FIG. 137(c)). In addition, in the present control example, even when the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is achieved, the same control process as in the case of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol described above is executed. In the process of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2). To be done. Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackets A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2) is set as the stop type. ..

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 138(c) and FIGS. 139(a) to (c)) to determine the variation type. A fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the third symbol is displayed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the device 81, the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", the complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", the reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

When the process of S308 or the process of S310 is finished, next, a change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S308 or the process of S310 is set (S311). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of this fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S312). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S313). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 159). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing a holding process of the values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the special symbol is held) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e If the value (N1) of is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reservation ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) (S407). In this process as well, similar to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of fluctuation display in the special symbol is held) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to It is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a pre-reading process for pre-reading the winning/absence of the various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and the present process is ended. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In the prefetch process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 in the present start winning process (see FIG. 153). (S501), if a new incoming ball has not been detected (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, if it is determined that a new incoming ball is detected (S501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S502), and when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is the probability change state of the special symbol. It is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the state is the probable variation state, depending on the current game state and the look-ahead result of the holding ball held before the current entering ball. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the hold ball, the current game state and the timing to start the variable display based on the detected ball entered this time match, so the current game state is a sudden change state. It is determined that In addition, when the big hit is included in the reservation ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of big hit. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot is suspended, the probability transition state is shifted to after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the status is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. In consideration of these, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the ball detected this time is in the probable state.

In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the detected incoming ball is the probability change state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the incoming entrance that detected the incoming ball and the high probability Based on the first random number table for use (see FIG. 137(b)), the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start time is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), the type of the entrance detecting the entrance and the first random number table for the low probability case (FIG. 137). Based on (b)), the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, the prize information command is set based on the type of the entrance detecting the current entrance and the lottery result acquired in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the prize information command in the prize information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203d is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203d is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203d is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508). Specifically, the value of the time saving medium counter 203i of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203h is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, If the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not the time saving state).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the second per random number table for high probability Based on the result, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 138(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 138(a)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S509 or S510 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S511), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S511: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol "○" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S514), and if the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S514: Yes), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), this process To finish. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", so it is normal The lottery frequency of the symbols becomes high. Therefore, since the winning frequency in the regular symbol lottery becomes high, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 becomes easy to open, and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. It becomes a state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S517). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S518, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 159) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the display is finished, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S519). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S520), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state. (S520: Yes), “1 second×2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. .. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state (not the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, and the number of times of opening. As a result, “0.2 seconds×1 time” is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the present process is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 159) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and opening number set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the result of the current lottery is out of the normal symbols (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 150), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g (M) If is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of retained balls counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of power-off last time did not end normally, the process proceeds to S812 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 of FIG. 159. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state at the time of cutting off the drive power is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 150) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) and the start winning process (see FIG. 153), the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 153) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 160) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors product 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), the opening/closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) ends, the first symbol display device End the variable display being executed in 37, in the display mode set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) or the process of S309, the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155) or the process of S516, in the second symbol display device 83. Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 157 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 158) is performed without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the stack pointer value. ), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control processing (S904) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 159), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and the present process is ended.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1003). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S1007, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached.

In the process of S1009, if it is the ending effect start timing (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and the present process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011), and the end timing of the ending effect When the determination is made (S1011: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of this time is the jackpot A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B) (S1012: No), the value corresponding to the big hit type is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203i (S1013), and the process is executed. The process moves to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that the big hit of this time is the big hit A (S1012: Yes), the probability change flag 203h is turned on so that the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the big hit. Is set (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1013, or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the special symbol lottery state after the jackpot is over (whether the special symbol is a probability changing state or a special symbol low probability state) is voiced. The status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the big hit is set (S1016), and this processing is ended.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 161, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S3901). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S4017 (see FIG. 162) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4014: Yes in FIG. 162), the power-off process of S4017 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S4016 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

In the process of S3902, if the power-off process in progress flag is off (S3902: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off or after a momentary power failure occurs. It is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S4017, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3906. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S4017 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the process proceeds to S3908.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S3902: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4017, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S3904 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3904, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3906). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and the loop is infinite until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S3908, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4017 is executed (see S4016 in FIG. 162). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4017 is executed, the process of S3908 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S4017 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3909), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S3904 to S3906 is performed and then the process of S3908 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S3909, is skipped, the process proceeds to S3910, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S3911), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S3909 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3904 when the process of S3904 progresses to the process of S3908 via the process of S3906. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4001 this time has been executed (S4001), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4012 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4011. In the process of S4001, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S4002 to S4011 that determines whether 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4012 and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4013 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4012 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4013 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4003 to S4013 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002). ).

Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4004). .. The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S4005 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4007). The frame button input monitoring/effect process is a process of monitoring whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed and setting an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. Specifically, a process for changing the display mode when the frame button 22 is pressed (continuously pressed) during the operation effective period of the operation effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22. Is. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4007) is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S4008), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4009, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4010), and thereafter, during execution of variable display, effect update processing for changing the effect mode according to the remaining variable time, the value of various timers, and the like. It executes (S4011) and moves the process to S4012. The details of this effect update process (S4011) will be described later with reference to FIG. 165.

In the process of S4012, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4012). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the command determination process ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S4013). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174.

After the processing of S4013 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4014). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4014 (S4014: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-progress flag are both turned on (S4016), and the power-off process is executed (S4017). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S4018), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4014 (S4014: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4015), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4015: No), the process returns to S4001 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4015: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4007) executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect process. As described above, the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see FIG. 163) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether the value of the effective period timer 223e is larger than 0 (S4101), and when it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (is 0), (S4101: No), which means that the operation is not in the valid period, and thus the present process is terminated. That is, if the operation button is not in the operation valid period, the display mode of the operation effect is not variably displayed even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is larger than 0 (S4101: Yes), it means that the current operation is valid period. It is determined whether or not is detected (S4102). In the processing of S4102, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S4102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pressing timer 223s is larger than 0 (S4103), and it is not larger than 0 (when 0 is set). If it is determined that it is the first timing when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected within the current operation valid period (S4103: No), the value of the pressing timer 223s is set to 1. (S4104), the process proceeds to S4105.

The pressing timer 223s set in the process of S4104 is a timer whose value is updated in the effect updating process (see S4011 of FIG. 165) described later, and the player continuously presses the frame button 22. It is for measuring time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the value of the press timer 223s is larger than 0 (S4103: Yes), it means that the frame button 22 has already been pressed (the state of long pressing). , S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not the press release flag 223u is set to ON (S4105), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4105: No), the frame button 22 is continuously pressed ( A display command indicating that the button is being pressed is set (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4110.

If it is determined in the process of S4105 that the press release flag 223u is set to ON (S4105: Yes), a display command indicating that continuous pressing is being performed is set (S4107), and the press release flag 223u is set to OFF. (S4108), the continuous hit effect flag is set to ON (S4109), and the process proceeds to S4110.

Then, after the processing of S4106 or the processing of S4109 is completed, the press effect setting processing is executed (S4110), and this processing is ended. This pressing effect setting process (S4110) is a judgment timing when it is judged whether the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 is the judgment timing for changing the stage information (the spirit gauge KG) of the operation effect. In this case, the processing for changing (raising) the stage information (vigor gauge KG) is executed.

Here, the contents of the press effect setting process (S4110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the press effect setting process (S4110). When the press effect setting process (S4110) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the determination timing (determination timing for the operation effect) for varying the stage information (the spirit gauge KG) (S4201), and not the determination timing. If it is determined (S4201: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the determination timing (S4201: Yes), then, whether or not the gauge is increased is determined using the gauge increase lottery table 222d (S4202), and if it is determined that the gauge is increased (S4203). ), the value of the gauge counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S4204), a display command for indicating the value of the gauge counter 223x after the addition is set (S4205), and this processing is ended. If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the gauge has not risen (S4203: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description will be continued. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), it is then determined whether the long-pressing flag 223t is set to ON (S4111), and the long-pressing is being performed. If it is determined that the flag 223t is on (S4111; Yes), the long-pressing flag 223t is set to off (S4112), the press release flag 223u is set to on (S4113), and a display command prompting continuous hitting is set. Is set (S4114), the value of the press timer 223s is cleared to 0 (S4115), and this processing ends.

When it is determined in the process of S4111 that the long-pressing flag 223t is not set to ON (S4111: No), the processes of S4112 to S4114 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4115. In the processing of S4115, processing for clearing the value of the press timer 223s to 0 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the processing content of the effect update processing (S4011) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process (S4011). As shown in FIG. 165, in the effect update process (S4011), the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid, and the value of the effective period timer 223e for measuring the remaining period of the effective period of the operation and the frame button 22 by the player. The value of the press timer 223s for continuously pressing is updated, and the process of setting the display command for indicating the effect mode corresponding to the updated value is executed. .. This effect update process (S4011) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the variable display, the remaining variable time, the value of various timers, etc. are displayed. It is a process for changing the effect mode accordingly.

This effect update process (S4011) is a process that is periodically executed every 1 millisecond (ms) in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the voice lamp control device 113, so the effective period timer 223e and the press timer are pressed. In 223s, the value is measured in units of 1 millisecond. Therefore, each time the value of each timer is updated 1000 times, the period corresponding to 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is measured. For convenience of explanation, when showing the values of various timers, the explanation will be given in millisecond units (that is, the same as the value actually updated) and in the second unit (that is, 1/of the actually updated value). In some cases, the description will be given using a value of 1000).

When the production update process (S4011) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is currently changing (special symbol is changing) (S4301), and when it is determined that the special figure is not changing (S4301: No). ) That is, if the conditions for executing the special symbol fluctuation are not satisfied (when the winning data is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (standby) Medium), or, if the winning data is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, because it is a jackpot game, if the prize data cannot be shifted to the execution area (Big hit game)) executes a process for updating other effects (standby effect (demo effect), big hit game effect) (S4310), and ends this process.

The detailed description of the processing executed in S4310 will be omitted. For example, during standby, a display screen showing the result of the last special symbol lottery (the stop display mode of the third symbol is displayed. Value of the timer (demo timer) that measures the period from the display screen that is displayed) to the demo screen that is displayed during standby (the screen that displays the model name, demonstration effect, etc.) A process for changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the update result.

Also, during the jackpot game, update the value of the timer that measures the elapsed time of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period), the third symbol display based on the update result A process for changing the display mode of the device 81 is executed. Here, for example, when the round game period has passed a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), but the ball has not won into the specific winning opening 65a, or the round game period has a specific period (for example, 20 seconds). ) If the round game has not ended despite the passage of time, that is, if the round game end condition that is satisfied by winning 10 balls into the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied, On the other hand, an effect for emphasizing and promoting the right-handed game is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the current time is during special figure fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation), then the value of the valid period timer 223e is greater than 0, that is, the current operation valid period. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S4302), and when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is 0 (S4302: No), the process of S4310 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. In the process of S4302, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is larger than 0 (S4302: Yes), the value of the valid period timer 223e is updated (S4303), and then the updated valid period timer is used. It is determined whether the value of 223e is 0 (S4304).

When it is determined that the value of the effective period timer 223e is 0, that is, when the operation effective period has ended (S4304: Yes), a display command for indicating the effect result of this operation effect is set. (S4305), the present process ends.

In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not 0 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the value of the press timer 223s is greater than 0 (S4306), and it is determined that the value is greater than 0. In the case (S4306: Yes), the value of the pressing timer 223s is updated (S4306), and then it is determined whether the value of the updated pressing timer 223s is the value (20000) corresponding to 2 seconds (S4308). If it is determined that the value corresponds to 2 seconds (20000) (S4308: Yes), the long-pressing flag 223t is set to ON (S4309), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the press timer 223s is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S4306 (S4306: No), or it is determined that the value is not 2 seconds in the process of S4308. In the case (S4308: No), the process of S4309 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the command determination processing (S4012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4012). The command determination process (S4012) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 162) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination processing (S4012), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main control device 110 changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether a command has been received (S4401). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S4401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4402), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( (S4403), and returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 174) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4404). When the stop type command is received (S4404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 174) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S4404: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4407: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110, or, The value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times N of the variable display holding in the special symbol is extracted) is extracted, and the storage area for the corresponding special symbol type in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is extracted. (S4408). Further, in the process of S4408, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the processing of S4408 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110. Since it is transmitted from, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S4408. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of 110, or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) can be adjusted. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f. Even if it deviates from the value of (variable display holding number N in the special symbol), the value of the special symbol holding number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of the detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol). When the process of S4408 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls for each special symbol type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S4407, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S4407: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4409). When it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S4409: Yes), the information of the received prize command is set in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (S4410), and the process returns to the main process.

In the processing of S4409, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4409: No), it is then determined whether or not a hit related command has been received (S4411). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4411: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S4412), and the process returns to the main processing. The details of the hit-related processing (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 171.

In the processing of S4411, if it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S4411: No), then it is determined whether or not the prize control command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4413). When it is determined that the command for the number of prize balls is received (S4413: Yes), the prize ball related process is executed (S4414), and the process is finished. The detailed content of this prize ball-related processing (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

In the processing of S4413, when it is determined that the prize ball number command has not been received (S4413: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S4415), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

By executing this command determination processing, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the command output from main controller 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, the variable display setting process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4013). This variable display setting process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag included in the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S5201: No), the variation pattern command of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is issued from the main controller 110. Since it has not been received, the process proceeds to S5209. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag of the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is turned off (S5203), and then the current game state is normal. If it is determined that it is in the state (S5204), and if it is in the normal state (S5204: Yes), in the process of S4403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 166), the variation in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command Based on the pattern type, the variable display mode of the current variable display is determined from the variable pattern table 222a (S5205).

Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation display mode is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5206). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5207). In the process of S5207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of: first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5209.

On the other hand, in the process of S5204, when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (time saving state or probability changing state) (S5204: No), the time saving effect mode setting process is executed (S5208), and then the process of S5209 is performed. Transition. This time saving effect mode setting process (S5208) is to set the effect mode of various effects that are executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. 179 will be described.

In the process of S5216, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S5216). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5216: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5216: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5217), and then in the process of S4406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 166), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5218).

Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5219), and the display controller is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5220), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the time saving effect mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)) will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)). In this time saving effect mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)), a process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is executed. In this control example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the same effect mode is set as the effect mode of the variable effect. , The same control process is executed.

When the time saving mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag 223ab is set to ON (S5301). If it is determined that the arrival flag 223ab is set to ON (S5301: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304, and if it is determined that the arrival flag 223ab is not set to ON (S5301: No). , It is determined whether the value of the display point counter is greater than 0 (S5302), and when it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S5302: No), the information stored in the effect information storage area 223h is read (S5303). ), specify the current performance state.

Then, it is determined whether or not the present is the winning rate UP zone (S5304), and when it is determined that the winning rate is the UP zone (S5304: Yes), the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305) is executed, and then the display is performed. The value of the display point stored in the point storage area 223r is incremented by 1 (S5306), the display command for indicating the added value is set (S5307), and the value of the hour/hour counter 223y is incremented by 1 (S5310). ) Do.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the winning percentage is not in the UP zone, the variable display mode is determined based on the read information and the extracted variation pattern (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5310, or S5302. When it is determined that the value of the display point counter is greater than 0 in the process of (S5302), the effect setting process is executed from the first time onward (S5309), and then the process of S5310 is performed.

After the processing of S5310 is finished, next, the upper limit time saving number (when the game state set this time is a time saving state, the set time saving number) is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223aa. Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 223y corresponds to the upper limit number in order to determine whether or not the current variation display is the final hour/hour variation (S5311), and if it is determined that the value corresponds (S5311: Yes). A variable display mode (defeat mode of defeating battle effect) indicating the end of time saving is determined (S5313), a normal state is set in the state storage area (S5314), and this process is ended.

As described above, in the present control example, when the time saving state is set, different time saving times can be set, and as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation of the number of times that can be the upper limit number of time saving, the battle must be performed without fail. It is configured such that a variation pattern (60-second variation) capable of executing an effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the processes of S5312 to S5314, it is possible to properly notify the player of the game result only by performing the process of rewriting the effect result of the battle effect only when the time saving state is actually ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the contents of the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305) will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning percentage UP zone effect setting process (S5305). In this win rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305), various variable effects executed during the win rate UP zone are executed.

When the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a jackpot variation (S5401). When it is determined that the variation is a jackpot variation (S5401: Yes), the winning rate is determined. The effect mode showing the winning rate V% is determined so that the display becomes the special display mode (V%) (S5402), and the information stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j and the display winning rate storage area 223k is cleared (S5403). ), the winning rate variable flag 223i is set to OFF (S5404), and this processing ends. In other words, in the win rate UP zone, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is started without setting the battle mode. Therefore, the win rate display for showing the winning expectation degree of the battle production in the battle mode is special. By changing the display mode, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5401, when it is determined that the jackpot does not change (S5401: No), the upper limit of the winning percentage stored in the upper limit winning percentage storage area 223j is read (S5405) and stored in the display winning percentage storage area 223k. The winning win display value is read (S5406), and the difference value between the winning win upper limit value read in S5405 and the display value read in the process of S5406 is calculated (S5407).

Then, based on the calculated difference value, a value that can be increased in the present variation effect is determined (S5408), and then it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 11 seconds). (S5409), if it is a normal variation pattern (variation pattern of variation time of 10 seconds) that is not the specific variation pattern (S5409: No), a lottery for determining the presence or absence of the winning percentage UP is executed (S5410), and the winning percentage UP effect If the player wins the execution (S5411: YES), the effect mode indicating that the winning rate is UP is determined by the increaseable value determined in the process of S5408 (S5412) and is stored in the display winning rate storage area 223k. The display value is updated (S5413), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if the winning percentage UP effect is not won (S5411: No), an effect mode indicating that the winning percentage UP is not performed is determined (S5414), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the effect setting process (S5309) after the first time will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5309) after the first time. In the production setting process after the first time (S5309), various processes for setting the production mode for special symbol variations other than the first special symbol variation during the time saving state are executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, first, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 223y is 2 or less (S5501), and if it is 2 or less (S5501: Yes), the hour/hour count is It is determined whether the value of the counter 223y is 2 (S5502), and when it is determined that it is not 2 (S5502: No), the winning percentage UP zone effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. 176 is executed ( (S5503), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223y is 2 (S5502: Yes), the final win rate determination process is executed (S5504), and the process is finished and the process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 223y is not 2 or less (3 or more) (S5501: No), it is next determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 223y is 3. If it is determined (S5505) and 3 (S5505: Yes), the current game state is read from the state storage area 223aa (S5506), and the upper limit number of lucky points is determined based on the read game state. (S5507), the determined upper limit value is stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q (S5508), the effect information of the battle opponent is read from the information stored in the effect information storage area 223h (S5509), and it corresponds to the read battle opponent. The effect mode to be performed is determined (S5510), the battle effect setting process is executed (S5511), and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 223y is not 3 (4 or more) in the process of S5505, that is, when the battle mode is already in progress, the processes of S5506 to S5510 are skipped and S5511 is executed. The process is executed and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the content of the final winning percentage determination processing (S5504) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning percentage determination processing (S5504). In this final winning rate determination processing (S5504), processing for determining the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 125(b)) for determining the battle opponent executed as the final variation effect for the winning rate UP zone is executed.

When the final win rate determination process (S5504) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not this fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation (S5601), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot fluctuation (S5601: Yes), the winning rate display is special. The presentation mode indicating the winning rate V% is determined so as to be the display mode (V%) (S5602), the information stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j and the display winning rate storage area 223k is cleared (S5603), and the winning rate is determined. The variable flag 223i is set to OFF (S5404), and this processing ends. In other words, in the win rate UP zone, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is started without setting the battle mode. Therefore, the win rate display for showing the winning expectation degree of the battle production in the battle mode is special. By changing the display mode, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5601, when it is determined that the jackpot does not change (S5601: No), the upper limit of the winning percentage stored in the upper limit winning percentage storage area 223j is read (S5605) and stored in the display winning percentage storage area 223k. The winning win display value is read (S5606), and the difference value between the winning win upper limit value read in S5605 and the display value read in the process of S5606 is calculated (S5607).

Then, in the present variation effect, an effect mode indicating that the winning rate is increased by the difference value is determined (S5608), a battle opponent corresponding to the upper limit value is determined (S5609), and an effect aspect for indicating the determined battle opponent. Is determined (S5610), then the effect information corresponding to the determined battle opponent is stored in the effect information storage area 223h (S5611), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the present control example, the upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning percentage) determined when the winning percentage UP zone is set is finally displayed, and the battle opponent corresponding to the upper limit value competes in the battle mode. It is configured to be decided as a battle opponent to do. Therefore, even if an effect in which the winning rate is increased in the winning rate UP zone is not set, the upper limit value is finally displayed, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the battle opponent may be determined based on the display value stored in the display win rate storage area 223k instead of the upper limit value stored in the upper limit win rate storage area 223j. .. In this case, even if the same upper limit value is set, the display win rate at the end of the win rate UP zone can be made different depending on the effect contents executed in the win rate UP zone. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current game state.

Next, the content of the battle effect setting process (S5511) will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the content of the battle effect setting process (S5511). In this battle effect setting process (S5511), when a variation pattern (60-second variation) capable of executing the battle effect is set during the battle mode, a process for determining the effect result of the battle effect is executed. ..

When the battle effect setting process (S5511) is executed, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern extracted this time is a 60-second variation (S5651), and it is not a 60-second variation, that is, a variation in which the battle effect cannot be executed. If it is determined that it is a pattern (S5651: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5651, if it is determined that the fluctuation is 60 seconds (S5651: Yes), then it is determined whether the current variation is a jackpot variation (S5652), and if it is a jackpot variation. (S5652: Yes), sets a display command for executing an effect in which the effect result is “win” (S5663), and ends this processing. Further, in the processing of S5652, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot variation (S5662: No), it is determined whether the current variation is the time saving final variation (S5654), and when it is determined that it is the time saving final variation ( (S5654: Yes), the display command for executing the effect that the effect result is "defeat" is set (S5656), and the present process is ended.

In the processing of S5654, when it is determined that the final reduction is not the time saving final variation (S5654: No), a display command for executing an effect in which the effect result is “continuation” is set (S5656), and the display point storage area 223r is set. 5 is added to the value of the display point stored in (S5657), a display command for indicating the added value is set (S5658), and this processing ends.

That is, the display of "continuation" in the battle effect is a condition for executing the addition effect that allows a predetermined number of lucky points to be added. Although detailed description is omitted, in the process of S5657, if the difference between the upper limit number of lucky points and the current display number is less than 5, it is not executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, the NOR flash memory 234d is stored with a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, and therefore, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the first flash memory of the NOR flash memory 234d to be read. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S8001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, according to the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c. , Of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S8101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing required for the boot processing (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S8001 in FIG. 180) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) (S8105), the execution of the boot program ends, and the present boot process ends.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S8001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

On the other hand, the NOR flash memory 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 181, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S8102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S8101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S8101. Alternatively, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed after repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S8102 and S8102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 180. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. In addition, as an initial value of each flag, “OFF” or “0” is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8003, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S8005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S9602 in FIG. 192(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during this period, the V-interruption process (see FIG. 182(b)) causes the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 145 is drawn. The determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 182(b)) are executed.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. If it is through the device 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 145(b) and (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S8005, the interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 149) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 182(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal rendering is performed instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 145. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S8302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188.

In the display setting process (S8303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) or the like. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191.

After the display setting processing is executed, next, task processing is executed (S8304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simple display setting process (S8309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction for setting the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S8304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305). 149, the drawing list shown in FIG. 149 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, complete disconnection) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S8301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S8301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 145 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the process of S8304 is executed. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188, details of the above-described command determination processing (S8302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 183, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S8401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: YES), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S8303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S8403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S8405), the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S8501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

In the process of S8502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S8505), the fluctuation pattern command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 189), the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8504 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501. From the variable display data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the processing of S8502 is performed. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process (see FIG. 189), the time of the fluctuating effect specified in the variable display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S8503, and the time in the variable display data table is set. When it is determined that the variation effect ends, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406). If there is a display variation type command (S8406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop-type command. Is determined (S8601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. (S8603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S8304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S8603, and the specification thereof is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S8601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S8602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the stop of complete disengagement on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409) and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). FIG. 185(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8704). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S8705), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S8702. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S8410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b). FIG. 185(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S8801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S8805), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S8410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8904). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S8905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S8414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187(a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9001). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S9002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S9001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S9002. .. If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set by the processing in S9002 is used. The RAM type in which the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S8414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S8416), and there is an error command. If (S8416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S8417) will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S9101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S9102), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S9102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S9102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. In the process of S8416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the information to which the number of times displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is added. If it is determined (S8418) and there is a command related to the display of the number of times (S8418: Yes), the number addition related command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

In addition, the command related to the number-of-times addition display is, for example, a display command for indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, a display command for indicating a lucky point, a display command for indicating the winning percentage, or a spirit gauge KG. A display command or the like for indicating information for changing the stage information can be given. The display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b like the variable display data table and the like. By executing the number-of-times addition related command process (S8419), the type of the display mode instructed to start the display, the display time, etc. are determined from the command related to the number of times display, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d.

Here, the details of the number-of-times addition-related command processing (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the number addition related command processing. The number-of-times addition-related command process is a process corresponding to the number-of-times addition-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the number-of-times addition-related command processing, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S9202). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time indicated by the command is set in the clock counter 233h (S9203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S9204), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the process of S8418, when it is determined that there is no command related to the number of times addition (S8418: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S8420), and the process proceeds to S8401.

In the processing of S8401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area, and if there is a new unprocessed command (S8401: Yes). ), and the processes of S8402 to S8420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S8401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 145, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 184(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 184(b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S8501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S8502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191, details of the above-described display setting process (S8303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S9301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S9302 to S9304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S9301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S9302), and then S9303 and S9304. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S9303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S9303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S9304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S9401).

In the task processing (see S8304 in FIG. 182(b)), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 189. After the warning image setting process (S9304) or in the process of S9303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S9303: No), the process proceeds to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S9501, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S9503), and if it is the demo display data table (S9503: Yes), the display data table buffer is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S9505), and this processing is terminated and displayed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S9506). ), and ends this processing, and returns to the display setting processing. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , The drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S9502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 189, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S9306 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the final display flag is on. (S9309).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S9309: No), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S9310), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S9311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9312), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S8304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S9315, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the confirmation display flag is on (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S9316). If the demo display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. 233d (S9317) and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S9318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9321), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, after the fixed display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set to be displayed.

In the process of S9316, if the demo display flag is on (S9316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines that the image (FIG. 145(b) or (c)) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S8305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S9601: YES), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S9601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S9601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S9602) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S9701), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S9701: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S9702). In this processing of S9702, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237 after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S9702 that the transfer processing is not completed (S9702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S9702: Yes), the process proceeds to S9703. Further, as a result of the processing of S9701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the processing proceeds to S9703.

In the processing of S9703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9703). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S9703: No), the A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S9703 (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S8308 of FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 of FIG. 182(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 183 to 188) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S9601: No in FIG. 192(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the normal image transfer setting process (S9603) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, with the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S9305) of the display setting process (S8303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802), and if it is transfer data information (S9802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S9803, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (step S9804), and the process proceeds to step S9805.

Further, in the processing of S9802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S9802: No), the processing of S9803 and S9804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: YES), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9806).

In the processing of S9806, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S9806 that the transfer processing has not ended (S9806: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S9806: Yes), the process moves to S9807. Also, as a result of the processing of S9805, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S9805: No), the processing moves to S9807.

In the process of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807). If the transfer start flag is on (S9807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S9808), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S9803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S9807: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S9809). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S9809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is turned on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is turned off (S9810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S9811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

In the processing of S9813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the processing of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S9813 (S9813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S9813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S9814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S9814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the above-described drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 149 is generated (S9901). That is, in the processing of S9901, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S8304). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of sprites that should be arranged on the rearmost side to sprites that should be arranged on the front side in an image for one frame, and the details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is included as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S9902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 200. In the above-described first control example, during the jackpot game, the additional effect can be executed when the ball enters the general entrance 63 or the over-winning into the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when a ball is won in each winning opening, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, and when the execution lottery is won, the additional effect is executed. However, there are various timings when the ball wins each winning opening, and there are cases where the ball is continuously won in the execution lottery, so multiple additional effects are executed in duplicate, which is difficult for the player to understand. There was a problem of providing.

On the other hand, in the second control example, a new additional effect is not executed while the additional effect is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of additional effects from being duplicated and execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Further, in the second control example, the length of the period during which execution of a new additional effect is prohibited is changed according to the type of additional effect. Specifically, when an additional effect that increases the winning rate is executed, a new additional effect is not executed until the additional effect is completed, and when the lively additional effect is executed, A new additional effect can be executed even during the additional effect period. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute the additional effect that provides information (winning rate UP) that is advantageous to the player, and to duplicate the additional effect for the lively additional effect. By doing so, the staging effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the second control example, when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied in the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the additional effect is internally generated based on the satisfaction of the execution condition. When a process for determining the effect mode is performed and an additional effect for providing the player with advantageous information (winning rate UP) is determined, the processing result is temporarily stored. Then, after the new additional effect can be executed, when the player performs the additional effect that provides advantageous information (winning rate UP), the processing result of the additional effect temporarily stored is also included. It is configured to execute an additional effect. In addition, when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied during the period when the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the new additional effect can be executed based on the stored number of times. It is configured to be able to determine the effect mode of the additional effect that is executed in step (1).

With such a configuration, during the jackpot game, the player who actively plays the game to execute the additional effect is made to actively and actively play the game even during the execution period of the additional effect. be able to.

<Regarding effect contents of the second control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 195, of the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of characteristic effects will be described. The second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the additional effect is generated according to the number of times (the number of stocks) that the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. The difference is that the effect mode is variable. Therefore, the content of the additional effect executed according to the number of stocks will be described.

FIG. 195(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a point acquisition effect (additional effect) is executed in a state where two additional effects are stocked. As shown in FIG. 195(a), when the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied at a timing at which a new additional effect can be executed (when the ball enters the general entrance 63 and wins the execution lottery). In addition, the additional effect of continuously acquiring the capsules 801 corresponding to the number of stocks of the additional effect is executed.

This capsule 801 is similar to the additional effect shown in FIG. 121(b) of the above-described first control example, in which the content 801a pops out from the capsule 801, and information indicating the winning rate increase value is displayed. In FIG. 195(a), the character "10%" is displayed to indicate that the win rate displayed in the display area HR1 is increased by 10%. Then, the second capsule 801b and the third capsule 801c are displayed in correspondence with the number of stocks of the additional effect. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 195(a) is a display screen when the point acquisition effect (additional effect) is executed in the state where the stock number of the additional effect is two, and the additional effect that has been stocked is It is executed continuously.

Then, the contents 801a are displayed from the second capsule 801b and the third capsule 801c in the same manner as the capsule 801, and information that is advantageous to the player (information indicating a winning percentage increase value, information on whether or not there are consecutive chans) is displayed. It With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to actively play the additional effect even during the period when the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited.

In addition, in the present control example, when the execution lottery of the additional effect is won during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the number of times the execution lottery is won without determining the effect mode of the additional effect ( The number of stocks is counted and stored. Then, when the additional lottery execution lottery is won at a timing when a new additional lottery can be executed, the number of stocks is determined, and the additional lottery is executed in an effect aspect corresponding to the determined number of stocks. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to omit the process of setting the effect mode for the stocked additional effect, and thus it is possible to simplify the process for determining the effect mode.

Furthermore, in the present control example, the effect mode (additional effect type) corresponding to the stock of the additional effect is configured to be the same as the effect mode (additional effect type) set as the newly executed additional effect. ing. That is, when the type of the additional effect to be newly executed is the additional effect type of the point acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. 195(a), the effect corresponding to the number of stocks is also the additional effect type of the point acquisition effect. The effect mode is determined as. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously execute the additional effects corresponding to the additional effect type set for one additional effect, so that the player can easily perform the effect. You can

In addition, in FIG. 195(a), the point acquisition effect has been described as an example, but, for example, when the lively effect is set as the additional effect type, the lively effect is continuously executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of stocks. To be done. With such a configuration, the effect described above with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123, that is, the effect of giving a bonus to the player when the lively effect is executed with a specific law is executed in a short period of time. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, in the present control example, during the period when the execution of the additional effect is prohibited, the number of times of winning the execution lottery for the additional effect is configured to be stored. It may be configured to store the information determined up to the rendering mode. In addition, in the present control example, the number of times of winning the execution lottery of the additional effect is stored, but the number of times the execution lottery of the additional effect is performed is stored, or the number of points is added as a type of the additional effect. It may be configured to store the number of times the acquisition effect is set.

Further, on the display screen, it is preferable to execute a notification effect for informing the player that the current stock period of the additional effect is present. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the situation in which the new additional effect is not executed even though the player has entered the ball into the general entrance 63. In this case, for example, by changing the effect mode of the additional effect that is being executed, it is notified that the stock period of the additional effect is in effect, or by displaying the character "Additional effect stock" in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode. Good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195(b), an effect mode of additional effect when the number of stocks reaches the upper limit will be described. In the present control example, it is configured to stock up to 10 additional effects, and when the stock number reaches the upper limit (10), the additional effects corresponding to the number of stocks are not executed. The special effect mode additional effect is executed.

With such a configuration, when the stock number of the additional effect increases, the additional effect corresponding to the number of stocks as shown in FIG. 195(a) is executed, and the effect period becomes long. Can be suppressed. Further, since the additional effect in the special effect mode can be executed by increasing the number of stocks, it is possible to motivate the player to play the additional effect in stock.

It should be noted that the execution condition of the additional effect of this special effect mode may be separately provided, for example, if a determination means for determining the remaining period of the round game is provided and a new additional effect is executed, the additional effect executed this time. If it is determined that the production period of may be longer than the remaining period of the round game, and it is determined that the production period of the additional production executed this time may be longer than the remaining period of the round game. May be configured to execute an additional effect in a special effect mode having a shorter effect period than the normally executed additional effect. With such a configuration, the effect period of the additional effect can be easily accommodated within the round game period, so that the control process for executing the additional effect can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 195(b), when the additional effect of the special effect mode is executed, the capsule 801s with an angel pattern and the capsule 801t with a skull pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed, and the character 801u of "which is open" is displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "winning rate 100% or 0%" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the effect content of the additional effect this time.

That is, in the additional effect shown in FIG. 195(b), an effect for informing the game state set after the jackpot game is finished is executed. Here, when the capsule 801s with the angel pattern is opened, the winning rate of 100% is displayed in the display area HR1, and when the capsule 801t with the skull pattern is opened, the winning rate of 0% is displayed in the display area HR1. It

In this control example, at least a part of the period during which the additional effect is executed is configured to set the period for stocking the additional effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the additional effect is executed. It may be configured such that a period during which additional effects are stocked can be set even in a period in which it is not. With such a configuration, for example, an additional effect is executed while an effect other than the additional effect executed during the jackpot game is being executed, and an effect which gives a valid benefit to the player is being executed. Can be suppressed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 196(a), the second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that an additional effect selection table 222aa is added, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The additional effect selection table 222aa is a data table that is referred to in order to select an effect mode of the additional effect to be executed when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied. In the additional effect selection table 222aa, an additional effect for increasing the win rate and an additional effect for bustling are defined in correspondence with the value of the stock counter 223an and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. That is, in the second control example, the effect of the additional effect to be executed is executed according to the number of times (the value of the stock counter 223an) that the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. It is configured such that the modes can be made different, and as the value of the stock counter 223an is larger, the additional effect that increases the winning rate, that is, the additional effect that is advantageous to the player is easily selected. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to increase the value of the stock counter 223an.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 196(b), the second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that an in-production timer 223am and a stock counter 223an are added, and is otherwise the same. .. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The production timer 223am is a timer for measuring a period during which execution of a new additional production is prohibited, and when execution of the additional production is set, a period according to the type of the additional production to be set is set. To be done. Then, the timer value is subtracted in the effect update process (S4011) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied, the value of the in-production timer 223am is referred to, and it is determined whether the present time is the additional effect execution prohibition period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited.

In the second control example, the length of the additional effect execution prohibition period is determined according to the type of the additional effect, instead of prohibiting the execution of the new additional effect during the entire period of the additional effect execution period. A value is set in the production timer 223am), and execution of a new additional production is prohibited during the additional production execution period. With such a configuration, for example, only the period during which the information advantageous to the player is notified of the additional effect production period is set as the additional production execution prohibition period, or other conditions (for example, already acquired). 2) When the condition that holds when the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the special map 2 hold) is established, a period different from the case where it is not established is the additional effect execution prohibition period. It is possible to easily execute the process of setting to.

Further, even with the pachinko machine 10 configured such that the execution period of the additional effect can be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (frame button 22), the execution timing of the additional effect set to be executed. It is possible to easily set the additional production execution prohibition period in accordance with the execution period.

The stock counter 223an is a counter for accumulating the number of times the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied during the additional effect effective prohibition period. The value of the stock counter 223an is incremented by 1 when the additional effect execution condition is satisfied during the additional effect execution prohibition period. Then, it is referred to in the process of determining the effect mode of the additional effect, and is used in the process for facilitating the selection of the additional effect of the different effect mode as the effect mode of the additional effect according to the value of the stock counter 223an. Then, when a new additional effect is executed, or when the jackpot game (round game) ends, the value is reset to 0.

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the content defined in the additional effect selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 196(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222aa. In this additional effect selection table 222aa, the upper limit value of the winning percentage stored in the upper limit winning percentage storage area 223j, the difference value between the upper limit value and the winning percentage currently displayed in the display area HR1, the value of the stock counter 223an, and Corresponding to the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, the effect modes of the additional effect for increasing the winning rate and the additional effect for bustling are defined.

Specifically, when the winning percentage upper limit value is “100” and the difference value is “50 to”, the usual “point additional effect” (FIG. 121(b)) is set for the additional effect stock number “0”. ")" is the "point addition effect corresponding to the stock number (see Fig. 195(a))" for the stock number "1 to 3" and "special point addition effect" for the stock number "4 to". (See FIG. 195(b))" is defined.

When the difference value is "to 49", the stock number of additional effects is "0", whereas the normal "point additional effect (see Fig. 121(b))" is the stock number "1 to 3". On the other hand, a "buzzing effect (see Fig. 122(b))" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and a "special lively additional effect" is defined for the stock number "4 to".

When the winning rate upper limit value is "79 to 99" and the difference value is "50 to", the usual "point additional effect" (see FIG. 121(b)) is set for the stock number of additional effect "0". )” corresponds to the stock number “1 to 3”, “point addition effect corresponding to the stock number (see FIG. 195(a))”, and the stock number “4 to” corresponds to the stock number. Point addition effect (see FIG. 195(a))" is defined.

When the difference value is "to 49", the stock number of additional production is "0", whereas the normal "lively production (see Fig. 122(b))" is "1 to 3". On the other hand, “lively production” corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and “lively production” corresponding to the number of stocks is defined for the stock number “4 to”.

Furthermore, when the winning rate upper limit value is "-78" and the difference value is "50-", the normal "point additional effect" (see FIG. 121(b)) is set for the stock number of additional effect "0". "Is a point addition effect corresponding to the stock number for the stock number "1 to 3" (see FIG. 195(a))" and "point corresponding to the stock number for the stock number "4 to"" Additional effect (see FIG. 195(a))" is defined.

When the difference value is "to 49", the stock number of additional production is "0", whereas the normal "lively production (see Fig. 122(b))" is "1 to 3". On the other hand, “lively production” corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and “lively production” corresponding to the number of stocks is defined for the stock number “4 to”.

That is, in the second control example, the effect of the additional effect to be executed is executed according to the number of times (the value of the stock counter 223an) that the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. It is configured such that the modes can be made different, and as the value of the stock counter 223an is larger, the additional effect that increases the winning rate, that is, the additional effect that is advantageous to the player is easily selected. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to increase the value of the stock counter 223an.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. First, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the effect update process 2 (S4061) will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 2 (S4061). This effect update process 2 (S4061) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (S4011) in the first control example, and is at a timing other than during the special symbol fluctuation (during the fluctuation period of the special symbol), that is, a big hit. This is a process for updating the value of the in-production timer 223am set during the game.

Of the effect update processing 2 (S4061) in this second control example, in each processing of S4302 to S4310, the same processing as each processing of effect update processing 2 (S4011) in the first control example is executed respectively, and in S4301. In the process, when it is determined that the special figure is not currently changing (the big hit game is being played), the effect timer update process is executed (S4351), and then the process proceeds to S4310. Is different from the above-described production update processing (see S4061).

Here, the contents of the effect timer updating process (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the content of the effect timer updating process (S4351). This effect timer update process (S4351) is a process executed when it is determined in the effect update process 2 (see S4061 of FIG. 198) that the present figure is not changing (S4301: No of FIG. 198). Therefore, the process for measuring the prohibition period in which the execution of the additional effect during the jackpot game is prohibited is executed.

When the effect timer update process (S4351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0, that is, whether the prohibition period is measured by the effect timer 223am (S6001). Then, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S6001: No), the present processing is ended as it is not in the prohibition period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0 (S6001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 223am is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am after the update is 0. (S6003), if it is determined to be 0, that is, if it is determined to be the end timing of the prohibition period (S6003: Yes), a display command indicating that additional effect is possible is set (S6004), and this processing is performed. To finish. In addition, in the processing of S6003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am after updating is not 0, that is, it is during the prohibition period (S6003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

Next, the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059). This additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059) is that the process during the prohibited period is added to the additional effect mode setting process (S5009 of FIG. 173) of the above-described first control example, and the additional effect mode. The difference is that the process for determining is changed to a process for determining the effect mode based on the number of stocks of the additional effect, and is otherwise the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same reference symbols, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0, that is, during the prohibition period (S5151), and the value of the effect timer 223am is set. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5151: Yes), the value of the stock counter 223an is incremented by 1 (S5152), and this processing is ended.

When it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am is not greater than 0 (0) in the process of S5151 (S5151: Yes), the additional effect mode setting process (S5009 of FIG. 173) of the above-described first control example is performed. The same processes of S5101 to S5103 are executed, and thereafter, the effect mode of the additional effect is determined using the additional effect selection table 222aa based on the calculated difference value and the upper limit value (S5153). The additional effect selection table 222aa used in the process of S5153 is configured such that the value of the stock counter 223an is also referred to, as described above with reference to FIG.

When the process of S5153 is finished, the value of the stock counter 223an is cleared to 0 (S5154), and the same processes of S5101 to S5103 as the additional effect mode setting process of the first control example (S5009 of FIG. 173) are executed. Then, after that, the value corresponding to the additional effect period to be executed is set to the value of the effect timer 223am (S5155), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the second control example, the length of the period during which execution of a new additional effect is prohibited is changed according to the type of additional effect. Specifically, when an additional effect that increases the winning rate is executed, a new additional effect is not executed until the additional effect is completed, and when the lively additional effect is executed, A new additional effect can be executed even during the additional effect period. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute the additional effect that provides information (winning rate UP) that is advantageous to the player, and to duplicate the additional effect for the lively additional effect. By doing so, the staging effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the second control example, when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied in the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the additional effect is internally generated based on the satisfaction of the execution condition. When a process for determining the effect mode is performed and an additional effect for providing the player with advantageous information (winning rate UP) is determined, the processing result is temporarily stored. Then, after the new additional effect can be executed, when the player performs the additional effect that provides advantageous information (winning rate UP), the processing result of the additional effect temporarily stored is also included. It is configured to execute an additional effect. In addition, when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied during the period when the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the new additional effect can be executed based on the stored number of times. It is configured to be able to determine the effect mode of the additional effect that is executed in step (1).

With such a configuration, during the jackpot game, the player who actively plays the game to execute the additional effect is made to actively and actively play the game even during the execution period of the additional effect. be able to.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 206. In the above-described first control example, of the additional effects executed during the jackpot game, when an additional effect for bustling is executed, unless a predetermined condition is satisfied (the special figure 2 hold is a big hit. (Unless information indicating winning is included), it is configured so that a specific number of additional effects in the same display mode are not displayed continuously, so that the player is also interested in the additional effects for lively play. Was configured. However, in the above-described first control example, the predetermined condition is satisfied only when the display mode of the live-action additional effect is set at random and the display mode set at random is the same for two consecutive times. Since the display mode is changed depending on the presence/absence, the chance that the same display mode is displayed three times in succession is small, and the effect is not preferably enhanced.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the display mode is randomly determined within a range excluding the display modes displayed in the past, as the display mode of the live-action additional effect executed during the jackpot game, The type of information to be provided to the player is configured to be different depending on the combination of the display modes at the time when the lively additional effect is performed a specific number of times (5 times). With this configuration, when the live entertainment additional effect is executed a specific number of times, some information is provided to the player based on the effect result, so the effect mode is randomly set for the player. It is possible to surely give the privilege based on the fact that the additional live-action effect is performed a specific number of times, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect.

Further, in the third control example, it is possible to inform which display mode is displayed as the live-action additional effect, which is likely to give a privilege advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a desired display mode is set with respect to the display mode of the lively additional effect randomly set.

The third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the effect content of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game is different, and in order to make the effect content of the additional effect different, a voice lamp control is performed. The difference is that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the device 113 is changed, and the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partly changed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, differences from the first control example described above will be mainly described, and detailed description of the same contents as the first control example will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the effects on the pachinko machine in the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, of the various effects executed in the third control example, characteristic effect contents will be described. In the third control example, the effect content of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game is different from the first control example described above.

FIG. 201(a) is a diagram showing a display screen at the time when the jackpot game is started. As shown in FIG. 201(a), when the jackpot game is started, a bingo card is displayed in the display area HR20 formed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and "bingo game start" is displayed above the bingo card. Is displayed. Then, the characters of "secret information GET with the number of established lines" are displayed as a game guidance mode for suggesting a privilege based on the effect result of the bingo game. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "maximum 5 types of numbers will appear" is displayed as a game guidance mode for guiding that the number of numbers that can be acquired in this bingo game is 5 types. It

With this, it is possible to easily understand to the player who has started the jackpot game that the privilege is given according to the number of lines formed by the maximum five kinds of numbers that can be acquired during the bingo game. In the third control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the addition of the ball to the general ball entrance 63 during the jackpot game and the over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a are additionally performed. It is an opportunity. Then, an effect in which a number is displayed is executed as an additional effect, and the bingo game is configured to proceed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to enthusiastically play the game so as to establish the timing for executing the additional effect in order to progress the bingo game.

When the jackpot game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 201(a) and an additional effect is executed based on the ball entering the general entrance 63, the display screen shown in FIG. 201(b). Is displayed. FIG. 201(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an additional effect is executed in the bingo game executed during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 201(b), when the execution condition of the additional effect is satisfied (when the execution of the additional effect is determined based on the ball entering the general entrance 63), the number randomly set. A display icon 820 indicating is displayed. In FIG. 201(b), a display icon 820 indicating the number “1” is displayed, and a display mode in which the area corresponding to the number “1” in the bingo card in the display area HR20 is filled (in the figure, is indicated by a cross mark). Display) is displayed.

Further, the display area HR21 is formed, and the acquired numbers are displayed as the history. The display area HR21 is formed in a size corresponding to the number of display icons 820 that can be acquired in the current bingo game, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the player predict how many kinds of remaining display icons 820 can be acquired at the time when the display mode indicating that “1” of 1) is displayed. That is, the display area HR21 is a history display mode for notifying the player of the number of display icons 820 acquired during the bingo game and the type of the number shown in the display icon 820 in an easy-to-understand manner. This allows the player to easily understand how many kinds of display icons 820 can be acquired later during the bingo game.

In the example shown in FIG. 201(a), as the display mode of the displayed bingo card, a display mode in which nine types of numbers (“1” to “9”) are displayed in the area of nine cells is Although displayed, the display mode of the bingo card used in the bingo game is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an overlapping display mode in which the same number is displayed in a plurality of areas. In this case, when the numbers displayed in the plurality of areas are set as the additional effects, it is possible to easily increase the number of bingo established lines, and the numbers displayed in the plurality of areas are not set as the additional effects. In this case, since it is possible to make it difficult to establish bingo, it is possible to perform a sharp effect for the player. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the number of bingo established lines until the last display icon 820 is displayed, so that the player can be interested until the end of the bingo game.

Then, when the bingo game ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 202(a) is displayed. FIG. 202(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the fifth type of display icon 820 (the number "9") is displayed. As shown in FIG. 202(a), the player is informed by the history display of the display area HR21 that the fifth type of display icon 820 has been displayed. Specifically, the fact that the display icons 820 indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9” are displayed in the bingo game this time is displayed in the history display of the display area HR21. It is displayed.

In the display area HR20, an area corresponding to the number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) indicated by the display icon 820 acquired this time is displayed in a filled display manner (displayed with a cross mark), and as a result of the bingo game. A display mode indicating that the number of bingo established lines is 2 is displayed. Further, above the main display area Dm, the character "2 lines are established" is displayed as a result display mode showing the result of the current bingo game. Further, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed as a guidance mode indicating whether the result of the current bingo game is advantageous to the player.

In the bingo game example shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, as shown in FIG. 201(a), a display mode in which nine types of numbers (“1” to “9”) are displayed in the area of nine cells. Since the bingo game using the bingo card of is executed, if the type of the acquired number is, for example, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", the bingo establishment line The number is one line. Further, if the additional effect is not executed five times during the jackpot game, it is not possible to acquire five types of display icons 820, and thus the number of bingo established lines may be zero. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 202(b), when the number of established bingo lines is two, the result of the bingo game is a result advantageous to the player (the maximum number of established lines that can be assumed). "Congratulations" comment is displayed to congratulate you.

The guidance mode displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to be different depending on the result of the bingo game. For example, in the example of the bingo game shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the display icon is displayed. When 5 types of 820 have been acquired and the number of lines to be bingo is 1 line, the comment of the “participation prize” indicates that 5 types of display icons 820 have not been acquired and the number of lines to be bingo is 1 line. In the case, the comment “The participation award has not been performed, but the upper limit number was not executed”, the comment “I might have worked harder” has not acquired 5 kinds of display icons 820, and the number of bingo established lines is 0. In the case of, a comment of "sorry" is displayed. In this way, by making the content of the guidance mode indicating the result of the bingo game different depending on the number of times of the additional effect and the number of bingo established lines, it is determined whether or not the result of the bingo game this time is good. It is possible to make the person understand easily.

Then, after the bingo game is finished, as shown in FIG. 202(b), a privilege corresponding to the number of bingo established lines is given. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of privilege information based on the result of the bingo game. In the third control example, as a privilege given to the player as a result of the bingo game, game state information indicating a game state set after the end of the big hit game and special figure 2 hold already acquired during the big hit game are held. It is configured to provide privilege information such as consecutive Chan information indicating jackpot winning (information indicating that it is a pending consecutive jackpot), and as the number of established lines increases, the contents of the above-mentioned gaming state information and consecutive Chan information Is configured so that the player can easily discriminate it.

In FIG. 202(b), as the game state information, the character “probability change confirmed” is displayed in the main display area Dm as a display mode for clearly informing that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is over, and the sub display area Ds. The character "I did it" is displayed on the screen to congratulate that the probability change state is set. As described above with reference to FIG. 202(a), FIG. 202(b) is given to the player because the result of the bingo game is a result that is advantageous to the player (the number of bingo established lines is 2). As the privilege information, a display mode is displayed in which the player can easily determine that the probability change state is set. For example, if the number of bingo-established lines is one, the display of "chance!" Mode, that is, a display mode that only suggests the possibility that a probability variation state is set is displayed, and when the number of bingo established lines is 0, the display mode is "no privilege", that is, it is set after the jackpot game is over. The display mode for notifying (suggesting) the game state is configured not to be displayed.

As a result, a player who wants to quickly determine the game state set after the jackpot game can be interested in the bingo game executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the present control example, as the privilege information given to the player according to the result of the bingo game, information about any one of a plurality of privilege types (game state information, consecutive chan information) is given. Is configured as follows. With such a configuration, for example, when the result of the bingo game executed during the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished is advantageous to the player, the game state information (time saving It is possible to notify the player of another privilege type (for example, continuous churn information) rather than explicitly notifying the player of information indicating that the state is set). ..

In the third control example, the display mode based on the result of the bingo game is set for the privilege types that are advantageous to the player among the plurality of privilege types, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the display mode based on the result of the bingo game may be set only for the game state information indicating the game state set after the jackpot game is over. In this case, a situation may occur in which the player is clearly informed that the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game is over, but the display mode indicating that the time saving state is set is also set to the time saving state. Nonetheless, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting that the probability variation state has been set, and to prevent the player's willingness to play at the end of the time saving state from excessively decreasing. It can be said that the information is advantageous to the person.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 203, the third control example is different from the second control example described above in that an array storage area 223ba, a selected information storage area 223bb, and a display number counter 223bc are added. , Otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The array storage area 223ba is a storage area for temporarily storing the number type set for each area (9 squares) of the bingo card used in the bingo game, and is the first area (see FIG. The upper left area where "1" is displayed on the bingo card shown in a)), the second area (the middle upper area where "2" is displayed on the bingo card shown in FIG. 201(a)),... There are nine types of storage areas corresponding to each of the nine areas (the lower right area where “9” is displayed on the bingo card shown in FIG. 201(a)), and the numbers determined at the start of the bingo game. The type is stored in the corresponding recording area. Then, at the end of the bingo game, it is referred to when the number of bingo established lines established by the number type obtained as the display mode of the additional effect is specified.

With this configuration, even if the number type displayed on the bingo card is randomly determined at the start of the bingo game, the number of lines established in the bingo game can be reliably determined. be able to.

In addition, in this control example, the number type displayed on the bingo card is configured to be randomly determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of bingo cards in which the arrangement of numbers is defined in advance. The player may select one bingo card from among the above. In this case, the ROM 222 included in the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113 stores in advance information corresponding to the number array of the bingo cards of a plurality of types, reads the information corresponding to the selection result of the player, and stores the array storage area 223ba. It may be configured to be stored in. With such a configuration, the type (numerical type) of the display icon 820 that is randomly determined is determined with respect to the numerical sequence selected by the player from a plurality of patterns that are predefined as the numerical sequence of the bingo card. Since the used bingo game is executed, the result of the bingo game can be changed according to the selection result of the player. Therefore, in the player participation type production, it is possible to make the player happy and unhappy.

In addition, when the player can select one bingo card from a plurality of bingo cards in which the arrangement of numbers is defined in advance, each bingo card is selected when the player selects the bingo card. It may be configured to display a selection screen that allows confirmation of the numerical arrangement defined in Section 2. This allows the player to proceed with the bingo game while considering whether or not the selection of the bingo card was appropriate, which makes it easier to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the bingo game progresses in a state in which the player can confirm at least one of the number arrays defined in the bingo card not selected by the player. This allows the player to more easily understand whether or not the bingo card is properly selected.

Also, in the case where the number arrangement is determined for each area of the bingo card as in the third control example, the player may be configured to be able to select an arbitrary number, and in this case also, the player participation In the production of the mold, it is possible to make the player happy and unhappy.

In the third control example, the bingo game is configured to be executed using the bingo card determined at the time when the bingo game is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bingo game may be executed during the bingo game, for example. Even when the condition is satisfied, for example, when the specific effect result is satisfied in the mini game in which the effect is changed by the player operating the operation means, the number arrangement of the bingo card can be changed. good. As a result, even when the progress of the bingo game is not good, the progress of the bingo game can be varied to a situation that is advantageous to the player by varying the number arrangement of the bingo cards. It is possible to execute an effect that interests the player until the game ends.

The selected information storage area 223bb is a storage area in which information indicating the display mode already selected as the display mode of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game is stored, and when the display mode of the additional effect is selected. In, information indicating the selected display mode is stored. Then, the stored information is read when the next additional effect is executed, and the display mode is selected from the range excluding the display mode indicated by the read information. With this configuration, when the additional effect is executed a plurality of times, the additional effect can be executed in various display modes without selecting the same display mode.

Further, in the third control example, the display mode of the additional effect during the jackpot game is configured to indicate the number type used in the bingo game. Then, as a history display displayed in the display area HR21, a display mode corresponding to the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb is displayed.

The display number counter 223bc is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the additional effect, and a value corresponding to the number of additional effects that can be executed during the jackpot game is set based on the start of the jackpot game. The value is subtracted each time it is executed. Then, when the value of the display number counter 223bc becomes 0, the result effect according to the result of the additional effect is executed.

In the third control example, when the bingo game is started, the number of executions of the additional effect (the number of times the display icon 820 is displayed) is determined, and the display icon 820 is displayed for the determined number of times. In addition, in the present control example, since the additional effect is not executed in the same display mode, the number of types of numbers that can be acquired in the bingo game can be increased as the number of times the additional effect is executed increases.

As described above, even when the number of executions of the additional effect is variable, the number of executions of the additional effect is set as the value of the display number counter 223bc, and the display number counter 223bc is executed every time the additional effect is executed. By configuring to subtract the value of, the result of the bingo game can be reliably displayed when the additional effect is executed the determined number of times.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 204 to FIG. 206, the control processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The third control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the contents of the effect executed during the jackpot game are different. More specifically, in the first control example described above, when the ball enters the general entrance 63 during the big hit game, or when the ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game. In addition, the additional effect is configured to be executable, and as the additional effect, an effect mode for increasing the winning rate or an effect mode for bustling can be selected.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the bingo game can be executed during the jackpot game, and the type of numbers used in the bingo game can be displayed as an additional effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 204, the content of the winning effect setting process 3 (S4572) will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hitting effect setting process 3 (S4572). As shown in FIG. 204, the hitting effect setting process 3 (S4572) in the third control example is different from the hitting effect setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168) in the above-described first control example with a probability variation ( "777") is different in that the processing content executed when it is determined that the stop display has not been performed is different, and is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the hitting effect setting process 3 (S4572) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the stop display mode (big hit symbol) of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed this time is "777" (S4601), and "777". If it is determined to be (S4601: Yes), the same processing of S4602, S4603, S4609 that is the same as the hitting effect setting processing (see S4502 of FIG. 168) in the above-described first control example is executed, and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if the jackpot symbol is not "777", that is, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the jackpot winning is determined not to be the stop display mode indicating the probability variation jackpot. (S4601: No), next, the number array of the bingo card is determined (S4651).

Here, the processing contents of S4651 will be described. In the third control example, nine types of numbers “1” to “9” are prepared as the number types used for the number array of the bingo card. Specifically, it is stored in advance in the numeral information storage area of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, as shown in FIG. 202(a), nine areas (first area to ninth area) are defined in the bingo card, and each area is stored in the numeral information storage area. A process of randomly determining one number type from the number types by lottery is executed.

When the process of S4651 is completed, the numeral array determined in the process of S4651 is stored in the array storage area 223ba (S4652), the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 5 (S4653), and the process proceeds to S4608.

In the process of S4653, the number of additional effects executed during the bingo game, that is, the number of times the display icon 820 (see FIG. 202(a)) is displayed is defined. This value is configured so that different values can be selected based on the jackpot type to be executed, jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, that is, a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over, The jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set is configured so that a large value can be set easily. In this way, by configuring the display number counter 223bc to be able to set a different value depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot game that can provide information that is advantageous to the player (information indicating that it is a probability variation jackpot) is better. It is possible to easily increase the number of bingo winning lines in the bingo game.

It should be noted that different processing may be executed as the processing for determining the value to be set in the display number counter 223bc. For example, it is included when the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the already-acquired special figure 2 hold. A value larger than that when not displayed may be easily set in the display number counter 223bc, and a state in which specific information that is advantageous to the player can be provided, for example, a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the display number counter 223bc is set to a specific value (for example, 2) in a state where the information indicating the big hit is included in the acquired special figure 2 hold. As a result, it is possible to forcibly end the bingo game while the number of bingo established lines is 0 even though the bingo game has started, and to provide the above-described specific information. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect for the player and enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, the content of the round effect setting process 3 (S4576) will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process 3 (S4576). This round effect setting process 3 (S4576) is a process for ending the bingo game when a specific round game is executed, in contrast to the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above. It is different in that it is added, and is otherwise the same.

When the round effect setting process 3 (S4576) is executed, first, the same processes in S4701 to S4706 as the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of S4705 or S4706 is finished, it is determined whether or not the round game executed this time is the eighth round (S4771), and when it is determined that it is the eighth round (S4771: Yes), the number of displays When it is determined whether the value of the counter 223bc is 0 (S4772), it is determined that the value is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the bingo game is not finished at the time when the eighth round is started (S4772). : No), the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 1 (S4773), the same process of S4707 as the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the above-described first control example is executed, and this process is ended.

Further, in the processing of S4771, when it is determined that the round game to be started this time is not the eighth round (S4771: No), or in the processing of S4772, the value of the display number counter 223bc is 0, that is, already. If it is determined that the bingo game is over (S4772: Yes), the process of S4773 is skipped, the process proceeds to the process of S4707, and then the process is finished.

As described above, in the round effect setting process 3 (S4576), the additional effect is executed a predetermined number of times, despite the jackpot game progressing to the specific timing (start timing of the eighth round). If not, the process for ending the execution of the additional effect is executed when the additional effect is executed next time, regardless of the number of times of the additional effect executed up to the present. As a result, in the state where the bingo game is being executed, the additional effect (display of the display icon 820) is not executed a predetermined number of times (5 times), and the jackpot game ends before the bingo game ends. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the player cannot be notified of the result of the bingo game.

In this control example, by setting the value of the display number counter 223bc to 1 in the process of S4773, the value of the display number counter 223bc becomes 0 at the time when the additional effect is executed next, and the result of the bingo game is Although it is configured to be displayed, the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 0 in the process of S4773 so that the result of the bingo game is notified during the eighth round game. It may be configured to. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the result of the bingo game during the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079). This additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079) is a complete process for the additional effect when the value of the in-production timer 223am is larger than 0, in contrast to the above-described additional effect setting process 2 (see S5059 of FIG. 200). The difference is that the process is configured to be skipped and the process for setting the effect mode of the additional effect is different.

When the additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the in-production timer 223am is greater than 0 (S5151), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5151: Yes). , And this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (0) (S5151: No), then the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb is read and 1 is selected from the unstored values. Value is determined (S5171), a display command indicating the determined value is set (S5172), information corresponding to the determined value is stored in the selected information storage area 223bb (S5173), and the display number counter 223bc is stored. The value is subtracted by 1 (S5174).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display number counter 223bc after the subtraction is 0 (S5175), and when it is determined that it is not 0 (S5175: No), that is, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the bingo game. , And this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5175, when it is determined that the value of the display number counter 223bc is 0, that is, it is the end timing of the bingo game (S5175: Yes), the information stored in the array storage area 223ba (this time). Based on the information indicating the number array of the bingo card used in the bingo game) and the information (number type determined by the additional effect) stored in the selected information storage area 223bb. The number of specified privilege lines is determined (S5176), the privilege information corresponding to the specified number of established lines is determined (S5177), the display command for indicating the determined privilege information is set (S5178), and the information in the various storage areas is cleared. (S5179), the present process ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 212. The fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the effect executed during the winning rate UP zone is different, and is otherwise the same.

In the above-described first control example, the slot effect (see FIG. 124(a)) and the rise confirmation effect (see FIG. 125) are configured to be executable as the content of the effect executed in the winning rate UP zone. According to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the effect contents to be executed are determined. Then, when the specific variation pattern type is selected as the variation pattern type, the rise confirmation effect is executed to notify the player that the winning rate is increased, and thereafter, the increase amount of the winning rate is notified. Was configured.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the content of the rise confirmation effect executed when the specific variation pattern type is selected as the variation pattern type is different. More specifically, as the rise confirmation effect, an operation effect of increasing the winning rate by 1% based on the player operating the frame button 22 (continuous hitting operation) can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to change the amount of increase in the winning rate during the rise confirmation effect based on the operation of the player, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22. You can

In this control example, the winning rate of the battle effect is variably displayed in the range of "0 to 100%", and the winning rate is increased by 5% as a winning rate increasing effect for varying (increasing) the displayed winning rate. The slot effect of changing (raising) and the rising confirmation effect of changing (raising) the winning rate in units of 1% can be executed a plurality of times.

Here, as the winning percentage display of the battle effect, if the winning percentage is displayed as a specific value (for example, “77%” or “33%”) in the process of executing the rise confirmation effect for a plurality of times, the player is presented with the winning percentage. Since it makes the player think that the game state set as above is a game state (probably changed state) advantageous to the player, it is necessary to limit the display so that the above-mentioned specific value is not displayed.

However, when it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects as a winning rate increase effect, it is necessary to execute control for all the winning rate increase effects so that the winning rate after the increase does not reach a specific value. However, there is a problem that the processing load of the display restriction processing for preventing the winning rate of the specific value from being displayed increases.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the value of the winning rate (the value of 1's place) displayed in the rising confirmation effect which is the winning rate increasing effect capable of increasing the winning rate in the minimum unit (1%). Is configured so that the win rate does not reach a specific value regardless of the value of the effect result of another win rate increase effect (slot effect). In this way, when executing a plurality of winning rate increasing effects with different increasing amounts, the display limiting process is executed for one winning rate increasing effect, and the display limiting process is not executed for the other winning rate increasing effects. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the display restriction process.

<Regarding effect contents of the fourth control example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 207, a characteristic effect among various effects performed in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 207(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a continuous hit effect is executed as the rise confirmation effect executed during the winning rate UP zone. As shown in FIG. 207(a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, a continuous hit image RG for allowing the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed, and the player operates the frame button 22. A time gauge TG is displayed below the time gauge TG to indicate the operation valid period in which is effectively determined. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “increase win rate with continuous button hits” are displayed as a guide notification mode for indicating the effect contents of the hit effect.

Then, based on the fact that the player operates the frame button 22 within the operation valid period, numerical icons 831a to 831b showing the increase value of the winning percentage are displayed from the icon 831 simulating a vase. In this control example, the value in which the winning rate increases in the continuous hit production is configured to be in the unit of "1%", and "+1%" indicating that the winning rate increases by 1% is displayed on the numerical icons 831a to 831c. Has been done. Then, "+?%" is displayed on the numerical value icon 831d.

Here, in the present control example, the winning rate of the specific value (for example, "33", "77") is displayed in the display area HR1 at the time when the one-time winning rate increasing effect is finished, and this time to the player. In order to prevent misidentification that the big hit game is a big hit game that is advantageous to the player (a big hit game in which the probability variation state is set after the big hit game ends), the winning percentage display is displayed at the end of the continuous hit production. The display content of the effect is controlled so that the 1's digit of "1" does not become "2, 3, 7, 8".

Specifically, the ones place of the probability display displayed in the display area HR1 is specified, and the number of times the numerical icon 831a is displayed in the continuous hit effect and the specified ones place value are summed up. When the value reaches "2, 3, 7, 8", the display icon of "+?%" is displayed as shown in the numerical value icon 831d. Then, when the continuous hit effect is completed, the number of displayed “+1%” is accumulated, and the value obtained by adding the specified ones digit and the accumulated number is “2, 3, 7, After the numerical value is displayed on the numerical value icon 831d of “+?%” so as to have a value other than “8”, the effect result of the continuous striking effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 207(b).

FIG. 207(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the effect result of continuous hit effect. FIG. 207(b) shows the effect result when the continuous hit effect ends in the state shown in FIG. 207(a), and the winning percentage is obtained for the numerical icon 831d displayed as “+?%”. If the value is not added, the effect result is "+3%", and the winning rate displayed in the display area HR1 is the specific value "33%". Therefore, the display restriction process is executed and "+?%" is added. By displaying a value of "+2%" with respect to the numerical value icon 831d displayed with "," "+5%" is displayed in the display area HR30 in which the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed, and is displayed in the display area HR1. The continuous hit effect is executed so that the winning rate is “35%”.

As shown in FIG. 207, during the continuous hit effect, the increase value of the winning rate obtained by the operation of the frame button 22 is individually displayed in the main display area Dm, and the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed in the display area HR30 and then the display area. The display is added to HR1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the value displayed in the display area HR1 is changed during the continuous hit effect and it is difficult for the player to grasp the current winning percentage. Further, it is possible to prevent the value displayed in the display area HR1 from being changed during the continuous hit effect, and the specific value from being displayed in the display area HR1 in the middle of the process.

Note that, in the present control example, as described above, the display win rate does not reach the specific value by variably controlling the effect content of the repeated hit effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, shown in FIG. It may be configured to execute the effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 208, another example of the effect control content for preventing the display winning percentage from reaching a specific value will be described. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen on which a plurality of winning rate increase effects are overlapped and executed. In the example shown in FIG. 208, “+4%” is displayed in the display area HR30 as the effect result of the repeated hit effect, and the effect result of the repeated hit effect (+4%) is displayed in the display win rate “73%” displayed in the display area HR1. When the display is added, the display win rate becomes the specific value “77%”, so the additional effect for further increasing the win rate by “+5%” is overlapped with the continuous hit effect and executed.

With such a configuration, the effect content (display content) is controlled so that the winning percentage display does not become a specific value with respect to the effect content of the continuous hit effect, only by performing the process of determining whether or not the additional effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the winning percentage display from reaching a specific value.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, by controlling the display content so that the display win rate is added in the positive direction, it is possible to prevent the display win rate from reaching a specific value without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be controlled so that the display win rate is changed in the negative direction.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 209, this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that an unconfirmed flag 223ca is added, and is otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The unconfirmed flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the numerical value icon 831d for which the winning percentage to be added is undetermined is displayed during the continuous hit effect, and the numerical icon 831d for which the winning percentage to be added is undetermined. Is set to on when is displayed. Then, in order to show the effect result of the continuous hit effect, it is set to OFF when the value (winning rate) given to the numerical value icon 831d is determined.

<Regarding Control Contents of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. The fourth control example is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that a process related to repeated hitting effects in the winning rate UP zone is added. Specifically, instead of the frame button input monitoring/production process (see S4007 in FIG. 163), the frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (see 4057 in FIG. 210) is changed to the production update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165). Instead, the production update process 4 (see S4061 in FIG. 212) is executed, which is a difference. Otherwise it is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (see 4057) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (see 4057). This frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (see 4057) is performed on the frame button 22 in the winning rate UP zone in comparison with the frame button input monitoring/production process (see S4007 in FIG. 163) of the first control example described above. The difference is that processing for the operation is executed, and the other points are the same. Specifically, when the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (see 4057) is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4101), and it is determined that the value is not greater than 0. In the case (S4101: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S4101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is the winning rate UP zone (S4151).

In the processing of S4151, it is determined whether or not the current win rate is the UP zone based on the effect information stored in the effect information storage area 223g. If it is determined that the win rate is the UP zone (S4151: Yes), the continuous hit is performed. Performance setting processing is executed (S4152), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4151, when it is determined that the winning percentage is not the UP zone (S4151: No), the same S4102 to S4111 as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4007 of FIG. 163) of the first control example described above. The process is executed and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the continuous hit effect setting process (S4152) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (see 4057 in FIG. 210) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit effect setting process (S4152). In the continuous hit effect setting process (S4152), a process for determining the display mode of the numerical icon 831a (see FIG. 207) displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect is executed.

When the continuous hit effect setting process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S4171), and if it is detected (S4171: Yes), it is stored in the display point storage area 223r. The displayed display point, that is, the value of the winning percentage displayed in the display area HR1 is read (S4172), and it is determined whether the tens place of the display point is 7 or less (S4173). If it is determined that the number is 7 or less in the process of S4173 (S4173: Yes), then it is determined whether the ones digit of the display point is "1, 2, 6, 7" (S4174). , "1, 2, 6, 7" (S4174: Yes), it is determined whether the unconfirmed flag 223ca is set to ON (S4175).

When it is determined in the process of S4175 that the addition is not set to ON (S4175: No), a display command for indicating that the number of additions of display points is undetermined is set (S4176), and the undetermined flag 223ca is set. Is set to ON (S4177), and this processing ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4176, the numerical icon 831d of “+?%” (see FIG. 207) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4173, when it is determined that the tens place of the display point is not 7 or less (8 or more) (S4173: Yes), the specific value (“33 , "77"), there is no problem in setting any value for the ones digit (the specific value will not be displayed in the future), so the display point is 1 A display command for indicating addition is set (S4178), and then the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of S4174, when it is determined that none of "1, 2, 6, 7" (S4174: No), there is no problem even if the continuous hit effect is executed as usual, so the process proceeds to S4178. After that, the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this processing ends. Further, in the process of S4175, when it is determined that the unconfirmed flag 223ca is set to ON (S4175: No), that is, in the continuous hit effect this time, the numerical icon 831d of “+?%” has already been generated (see FIG. 207). ) Is displayed, a display command for indicating that the display point is incremented by 1 is set (S4178), and then the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179). To finish. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of numerical icons 831d of “+?%” (see FIG. 207) from being displayed during the continuous hit effect, and to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult to understand.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 4 (see S4061) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 4 (see S4061). In the effect update process 4 (see S4061), the value of the effective period timer 223e set for the continuous hit effect becomes 0 in the effect update process of the first control example (see S4011 in FIG. 165) described above. The difference is that the processing in the case of adding is added, and other than that is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the production update process 4 (S4061) is executed, first, the same processes of S4301 to S4304 as the production update process of the first control example (see S4011 of FIG. 165) described above are executed. In the process of S4304, When it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is 0 (S4304: Yes), it is then determined whether the undetermined flag 223ca is set to ON (S4351). When it is determined that the unconfirmed flag 223ca is set to ON (S4351: YES), the unconfirmed flag 223ca is set to OFF (S4352), and the value of the display point is "2, 3, 7, 8". The value of the unconfirmed point (the value to be given to the numerical value icon 831d) is determined to be other than "(S4353), and the display point added with the determined value is stored in the display point storage area (S4354). A display command for indicating the effect result of the operation effect is set (S4305), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is not 0 (greater than 0) (S4304: Yes), the effect update process of the above-described first control example (see S4011 of FIG. 165). ), the same processing of S4306 to S4309 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the variable effect in which the variable stage information can be variably displayed multiple times (the effect in which the winning rate of the battle effect is variably displayed between "0 to 100%") is executed. In addition, as a production mode of a variable production in which the stage information is varied, a production mode in which a variable amount is changed (a win rate increasing production for changing (increasing) the displayed win rate, a win rate is a 5% unit. It is possible to set a slot effect that is varied (increased) with and a winning decision effect that is varied (increased) in 1% increments.

Here, as the winning percentage display of the battle effect, if the winning percentage is displayed as a specific value (for example, “77%” or “33%”) in the process of executing the rise confirmation effect for a plurality of times, the player is presented with the winning percentage. Since it makes the player think that the game state set as above is a game state (probably changed state) advantageous to the player, it is necessary to limit the display so that the above-mentioned specific value is not displayed.

However, when it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects as a winning rate increase effect, it is necessary to execute control for all the winning rate increase effects so that the winning rate after the increase does not reach a specific value. However, there is a problem that the processing load of the display restriction processing for preventing the winning rate of the specific value from being displayed increases.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the value of the winning rate (the value of 1's place) displayed in the rising confirmation effect which is the winning rate increasing effect capable of increasing the winning rate in the minimum unit (1%). Is configured so that the win rate does not reach a specific value regardless of the value of the effect result of another win rate increase effect (slot effect). In this way, when executing a plurality of winning rate increasing effects with different increasing amounts, the display limiting process is executed for one winning rate increasing effect, and the display limiting process is not executed for the other winning rate increasing effects. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the display restriction process.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 221. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the display control content of the lucky points is changed, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, it is configured to execute the effect of additionally displaying lucky points during the high probability state of the normal symbols, and the lucky points are a predetermined number ( When it reaches 100P), the player is informed that the current game state is the probable change state. That is, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the lucky point cannot reach 100P.

Then, as the effect of additionally displaying the lucky points, the first addition effect of adding 1 to the value each time the special symbol variation is started, and the specific effect as the variation effect (for example, the battle effect in which the effect result is "continuation"). The second addition effect of adding a plurality of values (2 to 5) when is executed is configured to be executable.

With such a configuration, while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to perform the game while expecting that the number of lucky points reaches a predetermined number.

However, there is a difference between the lucky point value (internal point) managed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the lucky point value (display point) which is actually display-controlled by the display control device 114. However, despite the fact that the time saving state is set, there is a risk that the lucky points may reach a predetermined number.

Specifically, based on a command (for example, a command including information indicating an internal point) output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 displays a lucky point (display point) on the liquid crystal screen. In this case, there is a problem that neither the voice lamp control device 113 nor the display control device 114 can detect the mismatch when the internal point and the display point are different.

The above-mentioned difference is, for example, when the liquid crystal substrate is momentarily stopped, that is, when the command is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 but the command is missed, or the audio lamp control device. Although the command is not output from the display control device 114 to the display control device 114, the generated noise may occur when the display control device 114 erroneously receives the command.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a process of determining whether or not the internal point and the display point match.

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably detect a mismatch between the internal point managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side and the display point managed by the display control device 114 side.

Further, in the fifth control example, when a mismatch occurs between the internal point and the display point, one value (the value of the internal point) is set to be positive, and the correction process for correcting the other value can be executed. doing. Further, the content of the correction process is configured to be different according to the remaining period of the period (battle mode period) in which the lucky points can be additionally displayed.

Specifically, in the first half period of the battle mode, when the internal point and the display point are inconsistent, the process of correcting the inconsistency is not immediately executed, but the second addition effect ( When a production in which a plurality of lucky point values can be added is performed in one production), the correction process is executed using the content of the addition. With such a configuration, for example, while continuously executing the first addition effect of adding one lucky point each time the special symbol variation is executed, eliminating the difference between the internal points and the display points. You can

Also, if the time when the inconsistency between the internal points and the display points occurs in the second half of the battle mode period, the correction effect for immediately eliminating the difference between the internal points and the display points is executed. I am configuring. As a result, it is possible to prevent the battle mode period from ending with the display points having a value different from the internal points being displayed, and the production being difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding effect contents of fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 213 to FIG. 214, characteristic effect contents among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. Specifically, the content of the effect (correction effect) executed when a difference occurs between the internal point and the display point will be described.

FIG. 213(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display points deviate in the negative in the first half period of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 213(a), when the value of the display point is "33" even though the value of the internal point is "34", the display point is displayed so as not to be noticed by the player. It is necessary to correct (add) the value of, and in the example shown in FIG. 213(a), as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, a variation pattern in which the variation time of a predetermined period or more is set is executed. In that case, within one special figure fluctuation period, a variation effect (pseudo-variation effect) is executed as if the special symbol variation was executed a plurality of times. Then, at the start of the pseudo-variable effect, the effect of displaying the value of the display point by adding 1 is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the first addition effect a plurality of times within one special symbol variation period without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the internal point and the display point without the player being aware of it. Also, if there is a difference between the internal points and the display points in the first half period of the battle mode, the special symbol variation will be executed multiple times within the remaining period of the battle mode, so the pseudo variation described above. It is possible to make the execution of the correction process stand by until the special symbol variation is performed in a variation pattern capable of producing an effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213(b), the content of the correction process executed when the display points are shifted in the negative in the second half period of the battle mode will be described. FIG. 213(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display points deviate in the negative in the second half period of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 213(b), when the second half period of the battle mode, that is, when the remaining period of the battle mode is short, the execution of the correction process is made to wait until the second addition effect is executed. , The battle mode may end with the internal point and the display point deviating from each other.

Therefore, unlike the case where there is a difference between the internal points and the display points in the first half period of the battle mode, the correction effect is executed when it is determined that there is a difference. As described above, by immediately executing the correction effect, it is possible to prevent the battle mode from ending in a state where the difference between the internal point and the display point remains.

In FIG. 213(b), it is configured to execute the correction effect of adding 2 lucky points in the first addition effect in which the value of the lucky point is normally increased by 1. With this configuration, the difference between the internal point and the display point can be immediately and surely resolved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214(a) and FIG. 214(b), description will be given of contents of effect executed when the number of display points exceeds the number of internal points in the battle mode. FIG. 214(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display points are deviated to plus in the first half period of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 214(a), when the value of the display point is "36" even though the value of the internal point is "34", the display point is displayed so as not to be noticed by the player. 214 is required to be corrected. In the example shown in FIG. 214(a), the correction process waits until the second addition effect in which the internal points are added by +2 is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, and When the execution condition of the 2-addition effect is satisfied, the correction process that does not set the command for executing the second addition effect for adding and displaying the display points on the display control device 114 while adding the internal points is performed. To be executed.

With this configuration, since it is possible to add only the internal points, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the display points are deviated to a plus (a state in which there are more display points than the internal points).

Next, FIG. 214(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display points deviate to the plus in the second half period of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 214(b), if the value of the display point is "79" even though the value of the internal point is "78", the display point will be displayed unless it is corrected immediately. The difference value is subtracted because the battle mode ends when the points are misaligned, and the display points may reach a predetermined number (100P) despite the fact that the time saving state is set. A correction process for displaying is executed. Specifically, a display mode of "-1P" is executed as a subtraction display for directly subtracting the value of the lucky points displayed in the display area HR6, and at the same time, an effect mode of subtracting 1 from the value of the lucky points is executed. .. As described above, by immediately executing the correction effect, it is possible to prevent the battle mode from ending in a state where the difference between the internal point and the display point remains.

Here, with reference to FIG. 215, a flow of control processing relating to variation effect display in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a diagram schematically showing a flow of control processing relating to variation effect display in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the special symbol variation (variation A) is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 determines a variation pattern for effect, and a variation effect command (variation pattern command) indicating the determined variation pattern. ) Is output to the display controller 114. Then, in the case where the output mode of the variation effect command includes an effect mode in which the lucky point is added, for example, the lucky point is “+1” at the start of the variation and the lucky point is “+2” 5 seconds after the start of the variation. If the mode is included, information indicating that 3 lucky points are added in total in this variation effect is stored in the display point storage area 223r, and the last effect in which the lucky points are added in this variation effect. A value for specifying the execution timing of (effect 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation) is set to the value of the detection timer 223da.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the variation effect command output from the voice lamp control device 113, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, based on various effect information included in the received variation effect command. Various effect images to be displayed are created, and the control process for executing the effect image display is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The detailed control processing contents for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same as those of the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the variation effect command received by the display control device 114 includes an effect mode in which the lucky point is “+1” at the start of the variation and the lucky point is “+2” 5 seconds after the variation starts, immediately after the variation starts. Information indicating the addition display for adding 1 to the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen, adding 1 to the value of the display counter included in the work RAM 233 included in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and indicating the number of additions of the display counter. A confirmation command including “” is output to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change, the addition of the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen immediately after the start of the change is added by 2 is instructed, and the work RAM 233 included in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has it. The value of the display counter is incremented by 2, and a confirmation command including information indicating the number of additions of the display counter is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

Then, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, addition display to the value of the lucky point is executed corresponding to the control processing of the display control device 114, and, for example, "9P" is displayed as the lucky point. When the addition display of “+1” is executed in the state, the addition display in which the value of the lucky point becomes “10P” is executed. When the addition display of "+2" is executed after 5 seconds, the addition display in which the value of the lucky point becomes "12P" is executed.

When the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received, the voice lamp control device 113 specifies the value (addition value) of the display counter included in the received confirmation command, and the specified value is displayed on the display counter. Set to 223db. Then, the process waits until the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, and when it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is 0, that is, all the effects that add the value of the lucky points executed in this variation effect When it is determined that the display has been completed, the display points (internal points) stored in the display point storage area 223r to be added during the current variation effect, and the display control device 114 actually give an instruction for addition display. The display points are compared with each other, and it is determined whether the same amount of value as the internal points is additionally displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, if the comparison results match, the value of the lucky point set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the lucky point actually displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are equal to each other. Since this is the case, the fluctuation production is normally terminated. Here, when a signal is transmitted between a plurality of control devices, the power supplied to one control device becomes unstable, or a power failure state (instantaneous power failure state) occurs momentarily due to noise or the like. In that case, various output signals may not be received correctly. In this case, the value of the display point (internal point) set by the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the value of the lucky point (display point) actually displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 There is a problem that they are different.

In particular, as in the present control example, when the value of the lucky point reaches a predetermined number and the specific effect can be executed, the internal point and the display point are different from each other. However, there is a problem that a specific effect is executed in a state where the value of the lucky points is a value other than a predetermined number, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, the display control device 114 is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113, information indicating the content of the display instruction (display counter of the display control device 114). The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute processing for correcting the degree of deviation between the internal point and the display point. With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem caused by the difference between the internal point and the display point.

For example, if the display point is one greater than the internal point, the variation effect command determined when setting the variation effect at the time of the next special symbol variation (variation B), the effect that the lucky point is "+1" immediately after the variation starts. If the mode is included, information indicating that one lucky point is added in total in this variation effect is stored in the display point storage area 223r, and the variation effect command and the non-display command are displayed on the display control device. Output to 114. When the display control device 114 receives the variation effect command and the non-display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines whether the non-display command is received, and when it is determined that the non-display command is received. Indicates that if the variation effect command includes an effect mode in which the lucky point is “+1” at the start of the variation, an addition display for adding 1 to the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen immediately after the variation starts Without outputting the value of the display counter of the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the confirmation command including information indicating the current number of additions of the display counter is output to the voice lamp control device 113. ..

Then, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the addition display to the value of the lucky point is not executed corresponding to the control processing of the display control device 114, and for example, "12P" is displayed as the lucky point. In the state in which it is present, "12P" remains displayed. That is, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, as usual, the process of determining the variation effect mode is executed, and when the internal point and the display point are different, the non-display command is issued when the display point is larger. By setting, it is possible to perform processing that does not add display points while adding internal points. Therefore, the correction process can be easily executed without executing a complicated control process as a dedicated process for correcting the difference between the internal point and the display point.

Note that the variation B shown in FIG. 215 is shown as an example when the added number of lucky points included in the set variation display command is the same as the difference between the internal point and the display point, that is, the variation display command. Although the case where the difference between the internal point and the display point can be eliminated by not performing the addition effect of the included lucky points once (not displaying the addition on the display screen), the present invention is not limited to this. If the added number of lucky points included in the displayed variable display command is larger than the difference between the internal point and the displayed point, the hidden command is not set and An actual display command including information indicating a value obtained by subtracting the difference from the display point is output to the display control device 114 together with the variable display command, and the actual display command is given priority over the variable display command on the display control device 114 side. If it is configured to determine the existence and content of the command, and to configure the display content instruction based on the content of the actual display command instead of the number of lucky points included in the variable display command. good. As a result, the number of additions of the display counter value of the display control device 114 and the number of additions of lucky points on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are determined based on the actual display command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the confirmation command corresponding to, it is possible to eliminate the difference situation between the internal point and the display point, which has occurred at the time of the previous variable effect.

Further, in the present control example, when there is a difference between the internal points and the display points, the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed is determined, and the internal points are displayed according to the length of the remaining period. The processing contents of the correction processing for correcting the difference from the points are configured to be different. Specifically, when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, as described above with reference to FIG. 215, the difference between the internal point and the display point is subtracted at the time when the next lucky point addition effect is executed ( The added effect is executed, or a correction process for hiding the added effect is executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to execute an effect in an effect mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, an effect in which the value of the lucky point is subtracted), and thus the correction process can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, an effect (for example, an effect of subtracting the value of the lucky points) in the effect mode dedicated to the correction processing is executed, and the effect of adding the lucky points is within the executable period. Is configured to reliably correct (eliminate) the difference between the internal point and the display point. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that occurs when there is a difference between the internal point and the display point.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the correction process is configured to be different by determining the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, When a part of the feasible period has elapsed, a specific effect is executed based on the value of the display point (the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). In such a case, the content of the correction process may be changed based on the remaining period until a part of the period elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness even in the process of adding the lucky points.

In addition, in this control example, it is confirmed whether or not there is a difference between the value managed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the value managed by the display control device 114, and the correction process is executed based on the confirmation result. However, when performing one control process across a plurality of control means (setting-side control means and execution-side control means), the setting-side control means By executing the confirmation process of whether the contents set by the execution side control means and the contents executed by the execution side control means and the correction process based on the result of the confirmation process are executed, processing with unintended contents is performed. The technical idea of suppressing execution of the above may be used in other configurations, for example, between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, or the main control device 110 and the voice lamp. It may be executed across the control device 113 and the display control device 114 and three or more control means.

Further, in the present control example, the confirmation process and the correction process are executed for the deviation in the effect in which the value of the lucky point used as the effect is varied (added). However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The control processing result of the main control device 110 such as a time saving number display for variably displaying a value (time saving number) indicating a period in which a high probability state of a normal symbol continues, and a big hit number display for showing the number of consecutive winnings of a big hit You may perform for the value changed based on the information which shows (the result of special symbol lottery).

In addition, in the present control example, when the remaining time of the addition effect is short, a dedicated correction effect (see FIG. 214(b)) is executed to eliminate the difference between the internal point and the display point. However, the display point is not limited to this, for example, when the display point reaches a specific value with a difference between the internal point and the display point, or when the internal point reaches a specific value. Is configured to be a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp (for example, “??” display mode), and the value indicated by the display point is displayed until the difference between the internal point and the display point is eliminated. May be continuously displayed in a display mode that is difficult to grasp (for example, a display mode of "??"). As described above, the processing load in the correction processing can be further reduced by performing the correction that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed value, instead of correcting the displayed value. In this case, for example, when the difference between the internal point and the display point is within a predetermined range (for example, the difference is "1"), it is difficult for the player to grasp the value indicated by the display point (for example, "??"). "Display mode)" is set, and when it is larger than the predetermined range, it is preferable to execute an addition effect for correcting the value of the display point. In this way, by making the content of the correction process different depending on the correction amount that needs to be corrected, the display mode (for example, “??” display mode) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the value indicated by the display point is long-term. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the correction processing while suppressing the execution of the effect that is difficult for the player to understand by being continuously displayed.

Further, in the present control example, the correction process is executed for the set value relating to the effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the correction process may be executed with respect to the setting value related to the effect set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the operation value related to the operation of the decorative accessory. However, the correction process may be performed with respect to the set value regarding the effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the output value regarding the voice output by the voice output device 226, or a value of 3 or more. The correction process may be executed on the target.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. Specifically, the difference is that a detection timer 223da, a display counter 223db, a non-display flag 223dc, and an addition flag 223de are added. The other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, and detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

FIG. 216 is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifth control example.

The detection timer 223da is the last when the addition effect (first addition effect and second addition effect) for adding the value of the lucky point is set in the variation effect determined by the voice lamp control device 113. A timer for measuring the time until the addition effect executed in is ended, and a value corresponding to the period from the execution of the variation effect to the end of the last addition effect executed during the variation effect. Is set. Then, when the value of the detection timer 223da is subtracted with the lapse of time and the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, that is, when the final addition effect executed during the variable effect ends, the internal point and the display point The process of comparing the values of and is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the values of the lucky points are added and displayed at a plurality of timings in one variation effect, the values of the internal points and the display points are changed after the last addition and display is completed. Since it is possible to make a comparison, it is possible to easily discriminate a deviation that is actually occurring.

The display counter 223db is a counter whose value is updated based on a confirmation command (a command including information indicating the number of added lucky points to be displayed on the display screen) output from the display control device 114. The counter value is updated each time the confirmation command output from the control device 114 is received. Then, when the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, the value of the display counter 223db is used as the value of the display point.

The non-display flag 223dc indicates a state in which the lucky points are not actually added and displayed even when it is determined that the sound lamp control device 113 executes the addition effect, and the value of the internal point and the display point is set. When it is determined that the values do not match during the first half period of the battle mode and the value of the display point (display counter) is larger than the internal point (S4490 of FIG. 218). : Yes) is set to ON.

The addition flag 223dd is a flag indicating that it is necessary to additionally display the lucky points when it is determined that the sound lamp control device 113 executes the addition effect, and the addition point 223dd indicates the value of the internal point and the display point. In the case of comparison, when it is determined that the values do not match during the first half period of the battle mode, and it is determined that the value of the display point (display counter) is smaller than the internal point (S4490 of FIG. 218: No) is set to ON.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220, the control processing contents in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, in addition to the first control example described above, a confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is configured to be receivable, and a process executed when the confirmation command is received is added. Is very different. Further, the difference is that a part of the content of the control processing for displaying the lucky points is changed. The other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination processing 5 (S4082) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 5 (S4082). The command determination processing 5 (S4082) is executed when the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received, in contrast to the command determination processing of the first control example (see S4012 of FIG. 166) described above. The difference is that is added, and other than that is the same.

When the command determination process 5 (S4082) is executed, first, the same processes of S4401 to S4414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see S4012 of FIG. 166) are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4413 that the award ball number command has not been received (S4413: No), then it is determined whether a confirmation command has been received (S4481), and it is determined that it has not been received. (S4481: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4415), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4481, when it is determined that the confirmation command is received (S4481: Yes), the confirmation processing is executed (S4482), and then this processing is ended. The details of the confirmation process executed in the process of S4482 will be described later with reference to FIG. 218, but in this confirmation process (S4482), the confirmation command output from the display control device 114, that is, the third symbol display device. The value of the lucky points (display points) actually displayed on the display screen is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the command including the information indicating the number of added lucky points displayed on the display screen 81. However, it is determined that the process of checking whether the value of the lucky point (internal point) managed by the voice lamp control device 113 is different and the value of the internal point and the value of the display point are different. If so, a correction process for eliminating the difference is executed.

Here, the content of the confirmation processing (S4482) will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of the confirmation processing (S4482). The confirmation process (S4482) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process 5 (see S4082 in FIG. 217) that the confirmation command is received.

When the confirmation processing (S4482) is executed, first, the value included in the confirmation command received this time, that is, the value of the lucky point (display point) subjected to the addition display control in the display control device 114 is displayed. It is added to the counter 223db (S4485). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection timer 223da is 0 (S4486), and when it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is not 0 (greater than 0) (S4486: No), this processing is ended as it is. To do. That is, when the timing at which the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received is not the final production in which the value of the lucky point is added in the variation production being executed, the display counter 223db of the display counter 223db is based on the received confirmation command. Only the process of adding the values is executed, and this process ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the process of determining whether or not the value of the display point and the value of the internal point match each time the confirmation command is received. Here, in this control example, it is configured to execute the first addition effect of adding 1 to the value of the lucky point in accordance with the start timing of the variation effect executed in the battle mode (while the lucky points are displayed). .. That is, during the battle mode, the lucky points are added and displayed every time the special symbol variation is executed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the situation in which lucky points are added as the game progresses in the battle mode.

Further, when a specific effect mode is set as the effect mode of the variable effect, the second addition effect for adding a plurality of lucky points is executed at the execution timing of the specific effect mode. By executing this second addition effect, it is possible to make the player understand that the value of the lucky points can suddenly increase, so expect the lucky points to always increase sharply during the battle mode. A player can play a game while holding.

In the fifth control example, as described above, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are configured to be executed in one variation effect, so that the lucky point of one variation effect period is set. The value will be changed multiple times. Since the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is configured to be output each time the display value of the lucky point is variably displayed (addition display), the command determination processing 5 ( In S4082 of FIG. 217), it may be determined multiple times that the confirmation command has been received within one variation effect. In this case, the confirmation process is executed multiple times.

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the change effect corresponding to one special symbol change, and also regarding the number of lucky points to be added (the number of internal points). The management is performed not for each addition effect but for each variable effect unit. Therefore, every time the confirmation process is executed, the internal points (the total number of points added to the lucky points in the current variation effect) and the display points (the number added and displayed to the lucky points in one addition effect) are displayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the determination result indicating that the internal point and the display point do not match because the determination is performed on the target.

It should be noted that in the configuration of the fifth control example, the internal points are stored for each value added to the lucky points in addition effect units, not the total number added to the lucky points in one fluctuating effect. Then, each time the confirmation command is received, it is possible to properly execute the determination as to whether the value of the internal point and the value of the display point match.

In the process of S4486, if it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is 0 (S4486: Yes), then the value of the display counter 223db (display point) and the display stored in the display point storage area 223r. The value of the point (internal point) is compared (S4487), and it is determined whether the comparison results match (S4488).

In the process of S4488, when it is determined that the comparison results match each other (S4488: Yes), it is appropriate with respect to the effect mode of the variable effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 (the effect mode of the additive effect). Since this is the case where the addition display of the lucky points is being executed, this processing is ended without executing the correction processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4488, when it is determined that the comparison results do not match (S4488: No), the effect mode of the variable effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 (the effect mode of the additive effect) is set. Since it is a case where the addition display of the lucky points is not properly executed, the processing of S4489 to S4495 described later is executed as the correction processing for matching the value of the display point and the value of the internal point.

In the process of S4489, it is determined whether the present is the first half period of the battle mode (S4489). Here, the remaining period until the battle mode ends is calculated based on the game state stored in the state storage area 223aa and the value of the time saving counter 223y, and the remaining period is 50% of the entire battle mode period. If it is above, it is determined to be the second half period of the battle mode if less than 50% in the first half period of the battle mode.

In the process of S4489, when it is determined that the present is the first half period of the battle mode (S4489: Yes), the value of the display counter 223db (display point) is stored in the internal point (display point storage area 223r). (S4490), and if so (S4490: Yes), the non-display flag 223dc is turned on so as to correspond to the difference value between the display point and the internal point (S4490: Yes). (S4491), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4490, when it is determined that the value of the display counter 223db (display point) is not larger (smaller) than the internal point (the value stored in the display point storage area 223r) (S4490: No). , The addition flag 223dd is turned on so as to correspond to the difference value between the internal point and the display point (S4492), and the present process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S4489, when it is determined that the present is not the first half period of the battle mode (the latter half period) (S4489: No), then, it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for setting the display value of the lucky point to a value corresponding to the internal point is set (S4493), it is determined whether the non-display flag 223dc is set to ON (S4494), and it is set to ON. If it is determined that the flag is present (S4494: No), the non-display flag 223dc is set to off (S4495), and this processing is ended. Further, in the processing of S4494, when it is determined that the non-display flag 223dc is not set to ON (S4494: No), the processing of S4495 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the content of the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258). The time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) is a process for adding the value of the lucky point to the time saving effect mode setting process (see S5208 of FIG. 175) of the above-described first control example (S5306 of FIG. 175). , S5307) in place of the display point setting process (see S5351 in FIG. 219) and is otherwise the same, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the display point setting process (S5351) executed in the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display point setting process (S5351). In the display point setting process (S5351), a process of setting an addition effect for adding the value of the lucky points as the variation effect is executed.

When the display point setting process (S5351) is executed, first, the value of the display point (the value of the internal point) stored in the display point storage area 223r is incremented by 1 (S6101), and then the variation effect of this time is added. It is determined whether or not there is an addition effect (second addition effect) for adding display points (S6102). In the process of S6102, the second addition effect in the effect mode of the variable effect set in the effect setting process after the first time (see S5309 of FIG. 219) executed in the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (see S5258 of FIG. 219). Determines whether is set.

In the processing of S6102, when it is determined that there is an addition effect (second addition effect) (S6102: Yes), it is stored in the display point storage area 223r corresponding to the value added in the current addition effect. The value of the display point (the value of the internal point) is added (S6103), the value indicating the final execution timing of the added effect (the value corresponding to the number of seconds) is set in the detection timer 223da (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6105. Transition. By setting the value of the detection timer 223da in the process of S6104, is it the timing at which the final addition effect in the current variation effect is executed when the confirmation command is received in the confirmation process (S4482 of FIG. 218)? It is possible to determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6102, when it is determined that there is no addition effect (S6102: No), the addition effect executed in the current variation effect is the first addition effect (the value of the lucky point is 1 when the variation effect is started). Since it is only the effect to be added), the process for setting the value in the detection timer 223da is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6105.

Next, of the display point setting processing (S5351), the processing contents after S6105 will be described. In the processing of S6105 and subsequent steps, processing for setting a display command for executing the addition effect display of the content for which correction processing has been performed on the effect content of the addition effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 Is executed.

First, in the processing of S6105, it is determined whether or not the non-display flag 223d is set to ON (S6105), and if it is determined that the non-display flag 223d is set to ON (S6105: Yes), then the non-display flag 223d is set. A difference value (a difference value between the internal point and the display point) is calculated based on the setting situation, and it is determined whether or not the addition value (the number of lucky points added) in the second addition effect this time is equal to or more than the difference value (S6106). ), if it is determined that the difference value is greater than or equal to the difference value (S6106; Yes), the effect content of the addition effect (second addition effect) executed this time is corrected and the difference value is subtracted from the addition value in order to eliminate the difference value. Is subtracted, a display addition count command indicating the subtracted value is set (S6107), a non-display addition count command corresponding to the difference value is set (S6108), and the non-display flag 223d is set to OFF (S6109). , This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6105, when it is determined that the non-display flag 223d is not set to ON (S6105: No), it is determined whether the addition flag 223dd is set to ON (S6110) and is set to ON. If it is set (S6110: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current variation effect has the second addition effect (S6111), and if it is determined that the second addition effect is present (S6111: Yes). ), the value corresponding to the difference value set in the addition flag 223dd is added to the addition value of the second addition effect, and the display addition number command indicating the value after the addition is set (S6112). 223dd is set to off (S6113), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the display point setting process (S5351), the correction process for eliminating the difference between the internal point determined in the confirmation process (see S4482 of FIG. 218) and the display point, that is, the addition effect is performed. The process of eliminating the difference by increasing or decreasing the value of the lucky points to be added is not targeted for the first addition effect (the effect of adding 1 to the lucky point value each time the variation effect is started). The second addition effect (addition process executed when a specific effect mode is set as the effect mode of the variable effect) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prohibit the correction process from being performed on the first variable effect that is regularly executed and the addition number is the fixed value (1). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the variable effect contents of the variable effect. In addition, by continuously executing the first variable effect of adding a fixed number (1) to the value of the lucky points, to the player, every time the variable effect is executed (special symbol fluctuation is executed. Each time), the rule that the value of the lucky point is incremented by 1 can be easily recognized, so that it is possible to facilitate the game while predicting the degree of addition of the value of the lucky point.

Further, in the fifth control example, when it is determined that the correction process is necessary during the first half period of the battle mode, the execution of the correction process is waited until the second addition effect is executed next. ing. Thereby, the difference between the internal point and the display point can be eliminated only by executing the process of correcting the value added and displayed in the second addition effect in which the number of additions is indefinite. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated addition effect for executing the correction process, and the processing load for executing the correction process can be reduced.

When the second half period of the battle mode is entered while waiting for execution of the correction process, a correction for eliminating the difference between the internal point and the display point in the confirmation process (see S4482 of FIG. 218). The processing is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation where the battle mode is ended without executing the second addition effect and the correction process is not executed, and the correction process can be surely executed before the battle mode ends.

In this control example, the correction process is executed only when the difference value between the internal point and the display point can be eliminated in one second addition effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of The difference value between the internal point and the display point may be eliminated by using the second addition effect of one time, and in this case, the difference value eliminated by the second addition effect of one time is subtracted. The residual difference value may be configured to be memorable, and the correction process may be performed on the stored residual difference value when the next second addition effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily reduce the value that is corrected in one second addition effect, and thus it is possible to easily execute the correction process that is unlikely to give the player a feeling of strangeness. ..

It should be noted that, as in the fifth control example, when a situation in which a correction process is necessary occurs, it is preferable to provide a notification unit that can notify the outside to that effect. In other words, if there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, it is highly possible that one of the signal transmission systems has an abnormality. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the correction process by notifying the fact to the outside. It is possible to prevent the player from causing a great deal of trouble by causing an abnormality in the contents.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the control processing content of the display control device 114 executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the process executed when a display command for adding and displaying some number of times is received is changed. Other than that, it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the fifth control example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed based on the reception of the number addition related command output from the voice lamp control device 113. This is different from the first control example described above in that when the value of the displayed lucky point is added and displayed, a display counter is added as a measuring means for measuring the added and displayed value. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

The display number counter described above is provided in the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and when the addition number command is received and the addition display of the lucky points is executed, the value corresponding to the addition display number is displayed. It is added to the frequency counter. Then, when the command indicating the number of times clear for resetting the value of the display number counter is received, the value of the display number counter is reset to 0. In this control example, since it is configured to determine whether the internal point and the display point are different in one variation effect unit, when the variation effect is completed (when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) ), a command indicating clearing the number of times is output from the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number addition related command processing 5 (S8469). This number-of-times addition-related command processing 5 (S8469) is processing executed when a command related to the number of times addition set by the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and is for displaying the value of the lucky point in addition. The process is executed. Further, processing for varying the addition display mode of the lucky points is executed according to the processing result of the correction processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

When the number-of-times addition-related command process 5 (S8469) is executed, it is first determined whether the number-of-times addition-related command received this time is an addition-number command indicating that the value of the lucky point is added (S9251), and the addition is performed. When it is determined that the command is the number of times command (S9251: Yes), the same processes of S9201 to S9204 as the above-described number addition related command process (see S8419 of FIG. 188) are executed, and then the value of the display number counter is set. The addition value indicated by the command received this time is added (S9252), a confirmation command including information indicating the value to be added and displayed is set (S9253), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9251, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the addition count command (S9251: No), then it is determined whether the non-display addition count command is received (S9254), and the non-display addition is performed. If it is determined that the number of times command is received (S9254: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described process of S9252, then the process of S9253 is executed, and the present process ends. That is, when the display points are larger than the internal points by the correction processing, the processing for executing the addition display of the lucky points (the processing of S9201 to S9204) is skipped, and only the value of the display number counter is updated. Is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to add only the value of the internal point without adding the value of the lucky point that is actually displayed, and thus it is easy to eliminate the difference between the internal point and the display point. be able to.

In the processing of S9254, if it is determined that the command received this time has not received the non-display addition count command (S9254: No), then the count clear command for clearing the value of the display count counter is received. It is determined (S9255), and when it is determined that it has been received (S9255: Yes), the value of the display number counter is reset to 0 (S9256), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9255, when it is determined that the command is not the command for clearing the number of times (S9255: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the process of determining whether the internal point and the display point match, and the voice lamp control is performed. When the inconsistency between the internal point managed by the device 113 side and the display point managed by the display control device 114 side can be surely detected, and when the inconsistency occurs between the internal point and the display point, , One of the values (the value of the internal point) is positive, and the correction processing for correcting the other value is executable. Further, the content of the correction process is configured to be different according to the remaining period of the period (battle mode period) in which the lucky points can be additionally displayed.

Specifically, in the first half period of the battle mode, when the internal point and the display point are inconsistent, the process of correcting the inconsistency is not immediately executed, but the second addition effect ( When a production in which a plurality of lucky point values can be added is performed in one production), the correction process is executed using the content of the addition. With such a configuration, for example, while continuously executing the first addition effect of adding one lucky point each time the special symbol variation is executed, eliminating the difference between the internal points and the display points. You can

Also, if the time when the inconsistency between the internal points and the display points occurs in the second half of the battle mode period, the correction effect for immediately eliminating the difference between the internal points and the display points is executed. I am configuring. As a result, it is possible to prevent the battle mode period from ending with the display points having a value different from the internal points being displayed, and the production being difficult for the player to understand.

Further, as in the present control example, when the specific effect can be executed when the value of the lucky points reaches a predetermined number, the display control device 114 gives a display instruction ( Information indicating the display counter of the display control device 114) is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and a process for correcting the degree of deviation between the internal point and the display point is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem caused by the difference between the internal point and the display point.

Further, in the present control example, when there is a difference between the internal points and the display points, the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed is determined, and the internal points are displayed according to the length of the remaining period. The processing contents of the correction processing for correcting the difference from the points are configured to be different. Specifically, when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, as described above with reference to FIG. 215, the difference between the internal point and the display point is subtracted at the time when the next lucky point addition effect is executed ( The added effect is executed, or a correction process for hiding the added effect is executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to execute an effect in an effect mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, an effect in which the value of the lucky point is subtracted), and thus the correction process can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, an effect (for example, an effect of subtracting the value of the lucky points) in the effect mode dedicated to the correction processing is executed, and the effect of adding the lucky points is within the executable period. Is configured to reliably correct (eliminate) the difference between the internal point and the display point. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that occurs when there is a difference between the internal point and the display point.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the correction process is configured to be different by determining the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, When a part of the feasible period has elapsed, a specific effect is executed based on the value of the display point (the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). In such a case, the content of the correction process may be changed based on the remaining period until a part of the period elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness even in the process of adding the lucky points.

In addition, in this control example, it is confirmed whether or not there is a difference between the value managed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the value managed by the display control device 114, and the correction process is executed based on the confirmation result. However, when performing one control process across a plurality of control means (setting-side control means and execution-side control means), the setting-side control means By executing the confirmation process of whether the contents set by the execution side control means and the contents executed by the execution side control means and the correction process based on the result of the confirmation process are executed, processing with unintended contents is performed. The technical idea of suppressing execution of the above may be used in other configurations, for example, between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, or the main control device 110 and the voice lamp. It may be executed across the control device 113 and the display control device 114 and three or more control means.

Further, in the present control example, the confirmation process and the correction process are executed for the deviation in the effect in which the value of the lucky point used as the effect is varied (added). However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The control processing result of the main control device 110 such as a time saving number display for variably displaying a value (time saving number) indicating a period in which a high probability state of a normal symbol continues, and a big hit number display for showing the number of consecutive winnings of a big hit You may perform for the value changed based on the information which shows (the result of special symbol lottery).

In addition, in the present control example, when the remaining time of the addition effect is short, a dedicated correction effect (see FIG. 214(b)) is executed to eliminate the difference between the internal point and the display point. However, the display point is not limited to this, for example, when the display point reaches a specific value with a difference between the internal point and the display point, or when the internal point reaches a specific value. Is configured to be a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp (for example, “??” display mode), and the value indicated by the display point is displayed until the difference between the internal point and the display point is eliminated. May be continuously displayed in a display mode that is difficult to grasp (for example, a display mode of "??"). As described above, the processing load in the correction processing can be further reduced by performing the correction that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed value, instead of correcting the displayed value. In this case, for example, when the difference between the internal point and the display point is within a predetermined range (for example, the difference is "1"), it is difficult for the player to grasp the value indicated by the display point (for example, "??"). "Display mode)" is set, and when it is larger than the predetermined range, it is preferable to execute an addition effect for correcting the value of the display point. In this way, by making the content of the correction process different depending on the correction amount that needs to be corrected, the display mode (for example, “??” display mode) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the value indicated by the display point is long-term. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the correction processing while suppressing the execution of the effect that is difficult for the player to understand by being continuously displayed.

Further, in the present control example, the correction process is executed for the set value relating to the effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the correction process may be executed with respect to the setting value related to the effect set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the operation value related to the operation of the decorative accessory. However, the correction process may be performed with respect to the set value regarding the effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the output value regarding the voice output by the voice output device 226, or a value of 3 or more. The correction process may be executed on the target.

<Regarding another example of the fifth control example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. 222 to 225 are diagrams showing an example of a case where an effect using the decorative accessory YK and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Specifically, the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30) described in the first embodiment to which the present control example is applied is schematically shown. The specific operation content of the decorative accessory YK is the same as that in the first embodiment, and therefore its explanation is omitted, but the character "attack" is shown on the first display surface of the decorative accessory YK. On the second display surface, which is a surface (rear surface) different from the first display surface, the second display mode indicating the word "defense" is displayed.

This decorative accessory YK is used for an accessory effect executed in the battle mode, and is configured to be able to inform the player's advantage degree in the battle mode according to the operation content of the accessory YK. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 222, the first display surface of the decorative accessory YK is displayed to the player at the effect position which overlaps with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (overlaps on the front side of the display screen). When it becomes the first visible state, the first display mode becomes visible to the player, and the attack standby effect for maintaining the posture in which the boy 810 attacks the enemy character 811 is executed in the main display area Dm. To be done. In this attack standby effect, the boy 810 executes an attack at the time when the battle effect is executed, and informs the player of a state in which the effect result “win” of the battle effect is confirmed. This effect shows the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, the look-ahead information for holding the special figure 2 and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol change being executed. It is executed based on the information, at least part of the case where the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the prefetch information or the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery being executed, and the prefetch information or the execution There is no information indicating the end condition of the time saving state in the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the fluctuation pattern (60 seconds fluctuation) in which the battle effect is executed in the out-of-range fluctuation is not included, that is, the effect result is " It is executed in at least part of the case where the battle effect of "continuation" is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with a sense of security in a battle mode in which the player does not know when the game will end. In addition, in this another example, the attack standby effect shown in FIG. 222 is configured to be executed in a period in which the information indicating the battle effect whose effect result is “continuation” is not included. Without being limited to this, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern (60-second fluctuation) in which the battle effect is executed in the deviation variation is included, the attack standby effect can be configured to be executed, and the deviation variation can be performed during the execution of the attack standby effect. In the case where the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds fluctuation is set in, it is preferable to execute not the battle effect but the effect for inspiring whether or not the battle effect is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the player by inspiring the player whether or not the battle effect of which the victory is confirmed is executed, and at the same time, when the battle effect is actually generated, the victory is defined. be able to. Further, the attack standby effect can be executed even during the period in which the deviation variation is set to 60 seconds, so that the attack standby effect can be executed more frequently and the effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that this attack standby effect may be configured so that the jackpot is won at a rate of about 20% of the time when it is executed. As a result, when the attack standby effect is performed, it is possible to make the player more likely to win the jackpot than when the attack standby effect is not performed. Further, in this another example, the display mode displayed in the main display area Dm during the attack standby effect is made common (at least part is common) to the display mode used in the shortened mode. Therefore, the amount of effect image data dedicated to the attack standby effect can be reduced. Further, the execution frequency of the attack standby effect may be changed according to the actually set game state. The standby effect may be configured to be executed more frequently. This allows the player to predict the current game state according to the execution frequency of the attack standby effect. In addition, when the game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set, by increasing the execution frequency of the attack standby effect, for example, an effect that is disadvantageous to the player as the effect result of the attack standby effect. Even if the result (effect result in which the battle effect is not executed) is displayed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the probability variation state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the content of another effect (defense or more finalized effect) using the decorative accessory YK will be described. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of the effect during the defense effect or the final effect. Like the attack standby effect shown in FIG. 222 described above, this defense or more final effect is an effect that can be executed during the battle mode. Even if the battle effect is executed during this defense or more final effect, that effect is produced. As a result, this is an effect for notifying the player that “defeat” will not be selected, that is, “continuation” or “win” will be decided. During the above-mentioned defense and finalized effect, the second display surface of the decorative accessory YK is visible to the player at the effect position which overlaps with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (overlaps on the front side of the display screen). The second state is set, and the second display mode is visible to the player. This effect shows the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, the look-ahead information for holding the special figure 2 and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol change being executed. It is executed based on the information, if there is no information indicating the end condition of the time saving state in the information indicating the look-ahead information or the result of the special symbol lottery being executed, that is, the effect result of the battle production is "defeat" It is executed in at least a part of the period without information.

And, as shown in FIG. 224, the accessory lock effect capable of notifying the player of the period during which the decorative accessory YK is located at the effect position (the number of special symbol lottery executed in the state of being located at the effect position). It is configured to be executable. By configuring the accessory lock effect to be executable in this way, it is possible to inform the player of a period in which the boy 810 will not be defeated in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 224 shows an example of an effect when the accessory lock effect is being executed. In the main display area Dm, a display area HR40 as a remaining period display mode indicating an effect remaining time of the accessory lock effect. Is displayed with the “role lock 5G”, and the boy 810 is displayed in a display mode in which the aura is put together. The display of this character lock 5G shows the number of special symbol lottery executed during the character lock effect, and according to the example shown in FIG. While the symbol lottery is executed, the player is informed that the attack standby effect will continue.

In the character lock effect shown in FIG. 224, when the variable effect is set by the voice lamp control device 113, the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is determined based on the received variation pattern command, and further, the winning is achieved. The winning information (prefetch information) stored in the information storage area 223a is determined, and it is determined whether the execution condition of the attack standby effect is satisfied. Further, the number of winning information corresponding to the suspension of special figure 2 stored in the winning information storage area 223a is determined, the executable period of the attack standby effect is specified, and the effect period of the character lock effect is determined. Then, an effect mode is set according to the determined period, and an effect instruction (effect command) corresponding to the determined effect mode is output to the accessory control device that operates the decorative accessory YK and the display control device 114. ..

Then, each time a new special symbol variation is started, an effect mode for updating (subtracting) the remaining period of the character lock effect displayed in the display area HR40 is determined, and the remaining period is 0 (character lock 0G). When it becomes, an effect instruction (effect command) for ending the effect lock effect is output to the effect control device and the display control device 114. With such a configuration, the accessory lock effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 for a period of time is executed by synchronizing the operation status of the decorative accessory YK and the effect display of the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

However, also in this accessory lock effect, similar to the fifth control example described above, due to the missing of the effect command or an erroneous reception on the accessory control device due to the occurrence of noise, and the display control device 114 side. There is a problem that the remaining period managed by the voice lamp control device 113 may be different from the remaining period controlled by the accessory control device and the display control device 114. Therefore, in this another example, as in the fifth control example, the voice lamp control device 113 side can manage the execution contents of the accessory control device and the display control device 114.

Then, when it is determined that the remaining period managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side is different from the execution status of the accessory control device and the display control device 114 side, the voice lamp control device 113. The display mode shown in FIG. 225 is controlled to be displayed until the remaining period managed on the side ends. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing an example of the correction process during the character lock effect. As shown in FIG. 225, when the remaining period managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side is different from the execution status of the accessory control device and the display control device 114 side, “effect product” is displayed in the display area HR40. The character "Lock?G" is displayed, and the effect is executed in an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period during which the accessory lock effect continues. As a result, during the accessory lock effect, a situation in which the "accessory lock 2G" is displayed in the display area H40 at the timing when the decorative accessory YK finishes the effect, that is, the accessory control device and the display control device 114 are displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the degree of progress of the accessory lock effect is different.

In the case of displaying "role lock? G" in the display area HR40 as the correction process, even in the normal role lock effect, as an extension effect of extending the effect period, "role character" is displayed in the display area HR40. It is preferable to configure so that "Lock?G" can be displayed. That is, the winning information regarding the special figure 2 hold newly acquired until the predetermined effect period of the character lock effect is read from the prize information storage area 223a, and the condition that the character lock effect can be continuously executed. When the above is established, it is preferable that the extension effect can be executed. As a result, "normal character lock? G" is displayed in the display area HR40 even in the normal situation, that is, even when the character lamp lock effect period management managed by the voice lamp control device 113 is normal. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the correction process is being executed or the extension effect is being executed.

<A1 embodiment>
Next, an A1 embodiment of the present invention will be described. For the sake of convenience, the same configurations as those described in each of the above-described embodiments and control examples will be described again. First, with reference to FIG. 226 to FIG. 296, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as an A1 embodiment. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment is formed in an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and in an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11. An outer frame 11 and an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable are provided. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 226), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 229) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 226), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 229) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. 227) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is illustrated, and others are shown). Other than rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol starting opening (not shown) A through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are penetrating formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. 227.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left part of FIG. 227) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 227), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to give a force. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 227). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a deviating symbol by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device makes a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

The first winning opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into left and right, and a left flow path through which a game ball can flow down the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right side of the variable display unit 80. A right-hand side flow path through which the sphere can flow is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the left side flow path is configured not to flow down the right side flow path. The first winning opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left channel and the game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right flow path is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the left flow path. The second winning opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which a game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and the second winning hole 640 has entered the opening. A photo sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640a is provided as an opening/closing plate having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the opening. And an opening solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning opening 640 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When hitting a normal design (second design), the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the lower front side, so that the ball is easily opened in the opening of the second winning opening 640. It is formed to operate repeatedly so that the open state and the closed state at the normal time are repeated a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the jackpot type to be determined here, 5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (bonus A), 5R time reduction that is set corresponding to the first special symbol that is variably displayed when the first winning opening 64 is won (3 times) Big hit (big hit B), 15R normal big hit (big hit C) are prepared. In addition, a 15R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) that is set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variably displayed when the second winning opening 640 is won. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, "5R time reduction (95 times) big hit (big hit A)" means that the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is changed 95 times after the jackpot of which the maximum number of rounds is 5, 95 During the period until the fluctuation of the second time stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to a high probability state, and the short variable game state is set when the short variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected. It's a big hit. "5R time reduction (3 times) big hit (big hit B)" means that the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is changed three times after the maximum number of rounds of five rounds, and the third variation. During the period until the stop, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (the second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and the short game state is set when the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is easily selected. Is. In addition, "15R normal jackpot (jackpot C)" is a jackpot in which the low probability state is set and the time saving game state is not set after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds.

During time saving (time saving game state), not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the time saving, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a per hit. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times that is released than usual. Further, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is determined. Alternatively, the number may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the fluctuation of the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for displaying, and a second symbol is variably displayed by the passage of a ball through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) including LEDs is provided. Further, the variable display unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238). Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the first symbol display device is displayed. The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. Is displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the time saving, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of variable display of the second symbol) can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to be in the open state of the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time saving, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. It should be noted that when the balls enter the second winning opening 640, four balls are paid out to the player as the award balls to the upper plate 17, so that the balls easily enter the second winning opening 640. , It is possible to play while suppressing the decrease of the player's balls, and to suppress the investment for lending additional balls, while allowing the special symbols to be drawn during a short period of time. ..

It is to be noted that a state in which the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the time saving also by other methods such as increasing the winning probability during the time saving and increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or the electric winning role for one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the region of the left side flow path of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the left side of the game board is It is configured to pass. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the second symbol hit lottery is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of passages through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 of the sphere is reserved up to 4 times in total, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. It is also lit up (not shown). Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is carried out by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. Further, the number of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 229) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. The prize balls may be paid out.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings from which four balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, the symbol "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol. Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the time reduction is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a jackpot is the same in the case where the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball wins the second winning opening 640 in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, if a ball wins the second winning hole 640 as a type of jackpot that is selected when it becomes a jackpot (became a jackpot in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R at a rate of 100% When the time saving (95 times) big hit (big hit D) is selected and the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (becomes a big hit in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the time saving game state is given. The jackpot is a maximum jackpot of 5R (61% when it becomes a jackpot), and the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 is configured. Has been done. With such a configuration, in the normal game state (a low probability game state in which time saving is not provided), the ball is easier to win in the first winning port 64 than in the second winning port 640. By winning a game ball in the 1 winning port 64, the jackpot to which the time saving is given (the jackpot A or the jackpot B) is set at a low rate, and the winning is given to the second winning port 640. When it is easy to win the prize, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol, and the time saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of being provided with time saving.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V winning door 600 that can guide the ball to the V ball entrance 600a of the V winning device 620 is arranged. The V winning door 600, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit B or a small hit, stands upright and the ball does not enter the V entrance 600a. As described above, the sphere can enter the V ball entrance 600a by changing from the upright closed state to the open state rotated about 90 degrees to the right.

In the case of a small hit, a 1R (round) small hit game is executed in which the V winning door 600 is in the open state for 1.2 seconds or 10 balls and the V entering hole 600a is won. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B, like the small hit game, the V winning door is opened until the 1R, and the variable winning device 65 is changed to the open state from the 2R. Here, from the 2R, the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is preset as 1R (round) for 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a. A round game is repeatedly executed up to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

With such a configuration, regardless of whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol display device 81 or the like does not notify whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, and a small hit. By configuring to shift to the game or the jackpot game, similarly, the game ball is inserted into the V winning device 620, and the game ball is expected to enter the V winning opening 624 described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, a game ball enters a V winning opening 624 of a V winning device 620, which will be described later, so that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. .. In addition, during the small hitting game, the big winning which is started by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 624 is configured such that the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1R.

In the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, in the jackpot game of the 1R, when the gaming ball enters the V winning device 620, the winning control is executed so that the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 624. Is configured. As a result, even in the case of a jackpot game in the jackpot B, it is possible to make the player think that the variable winning device 65 is subsequently opened by winning the V winning opening 624 (actually, 2R in the jackpot game). Eyes are running). It should be noted that when a ball is won in the V ball entrance 600a and the specific prize hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out to the player as a prize ball for one ball. In the jackpot games other than the jackpot B, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state from the 1R (round), so that the jackpot game is started instead of the jackpot. It is also configured to be identifiable by.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol (for example, a matching pattern of 333 or the like) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, it becomes a small hit stop design. While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B, a stop symbol (for example, a matching pattern of 333 etc.) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol display device 81 similarly has a reach display mode of the third symbol (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same first symbol). 3 symbols are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbols are stopped and the chance symbols (the third symbol with the letter "CHANCE") are stopped and displayed. Will be notified. As a result, the player performs the game (corresponding to the small hit game or the big hit game) in which the V winning door 600 of 1R is opened by the third symbol being stopped and displayed in the chance pattern as a minimum. It is possible to recognize that, and expect the ball to enter the V winning opening 624. In addition, when a specific symbol (for example, a 777-slot pattern) is stopped and displayed among the third symbols, the fact that the jackpot game is executed is notified, and the specific symbol is specified. By displaying, the player may be made to recognize early that a jackpot game with high added value will be executed.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In the case of big hit B, from the 2R, in the case of other than big hit B, from the 1R, open the opening door to tilt the open/close plate to the front lower side and open the ball easily to the specific winning opening 65a. Is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normally closed state are alternately repeated.

Next, the V winning device 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. The V winning device 620 is arranged in the variable display unit 80, and is attached to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guiding member 622, a rotation distributing member 621, a V winning opening 624, a left discharging path 623a, a right discharging path 623b, a first retention member 622d, and a flow path switching. It is composed of a member 622e.

Normally, the rotation distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and the rotation distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left-right direction at a constant cycle when the power is turned on. Is configured to. When the V winning door 600 is opened upon the start of a small hit game or a big hit game, the game ball can flow into the V ball entrance 600a of the V winning device 620. At the abutting portion of the V winning door 600 and the V winning device 620, a V ball inlet 600a into which a game ball can enter is formed. From the V ball inlet 600a into the V prize device 620 A guideway for guiding the is formed. A photo sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is arranged at the V entrance 600a, and is configured to be able to count the number of wins to the V winning device 620 (V entrance 600a). The award balls (3 balls) are paid out to the player based on the balls detected by the photo sensor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the V winning apparatus 620 will be described in detail in accordance with the timing chart of the operation control of the V winning apparatus 620 in the small hit game. When the small hit game is started, after the opening period (t1:0.1 seconds) has passed, the opening period (t2:1.2 seconds) the V winning opening solenoid is activated (activated to ON), and V winning is won. The door 600 is changed to the open state. When the game ball is in the open state and the V ball entry port 600a wins, the game ball that has flowed down the guide path is configured so that the flow of the ball is restricted by the first retention member 622d shown in FIG. 231 and is retained. The first staying member 622d is configured such that the staying 1 solenoid operates for 4 seconds (actuates to ON) so as to project to the front side so that the ball stays at the top based on the start of the small hitting game. .. It should be noted that, when one ball is retained in the first retaining member 622d, the game ball flowing down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is discharged to either the left or the right. After 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V winning door 600 has elapsed, 2.7 seconds after the V winning door solenoid is turned off and the V winning door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, The stay 1 solenoid 209a is operated to be turned off, the first stay member 622d is retracted toward the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10, and the ball stayed in the upper part flows downward. Below the first retention member 622d, a flow path switching member 622e that always operates in the left-right direction is arranged.

The flow path switching member 622e is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at 0.4s intervals by the flow path solenoid 209b. When it is turned off, the movable guiding member 622 is moved to a position where it blocks the inflow port so that the ball cannot enter the movable guiding member 622. In the off state, the sphere flowing down from the upstream side is guided to the right side by the inclined portion formed on the upper portion of the flow path switching member 622e and discharged to the outside of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow passage solenoid is turned on and the flow passage switching member is retracted to the left side of the inflow port, the sphere is allowed to flow into the movable guiding member 622. It is configured.

The flow path switching member 622e is in the open state (flow path solenoid is on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left) at the timing when the first retention member 622d retracts and the retained game balls flow down. Then, the sphere flows into the movable guiding member 622. As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guiding member 622 is formed in a tubular shape that allows one sphere to flow down. An inflow port into which the sphere flows is formed on one end side, and the sphere is discharged to the other end side. A discharge port 622a is formed. A recess 622c for holding one sphere is formed on the front side (upstream side) of the discharge port 622a, and a second retention member that blocks the flow of the ball entering the recess 622c is formed downstream of the recess 622c. 622b is arranged. The second staying member 622b is in a regulated state in which the staying 2 solenoid 612 is actuated (turned on) to project upward and prevents the ball that has entered the recess 622c from flowing down, and the staying 2 solenoid 612 is turned off, and the second staying member 622b is turned off. 622b is rotated to the left and is changed to a release state in which the ball entering the recess 622c is allowed to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 253, the second staying member 622b is in a state in which the staying 2 solenoid 612 is activated (ON) for 2 seconds (t6) 5 seconds after the start of the small hitting game and is changed to the restricted state. The sphere entering the recess 622c is restricted from flowing down. The movable guide member 622 is rotated leftward so that the inflow port side rises as shown in FIG. 231(b) by the stay 2 movable motor 610a after 5 seconds (t4) from the start of the small hitting game. After that, for 1.5 seconds (t5), the stay 2 movable motor 610a is operated to raise the movable guiding member 622 and controlled to move to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231(b)). As described above, the stay 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be turned off at the timing 6 seconds after the start of the small hitting game, so the second stay member 622b is released while the movable guiding member 622 is rising. In this state, the movable guiding member 622 is tilted to the lower left, and when the tilt angle is further increased, the ball entering the recess 622c easily flows down to the lower left.

As shown in FIG. 229(a), when the ball that has entered the recess 622c starts to flow down, the ball that has entered the recess 622c is discharged to the rotary distribution member 621 through the discharge port 622a. The discharged balls roll on the rotary distribution member 621 and are discharged downstream. The rotation distribution member 621 is rotated to the left and right at a constant cycle after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the V distribution port 624 and the rotation distribution member 621 arranged downstream of the rotation distribution member 621. When the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a at the timing when the downstream discharge port 621a and the downstream discharge port 621a are aligned in parallel, the ball easily enters the V winning opening 624. On the other hand, when a ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a in a state where the downstream discharge port 621a and the V winning hole are not aligned in parallel, the left winning passage 623a or the right discharging passage 623b arranged on the left and right sides of the V winning device 620 causes the ball to be discharged. It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, the V effective period for determining that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 for 2 seconds (t7) from 5 seconds after the start of the small hit is set. It is configured. Only when the photo sensor detects that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the winning detection is valid, and when the winning is in any other period, the control processing is performed as invalid. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine only the period during which the V winning opening 624 can be won, and damage caused by fraud such as when the ball is manipulated by a magnet or the like to illegally win the V winning opening 624. Can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when the winning of the V winning opening 624 is detected during the V effective period, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. The jackpot game that is given when the ball normally passes through the V winning opening 624 in the jackpot game is the type of the jackpot game executed (small hit A or small hit B (FIGS. 244(b) to (c)). It is configured so that the jackpot type corresponding to (see )) is set.

Note that the timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown when the small hit does not pass through V. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the flow path switching member 622e is in the closed state, the first retention member 622d is released, and the game ball is not guided to the movable guiding member 622, so that the V winning is achieved. It shows an example of not doing. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart of winning the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot B is hit, and FIG. 255 is a timing chart of a case of not winning the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot B is hit. This is an example. Further, FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state set when a big hit or a small hit in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), when the small hit A in Special Figure 1 is executed, 5R (95 times reduction in working hours) big hit is set, and when the small hit B is executed, 10R normal ( No time saving) A big hit is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 244(c), when the small hit C in the special figure 2 is executed, 15R (95 times reduction in time) big hit is set, and when the small hit D is executed, 5R( If the small hit E is executed, 5R (no time saving) big hit is set. In addition, the time saving of each of the above jackpots indicates that the time saving game state is set, and the subsequent number display shows the number of times the special symbol fluctuates as the period in which the time saving game state is set. Normal indicates that it is a big jackpot in which the time saving game state is not set.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is executed by winning the V winning hole 624, but the present invention is not limited to this. A counter value (for example, the first winning type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning the prize, and selected from a predetermined selection table. As the predetermined selection table, a different selection table may be set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), a different selection table may be set depending on the type of the special symbol, or the executed small table. Different selection tables may be set depending on the hit type.

In addition, here, when the variable display when the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a small hit or a big hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit type , The LED of the first symbol display device 37a is lit and displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to the jackpot type. Since it is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are combined and displayed, even if the player visually recognizes the first symbol display device 37a, it is difficult to identify the details of the small hit type and the big hit type at a glance. Has been done. Furthermore, when it is a big hit, the LED of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be displayed in correspondence with the number of rounds corresponding to the big hit type. Regarding the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by characters or the like, and is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the type of jackpot, so that the player is more difficult to identify. Thereby, even if the player is informed of the big hit type, the small hit type, and the number of rounds of the big hit on the first symbol display device 37 and the fairness of the game can be maintained, it is difficult for the player to understand. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the small hit game and the big hit game before the execution, and even during the small hit game and the big hit game in the big hit B, the player can change the small hit type, the big hit type, etc. It is structured so that you can play while making predictions. As a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the type of the big hit game that is given when the V winning hole 624 is won is different depending on the small hit type, and thus the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player. When the small hit game corresponding to the small hit type to which the type is given is executed, by stopping the firing of the game ball and playing the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the V entrance 600a, There is a possibility that the disadvantage on the amusement store side may increase, but in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured as a notification mode in which the type of the small hit is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantages of the game.

Furthermore, after the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be a small hit is stopped and displayed, 0.1 seconds later, the V winning door 600 is opened and the opened state is maintained for 1.2 seconds. Since it is only done, even if the player can analyze and identify the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if he or she operates the launch of the game ball after the identification, up to the V entrance 600a It is constructed so that it is difficult to fire the game balls so as to reach them. In detail, in the present embodiment, 100 game balls per minute are configured to be fired at equal intervals regardless of the firing intensity, so that one game is shot in 0.6 seconds. Since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V ball entrance 600a after being launched from the launch device, the V ball entrance 600a is required unless the game ball is continuously fired to the right area. It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the V entrance 600a at the time of a small hit, and if you control not to enter the V entrance 600a during a small hit, you can enter the V entrance 600a into the V entrance for any small hit game Will not be able to enter. Therefore, the player immediately starts right-handing when the third symbol is stopped and the right-handing notification is given (a notification mode for notifying the player that the game ball is to be launched in the right area). The game can be performed as if to play.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 226).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 600a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 66. The outlet 66 is arranged below the variable winning device 65.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as the movable member 310) is disposed above the left side of the game board 13 as viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 228, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), as a trigger, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. The third symbol is commonly displayed in a variable manner with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner, prior to the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed and displayed at the same time, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed and displayed simultaneously. It may be possible. With this configuration, more lottery games can be executed at the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of the numbers "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the end. On the other hand, in the case where the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

Further, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol column→the right symbol column→the middle symbol column. When the combination of the big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, there is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the spheres entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. One identification symbol (reserved symbol) of "round symbol" is displayed for one reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is notified to the player. The player can determine the current number of holding balls by the number of holding symbols. The maximum number of reserved balls for each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is set to 4, and each of the holding balls is a holding ball for the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Are configured to be distinguishably displayed in different colors on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, black for the first winning opening 64 and red for the second winning opening 640).

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, a character symbol, a character, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. To be done. Further, when the game is not played for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a first random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a normal symbol per random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202aa, a small hit. Each scenario table 202ab is set. It should be noted that although data and the like necessary for other games are also stored, they are not necessary in the description of the invention in the present embodiment, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

The first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the normal symbol random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202e will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The jackpot scenario table 202aa is a data table that defines jackpot scenarios in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set, and the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started. Period), round period (maximum period when one round game is set), and inter-round interval period (period from the end of a round game to the start of the next round game) Corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa, which is defined correspondingly, is set when the jackpot game is started, and the value is periodically incremented (every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed) by 1 Motion control is executed.

In this jackpot scenario table 202aa, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won are defined. Here, detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot scenario table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 248(a), different scenarios are defined in the jackpot scenario table 202aa corresponding to the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), the jackpot scenario A202aa1 corresponding to the jackpot game for 5R is included in the jackpot types A and C in which the jackpot game opening the specific winning opening 65a is executed. The jackpot scenario 202aa6 corresponding to the jackpot game for 15R is defined in D.

Also, as shown in FIG. 248(a), as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game, for the jackpot type B in which the V winning hole 624 or the specific winning hole 65a is opened according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game, Hit scenario a202aa2 showing the operation content of the first half of the first round, hit scenario b202aa3 showing the operation content of the second half of the first round, hit scenario c202aa4, and operation content of the round game from the second round to the fifth round The jackpot scenario b202aa5 that indicates is defined.

As for the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, the content of the first round game is the same as the game content of the jackpot game (error that is difficult for the player to identify). The scenario is stipulated so that when the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot type B is started, the V winning door 600 is opened and the round game (V challenge) aiming at the V winning opening 624 is executed. To be done.

Furthermore, by opening the V prize door 600 during this V challenge, it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a, and the game ball that entered the V ball entrance 600a is the flow path switching member. Based on the detection result of the second retention sensor (not shown), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through 622e and is retained by the second retention member 622b of the movable guiding member 622 (see FIG. 231(a)). The operation contents of the latter half of the first round game are changed based on the determination result.

In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for the initial value setting of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 274). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 formed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, The values of the per-random number counter C1, the first-per-type counter C2, and the stop-type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal starting openings (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored. Then, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table (see FIGS. 242(a) to (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first per random number. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Here, the first random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol are respectively set.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0-3", and "0 If any of "3", it is determined to be a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than “0 to 3” (that is, when the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of order), it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “4”. If it is "4", it is determined to be a small hit. Here, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out.

In the lottery for the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 242(c), it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the same manner as the first special symbol is “0 to 3”, and “ If any of 0 to 3”, it is determined to be a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than “0 to 3” (that is, when the jackpot lottery is determined to be out of order), the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is “4 to 997”. If it is any of "4 to 997", it is determined to be a small hit. Here, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out.

In this way, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to the same, but for the small hit probability, the second special symbol, the small hit probability than the first special symbol Is set high. As a result, in the time saving game state where it becomes easy to enter the game balls into the second winning opening 640, the lottery is likely to be executed with the second special symbol, so that the probability of a small hit increases, and the V winning opening 624 is won. The opportunities that can be given can be increased. Therefore, the time saving game state can be set more advantageously for the player, and it is expected that the jackpot game to which the time saving game state is given is executed even when the normal game state is set. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the special symbol big hit becomes a big hit, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and has a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). ) Are sequentially incremented by one, and after reaching a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the sphere has won the second winning opening 640.

Here, the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first random number counter C1, the first special symbol, there are four random number values to be the big hit of the second special symbol, the random number value "0-3", as described above, a random number per special symbol The table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 are stored in the random number table 202a2. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 1,000, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 4, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/250”.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 241(a)) for determining the type of big hit to be executed is It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as shown in FIG. 243(a), a special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 which is a data table for determining the type of the big hit game for the first special symbol, and the second special Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the symbol, respectively.

FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, three types from the jackpot A to the jackpot C described above are set to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "0 to 44" is "big hit A (5R hour reduction 95 times big hit)". That is, the value of "0 to 44" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of “45 to 60”, the jackpot type is “big hit B (5R time reduction 3 times big hit)”. That is, the value of "45-60" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "61 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit C (10R hour short no big hit)". That is, the value of "61 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game balls are mainly won in the first winning opening 64 to play the game, but the time saving gaming state is 61% of the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is a jackpot to be given (jackpot A and jackpot B). Therefore, even if a big jackpot in the first special symbol, the time saving game state is not necessarily given, so the player is interested in whether it is a jackpot type to which a time saving game is given, even if it is a big hit. You can have it, and you can improve the fun of the game.

FIG. 243(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of the jackpot D described above is set to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "0 to 99" is "big hit D (15R hour reduction 95 times big hit)". That is, the value of "0 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot against the second special symbol (by the jackpot determination for the winning in the second winning hole 640), the jackpot to which the time saving game is always given is configured to be given. There is. Further, the number of time saving is set to 95 times, which is more advantageous than the jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set to 15R, so that the player is more advantageous than the jackpots A to C. It is configured. As a result, in the case where the jackpot is mainly due to the lottery of the second special symbol which is easy to be executed mainly in the time saving game state, the jackpot game which is more advantageous than the first special symbol is configured to be executed. It is configured to have a high value when the gaming state is executed.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the case of a small hit of a special symbol, and a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). In step 99), the values are sequentially incremented by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 holding ball of the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the sphere has won the second winning opening 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit, the small hit type selection table 202e for determining the type of the small hit to be executed (see FIG. 244(a)) Is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. In the small hit type selection table 202e, as shown in FIG. 244(a), the special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202e1 which is a data table for determining the type of small hit game for the first special symbol, and the second Special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202e2, which is a data table for determining the type of small hit game for special symbols, is set.

FIG. 244(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202b1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, two kinds of the small hit A and the small hit B described above are set to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "0 to 64", the small hit type is "small hit A (5R time when passing V, 95 times big hit)". Becomes That is, the value of "0 to 64" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "65 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit B (10V hour when passing V, no big hit)". That is, the value of "65-99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit A and the small hit B, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game, the type of the big hit game to be executed thereafter is set. In the case of the small hit A, the big winning of 5R hour-shortening 95 times is set, and after the small hit A, the big winning in which the variable winning a prize device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the short-time gaming state is set to 95. The time saving game of the number of times (the period until the change of the special symbol is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed) is set. Further, in the case of small hit B, 10R hour short no big hit is set, and after the small hit B, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state is executed, but after the big hit game Is configured such that the time saving game state is not set, but the normal game state is set. In this way, the small hit B has a large number of rounds to be executed in the big hit game and is set to be more advantageous than the small hit A, but since the time saving game state is not set after the big hit game, the player is hit after the big hit. It is difficult to execute the lottery with the advantageous second special symbol, and in general, when the small hit A wins the V prize hole 624 more than the small hit B, it is set to be advantageous to the player. Has been done.

FIG. 244(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202b2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, the three types of small hit C to small hit D described above are set to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit C (15R time when passing V, 95 times big hit)". Becomes That is, the value of "0 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of “50 to 79”, the small hit type is “small hit D (5R time when passing V, 95 times big hit)”. That is, the value of "50 to 79" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of “80 to 99”, the small hit type is “small hit E (5V time when passing V, no short win, big hit)”. That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit C to the small hit E, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game, the type of the big hit game to be executed thereafter is set. In the case of the small hit C, a big hit of 15R hour-shortening 95 times is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big jackpot in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and thereafter, as a short-time gaming state 95 The time saving game of the number of times (the period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed) is configured. Also, in the case of small hit D, 5R hour-short 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit D, the big winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the variable winning. Device 65 is set to the 5R open state jackpot is executed, after that as time saving game state 95 times saving game (the period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times and stopped) is set It is configured. Also, in the case of small hit E, 5R hour short no big hit is set, and after the small hit E, the big prize game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, but after the big hit game Is configured such that the time saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set.

In this way, for the small hit type for the second special symbol, when the V winning hole 624 is won than the small hit type for the first special symbol, a short time gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set. The type selection rate is set high. As a result, when the time saving game state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is set higher than the lottery of the first special symbol, It is possible to easily execute the big hit game in which the time saving game state is set again by determining the small hit and winning the V winning opening 624. Thereby, the jackpot game can be given to the player while continuing the time saving game state, and the value of the time saving game state can be further increased.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol, the second special symbol is determined as a small hit, when the variable display is stopped, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. Is configured to. Therefore, a player wants to perform a more advantageous jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a shortened gaming state is set) by effectively using the remaining number of hours saved when the hour-short game is being played. .. Then, the small hit game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only in the case of the small hit type in which the time saving game state is not given, the firing of the game ball is stopped and the V entrance 600a is entered. There is a possibility that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game store side, that is, the game is played so that the game balls do not enter, may be executed. However, in the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds after the variable display determined as the small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the V winning door 600 is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds. Since it is only done, it is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds, and in the configuration of the present embodiment that requires 2 seconds to the V ball entrance 600a, after checking the first symbol display device 37, the game ball is fired. , It is difficult to enter the V entrance 600a, the first special symbol, the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit and the fluctuation stops, the right-handing notification is the third symbol display device 81 If the game ball is shot to the right area as soon as the game is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a in the small hit game in all the small hit types. Is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that is extremely disadvantageous to the game store side.

Here, with reference to FIG. 247, the operation of each hit type and hit game will be described. The jackpot A and the jackpot C are repeatedly executed by 5R round games in which 1R is 10 balls in the variable winning device 65, until a game ball is won, or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds.

For the jackpot B, in the 1R round game, the V winning door 600 is opened and the V entrance 600a is opened for 1.2 seconds. In addition, when 10 balls are won in the 1st round, it will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed, but at 1.2 seconds, the opening time when it is impossible to actually enter 10 balls Has become. In the 2R to 5R round games, a round game that continues until 10 balls, game balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or until the open state for 29 seconds is continued is executed.

The jackpot D is 1R, 10 balls in the variable winning device 65, a round game that continues until a game ball wins or the open state continues for 29 seconds is repeatedly executed for 15R.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Depending on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the lottery result (missing, big hit type, small hit), so-called short misses (7 seconds), missteps (30 seconds), various normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), special reach Rough display mode of various (90 seconds), pseudo development no production (30 seconds), pseudo development one production (34 seconds), pseudo development two productions (38 seconds), pseudo development three productions (42 seconds) ( Fluctuation time) is determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 245(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 245(a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d is a fluctuation pattern table for normal use 202d1 used in the normal game state and a fluctuation pattern table for time saving 202d2 used in the time saving game state. Are set respectively.

FIG. 245(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table 202d1. The fluctuation pattern table for normal use 202d1 is short deviation (7 seconds), misalignment (30 seconds), various normal reach ( 30 seconds), various kinds of super reach (60 seconds), and various kinds of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation is obtained by collating the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. The pattern is selected.

In detail, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", short deviation (7 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "140 to 149", misalignment (30 seconds) is selected. If it is "150 to 179", various normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is "180 to 194", various super reach (60 seconds) is selected and it is "195 to 198". In this case, the determination values are set so that various special reach types (90 seconds) are selected.

As a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit types are big hits A and C to D (that is, other than big hit B), various normal reach types (30 seconds) , Various kinds of super reach (60 seconds) and various kinds of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by collating the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. To be done. Here, it is configured to notify the player that it is a big hit by the stop display of the third symbol (a big hit for matching the symbols) when the movement is stopped. It should be noted that the index of "777" is displayed only in the case of a jackpot type in which the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of the jackpot type in which the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game, it is configured so that the check symbols other than "777" are determined by the determination lottery of the stop symbol of the third symbol. It is configured so that it is not possible to know whether or not the time saving game will be given only after the jackpot game.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 40”, various normal reach types (30 seconds) are selected, and when the value is “41 to 179”, various super reach types (60 seconds) are selected. The determination values are set so that various special reach types (90 seconds) are selected when selected and "180 to 198".

In addition, each fluctuation pattern selected when it is a big hit is composed of the same fluctuation time as each fluctuation pattern selected when it is a big hit, and finally it is a stop pattern (groove) showing a big hit. It is configured to be different depending on whether or not it is displayed. As a result, even if the determination result is incorrect, the player can expect the jackpot by selecting the same variation pattern (reach variation pattern that is reached) even when the jackpot is a big hit. it can.

As the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B, pseudo development no production (30 seconds), pseudo development one production (34 seconds), 2nd pseudo development (38 seconds), and 3rd pseudo development (42 seconds) are respectively set, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are set. The matching and corresponding variation pattern is selected. Here, when the variation stop (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, the player is informed that at least a small hit has been won. As a result, even if the big hit B is displayed with the same stop symbol as the small hit, the player can play in the small hit game with the expectation of winning the game ball into the V winning opening 624. it can.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", pseudo development non-production (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", pseudo development once production ( 34 seconds) is selected, and if it is "100 to 149", the pseudo development twice effect (38 seconds) is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the pseudo evolution three times effect (38 seconds) is selected. Each judgment value is set so as to be selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 232 to FIG. 236, in the third symbol display device 81 in the misalignment (30 seconds), pseudo non-production (30 seconds), and pseudo single development (34 seconds) in the present embodiment. The effect mode displayed will be described. 232 to 233 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol in the looseness (30 seconds). When the variation start trigger of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is determined to be off, each third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 232(a) (left, middle, The right pattern) starts to scroll vertically. Further, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is a "round symbol" in a display area smaller than the region in which the third symbol is displayed (the region in which each third symbol is displayed). And "x symbol" are alternately displayed in a variable manner and are displayed in two columns on the left and right. The fourth symbol is configured to be variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display period of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable period. (Displacement: Round design in the left column, combination of x designs in the right column, Jackpot: Combination of circle designs in the left column, Combination of circle designs in the right column, Small hit: Combination of x design in the left column, × design in the right column) It is configured to stop at. As shown in FIGS. 232(a) and 232(b), the state in which three lines are described above the fourth symbol indicates that the fourth symbol is variably displayed.

Gase disengagement (30 seconds), when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the third symbol that was temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 is definitely stopped (stop display from shaking fluctuation), and the fourth symbol is synchronized with it. Is also configured to be stopped.

In the pseudo-development non-production (30 seconds), with respect to the variable display of out of control (30 seconds), the temporarily stopped symbol is the reach display mode of the left and right symbols as shown in FIG. 237(a), and the middle symbol is " The difference is that the chance eye pattern in which the characters "CHANCE" are displayed is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol in the pseudo development once effect (34 seconds). When it is determined as a small hit or a big hit B, and the pseudo development once effect is selected, the variation start timing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is similar to that described in the pseudo no development effect, as shown in FIG. 232 ( As shown in a), each third symbol (left, middle, right symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is started to be scrolled in the vertical direction. After that, after being displayed at high speed in a scroll display (speed or mode in which the type of the third symbol is difficult to identify), the chance eye symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 232(b) (for example, stopped at a combination of “354”). After the display, the third symbol is shaken and fluctuated up and down).

Thereafter, in the pseudo-first development effect, as shown in FIG. 234(a), the medium symbol "5" symbol and the right symbol "4" symbol are variably displayed so as to be exchanged. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of “345”, it is set as the symbol of the combination for notifying the player that the re-variation will be executed. As shown in FIG. 234(b), by moving to the combination of "345" and displayed, the scroll display is started again in the vertical direction. After that, after a high-speed scroll display, as shown in FIG. 237(a), the chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, and is stopped and displayed at the timing when 34 seconds of the change time (change period) has elapsed. Here, in the case of the pseudo development two times production (38 seconds) and the pseudo development three times production (42 seconds), after the temporary stop, if the pseudo development two times production, it changes again. In the case of the pseudo-developed 3rd production, the chance eye symbol is temporarily displayed after the production in which the re-changing is executed twice is executed. Thus, by executing the pseudo-variation a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the small hit game or the big hit B is started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 236, the SW (switch) effect in the out-of-control, the pseudo first development effect, the pseudo second development effect, and the pseudo third development effect will be described. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the variation pattern command. Detailed effect contents are selected by the voice lamp control device 113 by lottery based on the variation pattern commands indicating the out-of-control, the pseudo first development, the pseudo second development, and the third pseudo development. As one of the effects, when the temporary stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 235(a), the symbol indicating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is pressed. An effect that prompts the player is executed.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235(b), if any one of the pseudo development once effect, the pseudo development twice effect, and the pseudo development three times effect is selected, it is changed again. The symbol of “345” indicating that is displayed, and re-change is executed. On the other hand, in the case where the misalignment is selected, the temporarily stopped symbol does not change as shown in FIG. 236, and it is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the variable period has elapsed. ..

In the present embodiment, the “CHANCE” symbol of the chance eye is displayed as the final stopped symbol that has changed again, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “CHANCE” symbol and other symbols (for example, the medium symbol) Alternately, "4" symbols) may be displayed alternately, or both symbols may be displayed and scrolled to display an effect as to whether the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, when the "CHANCE" symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, it may be changed again when changing again from the stopped symbol. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to determine each variation pattern before the player is definitely stopped, and it is difficult to understand the start timing of the small hit game and the big hit B. Therefore, even if the small hit in the fourth symbol, even if the big hit is displayed in a distinguishable manner, the attention to the fourth symbol can be lowered by the effect of the third symbol, and the small hit game starts. Can be difficult to identify. Further, in the fourth symbol, since it is configured so as not to be able to identify up to the type of small hit, it is necessary to check the first symbol display device 37, to stop the firing of the game ball in a specific small hit game, etc. It is possible to suppress the special game method of (Strike).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 238, an effect mode (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 up to the fixed stop symbol in the small hit or the big hit B will be described. As previously described, the pseudo development no production, the pseudo development once production, the pseudo development twice production, and the pseudo development three production, when the chance eye symbol indicating the final stop symbol is temporarily stopped, the chance eye symbol swings and changes. In this state, the words "Preparing to aim right" are displayed at the top of the chance eye pattern. Further, the outline of the right hitting notification symbol n is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so as to notify the user to operate the firing handle with the firing strength for firing the game ball to the right area. When the variation time elapses and two seconds before the variation time elapses, the character "Come on, aim at the right" is displayed, and the density of the outline of the right-handing notification symbol n is displayed dark (FIG. 237). (See (b)). After that, at the timing when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 238, the right-handed notification symbol n is displayed not only in the contour but also in the middle, and the character "right-handed" is displayed on the left side thereof.

In this way, by notifying the right-hand hitting information in a stepwise manner before being fixedly stopped, the gaming ball is fired to the right area in accordance with the timing when the small hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game balls are not launched in time during the period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the re-variation is executed the specified number of times, when the fixed symbol is displayed, the right-handed notification symbol is configured to be displayed stepwise, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the temporary stop is performed. Every time at the timing, the step display of the right-handing notification symbol n is started, and when the deviation or re-fluctuation occurs, the right-handing notification symbol n is displayed before switching to the display mode of the confirmed right notification symbol n (see FIG. 238). May be hidden and the third symbol may be changed again. In this case, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and when it is changed again, the fixed symbol is not displayed and the scroll symbol is again displayed. It may be a fixed stop symbol that replaces 3 symbols and is fixedly stopped (for example, by scrolling by one frame (shift) to stop) and notifying that the symbol has come off. By configuring in this way, it is more difficult to understand the small hit start time, and each time the player temporarily stops, the player is made ready to hit the right side, and a special game such as not firing in a specific small hit type. Can be suppressed.

Next, the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. The time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table used for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. In the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving game state is out, short miss (2 seconds), short miss pseudo 1 time ( 6 seconds), short miss pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by collating the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value.

More specifically, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 90", short deviation (2 seconds) is selected, and if the value is "91 to 189", short deviation pseudo 1 time (6 seconds). ) Is selected, and if it is "190 to 198", the judgment values are set so that the short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is selected.

Short deviation (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation for 1 second from the start of fluctuation, it sways at the chance (the middle symbol is the "CHANCE" symbol is greatly fluctuating). After fluctuating and temporarily stopping for 1 second, a change effect is executed in which it is switched to a detachment symbol (the middle symbol is a scroll (slipped) symbol one frame downward from the “CANCE” symbol) and is fixedly stopped to inform that it is out. This is a fluctuation pattern. By the way, the middle symbol during the temporary stop is greatly shaken, and the “CHANCE” symbol and the symbol “for example, “1” symbol” arranged in the first frame are alternately displayed at the stop display position. The player is not mistaken for a lottery result such as a small hit.

The short deviation pseudo 1 time (6 seconds) fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set at 6 seconds, and after the temporary deviation of 1 second of the short deviation (2 seconds) described above, the symbol is high again for 2 seconds. After starting fluctuation and re-changing, after temporarily stopping for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short deviation (2 seconds)), deviation symbol (middle symbol scrolls one frame downward from "CHANGE" symbol) This is a variation pattern in which the variation effect is executed in which the (shifted) pattern is switched to the fixed stop, and it is informed that it is out.

The short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set at 9 seconds, and after the short deviation pseudo 1 time 2 seconds provisional stop, the symbol changes again for 2 seconds at high speed. After starting and re-changing, after temporarily stopping for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short deviation (2 seconds)), out symbol (middle symbol scrolls one frame downward from the "CHANGE" symbol ( It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the pattern is switched to a (slipped) pattern), the movement is fixedly stopped, and it is informed that it is out.

In the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, as a fluctuation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving game state is a small hit, short small hit (2 seconds), short small hit pseudo 1 time (6 seconds), pseudo short times 2 times (9 seconds), short times small pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) are set, and the obtained variation type counter CS1 value is collated with the set judgment value. Then, the corresponding variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", the short and small hits (2 seconds) are selected, and when the value is "68 to 136", the short and small hits are simulated once (6 seconds. ) Is selected, and if it is "137 to 167", pseudo short times are selected twice (9 seconds), and if "168 to 198", pseudo short times are selected three times (12 seconds). The respective judgment values are set so that

Short and small hits (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high speed fluctuation for 1 second from the start of fluctuation, it sways at the chance (the middle pattern is a large fluctuation fluctuation of the "CHANCE" symbol) This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect in which a variation is fluctuated and temporarily stopped for 1 second, and then a fixed stop is notified and a small hit is performed. In addition, the middle symbol during the temporary stop is greatly shaken, and the "CHANGE" symbol and the symbol "for example, "1" symbol" arranged in the first frame thereof are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

The variation pattern of one small per small pseudo (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 6 seconds, and after the temporary short stop (2 seconds) for 1 second, the pattern is high again for 2 seconds. After the fluctuation is started and changed again, at the chance, it temporarily stops for 2 seconds (temporary stop mode similar to short and small hits (2 seconds)), then fixedly stops, and is notified that it is a small hit. This is the variation pattern that is executed.

The variation pattern of short and small pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 9 seconds, and after the short and small pseudo 1 time 2 seconds provisional stop, the symbol again fluctuates for 2 seconds at high speed. After starting and re-changing, it temporarily stops for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short and small hits (2 seconds)), then fixedly stops, and a change effect is informed that it is a small hit. This is a fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern of short and small pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 12 seconds, and after the short and small pseudo 2 times 1 second temporary stop, the symbol changes again for 2 seconds at high speed. After starting and re-changing, it temporarily stops for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short and small hits (2 seconds)), then fixedly stops, and a change effect is informed that it is a small hit. This is a fluctuation pattern.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, the lottery result is configured with the same variation time when the result is out and when the lottery result is a small hit, and with the same variation timing (variation time elapsed timing). The third pattern is configured to be temporarily stopped at the chance. As a result, even if the lottery result is out of order, it can be made to appear as if each variation is a small hit, and the player can be prepared to make a right hit in preparation for the start of the small hit game. Furthermore, it is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37 whether or not it is a specific small hit type (for example, small hit E which is a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player in the small hit type), and the game ball is launched. It is possible to suppress the problem that a special game method for stopping and preventing the game ball from entering the V ball entrance 600a is performed.

It should be noted that the stepwise notification of the right-handed notification symbol in the normal game state may be configured to be executed at each temporary stop even during the time saving game. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect a small hit even if the variation is even more out of sync with the game.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 242(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second per random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second per random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (normal symbol). (For a period of time saving state), and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

FIG. 242(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c described above. In the second random number table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”, The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds→3 seconds”, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further increased. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but the opening time The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 240, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 274) when the power is turned off, and each value written in the RAM 203 is restored by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 273). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Is input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 241(b), the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passing place big hit type value 203m, V flag 203n, and other memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 240, the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5, which are acquired based on winning the first winning opening 64, are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3, C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding areas). Among the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. When data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored respectively, and other Since the configuration is the same, detailed description is omitted.

Normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (holding first area to reserve fourth area) ) And have. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either of the left and right normal starting ports 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing is performed to pack the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball (starting prize) into the first winning opening 64 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 holding ball number command (S211 of FIG. 263, of FIG. 266). See S305). The special symbol 1 holding sphere number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is changed, by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the fluctuation held by the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in that it is different in that the number of held spheres held is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 holding sphere numbers (waiting times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere at the normal starting opening 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. .. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the sphere passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c.

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. A counter value corresponding to the number of times saved is set in the hour saving counter 203g, and by subtracting one at a timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, time saving is completed until the number of times the special symbol set in the time saving game state ends. The gaming state is set.

The big hit start flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is a big hit game start timing. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit stops, the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON (see FIG. 263: S219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on and it is the start timing of the jackpot, it is set to off. Note that the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to retain the state immediately before the power shutdown when the power shutdown or the like occurs.

The big hit medium flag 203i is a flag indicating that the big hit game is being performed. The determination result is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol which is a big hit is stopped (FIG. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type is finished), it is set to be turned off. The big hit flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear. When an electric power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. Is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203j is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. The small hit start flag 203j is determined to be on, and is set to off when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game. This small hitting start flag 203j is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when an electric power interruption or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the electric power interruption or the like. Is configured to be.

The small hitting flag 203k is a flag indicating that the small hitting game is being performed. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit is finished), it is set to be turned off. This small hitting flag 203k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when an electric power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the electric power failure or the like. Is configured to be.

A memory for storing the jackpot type value 203m for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball wins the V winning opening 624 within the V valid period when the small hit game is being executed. Area. The data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in the V-passing jackpot type value 203m when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot is stopped. When a ball wins the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the V flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type value 203m is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the big hit type value 203m during V passage is configured to be cleared. The V-jacket type jackpot value 203m is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear. When an electric power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203n is set to a flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the jackpot game being executed when a ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period in the jackpot game. It By determining whether or not this V flag 203n is on at the end of the small hit game, it is identified that there is a winning in the V winning opening 624 during the V effective period, and the flag that is set to on The jackpot type to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. The V flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when an electric power failure or the like occurs, the V flag 203n is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the electric power failure or the like. Is configured.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

The scenario counter 203aa is a counter for advancing various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) defining the operation control contents of the big hit game or the small hit game, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is started. Is set to "1" as a counter value, and thereafter, the jackpot control process (see S1004 of FIG. 275) or the small hit control process (see FIG. 275) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 274). The value is incremented by "1" every time (see S1005 of 278) is executed. Then, when the various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) are added up to a value at which the scenario ends, “0” is reset as the counter value.

The specific control completed flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 of FIG. 276) executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has ended.

This specific control completion flag 203ab is set to ON when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) is finished (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the flag setting status is the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). ) (See S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific control completed flag 203ab is set to ON (S1118: Yes), when the big hit B is set as the big hit type, the first round in which a special round game is executed is It is determined that the game is finished, and the normal round game (round game for opening the specific winning opening 65a) for the second and subsequent rounds is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

Returning to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 251(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns not shown. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251(b). As shown in FIG. 251(b), in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, the variation start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a SW effective time counter 223g, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter for counting the maximum number of times the number of balls to be held (the number of times of waiting) of the variable effect that is held in the main control device 110 is maximal. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b holds the holding ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere for the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c stores the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b on the basis of the holding sphere number command output from the main control unit 110 to the number of holding spheres corresponding to the second special symbol. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW valid time counter 223g is a storage area in which a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 282) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Direction) and notice production are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in A1th Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240, 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids the access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data while setting the data in one bank while using the other bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 word (1 word=2 bytes) instructions) is stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S3002 of FIG. 286) executed after the boot process (see S3001 of FIG. 286) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 261) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, the area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result in the main controller 110 by the fluctuation effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

The power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. It is displayed on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control apparatus 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control apparatus 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control apparatus 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to alternately display the images on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball into the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is disengaged, the stop symbol indicating disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is jackpot The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the through gate 67. Therefore, the chances of drawing the normal symbol will increase, and the chances of winning the normal symbol also increase. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be opened as a jackpot for the normal symbols, the balls easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the special symbols are easily drawn. Therefore, the longer the shorter time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, which can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which 5 balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of one of the special symbols that are being held will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player is a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol that is being held. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is a main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, what range of the backside type and the backside image corresponding to the backside type is specified. The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

“Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 259) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 260). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing in the transfer data table.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 260).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 260, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is used after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3305 in FIG. 288(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288(b)), and If the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S3308 of FIG. 288(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 288(b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 288(b) S3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(b)) that transfers the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, in which the contents of the image drawing instructions are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 261) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 261) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes the drawing process of the image for one frame (Fig. 288 (b )), the pointer update processing (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 261), and at the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to start the transfer is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 261, a rear image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy that information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 288 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 of FIG. 288(b)). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has been developed in advance from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 288(b)) is executed (see S8202 of FIG. 172).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in A1st Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 262 to 279. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 999, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 263 to 267.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 268. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the through gate passage process that accompanies the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

After the through gate passage process is executed, the V entrance passage process is executed (S108), and then the V passage process (S109) is executed. Here, details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

After executing the V passage process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the third symbol. It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special. During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), that is, if there is no reserved sphere for newly starting the special symbol fluctuation, the book as it is The process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and by the processing of S210. Set (S211) a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the processing of S213 is executed, and this processing is ended.

Further, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set. Depending on the big hit A to big hit D is decided, when the lottery result of the special design is a small hit, one of small hits A to E is decided according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.

In the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is configured to notify the player of the lottery result of this special symbol (decision result of each type of counter). If the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is out. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

And the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and when the big hit A is determined, a blue LED in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a mode showing the big hit A (for example, the alphabet "a"). When the jackpot B is determined and the jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B is turned on in a manner (for example, the letter "b" is simulated), and when the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot is determined. When the jackpot D is determined by lighting in a mode showing C (for example, a model imitating the alphabet "c"), it is lit in a mode showing the jackpot D (for example, a model imitating the alphabet "d"). Let

In addition, even when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, the red LED is lit in a manner corresponding to each small hit type (small hit A to small hit E) as in the case of winning the above-mentioned big hit. Let It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode showing the contents of each hit type (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b are configured to be lit in a manner of being formed from a lighting manner corresponding to each winning type, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or The same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b even when the determined winning types are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of this special symbol and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode that is divided to a degree that the player can distinguish that the special symbol lottery results are different. ..

After the processing of S215 is completed, the lottery result (the lottery result of this time) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is a jackpot of the special symbol ( S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the V winning award is made based on the jackpot type so that the ball can be won to the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 624). An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and thereafter, the setting of the jackpot start (setting of jackpots such as 15 rounds) is executed corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this jackpot (S218). ).

After finishing the process of S218, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit medium flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the stop command is set (S225). ), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S221), which is a small hit. If it is determined (S221: Yes), the small hit start setting process (S222) is executed, and then the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. The details of the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

In the processing of S221, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (missing) (S221: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S223). .. When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S223: No), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S223: Yes), that is, if the current time saving state is in progress, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and S225 is executed. The process is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" ( It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuating effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, as well as determining whether or not it is true or false.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area (special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a, special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b) , The first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the special symbol lottery result based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is obtained. (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

Specifically, if the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)) The four random number values set in the above are compared one by one. As described above, four random numbers of “0 to 3” are set as the random number value of the big jackpot of the first special symbol, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 and the random number of these jackpots. When the numerical values match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Similarly, when the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value “4” which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242(b)) match, It is determined that it is a small hit of a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, a random number value determined to be off in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and a big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined as a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit depending on the type of special symbol can be made different, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher small hit probability. Can be played as a game.

In the present embodiment, the first random number table 202a is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won in the small hit, but only one of the special symbols is hit in the small hit. The first random number table 202a may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set to a random number value which is a small hit of the special symbol, and only the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is special. It is good to set so that a random number value that is a small hit of the design is set. With such a configuration, the privilege (small hit game) that can be given to the player can be changed according to the type of the special symbol, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined range (0-3) of the value of the first random number counter C1 is associated with the jackpot of the special symbol, and the range (4 to 999) other than that corresponds to the type of the special symbol. Although it corresponds to the small hit of the special symbol, as a configuration other than that, for example, a value of a part (for example, 0 to 2) of the big hit in the first special symbol, a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a winning range.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a are used to perform a lottery for special symbols (big hit, small hit, out), but that As a configuration other than, it may be configured to perform a lottery for special symbols by using a plurality of hit random number tables, for example, whether or not the lottery result of special symbols is a big hit using the first random number table. When the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, the second random number table is used to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. You may. By performing a lottery for special symbols by using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of special symbols can be set more randomly, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of operating the lottery result of special symbols. ..

In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the special symbol is drawn, but other configurations may be used, for example, the values of a plurality of random number counters and the first hit number. You may draw a special symbol by using the random number table 202a. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a win.

Returning to FIG. 264, the description will be continued. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S232 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S233). When it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery this time (S234), The display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S235), the big hit change pattern is determined based on the value of the change type counter (S236), and the change pattern corresponding to the big hit change pattern decided this time. A command is set (S243), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S237), and it is a small hit. When it is determined (S237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery this time (S238), and the special symbol and the small hit type. The display mode at the time of small hit corresponding to and is set, the small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time is set (S243), This process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S237: No), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of prize, it corresponds to the special symbol type The display mode at the time is set (S241), the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of deviation determined this time is set (S243), This process ends.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol is determined. If the lottery result is wrong, the variation pattern is different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the more easily the variation pattern having the shorter variation time is determined. This makes it possible to shorten the period until the lottery result of special symbols is displayed without giving a privilege to the player (off) as the number of reserved balls increases, so it is executed per unit time In order to increase the number of lots of special symbols to be played, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play a game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen one time of the special symbol fluctuation time, so that it is possible to prevent the special symbol from changing during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, but other than that, for example, the special symbol is The fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed may be shortened on condition that the number of reserved balls has become equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3) during the fluctuation. .. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is made different based on the number of reserved balls only if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved ball The variation pattern may be different based on the number, or the variation pattern having a longer variation time may be more easily determined as the number of reserved balls is larger. Further, for the number of reserved balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern, a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in which the special symbol variation start process is preferentially executed may be used, or the special side subject to the special symbol variation start process executed this time Only the value of the number of reserved balls in the design may be used.

Next, the small hitting start setting process (S222) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). In this small hitting start setting process, a solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and a ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 is V A first retention member 622d (see FIG. 231), a movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), a second retention member 622b (see FIG. 231), and a rotation distribution member provided in the flow path that flows down toward the winning opening 624. A process of setting a scenario for driving a solenoid for operating each of 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed.

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, a scenario (hit scenario a) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario table 202ab (see FIG. 248(b)) (S241). .. Next, a small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined in the V passing big hit type value is set (S242), a small hit start corresponding to the small hit type is set (S243), and the small hit start flag 203j is set. Then, the small hit medium flag 203k is set to ON (S244), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in the present embodiment. The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is performed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 266, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three times of the timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S302). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S303).

Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S303: No), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S305).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S305, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S306). In the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S307 to S312, the same processing as the processing from S301 to S306 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S307: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). Then, this process is completed.

Next, the prefetch process (S313) will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S313). When the prefetching process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (S321). When there is no new winning (S321: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322).

In the processing of S322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table. The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

On the other hand, in the process of S322, when the winning is determined to be the winning of the second special symbol (S322: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a prize information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the process of S323 or S324 described above is set ( S325). Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), such as the variable display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like. This is a process for controlling.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S401). The normal symbol (second symbol) is in the middle of being displayed on the second symbol display device 83 to indicate the collision, and in the middle of being controlled to open/close the electric accessory 640a. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S401: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S404: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S404: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S407).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S409). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S409: Yes), the process proceeds to S411.

In the process of S409, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S409: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S407. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S410). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 8B).

In the process of S408, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (S408: No), the process proceeds to S411. In the process of S411, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S407 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S411). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 8B).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S410 or S411, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S412), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S412: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S413). In the processing of S413, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S414), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S414: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S415). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S415: Yes), the process proceeds to S417.

In the process of S415, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S415: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a The opening period is set to 1 second, the opening count is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the process of S414, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (S414: No), the process proceeds to S417. In the processing of S417, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, The number of releases is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S412, if it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S412: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S419), and if the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S419: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (S419: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the ordinary symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a becomes extremely long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S422). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S422, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S422: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S422, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S422: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S413, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S423, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S413 or the processing of S418, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S424). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S424: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S425), and the present process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S425, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S416 or the processing of S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. This through-gate passage process determines whether or not a ball has passed through this normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67, and if there is a ball, acquires and holds the value indicated by the second random number counter C4. This is processing for.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S433).

Whether the ball is not passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431: No), or even if the ball is passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S433: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f The value (M) of is incremented by 1 (S434). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S435), and this processing ends.

Incidentally, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty holding area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is referred to, and the value is If 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the V entrance passage processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

In the V-entry passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501), and if not (S501: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501: Yes), then, during the V winning opening opening period, that is, the first round of the jackpot game in which jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. It is determined whether the round game or the small hit game is being performed based on whether the set scenario is the hit scenario a202aa2 (S502). In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (S502: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S503), and this processing is ended. If the small hit is not in progress (S502: No), it is the case where the game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not the small hit game. Therefore, an error command is set (S504), and this processing is executed. finish.

The V-entry passing command set in the process of S503 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hitting game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the V passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S109) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262).

When the V passage processing (S109) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is V passage, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the V winning opening 624 (S601), and if it is determined that a winning has occurred (S601: Yes). ), and then it is determined whether or not the present is in the V valid period (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203aa that counts the progress of the scenario (hit scenario b222aa3) set in the small hit game or the big hit type B is "1" to "501", It is determined that the V valid period is in progress, and in other cases, it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress.

In the processing of S602, when it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (S602: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the small hit game is in progress (S603), and if the small hit game is in progress (S603). : Yes), the V passing big hit type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game of this time is obtained (S604), the V flag corresponding to the big hit type is set to ON (S605), and the time saving medium counter is set to 0. Is set (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

That is, in the processing of S604 to S606, the processing for executing the big hit game is executed based on that the game ball wins the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the process of S603, when it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (the big hit game corresponding to the big hit type B) is determined (S603: No), it is necessary to newly perform the big hit game. Therefore, the processing of S604 to S606 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S607.

In the processing of S607, the V passage command is set (S607), and this processing ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 like other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during the small hitting game, the V challenge executed during the small hitting game is successful, and following the small hitting game. , Performs an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. In addition, when the V pass command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V pass command is received during the small hit game is executed.

On the other hand, when the V passage command is not received at the predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V challenge has failed, and the V passage command is received at the predetermined timing during the big hit game. If not, the rehabilitation effect from the disappointing effect is executed, and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the structure which sets only the command (V passage command) for showing that the game ball has won in the V winning opening 624 is shown, the game ball does not win in the V winning opening 624. It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passage command) to indicate that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, since the only game balls that can enter the V winning opening 624 are the game balls (for example, one) retained by the second retaining member 622b, the second retaining member 622b. By means of a number measuring means for measuring the number of game balls retained by the game balls passing through the left discharge path 623a and the right discharge path 623b (see FIG. 229) through which the game balls flowed down from the rotation distribution member 621 can flow down. It may be configured to provide a detection means for detecting and to set the above-mentioned V non-passing command when the number of game balls measured by the number measurement means is detected by the detection means. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect and enhance the effect. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is blocked in the V winning device 620.

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, when it is determined that the current time is not in the V valid period (S602: No), an error command is set (S607), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of S607, the state where the game ball has won the V winning opening 624 outside the V effective period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the V winning opening 624 is performed, or the V winning A case where a member attached to the mouth 624 (for example, the second retention member 622b) has a defect can be quickly notified to the outside.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) is selected. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the previous power-off was not normally completed, in this case as well, in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device), the payout initialization is performed. The command is transmitted (S912).

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so that the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device), should be initialized. A payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process is executed. In addition, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner even when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power-off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S907: Yes), the RAM 203 is backed up. With the data held, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and execution of various productions is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S911). Then, the interrupt is permitted and the process shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout controller 111 Send the prize ball command. Further, various commands set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263), start winning process (see FIG. 266), V entrance passage process (see FIG. 270) and V passage process (see FIG. 271) are performed by the voice lamp control device. Send to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command set in the big hit control process (see FIG. 275) and the various commands set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278) described later are transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113. .. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

Next, a small hit control process (S1005) is executed. This small hit control process (S1005) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 278. After that, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S425 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S416 or the processing of S417 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S236 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the process of S240 or the process of S242, the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the process of S240 or the process of S242 ends, the 1 The symbol display device 37a, 37b ends the variable display being executed, the display pattern set by the process of S235, S239, S241 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the stop symbol (the first symbol) ) Is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 or the process of S421 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), variation display is started on the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S413 or the process of S418 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 268), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1014). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1009 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer has a predetermined value ( By setting it to the (initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 274), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the variable winning device 65. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) or the process of S1406 of the small hit ending control process (see FIG. 279) described later is executed to determine whether the big hit scenario is set. To do. That is, the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on that the specific area (V winning opening 624) is passed during the small hit game. Determine whether it has been set. In the processing of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF, and then the set scenario is jackpot B. It is determined whether or not (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario of the jackpot B is set (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific controlled flag 203ab is on (S1117).

When it is determined in the process of S1117 that the specific control completed flag 203ab is off (S1117: No), the process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed, and the jackpot control process is ended. The process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG. 276.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that a jackpot scenario other than the jackpot B is set (S1102: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1117 that the specific control completion flag 233ab is on (S1117: Yes) adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1103), and determines whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), since the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 1 To determine.

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the start of opening (the counter value is 1 for the big hit scenario a) (S1104: Yes), the big hit opening command is issued. The setting is made (S1105), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1104: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the round (in the case of the jackpot scenario a. , And the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

In the processing of S1106, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in the processing of S1107 (specific winning a prize). The specific winning opening solenoid is turned on so that the opening/closing door 65b of the opening 65a is opened), and then the round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1108), and this processing is ended.

The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of balls (29 seconds have elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a or after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a ( If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1109: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to the counter value corresponding to the round end of the currently executed round. Is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 (S1110), and this processing ends. When it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of S1109, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next big hit control process. ..

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa and execute the operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the specific winning opening 65a, that is, closing the specific winning opening 65a due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). In such a case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next big hit control process. Is configured as).

By doing this, the action control that is executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the action control that closes the specific winning opening when a predetermined number of balls wins) becomes a big hit scenario. It becomes possible to carry out based on. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, operation control is performed based on a jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and when a predetermined number of winnings are received, the operation is not based on the jackpot scenario. There is no need to perform complicated control such as execution of operation control, and there is an effect that design can be facilitated and a situation where both operation controls are mixed can be prevented.

In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1109: No), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (in the case of the jackpot scenario a). For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750) (S1111).

In the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S1112 (specific winning. The specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing door 65b of the opening 65a is closed), and this processing is ended. In addition, the determination process of S1106 to S1111 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big hit set in the big hit scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the start of the interval (big hit). In scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). In the processing of S1113, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: Yes), the interval command is set (S1114), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1113, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: No), then the jackpot ending control processing (S1115) is executed. This big hit ending control processing is the ending period in the big hit game, that is, the processing executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the big hit game until the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. ..

The contents of this jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277. When the big hit ending control process (S1115) is finished, next, an operation process based on another scenario is executed (S1116), and this process is finished. Here, as the processing of S1116, for example, when the V distribution motor 620a for driving the rotation distribution member 621 is drive-controlled based on the jackpot scenario, the operation processing of the motor is executed.

Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the specific jackpot control process (S1118). The specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when the jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is the hit scenario a (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is set (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1203).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204). In the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204: No), the process directly returns to the big hit control process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1205), and the second retention member 622b is retained. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (retained ball) in play (S1206).

When it is determined in the process of S1206 that there is a retained sphere in the first retaining member 622d, the hit scenario b is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first retaining member 622d does not have a retaining ball, the hit scenario c is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. Accordingly, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, it is possible to change the type of hit scenario set thereafter, depending on whether or not there is a stay ball in the second stay member 622b.

In the process of S1209, an operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1210).

In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1210: Yes), the big hit scenario b is set (S1211), and the specific control completed flag 233ab is set to ON ( (S1212), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1210, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1210: No), the processing of S1211 and S1212 is skipped, and this processing is ended.

In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is not set (S1201: No), it is then determined whether or not the hit scenario b or c is set (S1213). In the process of S1213, when it is determined that the hit scenario b or c is set (S1213: Yes), the process proceeds to S1209. Accordingly, when the hit scenario a is set, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is executed, and when the hit scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing of S1209 is executed. You can then do the following:

On the other hand, in the processing of S1213, when it is determined that neither of the hit scenarios b and c has been set (S1213: No), this processing ends as it is.

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 277. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending control process (S1115). The big hit ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 275).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (the jackpot scenario a has a counter value of 40751) (S1301). In the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the ending start (S1301: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and the present processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the ending start (S1301: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the ending end (in the case of the jackpot scenario a. , And the counter value is 42000) (S1303). In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the ending ending (S1303: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the ending ending (S1303: Yes), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1305). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

Next, the big hitting flag 203i is set to off (S1306), and the specific control completed flag 203ab is set to off (S1307). Then, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), the jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this processing is ended.

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 278. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing this small hit control processing (S1005). The small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and the command setting for causing the voice lamp control device 113 to execute various effects corresponding to the small hit and the V entry. This is a process of controlling the operations of the V prize solenoid for opening and closing the V prize door 600 attached to the mouth 600a and the flow path solenoid 209b. In the present embodiment, the scenario set during the small hit game is the same as the specific big hit control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the hit scenario a is set (S1401). In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the hit scenario a is set (S1401: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. It executes (S1403).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404). In the process of S1404, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404: No), the present process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1405), and the second retention member 622b is retained. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (retained ball) in play (S1406).

In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the second retaining member 622b has a retaining ball, the hit scenario b is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second retaining member 622b has no retaining sphere, the hit scenario c is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, it is possible to set an effect depending on whether or not there is a staying ball on the second staying member 622b.

In the process of S1409, the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1410).

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1410: Yes), the small hit ending control process is executed (S1411), and the present process is ended. The details of this small hitting ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 279.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1410: No), the process of S1411 is skipped and the present process is ended.

In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the hit scenario a is not set (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit scenario b or c is set (S1412). In the process of S1412, when it is determined that the hit scenario b or c is set (S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to S1409. Thereby, when the hit scenario a is set, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is executed, and when the hit scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing of S1409 is executed. You can then do the following:

On the other hand, in the processing of S1412, when it is determined that neither of the hit scenarios b and c has been set (S1412: No), this processing ends.

Next, the small hitting ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 279. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing this small hitting ending control processing (S1411). This small hitting ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 278).

In the small hit ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 751) (S1501). In the process of S1501, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1501: Yes), the small hit end command is set (S1502), and the process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the ending start (S1501: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the ending end (if the scenario counter 203aa , And the counter value is 1500) (S1503). In the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the ending ending (S1503: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the ending ending (S1503: Yes), the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to S1505.

In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505). In the process of S1505, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is not set to ON (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203n set in S705 of FIG. 30 is selected. It is set (S1506). Then, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit medium flag 203i are set to ON (S1507), the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S1508), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the small hit game is set as a game of one round, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, a process of setting a command regarding the number of rounds and an interval period (round). Although there is no scenario corresponding to the (interval interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-described big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is configured to be set for the period in which the small hit game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passage effective period until 1 second has elapsed after the small hit game is finished. Therefore, it is possible to set the period set over different game states by one scenario, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of control processing.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game, a big hit game corresponding to a big hit type preset corresponding to the small hit is executed. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 may be acquired based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the V winning opening 624 to determine the jackpot type.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in A1 Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2018 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing (see FIG. 281) ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), the power-off process in S2018 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S2018 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1402: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1514 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2018, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S2017 of FIG. 281). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2018 is executed, and therefore, the process of S1408 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2018 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and therefore, the process of S1404 to S1406 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1409 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404 when the processing of S1408 is reached through the processing of S1406 through S1406. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2001 this time has been executed (S2001), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2001: No), the process proceeds to S2013 without performing the processes of S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2002 to S2012, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S2014 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2002). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later is set (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2005 without any notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reservation ball counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285, but the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed is monitored, and the frame button 22 is operated. It is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to when the input of is confirmed. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2008), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2009, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S2009 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the various counter update processing of S2011, various counters used in the control processing of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are updated. In the production update processing in S2012, the production update processing is executed.

After the effect update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 282.

Next, the process proceeds to S2014. In the process of S2014, the variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off process is executed (S2018). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2019), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, a command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. .. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also performed.

In the command determination processing (FIG. 280, S2013), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed to analyze the main control device 110. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S2103). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2101: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2104). When the stop type command is received (S2104: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described below is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2107). Then, when the number of reserved balls is received (S2107: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball The numbers are stored in the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, respectively. When the process of S2108 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2107, when the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2107: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2109). When it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S2109: Yes), the prize information corresponding to the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a (S2110). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2109 that the winning information command has not been received (S2109: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command regarding a big hit, a small hit, etc. has been received (S2111). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S2111: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but a process based on each command output from the main control device 110 is executed in the big hit or the small hit. Then, this process is completed.

In the processing of S2111, when it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S2115), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the hit related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S2112). The hit related process (S2112) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related processing (S2112), first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, the jackpot start command for display is set (S2202). Although omitted, even in the voice lamp control device 113, when the jackpot start command is received, necessary processing is executed to start jackpots of various lamps, voices, and the like. Then, this process is completed.

When it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2203). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S2203: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the received command (S2204). Then, this process is completed.

When it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S2205). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: Yes), a jackpot end command for display that indicates the end timing of the jackpot is set (S2206). Then, this process is completed.

When it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2207). When it is determined that the small hitting start command has been received (S2207: Yes), the small hitting start command for display indicating that it is the start timing of the small hitting game is set (S2208). Then, this process is completed.

When it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2209). When it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S2209: Yes), the small hit end command for display indicating the end timing of the small hit game is set (S2210). Then, this process is completed.

When it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211). When it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S2211: Yes), the display V entrance passage command indicating that the first retention sensor is on is set (S2212). Then, this process is completed. The fact that the first retention sensor is on indicates that the game ball has entered the V entrance port 600a.

When it is determined that the V-entry passing command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the V-entry passing command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the V passage command is received (S2213: Yes), the game ball passes through the V winning opening 624 and V effect (effect of displaying characters such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81). A display V effect command indicating that it is a timing to execute is set (S2214). Then, this process is completed.

Next, referring to FIG. 284, the variable display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2014). This variable display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2221). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2221: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S2226 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2221: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2222), and then in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2223).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2224). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

In the process of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2225). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2225: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2225: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2226), and then in the process of S2006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process proceeds to S2229. In the process of S2229, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2229). .. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring/production process (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/production process (S2007) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player, the display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 285, S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time (SW effective time counter 223g>0) is set (S2301). .. Note that, as for this SW valid time, as shown in FIG. 235, the selected valid pattern is automatically the SW valid time at the timing corresponding to the case where the effect of the varying pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. Is set. When it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S2301: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is subtracted by the value corresponding to the elapsed time and updated (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303; Yes), the display chance command is set based on the set variation pattern and pressing timing. By this display chance command, re-fluctuation (see FIG. 235) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, or an effect of executing a temporary stop display of sway fluctuation again without re-fluctuation is executed. The SW valid time counter 223g is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S2301: No), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S2303 (S2303: No). ), the process of S2306 is executed. In the processing of S2306, other processing related to SW effect (background change, etc.) is executed.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Process Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed so that the display control device 114 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 However, even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S3103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S3001 in FIG. 286) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S3001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S3102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3101. It is also possible to execute the processing of S3103 to S3105 after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S3102 and S3102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 286. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process (S3002), after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is controlled so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Instruct execution of image drawing and display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S3003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S3005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video in the transfer setting process (see S3305 of FIG. 288(b)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer to the RAM 235 is executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 288) is performed so that the power-on main image and the power-on variation image, which are power-on images, are drawn. 288 (b) S3308) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 288 (B) S3309) are executed.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect is issued from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp controller. When it is through 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S3005, the interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 288(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288(b). FIG. 288(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 288(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296.

In the display setting process (S3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the details of this display setting process are the same as the display setting process of the first control example (see FIGS. 167 to 168), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the display setting processing (S3303) is executed, next, task processing is executed (S3304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S3303) or the simple display setting process (S3309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction for setting the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 170 and 171) of the first control example, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S3304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3305). 261 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Since the details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process of the first control example (see FIG. 172), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S3307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S3302), when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hits A to D, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach, complete disconnection). , The opportunity type) and the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S3309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, the details of the above-described command determination processing (S3302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 289, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3403).

Then, of the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3405), the process returns to S3401.

Details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S3405) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 290(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S3501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3506), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3505 is updated, while the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3406). If there is a display stop type command (S3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3407), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 290(b). FIG. 290(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to D, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, complete disconnection, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is determined (S3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in is finally set (S3602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is described. In the above-described task process (S3304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in case of such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S3602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S3408), and If there is an image change command (S3408: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3409), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S3409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 291(a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON ( S3701). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3702), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S3702. .. If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S3304), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S3702. From that, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the effects of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the process of S3408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3410), and the error command is detected. If (S3410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S3411), and the process returns to S3401.

Details of the error command process (S3411) will be described below with reference to FIG. 291(b). FIG. 291(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3802), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3801, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3802, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S3802. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the process of S3410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412), and there is a hit related command. If (S3412: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S3413), and the process returns to S3401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the details of the hit related command processing (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the hit related command processing.

In this hit related command process, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command in the hit related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command, (S3901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S3903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S3902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 293(a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing. This jackpot start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot start command processing, first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3921). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3922).

Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3921, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3923), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3925), the jackpot start command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this jackpot start command processing, in the display setting processing, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3921 is updated while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3924. From the drawing, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer is processed by the processing of S3922. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set jackpot start display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal use. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

When this jackpot start command process is executed, the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the jackpot start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data required for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the jackpot performance (big hit start effect, round effect, jackpot end effect) is caused due to its slow reading speed. It takes a long time for the image data used for the presentation to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when the jackpot start effect on the third symbol display device 81 ends, so the first round When the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command shown is received, the large number is required from the end of the jackpot start effect to the start of the round effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, the display jackpot end command for instructing the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are finished, so that the jackpot for display is displayed. When the image data necessary for the jackpot end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the end command is received, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the jackpot end effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display jackpot start command is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is started, and the variation display of the jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81. By the time, control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is completed. Thereby, when the big hit start effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 are finished, the jackpot end effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may be worried whether the operation is stopped or not. There is no sense of discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot end effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the big hit start effect is completed by the end of the variation effect that is a big hit. As a result, when the variation effect that is a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, the big hit start effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so whether or not the operation is stopped by the player. There is no anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the processing of S3901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the hit related commands (S3903), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S3903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S3904) will be described with reference to FIG. 293(b). FIG. 293(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S3931). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3932).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3931, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are turned off (S3935), the round number command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the processing of S3903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot end command among the hit related commands (S3905), and the display is performed. If there is a jackpot end command (S3905: Yes), a jackpot end command process is executed (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command process (S3906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 294(a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing. This jackpot end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot end command processing, first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the display jackpot end command is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S3941). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3942). The jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be discriminable. Specifically, the data table determination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 is turned on, and the data table determination flags corresponding to the other jackpot end display data tables are set to off. Accordingly, by referring to the data table determination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing such as the display setting processing corresponds to which jackpot end effect display mode. It can be easily determined.

Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3941, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3943), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3945), the jackpot end command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the processing of S3905, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit related commands (S3907), If there is a small hit start command for display (S3907: Yes), a small hit start command process is executed (S3908), and then the process proceeds to S3909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command process (S3908) will be described with reference to FIG. 294(b). FIG. 294(b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command processing. The small hitting start command process is a process corresponding to the small hitting start command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit start command processing, first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received small hit start command for display is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3951). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hitting start display data table set in S3951 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3952).

Then, based on the small hit start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S3954). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S3955), the small hit start command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this small hit start command processing, in the display setting processing, the small hit start display set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3951 is updated while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3954. From the data table, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is processed by the processing of S3952. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set small hit start display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

When this small hit start command process is executed, the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the small hit start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. .. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, the small reading performance is slow, so that the small hit effect (small hit start effect, round effect, small hit). It takes a lot of time until the image data used for the production of (end production) is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when the small hit start effect on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round Since the image data necessary for the round effect has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command indicating is displayed, until the round effect is started after the small hit start effect is finished. Therefore, there is a possibility that a lot of waiting time occurs, and the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and cause a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the display small hit end command for instructing the start of the small hit end effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are ended. After receiving the small hitting end command, the image data required for the small hitting end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 until the round effect ends and the small hit end effect starts. Therefore, there is a possibility that a lot of waiting time occurs, and the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and cause a sense of discomfort.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the small hit start command for display is received, the transfer of the data required for the round effect and the small hit end effect is started from there, and the variable display of the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled so that the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect is completed before the end of. As a result, when the small hit start effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are ended on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the small hitting end effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the big hit stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit end effect is started from there. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit start effect is controlled to be completed by the time the variable effect that is a big hit ends. As a result, when the variable effect that is a small hit on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, the small hit start effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation is not stopped by the player. There is no anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the processing of S3907, if it is determined that there is no display small hitting start command (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display small hitting end command among the hit related commands (S3909). If there is a small hitting end command for display (S3909: Yes), a small hitting end command process is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to S3911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S3910) will be described with reference to FIG. 295(a). FIG. 295(a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing. This small hit end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the small hit end command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit end command processing, first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small hit end effect indicated by the display small hit end command is determined, and the determined small hit end display data table is set as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3961). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3962). Then, of the data table determination flags provided for each small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small hit end effect, the data table determination corresponding to the small hit end display data table set by the process of S3961. The flag is turned on and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other small hit end display data table is set to off. In the display setting process, the small hitting end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to which small hitting end effect display mode by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703. You can easily determine if it is a thing.

Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3961, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3963), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. Yes (S3964). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are turned off (S3965), the small hit end command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3909, if it is determined that there is no display small hit end command (S3909: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command in the hit related commands (S3911). If there is a display V entrance passage command (S3911: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S3912) will be described with reference to FIG. 295(b). FIG. 295(b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command processing. The V-entry passage command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V-entry passage command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V entrance passage command processing, first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is set as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3971). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3972). Note that the display mode of the V entrance passage effect may be made distinguishable. Specifically, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the processing of S3971 is turned on, and other V The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table is set to OFF. As a result, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2703, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process such as the display setting process is displayed as which V entrance passage end effect. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it corresponds to the display mode of.

Next, based on the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3971, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3973), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3975), the V entrance passage command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 292. In the processing of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S3911: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the hit related commands (S3913), If there is a display V effect command (S3913: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S3914), and then the hit related command processing ends.

Here, details of the V effect command processing (S3914) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing. The V effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , And sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3981). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3982).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3981, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3983), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3985), the V effect command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. In the process of S3412, if it is determined that there is no hit related command (S3412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display chance command (S3414), and if there is a display chance command (S3414). : Yes), the chance command process is executed (S3415), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the chance command processing (S3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 291(c). FIG. 291(c) is a flowchart showing the chance command processing. This chance command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display chance command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the chance command processing, first, the chance display data table corresponding to the display mode of the chance shown by the display chance command is determined, and the determined chance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Display data table buffer 233d (S3851). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3852).

Next, based on the chance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3851, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3853), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3855), the chance command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. When it is determined in the process of S3414 that there is no chance command (S3414: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3416), and the process returns to S3401.

In the processing of S3401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area, and if there is a new unprocessed command (S3401: Yes). ), and the processes of S3402 to S3416 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3401 to S3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 290(b)) that are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed, and The command is deleted without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S3502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

<A2 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present second A2 embodiment is a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter, referred to as a right-handed region) as compared with the above-mentioned first A1 embodiment. The difference is that the configuration of is different. Specifically, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed region, and of the game balls flowing down the right-handed region, the game balls flowing down the first flow path B701a and flowing into the distribution device B700 are divided into two flow paths ( The second channel B701b and the third channel B701c are configured to be distributed.

Next, the distribution device B700 provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 of the present A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299.

FIG. 298 is an enlarged schematic view of the right-handed area of the game board 13. The sphere that has been launched into the right-handed region and has flowed down the first flow path B701a passes through the distribution device B700 and is distributed to the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c. The detailed configuration of the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 described later, but a sphere that has flowed down the first flow passage B701a has three parts in the second flow passage B701b and the third flow passage B701c: It is configured to be distributed at a ratio of 1. With this configuration, it is necessary to shoot a plurality of game balls in order to surely enter the game balls into the V ball entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. , It is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and improve the operation of the game. In addition, in at least 4 balls out of the balls that have flowed into the sorting apparatus B700, one ball can flow down the third flow path 701c, so that in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously launched. , It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the V entrance port 600a during the period when the V prize door 600 is open.

The second flow path B701b is configured such that the flowed-down sphere flows down to an area where the through gate 67 can pass, and the third flow path B701c allows the flowed-down sphere to enter the V ball inlet 600a. When the V winning door 600 is open, the sphere that has been formed so as to have the following shape passes through the V winning door 600 in the open state and is in the V incoming ball opening 600a. Flow into (enter). On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, the V winning door 600 is configured to flow down to a region that can pass through the through gate 67.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is opened, the sphere flowing out from the third flow path B701c is always configured to enter the V entrance 600a, but other than that. The configuration may be used, for example, a distribution member (nail, distribution device, or the like) for distributing the downward direction of the sphere is provided between the outlet of the third flow path B701c and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 is provided. It may be configured such that only a part of the spheres flowing out from the third flow path B701c enters the V-ball entrance 600a when is open.

With such a configuration, among the game balls that are regularly distributed by the distribution device B700 (ratio of 3:1), the game balls that flow into the V entrance 600a are irregularly generated. Therefore, in order to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a while the V prize door 600 is open, the game ball can be continuously fired more motivated.

Next, the structure of the distribution device B700 that distributes the inflowing spheres into the two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 299(a) to 299(d). FIGS. 299(a) and 299(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of the distribution device B700, and FIGS. 114(c) and 114(d) are spherical flow down and distribution of the first flow path B701a. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship with the apparatus B700 typically.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), the sorting device B700 is a rotating body configured to be rotatable about an axis, and is arranged in four directions (four directions at 90 degree intervals) of the rotating body. A blade member (first blade member B700a, second blade member B700b) that can contact the ball is provided. The first blade member B700a has a flat shape so that the sphere that has flowed down to the distribution device B700 flows down to the third flow path B701c (so as to flow down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the distribution device B700). In the second blade member B700b, the sphere that has flowed down to the distribution device 700 flows down to the second flow path B701b (to flow directly below the rotating body of the distribution device B700). It has a flat plate shape.

In the present embodiment, since the rotator having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used as the distribution device B700, the number of balls to be distributed to the second flow path B701b and the third flow rate. The number of balls distributed to the road B701c is 3:1. Further, a metal piece B700c is embedded on the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting apparatus B700, and it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating by a detection sensor (not shown). As a result, the action of illegally modifying the distribution device B700 and causing the spheres flowing into the flow path unit B720 to flow down to only one flow path (the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c) is executed. Can be easily discriminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 299(c) and 299(d), the positional relationship between the first flow path B701a and the distribution device B700 will be described. FIG. 299(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second blade member B700b is located in the flow path. When a sphere flows down the first flow path B701a in this state, the sphere comes into contact with the second blade member B700b and is distributed to the third flow path B701c. Then, the second blade member B700b that is in contact with the sphere rotates 90 degrees (rotates downward by 90 degrees) along the downward direction of the sphere (downward in FIG. 299(c)), and the first blade member B700a passes through the flow path. Will be located inside.

When two spheres pass through the sorting apparatus B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299(c), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299(d) (the state in which the first blade member B700a is located in the flow path). To do.

In this way, the sphere flowing down the distribution device B700 and the blade member provided on the rotating body are brought into contact with each other to change the flowing down direction of the sphere and to rotate the rotating body. The blade member that can rotate and rotate to contact with the ball can be changed every time when the ball passes, so that the ball can be reliably distributed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and the flow path (third flow path 701c) capable of entering the V entrance 600a and the V entrance 600a. Since the game balls are distributed to the flow path (second flow path 701b) incapable of entering (the second flow path 701b), during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, the V entry opening In order to reliably enter the game ball into the 600a, it is necessary to shoot a plurality of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot in a single shot, and improve the operation of the game. ..

In addition, in at least 4 balls out of the balls that have flowed into the sorting apparatus B700, one ball can flow down the third flow path 701c, so that in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously launched. , It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the V entrance port 600a during the period when the V prize door 600 is open.

As described above, in the A2 embodiment described above, the configuration having the sorting device B700 is used to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, but other configurations may be used, for example, a game ball. A delay means is provided in the right-handed region to make the flow-down period of the game ball irregular so that the period from when the game ball is shot to when it reaches the V entrance 600a is irregular, and the game ball is shot. It may be possible to use a configuration in which a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot is suppressed by not easily grasping the period from reaching the V entrance 600a, and a plurality of game balls are consecutive. As long as the game ball does not flow down to the V entrance 600a, retention means for retaining the game ball for a predetermined period is provided in the right hitting area, and when the game ball is retained in the retention means. The following game ball may collide with the staying game ball and flow into the flow path into which the V ball entrance 600a can enter.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is configured to distribute the balls to the third flow path 701 at a ratio of one to four balls, but the distribution device B700 is not limited to this, and may have another ratio. The distribution device B700 may be configured by a wind turbine or the like, and may be configured to be distributed at a random rate.

<A3 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 301, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present third A3 embodiment is a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter, referred to as a right hitting region) as compared with the above-mentioned first A1 embodiment. The difference is that the configuration of is different. Specifically, the difference is that a clune member 1700 for delaying the flow of the game balls is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed area, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, by providing the clune member 1700, the flow of the game ball is delayed by flowing down the inside of the clune member 1700 as a path of the game ball flowing down the right-handed area, and the flow down to the V winning door 600. And a normal route that flows down the outside (right side) of the clune member 1700 and flows down to the V winning door 600.

With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the delay route can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player has stopped firing the game ball.

Here, for example, if the player determines the small hit type and a small hit of the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player occurs, the player is prohibited from launching the game ball so that the game ball does not flow down to the V winning door 600. A game can be considered. In this case, the V-prize due to the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player, does not occur, and the damage to the game shop becomes large.

On the other hand, with the above-described configuration, even if the player stops firing the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flowing down is delayed by the clune member 1700 (delay path) is the V winning door 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the V prize is not generated due to the small hitting game which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 greatly changes depending on whether the game ball is flowing down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to surely enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a during the period when the V prize door 600 is open (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay route), It is necessary to shoot the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Here, details of the clune member 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 301. The clune member 1700 is configured in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion 1710a into which a game ball flowing down the right hitting area enters at the top. The ball-in portion 1710a is an opening that is slightly larger than the game ball 1 ball (diameter 12 mm in this embodiment).

Inside the clune member 1700, a spiral flow path 1710d is formed to spirally flow down the game sphere entering the entry ball portion 1710a along the inner wall of the clune member 1700, and at the end of the spiral flow path 1710d. Has a bottom portion 1710c that is gently inclined toward the center in a mortar shape. The spiral flow path 1710d is configured such that the game ball that has entered the ball entering portion 1710a flows down to the outer end of the bottom surface portion 1710c, and the game ball spirals down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 1710c. There is. The bottom surface portion 1710c has the same shape as the already-known bottom surface of the klune, and gradually guides the game ball to the center while circularly moving the game ball along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 1710c, a ball outlet 1710b slightly larger than the game ball 1 ball (diameter 12 mm in the present embodiment) is configured to project downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 1710b, a flow path is formed in a spiral shape by a protruding flow path wall of 0.5 mm, and the game ball rotates to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b while spirally rotating inside the ball outlet 1710b. It is configured to be discharged.

In the present embodiment, the spiral channel 1710d is formed inside the clune member 1710. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the spiral channel 1710d may not be provided, or the clune-shaped bottom surface. It is also possible to form only the spiral flow path 1710d without forming the above. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 1710d, it is possible to form a deceleration part made of a material having a high friction coefficient for decelerating the flow velocity of the game ball. Any option may be selected as long as it delays the flow of the game ball.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the clune member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710d and is guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c. The game ball guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c is gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710b while making a circular motion from the outer peripheral side to the center on the bottom surface portion 1710c. In addition, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710b is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the spiral flow path formed inside the ball outlet 1710b causes the game ball to spirally rotate inside the ball outlet 1710b. While being discharged, it is discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. With this configuration, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 takes about 6 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b.

Here, in the present embodiment, the time from when the small hit type is displayed to when the V winning door 600 is opened is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if the launch of a new game ball is refrained from after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball delayed and flowing down inside the clune member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal game in which the player refrains from launching a game ball after determining the type of small hit and does not generate a V prize due to a small hit game which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time per small hit is configured to be selected to be larger (or the same) as the variation time shorter than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clune member 1700 (delay path). There is. As a result, the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 before (or during the variable effect) of the small hit, the small hit variable effect ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. At a timing, it is easier to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entry port 600a to suppress an illegal game, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600a in a normal game. , The interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that a variable time shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clune member 1700 (delayed route) may be hard to be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time per small hit. Therefore, it is difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the V prize door 600 is opened and to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entrance 600a greatly changes depending on whether the game ball flowing down the right-handed region flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to shoot the game ball in consideration of the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

In addition, the variation time of the small hit is not limited to the one described above, and may be only the variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clune member 1700, or only the variation time long. Naturally good.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing the two routes of the delay route and the normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entrance 600a. Of course, three or more routes may be provided.

As described above, in the present A3 embodiment, by providing the clune member 1700 on the upper portion of the V prize door 600 (V entrance 600a), the game ball flowing down the right-handed area is the V entrance 600a. As a route for entering the ball, a delay route and a normal route with different downflow times are provided.

With this delay route, the game ball flowing down the delay route can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player has stopped the firing of the game ball. That is, even if the player stops the emission of the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flowing down is delayed by the clune member 1700 (delay path) enters the V ball entrance 600a. become. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which the player discriminates the small hit type and prevents the game ball from entering the V ball entrance 600a during the small hit game which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the shot game ball reaches the V winning door 600 largely changes depending on whether the game ball is flowing down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to surely enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a during the period when the V prize door 600 is open (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay route), It is necessary to shoot the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the clune member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time from when the small hit type is displayed until the V prize door 600 is opened. doing. Therefore, even if the launch of a new game ball is stopped after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball delayed and flowing down inside the clune member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal game in which the player stops firing the game ball after determining the type of small hit and does not generate a V prize due to the small hit game which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time per small hit is configured to be selected to be larger (or the same) as the variation time shorter than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clune member 1700 (delay path). There is. As a result, the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 before (or during the variable effect) of the small hit, the small hit variable effect ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. At a timing, it is easier to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entry port 600a to suppress an illegal game, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600a in a normal game. , The interest of the player can be improved.

<A4th Embodiment>
Next, an A4 embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. In the present A4 embodiment, in comparison with the A1 embodiment, a distribution device 720 for distributing game balls is arranged in the right flow path of the variable display unit 80 so that the balls flowing down the right flow path are alternately distributed. After the fluctuation of the special symbol determined to be a small hit or a big hit is stopped and displayed on one of the passages that are distributed, a gate to start the small hit or big hit game is placed and the ball is on the right flow path It is different in that the ball can enter the V winning device 620 at the start of the small hit or the big hit by continuing to shoot. Since other configurations are the same, the other configurations are omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. In the present A4 embodiment, the distribution device 720 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600. In the distribution device 720, a ball entrance 720c into which a ball flowing down the right flow path can enter is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass, and the ball that has passed the ball entrance 720c is When flowing down, the spheres that rotate left and right and flow down alternately are distributed to the left flow passage 720d and the right flow passage 720e. At the lower end of the right flow path 720e, a start gate 720a composed of a photo sensor capable of detecting passage of a sphere is arranged. When the ball passes through this start gate 720a, the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is set. In this way, in the second embodiment, even if the variation of the special symbol for which the small hit or the big hit is determined to stop, the ball does not move to the small hit game or the big hit game and the start gate 720a is a ball. The state of waiting for the execution of the small hit game or the large hit game until it passes.

The distribution turning member 720b receives the entered game ball in the left housing part or the right housing part arranged on the left and right. When the game ball is received in the left accommodating portion, the distribution rotation member 720b rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left channel 720d. Here, the distribution rotation member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees to the left and right, and a magnet is provided on a boundary wall between the left accommodation portion and the right accommodation portion.

On the base body provided on the back side of the distribution device 720, the magnet of the distribution rotation member 720b is arranged with the base-side magnet at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the distribution rotating member 720b and the base-side magnet are configured to have repulsive polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip. The base-side magnet is arranged and fixed so that its tip end faces the distribution turning member 720b side.

The magnet is also configured by a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotation member 720b so that the tip end portion faces the base-side magnet side. The distribution turning member 720b is turned, and at the position where the boundary wall between the left accommodation portion and the right accommodation portion comes directly above (on the center line of the space where about 1 ball can enter the game ball at the passage port), The side magnet and the magnet of the distribution rotating member come to the closest position (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), it is necessary to stop at a position where the boundary wall of the sorting/rotating member faces directly above because of the repulsive force. It will be maintained at the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet comes to a position where the magnet is on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the magnet and the base-side magnet repel each other, so that the distribution turning member 720b moves to the left or right. By rotating the crab, either the left accommodating portion or the right accommodating portion faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game balls entering the distribution device 720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion and causing ball clogging.

In addition, by repulsing the magnet and the base-side magnet, for example, the left accommodating portion receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and guides the game ball to the left flow path 720d, and then the distribution rotation. It is possible to prevent the member 720b from rotating to the right (the left accommodating portion faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game sphere to the left flow path 720d, the right accommodation part is in a state of facing upward, and the game sphere next entered into the sorting device 720 is received by the right accommodation part and the game sphere is received. By the weight of, the distribution turning member 720b rotates about 180 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the right flow path 720e. In this way, the distribution turning member 720b can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution device 720 to the left flow passage 720d and the right flow passage 720e. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute and guide the game balls to the left flow passage 720d and the right flow passage 720e.

The sphere which has been distributed to the right flow path 720e by the distribution rotation member 720b and then passed through the ball entrance 720c is moved to the left flow path 720d by the distribution rotation member 720b rotating leftward. It is distributed. When it is distributed to the left channel 720d, it is guided to a channel that can enter the V-ball entrance 600a. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, a small hit or a big hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to an open state, so that the ball distributed to the left flow path afterwards is to the V entrance 600a. It becomes possible to enter. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds 1 second after the start timing of the big hit game in the small hit or big hit B (the timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720a). Here, 100 balls are fired at the same interval per minute by the launching device, so one ball is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the balls are continuously fired to the right side area, after passing through the start gate 720a, the game balls are discharged from the left side flow path 720d after about 0.6 seconds (sorting device). The flow paths are formed so that the spheres of the left flow path 720d and the right flow path 720e of 720 flow down at the same time).

Since the flow-down time from the lower end of the left flow path 720d to the V entrance 600a is about 0.1 seconds, the ball will flow down before the V winning door 600 is opened. A ball discharged from the left flow passage 720d (1.2 seconds after being discharged from the left flow passage 720d first) can be won at the V entrance 600a because the V prize door 600 is open. Become. In addition, next, it is possible to win a ball discharged from the left flow path 720d into the V ball entrance 600a.

In this way, after passing the ball to the start gate 720a, stop the firing of the ball and confirm the small hit type on the first symbol display device 37, and the small hit game in which the short hit number is selected and the small hit type is selected. Even if the player tries to avoid winning the V winning opening 624 in the above, the number of balls that can be won is limited to two even if they are continuously fired. It is difficult.

In the present embodiment, the game sphere that has passed through the left channel 720d is configured to be able to enter the V ball inlet 600a, but the game sphere that has passed the right channel 720e can be configured to enter. Of the game balls flowing down the right flow path, the game balls that have not entered the sorting device 720 may be allowed to enter.

Further, although the distribution device 720 in the present embodiment is configured to alternately distribute the entered game balls, the distribution rotation member 720b may be configured by a windmill or the like and randomly distributed to the left and right. ..

<Regarding electrical configuration in A4 embodiment>
The present A4 embodiment is different from the A1 embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 307(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present A4 control differs from the A1 embodiment in that a condition device flag 203ac is added. The other configurations are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device flag ac is a flag indicating that the start gate 720a has been passed. This is a flag for determining whether or not the power has been passed through the start gate 720a by referring to the case where the power is restored when the power is cut off or the like. It is set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 304 to FIG. 306 and FIG. 308 to FIG. 309, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined as a small hit or a big hit B in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing the content controlled by the main control device 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small hitting game, and a timing chart of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is.

Whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed is executed and the small hit is determined, the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol) is started on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. To be done. At the start of fluctuation, the characters "roulette chance start" are displayed as shown in Fig. 304(a). Three seconds later, as shown in FIG. 304(b), the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the roulette display is started. In the roulette display, an arrow symbol is displayed on the left side, and by the roulette symbol stopped at the arrow position, the result of winning/deciding determination (big hit, out, small hit) and the "V" symbol indicating that the V winning opening 624 has been won Then, although the V winning opening 624 is not won, the "BIG" symbol indicating that the jackpot game is started, and the "skull" symbol indicating that it is out are arranged. After that, during the variation time of the special symbol, the roulette display is displayed at high speed rotation as shown in FIG. 305(a). Then, as shown in FIG. 305 (b), when the fluctuation period elapses and the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, the scroll of the roulette display (rotational display) is slow-displayed, and the right-handed notification symbol is displayed on the upper left side. It is displayed, and the player is informed that it is the period for right hitting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306(a), at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624, the position of the "V" symbol on the roulette display is stopped and displayed at the position corresponding to the arrow symbol. In addition, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the result of judgment of success or failure is out at the timing when the V effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at a position where the position matches the arrow design. Although illustration is omitted, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the result of the winning/judgment is a big hit (big hit B), the position of the “BIG” symbol stops at the position corresponding to the arrow symbol. The game that is displayed and actually executed is informed that it is a jackpot game.

With such a configuration, whether the result of the winning/judgment determination is a big hit or a small hit is configured by a series of effects until the period in which the ball can be entered into the V winning opening 624 has elapsed, and the period until the V winning is won. You can improve the enjoyment of the game by using.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 to 311, the pachinko machine 10 in the A4 embodiment will be described. In the A1 embodiment, after the variation period of the special symbol, if the hit determination result is a big hit, the big hit game was started 0.1 seconds later, but in the present embodiment, the start gate 720a is a game ball. The difference is that the jackpot game is started by passing. The description of the same configuration as the A1 embodiment will be omitted.

The special symbol variation process 2 (S140) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), the processes of S217 to S220 are deleted and the condition device determination process (S250) is added to the special symbol variation process (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment. The difference is that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The conditional device determination processing (S250) in the present A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the condition device determination processing (S250). In the condition device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate 720a (S251). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate 720a (S251: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The big hit start flag 203j, the big hit medium flag 203k, and the condition device flag 203ac are set to ON (S254). The hour/medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S255), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S251, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720a (S251: No), this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720a, the jackpot game can be started with the intention of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the start of the big hit game is configured to be started by passing the start gate 720a, but the small hit game may be configured to be started by passing the start gate 720a. .. With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the start gate 720a can be easily won in the V entry slot 600a, and a specific small hit game type can be avoided so that the game ball does not enter the game ball. It can be difficult to fire.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start gate 720a is provided in the left channel 720e, but the invention is not limited to this, and the start gate 720a may be disposed in the right channel 720d. When configured in this way, it is possible to enter the V entrance 600a from the passage of the starting gate 720a until the V winning door 600 is opened after the game ball passes through the starting gate 720a. The period may be set as follows. With such a configuration, in the small hit game, the game ball can be inserted into the V entrance 600a, and the game method of avoiding winning of the game ball in a specific small hit type can be suppressed.

<A5th Embodiment>
Next, the present A5 embodiment and its modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In the A1 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in the present embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when the jackpot B is hit. Differences in points.

In FIG. 312(a), the jackpot B in the present A5 embodiment is executed, the game ball enters the V ball inlet 600a, and the movable guide member 622 guides the game ball to the rotation distribution member 621. It is the figure which showed the case. The rotation distribution member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (position for guiding the game ball to the V winning opening 624) at the timing when the movable guiding member 622 starts to rise.

Further, FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the content of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the present A5 embodiment. The difference is that the processes of S1281 to S1282 are added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. The other processing is the same as that of the A1 embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

After the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed in the process of S1203, the process of S1281 is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (the solenoid that opens and closes the V winning door 600) (S1281). When it is determined that it is the timing when the V winning solenoid is turned off (S1281: Yes), data for stopping the V sorting motor for 3.7 seconds at the center position is set as the hit scenario a (S1282). Then, the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to S1204.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit B, the rotation distribution member is configured to stop at the center position in synchronization with the V winning timing, so that the game was thought to be a small hit game. It is possible to provide a person with a fresh production. Furthermore, since the V jackpot 624 can always be won with the jackpot B, winning the V jackpot 624 can make it appear as if the second round was started.

Next, a modified example of the A5 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312(b). In the A5th embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of the big hit B. However, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is not changed, and in the case of the big hit B, it is changed. The confirmation flow path 660 is newly projected and the movable guide member 622 releases the stay 2 solenoid at an intermediate position, and the game ball is dropped onto the movable guide member 622, and the confirmed flow path 660 is played to the V winning opening 624. The difference is that it is configured to guide a sphere. The finalized flow path 660 is configured to be projected by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 624 with high probability or 100%.

FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the content of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modified example of the present A5 embodiment. The difference is that the process of S1283 is added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. The other processing is the same as that of the A1 embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

In the process of S1207, when the hit scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guiding member 622 starts to rise, the definite flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds to project forward and fall from the movable guiding member 622. The game ball is moved to a position where it can be received on the upper surface (S1283). Then, the process of S1209 is executed. Although not shown, the movable guiding member 622 is also set so that the stay 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

As a result, in the case of the big hit B, it is possible to win the V winning opening 624 via a different guide path than in the case of the small hit. As a result, the winning control for the V winning opening can be switched between the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit B, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The phrase "at the start (at the time of execution) of the big hit (big hit game)" used when explaining each control example and each embodiment described above is won in the big hit lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit game is started. Is used as a concept to indicate the timing of confirmation, specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with a combination of symbols for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. It is a concept that includes the timing, the timing when the jackpot opening period starts, the timing when the jackpot round game starts, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (big hit game)" used when describing each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. Is a concept that includes the timing when the final round of jackpots ends, the timing when the ending period of jackpots ends, and the timing of the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends.

With respect to each wording used in such a concept, if a specific timing is not designated in each control example and each embodiment described above, it is configured to appropriately adopt any of the above timings. May be.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in each control example and each embodiment described above may be appropriately combined and implemented. For example, a fall lottery unit that executes the fall lottery used in the second control example described above may be provided. A small hitting lottery means for executing the small hitting lottery used in the third control example described above may be provided for the pachinko machine 10 included therein.

In addition, the falling lottery means used in the second control example described above is for carrying out a lottery for shifting (falling down) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the content set for the element of, for example, to shift (fall) the probability of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) from a high-probability state to a low-probability state. It may be configured to execute a lottery for, or a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation unit that can be operated by the player, but a configuration different from the frame button 22 may be provided as the operation unit. Lever-shaped operation means that allows the player to operate in the front-rear direction, touch-sensor-type operation means that detects when the player has touched (or approached), and shooting results of the shooting means that shoots the movement of the player. It is also possible to provide a camera-type operation means or the like for determining. Further, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each of the control examples described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided and a plurality of display means are provided. May be configured to execute the various effects described above, and in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more effects among the various effects described in the above-described control examples. The player may select an effect that is actually executed from two or more effects that can be executed.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be noted that the same elements as those in the above-described control examples and each embodiment will be repeatedly described for convenience of description. The gaming machine of the fifth control example is, similar to the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 226), a jackpot in a special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player has an advantage. The chance to win the jackpot game (the symbol jackpot game) is executed (the first trigger) and the small symbol is won by the special symbol lottery, and the game ball is in a specific area during the jackpot game (during the jackpot game) The opportunity to execute the jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on having passed through the V area (not shown) provided in the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 315) that is opened to the second (second opportunity) ) And two triggers.

With this configuration, the jackpot game can be provided to the player at various occasions, so that the game with improved game playability can be provided. Further, in the fifth control example, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be easier to win the small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, during the time saving state, which is a gaming state that can be set after the jackpot game is over, the lottery of special figure 2 is configured to be easily executed. As a result, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot game can be executed more easily than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of Toku-zu 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that it is possible to easily establish the second trigger described above. .. Therefore, the time saving state can be set to a game state advantageous to the player, and thus the player can be motivated to play the game aiming to set the time saving state.

In addition, the fifth control example is configured so that the period during which the lottery of Toku-zu 2 is easily executed can be temporarily displayed in the state where the normal state is set. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 315, when a specific hit (per long opening) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640a is long-term (1.5 seconds). It is configured to be opened, and a period during which a ball can easily enter the second entrance (prize entrance) 640, which is a trigger for executing the special figure 2 lottery, is set. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed even for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, so that the game can be executed without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as a continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 variation is executed five times during the time saving state, or the small hit game. End) and a second condition (for example, a special figure change (cumulative of special figure 1 fluctuation and special figure 2 fluctuation) during the time saving state) that is easier to continue (harder to finish) than the first condition. It is configured to be able to set "execution once or a small hit game end)". And, when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state, and when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state, the time saving The setting ratio of the condition continuation condition (end condition) is different. Specifically, after completion of the V jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state, after completion of the V jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state The continuation condition (end condition) in which the time saving state is easy to continue (difficult to end) is easily set.

With such a configuration, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special diagram) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed, The interest of the game can be improved. Further, in the fifth control example, as described above, a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, When is set, it is configured such that a time saving state that is easy to continue after the V jackpot game is finished is set easily. Therefore, whether the normal state is set or the time saving state is set, it is possible to cause the player to enthusiastically play the game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, a maximum of four winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be reserved and stored, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to notify the player of the look-ahead result of the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored by using the variable effect. That is, as the effect result of the variation effect executed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure variation, the special figure 2 lottery (after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state The result of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored at the time of the shift is notified. With this configuration, when the effect result of the fluctuating effect is an effect result indicating that a win (for example, a small hit) is won, whether the current small hit prize is won in the time saving state or the normal state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the player wins.

Further, as described above, in the fifth control example, the big hit game (V big hit game, which is executed via the small hit game, in the case where the small hit is won in the time saving state and the small hit is won in the normal state. ) Is set after the end of ), the ease of continuation of the time saving state is made different. Specifically, the special figure during the normal state is the special figure during the time saving state when the small hit is won in the lottery. It is configured so that continuation conditions (end conditions) that are easier to continue (difficult to end) can be set more easily than when a small win is won in the 2 lottery, and after transitioning to the normal state When the look-ahead result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the result of the determination that the small hit that the time-saving state is easy to continue is won, in the variation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time-saving state The pre-reading result (the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state) is notified.

With this configuration, when the notification that the small hit has been won is given by the variation effect executed during the time saving state, the winning small hit is the percentage that is the small hit that the time saving state is easy to continue. Can be increased. Here, in recent game machines (for example, pachinko machines 10), in order to improve the soundness of the game, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a probability variation state) is set after the jackpot game is over. There is one that suppresses the gambling property of the game by setting a low value (so-called continuation rate) (for example, 65% or less). In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a player wins a win (for example, a big hit or a small hit) in a state where an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set again after the hit game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make the hit notification effect have a sense of expectation during the advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, in the hit notification effect (fluctuation effect) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), the winning (small hit) during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) In addition to the notification of, the pre-reading result of special drawing 2 lottery executed after shifting from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantaged gaming state (normal state), if you win the small hit that is easy to continue in the time saving state It is also configured to notify when it is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning percentage of small hits in which the time saving state is likely to continue when the hit notification effect is executed during the advantageous game state (time saving state), and the player's expectation for the hit notification effect during the advantageous game state. You can increase the feeling.

Further, in the fifth control example, the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) or the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (the residual characteristic existing at the transition to the normal state). It is configured such that a variation effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special prize 2 variations (corresponding to the FIG. 2 hold) that won the small hit is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the fifth control example, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state), the variation effect is executed corresponding to the final variation period of the time saving state. Is configured to also notify the prefetch result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of shifting to the normal state) executed after, and after the end of the time saving state (after shifting to the normal state). The change time of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of shifting to the normal state) to be executed is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short time fluctuation ends. Up to the above, it is configured to display the effect result of the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation period in the time saving state. In this way, the final fluctuation of the time saving state and the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of shifting to the normal state) By executing a series of effects using the period in which is executed, and displaying the effect results of the series of effects across a plurality of fluctuations, this series of effects corresponds to which special figure fluctuation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the result of the special drawing lottery has been notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 315 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 315, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is different from the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 227) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described A1 embodiment in the variable display unit 80. Also in the game area formed on the left side (left side game area), a point where a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, which is a trigger for lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol), is provided, and formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. In the special drawing lottery, the V winning opening 600a, the V winning door 600, and the flow path through which the ball entering the V winning opening 600a flows down are provided in the game area (right-side game area) The difference is that the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 650, which are opened when a big win or a small win is won, are arranged on the downstream side of the right game area. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the configuration of the left side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described focusing on the points different from the above-described A1 embodiment. As described above, in the fifth control example, the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass is formed in the middle part of the left game area (on the left side of the variable display unit 80). Thereby, while the player is playing a game in which the ball flows down to the left game area (left-handed game), a lottery for normal symbols (general drawing) is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present control example, while the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, if you win per specific public figure, It is configured so that a game can be executed per ordinary figure in which a ball can be easily inserted into the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the special figure 2 lottery is used even if the game state is not changed to the time saving state by configuring the period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the normal state. The game property, that is, the game property of executing the big hit game based on the small hit prize can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player, who has been playing the game in the normal state for a long time, from getting tired of the game without experiencing the playability using the special drawing 2 lottery.

Also, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64, and the ball to the through gate 67. Since a game aiming for a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) can be executed at the same time based on the passage of, the interest of the game in the normal state can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, like the above-described A1 embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed (the second prize which is a trigger for the special figure 2 lottery). Because the ball easily wins in the mouth 640), a game (right-handed game) is aimed at the right side game area in which the second winning hole 640 is arranged.

In the fifth control example, in the right game area, the through gate 67, the second winning port 640 (electrical accessory 640a), the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650 are arranged, and a regular symbol (general drawing) is selected. The game to perform, the game to perform the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2), and the game during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) can be executed by the right-handed game There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the ball firing direction (left game area direction, right game area direction) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small hit game, and the big hit game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complicated change of the firing direction of the ball and to comfortably play the game. Further, in the fifth control example, when a gaming state (time saving state, small hitting gaming state, large hitting gaming state) that is advantageous to the player is set as compared to the case where the normal state is set as the gaming state In addition, since it is configured to perform the right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small hit game is executed, and can be changed between an open state in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 650a and a closed state in which winning is difficult. It has a winning door 650b. The V winning door 650b is configured such that a spherical flow path is formed on its upper surface when the V winning door 650b is in the closed state. While the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, it is fired by a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down on the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. Further, inside the V winning opening 650a, there is a specific area (V area) not shown, and a ball that has won the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game (including the ball handling period after the end of the small hitting game). When a certain area (V area) has passed, the big hit game is configured to be executed.

The configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known and general technique in the art, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. For example, the above-described A1 embodiment. As described above, a plurality of passages through which spheres can pass are provided in the V winning device 650, and only the spheres that have passed a specific passage can pass through the specific region (V region). A distribution member that distributes the flow direction of the ball flowing down in the V winning device 650, for example, a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or in advance after the jackpot game is started. Providing a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule, a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after a specific number of round games of jackpot games are started, and the distribution member The big hit game may be executed when the ball passes through the specific area (V area).

Further, a plurality of types of small hit games to be executed when a small hit is won are provided, and for example, a small hit game in which a ball easily passes a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. The small hit type to be executed and the small hit type in which the small hit game in which the ball is hard to pass through the specific area (V area) are executed may be settable. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is changed in accordance with the type of the small hit, and when the small hit game in which the ball hardly passes the specific area (V area) is executed, the V winning opening 650a The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b that makes it difficult for the ball to enter is set, or the sphere is distributed to a region other than the specific region (V region) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at a timing. In addition, as a small hit game executed based on the small hit prize, a small hit game for opening the variable winning device 65 instead of the V prize device 650 can be set, and the small hit game is executed. In this case, the ball may physically be configured so as not to pass through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a jackpot game, and has a variable winning door 65b that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can easily win a specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball. Have The winning door 65b is configured such that a ball passage is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball launched by the right-handed game. Is configured to flow down the upper surface of the prize door 65b toward the outlet 66.

<About the game property of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 316, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) as a game state and a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, It is configured such that either one of the high probability states of ordinary symbols is set.

Then, the left-handed game is performed during the normal state, and when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (big hit probability 1/250), the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state which is set when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state will be described. Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 335, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, one of the three jackpot types is set, and for each jackpot type Different time saving conditions are specified. The time saving end condition is a condition for ending the time saving state, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

If you win the special figure 1 jackpot in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 316, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 99 times. When the time saving end condition is satisfied when reaching, the jackpot type (big hit AA) is set at a rate of 1%, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) reaches 5, the time saving end condition is The jackpot type (jackpot AB) that is established is set at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot type (jackpot AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special map 2) reaches one It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if you win the special map 1 jackpot during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but depending on the set jackpot type, it is easy to continue the time saving state (time saving end Conditions) are different.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the fifth control example, since it is configured such that the winning information of the special figure 2 can be stored at a maximum of four pieces, the one hour saving time is set as the time saving ending condition. Even in the case, the time saving state is set while the first special map 2 fluctuation is being executed (until the first special map 2 fluctuation is stopped), and the electric accessory 640a is easily opened. Since it is in the state, it is possible to easily store the winning information of the special figure 2 on hold. Therefore, even when the time saving end condition of one time saving is set, during the period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation during the time saving state is executed once, the winning information (special figure 2 hold) of the special figure 2 is held and stored. By playing the game, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state up to four times. With such a configuration, when a large jackpot is won, a large number of special figure 2 lottery can be executed, so that the player can easily experience the jackpot game via the small jackpot winning.

On the other hand, in the normal state, if the special small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery (small hit probability 1/500), the ball is executed by passing the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. After the jackpot game is over, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the small hit type that the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 99 times ( The small hit AA) is set at a rate of 10%, and the small hit type (small hit AB) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) reaches 5 times is 40%. It is set at a rate of, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one, the small hit type (small hit AC) where the time saving end condition is satisfied is set at a ratio of 50%. Is configured.

As described above, in the fifth control example, by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, if the jackpot is won (if the symbol jackpot is won), and if the jackpot is won, Whether the big hit game is executed when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (when the V big hit occurs) or when the big hit game is executed, the big hit game ends Even if it is a jackpot game that is executed based on the special drawing 1 lottery, it is configured so that a time saving state is set later, and the ease of continuation of the time saving state is made different by the execution opportunity of the jackpot game. There is. As described above, in the case of the execution trigger of the jackpot game which is easy to be established (the jackpot winning by the special drawing 1 lottery), the average number of continuation of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is 2.58 times, In the case of an execution trigger that is difficult to be established (a small hit by the special drawing 1 lottery), the average number of times of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 12.4 times.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot game execution triggers, by associating the ease of establishment of the execution trigger with the ease of continuation of the advantageous game state (time saving state) that can be set after establishment, Even if the jackpot game is executed at the execution timing of, the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, a lottery for normal symbols (general drawing) is executed even while the left-handed game is being executed in the normal state. , With a probability of 1/10, it is configured so as to be won per ordinary figure. Then, it is configured to execute a per-universal game (long per-unlocking game) in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period (1.5 seconds) at a ratio of 1/100 of the case of winning per universal drawing. There is. In other words, the state where the special figure 2 lottery can be executed with a probability of about 1/1000 of the ordinary figure lottery executed while the normal state is set (game per long opening) is set.

When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the long open game, the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In the fifth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. And when you win the jackpot in special drawing 2 lottery, the number of times the first special symbol (special figure 1) changes and the number of times the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (jackets AD to AF) that satisfy the ending condition are set (see FIG. 335). That is, in the normal state, the special map lottery is difficult to be established among the special map 1 lottery and the special map 2 lottery with the same jackpot probability (it is difficult to make a ball win the corresponding starting winning opening). This is configured so that a time saving state in which the time saving ending condition is difficult to be satisfied is easily set after the jackpot game is over. With such a configuration, if the winning is won by the general drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can enthusiastically execute the special drawing 2 lottery. it can.

Next, the flow of the game in the case of winning the small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In this control example, the probability of winning the small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery (about 1/7.1) is higher than the probability of winning the small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery (1/500). It is configured (see FIG. 334). And, after the big hit game which is executed by the ball passing the specific territory (the V territory) during the small hitting game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) when the number of fluctuations reaches 99 times, the small hit type (the time saving end condition is satisfied ( The small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) reaches 5 times is 60%. It is configured to be set at a ratio of. In other words, in the normal state, the average number of continuation in the time saving state set via the small hit of special drawing 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and the jackpot game is executed via the small hit of special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state. The time saving state in which the time saving ending condition is difficult to be satisfied (is easy to continue) is more likely to be set.

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although there is a low probability, the winning is won by the general drawing lottery, and when the game is executed per long opening (1/1000), the jackpot is won by the special drawing lottery. Also, by making it easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, while allowing the player who is playing the normal state to play a game that aims for a big hit or a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, With the winning of the drawing lottery as a trigger, it is possible to perform a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 315, a position where a ball that is launched into the game area (a ball that flows down the left side game area) when a left-handed game is performed in order to win the ball in the first winning opening 64 can pass through. Since the through gate 67 is provided in the game, the game in which the special figure 1 lottery and the general figure lottery are performed for the player who is playing the normal state without changing the firing direction of the ball. And can be done in parallel.

In addition, in the present control example, the larger the jackpot game is executed when it is hard to be established, the easier it is for the player to set the time saving state, which is advantageous to the player. When the big hit game is executed, it may be configured such that a time saving state that is advantageous to the player may be set more easily, or a predetermined specific trigger (for example, a special winning lottery in the special drawing 1 lottery winning ), when the jackpot game is executed, it may be configured such that a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is easily set.

When the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small hit game (small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery) (In the case of non-V prize), the normal state is set after the small hit game is finished (corresponding to the flow shown by the dotted line in FIG. 315). As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive privilege from being given to a player who conducts an illegal game in which a ball is not intentionally inserted into a specific area (V area) while the small hit game is being executed. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be described. In this control example, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and the ball is easily put into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the right-handed game that mainly executes the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. It

This time saving state is configured to continue until a predetermined time saving ending condition is met, and transition to the normal state when the time saving ending condition is met. This time saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won in the special drawing lottery or the jackpot type set for the jackpot won. There is. Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, a common time saving end condition set as a common condition and a different condition set depending on the hit type The time saving end condition is stipulated, and as the common time saving end condition, the first end condition that is satisfied at the time of jackpot winning (at the start of the big hit game), the second end condition that is satisfied at the end of the small hit game, and the time saving The number of special symbols (special figure) variation executed during the state (the number of special figure 1 variations and the accumulation of the number of special figure 2 variations) reaches the third end condition that is satisfied when 99 times are set, Corresponding time saving end conditions include a short end condition that is satisfied when the special figure 2 fluctuation count is 1 during the time saving state, and a medium end that is satisfied when the special figure 2 fluctuation count is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the type.

As described above, the response time saving end condition is set based on the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 that are mainly changed during the time saving state. Therefore, for example, the corresponding time saving end condition exists when the time saving state is set. Even if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state based on the pending storage of the special figure 1 fluctuation which is present, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without the special figure 2 lottery being executed, even though the time saving state advantageous to the player is set. Further, since the corresponding time saving end condition is established based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time saving state can be easily specified, and the player It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive privilege (special drawing 2 lottery).

In the fifth control example, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition can be set with the above-described contents as the time saving end condition, but the setting contents of the present control example are not restrictive. For example, in the fifth control example, as the end condition for the small hit game defined as the common time saving end condition, the end condition is set when the number of times the small hit game is executed reaches a specific number (for example, 3 times). It may be configured to be satisfied, and the end condition for the small hit game is set as a corresponding time saving end condition, and the number of executions of the small hit game for which the end condition for the small hit game is satisfied is changed according to the hit type. It may be configured. Further, in the present control example, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game is executed, regardless of the small hit type set at the time of winning the small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second end condition may be satisfied when a small hit game according to a specific small hit type is executed. Further, in this control example, the second end condition is configured to be satisfied at the time when the small hit game is ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second end condition is set at the start of the small hit game (when the small hit is won). You may comprise so that it may be materialized.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small hit prize in the time saving state, so that there is a sense of tension as to how long the time saving state will continue. A game can be played.

Returning to FIG. 316, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be described. If you win the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the number of times the first special symbol (special figure 1) changes, and the number of times the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes, as in the normal state When the number reaches 99 times, any of the jackpot types (jackpot AD to AF) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied is set (see FIG. 335). That is, only the common time saving end condition is set as the time saving end condition.

On the other hand, in the case of winning the small hit by special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the jackpot game executed via the small hit winning, in addition to the common time saving end condition described above, according to the small hit type The time saving state is set when the corresponding time saving end condition is set. Specifically, during the time saving state, you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, and after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning, the special figure 2 change as a corresponding time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and 90% of the time is not set to correspond to the shortened response time end condition (substantially 99 times is set).

As described above, in the fifth control example, the setting ratio of the end condition (time saving end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery is the game state at the time of winning the small hit. It is different depending on the situation, and it is more difficult to achieve the time saving end condition if you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state than if you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state. The time saving condition is not set) The time saving state is easily set.

With such a configuration, for example, the special winning figure 2 lottery that is held and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state after the advantageous game state in which it is easy to execute the special drawing 2 lottery ends By doing so, it is easy for the player to set a time saving state that is advantageous, so that it is possible to enthusiastically play the game until a large amount of reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired until just before the time saving state ends.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present control example, by the variation effect (final variation effect) that is executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state (the variation in special figure 2 in which the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied), In addition to the variation lottery result, the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored is also notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery in which the effect result of the final variation effect is 5 times at the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to set a higher probability that the winning result (small win, large win) is notified as the effect result of the final variation effect than the variation effect in which only the lottery result of one special drawing 2 lottery is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect contents.

In addition, the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state and the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state are configured to be notified at a time of the lottery results (including the pre-reading result). When it is notified, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the special map 2 lottery that has been won is the special map 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special map 2 lottery in the normal state. With this configuration, as in this control example, when the time saving end conditions are set at different rates according to the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, the jackpot executed based on the present small hit winning It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what kind of time-saving condition with which the time-saving condition is set after the game is finished, by the effect mode (effect timing) of the variable effect.

In addition, in this control example, a short-time (0.5 second) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. As the fluctuating effect of the short-time fluctuation, the above-mentioned effect result of the final fluctuating effect is displayed. As a result, even if the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored in the reserve is also notified in the final fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state, the target of the pre-reading result It is possible to continuously display the final fluctuation effect until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 which becomes Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state) corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state ends (when the special figure 2 reserved memory number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery is selected. A left-handed game that aims for execution is performed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, even when the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long opening in the general drawing lottery). The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the special figure 1 lottery. As a result, in the normal state, it is possible to allow the player to perform a game in which the general drawing lottery is executed in parallel with the game in which the special prize 1 lottery is executed by aiming at the first winning opening 64, so that the interest of the game Can be improved.

<Regarding the flow of production in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 331, characteristic effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the special figure 1 variation is being executed, if the player wins per long opening in the general figure lottery, the general figure variation effect is displayed so as to interrupt the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation. Has been done.

Here, the universal figure fluctuation effect corresponds to the winning ball by allowing a ball to enter the second winning opening 640 after a game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period from the universal figure fluctuation start timing It is executed as a part of a series of effects using a period until the small hit is won by the change in the special figure 2 and the big hit game is executed based on the small hit.

Here, in recent years, per normal figure (per long opening) to open the electric accessory 640a for a long time (for example, 1.5 seconds) during a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). There is a method in which the lottery contents of the general drawing lottery are set so that the player can win, and a special advantageous drawing lottery (for example, special drawing 2 lottery) is temporarily executed in the normal state. In such a gaming machine, an advantageous special drawing lottery can be executed for a player who has been playing a game in a normal state for a long time, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the universal figure variation effect for showing the result of the universal figure variation is executed, and the result of the universal figure lottery is selected until the hit game per long opening is executed for the player. That can provide the enjoyment of predicting using a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (a display area smaller than the display area in which the variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation is executed) There is also.

However, in the recent gaming machines that only perform the universal figure variation effect capable of notifying the player that the winning game per long opening is performed, the variation effect of the special drawing 2 lottery obtained by the winning game and the above-mentioned variation effect, The special map 2 lottery was executed because the bonus given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening, is executed, which is not related to the general figure fluctuation effect. However, there is a problem in that it is not possible to notify the user in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is not possible to enhance the effect of the universal figure variation effect.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, from the start timing of the universal figure fluctuation, after a universal figure game (opening of the electric accessory 640a), a ball is won in the second winning port 640 and the winning ball is won. A small hit is won according to the variation in the corresponding special figure 2, and a series of effects is executed using a period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit. Thus, by executing a series of effects, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game until the jackpot game is executed in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery result of the universal drawing lottery, and enhance the effect of the effect. it can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-mentioned series of effects, when the ball is won in the second winning port 640 during the hit game of the universal figure long opening, that is, while the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time. In addition, there is a problem in that the timing at which the special figure 2 change based on the winning is started greatly differs depending on the change situation of the special figure 1 change. Specifically, for example, when the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the time of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 and the variation remaining time of the special figure 1 variation is 120 seconds, The period (waiting period) from the winning of the ball at the second winning opening 640 to the start of the change in Toku-zu 2 is 120 seconds. If the series production is continuously executed in such a situation, there is a problem that the production mode of the series production is delayed and the player gets tired of the production.

In order to solve such a problem, in the fifth control example, when the above-described waiting period is 60 seconds or more, after the pseudo-finishing of the series effect, the pseudo-execution of the series effect is performed again. The mode is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of the series production is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the flow of the variation effect relating to the special figure variation and the variation effect relating to the ordinary figure variation executed during the normal state will be described. FIG. 317(a) is a flow of the effect executed when the waiting period from the winning of the ball at the second winning opening 640 to the start of the change in Toku-zu 2 is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds). FIG. 317(b) is a timing chart showing a waiting period from when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the variation of Toku-zu 2 is started is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more). It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production performed in the case.

As shown in FIG. 317(a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the fluctuation corresponding to the universal figure long opening (long opening variation) is executed in the universal figure fluctuation. The change effect (special 1 effect) corresponding to the change in special figure 1 is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 319(a), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the variation in Toku-zu 1 will be described. FIG. 319(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) corresponding to a variation in special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 319(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically partitioned into a main display area Dm and a sub-display area Ds, and the main display area Dm is viewed from the upper right. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the special symbols (whether in the lottery (during fluctuation) and the lottery result) is displayed. As a result, a fourth symbol (special symbol 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery condition of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and a lottery condition of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). The fourth symbol (Special symbol 2 fourth symbol) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, it is possible to display the lottery status of special symbols. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (FIG. 319). (A) is indicated by a downward arrow), thereby showing a situation where the special symbol is changing, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 322(a)). ), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but not limited to this, for example, by using a display mode imitating a graphic as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, the graphic is displayed. It is shown that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and the display mode showing the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed to show the lottery result of the special symbol. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to show the lottery status of the special symbol (whether in the lottery (during change) and the lottery result), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 319(a), in the present control example, the main display is the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed. Although an example is shown in which it is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are set according to the effect mode of the variation effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It may be different.

Specifically, in the variation effect executed using the entire main display area Dm, it is possible to know whether the variation effect being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When the effect mode for making it difficult is set, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) may be changed so that it is difficult for the player to view. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol, or by displaying only one display area, the player sees the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured such that the type of the special symbol that is being executed cannot be easily determined only by itself. With this configuration, the type of the special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm is reduced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

As described above, although the special symbol (special symbol) is informed that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period during which the special symbol is changing, When the display is configured to be displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to determine the type, the result of the corresponding special figure change (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the end of the variable display. It is good to be configured as described above, for example, as a display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed, when a red stop display mode is displayed, the fourth symbol (special 1 fourth In the (pattern), when the blue stop display mode is displayed, it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special diagram 2.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the area in which the variation effect is executed from being limited by the fourth symbol display area, and to prevent the effect from decreasing. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and a variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. Should be configured to perform.

Further, a small display area Dm1a is formed near (on the left side of) the small display area Dm1, and the display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and the display mode indicating the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 319 (a) described later, in the number-of-holds display area (small display areas Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of holding balls of each special map is displayed using numbers. Although it is configured to be displayed, the display mode is not limited to this, and a display mode using a color or a symbol that can identify the number of reserved balls in the acquired figure may be displayed.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (in the upper left direction from the center of the main display area Dm). In this small display area Dm4, a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction of shooting the ball (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 320(b)).

In the fifth control example, the small display area Dm4 is used as the guidance display area. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize which region of the game board 13 the ball should be shot by only visually recognizing the guide display mode displayed in the guide display region Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guide display area (small display area Dm4), a display mode of "right hitting" for guiding the player to perform a right hitting game and a left hitting game for the player The display mode of "left hitting" for guiding that, and is configured to be displayed, the display mode of "right hitting" is a game state in which the right hitting game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, during the big hit game, and during the small hit game, and the display mode of "left hit" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right hit game is finished. ing. Also, when it is detected that the left-handed game is advantageous to the player in the gaming state, that is, when the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the "left-handed" is given for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display mode is configured to be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 319(a), the description will be continued. Although detailed description is omitted, the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a described above are results other than the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, in addition to the result of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in advance (prefetch result ) Is configured to display a display mode in which a suggestion can be notified to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while keeping expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbols that are stored on hold).

A small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area for displaying identification information for indicating the lottery status (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) of the ordinary symbol (general drawing), A fourth symbol (normal symbol fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the symbol (normal symbol) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is displayed. In the small display area Dm3a described above, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding normal symbol, the player can be informed of the result (pre-reading result) of previously determined stored winning information. It is configured to display various display modes. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while keeping expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the ordinary symbols stored on hold).

Furthermore, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 319(b), the sub display area Ds is configured to display a comment on the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub display area Ds may be configured to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable that the player can recognize the current number of holding balls of the special symbol by the number of holding display modes. Further, it is preferable that the winning information corresponding to each of the special symbols stored and stored in advance is discriminated in advance, and the corresponding suspension display mode is changed based on the discrimination result.

With such a configuration, among a plurality of holding symbols that can exist, a lot of special symbols corresponding to the holding symbols of which display mode is changed are drawn, and a game is performed while expecting to win the jackpot. It can be done. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the holding symbols corresponding to the individual holding storage number, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of holding symbols It is possible to set a result display that easily displays the pending symbol display that is changed to.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, a game result suggesting mode for suggesting a game result (a lottery result of each symbol) to the player and contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, an effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and a result of the operation, and a hit related information display mode for displaying information on a big hit game are displayed. The main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set to have different display area ratios depending on the contents displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the stopped and displayed third symbols is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a reserved ball, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is disengaged. After that, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved balls is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. Even though the player has been firing the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is no prize (ball) in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Rarely, in many cases the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. Due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new winning is executed. To be done.

Note that, in FIG. 319(a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown as being displayed in the main display area Dm, but the game method (direction) to the player is shown. When the display mode for guidance is not displayed, the small display area Dm4 itself is not displayed. In this way, in a state where it is not necessary to guide the game method (direction), the display area in which the guidance display area is displayed is deleted, so that an area for displaying another display mode (for example, a variation effect display mode) is displayed. Since it can be widened, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 317(a), the description will be continued. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the universal figure long open variation is executed while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Ordinary symbol variation effect for indicating the ordinary symbol (general symbol) variation is executed by using (see point A in FIG. 317(a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point A in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319(b).

After that, when the variation time of the universal figure long open variation exceeds a predetermined time, the special figure variation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display area of the universal figure variation effect are displayed. The process of changing the size is executed, the general figure variation effect is executed using the entire main display area Dm, and the special figure variation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (FIG. 317(a)). See Point B). Note that the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point B in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(a).

In this control example, 10 seconds after the start of the general figure fluctuation effect is set as the timing for switching the size of the display area between the special figure fluctuation effect and the general figure fluctuation effect. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the variation time of 10 seconds is set in a part of the case where the result of the universal drawing lottery is out of order. Even when the deviation variation is set, the general figure variation effect (see FIG. 319(b)) is executed.

With such a configuration, when the general figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the deviation from general figure (10 seconds), the display area of the special figure fluctuation effect and the general figure fluctuation effect is not switched, and the general figure fluctuation effect is not changed. An effect for ending the variable effect is executed. Therefore, after the general figure fluctuation effect is executed, the display areas of the special figure fluctuation effect and the general figure fluctuation effect are switched and displayed (see FIG. 320(a)), so that the general figure fluctuation effect being executed is changed. The degree of expectation, which is a long-open fluctuation, can be increased.

After that, when the variation time of the universal figure long open variation has elapsed, the universal figure per game (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the universal figure per game is displayed (see point C in FIG. 317(a)). .. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(b).

Here, the display content of the general figure fluctuation effect executed based on the general figure fluctuation will be described with reference to FIGS. 319(b) to 320(b). FIG. 319(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect contents displayed immediately after the universal figure fluctuation effect is started (see point A in FIG. 317(a)). As shown in FIG. 319(b), when the universal figure variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm (lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , The universal figure fluctuation effect is started.

That is, the small display area Dm5 is a general figure fluctuation effect display area in which the general figure fluctuation effect is executed. Then, as the universal figure variation effect, an effect in which the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches the character is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 319(b), the special figure 1 variation and the general figure variation are being executed, so a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is variably displayed in the small display area Dm1 (FIG. In FIG. 319(b), “displayed by a downward arrow” is displayed, and in the display mode (FIG. 319(b) showing that the general map is variably displayed in the small display area Dm3, “downward display” is displayed. Is displayed).

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the message that the universal figure variation effect has been executed and the text "discover treasure box! Chance when you reach it!!" are displayed as comments to show the effect content of the universal figure variation effect. .. As a result, the player can be easily informed of what kind of effect the general-drawing variation effect executed in a part of the main display area Dm should progress to in the future.

After that, when 10 seconds elapse from the start of the universal figure variation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 320(a) is displayed. FIG. 320(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect contents displayed immediately after the display area of the universal figure variation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 317(a)). As shown in FIG. 320(a), when 10 seconds elapse from the start of the universal figure variation effect, the universal figure variation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and The variable display effect of the special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small area Dm6 formed in a part (lower left portion) of the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Large chance" is displayed, which indicates that the general figure fluctuation effect has progressed (indicates that the result of the general figure lottery was not a general figure deviation change).

As shown in FIG. 319(b) and FIG. 320(a), variation effect (special figure variation effect, ordinary figure variation effect) for showing the lottery result of a plurality of symbol lottery (special figure lottery, general figure lottery) In the case where are simultaneously executed, by changing the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed according to the suggestion situation of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, the lottery of plural symbol lottery for the player It is possible to notify that the fluctuating effect for showing the result is being executed at the same time, and to inform easily which fluctuating effect should be watched, depending on the size of the display area in which each fluctuating effect is executed. it can.

Although illustration is omitted, when the executed general figure fluctuation effect is a general figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the small display area Dm5 gradually decreases from the display screen of FIG. 319(b) and finally. The effect that the small display area Dm5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the general figure lottery corresponding to the current general figure variation effect is out. In this way, when the general figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the deviation of general figure, only the general figure fluctuation effect using a display area smaller than the special figure fluctuation display effect is executed, so The figure variation effect does not hinder the special figure variation effect.

That is, according to the above-described example, the deviation (the deviation from the normal figure (10 seconds)) is selected as the effect result of the general figure fluctuation effect (the result of the general figure lottery that triggered the execution of the general figure fluctuation effect). During the period in which there is a possibility, that is, during the period from the start of the universal figure fluctuation effect to the lapse of 10 seconds, the special figure variation effect and the general figure effect are displayed by executing the display mode shown in FIG. 319(b). The player is informed that the fluctuating effect is being executed at the same time, and 10 seconds after the ordinary figure fluctuating effect is started, the effect of the fluctuating figure fluctuating effect (the normal fluctuating effect which is the trigger for execution) As there is no possibility that outliers (out-of-genuine figure deviation (10 seconds)) are selected as a result of figure lottery, there is a higher possibility that this time the ordinary figure lottery will be successful, As shown in, the display mode in which the display area of the general figure fluctuation effect is large (larger than the display area in which the special figure fluctuation effect is executed) is executed.

As a result, as the possibility of being a lottery result that is advantageous to the player as a result of the lottery variation production, that is, a lottery result in which the electric accessory 640a is long opened, is increased, Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, the player can be made to properly pay attention to the universal figure variation effect. In addition, for example, when the figure variation effect is executed based on the figure deviation variation (10 seconds), the figure variation executed in a display area smaller than the special figure variation effect (see FIG. 319(b)). Since it only ends with the effect, the visibility of the special figure variation effect is not hindered. In addition, regardless of the drawing result of the general drawing lottery, since the size of the display area at the start of the general drawing fluctuation effect is unified, the lottery of the general drawing lottery is performed depending on the display mode immediately after the general figure fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting the result.

In the fifth control example, as shown in FIGS. 319(b) and 320(a), the display area in which the universal figure variation effect is executed is more than the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 319(b))) and a display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 320(a)) larger than the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed (see FIG. 320). (See (a)), but the size is not limited to this, and three or more sizes of the display area of the general figure fluctuation effect may be provided. It is also possible to use a display area having the same size as the display area in which is executed.

Further, in the fifth control example, the display area in which the universal figure fluctuation effect is executed gradually increases as the general figure fluctuation effect progresses, but the invention is not limited to this. The display area in which the variation effect is executed may be configured to be reduced to the size of the final range (see FIG. 320(a)) after being made smaller than the initial range (see FIG. 319(b)). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to continue the general-use figure fluctuation effect while making the player think that the general-purpose figure fluctuation effect will be ended, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected effect. it can.

Further, in the fifth control example, when the special figure variation effect and the general figure variation effect are executed at the same time, the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed is varied, so that the player pays attention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the aspect of the display area in which each variation effect is executed (for example, the color of the outline of the display area or the background color of the display area is Variable mode), or an output mode of a sound corresponding to each variation effect (for example, only a sound corresponding to one variation effect is output, or an output level (volume) of a sound corresponding to each variation effect is changed. By setting the output mode), the player may be allowed to pay attention to any one of the plurality of fluctuation effects.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the range of the display area in which the universal figure fluctuation effect is executed is changed according to the progress situation (elapsed time) of the universal figure fluctuation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the figure variation effect is executed is variable based on the operation content on the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, and the figure variation can be changed. A variable range of the display area in which the general figure fluctuation effect is executed may be set based on the progress status (elapsed time) of the effect and the lottery result of the general figure lottery (result of success/failure determination). ..

With this configuration, for the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the general figure lottery during the general figure fluctuation production, the general figure lottery is performed based on the range of the display area which is changed based on the operation of the operation means. A display area in which the general figure variation effect is executed by not operating the operation means for the player who wants to grasp the lottery result quickly and can grasp the general figure lottery result with the effect of the general figure variation effect. It is possible to execute the universal figure variation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the variation time of the universal figure long opening variation has passed and the lottery result of the universal figure lottery is displayed as the long open winning, then the long open winning is executed, as shown in FIG. 320(b). The display screen is displayed. FIG. 320(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the game is won per universal opening long opening and the game per long opening is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 320(b), when the general figure long opening is won, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm to show that the treasure box 852 is won per the universal figure long opening. The effect of appearance of the capsule 853 is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (indicated by “3 circles” in the figure) for indicating that the result of the universal drawing lottery is a long open win is displayed, and in the small display area Dm4. , "Right hit" is displayed in order to perform a game (right hitting game) for winning the ball in the second winning opening 640, and the small display area Dm5 visually indicates the position where the ball is hit by the right hitting game. As a guide display mode for informing, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area of the game board 13 (in the vicinity of the second winning opening 640) is displayed.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 320(b), the special map 1 is being changed even while the game is being executed, so the special map 1 is being changed in the small display area Dm1. The special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that, and the special figure fluctuation effect is reduced in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 320(a)). It is displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even if the size of the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed is not changed, the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed is reduced by reducing the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed. On the other hand, since the display area in which the general figure fluctuation effect is executed can be relatively large, the effect contents of the general figure fluctuation effect can be made more noticeable to the player.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment “Challenge GET” is displayed to inform the player that the general figure fluctuation effect is further advanced. Here, in the fifth control example, in a part of the case where the drawing result of the drawing drawing is a winning, the drawing time is the same as the changing time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning the drawing of a drawing It is configured such that a short circuit open fluctuation (60 seconds) is set. When the universal figure variation effect is executed in response to this universal figure short opening variation, the universal figure variation effect proceeds until the same display mode as the display screen shown in FIG. The effect of displaying the disengagement mode for indicating that the lottery result of the universal figure lottery is out of 852 is executed.

That is, when the winning is won in the universal drawing and the short opening operation is executed as the winning game, the electric accessory 640a is opened so that the ball cannot enter the second winning opening 640. ing. In this case, even if the right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 (it is difficult), so that the comment "right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. ..

In the present control example, as a winning game (a game for opening the electric accessory 640a) executed when a hit is won in the universal figure lottery, a long open per game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640. And, it is configured to be able to execute two types of winning games, that is, a short open winning game in which it is difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 640, but it is not limited to this and three or more kinds of winning games can be executed. May be configured, for example, as a long open per game that can win a ball in the second winning opening 640, it may be possible to execute a per game with different opening timing and opening time of the electric accessory 640a. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the general-purpose long opening game, so that the ball is shot only at a predetermined timing during the winning game. It is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is won in the second winning opening 640. In addition, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the universal figure fluctuation effect (timing for displaying the display mode for notifying that the game is started per universal figure) may be configured to be different. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the ball firing timing at which the second winning opening 640 can be won based on the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 317(a), the flow of the effect will be described. When the right-handed game is played while the game is being executed and the ball wins the second winning hole 640 (see point C in FIG. 317(a)), the display mode indicating that fact is the third. It is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81. The display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(a).

Here, in the fifth control example, the special figure 1 variation for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 variation for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel). It cannot be executed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is preferentially executed to the special figure 1 fluctuation.

Therefore, when the special prize 1 fluctuation is executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640 during the game, the prize information of the special prize 2 is stored on hold and the special prize 1 being executed. The execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation is awaited until the fluctuation ends (waiting period). After that, when the special figure 1 variation that is being executed is finished, the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information that is held and stored is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 that has developed the above-described production mode of the general figure variation production The variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 317(a)). The display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point D in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(b).

After that, when the change of the special map 2 ends and the special map 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the small hit (see point E in FIG. 317(a)), the special map 2 for indicating the small hit is won. The variation effect is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point E in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(a). Then, while the small hit game is being executed, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 (see point F in FIG. 317(a)), small After the winning game is over, a display mode indicating that the big hit game is executed is displayed (see FIG. 322(b)).

Here, referring to FIG. 321 (a) to FIG. 322 (b), the normal figure long opening per game is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol is executed until the jackpot game is executed based on the per game. The effect contents executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In the fifth control example, a series of games from the execution of the universal figure long opening variation in the normal state to the execution of the jackpot game (general figure variation, regular figure hit, special figure 2 change, special figure 2 small hit) , A game executed in the flow of a big hit), a series of productions having a storyline characteristic are executed. Specifically, to the player, the effect contents of the universal figure variation effect described with reference to FIGS. 319(b) to 320(b) are advanced, and the jackpot game is executed depending on the progress status of the effect. It becomes possible to suggest.

By configuring in this way, as a trigger for the jackpot game, whether or not the execution trigger is more complicated than the trigger triggered when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

321 (a), the state shown in FIG. 320 (b), that is, in the state where the long open game executed during the variation of Tokushu 1 is being executed, a ball has been won in the second winning opening 640. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen for showing that. As shown in FIG. 321(a), when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game in the universal figure long opening, the capsule 853 is cracked and suggests the contents of the game to be executed from the capsule 853. A ticket 854 in which “Challenge game” is described is displayed as a mode. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "challenge game GET" for notifying that the challenge game will be executed in the future is displayed.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 321(a), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change is immediately executed based on the fact that the ball has won the second winning opening 640. The winning information of the special figure 2 is stored without being held. Therefore, in the small display area Dm2a, "1" indicating that one winning information of special figure 2 has been acquired is displayed. Then, when the special figure 1 change that has been executed in the state of FIG. 321 (a) ends, then the special figure 2 change is started, and the challenge game is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 321(b)).

FIG. 321(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the challenge game. As shown in FIG. 321(b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during execution of a series of effects, the challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 321(a), a plurality of result display modes 861a for indicating the effect result. ~ 861e rotate in order, and an effect in which the result display modes 861a to 861e stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 are the effect result of this time is executed.

In the fifth control example, the result display mode is a result display mode 861a with a "cross mark" indicating that the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is "out", and a "small hit". The result display mode 861d with "V" to indicate that, the result display mode 861c with "777" to indicate that it is a "big hit", and the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 are not notified. It has a result display mode 861b with "?" and a result display mode 861e with "NEXT" indicating that the challenge game is to be executed again.

Here, in the result display mode 861b to which "?" is attached as the effect result of the challenge game, when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" In the challenge game, an effect that does not notify the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. Even when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, “right hit” is displayed in the small area Dm4.

With such a configuration, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is performed without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball fired by the right hitting game wins the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hitting game or the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hitting game. Do you win the second prize hole 640 that is opened during the game, or you do not win per special map (big hit, small hit) and per bonus, and you won't win any prize hole Since it is possible to determine whether or not the actual movement of the ball is observed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the fifth control example, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by changing the display mode of the result display mode 861b after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery of this time is notified as the effect result of the challenge game. You may be able to.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of which special result 2 lottery result the result display mode 861b corresponds to during the challenge game, and the challenge game ends. Then, the player can be informed of the result of the present challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special map 2.

The result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 321(b) is displayed in a stopped state in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the fifth control example, when a plurality of winning information of special map 2 is obtained during the long open game, the lottery of special map 2 is continued until the big hit or the small hit is won by the lottery of special map 2. Is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special map 2 lottery is missed, the second special map 2 lottery is continuously executed, so the challenge executed corresponding to the first special map 2 fluctuation The result display mode 861e is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the game, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special drawing 2 lottery is a win (big hit, small hit), any of the result display modes 861b to 861d for indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. It

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of strangeness (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 obtained during the game per long opening. Although detailed description is omitted, the variation time set in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is the variation time (10 seconds) corresponding to one challenge game and the variation time (20 seconds) corresponding to two times. ) And are settable, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out, the variation time of 20 seconds is less likely to be selected than the variation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, when the challenge game is executed twice in one variation of the special figure 2 variation, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning the win (big hit, small win) in the special figure 2 lottery. .. Further, when the result display mode 861e to which “NEXT” has been added by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is executed only once. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it was executed within the fluctuation time or was executed across two fluctuations in special figure 2.

In the state shown in FIG. 321, since the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation that was fluctuating at the time point shown in FIG. 321(a) is not included in the small display area Dm1. The special figure 2 fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "451" shown, and in the small display area Dm2, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed. It is displayed. In addition, because the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed using the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored at the time shown in FIG. 321(a), “0” is displayed as the value displayed in the small display area Dm2a. It is displayed.

Then, as the series effect, the special figure 2 change effect is executed using the display area in which the general figure change effect has been executed, so the special figure change effect (special figure 1 change effect) is executed in FIG. 321(a). The small display area Dm6 that has been displayed is erased from the main display area Dm. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "right hitting" for allowing the player to play the right hitting game are continuously displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, the effect of the present challenge game is encouraged. The comment "What will I get?" is displayed.

According to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 321(b), in order to explain the current game situation, the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size. Actually, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. Thereby, the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) executed in the continuous main display area Dm can be further enhanced.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 321 (b), as described above, is the state in which the normal figure long opening per game is finished and the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so that it is provided in the right side game area at that timing. In addition, none of the respective winning openings (the second winning opening 640, the specific winning opening 65a, the V winning opening 650a) makes it easy to win a ball. However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 321(b), the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640 due to the game of the long opening per universal figure, for example, the small hit by the special drawing 2 lottery being executed. When the player wins the prize or wins the jackpot, the ball easily enters the V winning opening 650a or the specific winning opening 65a.

Thus, in a moment, even if the right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the right-hand side game area is not the advantageous game method for the player, the right-handed game is continuously played. By displaying the character “right hit” in the small display area Dm4, the trouble of the player frequently switching between the right hit game and the left hit game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed, for example, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the right hitting game cannot be performed in the state where the small hitting game is executed and the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game.

In the present control example, for the reason described above, in the case where the right-handed game can be executed with a predetermined interval (the period during which the Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is being executed), the small display area Dm4 can be continuously executed during the predetermined interval. Although the character "right hit" is displayed in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 only in a state where the right hit game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display, and a state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (general figure long opening per period, small hit game period) and a period between the states (special figure 2 fluctuation The characters "right-handed" may be displayed in the small display area Dm4 in different display modes.

With such a configuration, a player who is not familiar with the game is allowed to continuously perform a right-hit game, and the player is in a disadvantageous game situation (a ball is placed in the V winning opening 650a during a small hit game). It is unlikely that a situation in which a prize cannot be won) occurs, and a skilled player can select a game method according to the display mode of “right hit” displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, the game can be played according to the skill of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the display content displayed when the result display mode 861d to which “V” is added as the effect result of the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, that is, when the small hit is won is shown in FIG. 322 ( This will be described with reference to a). FIG. 322(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the small hit is notified in the challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 322(a), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2 indicating the small hit. Is displayed, and the result display mode 861d is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "small hit GET!!" indicating that the small hit is won is displayed, and in the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm, the player aims at the small hit game. As a guide display mode for visually guiding the V winning apparatus 650, a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the V winning apparatus 650 is enlarged and displayed is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, in order to notify that the right to execute the big hit game is obtained after the end of the small hit game. A display screen shown in FIG. 322(b) is displayed as the display screen of FIG. FIG. 322(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right of the big hit game is acquired during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 322(b), the character "777" indicating that the jackpot game is executed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the sub display area Ds congratulates the player, "Congratulations! !” is displayed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the normal figure variation effect executed when the long opening variation of the normal symbol (normal figure) is started in the normal state (see FIG. 319(b)). , The electric role object 640a is opened during the universal figure per game to be executed during the universal figure per game (see FIG. 320 (b)), during the universal figure per game, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, Special figure 2 hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 321(a)) executed when winning information of special figure 2 is acquired, special figure 2 fluctuation effect executed when special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) is started (Refer to FIG. 321(b)), the special hit 2 variation (lottery) indicates that the small hit has been won, and the small hit winning effect (see FIG. 322(a)), the right to win the big hit during the small hit game. Since the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 322(b)) executed in this case is configured to be executed as a series of effects with a storyline, it is realized when a plurality of conditions are satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 that has an opportunity to execute a game, it is possible to inform the player of its playability in an easily understandable manner.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description will be continued. As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 317(a), it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game by executing a series of effects. Depending on the game state when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the player may not be able to easily inform the player of the progress of the game in the above-described production mode of the series production.

Specifically, at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a), the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed, so the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed). While using the production mode of a series of productions in which the display screen (see FIG. 321(a)) in the case of standby is displayed, for example, in the state where the special figure 1 variation is not executed, during the game per ordinary figure When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation is immediately started. Therefore, when the above-described production mode of the series production is used, the display screen of FIG. 320(b) directly shifts to the display screen of FIG. 321(b), and each of the series productions is executed. There was a problem that the relevance of the performance was weakened.

Therefore, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change is executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects is executed, and the determination result is obtained. Based on this, the effect mode after the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired is made variable. Here, with reference to FIG. 323, the effect contents when the change of special figure 1 is not executed at the timing when the winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during the period when the series of effects is being executed will be described.

323(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the winning information of special figure 2 is acquired while the special figure 1 is not changing, and FIG. 323(b) is FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 323(a) is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 323(a), when a special ball 1 variation is not executed and a ball wins the second winning opening 640, the variation of the special FIG. 2 is immediately started, so that FIG. By the effect shown in (1), the character 851 destroys the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852 with the hammer 851aa. Then, when the timing at which the fluctuation of special figure 2 stops is reached, the display screen shown in FIG. 323( b) is displayed. FIG. 323(b) is an example of a display screen displayed when the special figure 2 change executed based on the ball winning the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 change is not changing is stopped. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 323( b ), when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, the effect display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation appears from the capsule 853. In the example shown in FIG. 323(b), since the lottery result of the variation of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit, a result display mode 855 with "V" indicating the small hit is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the change in the special figure 2, and specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 321(b) is displayed. Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the series of productions, when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the change of the special figure 1, the production in which the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the per-drawing period (first stage). The effect of acquiring the ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 hold acquisition period (remaining change period of special figure 1) (second stage effect), and the challenge game effect changes to special figure 2 While the production mode is set so as to correspond to the period (third stage production), when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 is not changing, the capsule 853 is selected from the treasure box 852. The effect mode is set such that the effect that appears is corresponding to the per-drawing period (first stage effect) and the effect of destroying the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 changing period (second stage effect). I am configuring.

In this way, depending on the game situation during the series of effects, by making it possible to set different effect modes depending on whether the special period 2 variation waiting period occurs or not, the player feels strange. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand series of productions.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description of the flow of effects will be continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 319 to 323, the effect contents that can be displayed when a normal game is executed in the state where the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, about the content of the effect when the ball normally wins the second winning opening 640 during the game, or the content of the effect when the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. I explained.

Here, the contents of the effect executed when the normal game is not executed while the series effect is being executed will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324, the effect contents when the ball does not win the second winning port 640 during the game in the universal figure long opening will be described. FIG. 324(a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 when one second has elapsed since the game started in the universal figure long opening. FIG. 324(b) is a schematic diagram shown, and is displayed when the game is finished per universal figure long opening without the ball winning the second winning opening 640 during the game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display screen typically.

As shown in FIG. 324(a), in the main display area Dm, the capsule 853 rolls and moves away from the character 851 until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game. Along with the execution, a comment “hurry!!, hurry!!” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to call attention to hurrying the ball into the second winning opening 640. Further, as a factor that may cause a situation in which the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game was opened, it is considered that the player may not be performing a right-handed game. The “right hitting” guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a more emphasized display mode (in FIG. 324(a), the outline of the small display area Dm4 is displayed with a double line). To be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that a right-handed game is to be played.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as a game per universal figure long opening, after the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 0.5 second again after a closing period of 1.5 seconds. The hit game (opening operation) is configured to be executed. Therefore, when 1 second elapses from the start of the game per the general figure long opening, the alert screen shown in FIG. 324(a) is displayed, and if the player who notices the display performs the right-handed game, the latter half It is configured such that the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide the player who has played the right-handed game after visually confirming the display content of the attention screen, with an opportunity to win a ball at the second winning opening 640.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) of the game per long opening of the universal figure elapses without the ball winning in the second winning opening 640, the series production is finished as shown in FIG. 324(b). The effect indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 324(b), a character 851 who is unable to obtain the capsule 853 and regrets is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "End" indicating that the series production is finished in the sub display area Ds. Is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4, a character "left hit" for executing a normal game in which the special map 1 lottery is executed in the normal state is displayed. With such a configuration, when a normal game (a game in which a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game during the universal figure long opening) is not executed in the middle of the series of effects, the series of effects is Since the production to be ended is executed, for example, it is possible to prevent the series production from progressing to the end in a state where the winning information of the special figure 2 is not acquired and causing the player to have excessive expectations. ..

Next, as a content of the effect executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the continuous effect is executed, when the ball does not win the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, or a specific The effect contents in the case of not passing through the area (V gate (V area)) will be described with reference to FIG. 325. FIG. 325(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed since the small hit game was started. FIG. 325(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the small hitting game is finished without the ball winning the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), if a ball has not won in the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed since the small hit game was started, a small formed in a part of the main display area Dm. In the display area Dm8, the character "Last 5 seconds!!" is displayed as the remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small hit game, and the countdown display in which the value decreases with the passage of time is executed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the situation in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small hit game is wrapped in smoke is displayed. Also, as in the case of FIG. 324(a) described above, a highlighted display mode in which the guide for the right-handed game is highlighted in the small display area Dm4 is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the small hit game is currently being played. , A comment of "Small hitting!! Hurry!!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small hitting game is finished without winning the ball in the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, a screen for ending the same series of effects as in FIG. 324(b) is displayed (FIG. 325( See b)). In this way, at each time point of the series production, if the series production ends, the same image data is used, so that the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, since it cannot be displayed during a normal game, it is unlikely that the same image data will be reused for the player even if the same image data is used. It is a thing.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description will be continued. Depending on the changing situation of the special figure 1 during the series of effects, a state in which the waiting period for changing the special figure 2 is set and a state of not being set occur. A new problem occurred even in the state where the variable waiting period in FIG. 2 was set.

In other words, the waiting period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning port 640 is the special figure. It is set irrespective of the change timing of 1. Furthermore, since the variation time length of the special figure 1 variation varies, for example, there is a possibility that the waiting period of the special figure 2 variation during the series of performances may exceed 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen (see FIG. 321(a)) indicating the waiting period of the change in Toku-zu 2 is continuously displayed, the same display mode continues to be displayed for 100 seconds, There is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable and that the series of effects is delayed and the effect of the effects is reduced.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, the presence/absence of the special figure 1 change and the remaining change time of the special figure 1 change are determined when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the series of effects, When the remaining variation time of the variation in FIG. 1 is a predetermined time (60 seconds) or more, the special series effect is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317(b), the flow of the game when executing the special series effect will be described. In FIG. 317(b), the period from the winning of the ball to the second winning port 640 to the execution of the special figure 2 variation during the game per ordinary figure (the special figure 1 remaining variation period being executed) is 60 seconds. It is a timing chart showing a flow of effects (special series effects) executed in the above cases. Note that detailed description of the same elements as those in the flow shown in FIG. 317(a) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 317(b), when a series of effects (universal figure variation effect) is executed based on the universal figure long open variation, the special figure 1 variation (indicated as "special variation" in the figure) Long deviation change (special 1 long fluctuation (deviation)) is being executed, and the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game per universal figure long opening Is determined to be 60 seconds or more, the series of effects being executed is pseudo ended by the effect (see point G in FIG. 317(b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation variation that is being executed reaches 10 seconds, a pseudo series of effects is executed, and the challenge game is performed at the start timing of the special figure 2 variation (see FIG. 321(b)). The effect mode for starting is set (see point H in FIG. 317(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 326, the effect contents of the above-described special series effect will be described. FIG. 326(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the point G in FIG. 317(b). As shown in FIG. 317(b), when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed at the time when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 is 60 seconds or more, the small display area Dm2a is displayed. Despite the state in which "1" indicating that one winning information of special figure 2 is stored in memory is displayed, an end screen indicating that the series production has ended is displayed in the main display area Dm. It

After that, as the special series effect, once the series effect is finished, the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation being executed is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 change reaches 10 seconds (when the time when the special figure 2 change is executed after 10 seconds), the display mode shown in FIG. 326(b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, description will be given of contents of effects executed in the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example. FIG. 318(a) schematically shows the flow of the effect executed when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (1 time) is set after the jackpot game is over. FIG. 318(b) is a timing chart, and in the time saving state, the small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the end of the big hit game executed based on the small hit. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the case of.

As shown in FIG. 318(a), there is a special figure 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as a special 1 hold) when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over, and a special figure 2 hold (hereinafter, both a special 2 hold). If there is not, that is, if the jackpot is won by the game (left-handed game) that executes the special map 1 lottery, the special map 2 lottery is executed by performing the right-handed game during the time saving state. Before that, all the special figure 1 lottery stored and stored is configured to be executed.

Specifically, rather than the universal figure fluctuation time (normal figure fluctuation time set during the high probability state of normal symbols) that is executed with the time saving state set, it is executed with the time saving state set It is configured such that the fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 is shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game in the time saving state while holding the special figure 1 hold. Therefore, during the execution of various effects in the time saving state, the special figure 1 variation that is harder to win than the special figure 2 variation is executed, and the production balance of various productions is lost. Can be suppressed.

Although a detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when the special map 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, the time of 0.2 seconds is lost regardless of the lottery result of the special map 1 lottery. The variable time is set. Then, the jackpot game end screen showing the end of the jackpot game is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game is finished or until the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the jackpot game is over, the period during which the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 hold already acquired at the start of the big hit game is executed (about 1 when the number of special figure 1 holds is 4). Second), the display mode indicating the big hit game end will be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to consume the special figure 1 hold without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation which is executed immediately after the end of big hit game), when the big hit is won, or when the small hit which can pass V is won, the big hit game ends again from the big hit game end screen It is configured so that the inside display screen is displayed, and game information indicating the contents of the jackpot game (for example, round number information indicating the number of rounds to be executed during one jackpot game or acquired during one jackpot game). As the acquired ball number information indicating the number of balls played), the game information indicating the cumulative value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think of a plurality of jackpot games as if they were one jackpot game, and thus the second jackpot game (the period when the jackpot game end screen is displayed. The variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation that is difficult for the player to identify the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game) and the variation of the third symbol Even if executed with (no display), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information for one big hit game can be increased, so that the player can be more strongly expected to win the big hit. Further, in the fifth control example, since the right hitting game is appropriate for both the big hit game and the game in the time saving state, internally the big hit game is finished and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 fluctuation period (the big hit game end screen is being displayed), the character "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from deciding whether the present is a big hit game or a time saving state depending on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured such that the special figure 2 suspension is preferentially consumed over the special figure 1 suspension. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and obtains the special figure 1 hold with the special figure 2 hold, the special figure 1 hold until the special figure 2 hold disappears. The special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the hold is not executed. Then, during the time saving state, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed, the special figure 2 suspension is configured not to be lost. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the Toku-zu 1 variation from being unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

Further, in the fifth control example, as the corresponding time saving end condition that is a part of the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the end condition that is satisfied based on the execution count of the special figure 2 change is set. , Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times) after the jackpot game is over, the game situation until the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied is updated based on the number of variations of the special figure 1 variation. There is nothing to do.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, and the special figure 2 variation is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. The special figure 1 fluctuation is configured to be changed for a short time during a period when the special figure 1 is not held, but the special figure 1 fluctuation is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation in FIG.

When "special map 2 fluctuation 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition after the jackpot game is over, the fluctuation period of the special map 2 fluctuation is used by using the fluctuation period of the special map 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving state. The time saving final variation effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the lottery result and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 327 to 331, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the fifth control example will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, as the effect during the time saving state, the first time saving variation effect set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation in the time saving state, and the special effect. It is configured to execute the second time-saving fluctuation effect set corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation that is the final fluctuation in the figure.

Then, in the first time saving fluctuation effect, a fluctuation effect for indicating the lottery result of the fluctuation is executed, and in the second time saving fluctuation effect, the lottery result of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of the special map 2 hold are shown. Change effect is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 327(a), the display contents of the first time saving effect will be described. FIG. 327(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in the variation effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 327(a) is a display screen when the first Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is executed in the time saving state in which the time saving number “5 times” is set.

As shown in FIG. 327(a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters of "time saving mode" for indicating that the present time is in a time saving state are displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. While the imitated character 851 is running, an effect is obtained in which one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c indicating the result of the special drawing lottery this time is obtained. In the fifth control example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, the character 851 attempts to obtain lottery result modes 871a to 871c in accordance with the variation time set during the time saving state (excluding the time saving final variation). The get effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times during one variation period, and as the number of times of the get effect executed during one variation period increases, the lottery result of this special figure variation is the player. It is configured so that the probability of being a lottery result that is advantageous to is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the effect result of each get effect, but also to the number of times the get effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect.

Further, in the small display area Dm4, a character "right hit" for guiding the playing method in the time saving state is displayed, and in the sho display area Dm20, "last 4" indicating a period until the time saving state ends. The word "time" is displayed. In other words, it notifies that the time saving state will end when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In addition, in the fifth control example, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are established based on the number of special figure fluctuations are configured to be settable, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a plurality of time saving end conditions. The remaining period until the quickest end condition that is most easily satisfied is satisfied is displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is the most satisfied condition as compared with the case where all of the plurality of time saving end conditions are displayed and the period (remaining period) until all the displayed time saving end conditions are satisfied is displayed. It is possible to easily inform the player of the easy time saving end condition. Further, when the ease of establishing the time saving end conditions overlaps, it is possible to display all the overlapping time saving end conditions, or to display only one of the overlapping time saving end conditions. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in this control example, in FIG. 327(a), as the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, the first lottery result mode 871a to which "777" indicating the big win is attached and the "V" indicating small win are shown. The attached second lottery result mode 871b and the third lottery result mode 871c to which a "cross mark" indicating the deviation is attached are displayed, and each time the get effect is executed, the character 851 is selected by any one of the lottery. An action is performed in which the result modes 871a to 871c are acquired but cannot be acquired, and finally, an effect of acquiring any one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c and informing of the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a lottery result suggestion mode with a "chance" indicating that the lottery result modes 871a and 871b showing the lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect are highly expected. Alternatively, the performance number suggestion mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get production is executed is displayed, and the character 851 executes the get production to acquire the lottery result suggestion mode and the production number suggestion mode. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible for the character 851 to perform the action of acquiring any display mode a plurality of times during one variable display effect, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the effect. be able to. Further, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the current special figure fluctuation in the middle of the special figure fluctuation period, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 327(a), a display mode for indicating the remaining execution count of the special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed in the small display area Dm20 as the remaining period in which the time saving state is set. Without being limited to this, for example, a display mode for indicating the remaining time in which the time saving state is set based on the change time of the special figure 2 change may be displayed, or the get effect executed during the current time saving state. A display mode for indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed. Further, the number of remaining executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time when the time saving state is set, that is, the time saving end condition (special figure 2 number of fluctuations) set in the current time saving state, and the special figure executed during the time saving state. The display mode may be displayed on the display screen to indicate the number of times of two fluctuations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327(b), the display content of the time saving final variation effect (second time saving variation effect) executed in the final variation in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 327(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the first half period of the time-saving final variation effect. In the fifth control example, as a variation effect for the time saving final variation, a reserved ball acquisition effect for allowing the player to acquire a special figure 2 reserved ball, a lottery result of the variation, and a special figure 2 pending look-ahead result, A second time-saving fluctuation effect for notifying the player of, is configured to be executable, and the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period (for example, 5 seconds) of the time-saving final fluctuation effect, and the second half period (for example, , 25 seconds), the second time-saving fluctuation effect is executed.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the time-saving final variation effect, as shown in FIG. 327(b), the "collect characters!" Is displayed, and an effect of gathering teammate characters around the character 851 in the main display area Dm is executed. In FIG. 327(b), a state in which a teammate character 851a imitating “turtle” and a teammate character 851b imitating “elephant” are displayed is displayed. Then, the character "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm20 to inform the player that the current special figure fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state.

This teammate character 851 is variably displayed in association with the acquired special map 2 number of reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. 327(b), Since it is shown that two special figure 2 holds have been acquired, it means that two teammate characters 851 have gathered. Then, in the small display area Dm7, a set history display that is displayed in the order in which the gathered teammate characters 851 are assembled is displayed, and “turtle” is displayed as the first history 872a and “elephant” is displayed as the second history 872b. ..

In the small display area Dm7, a set history display is displayed, but the display order here is associated with the order of the special figure 2 being held, and is used in the second time saving effect described later. Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, when the winning is won, it is possible to suggest which special figure 2 hold is the winning.

Then, when the special 2 reserved number reaches the upper limit value (4) during execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, it is indicated that the special figure 2 reserved ball number is 4 as shown in FIG. 328(a). A performance mode is displayed. Specifically, a new ally character 851c imitating a “snake” and a ally character 851d imitating a “lion” are newly added around the character 851, and a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d are added. The assembled effects are displayed. Also, in the small display area Dm21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c, and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d, and the special map 2 number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit in the sub-display area Ds. The comment "All gathered!!" is displayed. Note that, as described above, during the execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, the number of special character 2 reserved balls is associated with the special figure 2 reserved ball number in the small display area Dm2a because the group number of the teammate characters 851 is associated with the special figure 2 reserved ball number. “4” indicating that it is the upper limit value (4 pieces) is displayed.

After that, when the first half period of the time saving final variation effect has passed and the second half period has been reached, the second time saving variation effect shown in FIG. 328(b) is started. FIG. 328(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents (second time-saving fluctuation effect) displayed when the second half period of the time-saving final fluctuation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 328(b), in the second time-saving fluctuation effect, one of the ally characters acquired in the first half period of the time-saving final fluctuation effect challenges the mission, and if the mission succeeds, the winning notification is given, and the mission fails. An effect for notifying that the winning is not won is executed. Then, the effect result of the second time-saving fluctuation effect is configured to reflect the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time when the first half period of the time-saving final fluctuation effect has elapsed. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 328(b), the mission effect using the ally character 851a imitating a “turtle” is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time saving fluctuation effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed (in FIG. 328(b), "bear against rockfall") is configured so that multiple patterns can be set, and the content of the mission effect and the type of the selected ally character 851. , And the degree of expectation of successful missions varies. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction effect, but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

When the mission effect is successful, the mission success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 329(a). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 329(a), the first special figure 2 suspension (special figure 2 suspension executed next), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation of the first rotation after shifting to the normal state Since winning the small hit in advance is pre-read and the pre-reading result is used as the effect result of the second time-saving fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 329(a), the mission success is achieved as the effect result of the second time-saving fluctuation effect. At the change stop timing of the displayed time saving final change, the display mode of “351” indicating that the result of the special drawing 2 lottery this time is out is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After this, as shown in FIG. 329(b), the special symbol 2 variation in which the small hit is won is displayed while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the win is won in the main display area Dm is displayed in a swinging manner. Until the end, a notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time saving fluctuation effect is displayed. At the time of FIG. 329(b), the normal state is set as the game state, and the special figure 2 is changing (non-big hit game, non-small hit game), so the right-handed game is actually performed. Also, it is in a state where it is not possible to play a game that is advantageous to the player, but since a small hit game is executed immediately after, a "right hit" game that continuously guides the right hit game from the time saving state The display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. As a result, a smooth game can be played without causing the player to change the firing direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 hold is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time saving fluctuation effect is executed, it is shown in FIG. 330(a). As shown, the display mode for displaying the small hit prize to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol "777" for indicating the small hit type set in the present small hit prize is displayed. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, when the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. 328(b) (when both the variation lottery result and the special figure 2 hold prefetch result are out of order) ), the mission failure effect shown in FIG. 330(b) is displayed, and thereafter, the period until the change of Toku-zu 2 corresponding to the holding of Toku-zu 2 in the normal state is completed, the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. 331. Is displayed.

Although details will be described later, at the timing when the first half period of the time saving final fluctuation effect ends, the special figure 2 hold has not reached the upper limit value and the second time saving fluctuation effect is started (second time saving effect). If the special figure 2 hold is newly acquired after the effect result of the variation effect has been set), the newly acquired special figure 2 hold is generated at the first special figure 2 variation start timing in the normal state after the end of the time saving final variation. When the pre-reading process is executed for the FIG. 2 hold (special figure 2 hold not reflected in the effect result of the second time-saving fluctuation effect), and the result of the pre-read process is a win, the display of FIG. 331. The effect of suddenly displaying the small hit winning screen (see FIG. 330(a)) is executed from the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 332, the configuration of the counter buffer in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 332, in the fifth control example, the second hit type counter C6 and the second variation type counter CS2 are added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 240) in the fourth control example described above. And, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the point that the variation type counter storage area for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 is provided, and the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c And a second variation type counter storage area for storing the value of the second variation type counter C6 and a second variation type counter storage area for storing the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Corresponding to the counter value stored in the reserved sphere storage area, the difference is that the configuration of the special symbol reserved sphere execution area, the normal symbol reserved sphere execution area is changed. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process of the main control device in this control example), and the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing. Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol-based random number 5 table 202ec (see FIG. 334(d)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the second random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that is a regular symbol defined in the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec, it is determined to be a regular symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334(d), the random number per normal symbol 5 table 202ec will be described. Random number per normal symbol 5 table 202ec is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a hit in each game state (normal symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol low probability state) is set in the ordinary symbol lottery. Is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 334(d), when the gaming state is a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the lottery of a normal symbol Is within the range of "5-28", and if it is within the range of "5-28", it is determined that the normal drawing is successful. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state of a normal symbol (time saving state), it is determined whether the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the normal symbol lottery is within the range of "5 to 204". Then, if it is within the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a universal figure.

That is, in the fifth control example, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), the winning is won with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving state), there is a probability of 5/6. It is configured to win the prize. And, as will be described in detail later, in the normal state, a ball wins the second winning opening 640 as a game per ordinary figure with a probability of 1/100 of the case of winning an ordinary symbol (per ordinary figure). It is configured so that easy long open games are executed. Further, during the time saving state, the game is configured to be executed per long opening when the player wins the game.

With this configuration, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 with a probability of 1/1000, and thus the normal state can be executed. For the player playing the game to execute the special figure 1 lottery and the game to execute the special figure 2 lottery (game aiming for a specific winning in the general figure lottery) at the same time You can

The second fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 999, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). The second variation type counter CS2 determines one universal figure variation pattern from the set universal figure variation pattern selection table 202ef. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in the universal pattern fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the above-described main processing (see FIG. 136) of the main control device 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. .. In addition, from the value of the second variation type counter CS2 (random number value), the general pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef (see FIG. 338) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of the normal symbol variation is the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

Returning to FIG. 332, the description will be continued. In the fifth control example, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is provided with a variation type counter storage area, and the winning information stored in the reserved memory is changed in advance (the special symbol varies). By making a distinction (before), the variation pattern (variation time) that is actually executed is pre-readable. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the timing at which the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information of the special symbol that is held and stored is executed.

Further, in the fifth control example, the winning information of the normal symbol, that is, as the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the first random number counter used in the normal lottery lottery C2, the second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and used when setting the type of winning game per ordinary figure.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 333(a). FIG. 333 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed adoption of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 333(a), for the above-described A1 control example, the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 242(a)) is replaced with the first per random number 5 table C202ea, and the first per type selection The first per type selection 5 table 202eb is provided in place of the table 202b, the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec in place of the normal symbol per random number table 202c, the variation pattern 5 table 202ee in place of the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit In place of the type selection table 202e, a small hit type selection 5 table 202eg, in place of the big hit scenario table 202aa, a big hit scenario 5 table 202eh, and in place of a small hit scenario table 202ab, a small hit scenario 5 table 202ei, The difference is that a type selection 5 table 202ed per general figure and a general figure variation pattern selection table 202ef are newly provided.

The first per random number 5 table 202ea is different from the above first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 242) in that the specified value that is determined as a big hit is different, and is otherwise the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents defined in the first random number 5 table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 334. FIG. 334(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 5 table 202ea. As shown in FIG. 334(a), the first random number 5 table 202ea is a special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 that is referred to in the per lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and a second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 which is referred to when the winning lottery of (Special figure 2) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 will be described. FIG. 334(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1. As shown in FIG. 334(b), "big hit" is defined in the range of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small win" is defined in "10, 11". In other words, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning the big hit in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small hit is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 will be described. FIG. 334(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 334(c), "big hit" is defined in the range of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small win" is defined in "10 to 149". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning the big hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/7.1.

That is, in the fifth control example, the same special jackpot probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, since the small hit can be triggered to execute the big hit game, the special drawing 2 lottery is easier to execute the big hit game than the special drawing 1 lottery. It will be a drawing lottery.

In the fifth control example, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special map 1 lottery and the special map 2 lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special map 1 lottery and the special map 2 Different jackpot probabilities may be set depending on the lottery. Further, the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot or the jackpot is high depending on the gaming state ( A high probability state of a special symbol) and a low probability state of being low (a low probability state of a special symbol) may be configured to be set.

The first hit type selection 5 table 202eb is different from the above-described first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 243) in that the big hit type set when the big hit is won is different, Otherwise it is the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the first type selection 5 table 202eb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection 5 table 202eb. As shown in FIG. 335(a), in the first hit type selection 5 table 202eb, the special figure 1 big hit type selection 5 table 202eb1 referred to when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, and the special figure 2 lottery. The special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 that is referred to when the jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 335(b), the contents stipulated in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1 will be described. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, three types of jackpot AA to jackpot AC are set to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is set to "0", "big hit AA (15R hour shortening 99 times big hit)" is defined as the big hit type, and "big hit AB is in the range of 1 to 15". (7R hourly short 5 times big hit) is defined, and "big hit AC (7R hourly short 1 time big hit)" is defined in the range of "16 to 99".

In other words, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed and the special drawing 1 lottery is executed, when the big hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (assigned) after the big hit game ends. There is. Then, the end condition of the time saving state is set differently according to the set jackpot type.

Specifically, when the big hit type AA is set as the big hit type, only the common time saving end condition described above is set. Therefore, the special figure lottery is selected to win the win (big hit or small hit) or the special figure fluctuation. The time saving state continues until (the sum of fluctuations in special map 1 and fluctuations in special map 2) reaches 99 times. In the fifth control example, a right-handed game in which special figure 2 lottery is executed during a time saving state is performed, and in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning a big jackpot is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small jackpot is 1/. Since it is set to 7.1, for example, when the short-time state based on the jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation is set to a predetermined number (99 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the big hit AA is selected, the game state is set in which the time saving state is set until the big hit game is executed next time.

Next, when the big hit type AB is set as the big hit type, “the number of fluctuations of fluctuation in special figure 2 is 5” is set as the corresponding time saving end condition in addition to the common time saving end condition described above. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches the predetermined number (5 times) without being won in the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. .. That is, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number of 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning in success until the time saving end condition is satisfied (run probability) It is about 54%.

When the big hit AC is set as the big hit type, in addition to the common time saving end condition described above, “the number of fluctuations of the Toku-zu 2 change is once” is set as the corresponding time saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches the predetermined number (one time) without being won in the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) becomes 85%. In other words, when the big hit AC is set, that is, when the special time period 2 variation number of 1 is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning in success until the time saving end condition is satisfied (run probability). It will be about 15%.

As described above, according to the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the advantage degree (run probability) of the time saving state that is set is different, and the jackpot AA Is the most advantageous jackpot type, then the jackpot AB is the advantageous jackpot type, and the jackpot AC is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

Also, the number of round games to be executed as a jackpot game is defined to be different depending on the jackpot type, so that the jackpot AA is “15R”, the jackpot AB, and the AC are “7R” round games. Stipulated in. As the number of round games in one jackpot game increases, the number of balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired by the player increases, so in terms of the jackpot game executed, the jackpot AA is the most player. It becomes an advantageous jackpot type.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the jackpot type (jackpot AA) with the highest consecutive chan probability is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but is not limited to this. The jackpot type having the highest consecutive chan probability and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game having the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the most advantageous game state according to the game situation. For example, if you win the jackpot just before closing the amusement park, you can win more prize balls in one jackpot game than the jackpot type that is given (set) a time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chan. If it is a pachinko machine 10 that has a limit value (limit) for the number of times that the time saving state is set across the big hit game, then it is a big hit game just before the limit is reached. The jackpot type that can get more prize balls is a more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chan (the number of times the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the normal state even once) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), the privilege for the player (for example, valuable In the pachinko machine 10 capable of giving an image, a jackpot type in which a player who wants to obtain a privilege is given (set) a time saving state having a high probability of consecutive chan is a more advantageous jackpot type.

The above-mentioned consecutive Chan probability indicates the probability of winning based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the fifth control example, the special figure 2 lottery is given a predetermined number of times. It is configured such that (4) can be reserved for storage with an upper limit. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 reservations stored (remaining special figure 2 reservation number) even after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the normal state is entered. The special figure 2 is designed so that it is possible to aim for a small win. As described above, in the fifth control example, since the probability of winning the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1/7.1, the remaining special figure 2 is retained (maximum 4). The special number 2 lottery with the corresponding number of times makes it possible to sufficiently aim for the small win.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special map 2 reservations is 1, the probability of winning the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special map 2 reservation (withdrawal probability) is about 14%. 2 When the number of holdings is 2, the withdrawal probability is about 28.5%. When the number of remaining special map 2 holdings is 3, the withdrawal probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special 2 holding balls. If there are four, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be stored in a holdable manner, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is executed even after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. Regardless of the special drawing 2 lottery result in the time saving state, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game until the special time 2 holding is completed until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the time saving state is set once, the game period in the time saving state described above (the continuous Chang period) and the period during which the special map 2 lottery based on the remaining special map 2 suspension in the normal state is executed (pullback) It is possible to aim for a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery in two periods of (period) and), so even though the time saving state has been set, the big hit game will never be executed It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to the normal state in which one lottery is aimed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the fifth control example, a small hit is won by the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and a big hit game (continuous chan big hit game) is executed based on the small hit win during the normal state. Special figure 2 If the small hit is won in the lottery and the big hit game (pull back big hit game) is executed based on the small hit, it is easier to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. .. This allows the player to play a game while expecting to win a small hit during the withdrawal period even if the consecutive chan period has elapsed, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 will be described. FIG. 335(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three types of jackpot AD to jackpot AF are set to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", "big hit AD (15R hour reduction 99 times big hit)" is defined as the big hit type, and is in the range of "20 to 69". Is defined as "big hit AE (12R hour short 99 times big hit)", and "big hit AF (7R hour short 99 times big hit)" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

That is, in the special figure 2 lottery, if the big hit is won, the advantageous game state in which the time saving state continues until the special figure change reaches 99 times after the big hit game is configured is set. As a result, in the special figure 2 lottery whose execution frequency is lower than that of the special figure 1 lottery, it is advantageous for the player when the big hit is set at a probability three times or more lower than the probability of winning the small hit. It is possible to reliably provide the gaming state. Therefore, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, one time saving time setting) is set for the player who has a special experience of rare occurrence of jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, and thus has a desire to play. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

Each jackpot type defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, as in the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1. The number of round games to be played is different, and the jackpot AD is "15R", the jackpot AE is "12R", and the jackpot AF is "7R". As the number of round games in one jackpot game increases, the number of balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired by the player increases, so that the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It becomes a big jackpot type.

The normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec changes the value of the second per random number counter C4 defined corresponding to the regular symbol, with respect to the above normal symbol per random number table 202c (see FIG. 242(d)). They are different in that they are the same, and otherwise they are the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. Here, with reference to FIG. 334(d), the contents of the normal symbol-based random number 5 table 202ec will be described. FIG. 334(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number per symbol 5 table 202ec.

As shown in FIG. 334(d), in the normal symbol random number 5 table 202ec, the value referred to when performing the lottery per ordinary symbol in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbol in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The value to be referred to when executing the lottery per drawing is defined, and specifically, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”. "Hit" is defined, and in a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is defined as "hit" in the range of "5-204".

The ordinary figure per type selection 5 table 202ed is a data table for selecting the type per ordinary figure, and executes the ordinary symbol (general symbol) lottery by referring to the random number per ordinary symbol 5 table 202ec, in the case of winning Is referred to. In the fifth control example, as a per-university-play game executed when a per-universal-drawing is won in a low probability state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is provided so that the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640. A long open per game for opening operation and a short open per game for opening the electric accessory 640a so that the ball is more difficult to win in the second winning opening 640 than the long open per game Therefore, a different winning game is executed according to the type of a general figure selected at the time of winning.

Here, with reference to FIG. 336, the contents stipulated in the per-university drawing type selection 5 table 202ed will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the type selection 5 table 202ed per universal figure. As shown in FIG. 336( a ), the per-universal-drawing type selection table 202ed has two types of per-universal-drawing-type classification (in accordance with the probability state of the normal symbol and the acquired value of the second hit type counter C6). It is configured such that A for general drawings and B for general drawings are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state (universal figure low probability), the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is "0", "per ordinary figure A" is defined, " "B per universal figure" is defined in the range of 1 to 99". Further, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a high probability state (universal figure high accuracy), the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is "0,1" in the range "A per ordinary figure" is defined, "B per universal figure" is defined in the range of "2-99".

Next, with reference to FIG. 336(b), a description will be given of the relationship between the universal figure per category selected in the universal figure per category 5 selection table 202ed and the game state at the time when the universal figure per game is executed. do. FIG. 336(b) is a diagram showing a relationship between the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the per-universal figure type and the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the normal symbol per lottery is selected according to the gaming state set at the timing (normal symbol fluctuation start timing) at which the normal symbol (normal symbol) is hit, and the winning symbol is hit. When winning, the general-universal-game content is set according to the game state set at the timing of executing the general-universal-game (general-drawing variation stop timing). In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, since the game state is configured to shift in accordance with the lottery situation of the special symbol (special symbol) and the variation condition, it is independent of the special symbol lottery game. In the universal figure lottery game to be executed, different game states are set depending on the timing of executing the universal figure lottery and the timing of executing the universal figure per game that is executed when the winning figure is won. There is a case.

For example, when the general drawing lottery is executed during special figure fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) in a state where the time saving end condition is established, a high probability state of the normal symbol of the random number 5 table 202ec per normal symbol (universal symbol high The winning lottery is executed by using the determination value defined in (Probability). Then, in the case of winning, the universal figure fluctuation stops after a predetermined universal figure fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, and then the universal figure winning game is executed. Here, when the final time-saving change ends during the universal figure change, and the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the game state at the timing when the game per universal figure is executed. It will be.

In such a case, if the game mode of the per-university game is set according to the game state set at the time when the universal figure lottery is executed, despite the normal state being set, There is a problem in that the universal game per game (long open per game) that is executed during the time saving state is executed as the universal game and the player is provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special map 2 lottery). there were.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, the game state set at the timing of executing the universal figure game is determined, and the content of the universal figure game is set based on the determination result. As in the above-mentioned example, when the game state shifts to the normal state during the change of the universal figure, it is possible to execute the universal figure per game corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special drawing 2 lottery).

Specifically, if A per universal figure is selected (set) as the type per universal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the per universal figure game (when the electric accessory 640a is opened). Regardless, the game is executed per long opening. On the other hand, when the per-universal figure per B is selected (set) as the per-universal figure type, the game state set at the execution timing of the per-universal figure game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is a normal symbol. In the low probability state (Universal figure low probability), if the regular figure short opening per game, in the high probability state of the normal pattern (universal figure high accuracy), the regular figure long opening per game is executed Is prescribed.

Here, a description will be given of the content of the winning game of the universal figure long open per game and the universal figure short open per game, which is the universal figure per game. The universal figure long opening per game is a universal figure per game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (positioned in an open state) so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. After the second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first opening period), and then the closed state (waiting period) for 1.5 seconds and opened again for 0.5 seconds. (Second open period) A game is executed per universal figure. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the per-universal-drawing scenario (not shown). When executing the per-universal-drawing game, the per-universal-drawing scenario corresponding to the per-universal-drawing type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the per-universal-drawing scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-described per-universal-drawing per game flow.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the game is executed per universal figure long opening, it is configured to set two opening periods that secure a period in which the ball can win the second winning opening 640. doing. Then, of the two opening periods, when the first opening period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640, and the result of the determination is that the ball has not won in the second winning opening 640. If it is determined that the player is configured to display a caution screen (see FIG. 324(a)) for calling the player attention to play a game in which a ball is won in the second winning opening 640. There is.

With such a configuration, in the state where the normal state is set (the state where the left-handed game is being performed), the player who is not aware that the normal figure long opening per game (right-handed game) has been executed Against this, it is possible to perform the notification for executing the right-handed game again, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an unfavorable game result. Further, in the fifth control example, after the warning screen (see FIG. 324(a)) is displayed, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed after the waiting period of the predetermined period (1.5 seconds). It is configured to run.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) until the ball shot by the player performing the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. Has been done. Thereby, the player who has executed the right-handed game after seeing the display of the caution screen (see FIG. 324(a)) can easily make the second winning port 640 win the ball.

Further, in the fifth control example, when the universal figure hit scenario is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the ordinary figure hit game is ended, and the second prize is awarded during the ordinary figure hit game. Two types of per-universal-drawing ending conditions are set for ending the per-universal-drawing game when the number of balls winning the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, one).

The ball wins the second winning opening 640 when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the second opening period. The notification mode for indicating the fact is different. Specifically, if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the second opening period, it is highly possible that an appropriate game (right-handed game) has not been executed from the start stage of the game per universal figure. , It is configured to display a game explanation (a comment such as "Make sure to hit to the right during the game") so that an appropriate game can be played at the next game. This allows the player to be notified of the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, since the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period is not informed of the above-mentioned game explanation, the player repeatedly informs the contents of the game already grasped, and the game is repeated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the universal figure short opening per game, after the closed state (opening period) for 0.1 seconds, the universal figure per game for opening the electric accessory 640a for 0.1 second is executed. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the per-universal-drawing scenario (not shown). When executing the per-universal-drawing game, the per-universal-drawing scenario corresponding to the per-universal-drawing type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the per-universal-drawing scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-described per-universal-drawing per game flow.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned universal figure short opening per game is a universal figure per game in which the ball cannot be practically won in the second winning opening 640. .. In addition, this game per short opening per game, as shown in FIG. 336(b), is a game per game that is executed only during a low probability state (normal probability) of a normal symbol, and is described above. As usual, the universal figure short opening per game is completed 0.2 seconds after the game starts, so the universal figure short open per game is executed while the player is performing the left-handed game. Even if a right-handed game is played, the game is ended per game by the time the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to be won in the second winning port 640 during the game when the player is playing a short circuit.

It should be noted that the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot enter the second winning opening 640 during the game due to the opening of the universal figure short circuit. For example, the electric accessory 640a has a configuration of the electric accessory 640a. In the open state, a ball can be configured to flow down from the one end side to the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win the prize. It is advisable to arrange the second winning opening 640 at the position so that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is 0.5 seconds at the shortest. With this configuration, when a game is executed per universal short circuit opening, the ball that flows down on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. Cannot reach the other end side, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the winning game content of the universal figure per game is set according to the game state set at the timing when the universal figure per game is executed. For this reason, for example, in a time-saving state (a high degree of probability of a normal figure) that is highly likely to be won per a figure, the game of a normal figure is won based on the winning of that figure and the game is in a normal state (low figure of a normal figure). Even if it is executed in a state), it is possible to make it difficult for the game to be executed per universal figure long opening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 336(a), in the fifth control example, regardless of the game state, the ratio of selecting a type per universal figure (per universal figure A) in which a game is executed per long universal opening is selected. Is a low probability state of ordinary symbols (low probability of normal figure) and a high probability state of normal symbols (high accuracy of high rate of normal figure). At the time of probability, it is configured to be selected with a probability of 2%. By configuring in this way, you can win per universal figure when the general figure is uncertain, and win per regular figure when the general figure is more accurate than when the game is executed per general figure when the general figure is uncertain. When the universal figure per game is executed when the figure is low, the probability that the universal figure long open per game is executed when the figure is low can be increased. Therefore, even when the configuration for setting the game content of the universal figure per game according to the game state at the time when the universal figure per game is executed, it is executed when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. It is possible to increase the probability that the popular figure per game is a universal figure long open game, and to let the player pay attention to what game content the universal figure per game is executed.

The variation pattern 5 table 202ee is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and a special symbol lottery ( Various variation patterns (variation times) are selected based on the lottery result of the special drawing lottery) and the set game state. The basic technical idea of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee is the same as the various variation patterns used in each control example or each embodiment described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted, and the fifth variation will be omitted. The description will be continued focusing on the characteristic contents of the fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee used in the control example.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 339(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 5 table 202ee. As shown in FIG. 339(a), the fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee is referenced when the gaming state is the normal state and the normal fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee1 is referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern 5 table for time saving 202 202ee2 is provided, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected by using the data table corresponding to the game state set when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339(b), the contents of the normal-use variable pattern 5 table 202ee1 included in the variable pattern 5 table 202ee will be described. FIG. 339(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal-use variation pattern 5 table 202ee1. As shown in FIG. 339(b), the variation pattern 5 table 202ee includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations after the normal state is set, the special symbol lottery result, and the obtained variation type counter. Different variation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the special figure 1 lottery is mainly configured to perform the game, and the second special symbol ( As a pattern for executing the special drawing 2), the special drawing 2 lottery corresponding to the special drawing 2 hold that is held and stored at the time of the end of the time saving state and the long open per lot in the general drawing lottery are executed. There is a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on that a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the long win game.

Further, in the fifth control example, as the fluctuation effect corresponding to the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time saving final fluctuation effect capable of notifying the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the start of the time saving final change is executed. Is configured. Then, the effect result of the time-saving final fluctuation effect is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the time-saving state ends (in the normal state) ends.

The variation pattern 5 table 202ee corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure variation times 1 to 4 as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation executed during the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, if the special symbol variation first time after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is “out”, the obtained variation type counter CS1 "Short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of, and in the case of "hit (big hit, small hit)", "short hit A (2 seconds)" is selected. In addition, if the special symbol fluctuation second time after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is “out”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired Regardless of "short deviation A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, in the case of "hit", "short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, special symbol fluctuation after the normal state is set When the third time is the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is “out”, “short deviation A (0.5 seconds)” regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected, and in the case of “win”, “short hit C (1 second)” is selected. And, if the special symbol variation fourth time after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is “out”, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. Regardless of this, “short deviation A (0.5 seconds)” is selected, and in the case of “hit”, “short hit D (0.5 seconds)” is selected.

With such a configuration, when the special figure 2 holding number is the maximum number (4 pieces) at the time when the time saving state ends, the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 holding wins (small hit , Big hit) period (the period during which the second special symbol (special map 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the winning) and special lottery results of special map 2 lottery corresponding to special figure 2 hold It is possible to unify the period until it is out of order to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, regardless of whether or not there is winning information for winning in the special figure 2 hold, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable simply by controlling the result display for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final fluctuation. It is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state without giving it. In addition, even when the winning number of the special figure 2 hold wins, the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed can be unified (two seconds after the normal state is set). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special figure 2 are held for winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 339(b), as the variation time of the special symbol 2 variation in the normal state, when the special symbol variation number is “5 times or more”, the special symbol 2 retention number at the time when the time saving state ends Since it exceeds the limit, the game is executed per normal figure long opening per normal state, and it is the special map 2 lottery executed based on the ball winning in the second winning opening 640. A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing is selected, and a display mode for indicating that the present is the special figure 2 variation period during the series production based on the selected variation pattern ( An effect mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern 5 table 222ee2 that is referred to when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 340 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern of special figure lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In the fifth control example, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery in which the lottery result which is advantageous to the player with respect to the special drawing 1 lottery is likely to be executed more easily than the normal state, so that the time saving state is When set, the right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 is configured so that it becomes difficult for the ball to win the first winning opening 64, which is a trigger for executing the special drawing 1 lottery, when the right-handed game is played. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is executed based on the special figure 1 hold already acquired at the jackpot game end timing when the time saving state is set. It will be one lottery.

Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, the big hit is won, and in the state where the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game (time saving initial setting state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640. Since the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained because the easy game is not played, and the special figure 1 hold is held at that time, the special figure 1 lottery is executed.

In this case, as a variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 change cannot be executed until the special figure 1 change ends, and the game cannot be smoothly performed during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation executed during the time saving state. Accordingly, even if the time saving state is set in a state in which the maximum number (4) of the special figure 1 reservations is secured, the special figure 1 fluctuation can be executed without inhibiting the special figure 2 fluctuation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the big hit game end screen is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation is executed even after the big hit game is finished. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the change in Toku-zu 1 is changing in a short time during the time saving state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big hit, the jackpot game end screen which is continuously displayed is configured to be shifted to the big hit game screen.

The universal figure variation pattern selection table 202ef is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol variation (general figure variation), and a game state at the time of executing the universal figure variation, A different variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the drawing variation result of the universal figure variation and the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS2.

Here, the contents of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef will be described with reference to FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the universal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef. As shown in FIG. 338, in the fifth control example, as the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation, a short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time longer than the short fluctuation is set. (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected.

Then, when the long variation is selected as the variation time of the universal figure variation, the universal figure variation effect is configured to be executed. In addition, in the fifth control example, the universal figure variation effect for suggesting that the regular figure long opening is won is executed only during the period when the normal state in which it is difficult to win the universal figure long opening is set. With this configuration, the long fluctuation (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is specified only in the data table referred to during the normal state.

Specifically, if the gaming state at the time the universal figure fluctuation is executed is the normal state (low probability state of the ordinary symbol), and the lottery result of the universal figure fluctuation is "A per universal figure", obtain When the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 499", "Public Long Fluctuation A (30 seconds)" is in the range of "500 to 999" and "Public Long Fluctuation B (60 seconds)". However, when the drawing result of the universal figure fluctuation is "B per universal figure", the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is within the range of "0 to 999", and the "universal figure short variation is". A (2 seconds)" is specified. In addition, when the drawing result of the universal figure fluctuation is “out”, the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is within the range of “0 to 996”, the “universal figure short variation A (2 seconds)” is “ “Public figure long fluctuation A (30 seconds)” is defined in “997,998”, and “Public figure long fluctuation B (60 seconds)” is defined in “999”. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of execution of universal figure fluctuation is a time saving state (high probability state of ordinary symbols), regardless of the result of lottery of general figure variation and the value of the second variation type counter CS2, "Universal figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of the universal figure fluctuation is “A per universal figure”, that is, when the universal figure long opening is reached, the universal figure long variation is the universal figure long fluctuation time. It is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, the player can expect the player to win the long opening of the universal figure by executing the universal figure variation effect. Also, different long fluctuation times (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as long fluctuations for which the universal figure fluctuation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the universal figure fluctuation effect to the start of the game per universal figure long opening, for example, at the time when the universal figure fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the game of stopping the firing of the ball, waiting the elapse of a specific period (for example, 60 seconds), and then firing the ball again.

In addition, although it is a little, even if the general figure fluctuation is executed, even if the general figure variation effect is executed, the general figure long variation is selected. It is possible to leave the possibility that you have not been won per long opening figure. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player's universal figure variation effect to the end.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the long fluctuation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected when "Public hit per A", which is the long hit for the universal figure, is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases when "A per common figure" is won, "short fluctuations" or "middle fluctuations (10 to 15) that are longer than "short fluctuations" and shorter than "long fluctuations" Second) may be selectable, and when a variation pattern other than “long variation” is selected, it is preferable that the general figure variation effect is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the game per universal figure long opening without executing the universal figure fluctuation effect, so that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the game per ordinary figure long opening and to shoot the ball at the predicted timing.

Further, in the fifth control example, if the drawing result of the universal figure fluctuation is "between universal figure B" in which "a universal figure short game" is executed as a universal figure game, "long variation" is Although it is configured not to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and “long fluctuation” may be selected.

The small hit type selection 5 table 202eg is a data table referred to when selecting a small hit type set when a small hit is won in the special drawing lottery. This small hit type selection table 202eg is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 244) of the above-described A1 embodiment in that the contents of the defined small hit type are changed, Otherwise it is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Here, the small hit type selection 5 table 202eg will be described with reference to FIG. 337. FIG. 337(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202eg, and FIG. 337(b) schematically shows the contents defined in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 5 table 202eg1. 337(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table 202eg2.

The jackpot scenario 5 table 202eh and the jackpot scenario 5 table 202ei are the same as the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the jackpot scenario table 202ab of the above-described A1 embodiment, which are defined in the fifth embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the contents of the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the control example, and since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fifth control example will be described. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fifth control example deletes the scenario counter 203aa and the specific control flag 203ab from the RAM 203 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the main controller 110 of the A1 embodiment described above. The difference is that the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is added, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of a plurality of set time saving ending conditions.

In the fifth control example, the counter value set in the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is configured to be different according to the jackpot type that is won. As a result, the ease of ending the time saving state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of the jackpot, but also in the jackpot type to be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 341(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341(a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 of the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 251(a)) in place of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. The difference is that 222 ea is provided. Note that here, differences from the above-described variation pattern selection table 222a will be mainly described, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea, and FIG. 342(b) is a variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea that has the time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to 222ea3.

As shown in FIG. 342(a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea has three variation pattern selection tables in association with the gaming state and the variation state, and specifically, the gaming state is the normal state. Normal-use fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 referred to in a certain case, time-saving use fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 referred to in the case of a time saving state, and time saving final use referred to in the case of a final change of a time saving state The variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea3.

Regarding the above-described normal-use fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 and time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2, the same technical idea as the above-described control examples or the fluctuation pattern selection table described in each embodiment is used. Is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is selected. , Its detailed description is omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time saving state, that is, when selecting the production mode of the variation effect for the special figure variation when the time saving ending condition is satisfied by executing the variation. In the data table to be performed, in addition to the symbol type of the fluctuation, the lottery result, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c), the presence/absence of a pending reservation (the winning information storage area 223a) It is configured such that different variation patterns (effect modes) are selected based on the determination result of whether or not the winning information stored in the winning information includes winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342(b), when the time saving final fluctuation is the special drawing 1, that is, among the time saving ending conditions, one of the common time saving ending conditions is “the special drawing fluctuation count 99 times. When the special map fluctuation when "is established" is the special map 1 fluctuation, "Special map 1 time saving final" is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the lottery result of the fluctuation, the special map 2 number of reserved balls To be done.

Next, if the final time saving fluctuation is the special figure 2, and the lottery result (the success/failure determination result) of the fluctuation is “win” and the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is “0”, the fluctuation pattern is “time saving final If "A" is selected, the special map 2 holding number of balls is "1, 2," and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 holding, "time saving final A" is selected as the variation pattern. When the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time-saving final B" is selected as the variation pattern.

Then, when the lottery result of the fluctuation (the result of the judgment) is “win”, the special figure 2 holding ball number is “3”, and the winning information indicating the win is included in the special figure 2 hold, the fluctuation When "time saving final C" is selected as a pattern and the winning information indicating winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final D" is selected as the variation pattern.

On the other hand, when the time saving final fluctuation is the special figure 2, the lottery result (the success/failure determination result) of the fluctuation is “out”, and the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is “0”, the fluctuation pattern is “time saving final E Is selected, and the special map 2 number of reserved balls is “1,2”, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation, “time saving final B” is selected as the variation pattern, If the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final F" is selected as the variation pattern.

In addition, when the lottery result of the fluctuation (the result of the judgment) is “out”, the special figure 2 holding number of balls is “3”, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 holding, the fluctuation When "time saving final D" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final E" is selected as the variation pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 341(b). FIG. 341(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 251(b)) in the state storage area 223ea. Series effect flag 223eb, pseudo series effect flag 223ec, time saving final variation flag 223ed, small hit attention flag 223ee, non-variation prize flag 223ef, special figure variation time counter 223eg, general figure variation time counter 223eh, continuous sequence effect flag 223ej, The difference is that a series production counter 223ek is added.

The state storage area 223ea is a storage area for temporarily storing the current game state, and stores information included in the state command output from the main control device 110. In this control example, in the state storage area 223ea, information indicating the gaming state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating the time saving end condition of the time saving state, and the hit type (big hit type, Information indicating the small hit type) is stored. Then, the effect mode is variably set based on the various information stored in the state storage area 223ea.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the state storage area 223ea, in addition to the information indicating the current game state, the game state set in the past is temporarily stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the variation based on the transition status of the gaming state (which gaming state has transitioned to which gaming state).

The series effect flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied. Here, in the present control example, in the normal state, if a series effect is set as the variation pattern of the winning special drawing lottery, or if a long variation of the normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series effect Is configured so that

The series effect flag 223eb is set in the general effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 371) when the series effect is set (C4207 in FIG. 371) or in the hit variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 373). , When a series of effects is set (C4402 of FIG. 373: Yes), it is set to ON (C4208 of FIG. 371, C4403 of FIG. 373), and in the small hit related command processing (see C3504 of FIG. 366(a)). , Is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small hit game (C3701 in FIG. 366(a)). Further, in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370) and the general-purpose effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371), it is referred to when determining whether a new series of effects can be executed. Then, in the series production update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375), when it is determined that the continuous execution condition for the series production is not satisfied, the process is set to OFF (see C4613 in FIG. 375).

As described above, in the present control example, a series of effects is executed by a plurality of triggers (special drawing lottery, general drawing lottery). Even in the case of such a configuration, by using the series production flag 223eb, it is possible to prevent the series production from being redundantly set (executed).

The pseudo series effect flag 223ec is a flag for indicating that the special drawing variation lottery result is out of order and the execution condition of the series effect has been established, and the series effect is set as the variation effect of the out-of-special figure fluctuation. It is the one that is set to on. This pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to have a lower priority than the above-described series effect flag 223eb, and in the state where the same series effect is being executed, the case where the series effect flag 223eb is set to ON The effect setting process is different from that in the case where the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to ON.

Specifically, in the general figure effect setting process (see C4117 of FIG. 371), when the series effect flag 223eb is set to ON (for example, the series effect is executed as a hit variation effect of special figure variation). In the case), even if the universal figure variation satisfies the execution condition of the series production, a new series production is not executed, whereas the pseudo series production flag 223ec is set to ON. If it is (for example, when a series effect is executed as a deviation effect of the special figure fluctuation), the general figure fluctuation satisfies the execution condition of the series effect and also satisfies the special condition. In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 371).

In this way, in the state where the same series of effects is being executed, a process of executing a new series of effects (a process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed) is executed based on the execution timing of the series of effects being executed. Since it is possible to change whether or not to perform, it is possible to diversify the effect contents of the series effect. Moreover, since the production mode of the series production is configured to be replaced only when the production result that is more advantageous to the player than the production result of the series production being executed can be displayed, the production mode of the series production being executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the series of effects while expecting that the variable.

The time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is a flag for indicating that the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, and is set to ON when the current special figure fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state. .. By setting the time saving final variation flag 223ed to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for time saving final variation.

The small hit caution flag 223ee is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed the specific area even after a predetermined period has elapsed during the small hit game, and a predetermined period (1 second) since the small hit game was started. It is set to ON when the sphere does not pass through the specific area even after. When the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON, a guide display mode (see FIG. 325(a)) for performing a right hitting game during the small hit game is displayed. Then, it is set to OFF at the timing when the small hit game ends.

The non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and at the time when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is set to ON when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, to win a ball at the first winning opening 64 and to execute the special figure 1 lottery. Then, a general drawing lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is per general opening long opening, the electric accessory 640a Since the game is executed per universal figure long opening that is opened long, a right-handed game is performed to win the ball in the second winning opening 640.

In other words, when the game is being played normally, the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in the state where the normal state is set, when the game is just passing the ball through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth control example, the ball shot by the left-handed game is launched by the right-handed game rather than the rate of passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left-handed game area. It is configured such that the rate at which the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the normal state, if you play a right-handed game and perform a malicious game that attempts to execute only the general drawing lottery, even if you win per long opening by the general drawing lottery, It is configured not to execute the variable effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who performs the right-handed game in the normal state to understand the timing at which the game is executed per universal figure long opening.

The special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg and the general figure fluctuation time counter 223eh are counters for measuring each symbol fluctuation time, and when the symbol fluctuation is executed, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of this time is set. It Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113. By using the values of the special figure variation time counter 223eg and the universal figure variation time counter 223eh, the remaining time of each symbol variation time during the symbol variation can be determined.

The continuous series effect flag 223ej is a continuous series effect that is executed when the waiting period for fluctuation of special figure 2 is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more during the period during which the series effect is executed (see FIG. 317(b)). ) Is a flag for indicating that it is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series effect is executed.

The series production counter 223ek is a counter for updating the production scenario of the series production, and when the series production is set, a value corresponding to the production period of the series production executed this time is set, and the value is set. , Is updated in the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) that is periodically executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the series effect counter 223ek is set to a value for indicating a period until the series effect is completed to the end (the effect in which the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 322(b)) is executed). It is configured, and an effect mode according to the updated counter value is set. Then, during the execution of a series of production, the production end condition (for example, the condition established when the ball does not enter the second winning opening 640 during the game per universal figure and the special figure 2 hold cannot be acquired) is established. However, when ending the series production, the production mode for indicating the end of the series production is set, and the value of the series production counter 223ek is reset to 0.

The re-reading flag 223em is a flag for indicating that the pre-reading process needs to be executed again for the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and the pre-reading process needs to be executed again. If set to on. In the fifth control example, as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation in the time saving state, the variation effect (time saving final variation effect) in which the effect mode based on the prefetch result of the special figure 2 suspension is set is configured to be executed. Therefore, the prefetch processing is executed for the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure variation period, and the effect mode corresponding to the prefetch result is set.

The re-reading flag 223em described above is set to ON when the final special map variation is being executed, and when a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the elapse of the specific timing of the final special figure variation period, it is set to ON. In this case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the prefetching process for the special figure 2 suspension is executed again, and the variation effect based on the result of the prefetching process is executed.

The reserved upper limit flag 223en is a flag for determining whether or not the special map 2 number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit value (4), and when the special map 2 reserved ball number reaches the upper limit value (4). Set on. Then, it is referred to when setting the production mode of the time saving final variation production. Specifically, in the fifth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final special map variation in the time saving state, a holding ball for obtaining the special figure 2 hold during the first period of the final special map variation period. The acquisition effect can be executed, and the time saving final fluctuation effect for indicating the lottery result of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold can be executed during the second period after the first period. If the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON at the start of the first period, the time saving final variation effect is executed using the first period and the second period. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for acquiring a new special figure 2 hold for a player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit. Along with the game that can be suppressed and always holds the special figure 2 hold near the upper limit value, that is, for the player who is continuously executing the right-handed game, the execution period of the time-saving final fluctuation effect is extended. Can be set. Therefore, the player can be continuously played, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223eq is a flag for indicating that the time saving final fluctuation effect is being executed as the fluctuation effect corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation, and is normally executed from the second period of the time saving final fluctuation period. The time saving final variation effect is set to ON when it is executed from the first period set before the second period. That is, at the start of the first period of the short-term final fluctuation period, the number of special figure 2 holdings has reached the upper limit, and during the first period, the short-term final fluctuation production (production using the first period and the second period). Is set to ON when it is determined to be executed, it is determined whether the executed flag 223eq is set to ON at the start of the second period, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, it is already set to the second Since the effect mode executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. Then, it is set to OFF when a stop command corresponding to the final reduction in time saving is received.

The special 2 prize flag 223er is a flag for indicating that a ball has been won in the second winning port 640 during the game per game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). It is set to ON when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). This special 2 prize flag 223er is, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning port 640 in the per-universal game per-game update process (see FIG. 376(a)) (C4701 in FIG. 376(a): Yes), set to ON (see C4705 in FIG. 376(a)), and referred to in the series production update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) to determine whether or not to continue the series production (FIG. 375). 375, C4608). In the process of C4608, when it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (C4608 of FIG. 375: No), the special figure 2 change is not executed, and the end condition of the series production is satisfied. Therefore, a process (C4612) for ending the series of effects is executed.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 343 to 359. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is regularly (in this control example, at 2 msec intervals) started. There are an interrupt process 5 and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process will be performed. The processing and the main processing will be described. In the fifth control example, the contents described in each control example and each embodiment described above are given different reference numerals for the sake of convenience of description, and some of the description may be repeated. Regarding the parts where detailed description is omitted for the same elements as those described in each control example and each embodiment, the content described in each control example and each embodiment described above is applied. Is. Further, the above-described control examples and the technical idea described in each embodiment are naturally applied to the fifth control example, and have been described in each control example and each embodiment described above. The modified example and the added example are naturally applied to the fifth control example.

FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 5 is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process 5, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (C101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are updated (C103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are each incremented by one. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999, 99, 239, 239, 99, 99 in this embodiment, respectively), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is a process for displaying, and the special symbol variation process 5 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). .. After that, the starting winning process 5 associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 5 and the starting winning process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 344 to 349.

After the start winning process 5 (C105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process 5 which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. After the normal symbol variation process 5 is executed, the through gate passage process 5 accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passage processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352.

After the through gate passage process 5 is executed, the V entrance passage process 5 is executed (C108), and then the V passage process 5 (C109) is executed. Here, details of the V entrance passage process 5 and the V passage process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 353 and 354.

After executing the V passage process 5 (C109), the firing control process is executed (C110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 5 is ended. .. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the special symbol variation process 5 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 5 (C104). This special symbol variation process 5 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in the three symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation process 5, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (C201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special. During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (C201: Yes), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, and thus the present process is ended.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (C201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (special symbol changing) (C202), and the first symbol display If the display mode of the devices 37a and 37b is not changing (during special figure change) (C202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e indicating the value of the holding ball number (special figure 2 holding ball number command) is set (C206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start processing 5 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (C213). The special symbol variation start process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 345.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (C204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) A value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (C209). If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) is 0 (C209: No), that is, if there is no holding sphere for newly starting the special symbol fluctuation, this processing is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is subtracted (C210), and by the processing of C210. Set (C211) a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of C211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (C212). After that, the processing of C213 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when performing a new special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation), before the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter (N1), the special symbol 2 It is configured to determine the value of the holding ball number counter (N2), and when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter (N2) is larger than 0, the second special symbol (special diagram 2) It is configured to execute a process for starting a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (special symbol variation start process 5 (see C213)). Thereby, the second special symbol can be changed with priority over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is changing (C202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (C214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (C214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (C214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is set (C215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) described later with reference to FIG. 345. When this special symbol variation start processing 5 is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery Done. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set. Depending on the jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE and jackpot AF, if the lottery result of the special symbol is jackpot, jackpot according to the value of the jackpot type counter C5 Any one of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE and small hit E is determined.

In the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is configured to notify the player of the lottery result of this special symbol (decision result of each type of counter). If the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is out. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

Then, the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and when the big hit AA is determined, a blue LED in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a mode showing the big hit AA (for example, the alphabet "a"). When the big hit AB is determined, the big hit AB is turned on in a form (for example, a form imitating the alphabet “b”), and when the big hit AC is decided, the big hit When the jackpot AD is determined by lighting in a mode showing AC (for example, a model imitating the alphabet "c"), it is lit in a mode showing the jackpot AD (for example, a model imitating the alphabet "d"). Let

In addition, even when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, as in the case of winning the big hit described above, the red LED is used for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit) It is turned on in a mode according to AD, small hit AE and small hit E). It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode showing the contents of each hit type (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b are configured to be lit in a manner of being formed from a lighting manner corresponding to each winning type, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or The same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b even when the determined winning types are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of this special symbol and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode that is divided to a degree that the player can distinguish that the special symbol lottery results are different. ..

After the processing of C215 is finished, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (the lottery result this time) is a jackpot of the special symbol ( C216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of the special symbol (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this jackpot Start setting (setting for jackpots such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

When the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the jackpot of this time is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202eh. The method of updating the jackpot scenario table is the same as the content described above with reference to FIG. 248 of the first A1 control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After finishing the process of C218, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit medium flag 203i are set to ON (C219), the value of the hour/short time counter 203g is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225). ), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C216: No), the time saving update processing is executed (C221). The details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters (second special symbol (special figure 2)) for establishing the time saving ending condition are set. The number of fluctuations, the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is updated. After executing the processing of C221, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a small hit (C222). When it is determined that the small hit is a small hit (C222: Yes), the small hit start setting processing 5 (C223) is executed. Then, the above-described processing of C225 is executed, and this processing ends. The details of the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 347.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (is out) (C222: No), this process is ended as it is.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the time saving update process is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation ends (the timing when the special symbol variation time elapses). By configuring in this way, for example, when “special figure 2 fluctuation number of times 1” is set as the corresponding time saving end condition which is part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. Even if it is done, it is possible to shorten the period until the fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 is stopped, so that it is possible to secure the period for obtaining the suspension of Toku-zu 2.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the fifth control example, and may be configured to execute the time saving update process at the start of variation of the special symbol. In order to do so, it may be configured to set "special figure 2 number of fluctuations 2 times" as the corresponding shortening condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 5 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area of 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol deviation" It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, as well as performing the lottery (whether or not to judge).

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 5, first, the first random number counter stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserve sphere storage area (special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b) The respective values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are acquired (C231). Next, the special symbol lottery result based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1, special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) It is acquired (C232), and the process proceeds to C233.

Specifically, if the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired, the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (Figure The four random number values set in 334(b)) are compared one by one. As described above, four random numbers of “0 to 3” are set as the random number value of the big jackpot of the first special symbol, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 and the random number of these jackpots. When the numerical values match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Similarly, the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 and the two random number values “10, 11” which are small numbers set in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (see FIG. 334(b)) If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, a random number value determined to be off in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and a big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined to be a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit depending on the type of special symbol can be made different, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher small hit probability. Can be played as a game.

In this control example, the first random number 5 table 202ea is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won as a small hit, but only one of the special symbols is a small hit. The first random number 5 table 202ea may be set so as to be won. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set to a random number value which is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 corresponding to the second special symbol is set. It is good to set it so that only a random number that is a small hit for special symbols is set. With such a configuration, the privilege (small hit game) that can be given to the player can be changed according to the type of the special symbol, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present control example, the predetermined range of the value of the first random number counter C1 (0 to 3) is made to correspond to the jackpot of the special symbol, and the range other than that (4 to 999) corresponds to the type of the special symbol. Although it corresponds to the small hit of the special symbol, as a configuration other than that, for example, a value of a part (for example, 0 to 2) of the big hit in the first special symbol, a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a winning range.

Further, in this control example, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 5 table 202ea are used to perform special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, out), As a configuration other than that, it may be configured to perform a lottery for a special symbol by using a plurality of hit random number tables, for example, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit using the first random number table. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit using the second random number table. It may be configured. By performing a lottery for special symbols by using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of special symbols can be set more randomly, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of operating the lottery result of special symbols. ..

In this control example, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the special symbol is drawn, but other configurations may be used, for example, the values of a plurality of random number counters and the first You may draw a special symbol by using the random number 5 table 202ea. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a win.

Returning to FIG. 345, the description will be continued. In the process of C233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of C232 is a jackpot of the special symbol (C233). When it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb corresponding to the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery this time (( C234), the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (C235), the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C236), and the big hit fluctuation pattern determined this time is set. The corresponding variation pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C237), which is a small hit. When it is determined (C237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 5 table 202eg corresponding to the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery this time (C238), and the special symbol and the small amount. The display mode at the time of small hit corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), the small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (C240), and the variation corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time is set. A pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of C237, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (C237: No), that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of scope, then the special symbol is excluded. The display mode at the time is set (C241), the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (C242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of deviation determined this time is set (C243), This process ends.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol is determined. If the lottery result is wrong, the variation pattern is different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is executed, the shorter the variation time is, and the variation pattern is easily determined. This makes it possible to shorten the period until the lottery result of special symbols is displayed without giving a privilege to the player (off) as the number of reserved balls increases, so it is executed per unit time In order to increase the number of lots of special symbols to be played, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play a game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen one time of the special symbol fluctuation time, so that it is possible to prevent the special symbol from changing during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

In this control example, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is executed, but other than that, for example, the special symbol Even if it is configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed, on the condition that the number of reserved balls becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3) while the fluctuation is occurring. good. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is changing.

In addition, in this control example, the variation pattern is made different based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved ball The variation pattern may be different based on the number, or the variation pattern having a longer variation time may be more easily determined as the number of reserved balls is larger. Further, for the number of reserved balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern, a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in which the special symbol variation start process is preferentially executed may be used, or the special side subject to the special symbol variation start process executed this time Only the value of the number of reserved balls in the design may be used.

Next, the time saving update process (C221) will be described with reference to FIG. 346. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 has a high normal symbol. It indicates a probability state, and if the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. In the fifth control example, two game states can be set. Specifically, two game states can be set: normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) and time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) Is configured. That is, in the present control example, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, there is a case where a time saving state is used as a term indicating a high probability state of a normal symbol, and a normal state is used as a term indicating a low probability state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (C251: No), the hour/hour state has not been set, and thus this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the present time is in the hour/hour state, the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (C252), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure change this time is a change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). When the special map fluctuation this time is the fluctuation of special figure 2 (C253: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is decremented by 1 (C254), and the remaining short time count command indicating the values of various counters is set. (C255), and the process proceeds to C256.

In the processing of C255, the remaining short time count command indicating the value of the medium hour counter 203g and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ea is set. The remaining short time count command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 as a part of the state command indicating the game state by the external output process (see C1001 of FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later. Is output. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, if it is determined that the status command (remaining short time count command) is received in the command determination processing 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360) (C3212 in FIG. 360), it is included in the received command. Information is extracted, and the current game state (remaining shortened number of times) is stored in the state storage area 223ea. This makes it possible to predict (determine) the remaining period of the time saving state currently set by the voice lamp control device 113, and to set the presentation mode according to the remaining period of the time saving state.

In this control example, each time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 346) is executed, the main control device 110 outputs the remaining time shortened number command for indicating the remaining time shortened number. , Not limited to this, for example, to output to the voice lamp control device 113 a time saving end condition command for indicating the time saving end condition set at the time when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) In the above configuration, the time saving end condition is extracted from the time saving end condition command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side, and thereafter, the number of times of receiving the command (fluctuation pattern command) indicating the special figure change output from the main control device 110 side. May be accumulated, and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied may be determined based on the accumulated value. With this configuration, the processing load on the main controller 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if the current special figure fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 2 (C253: No), the processes of C254 and C255 are not performed, and the process proceeds to C256.

In the processing of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (C256). When the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (C256: Yes), it means that the hour/hour end condition (common hour/hour end condition) is satisfied, and therefore it is determined whether the corresponding hour/hour end condition is satisfied among the hour/hour end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to C260.

In the process of C256, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is not 0 (C256: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is 0 (C258). When the value of the fluctuation counter 203ea is 0 (C258: Yes), the time saving end condition (corresponding time saving end condition) is satisfied. The value of the time saving/medium counter 203g for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, in the process of C258, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is not 0 (C258: No), this process is ended as it is.

In the processing of C260, the game state is set to the normal state (C260), the state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this processing is ended.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 346) is, among the time saving end conditions, a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be satisfied based on the number of times the special symbol has changed (a part of the common time saving end condition, and It is configured such that the satisfaction status of the corresponding time saving end condition) can be determined, and when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the parameter values for satisfying the other time saving end conditions are also reset. This makes it possible to unify the state after the time saving state is ended, regardless of which parameter value the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the present control example, as the time saving end condition, a common time saving end condition that is commonly set regardless of the time saving state set based on which jackpot type (the first end condition that is achieved when the jackpot is won, the small hit) It is set corresponding to the second end condition that is satisfied after the game ends, the third end condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure fluctuations (cumulative of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times, and the jackpot type. However, the condition for ending the time saving state is not limited to this, and the corresponding time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 reaches a predetermined number) is set. For example, a small hitting end condition may be set which is satisfied when the number of small hits reaches a predetermined number of times or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times. In this case, the small hit end condition may be set as the common time saving end condition or may be set as the corresponding time saving end condition. In addition, when the final lottery means for drawing out whether to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special figure variation) is provided, and the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result that ends the time saving state Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at which timing the time-saving state ends, so that it is possible to execute the game in the time-saving state while giving the player a feeling of excitement. .. In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation is obtained as the lottery result of the special symbol) is satisfied during the time saving state, various parameters related to the time saving end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only when the special jackpot type is selected, the time saving state is set, and until a predetermined period elapses after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 30 times). It may be configured such that various parameters related to the time saving end condition are not updated. With such a configuration, it is possible to set the period in which the time-saving state continues without fail, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, although the small hit game is executed, the V winning opening 650a is provided with a determining means capable of determining that the ball has not won, and by the determining means, the V winning opening 650a has no winning ball. It may be configured such that the time saving compulsory termination condition that is satisfied when it is discriminated is set as the common time saving termination condition. With such a configuration, the small hit type set when the small hit is won is determined, and the result of the determination is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball in a specific area within the V winning opening 650a. When it is determined that it is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player when passing through (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game in which a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player after the end is not set) It is possible to penalize a player who plays an illegal game such as aiming for the next small hit, without firing the ball during the small hit game.

Next, the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) will be described with reference to FIG. 347. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process 5 (C223). In this small hitting start setting process 5 (C223), a scenario for opening and closing the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery is set. The process is executed.

In the small hit start setting process 5 (C223), first, a scenario (hit scenario) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario 5 table 202ei (C291). Next, a small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined in the V passing big hit type value is set (C292), a small hit start corresponding to the small hit type is set (C293), and the small hit medium flag 203k is set. Is set to ON (C294), and this processing ends. The detailed updating method of the small hit scenario (hit scenario) in this processing is the same as that of the above-described A1 embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 348, the starting winning process 5 (C105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 5 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) in the present embodiment. The start winning process 5 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the first winning port (winning port) 64 or the second winning port (winning port) 640 is won. This is a process for determining whether or not there is a (start prize), acquiring various random number counters when the start prize exists, and executing a holding process for the value.

When the start winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (starting prize) in the first winning opening (winning hole) 64 (C301). Here, the entrance into the first entrance (winning hole) 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is set. It is acquired (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (C303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance (prize) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance (prize) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter If the value (N1) of 203d is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning slot (winning slot) 64 (C301: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (C303: Yes), The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (C304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of C305, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) described above. , Each of the second random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, the variation type counter CS1 among the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 It is stored in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from C307 to C312, the same processing is performed with respect to the processing from C301 to C306 for the winning of the second entrance (winning entrance) 640. For the winning of the second entrance (winning hole) 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is executed, the other processes are the same, so the details Detailed description is omitted. Then, in the processing of C307, when it is determined that the ball has not won the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C307: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 203e (N2) is less than 4 If not (C309: No), the prefetch process 5 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). Then, this process is completed.

Next, the prefetch processing 5 (C313) will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing 5 (C313). When the prefetch process 5 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (C321). When there is no new winning (C321: No), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C322).

In the processing of C322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C322: Yes), by the processing of C306 or C312 of the starting winning processing 5 (see C105 of FIG. 348). Using the various counter values acquired, special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (see FIG. 334(b)), special figure 1 big hit type selection 5 table 202eb1 (see FIG. 335(b)) and special figure 1 small hit type selection 5 Based on the table 202eg1 (see FIG. 337(b)), the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the process of C322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (C322: No), the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 (see FIG. 334(c)), the special symbol FIG. 2 Based on the jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 (see FIG. 335(c)) and the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eg2 (see FIG. 337(c)), the lottery result, jackpot type, and jackpot type are acquired. (C324) and C325 are performed. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the process of C323 or C324 described above is set ( C325). Then, this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the prefetch processing 5 (see C313 in FIG. 349) in the fifth control example, when special figure variation based on the corresponding winning information is executed in addition to the prefetch result described above. The variation pattern (variation time) that is set is also configured to be distinguishable in advance. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is also acquired by the process of C306 of the start winning process 5 (see C105 of FIG. 348) or the process of C312, and the C323 of the prefetch process 5 (see C313 of FIG. 349). Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 5 table 202ee (see FIG. 339), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. There is. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information held and stored will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, the normal symbol variation process 5 (C106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 5 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (C106) is executed in the timer interruption process 5 (see FIG. 343), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a. It is a process for controlling such as.

In the normal symbol variation process 5, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting (C601). The normal symbol (the second symbol) is in the midst of being displayed in the second symbol display device 83 to indicate the hit and in the middle of being controlled to open/close the electric accessory 640a. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (C601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hitting (C601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (C604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is decremented by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (C606). In the processing of C606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the hour/short state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired by the process of C607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec for high probability (see FIG. 334(d)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (C609). ). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 334(d)).

In the process of C608, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (C608: No), the process proceeds to C610. In the process of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of C607 and a low value. Based on the random number per normal symbol 5 table 202ec (see FIG. 334(d)) for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (C610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 334(d)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of C609 or C610, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (C611), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (C611: Yes), Next, the per-universal-drawing type selection table 202ed is used to set the per-universal-drawing type (A per common drawing, B per common drawing) (C612). Specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C6 is compared with the random number value stored in the type selection 5 table 202ed per universal figure. As described above, in the case where the current game state is the time saving state (high probability state of the universal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0, 1", it is A per the ordinary figure. If it is in the range of “2-99”, it is determined that the per-universal figure is B (see FIG. 336(a)). Alternatively, if the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the universal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined to be A per the ordinary figure, and " If it is in the range of 1 to 99", it is determined that the normal figure is B (see FIG. 336(a)).

Next, the display mode at the time of hitting based on the setting result of C612 is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. On the other hand, in the processing of C611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (C611: No), this time the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery) is out, so the display mode at the time of detachment is set. (C614) and C615 are executed.

In the processing of C615, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving/medium counter 203g is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the time saving/medium counter 203g is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the universal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef is displayed. Of these, the universal figure fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set by using the regulation content corresponding to the time saving state (high accuracy of universal figure) (C617), and then this processing ends. In the process of C615, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is 0 (C615: No), the standard content corresponding to the normal state (universal figure low probability) in the universal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef is used. Set the figure variation time (2 to 60 seconds) (C616), and then set the various contents (value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f, ordinary symbol lottery result, ordinary symbol variation time) set in this processing ) Is set (C623), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (C618). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of C616 or the process of C617 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of C618, if the variation time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process proceeds to C623, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of C618, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the process of C619, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of C619, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is set to end in the processing of C613 or the processing of C614, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 5 is the hit of the ordinary symbol. It is determined (C620). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (C620: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric accessory is set according to the type of normal drawing and the gaming state (C621), and the opening/closing control process of the electric accessory is set. Then (C622), then, the processing shifts to C623, the command for indicating the contents of the game per universal figure set by the processing of C621 is set, and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of C621, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see C1006) of the main processing (see FIG. 357) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 ends. On the other hand, in the process of C620, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (C620: No), the process of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process shifts to the process of C623, and the deviation of the normal symbol is stopped. Is set, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the through gate passage process 5 (C107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. This through gate passage processing 5 (C107) determines whether or not a ball has passed through this normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if there is a ball, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is set. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f The value (M) of 1 is added by 1 (C434), and the universal figure holding ball number command is set (C435). Then, the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning type counter C6 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt process 5 described above, and the second updated in the process of C1002 of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (C436), and the processing proceeds to C437. ..

Incidentally, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty holding area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is referred to, and the value is If 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of C437, the universal figure prefetching processing is executed (C437), and then this processing is ended. In addition, the details of this universal figure prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but based on each counter value stored in the ordinary symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c corresponding to the acquired universal symbol reservation in the process of C436. By the time the normal symbol variation (general pattern variation) is executed, the process of preliminarily determining the lottery result or variation pattern of the universal symbol suspension is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the universal figure prefetching process (C437) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the universal figure prefetching process (C437) executed in the through gate passage process 5 (see FIG. 351).

In the universal figure prefetching process (C437), first, a random number 5 table per ordinary symbol 202ec (see FIG. 334(d)), a type selection 5 table 202ed per universal symbol (see FIG. 336(a)), and a universal symbol variation pattern. The lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), the winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), and then this processing is ended. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the pre-reading result of the ordinary figure) is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later (see FIG. 357). ) External output processing (C1001), the data is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the received prize information command is a prize information command related to special figure fluctuation or a prize information command related to general figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding prize information storage area 223a. .. The winning information stored here is the lottery result of the symbol variation at a timing before the symbol variation (special symbol variation or universal symbol variation) corresponding to the prize information command is actually executed. Refer to this when setting the suggestive suggestion.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process 5 (C108) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). Since this V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) has the same processing contents as the V entrance passage processing of the above-described A1 embodiment (see S108 of FIG. 270), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V entrance passage process 5 (C108), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a winning game (small hitting game) (C501), and if the present is not a hitting game (small hitting game) (C501). : No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the present is a winning game (small winning game) (C501: Yes), then it is determined whether the V winning opening is open, that is, the small winning game is being played. (C502). In the process of C502, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (C502: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (C503), and the present process is ended. When it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (C502: No), the error command is set because the ball has won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though it is not the small hit game. Then (C504), this processing ends.

The V-entry passing command set in the process of C503 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, an effect during the small hitting game based on the winning of the V winning device 650 can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the V passage processing 5 (C109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the V passage process 5 (C109) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). The V passage processing 5 (C109) has the same technical concept as the V passage processing of the above-described A1 embodiment (see S109 of FIG. 271), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the V passage processing 5 (C109) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is V passage, that is, whether or not the ball has won a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a (C601). If it is determined that no prize has been won (C601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a prize has been won (C601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is in the V valid period (C602). In the processing of C602, when the progress of the small hit scenario set during the small hit game is within the specific period, it is determined that the V valid period is in effect, and in other cases, it is not in the V effective period. To determine.

In the processing of C602, if it is determined that the V is in the valid period (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether the present is a small hit game (C603), if it is a small hit game (C603). : Yes), the V passing big hit type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game of this time is acquired (C604), the V flag corresponding to the big hit type is set to ON (C605), and the time saving medium counter 203g is set. It is set to 0 (C606), the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is set to 0 (C607), and the process proceeds to C608.

That is, in the processing of C604 to C607, the processing for executing the big hit game is executed based on that the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the process of C603, when it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (C603: No), there is no need to perform the process for newly executing the big hit game, so the processes of C604 to C607 are skipped. , C608.

In the processing of C608, the V passage command is set (C608), and this processing ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 like other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during the small hitting game, the V challenge executed during the small hitting game is successful, and following the small hitting game. , Performs an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. In addition, when the V pass command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V pass command is received during the small hit game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passage command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small hitting game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball has not passed the specific area during the small hitting game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the structure which sets only the command (V passage command) for showing that the ball has won (passed) the specific area in the V winning opening 650a has been shown, the V winning opening 650a has a game. A command (for example, a V non-passing command) indicating that the ball has not won may be set. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect and enhance the effect. In addition, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is blocked in the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, in the processing of C602, when it is determined that the present is not in the V valid period (C602: No), an error command is set (C609), and this processing is ended. By performing the processing of C609, the state where the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a outside the V effective period, that is, when the game ball illegally wins the game ball in the V winning opening 650a, or the V winning It is possible to promptly notify the outside of the case where a defect (ball clogging or the like) in the ball passage in the opening 650a has occurred.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 356. FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (C901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (C902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904), and if it is turned on (C904: Yes), the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) is selected. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if it is not stored (C905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power-off was not normally completed, in this case as well, in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device), the payout initialization is performed. The command is transmitted (C912).

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so that the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device), should be initialized. A payout initialization command is transmitted (C912). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of gaming balls. Becomes After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process is executed. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (C914). After that, the processing shifts to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power-off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (C907: Yes), the RAM 203 is backed up. The power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data (C908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (C909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (C910), and execution of various productions is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (C911). Then, the interrupt is permitted and the process shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of C1011 and C1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 357), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. The external output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (C1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of balls to be won is calculated for the payout control device 111. Send the corresponding prize ball command. Also, various commands set in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344), the start winning process 5 (see FIG. 348), the V entrance passage process 5 (see FIG. 353), and the V passage process 5 (see FIG. 354). It is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command set in the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 358) and various commands set in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 359) described later are sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, the various variation type counters (variation type counter CS1 and second variation type counter CS2) are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the various fluctuation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special figure variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is used. The value is usually used when referring to the variation pattern of symbol variation (general pattern variation). Then, the special map change and the general map change are configured to be executed by the establishment of independent and independent triggers. As a result, even if the timing of updating the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the contents of the update are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation are not synchronized. There is no. Therefore, the processing content in the main control device 110 can be simplified without affecting the game.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of updating the values of the various fluctuation type counters may be configured not to be synchronized, and for example, the value of one fluctuation type counter may be executed every time the main process is executed a predetermined number of times. Alternatively, only the value of the other fluctuation type counter may be updated every time a specific number of times different from the above-described predetermined number of times is executed. By thus changing the update contents of the various fluctuation type counters, it is possible to prevent the value of the other fluctuation type counter from being determined based on the acquired value of the one fluctuation type counter.

Further, in the fifth control example, a variation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting a variation pattern of special figure variation and a second variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting a variation pattern of general figure variation are provided. The counter values are separately provided and are configured to be periodically updated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, fluctuation patterns of special figure fluctuation and general figure fluctuation. May be configured to be selected.

When the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state. The jackpot control process 5 for executing the jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (C1004). In the jackpot control process 5, the specific winning opening 65a is opened by opening the winning door 65b for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a ball is in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, if any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the big hit control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). The details of the jackpot control process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 358.

Next, small hit control processing 5 (C1005) is executed. The small hit control process 5 (C1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 359. After that, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance (winning hole) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of C622 in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 in the normal symbol variation processing 5 are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of C236 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345), the process of C240 or the process of C242, the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. , The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are started. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of C236 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345), the process of C240 or the process of C242 ends, In the display mode set by the processing of C235, C239, C241 of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 345), the stop symbol (the first 1 symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37a, 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), it is executed in the second symbol display device. End the variable display, in the display mode set by the process of C613 or the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting). indicate.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: Yes), the process proceeds to C1001 and the above-described processes after C1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (C1010: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011 and C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the various fluctuation type counters can also be randomly updated.

In the configuration in which the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated as in the fifth control example, in order to make the update timings of the various variation type counters different, for example, in C1002 of the main process, In the process, any variation type counter may be updated, and in the process of C1012, only one variation type counter (for example, the variation type counter CS1) may be updated.

Further, in the processing of C1009, if the RAM 203 stores the information on the occurrence of power failure (C1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after C1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (C1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (C1014). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (C1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of C1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at C1001 to C1008 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from C1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of C1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer has a predetermined value ( By setting the value to the (initial value), the process of C1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 358. FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 (C1004). This jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 357), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the variable winning device. This is a process for opening or closing the 65 specific winning openings 65a. In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the same control process as the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275) in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed. There is. Therefore, detailed description of the contents described in the above jackpot control process (see FIG. 275) and the modified examples and the added examples will be omitted, but the contents described in each of the control examples or each of the embodiments described above will be omitted. Of course also applies.

In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201: Yes), an opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot middle flag 203i is set on, and the jackpot start flag 203h is set off (C1203). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, if it is determined that the big hit start flag 203h is off (C1201: No), then it is determined whether the big hit medium flag 203i is on (C1204).

In the process of C1204, when it is determined that the big hitting flag 203i is off (C1204: No), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is on (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (C1215). When it is determined in the process of C1205 that the present time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening/closing of the specific winning opening 65a). The specific winning opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65b is in the open state), then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this processing is ended.

The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when a plurality of big hit games are executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the number of rounds executed during the plurality of big hit games is accumulated. The accumulated round number is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the cumulative number of rounds is determined by determining whether or not a continuous condition is satisfied when a command indicating that the jackpot game has been started (winning jackpot) is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative round number counter is updated based on the newly received round number command without clearing the value of the cumulative round number counter that accumulates the received round number command. Then, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode showing the update result.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the consecutive big hit game is one big hit game. Therefore, the player is set by one big hit game. The maximum number of rounds that can be played can be shown in large numbers. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while making the player feel an expectation for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one big hit game.

In the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this. A part of the process for executing the number display may be configured to be executed on the main controller 110 side, for example, as a continuous condition for executing the cumulative round number display, it is executed after the jackpot game is over. Set the continuous condition that holds when the big hit game is executed within a predetermined number of times of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 5 times the special figure 2 fluctuations), and measure the cumulative number of rounds of the big hit game on the main controller 110 side. A cumulative round counter is provided and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round counter is set as the round command. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 5 times after the jackpot game is over, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

By configuring in this way, if the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, a value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. Only by doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the cumulative number of rounds.

Other conditions may be set as a continuous condition for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds to be executed in a plurality of jackpot games, for example, a predetermined period after the jackpot game is finished (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation When the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen which is continuously displayed is displayed until the jackpot game is finished (10 seconds after the jackpot game is finished) For example, a jackpot game is executed during a period when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery) or a specific game state (for example, a time saving state) is set as a game state. It may be configured to set the condition to be satisfied when the above is performed. In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the above-described cumulative round number counter (cumulative round number) and the round number of the current jackpot game (independent round number) are displayed. It may be configured.

In the processing of C1205, when it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: No), it is then determined whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). When it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is closed). (C1209), and then the present process ends. In the process of C1208, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not satisfied (C1208: No), it is then determined whether or not the current timing is the ending effect start timing (C1210). When it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: Yes), the ending command is set (C1211), and then this processing ends.

When it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of C1208, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next big hit control process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, when it is determined that the present is not the ending timing of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether the present is the ending timing of the ending effect (C1212). When it is determined that the present is the ending timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the time saving medium counter 203g and the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea (C1213), and the jackpot is hit. The state command corresponding to the later game state is set (C1214), the end of the big hit is set (C1215), and then this processing is finished.

Here, the value set to the value of each counter in the process of C1213 is different according to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in execution (see FIG. 335, FIG. 337), jackpot type AA, jackpot When the types AD to AF are set, "99" is set to the hour/hour counter 203g, and "-" indicating that it is not set is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea. As a result, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, the corresponding shortened time end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 is not set as the shortened time end condition, and the common saved time end condition (big hit winning, small hit game End, the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 99 times).

When the big hit AB is set as the big hit type, "99" is set in the hour/middle counter 203g, and "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea. When the big hit AC is set, the hour/middle counter is set. "99" is set in 203g, and "1" is set in the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea.

Further, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit, the value of the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type that is set is configured to be referred to, as shown in FIG. 337. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit prize with the types AA and AE set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, and "5" is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea, and the small hit types AB and AD are set. At the end of the big-hit game based on the small-hit win set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203g, and "-" indicating that it is not set is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea. On the other hand, at the end of the big hit game based on the small hit prize in which the small hit type AC is set, “0” is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, and “0” is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, when it is determined that the present time is not the ending timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), the present process is directly terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 359. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing this small hit control processing 5 (C1005). This small hit control processing 5 (C1005) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 357), and sets commands for causing the sound lamp control device 113 to execute various effects corresponding to small hits, and V winning. This is processing for controlling the operation of the V prize solenoid for opening and closing the V prize door 600b associated with the mouth 650a.

In the small hit control process 5 (C1005), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario set in the process of C291 of the small hit start setting process 5 (see C223 in FIG. 347) has a content indicating the small hit game start. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (C1302), the small hit medium flag 203k is set to on (C1303), and the small hit operation is performed. The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C1301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203k is on (C1305). When it is determined that the small hitting flag 203k is off (C1305: No), since this is the case where the small hitting game is not currently being performed, this processing is ended as it is. When it is determined in the processing of C1305 that the small hitting flag 203k is on (C1305: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the small hitting game (C1306). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit game (C1306), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203k is set to off (C1307), and the value of the hour/shortness medium counter 203g is reset to 0. Then, it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to ON (C1308) (C1309). As described above, in the fifth control example, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203g after the end of the small hit game, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed the specific area during the small hit game. Is configured as follows.

By this processing of C1308, one condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set. In other words, when the small hitting game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state ends with the end of the small hitting game. For example, the small hitting game being executed is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state. If it is determined that it is a small hit type (for example, a small hit type that can execute a large hit game that is disadvantageous to the player), a small hit game based on the small hit game being executed is not executed It is possible to suppress a game that does not shoot a ball (does not pass the ball in a specific area).

In the fifth control example, the value of the hour/hour counter 203g is always set (reset) to "0" when the small hit game is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the small hit game based on a specific small hit type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g may be set (reset) to "0" after the small hit game is finished.

In the processing of C1309, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is off (C1309: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (C1309: Yes), then the jackpot start corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203n is set to off. (C1311), and thereafter, this process ends.

In this control example, all the small hit games are set as one round of the game. Therefore, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command regarding the number of rounds and the interval period (round Although there is no scenario corresponding to the (interval interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-described big hit game may be set.

In addition, in this control example, the small hit scenario is configured to be set for the period in which the small hit game is executed, but, for example, after the small hit game ends, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for between. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passage effective period until 1 second has elapsed after the small hit game is finished. Therefore, it is possible to set the period set over different game states by one scenario, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of control processing.

In this control example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650a in the small hit game, a big hit game corresponding to a big hit type preset corresponding to the small hit is executed. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650a.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 375. It should be noted that, of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example, the details of the parts that execute the same processes as the above-described control examples or the respective embodiments will be described in detail. The description and illustration are omitted.

In the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 317, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, special symbol fluctuation effect according to special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) and normal symbol fluctuation (general symbol fluctuation) ) According to the general figure change effect, and is configured to be executable.

Then, the general figure fluctuation effect is configured to be executed as a series of effects in which a series of effects is executed across the general figure fluctuation period, the general figure per game period, the special figure 2 fluctuation period, and the small hit game period. There is. By configuring in this way, the game in the case of winning a particular public figure (per general figure long opening) by the general figure lottery, that is, a ball to the second winning hole 640 during the game per universal figure long opening Then, the small hit is won by the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning, and the big hit game is executed by the ball passing through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. It is possible to inform the player of the flow in an easy-to-understand manner by means of an effect mode of a series of effects.

In addition, since the above-described series of productions greatly differ in execution period depending on the game situation (whether there is a change in Toku-zu 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game, Different play modes are set according to the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Toku-zu 1) at the time of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the long open game. In other words, if the special map 1 variation is being executed at the time of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game of the universal figure long opening, if the special map 1 variation is being executed, then the special figure 2 variation is completed. Is performed, an effect mode is set in accordance with the length of the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation. Specifically, when the standby period is less than the predetermined period, the production mode corresponding to the normal series production is set, and when the standby period is the predetermined period or more, the series production is artificially ended and is being executed. When the remaining fluctuation period (standby period) of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 reaches a specific period, a continuous series effect for performing a pseudo series effect again is set. In this way, the production mode of the series production can be variably set according to the length of the waiting period, so that it is possible to provide the series production without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game because the production execution period becomes uselessly long.

On the other hand, at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game of opening the normal figure, if the special figure 1 change is not executed, the special figure 2 is immediately after the ball is won in the second winning opening 640. Since the variation is executed, a shortened series effect shorter than the normal series effect is set.

That is, in the fifth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is performed by the left-handed game, and the series of effects described above is performed. It is executed when the lottery result of the public figure lottery executed during the normal state (the lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67) is the specific lottery result (per general figure long opening). Since it is configured as described above, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation is being executed while the series production is being executed. Therefore, a normal series production, a general figure fluctuation period, a general figure per game period, a waiting period (a period of waiting until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution), a special figure 2 fluctuation period, a small hit game period, The effect contents are configured to be executed over a period of time, and the effect contents can be changed according to the stage of transition of each period.

Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game of the universal figure long opening, the waiting period among the periods in which the above-described series of effects is executed. Therefore, the special figure 2 variable period will be set after the per-university game period has elapsed. While such a state can occur, the same effect mode is achieved regardless of the game situation (whether there is a change in Toku-zu 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game for the long opening. If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the waiting period is set even though the waiting period is not set) is executed, and the effect of the effect may be deteriorated. ..

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, if the special map 1 change is not executed at the time of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game of the universal figure long opening, during the waiting period described above. It is configured such that a series of effects in which effects are skipped is executed. In addition, even if the effect of the standby period is skipped, the effect mode does not give the player a feeling of strangeness when skipping from the per-university game period to the special map 2 variation period so that the effect does not deteriorate. Is configured to be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily inform the general figure variation effect (series effect) executed based on the lottery result of the general figure lottery.

Further, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 318, as the variable effect indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the first suggestion effect that indicates only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. And, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, a suggestion is given including the determination result of the pre-determination for previously determining the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the winning information included in the special figure 2 hold. The suggestive production is configured to be executable.

Specifically, in the time saving state, it is determined whether or not the special figure change (special figure 2 change) executed this time is the final change during the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final change (time saving final change). If it is determined, the first suggestion effect (see FIG. 327(a)) is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined to be the time saving final variation, the special effect 2 The above-described second suggestion effect (see FIG. 327(b) to FIG. 329(a)) is executed as the change effect corresponding to the change.

With such a configuration, in the variation effect corresponding to the final reduction in time saving, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state). Since the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) is executed, the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the end of the time saving state for the player is executed as if the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery can be reminded, the winning probability (big hit probability, small hit probability) in the time saving state can be made higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set an effect mode (success effect mode shown in FIG. 329(a)) indicating a winning in a special effect (for example, mission effect shown in FIG. 328(b)) executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the effect of the exclusive effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the fifth control example, the variation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that has been stored on hold at the end of the time saving state) executed after the time saving state ends (normal state) It is configured such that a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed during the change of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation. The effect result of the second suggestion effect that is executed is displayed. With this configuration, when the success effect is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small hit) is included in the special figure 2 hold as the second suggestive effect, the small hit is selected. The second suggestion effect can be continuously executed without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player until the change in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the effect period of the fluctuating effect that is executed in response to the final shortened fluctuation is divided into a plurality of effect periods, and each effect period is used for a different purpose. Specifically, during the first period until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the time saving final variation is executed, a large number of special figure 2 suspensions are obtained by the player until the variation ends. The effect (holding acquisition effect) for performing is executed, and during the second period set after the first period, the second suggestion effect described above is executed.

Then, the production mode of the second suggestive production executed during the second period of the time saving final variation is the special figure 2 at the specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured so that it is set based on the number of holds and the result of pre-determination.

With this configuration, even if the time saving state is finished (when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out of order), the special map 2 lottery is executed the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the hold acquisition effect and the second suggestion effect are configured to be executed in the final reduction in time saving. This is to execute the hold acquisition effect during the special figure 2 change executed before the time-saving final change, and to acquire the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 2 hold while the hold acquisition effect is being executed. Even if the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time saving final variation, the special figure 2 hold is subtracted, so that the player should perform the special figure 2 lottery the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of being unable to

In the fifth control example, a plurality of special figure 2 lottery items (special figure 2 lottery for special time 2 variation and special figure 2 suspension of final time reduction are supported as the target of the production as the second suggestive effect executed in the short time final change. It is configured such that a production mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included in the lottery result of (Special figure 2 lottery) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this and is a target of production. It may be configured to set an effect mode that informs the player of the number of lottery results which are included in a plurality of special figure 2 lottery and are a winning prize. In this case, for example, as a production mode of the second suggestive production, it is a normal production mode of the second suggestive production that at least one winning is included in the plurality of special drawing 2 lottery targeted for production. A special effect mode capable of informing the player earlier may be set, and a hit number suggestion effect may be executed in which the player is informed of the winning number. In this way, by promptly informing the player that the winning prize is included, the player can be provided with a sense of security and entertaining the production that suggests how many winning prizes are included. it can.

First, with reference to FIG. 360, the command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 5 (C3113). This command determination process 5 (C3113) is a process that is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example, is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and is executed by the main controller 110. This is processing for executing control according to the type of command received from.

In the command determination process 5, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (C3201). When it is determined that the prize information command has been received (C3201: Yes), the prize information command process 5 is executed (C3202), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the prize information command processing 5 (C3202) will be described with reference to FIG. 361. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 5 (C3202). The prize information command process 5 (C3202) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp controller 113. That is, the processing for storing the information included in the received winning information command in the corresponding area (the reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command) of the winning information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

As the information included in the prize information command, the information about the result of win/fail judgment, the information about the stop type, the information about the variation pattern, and the type of symbol corresponding to the prize information of this time (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) However, it may include information other than that, for example, winning information regarding already-winned balls (where a winning information command has been received in the past). Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, the main control device 110 is configured to set the winning information command for indicating the look-ahead result of the normal symbol (see FIG. 352), In the winning information storage area 223a, in addition to the area for storing the winning information of the special symbol, an area for storing the winning information of the ordinary symbol is also formed.

When the prize information command process 5 (C3202) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (C3401), and the prize status determination process (C3402) is performed. Execute. As described above, the winning information storage area 223a has a maximum of four winning information commands of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a maximum of four winning information commands of the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured to store a maximum of four prize commands of ordinary symbols, a total of 12 prize information commands, and the prize information commands are stored in a designated storage area according to the order in which the prize information commands are received. ..

Here, the winning situation determination processing (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning situation determination processing (C3402). The prize status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the prize information command process 5 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the prize information of the normal symbol (general pattern). The game state at the time of receiving the command is determined, and the process for setting a different effect mode based on the determination result and the normal state, it is determined that an appropriate game (left-handed game) is being performed. The processing for is executed.

In the prize status determination processing (C3402), first, it is determined whether or not there is a universal figure winning prize (whether the prize information command received this time is a command corresponding to the universal figure) (C3451). If it is determined that the prize is not a universal figure winning prize (C3451: No), the procedure will be shifted to C3458 described later. When it is determined that it is a winning combination (C3451: Yes), then, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223ea provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the game state is the normal state. Yes (C3453). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the winning information command process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3453, when it is determined that the game state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current first special symbol (special diagram 1) is changing (C3454). ). Here, by determining whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg corresponding to the change in special figure 1 is larger than 0, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is currently changing. When it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently changing (C3454: No), the normal figure change is being executed while the special figure 1 change is not being executed in the normal state. The non-changing prize flag 223ef provided is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-changing prize flag 223ef to ON in the process of C3455, it is possible to store that the prize information command of the general figure is received in the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-changing. When a universal figure variation pattern command corresponding to the regular figure prize information command is received, the special state at the time of universal figure prize (passing through the through gate 67) is determined by determining the setting status of the non-variable prize flag 223ef. It is possible to set different variation effect modes according to the variation situation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 360, the process executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process 5 (C3113) of the voice lamp control device 113 (C3203 in FIG. 360). The processing (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 360) to be executed when the winning information command is received with priority over C3204).

Here, in the external output process (C1001 of FIG. 357) of the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 357), the winning information command for the universal symbol prize and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, ordinary symbol) , And are output in the same process, specifically, when the universal figure prize is generated in the state where the universal figure variation is not executed, the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. The winning pattern information command is set in the process of C105 (see 343), and the variation pattern command is set in the process of C104 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 343) executed next (after 2 milliseconds). .. Then, in the process (external output process) of C1001 of the main process (see FIG. 357) of the main controller 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the audio lamp controller 113 is output. From the above, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing and the execution timing of the main processing, the prize information command for the universal figure prize and the variation pattern command are output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same processing. There is.

In such a case, in the fifth control example, in the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see C3113 in FIG. 360), the winning information command processing 5 (C3202 in FIG. 361) and the variation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. Since the processing is executed in the order of C3204 of 363), even when the winning information command and the variation pattern command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, when the variation pattern of the universal figure variation is set, the non-variation time is set. It can be used for determination without missing the setting status of the winning flag 223ef.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is currently occurring (C3454: Yes), then it is judged whether the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456). .. When it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), the process proceeds to C3458.

In the process of C3456, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), the display command indicating the prefetch effect corresponding to the winning information is set (C3457), and then C3458. Process shifts to.

When the processing shifts to C3458, it is determined whether or not the prize information command received this time is a prize information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C3458), and it is determined that the prize information command of special figure 1 If (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the non-changing winning flag 223ef is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined to be set to ON (C3459: Yes), The variation winning flag 223ef is set to OFF (C3460), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C3458, when it is determined that the prize information command received this time is not the prize information command of special figure 1 (C3458: No), it is determined whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is being performed is received. It is determined (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the winning of the ball to each winning opening (general winning opening 63) provided in the left side game area of the game board 13 is received.

In the process of C3461, when it is determined that the left-handed game is detected (C3461: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described process of C3459, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: No), This processing is ended as it is.

As described above, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the special map 1 variation is executed at the time of the universal figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 variation is executed. When it is determined that there is no such change, the non-variable winning flag 223ef for indicating that is set to ON. In addition, when the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to on, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to off when the information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or the left-handed game is being performed is received. It is configured to do.

Then, as will be described in detail later, when the universal figure long variation is executed with the non-variation winning flag 223ef set to ON, the variation effect (series production) corresponding to the ordinary figure long variation is executed. It is configured not to run.

With such a configuration, in the state where the normal state is set, the gaming situation in which the general figure fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through the gate provided in the right-side game area by the right-handed game) It is possible to discriminate the game situation in which 67 passes the ball), and in that case, it is possible not to execute the variation effect corresponding to the general figure long variation (the effect that suggests that the game is executed per universal figure). ..

Further, in the fifth control example, even when the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning port 64, the special figure 1 Since the variation may not be executed, the non-variation prize flag 223ef set to ON at the time of winning the universal figure is configured to be set to OFF by the left-handed game. As a result, for example, the left-handed game is executed within a predetermined period from the time when the universal figure winning is started until the time when the universal figure variation starts It is possible to normally execute a performance that suggests that the above is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of a presentation mode that is disadvantageous to the player who is playing the appropriate game.

In addition, as long as it is possible to determine that a proper game (left-handed game in the normal state) is being performed, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the fifth control example described above, and for example, the rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is performed. It may be configured to be able to determine whether the left-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing strength) of the variable resistor that detects the amount or the rotation operation amount by the change in the electric resistance, or the game board 13 Detecting means for detecting passage of the ball is provided in a part of the left side game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left side game area pass), and the left hitting game is executed based on the detection result in the detecting means. It may be configured such that it can be discriminated whether or not it is present.

Further, in the fifth control example described above, the configuration for determining whether or not the left-handed game is being executed is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration for determining whether or not the right-handed game is being executed is used. Using, when it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, when a predetermined public figure fluctuation (general figure long fluctuation) is executed, fluctuation production corresponding to the general figure long fluctuation (general figure per game May be configured to be limited to the execution of the effect that suggests that is executed. In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed a predetermined area (for example, the through gate 67) provided in the right-side game area, A configuration for determining that a right-handed game is being executed, a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, or a variable resistor (not shown) that detects a rotation operation amount (rotation position) by a change in electric resistance It may be possible to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing strength).

Further, in the fifth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is playing an appropriate game in the period from the time when the universal figure winning is started until the time when the universal figure variation is started. However, without being limited to this, a period (determination target period) used for determining whether or not a proper game is executed may be set long. In this case, for example, a game situation storage means capable of temporarily storing the game situation is provided, and the game situation (past history) as to whether or not the player is performing a left-handed game is stored in the game situation storage means. It may be configured such that, at the timing of winning the universal figure prize, it is configured to determine whether or not the universal figure prize has been won during an appropriate game, based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means.

Furthermore, as a winning information command (universal winning information command) that is set when a prize is won, a winning information command indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area (left winning icon) The voice lamp control device 113 distinguishes between the prize winning information command) and the universal figure winning information command (right universal figure winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area. Based on the type of the universal figure prize information command received and the game situation, it is possible to limit the execution of variable effect (effect that suggests that the game is executed per universal figure) corresponding to the long variable of universal figure. May be variably set.

Returning to FIG. 361, the description will be continued. It is determined whether or not there is special hit information as the information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time (C3403). In the process of C3403, when it is determined that there is no special 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process proceeds to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is special 2 hit information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ed provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406.

When it is determined in the process of C3404 that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is on (C3404: Yes), information indicating a hit notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (C3405), and then the process of C3406 is performed. To do.

In the process of C3406, an effect mode related to the other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C3407), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 5.

In this control example, the specific effect set in the beginning of the variable display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the change) is set in another period (for example, the specific effect C). It is specified that the effect is that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is defined such that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more easily selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot in the subsequent changes. Further, it is possible to allow the player to eagerly accumulate the holding of the special symbol so that the suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this control example, based on the winning information included in the winning information command received as described above, and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are straddled. It is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, but other configurations may be used, for example, the suggestive effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to perform, to perform a predictive effect as a suggested effect and set the specific effect at the timing of starting the next variable display. , The specific effect is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 of the player during the period in which the indication effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With such a configuration, the production of the suggestive effect is based on the game situation (the lottery result of the next variation or the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestive effect is started. Aspect can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined and then executed.

Further, in the present control example, as an example of executing the suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are displayed. Although the suggestive effect used is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to span the variable display being executed and the variable display executed one after another, or may be executed one after another from the variable display executed next time. The suggestive effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the prize information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing for executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is advisable to provide a means for doing so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and, for example, a reserved display area in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding pattern) corresponding to the winning information indicating a big hit, a pending change notice effect that changes the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating a big hit. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation is started before.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold by referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot. It is configured to determine whether or not (the presence or absence of a holiday resort), and set the effect during the jackpot game or after the jackpot based on the determination result. In addition, the effect content is selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a even in the continuous effect executed during the probability change state.

Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when an effect (prefetch effect) that refers to the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag indicating that effect ( For example, if the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON and the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the prize included in the prize information command is received. The new prefetching effect based on the information is configured not to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that a plurality of prefetch effects are continuously executed without a gap and give a player a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, you may use control other than the above-mentioned content for solving the above-mentioned problem, for example, a priority rank is set to the some pre-reading effect set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The priority rank of the pre-reading effect that has been given and is currently executed is compared with the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new winning information command, and the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank is compared. You may control so that it may perform. In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead effect being executed ends midway. After that, a new pre-reading effect is executed, or the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed is changed to a shortened pre-reading effect mode that is earlier than the initially set end timing, and then a new pre-reading effect is executed. You may do it.

Also, as the priority rank of the pre-reading effect, the priority rank of the pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won is the highest. It is better to set so that Thereby, when the pre-reading effect being executed ends midway, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the jackpot and to pay attention to the new pre-reading effect to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the processing of C3201, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (C3201: No), it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (C3203). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (C3203: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command process 5 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command processing 5 is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting processing 5 (see FIG. 369) described later to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern. .. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type. Further, in the fifth control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for a special symbol (special symbol) and a variation pattern for a normal symbol (general symbol). It is determined whether the received variation pattern command is for a special figure or a general figure, and the processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, the fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204). This fluctuation pattern command process 5 (C3204) is a process executed when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Is.

In fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from main controller 110 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (C3301). When it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not the special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), the processing of C3302 and C3303 is skipped and the processing proceeds to C3304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the special figure variation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d for special figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON ( C3302), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure fluctuation pattern command (C3303), and then the process proceeds to C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a general-purpose fluctuation pattern command (C3304). When it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not the universal pattern variation pattern command (C3304: No), the processes of C3305 and C3306 are skipped and the process returns to the command determination process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the fluctuation pattern command for universal figure (C3304: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d for general figure provided in the RAM 223. Is set to ON (C3305), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received general-purpose fluctuation pattern command (C3306), and then this processing ends and returns to the command determination processing 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of C3203, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (C3203: No), it is then determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (C3205). When the stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described below is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, in the process of C3205, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), it is then determined whether or not the main control unit 110 has received the number of reserved balls command (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is received (C3208: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) The special symbol holding sphere number counter, or the value included in the holding sphere number command received from the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f of the normal symbol is stored (C3209), and then the process returns to the main process. Specifically, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 A value (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, from the received reserved ball number command, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of C3208, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit related command has been received (C3210), and if the hit related command has been received. (C3210: Yes), the hit related command processing 5 (C3211) is executed, and after the hit related command processing 5 (C3211) is completed, this processing is ended.

Here, the contents of the hit related command processing 5 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process 5 (C3211). The hit related command process 5 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the hit related command processing 5, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit related command is received from the main control device 110 (C3501). When it is determined that the big hit related command is received (C3501: Yes), the big hit related command process is executed (C3502), and then the process proceeds to C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 365. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command process (C3502). The big hit related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the hit related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command process (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (C3601). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), the opening command process for display is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3601, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether the round number command is received (C3603). Here, when the round number command is received (C3603: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the display round number command corresponding to the currently extracted round number is set. (C3605), and thereafter, the process proceeds to C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game is executed. In the number, the number of round games of the jackpot game executed this time is accumulated and displayed. Specifically, a period flag that is set to ON during the period in which the time saving state is set and the period from the transition from the time saving state to the normal state until the change in Toku-zu 1 is executed is provided. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to ON, and when it is determined that the flag is set to ON, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game. The number of rounds of this big hit game is accumulated and displayed in (number of rounds).

On the other hand, in the processing of C3603, if it is determined that the round number command is not received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (C3606). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), the ending command for display is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the ending command for display, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3606, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: No), the process proceeds to C3608. In the process of C3608, a process corresponding to another command is executed (C3608), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process 5.

Returning to FIG. 364, the description will be continued. In the process of C3501, if it is determined that the big hit related command is not received from the main control device 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit related command is received from the main control device 110. (C3503). When it is determined that the small hitting related command is received (C3503: Yes), the small hitting related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to C3505.

Here, the contents of the small hit related command processing (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 366(a). FIG. 366(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the small hit related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hitting related command process (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3701). When it is determined that the series production flag 223eb is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small hitting process is executed (C3702), and thereafter, this process ends and returns to the hit related command process 5. ..

As described above, in the fifth control example, the effect mode when the small hit game is executed is variably set according to whether or not the small hit game execution timing is in the series of effects. .. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the series of effects, the small hit game effect (see FIG. 324) is executed as part of the series of effects. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Here, the contents of the normal small hitting process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 366(b). FIG. 366(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small hitting process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the normal small hitting process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small hitting start command is received from the main control device 110 (C3801). When it is determined that the small hitting start command has been received (C3801: Yes), the small hitting start command for display is set (C3802), and thereafter, this processing ends and returns to the small hitting related command processing.

In the processing of C3801, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (C3801: No), then it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3803). .. If it is determined that the small hitting end command is received (C3803: Yes), the small hitting end command for display is set (C3804), and then this processing is ended and returns to the small hitting related command processing.

In the processing of C3803, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (C3803: No), it is next determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3805). When it is determined that the V pass command has been received (C3805: Yes), the display V pass command is set (C3806), and then this process ends and returns to the small hitting related command process.

Returning to FIG. 366(a), the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of C3701 that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C3701: Yes), the small hit game of this time is a small hit game executed during the series of effects, so the small effect process for the series effect is performed. After executing this (C3703), this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit related command process 5.

Here, the contents of the series effect small hitting process (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting process (C3703) for a series of effects. The series of small hitting process for effect (C3703) is a process executed in the small hitting related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the series of effect small hit processing (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command is received from the main control device 110 (C3901). When it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3901: Yes), the series effect hit start command is set (C3902), and thereafter, this processing ends and returns to the small hit related command processing.

In the processing of C3901, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (C3901: No), it is next determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3903). When it is determined that the V pass command is received (C3903: Yes), it is then determined whether the small hit warning flag 223ee provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3904). When it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is off (C3904: No), a series effect display V effect command is set (C3905), and thereafter, this processing ends and returns to the small hit related command processing.

Here, in the small hit caution flag 223ee, the ball has passed through the specific area within the V winning opening 650a even after the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, even though the small hit game is being executed. This is the flag that is set on if there is no. In the fifth control example, the game board 13 is configured such that the time required for the ball fired by performing the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650 is about 1 second, so a small hit When the right hitting game is performed based on the execution of the game, the small hit caution flag 223ee is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if you are playing a left-handed game without noticing that the small hit game is being executed, or if you perform an inappropriate game that intentionally reduces the number of balls to shoot during the small hit game (including 0) If it is, the state where the ball has not passed the specific area within the V winning opening 650a at the time point 3 seconds after the small hit game is started, the small hit caution flag 223ee is turned on. Easy to set. When the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON, an emphasized guidance display (see FIG. 325(a)) is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to allow the player to perform a right-handed game. To be done. Further, even when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit warning flag 223ee is set to ON or OFF. When the V pass command is received in a state where the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON, for example, a guide effect for promptly performing a right hitting game in the next small hit game. Is executed.

In the process of C3904, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is on (C3904: Yes), the special V effect command for series effect display is set (C3906), and thereafter, this process is ended and the small hit. Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for series effect display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for a series effect display, the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the timing at which the ball passed V in the small hit game this time was delayed as part of the series effect. The V effect including the effect mode shown (for example, the comment “Let's hit the right next time sooner”) is started.

On the other hand, in the processing of C3903, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (C3903: No), it is next determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3907). ). If it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether there is V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of effects A small hitting end command for display is set (C3909), and then the small hitting caution flag 223ee is set to off (C3912), and this processing ends and returns to small hitting related command processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, when it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of the series effect is set (C3910), the series effect flag 223eb is set to OFF (C3911), The small hit caution flag 223ee is set to off (C3912), and then this processing is terminated and returns to the small hit related command processing.

That is, when the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small hitting game during the series of effects, the effect of showing the occurrence of the big hit game cannot be displayed as the effect of the series of effects, so the end of the series of effects ( A presentation mode (see FIG. 325(b)) indicating "failure" is set. Also, when it is determined that the small hitting end command has not been received in the process of C3907 (C3907: No), this process is ended thereafter, and the small hitting related command process is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 364, the description will be continued. In the process of C3503, when it is determined that the small hitting related command is not received from the main control device 110 (C3503: No), it is next determined whether or not the general-purpose hitting related command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the universal figure hit related command has been received (C3505: Yes), a display command corresponding to the ordinary figure hit related command is set (C3506), and thereafter, this processing ends and the command determination is made. Return to processing 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of C3210, if it is determined that the hit related command is not received from the main control device 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether the status command is received from the main control device 110 (C3212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current game status is extracted from the received command, stored in the status storage area 223ea (C3213), and the display status command is set (C3214). After that, this process ends.

In the process of C3213, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control device 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 in the first control example is received. In addition to the current game state, a process of storing the game state set after the jackpot is finished is executed. With this configuration, the state command indicating the current game state and the state designation command indicating the game state (scheduled game state) set when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is over) are classified. And can be memorized. Also, after the jackpot is over, you will receive a status command that indicates the current gaming status, but at that time, the content of the status command that indicates the current gaming status and the content of the status designation command that indicates the planned gaming status. A configuration may be used in which a determination unit that determines whether or not match is provided and determines whether or not the game state is properly set based on the determination result of the determination unit. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally variably setting the gaming state after the jackpot is over to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the process of C3212, when it is determined that the status command is not received (C3212: No), it is then determined whether the stop command is received (C3215), and when the stop command is received (C3215: Yes). ), the stop command process 5 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 5 ends, this process ends.

Here, the contents of the stop command processing 5 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. 368. FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command processing 5 (C3216). The stop command process 5 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the stop command processing 5, it is first determined whether a special figure stop command is received (C3951), and if it is determined that a special figure stop command is received (C3951: Yes), then the special figure change time counter The value of 223eg is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether the pseudo series production flag 223ec is set to ON (C3953).

In the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to ON (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time is a special effect in which the series effect is executed as a fluctuation effect of the special figure deviation fluctuation. Since it is a change, the pseudo series production flag 223ec is set to OFF (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, in the process of C3953, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is not set to ON (C3953: No), the process of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3955.

In the process of C3955, it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ed is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined to be set to ON (C3955: Yes), the re-readahead flag is set to ON (C3956). ), the time saving final variation flag is set to OFF (C3957), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is not set to ON (C3955: No), the present process is directly terminated.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of C3215, when it is determined that the stop command is not received from the main control device 110 (C3215: No), the process according to the received command is executed (C3217), and the present process is ended. .. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

By this processing, it is possible to set a command for performing various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variable display setting process 5 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 369. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 5 (C3114). This fluctuation display setting process 5 (C3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and the fluctuation effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the above, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

The variable display setting process 5 (C3114) of the fifth control example sets a variable pattern display command of a normal symbol for the above-described control examples or the variable display setting process used in each embodiment. There is a large difference between the above-mentioned configuration and the point that the contents of the set fluctuating effect are changed, and the other elements (technical ideas) are the same. Detailed description of the same elements (technical ideas) as those of the above-described control examples or the variable display setting processing used in each embodiment will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 5 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4001). In the processing of C4001, either the fluctuation start flag 223d for special figure or the fluctuation start flag 223d for general figure in the processing of C3302 and C3305 of the fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (see C3204 of FIG. 363) described above is used. Determine if is set to on.

When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, both the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d and the general figure fluctuation start flag 223d are off) (C4001: No), the main control is executed. Since the variation pattern command has not been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (C4001: Yes), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (C4002), and then C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command process 5 (see FIG. 363). In the processes of C3306 and C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 370.

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370), a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is generated. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the processing shifts to C4006. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (C4006: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (C4007), and then in the command determination process 5 (C3207 of FIG. 360) process. The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the process of C4010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4010). After that, this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, a variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process (C4004). This change effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the change display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a change effect mode of the special symbol, Alternatively, a process for setting the variation effect mode of the normal symbol is executed.

In the variation effect setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect setting process this time sets the variation effect of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (C4101). In the process of C4101, in the process of C4001 of the variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369), when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is set to ON, the current variation effect setting process Determines that the change effect of the special figure change is set. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation effect is not set (the general figure fluctuation effect is set) (C4101: No), the general figure effect setting process is executed (C4117), and then the present process is ended. .. The details of the general figure effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 371, but when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the general figure variation executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect based on is executed.

In the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: Yes), the information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223ea is read (C4102), and the current game state is the normal state. It is determined whether there is any (C4103). When it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (the time saving state) (C4103: No), the time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the time saving state. This time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 372.

On the other hand, in the process of C4103, when it is determined that the game state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-reading flag 223em is set to ON (C4105), and the re-reading flag 223em is set to ON. When it is determined that it is set (C4105: Yes), that is, the variation effect this time is a variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation of the first rotation after the time saving state ends, and during the time saving state. If there is a special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time saving final variation effect executed in the time saving final variation, among the special figure 2 holdings acquired in step 1, the prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a From the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), the winning information (preliminary information corresponding to special figure 2) for which pre-reading processing has not been executed is extracted (C4106), and the winning information is won in the extracted winning information. It is determined whether or not there is winning information including (C4107).

In the processing of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: yes), a display command for replacing the result display mode of the time saving effect with the revival winning display mode is set (C4108). The re-reading flag 223em is turned off (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, in the process of C4105, when it is determined that the re-reading flag 223em is not set to ON (C4105: No), the current variation effect setting process is executed at the timing of changing the result display mode of the time saving variation effect. Since it is not performed, the processes of C4106 to C4109 are skipped, and the process proceeds to C4110. In addition, in the processing of C4107, when it is determined that the extracted winning information does not include winning information including winning information (C4107: No), the current variation effect setting process changes the result display mode of the time saving variation effect. Although it is the timing to perform, because the condition for changing the result display mode (the new prefetch result includes a hit) is not satisfied, the process of C4108 is skipped, the process of C4109 is executed, and the process of C4110 is executed. Move to.

In the process of C4110, it is determined whether or not the present time is within the extended display period of the time-saving fluctuation effect executed during the time-saving state (C4110), that is, within the extended display period, that is, the game result in the time-saving state is displayed. When it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 331) is displayed (C4110: Yes), this process ends without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), then, based on the variation pattern acquired in the processing of C4003 in FIG. 369, is this variation pattern a winning variation pattern? Is determined (C4111).

In the processing of C4111, when it is determined that the variation pattern of this time is the variation pattern of the hit (C4111: Yes), the hit variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process of C4116 is performed. In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), it is determined whether or not a series effect is to be executed as the special figure variation effect this time, and if the series effect is performed as the general figure variation effect, the series effect The process of replacing the effect result is executed. This winning variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 373.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the winning variation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether the series production flag 223eb is on (C4113), When it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4113: Yes), the process proceeds to C4116.

In the process of C4113, when it is determined that the series production flag 223eb is off (C4113: No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of this time is the variation pattern of the series production based on the extracted variation pattern ( C4114). When it is determined that the variation pattern this time is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: No), the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4114, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series production (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series production flag 223ec is set to ON (C4115), and then the processing of C4116 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of C4116, the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is set (C4116), and thereafter, this processing is terminated and the processing returns to the fluctuation display setting processing 5.

Next, with reference to FIG. 371, the universal figure effect setting process (C4117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing the general-use production effect setting process (C4117). This general-use production effect setting process (C4117) is executed in the variation production setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a variation production based on the general-use variation. A process for setting (a series of effects) is executed.

In the general-use production effect setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223ea provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is the normal state. Yes (C4202). When it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), this processing is ended thereafter.

In the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203). When it is determined that the variation time is not 30 seconds or more (C4203: No), this processing is ended thereafter. When it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), it is then determined whether the series production flag 223eb is on (C4204).

When it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series production flag 223eb is on (C4204: Yes), the present process is ended thereafter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4204: No), it is then determined whether or not the non-changing prize flag 223ef is on (C4205), and the non-changing prize flag 223ef. If it is determined to be off (C4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4206). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is off (C4206: No), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223eb is set to on (C4208), and then this processing is ended.

In the process of C4206, when it is determined that the pseudo-series effect flag 223ec is on (C4206: Yes), the universal figure variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special figure variation time is set (C4209), and then this processing To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4205, when it is determined that the non-variation winning flag 223ef is on (C4205: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is larger than 0 (C4210). ), if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is not larger than 0 (is 0) (C4210: No), the general figure fluctuation is executed in the state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed. Therefore, the present process is terminated without setting the universal figure variation effect for indicating the lottery result of the universal figure variation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the special figure fluctuation is not executed, the general figure fluctuation effect is not set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the general figure fluctuation effect is set to normal. May be configured to execute the universal figure fluctuation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the general figure fluctuation effect to be executed, the electric accessory 640a is long opened according to the lottery result of the current general figure lottery. It may be configured such that it is difficult for the player to easily determine the timing to play.

In the process of C4210, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is larger than 0 (C4210: Yes), the special series effect is set (C4211), and the series effect flag 223eb is set to ON (C4212). ), and thereafter, this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth control example, based on the execution status of the series production and the status of the special figure fluctuation during execution when the universal figure fluctuation time is the predetermined time (30 seconds) or more. It is configured so as to set a general-purpose image fluctuation production (production for general education). With such a configuration, when a production that easily informs the player of the lottery result advantageous to the player is being performed as the special diagram variation production for displaying the lottery result of the special diagram variation, the general production production is It is possible to suppress the situation that obstructs the special figure variation effect, and provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372, the time saving effect setting process (C4104) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing the time saving effect setting process (C4104). The time saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the time saving effect setting process (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the special map change this time is not the change of the special map 2 (C4301: No), the present process ends. When it is determined that the current special map fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special map 2 (C4301: Yes), it is then determined whether the current special map fluctuation is the time saving final fluctuation (C4302). If it is determined that the current special figure change is not the final time-saving change (C4302: No), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that the current special figure fluctuation is the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: Yes), the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read. (C4304), based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information, the variation pattern of the final variation is set (C4305), and then this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, a hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing the hit variation effect setting processing (C4112). The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4401). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). When it is determined that the variation pattern this time is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4402: No), this process is ended as it is. When it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series production (C4402: Yes), the series production flag 223eb is set to ON (C4403), and then this processing is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, when it is determined that the series production flag 223eb is ON (C4401: Yes), the variation stop timing and the series production branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). When it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), the present process ends. When it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a display replacement command indicating a variation pattern that replaces the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this process ends.

Next, the effect update process 5 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 374. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing production update processing 5 (C3112). This production update process 5 (C3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example, regardless of the change in the special symbol, the elapsed time. It is a process for setting an effect controlled based on.

When the production update process 5 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various fluctuation time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223eb is on (C4502). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4502: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4504). When it is determined that the pseudo series production flag 223ec is off (C4504: No), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4502: Yes), and when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is turned on in the process of C4504 (C4504: Yes), the The production update process is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to C4505. The details of the series production update processing will be described later with reference to the processing in FIG. 375.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ed is on (C4505). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to C4507.

On the other hand, in the process of C4505, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is on (C4505: Yes), the other effect update process is executed (C4507), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, a series of effect update processing (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing the series of effect update processing (C4503). The series of effect update processing (C4503) is executed in the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the series production update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series production counter is 0 (C4601). When it is determined that the value of the series production counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series production counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether the value of the series production counter is 0 or not. (C4604). When it is determined that the value of the series production counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series production counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series production flag 223eb is set to ON (C4612), and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), the value corresponding to the current series effect is set in the series effect counter (C4602), and the process proceeds to C4605. Transition.

In the processing of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per universal figure (C4605). If it is determined that the game is currently playing per universal figure (C4605: Yes), the per-universal figure per-game updating process is executed (C4606), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently playing per universal figure (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the game per universal figure is over (C4607). It is determined whether or not the game is over for the ordinary drawing (C4607). When it is determined that the game is not over for the general-purpose game (C4607: No), the process proceeds to C4609. If it is determined that the game is over for normal play (C4607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special 2 prize flag is on (C4608). If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series effect flag 223eb is set to on (C4612), and then this processing is ended. In the process of C4608, when it is determined that the special 2 prize flag is on (C4608: Yes), the process proceeds to C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not a small hit game is currently being played (C4609). When it is determined that the present is a small hit game (C4609: Yes), a small hit game update process is executed (C4610), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4609, when it is determined that the present is not a small hit game (C4609: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this processing is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376, the contents of the per-universal figure per-game update process (C4606) executed in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) will be described. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the per-universal-game per-game update process (C4606). In this update process for per-university game (C4606), if the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 for a predetermined period even though the per-universal game is in-play, the player is alerted. The processing for performing is performed.

When the per-university game in-game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a ball has been won in the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that no ball has been won in the second winning opening 640. In the case of (C4701: No), next, it is determined whether or not one second has elapsed from the start of the game per universal figure (C4702). If it is determined that 1 second has elapsed (C4702: Yes), a display alerting command is set (C4703), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C4702, when it is determined that it is not the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the per-universal game (C4702: No), the processing is ended as it is.

Here, in the processing of C4703, when the display alert command is set, the alert screen for winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 by the time the game ends is over (see FIG. 324(a)). ) Is displayed. In the present control example, as a universal figure per game, when the universal figure long open per game is executed, after the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is passed, and then 0.5 is again displayed. It is configured such that a game is executed per universal figure for opening the electric accessory 640a for a second. Then, the alert screen shown in FIG. 324(a) is displayed after 1 second has elapsed from the start of the game for the universal figure. With this configuration, when the player who sees the alert screen performs a right-handed game, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4701, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (there is a special 2 prize) (C4701: Yes), a display command for indicating the special 2 prize is set ( C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223er is set to ON (C4705), and this processing ends. Here, when the display command is set in the processing of C4704, a display mode for notifying the special 2 prize is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player that the special 2 prize has been generated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376(b), the contents of the small hitting game update process (C4610) will be described. FIG. 376(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting game update process (C4610). In this small hitting game update processing (C4610), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed a specific area within the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the small hitting game was started. Despite the lapse of time, if the ball has not passed the specific region within the V winning opening 650a, a process for alerting the player is executed.

When the small hitting game update process (C4610) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hitting flag 223ee is set to ON (C4751), and it is determined that the small hitting flag 223ee is not set to ON. If (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit game (C4752). If it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small hit game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball is passing through the specific area within the V winning opening 650a (C4753), and it is not passing. If it is determined (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON (C4754), the display caution command is set (C4755), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4751, when it is determined that the small hitting attention flag 223ee is already set to ON (C4751: Yes), it is determined in the processing of C4752 that it is not the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed from the small hitting game start In the case of (C4752: No), in the process of C4753, when it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area within the V winning opening 650a (C4753: Yes), the processes of C4754 and C4755 are skipped, and this process is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, the content of the final variation effect update processing (C4506) will be described. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the content of the final variation effect update processing (C4506). In this final fluctuation effect update processing (C4506), processing for setting the fluctuation effect corresponding to the final fluctuation in the time saving state is executed. As described above, in this control example, as the variation effect during the time saving state, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result of the variation (lottery result) and the variation result of the variation (lottery result), the special figure The second suggestion effect that suggests the pre-reading result of 2 holds is configured to be executable, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the final change in the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the final variation of the time saving state of this control example, a hold acquisition effect is also provided to urge the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the period in which the time saving state is set. It is configured to be executable, and the hold acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation, and the second suggestion effect (time saving final fluctuation effect) is executed in the latter half period. Then, the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestive effect.

With this configuration, after the player has acquired a large number of special figure 2 holds, the second suggestion effect (time saving final variation effect) that reflects the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 2 holds is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the production mode indicating the winning as the production mode of the time saving final variation production, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In addition, if the number of special map 2 reserved balls already acquired is equal to or more than the upper limit number (4) at the timing (the start timing of the first half period) before executing the hold acquisition effect, the hold acquisition effect is executed. Instead, the second suggestion effect is executed from the first half period. Thereby, a useless effect for the player, that is, a hold acquisition effect for trying to acquire the special figure 2 hold even though the special figure 2 hold ball number has already reached the upper limit. It is possible to prevent the situation where the player is confused by the effect contents. Furthermore, by executing the second suggestive effect from the first half period, the effect period of the second suggestive effect can be extended, so that the more interesting second suggestive effect can be executed. Then, the player can be motivated to play the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the interesting second suggestion effect, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

The final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 377) described with reference to FIG. 377 corresponds to the final variation in the time saving state updated in the process C4501 in the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374). The elapsed period of the final variation effect (the elapsed period of variation of Toku-zu 2) executed is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final variation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the standby period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined that the standby period elapsed timing is reached (C4801: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved sphere number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c) is “4” which is the upper limit value (C4802).

In the process of C4802, when it is determined that the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is “4” (C4802: Yes), the reserved upper limit flag 223en is set to ON (C4803), and the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of C4802, when it is determined that the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is not “4”, that is, is “3” or less (C4802: No), the pending upper limit flag 223en is not set to ON. This process ends.

In the processing of C4801, if it is determined that the current is not the standby period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the current is the first period start timing (C4804), and the first period start timing is determined. If it is determined that there is (C4804: Yes), it is determined whether the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON (C4805), and if it is determined to be set to ON, that is, at the start timing of the first period. Special figure 2 When it is determined that the predetermined number (4) which is the upper limit number is secured for the special ball 2 (C4805: Yes), the time saving variation effect using the first period and the second period as the time saving final variation effect. Is set (C4806), the holding upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, the executed flag 223eq is set to ON (C4808), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4805, when it is determined that the hold upper limit flag 223en is not set to ON (C4805: No), the reserved ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4) is generated. The display effect command shown is set (C4809), and this processing ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of special balls 2 reserved balls at the standby period elapsed timing, and provide various effects to the player. can do.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the first period start timing (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the second period start timing (C4810) and the second period start timing is determined. When it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the executed flag 223eq is set to ON (C4811).

Here, when it is determined that the executed flag 223eq is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the effect executed in the second period is set at the start timing of the first period. (C4811: Yes), since it is not necessary to newly set the effect mode, the executed flag 223eq is set to OFF (C4812), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4811, when it is determined that the executed flag 223eq is not set to ON (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (C4813), and the variation A display effect command indicating a time saving effect based on the lottery result (winning determination result) and the pre-reading result (preliminary determination result) included in the read winning information is set (C4814), and this processing is ended.

In this way, not at the execution timing of the time-saving final fluctuation, but at the timing after the elapse of the predetermined time after the execution of the time-saving final fluctuation (the timing when the second period is set), the rendering mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 suspension. By setting, the special figure 2 holding sphere number (value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c) subtracted when the fluctuation is executed, in the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 holding in the state of being re-added Based presentation mode can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of special figure 2 reservations that are prefetched, and thus it is possible to easily display an effect result indicating a hit in the effect (time saving final variation effect) executed during the second period, The staging effect can be enhanced.

In the process of C4810, if it is determined that the current time is not the second period start timing (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the second period end timing (C4815). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether or not a new special 2 hold is acquired during the second period (C4816), and it is determined whether a new special 2 hold is acquired. When the determination is made (C4816: Yes), the re-reading flag 223em is set to ON (C4817), and this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the process executed in C4816 will be described. In the winning information storage area 223a, a storage area corresponding to each symbol suspension is formed, and in the present control example, the first special symbol (special symbol Storage area for 1), storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and storage area for ordinary symbols (general symbols), the number corresponding to the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol (4) Has been formed. Then, each storage area indicates the pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110, and whether or not the pre-reading result is referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. And information is stored.

That is, in the process of C4816, it is determined in each storage area whether or not a new special 2 hold is stored in the winning information storage area 223a other than the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) referred to by the process of C4806 or C4814. It is determined based on the presence or absence of stored referenced information, and pre-read information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (special 2 suspension) of the winning information storage area 223a When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, in the process of C4817, the re-reading flag 223em is set to ON, so that the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the time saving). The variation effect based on the pre-reading result is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4816, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4816: No), all the special figure 2 hold currently acquired are prefetched, and the second effect is performed based on the prefetch result. Since the final time saving effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving effect is set as it is (C4818), and this processing is ended. In the process of C4815, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), next, the display command corresponding to the other update contents is set (C4819), and the present process is ended. In the process of C4819, the effect mode is set based on the elapsed period of the final fluctuation effect, the remaining period display mode is updated to indicate the remaining period of the final fluctuation, and the elapsed period display mode is indicated to indicate the elapsed period of the final fluctuation. Update settings, operation display mode settings performed based on the player operating the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change, and the like.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385. In the above-mentioned fifth control example, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is configured to be able to store four, and the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored when the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state. The special figure 2 lottery is executed with the lottery probability in the normal state for (maximum 4).

Further, the fifth control example described above is configured such that the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to give a lottery result advantageous to the player than the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state. The game was motivated to try to obtain a lot of special figure 2 hold at the time of the end.

In the fifth control example described above, the maximum number of special figure 2 suspensions can be easily obtained by simply performing the right-handed game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so that the player can play with peace of mind. However, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state cannot be made different, and further technical improvement is required.

On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the maximum reserved number of balls of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is set to "1", and a short variation as a variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that the time easily selectable period can be set according to the type of time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations during the time saving state, and as a regular figure per game executed during the time saving state, the winning game period Is configured to allow multiple types of long open games. In addition, as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state, a state in which a short time variation (0.1 second variation) is easily set can be set.

With such a configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after setting the normal state) can be made different according to the satisfaction of various game conditions. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy what kind of game condition is satisfied at the time when the time saving state ends.

First, with reference to FIG. 378, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 378 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is changed. Are different, and otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 378, in the sixth control example, the closed state in which the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 (displayed by the solid line in FIG. 378) and the open state in which the ball is easily won (displayed by the dotted line in FIG. 378) , And a variable electric accessory 640a is provided. The electric accessory 640a facilitates winning a plurality of balls into the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 315) is opened. Is configured. Further, although a detailed description is omitted, the period from the passage of the electric accessory 640a in the open state to the winning of the second winning opening 640 may be different depending on the flowing state of the ball. For example, a ball that has flowed down along the structure having the second winning opening 640 and has reached the vicinity of the base of the electric accessory 640a (on the side of the structure having the second winning opening 640), and the tip of the electric accessory 640a (second With the sphere that has reached near the side away from the structure having the winning opening 640), the sphere flowing down period required from when the ball is located at a position where it can win the second winning opening 640 until it wins the second winning opening 640. Is configured to be larger than 0.1 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the ball win the second winning opening 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the game in which the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the open state. it can. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation when the normal state is set as the game state. There is.

In other words, in the present control example, the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a variation time shorter than the generation time lag of a plurality of winning balls during the game per one universal figure. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls are won in the second winning port 640 during a single game, the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed by the number of times corresponding to the number of winnings.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 378, the time lag of the winning ball is generated depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a the ball reaches with respect to the electric accessory 640a in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of openings (first opening and second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the balls flowing into each opening are the second winning opening 640. It is configured to change the period until it reaches at least 0.1 seconds or more, and is configured to execute a universal game per game in which each opening is opened in one universal game per game. Is also good.

With such a configuration, during the normal game per game, the period until the second winning port 640 is reached by the ball passing through the first opening and the ball passing through the second opening at substantially the same timing. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed more reliably as many times as the number of winnings.

Further, in this case, the electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to shift the plurality of openings to the open state and the closed state. ..

<Regarding contents of effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example>
Next, the display content of the display screen in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 379. In this control example, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied at the timing of ending the time saving state, a state where the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed (support state) is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, in the final change in the time saving state (time saving final variation effect), the suggesting effect suggesting that the support state is set after the time saving is configured to be executed.

FIG. 379(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final variation in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 379(a), in the sixth control example, unlike the fifth control example described above, even in the final variation in the time saving state, the variation effect (first suggestion) for showing the lottery result of the variation. Since the effect) is executed, the same effect screen as the variable effect (see FIG. 327(a)) executed corresponding to the non-final change during the time saving state of the fifth control example described above is displayed. The same components as those in the display screen of the fifth control example (see FIG. 327(a)) described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth control example, on the display screen of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 327(a)), in addition to the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, it is suggested that the support state is set after the time saving ends. The difference is that a state suggestion mode 871d to which the letters “support” are attached is displayed. This state suggestion mode 871d is configured to be easily displayed each time the end of the time saving state approaches, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out, and when the support state is set after the time saving ends, An effect mode in which the character 851 obtains the state suggestion mode 871d is set. In addition, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is a win, a production mode in which the lottery result modes 871a to 871b indicating the win are obtained is set.

When the support state is set after the end of the time saving state, the display screen shown in FIG. 379(b) is displayed. FIG. 379(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the support state. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the winning game per universal figure won during the time saving state is a long opening per game, and the long opening per game is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state. The support state is set when the ball can win the second winning opening 640.

In this support state, although it is a normal state, since the ball can win the second winning opening 640, "right hit" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4. Then, in the small display area Dm31, a guide display mode for visually informing the player that a game in which a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 is performed is displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, a support state is set. A comment of "Support time inrush" is displayed indicating that it has been done.

In addition, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 change being executed is variably displayed, and information indicating the number of special figure 2 changes executed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. Is displayed as "support frequency". In the example shown in FIG. 379(b), since the first special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed after the support state is set, “support count×1” is displayed. In the main display area Dm, the effect that the character 851 tries to stand up is executed, and the comment “Ganbare” is displayed. In this support state, a short fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) can be executed as the special figure 2 fluctuation, and many special figure 2 fluctuations are executed in some cases. When the winning is won in the variation of Toku-zu 2 in the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<Regarding electrical configuration of sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 383. In this control example, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, and the upper limit number of the special figure 2 suspension is set to 1. It is different in that the structure of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed due to the change, and is otherwise the same. Is. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the detailed description of the differences between the RAMs 203 will be omitted.

FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, for the above-described fifth control example, the random number 5 table 202ed per universal figure is replaced with the 6 table 202fd per universal figure, and the variable pattern 6 table 202fe is replaced with the variable pattern 5 table 202ee. The difference is that a universal figure variation pattern selection table 202ef is provided instead of the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202ef, and the other points are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381(a), the contents of the type selection 6 table 202fd per universal figure will be described. FIG. 381(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection 6 table 202fd per universal figure. In the sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 381(a), the per-universal-drawing type is the above-mentioned per-universal-drawing type A, the per-universal-university drawing B1 and the per-universal-university drawing B2 are provided as the per-universal-university drawing type, This is different from the selection 5 table 202ed.

Specifically, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state (universal figure low probability), the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is "0", "per ordinary figure A" is defined, " "B1 per ordinary figure" is defined in the range of 1 to 50, and "B2 per ordinary figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99". Further, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a high probability state (universal figure high accuracy), the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is "0,1" in the range "A per ordinary figure" is defined, "B1 per ordinary figure" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per ordinary figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, with reference to FIG. 381(b), a description will be given of the relationship between the universal figure per category selected in the universal figure per category selection 6 table 202fd and the game state at the time when the universal figure per game is executed. do. FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing a relationship with the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the per-university figure type and the game state.

In the sixth control example, in addition to the fifth control example described above, “B1 per common figure” and “B2 per common figure” are provided instead of “B per common figure” as the type per common figure. Although different, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a for the "universal figure per B1" in the present control example is the same as the opening operation content for the "universal figure per B" in the fifth control example described above. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the game type per game is "B2 per game", and the game state when the game per game is released is the time saving state (high accuracy of map), the game per game is "long". The opening operation of "open B" is executed. When this "long open B" is set, a normal game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 second. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the per-universal-drawing scenario (not shown). When executing the per-universal-drawing game, the per-universal-drawing scenario corresponding to the per-universal-drawing type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the per-universal-drawing scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-described per-universal-drawing per game flow.

In other words, in the sixth control example, if the winning combination is won during the time saving state, either one of the "long opening A" and the "long opening B" common game is executed as the common long opening game. It No matter which universal figure hit game is executed, the period in which the electric accessory 640a is open is common to 1.5 seconds, and when the ordinary figure hit game is executed during the time saving state, any Even if the game is executed per game, it is possible to provide a state in which the same privilege can be given to the player.

However, in the "long open A" and the "long open B", the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (the state in which the ball can easily be won in the second winning opening 640) after the game is started If they are different, and "Long open A" is set, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds after the game starts per universal figure The electric accessory 640a is configured to be opened in the open state during the period.

Therefore, when the winning figure is hit when the "long opening A" opening operation is executed just before the time saving state ends, the "long opening B" opening operation is executed at the same timing. It is possible to make it easier for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set, as compared with the case of being elected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents of the normal-use variation pattern 6 table 202fe1 included in the variation pattern 6 table 202fe will be described. FIG. 382 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal-use fluctuation pattern 6 table 202fe1, and the normal-use fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee1 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 339(b)). ), the difference is that the content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and is otherwise the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the sixth control example, according to the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the end of the big hit, the special drawing executed until the number of times of change of the special map after the end of the big hit reaches a predetermined number of times. The change pattern (change time) of the two changes is configured to be different.

Specifically, when time saving A (time saving 1 time or time saving 99 times) is set as the time saving state, the special figure fluctuation frequency after the jackpot game is over is in the normal state within the range of "1 to 99 times". When the special figure 2 fluctuation in is executed, “short fluctuation (10 seconds)” is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the “100 to 151 times” In the range, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is “out”, “ultra short out (0.1 seconds)” is “win (big hit, small hit)” Is set to "long win (20 seconds)", and "short change (10 seconds)" is set in the range "after the 152nd time" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery. It is prescribed to be done.

Here, in the sixth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions (common time saving end condition, corresponding time saving end condition) are set as time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state. Even if it is a time-saving state in which 99 reductions in time are set (a time-saving state in which a corresponding reduction time saving condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in the Toku-zu 2 variation reaches 99) is set, for example. , When the small hit game is executed, the ball does not pass the specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the big hit game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. It is configured to do. Therefore, even if the time saving is set to 99 times, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state may be executed when the special figure fluctuation number after the jackpot is over is changed to the second time.

As shown in FIG. 382, when the shortening time A is set, the variation time of 0.1 seconds when the special figure 2 variation is executed when the number of special figure variation after the jackpot is “100 to 151 times”. Is configured to be set. In other words, when 99 hours have been completed without winning in the state where the time saving state has been set, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. To be done. In addition, when the game is executed per universal figure so as to stride over the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 in the normal state, and the special figure 2 changes with a change time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls are won in the second winning port 640 during the game, the special figure 2 variation of the number of times corresponding to the winning number is easily executed. ..

On the other hand, when the time saving state of one time saving time is set, even if the game is executed per universal figure across the end timing of the time saving state, the variation time of 10 seconds as the special figure 2 variation Since it is set, even if a plurality of balls are won in the second winning hole 640 during the game per ordinary figure, the special figure 2 variation is executed only for the number of times that the special figure 2 pending storage number is the upper limit. doing.

In addition, when the time saving B (the time saving state in which 5 times are saved) is set, the special figure fluctuation number after the jackpot game is within the range of "1 to 5th", and the special figure 2 fluctuation during the normal state Is executed, "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, and in the range of "6 to 20 times", the fluctuation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is “out”, “ultra-short deviation (0.1 seconds)” is displayed, and if it is “hit (big hit, small hit),” long hit ( 20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "21st time or later", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery. Has been done.

As described above, in the present control example, among the three time-saving states (1 time reduction, 5 time reductions, 99 time reductions) in which different time reduction end conditions are set, the time reduction state is set to 5 time reductions. In the two types of time-saving states, namely, the time-saving state in which 99 time-savings are set, when the time-saving state is completed by reaching the number of time-savings defined by the number of special figure fluctuations and the normal state is set, 0. The special figure 2 fluctuation of 1 second is configured to be executable.

And, as described above, 0.1 second which is set as the variation of special figure 2 is from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the game as shown in FIG. Since it is also short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by winning a plurality of balls in the second winning opening 640 in one game per game long opening.

Therefore, the ease of executing the special drawing 2 lottery after the end of the time saving state can be made different depending on the set time saving state and the established time saving end condition. It is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play when the game ends.

In addition, in the present control example, when the time saving state of one hour saving is set, the special figure 2 change is executed within a period in which the number of special figure changes after the jackpot game is "100 to 151". In the case, that is, the time saving state of one hour saving time ends, and then, while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed, the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is won by winning the per-game long opening If the number of special figure fluctuations after the jackpot game is "100 to 151", a short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is executed if the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is missed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuations multiple times when winning the general figure long opening in the normal state.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed not only after the end of the time saving state, but also at the time of winning the universal figure long opening in the normal state. On the other hand, the game in the normal state can be played while paying attention to the number of changes in the special map, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, a player who has been playing for a long period of time can grasp the contents of the previous time saving state (the number of times saving time), and further, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in winning the general figure long opening in the normal state. Since the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special figure fluctuations after the jackpot game is over) can be predicted and the game can be played more advantageously than other players, the desire to continue playing the game Can be raised.

In the sixth control example, when a specific time saving state is set and the time saving state is ended by the establishment of a specific time saving end condition, a short time (0. Although the variation pattern of 1 second) is selected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of a short time (0.1 second) can be set according to the timing of winning per universal long opening in the normal state. You may comprise so that the range which a fluctuation pattern is selected may be provided separately. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be favorably executed when the player wins the universal figure long opening, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the present control example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation is configured to be selected based on the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the jackpot game is finished, but it is not limited to this. Instead, for example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation may be selected based on the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the time saving state ends. With this configuration, it is possible to select the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation after the end of the time saving state, regardless of which time saving end condition the time saving state ends. You can play games with all your heart.

Further, when the same type of time saving state is set, different variation patterns may be selected. For example, a plurality of time saving types in which 5 times are set as the time saving state are provided, The special figure 2 variation may be executed for a short time (0.1 seconds) after the end of the time saving state only when a specific time saving type is set among the time saving types. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the game content after the end of the time saving state when the time saving state is set (when the remaining time saving number is grasped).

In addition, in this control example, as a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed (variable time), it is configured to set a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds, It suffices that the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a, and plural kinds of fluctuation times (for example, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.3 seconds). One variable time may be selected from among the above. With this configuration, the number of special map 2 lottery operations that can be executed in the support state depends on the length of the special map 2 variation time set in the state in which the special map 2 lottery is favorably executed (support state). Since it is variable, it is possible for the player to watch the game contents in the support state.

Next, the contents of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. 383. FIG. 383(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the universal figure variation pattern selection 6 table 202ff, and FIG. 383(b) is a universal figure for time saving A which the universal figure variation pattern selection 6 table 202ff has. FIG. 383(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202ff2, and FIG. 383(c) is defined in the time saving B general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 included in the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content.

As shown in FIG. 383(a), the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff is the normal universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and the type of the time saving state is " There is a general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B that is referenced when "time saving B" is set. doing.

The contents defined in the normal-use universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff1 are the same as the contents referred to in the normal state (normal figure low accuracy) of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef in the fifth control example described above. , Its detailed description is omitted. On the other hand, the universal figure fluctuation pattern table that is referred to in the time saving state (high accuracy of universal figure) is the type of the time saving state and the jackpot that are set for the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the general pattern fluctuation patterns selected based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end are configured to be different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383(b), the contents stipulated in the universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A will be described. 383. The general pattern variation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A is a data table referred to when "time saving A", that is, the time saving number of 1 or 99 times is set as the type of time saving state. As shown in (b), various general figure fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are defined based on the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the jackpot end is “1 to 98 times”, and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is “0 to 629” in the range of “short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)” is in the range of “630 to 999”, “ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)” is defined, and the number of special figure fluctuations is “99 times”. In the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0 to 709", "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)" is defined, and in the range of "710 to 989", "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is defined. In the range of “990 to 999”, “short fluctuation (2 seconds)” is defined.

That is, in the final hourly fluctuation when the hourly time is set once, the general pattern variation pattern is configured such that 63% selects 2 seconds and 37% selects 0.1 second, and the hourly time 99 times is set. In the time saving final variation in the case, 71% is selected as 0.1 seconds, 28% is selected as 10 seconds, and 1% is selected as 2 seconds as the universal pattern variation pattern. Here, as the shorter variation time is set as the universal figure variation pattern, the universal figure per game is more likely to be executed so as to stride over the end timing of the time saving state. In the time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set, it is possible to easily set the state (support state) in which the ball can be easily won in the second winning opening 640 after the time saving state is completed.

On the other hand, when the number of special figure fluctuations is “99”, the general-purpose figure fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and the general-purpose figure fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected. In this case, it becomes difficult for the game to be executed per universal figure so as to cross the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, in the present control example, when 99 hour reductions are set as the time saving end condition, the normal figure variation time during execution of the special figure variation (99th special figure variation) that satisfies the time saving termination condition is Since it is configured so that the 0.1-second universal figure fluctuation time can be selected more easily than the period, the 0.1-second universal figure fluctuation is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game that excessively obtains a privilege (a prize ball paid out by winning a ball in the second winning opening 640).

Also, the special figure fluctuation set as the time saving final fluctuation and the general figure fluctuation are set at different triggers, and any execution trigger can be established by the ball launched by the right-handed game so that any execution trigger can be established. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult for a game to be executed in which the universal figure fluctuation (variation per universal figure) is executed in accordance with the ending timing of the special figure fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383(c), the contents stipulated in the universal pattern variation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B will be described. The time saving B universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 is a data table that is referred to when "time saving B", ie, 5 times of time saving is set as the type of time saving state, and is shown in FIG. 383(c). As described above, various general figure fluctuation patterns (variation times) are defined based on the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4 times", and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0 to 629" in the range of "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)” is within the range of “630-999”, “ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)” is defined, and when the special figure fluctuation frequency is “5 times”, the acquired The "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)" is defined regardless of the value of the 2 fluctuation type counter CS2. Since the maximum time saving state is set to 5 times, the value corresponding to the 6th special figure variation number and thereafter is not set.

As described above, when the hour-shortening state is set to 5 times hour-shortening, the universal figure variation is always executed with the variation time of 0.1 seconds during the final hour-time variation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the per-universal game so as to stride over the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in the present control example, the variable time of the special symbol and the variable time of the normal symbol can be set differently according to the type of the hourly state (hourly A, B) that is set. Therefore, it is easy to set a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is most easily executed after the end of the time saving state for the time saving type (time saving B) in which 5 times saving time is set, then 99 times saving time, 1 times saving time It is configured to be in the order of.

As a result, when the condition for executing the jackpot game during the time saving state is not satisfied, it is possible to give a privilege (support state) to the player, and further, according to the set type of the time saving state, the privilege is provided. The interest of the game can be improved by changing the granting probability.

In this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of special figure 2 variation or when selecting the variation pattern of general figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variation after the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to select each variation pattern only by referring to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 variation, or may be configured to refer to the number of fluctuations of the universal figure variation. You may do it. Further, each variation pattern may be selected with reference to the satisfaction of the set time saving end condition.

In addition, in the present control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation or when selecting the variation pattern of the general figure variation, the special figure variation frequency after the jackpot game is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the small hit type that is won during the time saving state, the change pattern table used when selecting each change pattern may be changed, or after the small hit game is over. Each variation pattern may be selected based on the number of special figure changes and the number of ordinary figure changes.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth control example>
Next, the contents of the control process in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 384 and 385. In the present control example, with respect to the above-mentioned fifth control example, the normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) is replaced with a normal symbol variation process 6 (see C136 in FIG. 384), and the main control The difference is that the contents (see FIGS. 380 to 383) of the data table referred to in various determination processes in the apparatus 110 are different, and the other points are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, regarding the point that the content of the data table to be referred to has been changed and the various processing content that is changed in response to the change of the content of the data table to be referred to, only numerical values have been changed. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 384, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) will be described. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136). When the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) is executed, the same C601 to C611 processes as the normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and in the process of C611, When it is determined that the lottery for the ordinary symbols this time is a win (C611: Yes), the type per universal figure is set for this time by referring to the type selection 6 table 202fd for a universal figure (C641), and the hit time (normal The display mode of (at the time of drawing) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, when it is determined that the winning lottery of the normal symbol this time is out (C611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the process of C642, the general pattern fluctuation pattern of this time is set based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table (C642), and the commands corresponding to the respective setting contents (whether the lottery is hit or lost, the general pattern fluctuation pattern) are set. (C623), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C602, when it is determined that the present figure is currently changing (C602: Yes), the same C618 as the normal symbol changing process 5 (see C106 of FIG. 350) of the fifth control example described above. The processing of C623 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 385, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 of the sixth control example will be described. The control process content of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present control example is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth control example described above in place of the universal figure effect setting process (see C4117 of FIG. 371). The difference is that the configuration is such that the general-purpose effect setting process 6 (see C4167 in FIG. 385) is executed. The other control processes are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general-use production effect setting process 6 (C4167). As shown in FIG. 385, in the general-use production effect setting process 6 (C4167), the general-use production effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) is executed during the special figure final variation period in the time saving state. The difference is that a process for setting an effect mode is added, and other than that is the same, the same control process content is denoted by the same reference numeral, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the general figure effect setting process 6 (C4167) is executed, the same C4201 to C4212 processes as the general figure effect setting process of the fifth control example described above (see C4117 of FIG. 371) are executed, and the present process To finish. In addition, in the processing of C4202, when it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation is the final variation of the time saving state (C4251), and the final variation. If it is determined that it is not in the middle (C4251: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4251, when it is determined that the present fluctuation is currently in the short-time state (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is acquired, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed is determined. Extract (C4252).

Then, it is determined whether or not the ending timing of the special figure change being executed is in the universal figure long per game (C4253), and when it is determined that the universal figure long open per game is in progress (C4253: Yes), this time saving Since the game is executed per universal figure long opening for crossing the state end timing, a display command is set to indicate that the special figure 2 variable zone (support state) will be set after the time saving ends (C4254). , This process ends. When the display command is set by the processing of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same processing as other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 379(a) is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

In the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the time saving end timing (C4253: No), the present process is directly terminated. In this control example, when it is determined that the long opening is not performed at the time saving end timing in the process of C4253 (C4253: No), the present process is ended as it is. The time saving state was a time saving state (for example, time saving B) in which it was easy to set the support state, but the execution timing of special figure fluctuation and general figure fluctuation was bad and the support status was not set in the first place. It is possible to provide a means for determining whether a time saving state (for example, time saving A) that is difficult to set is set, and to display a display mode capable of notifying (suggesting) the determination result to the player. .. Further, at the end timing of the present figure fluctuation, and at the end timing of the game per figure that is executed based on the present figure change, a means for determining whether or not the final fluctuation of the time saving state has ended If it is determined that the final fluctuation of the time saving state has not ended at the provision timing of this time, and the ending timing of this time's universal figure fluctuation, and the ending timing of the game per universal figure executed based on this current universal figure fluctuation, The determination result may be suggested (notified).

As described above, the sixth control example is similar to the fifth control example described above, in the second special symbol lottery (special diagram 2 lottery) rather than the first special symbol lottery (special diagram 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win the small hit, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbol, The special symbol 2 lottery is configured to be executed more easily than when the normal symbol low probability state) is set. Then, a ball is won in the V winning opening 650a which is opened during the small hitting game, and when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate), a trigger for executing the big hitting game is established. ..

Then, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a first end condition (a condition that is satisfied when the special figure variation number (special figure 2 variation number) reaches a prescribed number (for example, 5 times)), When the first end condition is satisfied, at least the second end condition (a condition that is satisfied when a specific number of winnings is won a specified number of times (for example, once) by a special drawing lottery during a time saving state) Only, the player can be provided with an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Specifically, during the special figure fluctuation that the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is extremely short (general figure fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many fluctuations occur within one special figure fluctuation period. It is configured to be able to carry out universal figure fluctuations.

As a result, when the time-saving state ends based on the satisfaction of the first ending condition, the variation period of the universal figure variation to be executed is shortened by the final variation of the time-saving state (special figure final variation). be able to. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute the game per universal long opening during the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special fluctuation final variation), and by the end, the time saving state ends during execution of the general long opening per game Even after the state is set, it is possible to easily continue the game per universal figure long opening.

In other words, in the present control example, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1, 5, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small hit winning probability about 1/ 7)) is played while aiming to be given a game, while special figure 2 lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the small hit in special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, A second benefit (a period during which a short fluctuation is executed as a universal figure fluctuation) different from the first privilege is given. With this configuration, advantageous benefits can be given to the player regardless of whether or not the small hit is won as the game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state, so that the player can be provided with an advantageous privilege. It is possible to improve the game motivation.

Further, in the present control example, the period during which the short fluctuation is executed as the general-purpose fluctuation is set during the execution period of the special figure final fluctuation in a specific time-shortened state (for example, 5 times shortened). At the time when the time saving state ends, it is possible to easily acquire the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) up to the upper limit (4). Furthermore, by shortening the universal figure fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period in which the electric accessory 1640a is open per unit time, so that the game is being executed per universal figure (electric role) The normal state can be easily set in a state in which the object 1640a is open, or in a state in which a period in which the electric accessory 1640a is open remains.

As a result, it is possible to make it easier to win a ball at the second winning opening 1640 even after the normal state is set. Therefore, when the second privilege is granted, it is more than when the second privilege is not granted. A lot of special figure 2 lottery can be executed, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example, during a specific game (for example, a small hit game), the ball enters from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult to enter the ball from the first state. A specific ball entering means (V winning opening 650a) that is changed to a second state (open state) that is easy to perform is provided, and the ball entering the specific ball entering means (V winning opening 650a) is a specific area (V gate). The big hit game is configured to be executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a ball enters the V winning opening 650a that is opened when the small hit game is executed. In such a case, the technique described in this control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 to which the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player. Even in this case, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning the small hit than the special figure 1 lottery, which is advantageous to the player when the above-described second privilege is granted. A gaming state can be provided.

Further, in the sixth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 383, the period during which the above-described second privilege is granted is the period during which the final fluctuation in the time saving state is executed (the specific time saving ending condition is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the time saving 99 times is set, immediately after the time saving state is set (for example, the number of changes in the special map after the time saving is set is 1 to 5 times), or after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set (for example, a period in which the number of special map changes from the time saving state is set to 45 to 50 times) is the second privilege. The contents defined in the universal figure variation pattern 6 table 202fe may be configured to be added. Further, a plurality of time saving types may be provided for the time saving state in which the same time saving ending condition is set, and the period in which the second privilege is granted may be different according to the time saving type being set. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second benefit is granted when the time saving state is set, and thus it is expected that the second benefit is granted. It is possible to allow the player to play a game during the time saving state.

<Regarding Modification of Sixth Control Example>
Next, a modification of the sixth control example described above will be described. In the sixth control example described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the time saving state, that is, when the fifth special time period variation is executed in a state where a specific time saving state (5 times saving time is saved) is set. , Ordinary pattern (general drawing) is configured so that a short time (0.1 seconds) variable time is easily selected as the variable time, and the advantageous game is executed immediately before the end of the time saving state or immediately after the end of the time saving state. In the above, the ball is configured to be easily won in the second winning opening 640. Then, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 378, a second winning opening 640 accompanied by the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right game area of the game board 13, and when the right-handed game is executed, The second winning opening 640 can be won, but the first winning opening 64 cannot be a ball.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the lower position of the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball launched by the right-handed game. If the winning is possible and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the game board 13 in which the first winning opening 64 is arranged is used at a position where the ball shot by the right-handed game is difficult to win. ing. In addition, since the configuration of the game board 13 other than that is the same as the above-described sixth control example, description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the present modification, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) change in the order in which the acquired information is obtained (the order in which the ball wins the corresponding winning opening). The sixth control example is different from the sixth control example in that the (lottery) is configured to be executed and the configuration in which the acquisition information of the special figure 2 is stored for reservation is deleted. Since the other contents are the same as those of the sixth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 seconds) is easily set as the universal figure fluctuation time) is given during the time saving state, and the normal per regular figure is played during the game. When the state is set, the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to enter the second winning opening 640, and it is difficult to enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the special figure 2 variation during the normal state. On the other hand, if the normal state is set at a timing other than during the game, the ball shot by the right-handed game is likely to enter the first winning opening 64. Further, since it does not have a configuration for storing the suspension of special figure 2, even if a ball is won in the second winning port 640 while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the variation of special figure 2 is It is configured to not run.

That is, in the present modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as a guiding means for guiding the sphere to the second winning opening 640 and a limiting means for limiting the winning of the sphere to the first winning opening 64. It is configured to work. With this configuration, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state ends and when the normal state is set, depending on whether or not the second privilege is given during the time saving state. The benefits can be very different. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the second benefit to be given.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 397. In the above-mentioned fifth control example, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery result, or, as a variable effect that is executed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, a series effect is configured to be executable, and a series effect is executed. In such a case, it is difficult to know whether the execution timing of the series of productions this time is a special drawing lottery or a general drawing lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the production result (lottery result). (See Figure 317).

However, a notification mode for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game depending on the hit game to be executed (universal figure hit game, small hit game, big hit game) (small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) There is a possibility that it may be determined based on which symbol lottery the series of effects this time is based on.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, which is the symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) or the effect (set effect) executed by the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery). Even at the same timing, the notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game can be displayed. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration and control content of the seventh control example will be described. The detailed description of the same contents as the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is different from the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 315) in the right-side game area. , Otherwise the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example. In the seventh control example, a ball that flows down in the right-side game area by the player performing a right-handed game allows each winning game to be won by each winning game (universal game, small hit game, big hit game). The time to reach (the second winning opening 640, the V winning opening 650a, the specific winning opening 65a) is configured to be different, and specifically, the ball fired by the right-handed game is the second winning opening 640. It takes about 4 seconds to reach the V winning port 650a, about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, and about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, the configuration of the right side game area of this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. As shown in FIG. 386, above the right-side game area, distribution means 700 capable of distributing the sphere to a plurality of sphere paths is provided, and the sphere distributed by the distribution means 700 is the first path 701. And the second path 702 are alternately allocated.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering sphere passage, and it takes about 3 seconds for the sphere to pass through the first path 701. Then, the ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the flow path unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640a. The flow path unit is configured such that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the outlet 66, and the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are provided as a part of the flow path formed on the upper surface. It is provided. When both the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are closed, the sphere that has flowed down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the lowermost end (the end on the side of the outlet 66) of the upper surface of the flow path unit, and It is configured to flow into the mouth 66.

It takes about 1 second for the ball that has passed through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a (the ball flow on the upper surface of the flow path unit) is further configured. The surface forming the path) is provided with a delay member for delaying the flow of the ball, so that the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 2 seconds. I am configuring. Here, in the seventh control example, a meandering flow path is formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a so that the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a meanders in the depth direction so that the sphere does not flow straight down. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the sphere.

On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution unit 700 flow into the linear passage passage opening 704a formed in the depth direction of the first path, and are provided near the passage passage outlet. It is configured to flow down toward the V winning opening 650a, and the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, each winning hole in which the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won by each winning game (universal game, small hit game, big hit game) 2 winning holes 640, V winning holes 650a, specific winning holes 65a) are configured to have different times to reach, specifically, a ball fired by a right-handed game reaches the second winning holes 640. It takes about 4 seconds, it takes about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, and it takes about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65a.

With this configuration, it is possible to sequentially confirm which winning opening the ball fired by the right-handed game wins, and thus it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in this control example, the special figure variation time is set to be different when the small hit is won in the special drawing lottery and when the big hit is won, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after being hit, in order to win the ball to the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to give a notification for guiding the right-handed game during the special figure changing time. Then, whether the small hit or the big hit is won, the set effect is executed after the special figure variation is started, and the notification for guiding the right-handed game is given at the same timing when the specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player determines the current lottery result depending on the timing at which the notification for guiding the right-handed game is given.

In addition, in the present control example, when the general figure long opening is won by the general figure lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so as to notify the right-handed game at a specific timing of the set effect. I am configuring. With such a configuration, even if the set effect is executed and the notification for guiding the right-handed game is given, it is difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of the set effect this time indicates. It is possible to enhance the production effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389, a series of effects used as a variable effect of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) in the seventh control example, and right-handing for guiding the right-handing game The relationship with the notification display timing will be described. FIG. 389 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 389, in this control example, an effect (a series of effects) is executed for a predetermined period (54 seconds) after the symbol variation is started, and thereafter, a guidance notification for guiding the player to the right-handed game. (Right hit notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls fired by the right-handed game are opened according to the lottery result of the symbol variation currently executed. It is configured to win the winning openings (the second winning opening 640, the V winning opening 650a, the specific winning opening 65a).

Specifically, when a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) that is a big hit, right-handed 54 seconds after the start of fluctuation (while the special figure 1 is changing). Notification is executed. Then, the jackpot game is started at the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65a (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed).

In addition, when a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) that is won by small hit, 54 seconds after the start of fluctuation (while the special figure 1 is changing), a right-handed notification is given. Is executed. Then, the small hitting game is started at the timing when the ball shot by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed). In this control example, when the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, the ball is always passed through the V gate, and the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hitting game. In this case, the big hit game is started 2 seconds after the small hit game is started. As a result, depending on whether the big hit is won or the small hit is won in the special figure 1 variation, the production mode of the variation production (series production) executed from the start of the variation, and the guide notification for guiding the right-handed game In addition to the execution timing of, it is possible to be the same from the start of variation to the timing when the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of the current variation effect (set effect) indicates, and to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, when a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning figure change (54 seconds), right-handing notification is executed 54 seconds after the start of fluctuation (when the figure change stops). To be done. Then, at the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (2 seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the universal game is started. Even when a series of productions are executed based on this variation of the universal figure, the start timing of the jackpot game through the universal figure game is the same as when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery described above and when the small hit is won. It is configured to be the same. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of the current variation effect (set effect) indicates, and to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present control example, at a plurality of timings of a period (right-handing ball downflow period) from when the guide notification for guiding the right-handed game (right-handed notification) is executed until the jackpot game is started, It is configured to be able to execute a failure effect that notifies that the effect result of is a failure (a big hit game is not executed). Specifically, the failure notification timing is set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

That is, although detailed description and illustration are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is out of alignment, the variation patterns of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds are set. When the variation pattern is selected, the same variation effect as that described above is executed, and the failure notification is executed at the timing when the variation time has elapsed. The failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 during the game, and the ball is won in the second winning opening 640. It is configured so as to coincide with the timing at which the lottery result of the special figure 2 change executed is notified, or the result of the special figure 2 lottery wins the small hit and the small hit game ends.

With such a configuration, when the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is out of alignment, the production mode of the out-of-sequence series effect and the sequence effect executed based on the win In the game process after the game, it is possible to have the same effect mode as that set when the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of the current variation effect (set effect) indicates, and to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present control example, for example, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 variation and the special figure variation of 60 seconds is executed, it is possible to fuel whether or not the above-described failure notification is executed. It is configured to execute the stir production. In this case, since the special map 1 jackpot is internally won, a success effect mode for informing the player that the failure does not fail is set as a result of the fanning effect and is executed as an effect.

In this way, by performing the stirrup production, it is possible to reduce the difference in the production mode between the series production in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series production in which the failure notification is not executed. ) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result indicates and to enhance the effect. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect to be executed (the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), the effect this time is based on the ball flow situation of the right game area. It is possible to make it difficult to determine in advance what the result is.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392, an electrical configuration in this control example will be described. The present control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other than that, it is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 390(a), the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 390(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the seventh control example. In this control example, a variation pattern 7 table 202ge is provided in place of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee, and a universal figure variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf is provided in place of the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202ef in the fifth control example described above. They are different in that they are the same, and are otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202ge. As shown in FIG. 391(a), the variation pattern 7 table 202ge has a normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 and a time saving variation pattern 5 table 202ee2, which is the same as the fifth control example described above. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table that are referenced when the state is set are different.

Here, the contents of the normal-use variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 will be described with reference to FIG. 391(b). FIG. 391(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1. As shown in FIG. 391(b), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 is the first special symbol (see FIG. 339(b)) for the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 339). The contents specified in the data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special figure 1) are different, and the data that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The contents specified in the table are the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1, regardless of whether the lottery result of the special map 1 lottery is “out”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, a dedicated variation pattern (variation time) for executing the set effect. ) Is selected, and specifically, when the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is “out”, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is “short” in the range of “0 to 139”. "Displacement (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Displacement (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", "Short set performance (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194". "Various types of super reach (60 seconds)" are defined in the range, and "Set performance (60 seconds)" is defined in the range of "195 to 198".

When the lottery result of special figure 1 is “big hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, “various normal reach (30 seconds)” is in the range of “30 to 39”. "Short set performance (30 seconds)", "40-179" range "Super reach (60 seconds)", "180-198" range "set performance (60 seconds)" is defined. If the lottery result is "small win", "various super reach (60 seconds)" is in the range of "0 to 99" and "100 to 198" is in the range of "0 to 99" for the acquired variation type counter CS1. The winning set effect (56 seconds)" is defined.

As described above, in the present control example, the variation pattern for executing the set effect is selected at a predetermined ratio regardless of the lottery result of the special drawing 1. Further, the variation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect is configured to be different between when the small hit is won and when the big hit is won. Specifically, the variation time of 60 seconds can be selected as the set effect when the big hit is won, and the variation time of 56 seconds can be selected as the set effect when the small hit is won. That is, the variation time of the set effect at the time of winning the small hit is shorter than the variation time of the set effect at the time of winning the big hit by 4 seconds.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 386, in the game board 13 of this control example, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning opening 650a which is in the open state during the small hit game. The time required for the ball to reach the specific winning opening 65a (about 6 seconds) that is open during the jackpot game is set to be 4 seconds longer than the time required for (about 2 seconds). .. Then, as will be described later, in this control example, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, regardless of the set variation time (special figure variation time). It is configured to execute a notification for guiding a right-handed game (right-handed notification).

With this configuration, the timing from when the set effect is executed to when the right-hand hit notification is executed can be the same for both the big hit and the small hit, so that the result of the set effect is presented to the player. It can be confusing. Further, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, the right-handing notification is given, and when the player plays the right-handing game on the basis of the right-handing notification, the special drawing lottery result that triggers the execution of the set effect this time Whichever (big hit, small hit) is, it is possible to win the ball fired by the right-handed game to any winning opening that is in an open state.

Next, the contents of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf will be described with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf. As shown in FIG. 392, in the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf, a universal figure long fluctuation B (60 seconds) is defined in the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef (see FIG. 338) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the normal figure long variation C (58 seconds) is defined in the range, and the other is the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf, the gaming state is the normal state (normal figure low probability), the result of the universal figure lottery is A per ordinary figure, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is "500". ~ 999" range, and the game state is normal state (universal figure low probability), the result of the general figure lottery is out of the range, the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" As a pattern, "Ubuntu long variation C (58 seconds)" is defined.

When the ordinary figure long variation C is selected, the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the universal figure long variation C, the right-handing notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player performs a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the fired ball wins the second winning opening 640.

With this configuration, the timing from when the set effect is executed to when the right-handed notification is executed can be the same for the big hit, the small hit, and the universal figure win, so the set effect is given to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the production result of. Furthermore, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, right-handing notification is performed, and when the player performs a right-handing game based on the right-handing notification, the symbol lottery result that is the trigger for executing the set effect this time is It is any one (big hit, small hit, ordinary hit), and any winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening) that opens the ball launched by the right-handed game 640).

Further, in the present control example, the special figure hold and the universal figure hold are prefetched, and the start timing of the special figure change does not result in winning in the special figure lottery for a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds), and When it is determined that it is the timing when the winning is won by the general drawing lottery after a predetermined range period (for example, 58 seconds to 62 seconds) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and the winning long open per game is executed. It is configured to execute the set effect from the start timing of the special figure change, and 54 seconds after the set effect executed from the start timing of the special figure change is started, the right hit notification corresponding to the game per long opening of the general figure is notified. Is configured to run.

In this way, by pre-reading the contents of the special figure fluctuation and the contents of the general figure fluctuation, and making it possible to execute the set effect when it is determined that the set effect can be executed at any symbol fluctuation start timing, The frequency with which the effect is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be increased. Further, since the effect result of the set effect executed at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation can indicate the winning per universal figure long opening, it is possible to allow the player to play a game with a different characteristic.

It should be noted that the relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handing notification should not largely deviate, and for example, the execution timing of the right-handing notification performed 54 seconds after the normal set effect is executed is It may be shifted around a few seconds (2 seconds), or actually the ball fired by the right-handed game will be awarded to the winning opening 58 seconds after the set effect is executed, but the set effect is The right-handed notification may be executed 54 seconds after the execution. In this way, by allowing a slight deviation to allow the set effect to be executed, the condition that the set effect can be executed is more easily established and the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the present control example, the set effect is configured to be executed at the start timing of the symbol variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the set effect is executed while the fluctuation is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended before the set effect is executed. As a result, the player can perform the set effect, which is started during the execution of the special figure variation, without a feeling of strangeness.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. The present control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that a production prohibition flag 223ga is added, and is otherwise the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223ga is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new set effect, and is set to ON when prohibiting the setting of a new set effect. In this control example, in addition to the period during which the set effect is executed, the set effect is configured not to be executed during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including disconnection) is executed based on the special figure variation. The effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON even during the period in which the specific super reach effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect being executed (especially, an effect with a high expectation of hitting) from being switched to the set effect on the way, which lowers the player's willingness to play the game.

<Regarding the control process in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 393 to 397, the contents of control processing in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, with respect to the control processing contents in the fifth control example described above, the main control device 110 performs various determination processes (hit determination process, etc.) and various selection processes (hit type selection process, variation pattern selection process, etc.). Since the data tables referred to in () are different, the processing results are different, and the specifics of various processing (command setting processing, processing result storage processing, etc.) executed based on the processing results. However, since the technical idea is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the control process of the audio lamp control device 113, instead of the stop command process 5 (see C3216 of FIG. 368), the stop command process 7 (see C3246 of FIG. 393) is changed to the variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 of FIG. 369). ) In place of the variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394), and the production update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) in place of the production update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397). doing. The other parts are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the stop command processing 7 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command processing 7 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 393, the stop command process 7 (C3246) is different from the above-described stop command process 5 (see C3216 of FIG. 368) in that a setting process of the production prohibition flag 223ga is added, and other than that. Are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop command process 7 (C3246) is executed, first, the same processes of C3951 to C3956 as the stop command process 5 (see C3216 of FIG. 368) described above are executed, and thereafter, the stop command of this time is the effect prohibition flag. It is determined whether or not it indicates the stop of the target fluctuation in which 223ga is set to ON (C3971), and when it is determined that it indicates the stop of the target fluctuation (C3971: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223ga is turned off. The setting is made (C3972), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of C3971, if it is determined that the target fluctuation is not stopped (C3972: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 394, the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is added. And the point that a process for setting the effect prohibition flag 223ga to ON when the acquired variation pattern is super reach is added, and the other points are the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is executed, the same processes of C4001 to C4004 as the variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 of FIG. 369) described above are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, but it is determined whether the current variation display setting process is executed based on the special figure variation or the general figure variation. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, and when the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, the process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is performed. To be executed.

Returning to FIG. 394, the description will be continued. After the processing of C4041 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and when it is determined that it is super reach (CS24042: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON. (C4043), the display variation pattern command is set (C4044), the same C4006 to C4010 as the variation display setting processing 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of C4042, when it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: No), the processing of C4043 is skipped and the processing proceeds to C4044.

Next, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), a process for setting the set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure variation or the universal figure variation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, it is first determined whether the current game state is the normal state (C4901), and if it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (time saving state) (C4901) Since it is not in the game state where the set effect is executed, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (C4901: Yes), next, the variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) sets the variable display of the special figure fluctuation (sets the effect). If it is the processing (C4902), and if it is the processing for setting the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation (C4902: Yes), the fluctuation display setting processing 7 (see C3144 of FIG. 394), C4003 processing. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired in (4) is a variation pattern corresponding to the set effect (C4903).

In the processing of C4903, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to ON. In the case of (C4904: No), it is determined whether or not there is a long fluctuation per ordinary map (C4905).

In the process of C4905, when it is determined that the current time is in the long fluctuation per public figure (C4905: Yes), the value of the general figure fluctuation time counter 223eh is compared with the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg ( C4906), and it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the fluctuation of the universal map is shorter than the current special map fluctuation time (C4907). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time this time is longer (C4907: No), the winning information of the normal symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (C4908), and the read winning information is read. It is determined whether or not there is prize information corresponding to the universal figure long fluctuation (C4909), and if it is determined that there is prize information corresponding to the universal figure long fluctuation (C4909: Yes), a set effect according to the variation pattern of this time Is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4911), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4909, when it is determined that the winning information read in the processing of C4908 does not include the universal figure long variation (C4909: No), this processing is directly terminated. In addition, in the process of C4907, when it is determined that the remaining period of the universal figure fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), the set production that matches the universal figure variation stop timing is set (C4912), and the production prohibition flag 223ga is turned on. Is set (C4920), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of C4905, it is determined that the long variation per general figure is in progress, that is, although the production prohibition flag 223ga is not set to ON in the process of C4904, the long variation per general figure is changed. The middle case is, for example, a case where the super reach effect is executed as the change effect of the special figure fluctuation at the start timing of the long fluctuation per ordinary figure being executed.

As described above, in the present control example, the processing of C4909 is provided, and the set effect is set when the general figure long variation is included in the winning information. With this configuration, if it is determined that there is a general figure long fluctuation in the winning information, the general figure long fluctuation is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special figure fluctuation. During the figure change is executed multiple times in a short time, for example, the figure short hit per game is executed, so that the set effect this time is the set effect executed based on the special figure change. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping it. It should be noted that although the processing of C4909 is provided in this control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting effect may be set.

Further, in the set effect set in the process of C4912, the set effect is executed at a timing that coincides with the universal figure fluctuation stop timing instead of the start timing of the special figure variation, so that the universal effect long opening is performed as the effect of the set effect. You will be notified of the hit. In addition, when the remaining period of the universal figure fluctuation at the time of the start of the special figure variation this time is shorter than the period (15 seconds) in which the effect mode of the set effect can be executed, the set effect is not set but the universal figure long opening is performed. It is preferable to configure so that a dedicated presentation mode that indicates a hit is set. As a result, the player can be surely notified that he/she has won after the long opening of the universal figure.

On the other hand, in the process of C4904, when it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4904: Yes), or in the process of C4905, it is determined that the long variation is not per normal figure (C4905: No) obtains the lottery result of the currently-executed public drawing lottery (C4913), and determines whether or not it has won the per-university drawing (per common opening long opening) (C4914), When it is determined that the player has not won (or long drawing) (or the universal figure lottery has not been executed) (C4914: No), the process shifts to C4910 described above.

In the process of C4914, when it is determined that the winning figure is won per ordinary figure (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation this time is a winning variation (C4915), and it is determined that the winning variation is a winning variation. In the case of (C4915: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eh and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the general figure fluctuation is from this special figure fluctuation time. Is also short (C4917). When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation this time is shorter than the remaining period of the general figure fluctuation being executed (C4917: Yes), the set effect being executed for the general figure fluctuation is performed this time. Is set to the set effect indicating the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation (C4918), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4915, when it is determined that the current special figure fluctuation is not a hit variation (C4915), or in the processing of C4917, the fluctuation of the current special figure fluctuation is more than the remaining period of the general figure fluctuation being executed. If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the set effect corresponding to the current special figure variation.

In the process of C4902, when it is determined that the variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 of FIG. 394) of this time is the process of setting the variable display of the normal symbol (C4902: No), the universal figure set effect setting The process is executed (C4919), and the present process ends.

Here, the contents of the universal figure set effect setting process (C4919) will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the contents of the universal figure set effect setting process (C4919). When the universal figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined that it is a set effect (C5001: Yes), then First, it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C5002).

When it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223ga is not set to ON in the process of C5002 (C5002: No), the set effect is set according to the current variation pattern (C5003), and the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON. Then (C5004), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C5002, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current universal figure variation is a perturbation variation (variation per long opening) ( C5005), if it is determined that there is a change per long opening (C5005: Yes), the special figure lottery result in execution is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether or not it is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON based on the deviation of the special figure.

In the process of C5007, when it is determined that the special figure is not hit (C5007: No), the value of the universal figure fluctuation time counter 223eh is compared with the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg (C5008), It is determined whether or not the current universal figure fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation that is being executed (C5009). If it is determined that the current universal figure fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), it is being executed. A special effect (a set effect executed based on a change in the special figure) is used to set a replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the general drawing lottery result (per long opening) (C5010), and this processing is ended. To do. On the other hand, in the processing of C5007, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation in execution is a hit fluctuation (C5007: Yes), or in the processing of C5009, the current special figure fluctuation time remains the special figure fluctuation in execution. When it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: No), this process is ended as it is.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 7 (C3142) will be described with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the content of effect update processing 7 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 397, the effect update process 7 (C3142) is a right-handed notification process in the case where a set effect is executed, in contrast to the effect update process 5 (see C3112 of FIG. 374) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that is added. Others are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the effect update process 7 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 5 (see C3112 of FIG. 374) of the fifth control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of C4505, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is not set to ON (C4505: No), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is finished, the set effect is executed. It is determined whether there is any (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is performed by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

In the process of C4541, if it is determined that the set effect is being executed (the effect time measurement counter is being measured) (C4541: Yes), is 54 seconds elapsed from the start of the set effect? (C4542), and when it is determined that it is the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed (C4542: Yes), a display guide command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), and the process proceeds to C4507. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or when it is determined in the process of C4542 that it is not the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed (C4542: No). , C4543 is not performed, the process proceeds to C4507, and then this process ends.

In the production update processing 7 (C3142) shown in FIG. 397, only when it is determined that the set production is executed, the right-handed game is shown at the elapse timing of 54 seconds from the production start. However, in practice, the display guide command for indicating the right-handed game is set at other timings. Although not specifically shown, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 in FIG. 391(b), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed. After 24 seconds have passed, the setting of the display guide command for indicating the right-handed game is set. Further, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is to be replaced midway, a display guide command for indicating a right-handed game may be set at a different timing. As a result, the right-handed game is notified at a timing different from the normal timing, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 410. The eighth control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that the setting method of the production mode of the series production is different. First, a method of setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a series of effect settings in the fifth control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 398, in the above-described fifth control example, a case of winning per universal figure (per long opening of universal figure) and a case of winning a big hit or a small hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery Thus, the series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects is divided into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, the scenario 1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 319(b) and FIG. 320(a)) executed during the fluctuation of the universal figure, and the effect mode executed during the game per universal figure (FIG. 320). Scenario 2 corresponding to (b)), and scenario 3 corresponding to a performance mode (see FIG. 323(a)) executed when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game. It is executed when the period (waiting period) from the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game to the execution of special drawing 2 lottery based on the winning ball is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 321(a)), scenario 4 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 321(b)) executed during the change in Toku-zu 2, and small hitting game The scenario 5 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 322(b)) executed in step #3 and the effect mode (see FIG. 324(b) and FIG. 325(b)) executed when the series effect ends halfway. The corresponding scenario 7 is stored.

When a big hit or a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of effects using a plurality of effect data is collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern command of the corresponding special figure 1 variation. There is. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the variable effect (series effect) in which the above-described effect data of scenario 1 to scenario 5 is collectively set is executed, and the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. If the player wins, the variable effect (series effect) in which the effect data of the above-described scenario 1 to scenario 4 is collectively set is executed.

On the other hand, in the series production set based on the winning per ordinary figure, each scenario constituting the series production is individually set, and the next scenario is set based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition for one scenario. Is configured. Specifically, when the general figure long opening is won by the general drawing lottery, and the execution condition of the series production is satisfied, the scenario 1 indicating the start of the series production is set and If the stop command shown is received, then scenario 2 is set. In addition, in the fifth control example, there is a case where scenario 1 is set in a state where the player has not won per universal figure long opening (so-called gaze effect), and in that case, the elapsed time of scenario 1 ends and , The series of production is completed.

Next, when the production mode corresponding to the scenario 2 is executed during the game in the universal figure long opening and the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that fact is given. A notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 is displayed in a layer different from the display layer that is output from the main controller 110 and in which a series of effects is executed (sub display area in FIG. 321(a)). See Ds). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, the scenario 3 is set. In addition, when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the scenario 2 is set, the scenario 7 is set in order to end the series production, and the end screen of the predetermined period (3 seconds) is displayed. Is displayed.

In the fifth control example described above, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed (standby period) when shifting to the scenario 3, that is, when the ball wins the second winning port 640 during the game However, it is configured to be determined based on the change situation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, scenario 3 (see FIG. 323(a)) is set when the standby period is less than 10 seconds, and scenario 3-1 (FIG. 321(a)) is set when the standby period is 4 to 30 seconds. (See) is set. Here, when the standby period is 30 seconds or more, a special series effect (continuous series effect) in which the series effect being executed is pseudo-finished (scenario 7 is set) and the series effect is started again after a lapse of a predetermined period. Is executed (see FIG. 326). Further, when the scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario shift condition is satisfied.

Next, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in the state where scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 is set, the transition condition to the next scenario is satisfied, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and an effect mode having the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. .. Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received and the special figure 2 change this time indicates a hit, the process proceeds to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation indicates a deviation, the process moves to scenario 7 and the series of processes ends.

Here, in this control example, the same variation time is set regardless of whether the special figure 2 variation being executed in the state where the scenario 4 is set is a small hit or a big hit, and the scenario 5 is shifted to. Although it is configured to, but is not limited to this, for example, when the big hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is won, small fluctuation time (15 seconds) and small hit game time (10 seconds) as fluctuation time ) And a total of 25 seconds of fluctuation time are set, the scenario 4 to the scenario 5 is transitioned during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the big hit is changed according to the stop timing of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2. You may comprise so that a game may be performed.

When scenario 5 is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation is the small hit, until the V passage command is received during the small hit game, or the production mode corresponding to scenario 5 is executed until the small hit game ends. When the V passage command is received, the notification mode indicating that is displayed on a layer different from the display layer in which the series of effects is executed, and the big hit game is started. On the other hand, if the V pass command has not been received in the state where the small hitting game period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the scenario 7 is entered to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when performing a series of effects based on the special figure 1 variation, a series of effect scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation, and When the series production is executed based on the figure variation, the production mode of the series production is configured to be updated according to how the transition condition corresponding to each scenario is satisfied. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of effects in the same effect mode, when the update of the effect mode is confirmed, the process of setting the series effect can be simplified and the content of the update of the effect mode changes depending on the game situation. In this case, the effect mode can be changed flexibly according to each game situation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the series production is executed based on the general drawing lottery, the scenario of the series production is set individually, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, Of the series of effects executed based on the lottery, a plurality of scenarios may be collectively set for the part for which the update of the effect mode is confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the process of setting a series of effects.

In the setting method of the series production in the fifth control example described above with reference to FIG. 398, when the series production is executed in the same production mode, the series production is set when the update of the production mode is confirmed. While the process can be simplified, if the update contents of the effect mode can be changed depending on the game situation, the effect mode can be changed flexibly according to each game situation. According to this, since the production mode that can be variably set is only the production mode corresponding to the scenario 3, the player feels a sense of discomfort as compared with the production modes based on other scenarios of the series of productions executed in a predetermined period. There was a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the eighth control example, when the universal figure variation is executed, the variation state of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the game per universal figure is predicted, Based on the result of the prediction, it is configured to set an effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the change in the universal figure. That is, when the universal figure fluctuation is executed, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation executed this time, the universal figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per universal figure are calculated, On the basis of this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation currently being executed during the per-universal figure game ends, and based on the determination result, a production mode of a series of effects corresponding to the universal figure variation is set. doing.

With such a configuration, for example, the variation end timing of the variation in the special map 1 being executed is later than the period in which the ball can win the second winning port 640, that is, the gaming period per universal figure (maximum period). In such a case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the Toku-zu 2 variation can be executed at the time of executing the Toku-zu variation. As a result, an effect mode based on the length of the standby period can be set as various effect modes that are executed during the standby period. Therefore, in the above-described fifth control example, the variably settable period can be lengthened among the effect modes of the series effect depending on the length of the standby period, and therefore, the series corresponding to the length of the series effect can be performed. It is possible to easily execute the effect.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400. The eighth control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Specifically, it is different in that a series production scenario table 222ha is added to the ROM 222, and that a flag 223ha for ordinary drawing, a production scenario storage area 223hb, and a constant monitoring flag 223hc are added to the RAM 223. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 399(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a series production scenario table 222ha is added.

The series production scenario table 222ha is a data table in which the production mode of the series production executed corresponding to the progressing game situation is defined. Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the general figure scenario table 222ha1 of the series production scenario table 222ha in which the production scenario of the series production set based on the general figure variation is defined will be described.

FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the series production scenario table 222ha. Note that, in FIG. 400, among the contents specified in the series production scenario table 222ha, only the characteristic contents of the eighth control example (the production scenario of the series production set based on the general figure variation) are shown. Therefore, the description and the description of the same contents as those of the above-described fifth control example, that is, the contents of the effect mode of the series of effects set corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 400, in the eighth control example, a plurality of per-universal-drawing scenarios (per-universal-drawing scenarios 1 to 4) can be set when the production mode of the series production is set based on the general drawing variation. According to the result of the first prediction (prediction about the length of the waiting period that may occur during execution of a series of performances) performed when the general figure changes, different general figure per hit scenarios are set. I am configuring.

Specifically, at the time of the start of the universal map variation won per universal figure long opening, it is determined whether the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changing, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing First, the remaining period of the change in Toku-zu 1 being executed is determined. Next, the game period of the game per long long opening which is executed based on the present figure change is compared with the remaining period of the special figure 1 change being executed, and the ending timing of the special figure 1 change being executed is determined. It is determined whether it is later than the end time of the game per universal figure long opening executed based on this universal figure fluctuation, and if it is determined that it is later, it will be special from the end time of the game per universal figure long opening. The waiting period until the variation in FIG. 1 is completed (the period until the variation in Toku-zu 2 can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a per-universal-figure scenario corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined in the above-described processing.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation will not be executed at the start of the universal figure fluctuation. It is possible to execute a series of productions in different production modes.

In the above-described first prediction, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not being executed at the start timing of the general figure fluctuation, or the ending timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is longer than the general figure long per game period. If it is before, it is not possible to predict the waiting period in advance. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the general figure, only the presentation mode of the series of effects corresponding to the general figure change time is set.

As shown in FIG. 400, in the series production scenario table 222ha, a plurality of per-universal-diagram scenarios set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the general-picture fluctuation is defined, and the first prediction As a result of the prediction, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per universal figure" is set, and if it is "2 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds" It is specified that "scenario 2 per ordinary figure" is set, and "scenario 3 per ordinary figure" is set when "30 seconds or more". Further, when the prediction result of the first prediction is “unpredictable”, “scenario 4 per universal figure” is set.

Here, the content of each scenario for each universal figure will be described. When "Public Per-scenario 1" is set, "scenario 1" is set to "during universal figure change", "scenario 2" is set to "during special game per game", and "special figure 2 is changed" The content of the hit scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set to "medium". In other words, when "universal figure per scenario 1" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 standby period is short, without using a special figure 2 standby period dedicated production mode, the general aspect per game showing mode From the special mode 2 to the effect mode showing the variation, a series of effects is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds). You can In this control example, when scenario 1 per universal figure is set, a special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds that occurs when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per universal long opening In the inside, it is configured such that the effect mode that can be set during the game is continuously set, but without being limited to this, the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds It may be configured to set an effect mode that can be set inside.

When "Public Per-Scenario 2" is set, "Scenario 1" is set for "During Universal Drawing", "Scenario 2" is set for "Public Per Game", and "Special Figure 2 is changed" The hit scenario contents are defined such that the production mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set in "standby" and "scenario 4" is set in "changing special figure 2". That is, when the "universal figure per scenario 2" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period is set.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 standby period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects without giving the player a feeling of strangeness (a feeling of delay). Further, in this control example, when "scenario 1 per ordinary figure" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special figure 2 changing" is set when "scenario 2 per ordinary figure" is set. Is configured so as to correspond to "waiting for special map 2". With such a configuration, it is possible to set a production mode in which the transition from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" is performed as a series of productions regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of effects that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Next, when "Public Per-scenario 3" is set, "scenario 1" is set to "during public figure change", "scenario 2" and "special The hit scenario contents are stipulated so that the production mode corresponding to "scenario 2", "scenario 3" in "Fig. 2 variation standby", and "scenario 4" in "special figure 2 variation" is set. That is, when "scenario 2 per universal figure" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period is a predetermined period or more, the period during which "scenario 2" corresponding to the per-university game is set is It is configured to be longer than the other common scenarios.

With such a configuration, even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long, it is possible to make the player think that one period is a game per normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since it is configured to display the effect mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the per-universal game per game for a long period of time, the per-universal game per game is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. Can make you think you are being done.

In addition, when "Public figure per scenario 4" is set, it is a case where the fluctuation status of special figure 1 fluctuation during the game per long figure opening cannot be predicted at the start of general figure fluctuation, Only "scenario 1" corresponding to "during change in figure" is set, and this processing ends. In addition, when the "universal figure per scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the fifth control example described above, and the scenario based on the determination result is set. Is configured as follows.

In addition, even if a different universal figure hit scenario is set as the bonus figure hit scenario, the same effect mode is set during the small hit game and the big hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401 and FIG. 402, as a series of effects of the eighth control example, a flow in the case where scenario 2 per universal figure is set will be described. FIG. 401 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when scenario 2 is set as a general effect as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 401, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when the universal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the standby period is “20 seconds” as the processing result of the first prediction process, at the start of the universal figure fluctuation, the production data corresponding to “scenario 2 per universal figure” defined in the series production scenario table 222ha. Is set and stored in the effect scenario storage area 223hb described later. Then, based on the passage of time, a series of effects is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223hb.

In this way, when the future game content can be predicted at the start of the universal figure change, a plurality of effect data (scenarios) are configured to be collectively set to set the effect mode of a series of effects. The processing of can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, a flow in the case where the per-universal figure scenario 4 is set as a series of effects will be described. FIG. 402 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when scenario 4 is set as a general effect as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 402, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when the universal figure fluctuation is executed. If it is determined that the stop timing of the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation that is being executed is earlier than the stop timing of the fluctuation per universal figure as the processing result of the first prediction process, the length of the waiting period may be predicted. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined to be "unpredictable", and at the start of the universal figure fluctuation, the production data corresponding to "scenario 4 per universal figure" defined in the series production scenario table 222ha. Is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 402, during the period from the stop of the variation of the special map 1 being executed until the ball is won in the second winning port 640 during the game per universal opening long opening, a new Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation will be executed, the length of the waiting period cannot be predicted. In such a case, at the time of starting the general figure fluctuation, only the effect mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the general figure fluctuation is set as the effect mode of the series effect, and when the general figure fluctuation is stopped (at the time of starting the general figure fluctuation). 2) the second prediction process is executed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the universal figure fluctuation is stopped (at the time of starting the universal figure), and the length of the standby period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This is the process executed when In the second prediction process, it is determined whether or not the special map 1 fluctuation is being executed when the universal map fluctuation is stopped (at the time of starting the general map). The remaining period of the variation in FIG. 1 is compared with the game period of the game per universal figure long opening to determine the length of the waiting period. Then, based on the determination result, the production mode of the series production is set based on the contents defined in the series production scenario table 222ha.

As shown in FIG. 402, when the waiting period cannot be predicted even in the second prediction process (when Toku-zu 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at this point in time, since it is in a state where the waiting period cannot be discriminated, the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is constantly monitored during the game per ordinary game (game per long universal opening). The constant monitoring process for Then, when it is determined by the constant monitoring process that the special figure 2 change is executed before the new special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 change is made to correspond to the start of the special figure 2 change. A production mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when setting the production mode of the series production executed based on the universal figure variation, the standby period in which an irregular period is set according to the game situation The length is predicted, and a series of effects according to the prediction result are executed. With such a configuration, even if a long standby period is set during the period in which the series of effects is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of effects that does not cause discomfort.

In addition, in the eighth control example, since the standby period is predicted at the timing when the series production is executed, the series production performed before the time when the standby period is actually set is set. It is possible to variably set the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, compared with the case where only the effect mode set corresponding to the standby period is changed in accordance with the length of the standby period, the effective sequence of effects can be executed without a feeling of strangeness. ..

Further, in the eighth control example, in the state in which the standby period is set, it is possible to set the effect mode indicating that it is a period other than the standby period (for example, a gaming period per universal figure), It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a long waiting period is set. In addition, in the eighth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, since the right-handed game is performed during the series of effects, it is determined whether or not the present is the standby period depending on the game method. It can be made difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, in the eighth control example, when it is difficult to predict the length of the waiting period at the start of the universal figure fluctuation (impossible), the standby period is restarted at a different timing (game start timing per universal figure). Is configured to execute a process (second prediction process) for predicting the length of the. As described above, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the waiting period in the period until the waiting period is set, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period.

Also, in the process of predicting the waiting period, it is configured to constantly monitor the game status during normal game play only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, and respond to the waiting period based on the result of constant monitoring Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be performed, the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects can be simplified.

In the eighth control example, in the process for predicting the waiting period (first prediction process, second prediction process), the length of the waiting period is determined by using the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation in Toku-zu 1 that is being executed. Although it is configured to make a prediction (discrimination), the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information of the special figure 1 reservation stored in the winning information storage area 223a is pre-read, and based on the pre-reading result, It may be configured to predict the length of the waiting period also by using the variation time of the variation of Toku-zu 1 executed in Step 1.

By configuring in this way, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 402, when the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation being executed is before the start timing of the per-university game, that is, the execution is being performed. When the start condition of the special map 2 fluctuation (the winning of the ball into the second winning opening 640) cannot be satisfied at the time when the special map 1 fluctuation of No. 1 is finished, the fluctuation time of the special map 1 fluctuation to be executed next is set. It is possible to prefetch and predict the length of the waiting period based on the prefetch result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period.

Further, in the eighth control example, like the fifth control example described above, the special figure 2 change is executed with priority over the special figure 1 change, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, or may be prioritized over the special figure 2 variation. Then, the special figure 1 variation may be executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Eighth Control Example>
Next, the content of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 403 to 410. In the present control example, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, the prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361) is replaced with the prize information command process 8 (see FIG. 403), and a series of effect determination processes (FIG. 404), the hit-related command processing 5 (see FIG. 364) instead of the hit-related command processing 5 (see FIG. 364), and the universal figure-related command processing (see FIG. 406). A point to be executed, a point to execute the variable effect setting process 8 (see FIG. 407) instead of the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 369), and a point to execute the constantly monitoring effect setting process (see FIG. 408). And that the general-use production effect setting process 8 (see FIG. 409) is executed in place of the general-use production effect setting process (see FIG. 371), and that the series effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 410) is executed. , And are otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, regarding the point that the content of the data table to be referred to has been changed and the various processing content that is changed in response to the change of the content of the data table to be referred to, only numerical values have been changed. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the winning information command process 8 (C3242) will be described with reference to FIG. 403. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 8 (C3242) executed in the eighth control example. In this winning information command process 8 (C3242), in contrast to the above winning information command process 5 (see FIG. 361), a process executed when a winning information command is received during execution of a series of effects (series effect determination process ( 404) of FIG. 404) is added, and the other points are the same, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prize information command process 8 (C3242) is executed, after the same processes of C3401 to C3405 as the prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above are executed, the special process is executed in the process of C3403. If it is determined that there is no hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the processing of C3441, a series of effect determination processing is executed (C3441). Details of this series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG. 404.

After the processing of C3441 is executed, the processing of C3406 and C3407 is executed, and then this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the content of the series effect determination process (C3441) will be described. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series effect determination process (C3441) executed in the winning information command process 8 (FIG. 403) in the present eighth control example. In the series production determination process (C3441), it is determined whether or not the series production is currently being executed, and when it is determined that the series production is being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (special figure 1, special figure 2. Processing corresponding to (2) is executed.

When the series production determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series production counter 223ek is acquired (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series production counter 223ek is 0 (C5102). The series effect counter 223ek acquired in the process of C4101 is set to a value corresponding to the effect period when the series effect is executed, and is subtracted (updated) in the effect update process that is periodically executed, and is the counter value. Is set to "0", the series of effects is configured to end. That is, in the process of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects is being executed.

In the process of C5102, when it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223ek is not larger than 0 (is 0) (C5102: No), since the series production is not currently being performed, various display modes during execution of the series production are performed. The processing of C5103 to C5110 for setting is skipped and the processing proceeds to the processing of C5111.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223ek is greater than 0 (C5102: Yes), the series effect is being executed, and thus the prize information command received this time is the special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize). Command (C5103), and if it is a special 2 prize (C5103: Yes), the information in the effect scenario storage area 223hb is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223hc is on. It is determined whether there is any (C5105). When it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is off (C5105: No), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is on (C5105: Yes), that is, in the effect period in which the series of effects is performed this time, the standby period in which execution of the special figure 2 change is waited in advance. If it is not predicted, the standby period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the calculation contents executed in the process of C5106 will be described. Since the process of C5106 is a process executed when a winning information command indicating a special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) is received, the second winning opening 640 (starting winning opening of special figure 2 variation) is currently executed. The ball is won, and the condition that is part of the execution trigger of the special figure 2 change is satisfied. In this control example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are configured not to be executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 variation is prioritized over the special figure 1 variation. Is configured to run.

That is, when the special figure 1 change is currently executed, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 change currently being executed is extracted using the value of the special figure change time counter 223eg, and the extraction result is calculated as the waiting period. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at this time, the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the winning information command received this time is immediately executed, and thus “0” is set as the waiting period. ..

In the present control example, the number of balls to be won in the second winning port 640 is one during execution of one series of effects (during one game per universal figure long opening). Therefore, in the process of C5103, when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) is received, the process for calculating the waiting period is executed without fail. Without limitation, for example, in the case of configuring so that two or more balls can be won in the second winning opening 640 during one execution of a series of effects (during one game per opening of the universal figure) Sets the flag (calculated flag) indicating that the standby period has been calculated in the process of C5106 to ON, and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is ON in the process of C5105 (C5105: Yes). It is configured to determine whether or not the calculated flag described above is set to ON. When the calculated flag is set to ON, the processing of C5106 and C5107 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to C5108. It is good to configure like this.

With this configuration, even when a plurality of balls have won the second winning opening 640 and the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning has been received a plurality of times while the series of effects is being executed. Since the waiting period can be calculated only based on the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning received first, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. That is, in this control example, a period from the timing when the special figure 2 is first won to the time when the special figure 2 is changed is set as the waiting period during the execution of a series of effects, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period is set. By setting, even if the special figure 2 is won and the period during which the special figure 2 is not changed (waiting period) is long, the effect is executed in the middle of the series of effects (during the waiting period. Since it is configured to prevent the effect to be performed) from being delayed and to lower the effect of the effect, a plurality of balls are won in the second winning opening 640 while the series of effects are executed. However, even when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received a plurality of times, the process of calculating the length of the waiting period based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received after the second time is not necessary. It will be a process.

In addition, like the present control example, in the case where the waiting period is calculated each time the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received during the period in which the series of effects is being executed, the special waiting time is first calculated. FIG. 2 When the winning information command indicating the winning is received, whether or not the special figure 1 change is being executed, and if it is being executed, the remaining period is determined and the waiting period may be calculated. When the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, it is determined whether the special figure change being executed is the special figure 1 change or the special figure 2 change, and if the special figure 1 change is being executed. The waiting period may be calculated based on the remaining period of the change in the special figure 1 that is being executed and the winning information command that received the special figure 2 winning previously received.

In this case, the lottery result of special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received earlier is pre-read, and if the pre-reading result is out, the prize showing the special figure 2 prize received this time is shown. The waiting period is the remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the sum of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation to be executed next. It is better to configure as. With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the deviation variation of the special figure 2 is being executed as the waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 2 lottery has been missed. it can.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description will be continued. In the process of C5108, a display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to C5109. In the processing of C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 is won is set. The display command set here is, for example, a direct display mode for directly displaying that the special figure 2 is won, or a display suggesting the remaining period until the special figure change corresponding to the special prize is executed. The mode, that is, the indirect display mode that indirectly displays that the special figure 2 is won is displayed.

In this control example, the direct display mode and the indirect display mode described above can be set by using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The production mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the standby period of the series production. In addition, the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the first winning opening 640 during the series of productions and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 after the second time are different. Is also good.

Next, in the processing of C5109, it is determined whether or not the ball winning the V winning opening 650a has passed through the specific area (V area) (whether there is a V winning) (C5109). When it is determined that the ball winning the V winning opening 650a has passed the specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), the display command corresponding to the V winning is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. .. When it is determined that the ball winning the V winning opening 650a does not pass through the specific area (V area) (C5109: No), the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, the effect mode related to the other winning information is set (C5111), the display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C5112), and then this process is ended.

Next, the contents of the hit related command process 8 (C3261) will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process 8 (C3261) executed in the eighth control example. In this hit related command process 8 (C3261), the production mode in each period of the series of effects is set based on the fact that the universal figure winning game is executed during the period in which the series of effects is being executed.

When the hit related command processing 8 (C3261) is executed, the same processing of C3501 to C3504 as the hit related command processing 5 (see FIG. 364) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and in the processing of C3505, the main control is executed. If it is determined that the universal figure pertinent command is received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), the universal figure pertinent command process is executed (C3551), and then this process ends. The details of the per-drawing-related command processing (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the contents of the per-universal figure-related command processing (C3551) will be described. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of per-universal-diagram-related command processing (C3551) executed in the eighth control example. The per-universal figure pertinent command processing (C3551) is executed when a pertinent figure-related pertinent command is received (C3505: Yes in FIG. 405), and the start timing and end of the per-universal figure game At the timing, various processes for setting the production mode of the series production are executed.

In the per-universal figure related command processing (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (C5201). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series production counter 223ek is larger than 0, that is, whether the series production is currently being executed (C5202). .. When it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223ek is not greater than 0 (C5202: No), the opening command process for display is executed (C5203), the normal figure medium flag 223ha is set to ON, and C5215 is set. Move to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. In the meantime, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5202, when it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223ek is greater than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223hb is read (C5205), and then the production scenario It is determined whether the information stored in the storage area 223hb is scenario 4 per ordinary drawing (C5206).

Here, in the production scenario storage area 223hb, information indicating the per-universal-drawing scenario set in the series production prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when executing the universal figure fluctuation (general drawing lottery) is stored. In the processing of C5206, when it is determined that it is the “universal figure per scenario 4 (see FIG. 400)” which is the per-university figure scenario in which the effect mode corresponding to the period during the per-universal figure per game is not set. , Processing for setting the production mode during the game in the general production per game is executed.

In the process of C5206, when it is determined that the information stored in the rendering scenario storage area 223hb is not scenario 4 per universal figure (scenarios 1 to 3 per universal figure) (C5206: No), the universal figure is already available. Because the production mode during the winning game is set, that is, in the series production prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 410) that is performed when executing the universal figure fluctuation (general figure lottery) Since it is a case where the effect mode corresponding to the period of is set, without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game in this time (skipping the process of C5207 to C5210) The process proceeds to C5204.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223hb is scenario 4 per ordinary figure (C5206: Yes), the special figure variation time counter (special figure 1 variation time counter). The value of 223eg is compared with the game period per ordinary figure (C5207). Explaining the details of the processing of C5207 in detail, first, using the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated. For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation (in this control example, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is , 1 is subtracted in the effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 281). Therefore, as a value corresponding to 60 seconds, “60000”) is set. Then, when this processing is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed after the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is “30000”. Therefore, “30 seconds” is calculated as the remaining change time of the change in Toku-zu 1. Then, it is calculated based on the type of game per universal figure executed this time. In this control example, since the opening command output from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the type of the universal figure per game to be executed this time, the universal figure per game period is calculated based on the information. Here, as the game period per universal figure, the time defined as the ending condition that is satisfied based on the elapsed time is calculated.

Specifically, if 3 seconds have passed since the game was started, or if the number of balls winning the second winning opening 640 has reached 10, the game will be ended. If the ending condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time during which the game can last per universal figure, is set as the game period per universal figure. Thereby, in the process of predicting the waiting period (the period from the winning of the special figure 2 until the change of the special figure 2 is executed) in advance in order to set the effect mode of the series of effects, the common figure used for the prediction Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game period per ordinary figure that is actually executed is longer than the game period, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation, so the period predicted as a period in which a ball can be won in the second winning port 640. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball wins the second winning opening 640 after the passage of, and the special figure 2 variation is executed. Therefore, even when the effect mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, it is possible to make it difficult for the actual game content and the executed effect content to deviate from each other, so that the effect effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the per-university game period is calculated as described above, the per-university game ends in a shorter period than the calculated per-universal-game period, that is, a predetermined number within the per-universal-game period ( There is a case where the game is ended as a result of the winning due to the fact that 10 balls have entered the second winning opening 640. In this case, a ball is won in the second winning hole 640 during the game of the universal figure, and when the game of the universal figure ends, it corresponds to the effect corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 variation period. Since the production is executed, the player is configured so as not to feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description will be continued. After finishing the process of C5207, based on the comparison result of C5207, whether the special figure 1 remaining period (remaining period of fluctuation of special figure 1) is longer (longer) than the gaming period per ordinary figure, that is, the special character being executed. It is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation in FIG. 1 ends is later than the ending timing of the per-universal figure game to be executed this time (C5208). In the process of C5208, when it is determined that the special map 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per universal figure (C5208: No), the special figure is reached when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per universal figure. Since there is a possibility that one change has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the game duration per universal figure, that is, the variation of special figure 1 being executed does not end during the game per regular figure executed this time (C5208). : Yes), because it is decided that the special figure 1 variation is being executed when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 during the game, the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223hc (C5209) is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to C5210.

In the process of C5210, a corresponding per-university-game per-game series production scenario is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to C5204. In the process of C5204, the flag for hitting a normal figure is set to ON (C5204), and then the process proceeds to C5215. Here, the processing contents of the above C5210 will be described in detail. In the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the game period per universal figure (C5208: Yes), that difference period, that is, , The period from the end of the game per universal figure to the end of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation is calculated. Then, by using the calculation result as the special figure 2 standby period, a scenario corresponding to the special figure 2 waiting period corresponds to the general figure scenario table defined in the series production scenario table 222ha, and the production is performed. Set the mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, when it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per universal figure (C5208: No), the production mode (series production) at the timing when the ball actually wins the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the same effect mode as that of the fifth control example described above is set.

Next, in the processing of C5201, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C5201: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (C5211). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (C5211: Yes), the normal figure hitting flag 223ha is set to OFF (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to OFF (C5213), and the ending for display is performed. A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. In the meantime, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the ending command for display, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5211, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C5211: No), the processing proceeds to C5215. In the process of C5215, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (C5215), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, the content of the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) will be described. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 8 (C4044) executed in the eighth control example. In this variation effect setting process 8 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON (during a universal figure game executed during a series of effects, the length of the waiting period is not set. In the case), the process for setting the variable effect executed is added, and the content of the process for setting the variable effect for the normal symbol is changed, and the variable effect setting of the fifth control example described above. It is different from the process 5 (see FIG. 370) and is otherwise the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) is executed, the same C4101 process as the variation effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and the special figure variation effect is not set (normal When it is determined that the figure variation effect is set) (C4101: No), the universal figure effect setting process 8 is executed (C4167), and then this process is ended. Details of the general-use production effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG. 409.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4101, if it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON (C4151). When it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is on (C4151: Yes), the constant monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to C4102. Details of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408. On the other hand, in the processing of C4151, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is not set to ON, the processing of C4152 is skipped and the processing proceeds to C4102. After executing the processing of C4152, the same processing of C4102 to C4116 as the variation effect setting processing 5 (see FIG. 370) of the above-described fifth control example is executed, and then this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the content of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the eighth control example. In the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152), the change effect setting process 8 (see C4044 in FIG. 407) is executed, and is executed when the change pattern command corresponding to the special symbol change is received. It is a thing.

In the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is received (is the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301), and the special figure 1 variation is dealt with. If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command that has been received has been received (the start of the special fluctuation 1) (C5301: Yes), the fluctuation pattern extracted by the processing of C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (see C3204 of FIG. 363) is used. Based on this, the change time of the current special figure 1 change (special figure 1 change time) is extracted (C5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (longer) than the period per ordinary figure (C5303).

In the process of C5303, the special figure 1 variation time extracted in the process of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the per-university play game (per-universal figure period) being executed, and the ending timing of the special figure 1 variation time It is determined whether it is after the end timing of the per-university drawing period. In the present control example, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON, that is, at least during the normal game, so C5303. The processing of is to be executed during the per-universal figure game, but when the processing of C5303 is configured to be executable while the per-university figure game is not executed, the per-university figure game is executed. As a non-existing state, the per-universal-drawing period “0” may be used to compare the variation time of special figure 1 with the per-universal-drawing period.

In the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 change time is longer than the game period per universal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 change is later than the end timing of the game per general figure) (C5303: Yes) , Because the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per universal figure, based on the determination result of C5303, the production mode (production scenario of a series of production) during the per-universal game is set (C5304) and constantly monitored. The flag 223hc is set to OFF (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the per-universal figure per game period (the end timing of the special figure 1 permutation is later than the end timing of the per-university figure game) (C5303: Yes), the difference Period, that is, the period from the end of the game per universal figure to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the waiting period for the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuation (special figure 2 standby Period), the production mode is set based on the per-universal-drawing scenario corresponding to the special figure 2 standby period calculated this time among the per-universal-drawing scenarios 1 to 3 defined in the series production scenario table 222ha. On the other hand, in the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the per-university figure period (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the per-university figure game) (C5303). : No), even if the special figure 1 change this time is executed, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, that is, during the special figure 1 change this time, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640. If not, because the special figure 1 game is still running after the special figure 1 change to be executed this time, the special figure 1 change is executed during the remaining common figure game, Since it cannot be predicted whether the variation in FIG. 2 will be executed, the processes of C5304 and C5305 are skipped, and the process proceeds to C5306. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223hc is not set to OFF, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is continuously executed.

In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 401 and FIG. 402, a period effect (represented by a series of effects that is associated with the period from the execution of the universal figure variation to the execution of the jackpot game) In the case of executing (drafting), the previous game content (length of the special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at a plurality of timings (universal figure fluctuation start timing, general figure per game start timing), and rendering based on the prediction result. A mode is set. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined that the prediction is impossible, the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed to constantly monitor whether or not the special figure variation is executed during the per-university game. I am configuring.

With such a configuration, it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the series production in advance for the range in which the previous game content (length of the special figure 2 waiting period) can be predicted in advance. It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the presentation mode. Further, since the processing for predicting the previous game content can be executed at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Furthermore, when it is not possible to predict the previous game content at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series production is executed based on the actual game content. The mode can be set surely.

Returning to FIG. 408, the description will be continued. In the process of C5301, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is not received (not the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation) (C5301: No), then the fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation If it is determined that a pattern command is received (whether to start the special 2 fluctuation) (C5306), and it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is received (start of the special 2 fluctuation), (C5306: Yes), because the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the per-university figure game, as described above with reference to FIG. 402, even during the per-university figure per game during the special figure 2 fluctuation period. Scenario 3 is set as the production mode of the corresponding series production (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to OFF (C5308), the display special 2 variation command is set (C5309), and then the processing of C5310 is performed. To do.

Note that the above-described processing of C5307 is a case where a series of effects is executed based on the universal figure fluctuation, and is executed at the first prediction processing executed at the universal figure fluctuation start timing and at the universal figure per game start timing. In any of the second prediction process, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period during which the regular monitoring performance setting process is executed during the game per game. This is done when That is, this is a case where the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. As described above, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, the effect mode corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation period is set in the process of C5307. Thus, even if the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the performance mode of the series performance is configured to be executed based on the actual game content. It is possible to reliably set the presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5306, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not started (C5306: No), the process proceeds to C5310. In the process of C5310, a process corresponding to another command is executed (C5310), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, the contents of the general-use production effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the universal figure effect setting process 8 (C4167) executed in the eighth control example. This general production effect setting process 8 (C4167) is a series effect prediction setting process process for predicting the subsequent game content and setting the series effect when the condition for executing the general effect variation series effect is satisfied. This is different from the general-use graphic effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above in that the (first prediction process) is executed. Since the other contents are the same as the general-use graphic effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the general-purpose effect setting process 8 (C4167), first, the same processes of C4201 to C4206 as the general-purpose effect setting process of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 371) are executed. If it is determined that the series effect flag 223ec is off (C4206: No), the series effect prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to C4208. Details of this series effect prediction setting process (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after executing the same processing of C4208 to C4212 as the general-use effect setting processing (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, the non-changing prize flag 223ef is set to OFF (C4252), and thereafter, the present The process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) will be described. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the eighth control example. In this series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251), future game contents (special figure 2 waiting period) are predicted (first prediction) at the start of universal figure fluctuation, and a series is based on the prediction result (first prediction result). The process for setting the effect mode during the period in which the effect is executed is executed, and there is a case where the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result and a case where it cannot be predicted. The process for setting the effect mode is executed for different periods of the period during which the series of effects is executed.

In the series effect prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the current universal figure variation is a hit variation (C5401). If it is determined that the present figure change is not a hit change (C5401: No), the condition for executing the series production is not satisfied, and thus this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current figure variation is a hit variation (C5401: Yes), the value of the special figure variation time counter (special figure 1 variation time counter) 223eg is read (C5402), and the special figure variation time counter is read. It is determined whether the value of 223eg is larger than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is 0, that is, it is in the state where the special figure 1 is not currently changing (C5403: No), the present process is ended as it is. That is, in the present control example, the condition for executing a series of effects when the variation per ordinary figure is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. 409, the game state is the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol). , Normal symbol low probability state), this time the general figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series production counter 223ga is set to OFF, the non-variation prize flag 223ef is set to OFF, and the pseudo series Even when the effect flag 223ec is set to OFF, and as shown in FIG. 410, even if the condition that is satisfied when the current general figure fluctuation is a general figure fluctuation is satisfied, When the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time of execution of this process, the series effect is not executed (set).

With such a configuration, it is possible to set whether or not to execute a series of effects that can be executed based on the variation per ordinary figure according to the execution state of the special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), and thus the normal state. It is possible to execute a right-handed game in and not to execute a series of effects for a player who is playing a game in which only the universal figure variation is executed.

In the process of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is larger than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg. The special figure 1 remaining variation time is calculated based on (C5404), and the current figure variation time and the per-university figure game time executed after the end of this figure variation are extracted and summed (C5405). In the processing of C5405, the time period from the present time (at the start of fluctuation of the figure) to the end of the game at the figure is finished by adding the figure change time and the game period per figure (the end period per figure). A process for calculating is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 remaining variation time calculated in the process of C5404 and the total time (total time per ordinary figure) totaled (calculated) in the process of C5405 are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is the special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is longer (longer) than the total time per ordinary figure (C5407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining variation time is longer (longer) than the total time per ordinary figure (C5407: Yes), the game per ordinary figure is ended by the end of the special figure 1 variation being executed. Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins the second winning port 640 during the game per game. Therefore, by referring to the series production scenario table 223ha, a scenario for a universal figure based on a time difference between the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 and the total time per special figure (special figure 2 waiting period) is set (C5408), and then the book The process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C5407, when it is determined that the special figure 1 residual variation time is shorter than the total time per ordinary figure (C5407: No), the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period and the length thereof are predicted at the present time. Since this is not possible, scenario 4 is set per ordinary figure (C5409), and then this processing ends.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when the universal figure fluctuation is executed, the variation status of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per universal symbol is predicted, and based on the prediction result. It is configured to set an effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the change in the universal figure. That is, when the universal figure fluctuation is executed, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation executed this time, the universal figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per universal figure are calculated, On the basis of this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation currently being executed during the per-universal figure game ends, and based on the determination result, a production mode of a series of effects corresponding to the universal figure variation is set. doing.

With such a configuration, for example, the variation end timing of the variation in the special map 1 being executed is later than the period in which the ball can win the second winning port 640, that is, the gaming period per universal figure (maximum period). In such a case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the Toku-zu 2 variation can be executed at the time of executing the Toku-zu variation. As a result, an effect mode based on the length of the standby period can be set as various effect modes that are executed during the standby period. Therefore, in the above-described fifth control example, the variably settable period can be lengthened among the effect modes of the series effect depending on the length of the standby period, and therefore, the series corresponding to the length of the series effect can be performed. It is possible to easily execute the effect.

In the eighth control example described above, as in the fifth control example described above, as a per-university game, a game per short opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, opening period is 0.1 seconds) ), and a game per long opening (closing period (opening period) 0.1 seconds, first opening period 1 second, closing period (waiting period) 1.5 seconds, second opening period 0.5 seconds) Since, and is configured to be executable, in the first prediction process (series production prediction setting process (see C4251 of FIG. 410)) executed at the time of general figure fluctuation, it is won in the current general figure fluctuation It may be configured to determine the hit type per ordinary figure and set the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640) based on the result of the determination. In addition, the mode of the prediction range corresponding to the type of per-universal figure judged this time (length and timing of the period in which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640), that is, the game mode of the per-universal-play game to be executed. Based on this, the easiness of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game is determined, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball winning the second winning opening 640, When it is not possible to predict (the period until the variation of the special figure 2 based on the winning a prize), it is possible to determine the degree of difficulty of winning a prize for determining the ease of winning the ball in the second winning a prize opening 640. It may be configured to set the effect mode during the universal figure fluctuation period based on the determination result of.

Specifically, the prize-winning difficulty determination means determines that the prize-winning difficulty is low (the ball can be won in the approximately second winning opening 640 by performing a normal game). When the type of per-universal figure (for example, per-universal figure A (see FIG. 336(b))) corresponding to the general figure long opening per game) is set, as a staging mode set during the general figure fluctuation period. , A production mode that easily shifts to the next production mode set as a series production is set, and the winning difficulty is high (even if a normal game is performed, it is difficult to win a ball at the second winning opening 640) When the type of per-universal figure (for example, per-universal figure B (see FIG. 336(b))) corresponding to the per-universal figure per game determined to be (for example, per-universal figure short opening per game) is set, As an effect mode set during the figure variation period, it is preferable to set an effect mode that suggests that the series effect is finished (an effect mode that is difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as the effect series). .. In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of executing the first prediction process, the effect mode of the effect executed during the universal figure fluctuation period is changed based on the type of the universal figure game to be executed. As a result, when the universal figure fluctuation is started, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed at the occasion of the current universal figure fluctuation, and thus execute the first prediction process. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed when the standby period cannot be predicted at the timing.

In addition, it corresponds to the universal game per game (for example, universal game short open per game) that is determined to have a high difficulty level of winning (even if a normal game is performed, it is difficult to make a ball into the second winning opening 640). When the per-universal figure per type (for example, per-universal figure B (see FIG. 336(b))) is set, the production mode corresponding to the series production may not be set. With this configuration, it is not possible to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 during the normal game, and the game for the big hit game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small hit prize, small hit game) When it is difficult to proceed, it is possible to suppress the execution of a series of effects. In this case, if it is determined that a ball has won in the second winning opening 640 during a game with a high degree of difficulty in winning a prize, it may be configured to execute a series of effects from the timing of winning, for example, When the length of the waiting period (the period until the change of special figure 2 based on this winning) is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or more) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 It is advisable to use a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to set the effect mode that is normally set during the universal figure fluctuation period.

In this way, in the case where a game of winning a bonus figure with a high difficulty level for winning is executed, the start timing of the series of effects is not the timing of starting a variation of the figure, but the timing at which the ball wins the second winning opening 640. It is possible to suppress the frequency at which the series effect ends in the middle of the series effect even though the series effect is executed.

Further, in the present control example, an example is shown in which one per-university figure type corresponding to the per-university figure game with a low winning difficulty is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it corresponds to a per-university figure game with a low winning difficulty level. You can configure multiple types of per-universal figure per type, and you can change the game mode of the per-universal-game per game executed corresponding to each per-universal-university type. For example, it corresponds to the per-universal-game per game with low winning difficulty. As a type of per-universal figure, at least a per-universal-university type classification α and a per-universal-diagram permissible type β are configured to be settable, and a game mode of a per-universal-university game (game alpha per general figure) corresponding to the per-universal-diagram type α As a game mode of a closed period of 0.1 seconds and an open period of 3 seconds, a game period of a per-university figure game (game per-universal figure β) corresponding to a per-university figure type β is a closed period of 0.1 seconds. , The first opening period of 0.1 seconds, the closing period (waiting period) of 3 seconds, and the second opening period (2.9 seconds) of the game mode may be set.

In this case, in the case where a game of winning a prize is played with a low degree of difficulty in winning, the period in which the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 varies depending on the type of prize being set. In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type per universal figure, and the first prediction process is performed based on the determination result of the determination means. It may be configured so that the range of prediction to be performed is different. Specifically, when the above-mentioned universal figure game α is executed, the range of the prediction executed in the first prediction process is a range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the universal figure game ( Based on the range of the open period), when the universal figure game β is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is 3.3 seconds to 6.1 from the start of the universal figure game. It may be configured to set based on the range of seconds (the range of the second opening period).

In this way, the prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is set by associating and setting the range to be predicted, based on the game mode (the winning difficulty level, the setting timing of the winning possible period) of the per-university game to be executed. It is possible to narrow the range of. This makes it easier to predict the waiting period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a series of effects and enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, it is possible to set the per-universal figure type γ as a per-universal-university type corresponding to a per-universal-university game with a low degree of difficulty in prize winning, and a per-universal-university game corresponding to the per-universal figure type γ As a mode, when the game mode of the closing period 0.1 seconds, the first opening period 1.5 seconds, the closing period (standby period) 3 seconds, the second opening period (1.5 seconds) is set, That is, in the case of executing a game per universal figure in which a plurality of opening periods in which the balls can be won in the second winning opening 640 are set, first, in the first prediction process, first, corresponding to the second opening period set later. And the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed (remaining fluctuation period) are compared to determine whether the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is after the second opening period. If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the variation (remaining variation period) of the special figure 1 is after the end timing of the second opening period, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the second opening period It is configured to set up to the end timing of one fluctuation as the waiting period, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining variation period) is before the end timing of the second opening period. In this case, next, the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is compared with the range corresponding to the first opening period.

When it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is before the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining variation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first opening period When it is determined that the timing until the end of one fluctuation is set as the standby period, on the other hand, the elapsed timing of the first open period is later than the elapsed timing of the first open period, that is, When the Toku-zu 1 variation that is being executed is stopped and displayed by the time one open period elapses, the second prediction process described above is executed because the standby period could not be predicted in the first prediction process. It is good to configure like this.

<Ninth control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The ninth control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that the control process for the final fluctuation effect executed in the final fluctuation in the time saving state is different.

In the fifth control example described above, the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time saving state is used to draw the result of the variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed after the variation (the time saving state ends, The configuration is made so as to suggest the result of the prior determination for the special figure 2 variation executed in the state where the state is set. With this configuration, when the special figure 2 variation that is executed after the time saving state is completed and a win (big hit, small hit) is won, it is possible to suggest that fact in the final variation effect.

The ninth control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that the process for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect is described in detail. Specifically, when executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state, based on the lottery result of the fluctuation and the special figure 2 reserved ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), the final fluctuation effect is produced. A mode is set.

Furthermore, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, it is configured to set the production period of the final fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 holding ball number (value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c). There is. That is, when the final fluctuation in the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, the next special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the normal state) that is the target of the final fluctuation effect is executed after the fluctuation ends. Therefore, if the final fluctuation in the short-time state is an out-of-phase fluctuation, the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired is previously set at the start timing of the final fluctuation in the short-time state. The effect mode (final change effect) is set.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Ninth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415, an electrical configuration in the ninth control example will be described. The ninth control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and other than that is the same. Is. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 411(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 411(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 411(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above in the final variation effect table 222ia and The difference is that a final effect variable setting table 222ib is added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final fluctuation effect table 222ia is a data table that is referred to when setting the effect mode of the final fluctuation effect, and is referred to when the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the final fluctuation in the time saving state (Special figure 2 fluctuation) is received. Is done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222ia will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413.

FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222ia. As shown in FIG. 412(a), the final fluctuation effect table 222ia is referred to when the lottery result of the fluctuation is a win and the winning final table 222ia1 is referred to when the lottery result of the fluctuation is a miss. And a final table 222ia2 for detachment.

Here, the effect period in the final variation effect will be described. In the ninth control example, as in the above-described fifth control example, “standby period”, “first period”, “second period”, and “third period” are formed as the production period of the final variation production. The display mode can be set for each period. In the above-described fifth control example, regardless of the lottery result of the fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation), the production mode (standby production) for notifying that the final fluctuation production is started is set in the “standby period”. The production mode (acquisition production) for acquiring a lot of special figure 2 hold is set in the "first period", and the lottery result of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are suggested in the "second period". The effect mode (mission effect) for performing is set, and the effect mode (result effect) for indicating the effect result of the mission effect is set in the "third period".

Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether to execute an acquisition effect or a mission effect as an effect executed in the "first period", based on the number of special balls 2 reserved balls when the "standby period" has elapsed. However, if the special map 2 number of reserved balls when the “standby period” has elapsed is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (if the upper limit number (4)), the mission effect is executed in the “first period”. It was

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the production mode of the final variation production is set on the basis of the special figure 2 holding ball number at the timing at which the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed. This is different from the fifth control example described above. Further, it differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the presentation mode of the final variation effect set at the timing at which the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different based on the lottery result of the variation. doing. Furthermore, the fifth control example is also different in that a plurality of timings for setting the presentation mode of the final variation production are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 412(b), the contents defined in the final hit table 222ia1 of the final variation effect table 222ia will be described. FIG. 412(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the winning final table 222ia1. As shown in FIG. 412(b), in the final table for winning 222a1, in accordance with the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c (special figure 2 holding sphere number) and the acquired effect counter 223f, The effect mode set in each effect period of the final variation effect is defined.

Specifically, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is the effect pattern of the final variation effect. The effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect in the range of “170 to 189”, and the effect pattern C is specified as the effect pattern of the final variation effect in the range of “190 to 198”. ing. In addition, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is "1,2" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of “170 to 198”, the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is "3" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 109", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, In the range of "110 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect.

Here, the detailed contents of various effect patterns defined in the winning final table 222ia1 will be described. The effect pattern A is for performing the same final variation effect as in the fifth control example described above, and as described above with reference to FIG. 318, is set first in the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed. In the standby period (0th period) to be performed, "standby production (production a)", which is a production mode for indicating that the final variation production is executed, is set, and in the first period after the standby period has elapsed. , "Acquisition effect (effect b)", which is an effect mode for guiding the player to a game method in which the subsequent game is advantageously executed (acquires special figure 2 hold), is set, and the first period In the second period after the elapse of, the lottery result of the symbol that is the target of the final variation effect (the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation which is the final reduction in time saving, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold currently acquired) The "mission production (production c)", which is a production mode for suggesting, is set, and the "mission production (production c)" executed during the second period in the third period after the second period has elapsed. “Result effect (effect d)”, which is an effect mode for indicating the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The effect pattern B is an effect pattern set when the short-time final change is a win (big hit, small hit), and is a final change effect for notifying the player that the win has been won. The mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

The effect pattern C is an effect mode set when the special figure 2 hold number when setting the final variation effect is equal to or less than the predetermined number (0), and is included in the standby period ( The "standby effect (a)" is set in the 0th period). When the effect pattern C is set, in order to set the effect mode of the final variation effect (effect mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) again after the end of the waiting period (0th period). Is configured to be executed (final effect variable process).

Although details of the final effect changing process will be described later, in the final effect changing process, the number of special figure 2 holdings acquired during the waiting period (the 0th period) and the end time of the waiting period (the 0th period). The processing for setting the different effect modes according to the number of special figure 2 reservations in each of the first period to the third period is executed.

As described above, in the ninth control example, in comparison with the final fluctuation effect setting method in the fifth control example described above, the final fluctuation effect of the final fluctuation effect is set when the final fluctuation effect is set (at the start of the time saving final fluctuation). The point configured to set the effect mode, and the lottery result (pre-reading result) that is the target of the final fluctuation effect, the lottery result of the fluctuation concerned and the time of setting the final fluctuation effect (at the start of the time-saving final fluctuation) It is different from the pre-reading result of special figure 2 reservation already acquired in ).

With this configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the final variation effect that is executed in accordance with the acquisition status of the special figure 2 suspension at the time when the time-saving final variation is executed, so that the time-saving final variation is executed. It is possible to add variety to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before the game is stopped (during a time saving state). Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as in the present control example, in the case of changing the effect mode of the final change effect executed in accordance with the acquisition status of the special figure 2 suspension at the time when the time saving final change is executed, the time saving final change is executed. It is advisable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the special figure 2 hold number acquired at a certain point is a specific number (for example, 3 which is the upper limit number). With this configuration, the player is motivated to play the game so that the special figure 2 holding number becomes a specific number (for example, 3 which is the upper limit number) when the time saving final variation is executed. You can

Since the above-mentioned winning final table 222ia1 is a data table that is referred to when the variation (time saving final variation) is won, the execution of the final variation effect set by referring to the winning final table 222ia1. The period is a period corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the hourly final variation. That is, after the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222ia1, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. As described above, when the short-time final fluctuation is won, the final fluctuation is made to correspond to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation without considering the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of special chart 2 executed based on the suspension of special chart 2. Since the effect mode of the effect can be set in a batch, the process for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, in the hit final table 222ia1 used in the present ninth control example, the smaller the special figure 2 holding number (the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c), the easier the production pattern C is selected. It is prescribed. In other words, the smaller the number of special map 2 holdings at the time when the time-saving final fluctuation is executed, the more the number of special map 2 holdings that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period) can be increased. It is configured such that the effect pattern C in which the effect mode can be variably set according to the number of special figure 2 holdings acquired in () is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to execute different final fluctuation effects when the short-time final fluctuation is executed in a state where the number of reserved special characters 2 is small.

Further, the larger the special figure 2 hold number (the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c), the easier it is specified that the effect pattern B is selected as the final change effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily execute the special effect 1 that indicates that the winning is won, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of special maps 2 to be held is large. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game for obtaining the special figure 2 holding number, and the operation of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 413, the contents of the disengagement final table 222ia2 included in the final fluctuation effect table 222ia will be described. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the removal final table 222ia2. The deviation final table 222ia2 is a data table referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation which is the time saving final fluctuation is a deviation, and is specially stored in the special figure 2 during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. This is used for setting the production mode of the final variation production, which has a production period that is a period obtained by adding the variation time of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the hold.

In the ninth control example, similar to the fifth control example described above, the final fluctuation effect executed in the final fluctuation in the time-shortened state (time-shortened final fluctuation) is used to execute the lottery result of the fluctuation and the execution after the fluctuation. It is configured to suggest a preliminary determination result for the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed in a state in which the time saving state ends and the normal state is set). Then, when the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation is a win (big hit, small hit), since the winning game is executed after the end of the fluctuation, the final fluctuation effect is produced in a period corresponding to the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. It is configured to run.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out of alignment, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored after the end of the change is executed. In this control example, the final fluctuation effect is executed including the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation that is held and stored at the time when the time-saving final fluctuation ends.

As shown in FIG. 413, the final table 222ia2 for disengagement includes the special figure 2 holding number (value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c), the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 holding, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f. , The rendering mode of the final variation rendering is defined. Also, as the production period in which the final variation production is executed, the variation period of the time-saving final variation, and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) ends, normal state (low probability of special symbols) State, the low-probability state of the normal symbol) the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state), and the fluctuation period are defined.

Then, at the execution timing of the time saving final variation, the production mode of the final variation effect is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed corresponding to the already-obtained special figure 2 holding number. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the production (final variation production) executed across a plurality of special diagram variations (special diagram 2 variations). It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode, as compared with the case where the effect mode of the final variation effect is set each time is executed.

Further, in the present control example, in the case where the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variation effect, there is winning information indicating a win (when the prefetch result is a win), When there is no winning information that indicates winning (when the pre-reading result is incorrect), the execution content (whether or not to execute, the period during which it is executed) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect is configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning or winning in the acquired special map 2 hold (when the pre-reading result is winning), the winning effect is less likely to be executed than in other cases. Alternatively, the execution period is shortened even when the execution is performed.

With such a configuration, the player can be made to predict the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 suspension according to the effect mode of the fluctuation effect executed as the final fluctuation effect, so that the effect effect can be enhanced. In addition, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time when the time saving state can be terminated, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the time saving final variation is an outlier variation and the time saving final variation is executed. In the state of being off, the production mode (acquisition production (production b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery in the normal state) executed after the time-saving state ends, other than that It becomes possible to emphasize more than in the case of. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the advantageous game executed after the time saving state ends.

Here, when the content defined in the disengagement final table 222ia2 is specifically described with reference to FIG. 413, the special figure 2 holding number (the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c) is 0. When the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect a" is set in the standby period, "effect b" is set in the first period, and "effect c" is set in the second period. Performance data is defined. In addition, the special figure 2 reservation number (value of special design 2 reservation sphere number counter 223c) is 0, when the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "160 to 179", the standby period, and the The effect data in which "effect b" is set in one period and "effect c" is set in the second period is defined. Further, when the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "180 to 198", effect data in which "effect a" is set in the standby period is defined.

It should be noted that, in the final deviation table 222ia2, the effect mode executed in the final effect period of the final variation effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 413, “◯” is displayed as a display mode indicating that it is not set). Is configured. In other words, when the special figure lottery result (prefetch result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the time saving final fluctuation does not include a hit, the special drawing 2 hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the time saving final variation The fluctuation may be executed after the Toku-zu 2 fluctuation that is the target of the prefetching process at the execution timing of the time saving final fluctuation.

In this way, when it is necessary to change the production result (production mode) of the final variation production depending on the lottery result of the special figure variation that can be executed during the period from the execution of the final variation production to the end of the final variation production. Is configured such that the presentation mode of the final variation effect can be variably set at a timing other than the execution timing of the time saving final variation. Therefore, the final variation effect can be executed in various effect modes.

Returning to FIG. 413, the description will be continued. If the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c) is 1, the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold, and if "within hold", that is, The special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (special figure 2 fluctuation at the end of the time saving state) is a deviation fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation executed next (the special figure 2 fluctuation executed first after the normal state is set) ) Is a fluctuation, regardless of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), “effect a” is displayed in the standby period and “effect b” is displayed in the first period. , "Production c" in the second period, in the third period, and in the first variation period of special figure 2 (hereinafter, referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 1) after the normal state is set (through 1) The effect data for which "effect d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c) is 1, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold and is "no hold within hold". In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (special figure 2 fluctuation at the end of the time saving state) is an outlier fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed next (the special character figure first executed after the normal state is set). 2 variation) is also a deviation variation, and when the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "effect a" is in the standby period and "effect b" is in the first period. , "Effect c" is set in the second period, and "continuation effect (effect f)" which is a display mode for delaying the display of the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period is set. The performance data to be played is defined.

Here, the above-mentioned “continuation effect” is an effect mode displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. 328(b)) is executed, and is an effect mode indicating the effect result of the mission effect (FIG. 329 ( Refer to a)), that is, a result mode (effect d) is an effect mode executed when the period until it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is extended.

Although detailed description of the display content is omitted, for example, when the effect mode shown in FIG. 328(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as the mission effect, the falling rock 873 is dropped. By reducing the speed, the period showing the process until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed, or the mission effect continues as the effect result of the mission effect being executed ( A display mode (for example, the characters "continuation!") for indicating that the second mission effect is executed is displayed, and a plurality of mission effects can be performed in one final variation effect. A performance mode that is executed or a pseudo result display performance that temporarily displays a display mode that suggests a performance result different from the actual performance result is set as the performance result of the mission performance.

In this way, by being configured to execute the "continuous production" as the final variation production, for example, after the final variation production is executed, the special figure 2 hold is acquired, and the execution period of the final variation production being executed is executed. In the case of extending, it is possible to extend the production period of the final variation production without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 223c) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (there is a “presence” within the reservation). That is, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) executed this time is a deviation fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the two reserved special figure 2 holds. When there is a variation in winning, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" in the standby period, "effect b" in the first period, During the 2nd period, "effect c" is the 3rd period, and the variation period of the first special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as the normal special figure 2 variation 1) after the normal state is set (1), 2 In the variation period (through 2) of the second special figure 2 variation (hereinafter, referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 2), the effect data in which "effect d" is set is defined during the period until the hit variation ends. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold and is "no hold within hold". In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (special figure 2 fluctuation at the end of the time saving state) is an outlier fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed next (the special character figure first executed after the normal state is set). 2 variation) is also a deviation variation, and when the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "effect a" is in the standby period and "effect b" is in the first period. , "Effect c" is set in the second period, and "continuation effect (effect f)" which is a display mode for delaying the display of the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period is set. The performance data to be played is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 223c) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (there is a "retention within reservation"). That is, that is, the special map 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special time 2 fluctuation of the time saving state) is a deviation fluctuation, and the special map fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the three reserved special figure 2 holds When there is a variation in winning, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" in the standby period, "effect b" in the first period, "Production c" is set in 2 periods, and "Production d" is set in the 3rd period, and in the period until the winning variation ends among the 1st variation period, 2nd variation period, and 3rd variation period The data is defined.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation (there is no reservation within the reservation) That is, when the special map 2 fluctuation (the special special character 2 fluctuation at the end of the time saving state) executed this time is a deviation fluctuation, and all the special figure 2 fluctuations corresponding to the three pending special figure 2 suspensions are deviation fluctuations. Regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), effect data in which "effect a" is set in the standby period is defined.

Returning to FIG. 411(a), the description will be continued. The final effect variable setting table 222ib is a data table used for selecting the effect mode of the final variable effect executed in the final change in the time saving state (change in special figure 2). When setting using the final variation effect table 222ia, if there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, the effect mode is set for the unset period during execution of the final variable effect. It is used for. Specifically, in the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863: Yes in FIG. 420), and the effect variable flag 223ic is set to ON. 420 (C4864: Yes in FIG. 420), that is, when there is a production period (unset period) in which the production mode is not set (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222ib will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. FIG. 414(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 414( a ), the final effect variable setting table 222 ib has a hit setting table 222 ib 1 that is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (temporal final fluctuation) being executed is a hit fluctuation, and And a deviation setting table 222ib2 that is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is a deviation fluctuation, and according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed. , Different production modes are set. In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, if the drawing result of the special figure 2 change (time saving final change) that is being executed is a win or a miss, the elements referred to when setting the production mode are different. I am making it.

With this configuration, the effect mode set as the final variation effect can be set in correspondence with the actual game content (special figure lottery result and the degree of increase in the number of reserved balls). Can be made to be interested in the effect contents of the final variation effect executed for.

Next, the contents of the hit setting table 222ib1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 414(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning setting table 222ib1. As shown in FIG. 414(b), the hit setting table 222ib1 indicates that the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia, that is, during the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the waiting period (the 0th period). Different effect modes are defined based on the acquired special figure 2 hold number and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia is "0, 1" and the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "effect b" in the first period, It is stipulated that "effect c" is set in the second period and "effect d" is set in the third period. It should be noted that, without setting a new effect mode with respect to a period in which the effect mode has already been set when executing the final variation effect, an unset period in which the effect mode is not set when executing the final variation effect (Fig. The production mode is set by referring to this table only for the period 412 (b) indicated by “◯”).

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia is "2" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "effect b" in the first period and in the second period It is stipulated that "effect c" and "effect d" should be set in the third period, and when it is in the range of "150 to 198", it is being executed in the first period, the second period, and the third period. "Special effect 2 (effect g)" is set as a high expectation notification mode to show that the effect result of the final variation effect is likely to be an effect result indicating a winning of a special symbol (special effect 2). It is prescribed to do.

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect g)" is an effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 328(b)) that is normally executed as the final variation effect is executed, and detailed description will be given. As will be described later, the selection ratio is defined so that the effect result of the final variation effect this time is more likely to be the effect result indicating the winning than the execution of the mission effect.

Although the detailed display content of the “special effect 2” is omitted, for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating the winning is obtained. A certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter “V”) and a disengagement display mode (display mode imitating “cross mark”) which is the effect result showing the defeat winning are displayed and are displayed to the end. An effect whose display mode is the effect result of the final variation effect is executed. In this way, immediately after the end of the waiting period, by notifying the player that an effect different from the normal one will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner, the effect executed while expecting the player to win It can be watched.

Note that the effect content of the "special effect 2" is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and according to the example shown in FIG. 328(a), for example, as the type of the teammate characters (851a to 851d) used for the mission effect. Alternatively, a character not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character imitating a whale) may be set so that a mission effect different from a normal one may be executed, or the same ally character (851a to 851a). 851d) may be used to execute an effect in which a special mission is executed.

With such a configuration, the image data used in the normal mission effect can be diverted as a part of the image data of the effect executed as the “special effect 2”, and thus the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be used. Can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia is "3" and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", "effect b" in the first period and in the second period It is stipulated that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and in the case of the range of "120 to 198", "effect g" in the first period, the second period, and the third period. Stipulated to set.

Finally, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "1" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third period. It is stipulated to set "effect g", and in the case of the range of "150 to 198", the effect result of the final variation effect being executed is the special symbol (in the first period, the second period, and the third period). It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect h)" which is a finalized notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating the winning of special figure 2) will be obtained.

The above-mentioned "special effect 3 (effect h)" is an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 328(b)) that is normally executed as the final variation effect, and is a time-saving final variation ( It is executed only when the lottery result of (Special figure 2 fluctuation) is a win. Although the detailed display content of the “special effect 3” is omitted, for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating the winning is obtained. An effect in which a certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") is displayed is executed. In this way, immediately after the end of the waiting period for the final variation effect, the player can be made ready for the winning game by informing the player of the winning result. Further, by making the display mode at the time of starting the special effect 2 and the display mode at the time of starting the special effect 3 (mode in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is dark (black out)), the player On the other hand, it is possible to previously notify that the final variation effect this time is the special effect 2 or the special effect 3. Thereby, the player pays attention to the final variation effect while expecting the special effect 3 to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the ninth control example, as a privilege to be given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variable effect is notified at a time point before the final variable effect ends. Although it is configured to grant a privilege, it may be configured to grant a privilege other than that, for example, based on the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the timing when the special effect 3 is set. It may be configured to give a privilege to inform the player of the number of times of winning. Specifically, when there are two special figure 2 reservations in which the pre-reading result hits and wins among the four special figure 2 reservations, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as the effect mode of the special effect 3. Is darkened, an effect is displayed in which a plurality of hit display modes (display modes imitating the letters “V”), which are the effect results showing the winning, are displayed, and finally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It suffices that the number of displayed winning display modes indicates the number of times of winning. In this way, as the special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when the special effect condition is established, the player is given the first privilege (notice of winning) based on the execution of the special effect. However, after the first privilege is granted, the second privilege (notification of the number of winnings) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted, so that even after the first privilege is granted, It is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the special effect (special effect 3) executed, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 415. The contents of the detachment setting table 222ib2 will be described. FIG. 415 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment setting table 222ib2. This disengagement setting table 222ib2 is used when the disengagement final table 222ia2 is used when setting the final fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) in the time saving state (see C4364 of FIG. 419). ) Is a data table used for setting a production mode for an unset period (a period displayed by “◯” in FIG. 413) in which the production mode is not set, and the final fluctuation production update process 9 (FIG. 420). In C4566 of No.), it is referred to when it is the end timing of the waiting period (0th period) (C4863: Yes in FIG. 420) (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

As shown in FIG. 415, the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia (the number of special figure 2 pending acquired during the waiting period) and the presence/absence of additional winning (acquired during the waiting period) are set in the detachment setting table 222ib2. Based on the special figure 2 winning/non-winning based on the prefetch result of hold), the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223en, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, it is set for each effect period of the final variation effect. A performance mode is defined.

It should be noted that when the final variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is set using the disengagement final table 222ia2 (see C4364 in FIG. 419), the effect mode is already set. It is configured such that a new production mode is not set for the existing production period, and the production mode is set only for the non-set period by referring to the deviation setting table 222ib2.

Next, the content defined in the disconnection setting table 222ib2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 415. First, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is “0”, that is, when a new special figure 2 hold is not acquired during the waiting period, the presence/absence of additional hits and the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223en , Regardless of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f, various effect modes such that "effect b" is set in the first period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Is specified. That is, since there is no change in the time when the final variation effect is started and the number of special figure 2 to be held, there is no effect as a final effect effect (effect d) without setting a special effect mode. The result is set.

Next, when the value of the number-of-holding-balls increase counter 223ia is “1”, the additional hit is “present”, and the holding upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. When the number of reservations is 3 and the prefetch results of the special figure 2 reservations (3 pieces) that have already been acquired are all out, when the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit, In the range where the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 169", various effects are set such that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON when the waiting period ends, it is prescribed not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done. With such a configuration, a useless effect (an acquisition effect that causes the player to perform a game to obtain the special figure 2 hold even though the special figure 2 hold number has reached the upper limit) It can be suppressed from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the effect contents to be executed and lowering the effect effect. In addition, in the range of the obtained effect counter 223f of "170 to 198", various effect modes are defined such that "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

In addition, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional winning is "none", the first value is set regardless of the setting status of the pending upper limit flag 223en and the acquired value range of the effect counter 223f. Various effect modes are defined such that "effect b" is set in the period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, one new special figure 2 hold is acquired at the time when the final variation effect is started, and when the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold is out, a special effect mode is set. As a final result effect (effect d), an effect result indicating deviation is set.

Next, when the value of the number-of-holding-balls increase counter 223ia is “2”, the additional hit is “present”, and the holding upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In the state where the number of reservations is 2 and the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out, at least as the prefetching results of the two special figure 2 reservations newly acquired during the waiting period, If any of the special-reading 2 hold prefetch results is a hit, regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, "effect c" in the first period and the second period and "effect" in the third to fourth periods. Various effect modes are defined so as to set "d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON when the waiting period ends, it is prescribed not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

With such a configuration, a useless effect (an acquisition effect that causes the player to perform a game to obtain the special figure 2 hold even though the special figure 2 hold number has reached the upper limit) It can be suppressed from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the effect contents to be executed and lowering the effect effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 hold at the start of the final variation effect. In the state where the number is 2 and the prefetch results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out, the prefetch results of the two special figure 2 reservations newly acquired during the waiting period are also out. In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. There is. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON when the waiting period ends, it is prescribed not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

In addition, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is “2”, the additional hit is “none”, and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, that is, the special winning obtained during the waiting period of the final variation effect. In the state where the pre-reading results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are all out, the pre-reading results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 holds during the waiting period are also out, and the current special figure 2 hold When the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various effect modes are defined so that “effect d” is set in. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect (production b) for newly allowing the player to hold the special figure 2 hold using the first period. Is configured to run.

Next, when the value of the number-of-holding-balls increase counter 223ia is “3”, the additional hit is “present”, and the upper-limit holding flag 223en is set to ON, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is “0. In the range of "109", various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON. In this way, when the effect result indicating the winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, a new special figure 2 hold is acquired. Even if it is not possible, by intentionally performing the acquisition effect, it is possible to give a difference between the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the effect mode to be executed.

Further, in the ninth control example, only when the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating the winning, the effect described above (the acquisition effect (although the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON) Since the effect b) is executed, the effect in which the actual special figure 2 number of reserved balls and the effect mode to be executed are different is executed. It is possible to notify that the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game contents and the effect contents to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is “3”, the additional hit is “present”, and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “110 to 198. In the range of ", various effect modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON when the waiting period ends, it is prescribed not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "present", and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to off, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, Various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is not executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF. As described above, when the effect result indicating the winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the state where the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, that is, a new special figure 2 hold can be acquired. Even if it is possible to do so, by intentionally not performing the acquisition effect, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of special ball 2 reserved balls and the effect mode to be executed.

Even in this case, the production result in which the final variation production is a winning result is obtained by performing the production in which the actual special figure 2 number of holding balls is different from the production mode to be executed. This can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game contents and the effect contents to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is “3”, the additional hit is “none”, and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to on, that is, the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the final variation effect is In the case where the prefetching results of the obtained special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are all out in the case of 2, the prefetching results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 hold during the waiting period are also out. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, various effect modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON when the waiting period ends, it is prescribed not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

In addition, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is “3”, the additional winning is “none”, and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to off, that is, the special winning obtained during the waiting period of the final variation effect. In the state where the pre-reading results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are all out, the pre-reading results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 holds during the waiting period are also out, and the current special figure 2 hold When the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various effect modes are defined so that “effect d” is set in. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect (production b) for newly allowing the player to hold the special figure 2 hold using the first period. Is configured to run.

Finally, when the value of the number-of-holding-balls increasing counter 223ia is "4", that is, the special figure 2 at the time when the final variation effect is executed, the number of pending figures is "0", and the four special figures 2 during the waiting period. When a new hold is acquired, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired when the additional hit is “present” is in the range of “0 to 99” in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various effect modes are defined so as to set “effect g”, and various effects are set in the range of “100 to 198” so as to set “effect h” in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. A performance mode is defined. When the additional hit is "none", "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. As described above, various performance modes are defined. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON when the waiting period ends, it is prescribed not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 411(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above in that a holding number increase counter 223ia, a variable period storage area 223ib, The difference is that an effect variable flag 223ic is added, and the other points are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding number increase counter 223ia is acquired within a specific period (a waiting period set as a part of the effect period of the final variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state, and the first period). This is a counter for measuring the number of holds, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time a new Toku-zu 2 hold is acquired within a specific period. This hold number increase counter 223ia receives the prize information command corresponding to the special figure 2 prize in the final prize process (see C3461 of FIG. 418) executed in the prize information command process 9 (see C3262 of FIG. 417). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is set to ON (C5502: Yes), that is, in order to set the effect mode of the final variation effect, the special effect acquired during the waiting period is determined. FIG. 2 When it is necessary to count the number of reservations, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 418).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 9 (see C4566 in FIG. 420), when it is determined that the waiting period has ended (C4863: Yes in FIG. 420), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is the final effect variable setting table 222ib. Is set (see C4865 in FIG. 420). Furthermore, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: Yes in the figure), the effect extension process is performed in which the change period of the special figure 2 suspension acquired during the final change effect is set as the effect period of the final change effect. Therefore, the counter value is referred to (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration for counting the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during the specific period (for example, the waiting period), the specific reserved memory at the end of the specific period. Since it is possible to set not only the number but also the effect mode after the specified period based on the specified number of reserved memories acquired during the specified period, it is possible to set various effect modes. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property of acquiring a large amount of reserved memory within a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present control example, a dedicated counter (reserved number increase counter 223ia) is provided as a configuration for counting the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during a specific period (for example, a waiting period). However, without being limited to this, for example, a storage means for temporarily storing the number of pending storages at the start of the specific period is provided, and the number of pending storages at the end of the specific period is stored in the storage means. The number of reserved storages acquired during a specific period may be calculated by comparing the number of reserved storages.

Further, in this control example, a specific period (for example, a waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved storage (for example, special figure 2 suspension) is set within one special figure variation period (for example, special figure 2 variation). Since it is set to (within period), the number of pending storage does not decrease within a specific period, and a configuration is used that simply adds the number of acquired pending storage. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, it is possible to set a period in which the number of acquisitions of a specific pending storage can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of fluctuations in Special Figure 2), In this case, the counter value is incremented by 1 each time a specific reserved memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) is acquired as a configuration for counting the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 pending). The counter value may be decremented by 1 each time the pending storage decreases (for example, each time the Toku-zu 2 variation using Toku-zu 2 hold is executed). In addition, in this case, the number of specific reserved storages may be smaller at the end of the specific period than at the start of the specific period. As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set a value larger than the upper limit number capable of storing a specific reserved storage as an initial value of the counter. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the counter value from becoming smaller than 0 when the counter value is increased/decreased in response to the increase/decrease in the specific pending storage during the specific period.

In addition, as a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions of the specific reserved storage, a period in which the number of acquisitions of the specific reserved storage can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of changes in Special Figure 2) is set. In the case of configuring the above, as described above, it is not a configuration in which the specific pending storage actually increases within the specific period, but only the number of the specific pending storage newly acquired within the specific period is added. A configuration may be used.

Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode after the lapse of the specific period is set based on the number of increases in the specific reserved storage (special figure 2 hold) within the predetermined specific period (within the standby period). However, the specific period is not limited to this, depending on the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, the frame button 22). It may be configured to be variable, for example, a plurality of non-continuous periods may be set as the specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the value stored in the hold is counted by configuring the player so that the timing when the specific period is set is not notified. Since it is possible, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect for the player.

Also, do not set the specific period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player uses the operation means to perform an operation indicating that the specific period is not set). It may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect in a mode according to each player.

The fluctuation period storage area 223ib is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode of the final fluctuation effect executed in the final fluctuation in the time saving state (time saving final fluctuation). In the variable period storage area 223 ib, the waiting period (0th period), the first period, the second period, and the third period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state, and after the end of the time saving state (setting of the normal state) (1) Special period 2 fluctuation (first special period 2 fluctuation after the normal state is set) associated with the special period 2 fluctuation (special period 2 fluctuation based on the special period 2 suspension acquired during the time saving state) Period), regular 2 periods (second special map 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), regular 3 periods (third special map 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), regular 4 periods (normal A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the fourth special figure 2 fluctuation period after the state is set.

Then, information indicating the effect mode of the final variation effect set in the time saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 of FIG. 419) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 of FIG. 419), and the final variation effect update process. (See C4566 in FIG. 420) When it is determined to be the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes in FIG. 420), when it is determined to be the set presentation mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period (C4866: Yes in FIG. 420), the set effect mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 420). Although illustration is omitted, when the final variation effect is finished, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, in the case of using a configuration in which the production mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing to start the period effect, predetermined timing during execution of the period effect), the period effect By providing a storage area for storing the set effect mode each time the effect mode is set, it is possible to set a later effect mode based on the contents of the effect mode set previously. Become. Therefore, in the case of performing the one-period effect using the effect modes set at a plurality of timings, it is possible to set an effect mode without a sense of discomfort.

The production variable flag 223ic is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the production mode is not set as the production mode of the final variation production executed in the final variation in the time saving state (time reduction final variation). Therefore, it is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the time saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419), the effect mode of the final variation effect is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 419), and the effect mode is not set in an unset period. When it is determined that there is (C4366: Yes in FIG. 419), it is set to ON (see C4367 in FIG. 419).

Then, in the final variation effect update processing 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is the timing when the standby period ends (C4863: Yes in FIG. 420) and the timing when the first period ends (C4866: Yes in FIG. 420). That is, when it is determined that it is time to set the effect mode of the final variation effect, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420), and when it is determined that it is set to ON. , A new effect mode is set for an unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420). Then, after the effect mode is set for the unset period, it is turned off (see C4871 in FIG. 420).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, the content of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 416 to 420. In the present control example, in comparison with the fifth control example described above, the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) is replaced with the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 416), and the winning information command process 5 (see FIG. 361). Instead of executing the winning information command process 9 (see FIG. 417), performing the final winning process (see FIG. 418), and shortening the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372). The difference is that the production effect setting process 9 (see FIG. 419) is executed and the final variation effect update process 9 (see FIG. 420) is executed instead of the final variation effect update process (see FIG. 377). And otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, regarding the point that the content of the data table to be referred to has been changed and the various processing content that is changed in response to the change of the content of the data table to be referred to, only numerical values have been changed. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the command determination processing 9 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. 416. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) executed in the present ninth control example.

When the command determination processing 9 (C3163) is executed, the same processing of C3201 to C3209 as the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then the special 2 hold number (special FIG. 2). It is determined whether the number of reservations) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c is “4” which is the upper limit value.

In the process of C3261, when it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is the upper limit (C3261: Yes), the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON (C3262), and then the present process ends. When it is determined that the number of special 2 holds (the number of special figure 2 holds) to be performed is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3262 is not executed and the present process is ended.

Further, after executing the same processing of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above, this processing is ended.

Next, the contents of the winning information command processing 9 (C3262) will be described with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 9 (C3262) executed in the present ninth control example. In this prize information command process 9 (C3262), the contents of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is set to ON in the prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361) described above. The difference is that I changed.

When the prize information command process 9 (C3262) is executed, the same processes of C3401 to C3402 as the prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and then the process of C3403 is executed. If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON in the process of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the final winning process is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to C3406. Details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 418.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped, and the process proceeds to C3406. After that, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the present ninth control example. In the final winning process (C3461), a ball is won in the second winning port 640 while the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state is being executed, and a new special figure 2 hold (prize information) is given. A process for setting the effect mode when the winning information command indicating that the player has won is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a winning information command indicating that a ball has won the second winning opening 640 (whether there is a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), if it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 is not received (not the special figure 2 winning) (C5501: No), this processing is ended as it is. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 is received (the special figure 2 winning) (C5501: Yes), then the effect variable flag 223ic is turned on. It is determined (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is ON (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C5502: No), the process of C5503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information in the variable period storage area 223ib is read (C5504), and then it is determined whether or not the acquisition performance is currently being performed (C5505). When it is determined that the acquisition effect is currently being performed (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating hold acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this processing ends. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the acquisition effect is not currently in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating hold acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process ends.

As described above, in the present control example, the final variation effect can be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state, and a new special figure 2 hold is made as a part of the final variation effect. It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 327(b)) for causing the player to acquire. Then, when the new special figure 2 hold is acquired (timing information command showing special figure 2 winning) is being executed, the exclusive effect is executed. .. With such a configuration, the contents of the effect being executed and the actual game situation can be related to each other, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

In this control example, it is determined that the special figure 2 hold is acquired based on the effect contents being executed at the timing when the new special figure 2 hold is obtained (the timing when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received). Although the configuration shown is different, a configuration other than this may be used, for example, the timing of acquiring a new special figure 2 hold and the remaining period of the time saving state (the remaining variation time of the hour saving final variation). ) And the effect mode may be set based on In this case, for example, a winning determination unit that indicates that a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize has been received, and a remaining time determination that determines the remaining time in the time saving state at the time of receiving the prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize. And a means for deciding that the winning determination means has received the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize (there is a special figure 2 prize), that is, the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the special figure 2 hold. When the remaining period that can be easily acquired is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the special map 2 hold number is increased by the special figure 2 winning. ) Is displayed, and when it is less than the predetermined period, in addition to the display mode (for example, a comment of “plus 1”) indicating that the number of special figure 2 reservations has increased due to winning of special figure 2 It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of special figure 2 reservations has increased in a state where there is a small remaining period that can be easily acquired.

With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to determine whether or not the timing at which the new special figure 2 suspension is obtained is a timing with a margin, and thus it can be used as a reference for future games. You can Further, in this case, it is preferable that the player is not notified of the remaining period in the time saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily obtained. As a result, the player will determine the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, and thus the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired. Aspect can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired may be configured to be different depending on the number of the special figure 2 hold. For example, the number of the acquired special figure 2 hold is predetermined. When the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received in a state of less than or equal to a number (for example, “2” or less), the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the remaining period during which the special figure 2 hold can be easily acquired is predetermined. If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figure 2 reservations is increased by the special figure 2 winning, special figure 2 reservation is held. May be configured to be displayed in a display mode (for example, a comment “may be harsh”) that indicates that it is difficult to set the maximum number to the upper limit.

As a method for determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special map fluctuation in the time saving state ends) is set as the remaining period of the time saving state. Alternatively, it may be configured to set the period until the last game per universal figure executed in the time saving state as the remaining period of the time saving state.

In other words, in the present control example, the time saving state ends when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates once or five times) during the time saving state. It is configured to do. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the remaining period until the time-saving state ends based on the number of times of variation and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, a variation time of 2 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the ball is easy to win in the second winning opening 640. It is structured to make it easier to win. In addition, the normal symbol is configured so that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the per-universal game is executed. If the time saving state is set when the ordinary symbol lottery (universal symbol lottery) is executed, the ordinary symbol lottery and ordinary symbol fluctuation time are set as the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol per game is played. If the time saving state is set when is executed, it is configured such that the game is executed per universal figure as a high probability state of a normal symbol. Therefore, even if you win the per-universal figure by the general-universal drawing lottery that was executed during the time saving state, if the normal state is set at the time when the per-universal-university-play game based on the general-universal-university is executed, As a low probability state of the symbol, the game is executed per ordinary figure.

In this control example configured in this way, before the end of the last special figure fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) executed during the time saving state, depending on the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation timing of the normal symbol In some cases, the state in which the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640 may end. In this case, if the period until the last special figure change (special figure 2 change) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second winning award will be given within the remaining period. The mouth 640 includes a period in which the ball is not in a state where it is easy to win a prize, which causes a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state, it is determined the period until the state in which the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640 ends, that is, the period during which the game can be executed per universal figure during the time saving state. It is better to configure With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the period that is advantageous to the player (the period in which it is easy to set the state in which the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of performing an effect for informing the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the informed content can be improved. In addition, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set, a period advantageous to the player (a ball at the second winning opening 640 is displayed). When the period in which the easy winning state is easily set) continues, it may be configured to determine until the end of the period as the remaining period of the time saving state. In other words, when the Uzu per game (Uzu long open per game) executed during the time saving state is executed across both the time saving state and the normal state, the per Uzu game (Uzu long opening per The period until the end of the (game) is preferably determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous for the player (a period in which a state in which a ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 is easily set), and therefore, an effect of informing the remaining period in the time saving state is provided. When executing, the accuracy of the notification content can be further improved.

Next, the contents of the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) executed in the present ninth control example. This time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is an effect mode in the case where a special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change, with respect to the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the process for setting is changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is executed, the same C4301 and C4302 processes as the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and then in the process of C4302. When it is determined that the current special map fluctuation is the time-shortening final fluctuation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the current special map 2 fluctuation (time-shortening final fluctuation) is a hit fluctuation (C4361). When it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is a winning fluctuation (C4361: Yes), the effect mode is set by referring to the final table for hit 222 aia included in the final fluctuation effect table 222ia (C4362). ), and proceeds to the processing of C4365. Further, in the process of C4301, when it is determined that the current special figure fluctuation is not the special figure 2 fluctuation (C4301: No), or in the process of C4302, the current special figure fluctuation is not the final fluctuation in the time saving state. When it is determined (C4302: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current special map 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is not a hit fluctuation (is a deviation fluctuation) (C4361: No), the winning information (second prize) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The winning information relating to the special symbol (special figure 2) is read (C4363), the production mode is set up by referring to the final table 222ia2 for deviation which the final variation production table 222ia has (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the effect contents (effect modes) set by the process of C4362 and the process of C4364 described above are stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223ib (C4365), and then there is an effect unset period. Is determined (C4366). When it is determined that there is an effect-unset period (C4366: Yes), the effect variable flag 223ic is set to ON (C4367), and then this processing ends. If it is determined that there is no production-unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4367 is skipped, and this process is directly terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 420, the contents of the final variation effect update processing 9 (C4566) will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) executed in the present ninth control example. In the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566), the final variation executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state updated in the process of C4501 of the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) in the fifth control example. The elapsed time of the effect (the elapsed time of the change in Toku-zu 2) is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

When the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) is executed, first, the information in the variation period storage area 223ib is read out (C4861), and the information in the readout variation period storage area 223ib (set effect period) and the special figure Based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223eg (value indicating the fluctuation time of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2), the current performance status is extracted (C4862), and then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the standby period end timing. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (C4863) (C4863: Yes), it is then determined whether the effect variable flag 223ic is on (C4864). If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is on (C4864: Yes), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the result of the change judgment (C4865), and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C4864: No), the process of C4865 is skipped, and this process is directly terminated.

In the process of C4863, if it is determined that the present is not the standby period end timing (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the present is the first period end timing (C4866) and the first period end timing is determined. If it is determined that there is (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect variable flag 223ic is on (C4867). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is turned on (C4867: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia is greater than 0 (C4868). When it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223ia is larger than 0 (C4868: Yes), the effect period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223ib (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. In the processing of C4868, when it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is 0 (C4868: No), the processing of C4869 is skipped and the processing proceeds to C4870.

In the process of C4870, the production mode of the final production period is set (C4870), the production variable flag 223ic is set to OFF (C4871), and the process proceeds to C4872. Also, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is cleared (C4872), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4866, when it is determined that the current time is not the first period end timing (C4866: No), it is then determined whether the current time is the second period end timing (C4873). When it is determined that it is the second period end timing (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold is acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new special 2 hold is acquired. If yes (C4874: Yes), the re-reading flag 223em is set to ON (C4875), and this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the processing executed in C4874 will be described. In the winning information storage area 223a, a storage area corresponding to each symbol suspension is formed, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol Storage area for 1), storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and storage area for ordinary symbols (general symbols), the number corresponding to the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol (4) Has been formed. Then, each storage area indicates the pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110, and whether or not the pre-reading result is referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. And information is stored.

In other words, in the processing of C4874, whether or not a new special 2 hold other than the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) referred to by the process of C4806 or C4814 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a is stored in each storage area. It is determined based on the presence or absence of stored referenced information, and pre-read information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (special 2 suspension) of the winning information storage area 223a When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-reading flag 223em to ON in the process of C4875, the special figure 2 is again held as the variation effect corresponding to the special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the time saving). The variation effect based on the pre-reading result is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4874, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4874: No), all currently acquired special figure 2 hold are prefetched, and the second effect is performed based on the prefetch result. Since this is the case where the time saving final fluctuation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving fluctuation effect is set as it is (C4876), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4873, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: No), next, the display command corresponding to the other update content is set (C4877), and the present process is terminated. In the process of C4877, the effect mode is set based on the elapsed period of the final fluctuation effect, the remaining period display mode is updated to indicate the remaining period of the final fluctuation, and the elapsed period display mode is indicated to indicate the elapsed period of the final fluctuation. Update settings, operation display mode settings performed based on the player operating the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change, and the like.

As described above, the ninth control example is configured to set the presentation mode of the final fluctuation effect when setting the final fluctuation effect (at the start of the time saving final fluctuation), and the final fluctuation. The lottery results (pre-reading results) targeted for production are limited to the lottery results for the relevant fluctuations and the pre-reading results for the special map 2 that have been acquired at the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the time-saving final fluctuation) The difference is that they are doing.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the final variation effect that is executed in accordance with the acquisition status of the special figure 2 suspension at the time when the time-saving final variation is executed, so that the time-saving final variation is executed. It is possible to add variety to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before the game is stopped (during a time saving state). Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as in the present control example, in the case of changing the effect mode of the final change effect executed in accordance with the acquisition status of the special figure 2 suspension at the time when the time saving final change is executed, the time saving final change is executed. It is advisable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the special figure 2 hold number acquired at a certain point is a specific number (for example, 3 which is the upper limit number). With this configuration, the player is motivated to play the game so that the special figure 2 holding number becomes a specific number (for example, 3 which is the upper limit number) when the time saving final variation is executed. You can

Although the ninth control example is configured to start the above-described final fluctuation effect from the timing at which the final fluctuation in the time saving state is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period in the time saving state is the predetermined period. If, for example, the number of remaining shortening times is two, the final variation effect may be executed. In the ninth control example, a configuration is described in which the final variation effect is executed by using a period for one special figure change in the time saving state and a period for several special figure changes in the normal state. As the status of increase/decrease in the number of special map 2 held while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the number of special map 2 held increases until the special figure fluctuation in the time saving state ends, and From the start of the figure fluctuation, I explained only the pattern that the special figure 2 hold number decreases, but as another pattern, for example, the time saving during the execution of the game in the general map long opening executed during the time saving state. After the state is finished (the final fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) in the time saving state is stopped) and the special figure fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) in the normal state is started, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640. There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the lottery situation of the normal symbol (the result of the ordinary figure lottery being executed, the result of the ordinary figure lottery, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the stored game stored) It is configured to be able to discriminate the figure information (winning result, winning game type), and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination is made. It may be configured to change the presentation mode of the final variation production based on the result. For example, when it is determined that the ball can be won (easy to win) in the second winning port 640 after the transition to the normal state. Is a production mode in which it is easy to reflect the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery based on the winning in the second winning port 640 after the transition to the normal state and the variation period (a still image that easily extends the production period is used. It may be configured to set an existing effect mode or an effect mode in which the effect result can be suddenly changed.

In addition, when the final variation effect is executed using a plurality of special figure 2 variation periods in the time saving state, the remaining short time count when executing the final variation effect (the number of remaining special figure 2 variations that can be executed during the time saving state ) Is determined, the maximum number of special figure 2 variation times that can be executed during the final variation effect is calculated based on the determination result, and the effect mode based on the calculation result may be set. .. In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation effect may be smaller than the calculated maximum number but may decrease (for example, the game is stopped during the final fluctuation effect). (If the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the effect mode based on the above-described calculation result, it is preferable to set the effect mode in which the effect does not deteriorate even if the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 suddenly decreases.

Furthermore, when the special figure 1 variation is executed in a state where the final figure production is being executed for the special figure 2 variation, the final variation production is continued for the variation period of the special figure 1 variation. The final variation effect may be temporarily interrupted, and the effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation may be executed during the interruption period.

<Tenth control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. In the fifth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, a game in which the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state (left-handed game) ) Is configured to be able to execute a general drawing lottery, and a suggestive production (a series of productions) that suggests that a specific win (per a general public long opening) has been won in the public drawing lottery executed during the normal state is executed. Was configured to do.

Then, a guide display mode (right striking display) is displayed for the player to win a ball at the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area in accordance with the execution timing of the game per universal long opening. It is configured such that the player can easily put a ball into the second winning opening 640 during the game when the game is being performed. Furthermore, while the player is playing an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game in a normal state), when the player wins the universal figure long opening, the above-described suggestive effect and guidance display mode are displayed. Instead, the player is configured to make it difficult for the player to win the ball at the second winning opening 640 during the game due to the long opening of the universal figure.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, the ball shot by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left-hand side game area) is also on the right while the game is being played by the universal figure lottery by the universal figure lottery. At the position where the ball shot by the striking game (the ball flowing down the right side game area) can also win the prize, the electric prize 1640a that is opened during the game and the second winning hole 1640 are arranged. Are different.

Furthermore, the ratio of the balls that reach the electric role object 1640a among the balls that are launched by the left-handed game and the ratio of the balls that reach the electric role object 1640a among the balls that are launched by the right-handed game are made different, and the right The hitting game is configured so that the balls reach the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate than the left hitting game.

In addition, in the 10th control example, in some cases where the winnings are made per the universal figure long opening during the normal state, the fact that the universal figure long opening is won is executed rather than the universal figure long opening per game is executed. Information that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the change in the winning figure, or during the period after the winning information of the winning winning ordinary pattern (general drawing) is acquired) It is configured to execute the performance.

With such a configuration, in the case where the universal figure long opening is won, the ease of winning the ball to the second winning port 640 can be changed depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be made interested in the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second winning opening 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball shot by the left-handed game can also win, even if the notification effect is not executed, the ball is won in the second winning opening 1640. It becomes possible. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an extremely disadvantageous game.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine of the 10th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 421 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. In the tenth control example, the positions of the components disposed in the right game area are different from those in the fifth control example described above, and specifically, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a, and the The positions of the two winning holes 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 421, in the game board 13 of the 10th control example, a second winning opening 1640 accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a left-handed game is performed by a left-handed game. Both the ball that has flowed down the area and the ball that has flowed down the right-side game area by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 1640.

Specifically, the restriction member (nails) is provided in a region between the first winning opening 64 and the left end side (left side in front view of FIG. 421) of the opened electric role object 1640a (shown in black in FIG. 421). Are planted to make it difficult for a sphere to pass through the area. As a result, among the balls that have flowed down the left-side game area, only the balls that have been guided by the nails implanted in the game board 13 and have passed the area above the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. Composed. In the tenth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the ratio of the balls reaching the second winning opening 1640 is about 10% among the balls flowing down the left game area.

On the other hand, the ball that is launched by the right-handed game and flows down the right-side game area is a ball flow formed on the upper surface of the V prize door 650b which is in the closed state and the prize door 65b which is in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that it flows down the road and almost all (about 100%) thereof reaches the second winning opening 1640.

With such a configuration, during the game per universal figure long opening, that is, in the state where the ball can win the second winning opening 1640, the ball flowing down the right side game area is lower than the ball flowing down the left side game area. This makes it easier to win the second winning opening 1640. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to perform the left-handed game or the right-handed game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 421, in the present control example, in the normal state, a ball flowing down the right-side game area is a prize hole that can win a prize (a prize hole that can give a privilege (prize ball) to a player). Balls flowing down the left side game area are configured so that there are more winning openings (winning openings capable of giving a privilege (prize ball, lottery) to a player). Specifically, the ball flowing down the right side game area can win (pass) through the through gate 67 or the second winning opening 1640, while the ball flowing down the left side game area is through gate 67. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 1640, and the general winning opening 63 are configured to be able to win (pass).

With such a configuration, in the normal state, except for a period in which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 1640 (game period per universal figure long opening), a right-handed game in which the ball is shot toward the right-side game area Also, the left-handed game in which the ball is shot toward the left-hand side game area is a more advantageous game method for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously performing the right-handed game in the normal state, and allow the player to perform the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting when to perform the right-handed game during the normal state.

Further, in the tenth control example, the time required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the second prize for the ball fired by the right-handed game. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right hitting time). Specifically, the left hitting time is about 4 seconds, while the right hitting time is about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, a ball fired by the left-handed game and a ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, 1 second after the left-handed game executed before). It is possible to reach the second winning opening 1640 at the same timing with the ball shot by the right-handed game executed).

Therefore, in the case where the universal figure long opening per game is executed, depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 1640 during the universal figure long open-per game is achieved. Since the easiness of playing the game can be made different, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Further, although a detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the winning game period of the universal figure long opening per game is 3 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1.5 as in the fifth control example described above. Seconds, open period 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the right-handed game is executed after the game is executed per universal figure long opening, it is difficult for the ball shot by the right-handed game to enter the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640. It is configured so that the game may have ended per universal figure long opening when the ball reaches.

As a result, the ball is not fired until the game is executed per universal figure long opening, and the bonus is given to the player who plays the ball to the right after the game is started per universal figure long opening (second prize hole). Since it is possible to make it difficult to give the privilege (prize ball, special drawing 2 lottery) given by winning the ball to 1640, it is possible to continuously shoot the ball to the player. The operation can be improved.

As described above, in the tenth control example, even if the hit game period of the universal figure long open per game is set to 3 seconds and the right-handed game is executed after the universal figure long open per game is started, The ball is configured so that it is difficult to win the second winning opening 1640, but not limited to this, the hit game period of the game is long hit per right, the right hitting time (the ball shot in the right hitting game) May be configured to be longer than the time required to reach the second winning opening 1640) (for example, 5 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1 second, opening period 3 seconds)). As a result, it is possible for the player to play the game during the game with the long opening of the universal figure at ease.

<Regarding effect contents in 10th control example>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect executed in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 422. In the tenth control example using the configuration of the game board 13 described with reference to FIG. 421, it is easy to cause the ball to win the second winning opening 1640 while the game is being executed per universal figure long opening. Therefore, a guide notification (for example, right-handed notification) for guiding the game method to the player can be executed, and the player can easily identify the game method as a notification mode of the guide notification. The first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode in which it is more difficult for the player to identify the game method than the first guidance notification mode are settable.

With such a configuration, depending on whether the notification mode of the executed guide notification is the first guide notification mode or the second guide notification mode, the ball is the second winning opening during the game in the normal figure long opening. It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to make a prize in 1640 and a state in which it is difficult to make a prize.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode that is set as a part of the special map variation effect executed in response to the special figure fluctuation, and during the general figure fluctuation that is won per long general figure opening, This is set when the special figure fluctuation is executed in a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern described above is being executed, the player is displayed using a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm). A guidance display mode (for example, a "right hit" comment) for guiding the game method is displayed (see FIG. 320(b)).

Further, in the 10th control example, before the game is executed per universal figure long opening (for example, during the universal figure fluctuation period when winning per universal figure long opening, the general figure variation is finished and normal). During the period when the symbol is stopped (fixed display), or until the prize information command for winning the regular figure long opening is received as the prize information command for the ordinary symbol until the game is executed per universal figure long opening During the period), the first guidance notification mode can be displayed. With such a configuration, even if a game is executed according to the display content of the first guidance notification mode (for example, "right hit") after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed, The ball can easily reach the second winning opening 1640 which is in an open state in which the ball easily wins due to the game.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game is executed per universal figure long opening, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode described above. It is something. Specifically, at the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a guidance display mode for guiding the game method smaller than the first guidance notification mode displayed in the small display area Dm4 (for example, "right hitting"). Is displayed).

As described above, in the tenth control example, since the game board 13 is formed so that the period required for the ball shot by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 is about 3 seconds, When the game method (for example, right-handed game) according to the notification content is performed after recognizing the notification content of the second guidance notification mode, depending on the flow-down situation of the ball, the ball is set to the first ball during the game in the normal figure long opening. The state where it cannot reach the 2 winning a prize mouth 1640 occurs.

Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the winning per the long opening of the universal figure in the state where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. In the tenth control example, in the state where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, when the winning combination of the universal figure long opening is won, the universal figure long opening per game is executed based on the winning. The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed at the time when the game is executed per universal figure long opening. With such a configuration, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the game of the universal figure long opening is actually executed, the game of the universal figure long opening is being executed. The player can be notified in the second guidance notification mode.

In the tenth control example, the fact that the special symbol fluctuation is executed in the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode. Without being limited, for example, it may be set as a notification condition that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, or the transition status of the game state, Specifically, it may be set as the notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

Further, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition satisfaction flag) is provided, the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON when the notification condition is satisfied, and during the period when the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON. Is configured to display the above-described first guidance notification mode and second guidance notification mode, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF. Is also good. In this case, it is preferable to set a notification end condition for setting the notification condition satisfaction flag that is set to on to off, and to set the notification condition satisfaction flag to off when the notification end condition is satisfied. ..

Specifically, a predetermined period (the number of changes in the special figure reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes))) after the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON. The notification end condition may be set to be satisfied when the time has elapsed, or a lottery to be executed when a predetermined execution timing (for example, execution of special drawing lottery, winning of a ball to each winning opening) is established. It may be configured such that the notification end condition is satisfied when is a predetermined lottery result.

Further, a plurality of types (for example, a long-use universal figure A and a long-use universal figure B) are provided for each universal figure long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type of the selected universal figure long opening. By making them different, it may be possible to set a general figure long opening hit that is likely to display the first guidance notification mode and a general figure long opening hit that is difficult to be displayed.

Further, the notification condition may be varied based on the game situation of the player. For example, the elapsed period (number of special figure changes, elapsed time) from the previous big hit game (small hit game) satisfies a predetermined condition. In the case (for example, when the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches the number corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), it may be configured to always display the first guidance notification mode when winning the long opening of the universal figure. ..

In addition, the player plays an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when the normal state is set (a predetermined period after the game state in which the right-handed game is performed (time saving state) to the normal state) )) is performed, a caution display for modifying the game method for the player (for example, "left-handed" in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is displayed. If it is determined that the inappropriate game is being continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed), the notification condition may not be established.

The technique for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above is not limited to the tenth control example and is applied to each of the above-described embodiments and each control example. Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 unless the right-handed game is executed, as in the fifth control example described above. You may apply. In this case, the privilege given to the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the player is motivated to play the game for satisfying the notification condition. It can be done.

Further, an informing means for informing the player of the game method for establishing the informing condition may be provided, for example, in order to establish the informing condition in the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to display necessary necessary information (for example, issue super reach). Further, it may be configured to share the presence or absence of the display of the necessary information also as suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, when the game is executed according to the display content displayed as the necessary information, whether the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, or the special symbol lottery result is Since it is possible to inform the player whether or not a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating a jackpot win) has been reached, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, it is possible to provide an informing means capable of informing the player that the present state is in which the first guidance informing mode can be informed (state in which the informing condition is satisfied). This allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the tenth control example, as the guidance notification mode that suggests that the game is executed per universal figure long opening, the first guidance notification mode, and the player determines the notification content from the first guidance notification mode. Although it is configured such that it is possible to set the second guidance notification mode that is difficult to perform, in a state where the first guidance notification mode can be reported, a further special execution condition (for example, a special operation to the operation means (frame button 22)) is performed. If a condition that is satisfied when is performed) is satisfied, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode that notifies the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and is guided in the guidance notification mode. By executing the game method according to the content of the notification at different timing, it is possible to perform the game in which the advantageous privilege is easily given to the player. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example is configured so that both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 1640. It takes about 4 seconds for the ball shot by the left-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640, and the time required for the ball shot by the right-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640. Is about 3 seconds. By operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be fired per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from left-handed game to right-handed game in accordance with the execution timing of the game per universal figure long opening, the ball launched by the left-handed game and the ball launched by the right-handed game And are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640 at substantially the same timing. The special guidance notification mode described above is based on the timing at which the game is executed per universal figure long opening, based on the game method being executed for the player (for example, left-handed game), according to the notification content (for example, left-handed game). , A right-handed game), or a timing at which a plurality of balls can arrive at the second winning port 640 at approximately the same time as the timing of changing the ball to the right-handed game) or the timing of launching the ball of the playing method (eg, left-handed game). The notification mode for notifying the user is set.

With such a configuration, the player is willing to play the game so that a more advantageous guidance notification mode is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is established, the above-described special guidance notification mode can be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guidance notification mode is not limited thereto. Even if the notification condition is not satisfied, the special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode may be satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification. It may be configured such that the case where the notification condition of the mode is satisfied is more easily satisfied than the case where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

Further, as a notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes, a plurality of conditions are set in advance, and when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the conditions are satisfied, the corresponding guidance notification mode May be configured to be set. Furthermore, the ease of establishment of the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be different. Each time a person performs a specific operation on the operation means, the notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes are variably set so that the notification conditions (execution conditions) are easily established. It may be configured to. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the universal figure per game that the ball can be won in the second winning port 1640 is executed (the universal figure long open per game) is executed. It is configured to execute a guide notification (for example, a right-handed notification) for notifying the player during execution of the figure change which is the lottery result to be executed, and the game per figure is started. At the time before (before the universal figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to be changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the universal figure per game is started. It is configured such that the game ball that is shot by the right-handed game before the game is awarded to the second winning opening 1640 during the game of the regular figure long opening, but not limited to this, for example, the regular figure long A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the opening game, and the above-mentioned guidance notification (for example, right-handing notification) is set to the opening period of the game per universal figure long opening (after the universal game is started. It may be configured to be executed during the period until the electric accessory 1640a is opened.

With such a configuration, since the guidance notification (right-handed notification) can be executed after the universal figure variation for winning is stopped (fixed display), the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is not executed per universal figure. Also in this case, similarly to the tenth control example, it is determined whether the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, and the first guidance notification mode is set only when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied. It may be configured to execute the guide notification. In addition, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the effect for showing the lottery result of the universal figure lottery by using the universal figure variation period and the opening period of the universal figure game It is preferable to display the display mode indicating that the winning has been won per the universal figure as the effect result at the timing of ending the opening period of the game per universal figure (the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is notified that the winning combination has been won per universal figure at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed as the universal figure game. For this reason, even if the player who has identified that he/she has won the prize due to the notification performs the right-handed game, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the ball shot by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640. In the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the winning combination is won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as the playing game for the drawing figure. Although an example of notifying that is shown, without being limited to this, when the remaining period of the opening period of the game per game is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) You may comprise so that it may notify that it won. That is, even if the player who recognizes that he/she has won the prize hits the right hit game, the timing when it becomes difficult to win a ball at the second winning hole 1640 during the hit game, for example, by the right hit game The game ends per universal figure after notifying that the ball has been won per universal figure rather than the period required for the shot ball to reach the second winning slot 1640 (the ball can be entered into the second special aperture 1640 It is preferable that the period until the period ends) be shortened.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game is executed per universal figure In the variation production corresponding to the special figure 1 variation in the period, the production that suggests that you win per universal figure is executed, and the production in which the first guide notification mode is set is executed during the opening period of the game per universal figure. The player may be informed of the timing at which the right-handed game is to be performed by fusing the effect mode of the change effect of the special figure change with the effect mode of the opening effect of the per-university game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is executed by the special drawing effect executed based on the special drawing fluctuation, and the general drawing lottery is performed by the general drawing effect executed based on the general drawing fluctuation. By executing the second notification for indicating the lottery result, and further executing the first notification and the second notification in association with each other (execution continuously or execution overlapping), It may be configured to execute the third notification for indicating the right hit timing for the player to perform the right hit game with respect to the winning game.

Also, the length of the opening period to be set is changed according to the type of the universal figure game to be executed, and the universal figure game is set to have a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more as the opening period. , The opening time period is set to be less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) as a universal game per game, and the ease of winning a ball to the second winning port 640 is different during the universal game. Also, when the type of the set guide notification mode (first guide notification mode) and the type of the game per universal figure to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, rather than when the combination condition is not satisfied. Alternatively, a guide notification for facilitating the winning of the ball in the second winning opening 640 may be executed during the game. Thereby, depending on the type of the game to be executed, the type of the guide notification mode to be set, and the presence/absence of the notification condition of the first guide notification mode, different benefits for the player (to the second winning opening 640) Easiness of winning the ball) can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the sixth control example, the method of setting the guide notification mode for facilitating the winning of the ball in the second winning hole 640 during the game is explained, but a specific hit game (for example, game per hit) Based on that is executed, a game that shoots a ball with one launch strength (for example, a left-handed game), a game that shoots a ball with a predetermined launch strength different from one launch strength (for example, a right-handed game). It should be something that makes it easier to win a ball to a specific winning opening (for example, the second winning opening 640) by changing it to (game), for example, a small hit by a special drawing lottery executed during a left-handed game. As a small hit game that is executed when the player wins, a ball launched by a right-handed game is placed in a position where the ball can be won (for example, the right side game area). If it is a configuration provided with 650a), it may be configured to set the guide notification mode of the same idea as this control example, using the special figure variation period and the opening period of the small hit game.

<Regarding Modification of Seventh Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 423 and 424. FIG. 423 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh control example. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification example is different from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the configuration of the right game area is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 423, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced in the flow passage of the first flow passage 701 (the time required for the sphere to pass through the first flow passage 701 is delayed. The delay members 701y and 701z are provided so that the time required for a sphere to pass through the first flow path 701 (sphere transit time) is about 4 seconds. The operation gate 670 is provided at the lower end of the first flow path 701.

Here, the operation gate 670 will be described. In each of the control examples described above, when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, after the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) for a predetermined time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a display mode showing the jackpot winning. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed. On the other hand, in this modified example, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode showing the big hit, the big hit game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed the operation gate 670. Is configured. That is, the operation gate 670 is used as an executing means for executing the jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning).

With such a configuration, not only the special symbol lottery result but also the player can actually execute the jackpot game by firing the ball toward the predetermined area (the operation gate 670). It is possible to motivate the player to play a game. The operation gate 670 used in this modification is one of the execution conditions for executing the jackpot game only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot with respect to the start gate 720a of the above-described A4 embodiment. It is different only in that it is used as (start gate 720a is provided as an execution condition in both the small hit game and the big hit game), and the other configurations (gate structure and main controller 110) Since the processing contents (conditional device determination processing (see S250 in FIG. 311)) are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the present modified example is different from the above-described seventh control example in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. In addition, it is different in that the configuration of the second winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Since other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is configured such that the variation time of the special symbol selected and the variation time of the normal symbol are different from those of the pachinko machine of the seventh control example described above. Specifically, if you win the big hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in the normal state, or as a fluctuation pattern that can be selected when you win the small hit, the special special character with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds 1 variation pattern is selectable, and as a variation pattern that can be selected when the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is selected in the normal state, the special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected. It is made selectable, and a special universal pattern variation pattern having a variation time of 50 seconds is configured to be selectable as a universal pattern variation pattern that can be selected when a long symbol is won per ordinary symbol.

Then, as the end condition of the small hit game, the first end condition that is satisfied when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period during which the V winning opening 650a is opened in the small hit game is 1.5 seconds. And a second termination condition that is satisfied when the above condition is reached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example configured as described above, when the special figure fluctuation in which the special special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or the general figure fluctuation in which the special figure general figure fluctuation pattern is set is displayed. When the game is stopped and displayed, a guidance notification (see FIG. 320(b)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game as a game method is executed.

Here, when the guidance notification (right-handed notification) executed is based on the jackpot winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and passes through the operation gate 670, thereby making a big hit. The game starts. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the operation gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

If the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the small hit, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and wins the V winning opening 650a. The jackpot game is started. As described above, it takes about 4 seconds for the ball shot by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650a, and the small hitting game ends when one ball wins during the small hitting game. Also, when a ball wins the V winning opening 650a, the winning ball is configured to pass through the V gate (V area) without fail, and therefore, about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. The jackpot game will be started.

Furthermore, when the guidance notification (right-handed notification) executed is based on the winning of the universal figure, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702 and passes through the second winning opening 640. When the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after a fluctuation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the ball that has passed through the second winning opening 640 reaches the V winning opening 650a in about 2 seconds, the special prize 2 lottery wins the small hit. In this case, the ball that has passed through the second winning opening 640 will win the V winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played.

In other words, in this modification, the same variation time is set when the big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and when the small hit is won, and the variation time has passed. When the guide notification (right hitting notification) for changing the game method is executed at the timing, the player can perform the right hitting game based on the guide notification to execute the jackpot game at the same timing. Is configured.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot game of this time was executed based on the jackpot winning or was executed through the jackpot winning. it can. Further, as in the control example described above, the jackpot game executed when the jackpot winning of the special symbol is won, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed through the jackpot winning, to the player. When the size of the privilege (number of prize balls in the big hit game, advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the big hit end) is different, what causes the big hit game to be executed? By making it difficult to understand, it is possible to perform a game while expecting the game state set during the big hit game or after the big hit game ends.

Furthermore, in the present modification, as described above, even when a specific hit (winning long hit for the universal figure) is won in the lottery for the normal symbol, the jackpot game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. It is configured so that the period until it is won is the same as when the special symbol big hit or small hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the timing of executing the jackpot game.

In addition, in this modification, the same variation time (50 seconds) is configured to be selected when the jackpot game can be executed by a lottery result (special figure lottery result, general figure lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to set a special variation effect using the same effect mode as an effect using the variation time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation effect being executed is the special variation effect based on the special figure variation or the special variation effect based on the general figure variation even while the special variation effect is being executed. be able to.

In the example described above, the case where the special variation effect is set for the special variation pattern in which the variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation time of 50 seconds or more, for example. Of the variation effects corresponding to the variation pattern to be set, the above-described special variation effect may be executed when the remaining variation time of the variation time becomes 50 seconds. Furthermore, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a special deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a result of the special variation effect, the right-handed game is guided after the variation time elapses. The effect pattern (failure effect) in which the notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided even when the special variation effect is executed, so that the player can pay attention to the content of the special variation effect. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each control example, a specific symbol is selected by a lottery for regular symbols (general figure long opening per symbol), guidance information for guiding the right-handed game is executed, and the ball is second prized by the right-handed game. When the special figure 1 variation is being executed when the winning (passing) is performed in the mouth 640, the special figure 2 variation is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure 1 variation being executed is finished. 2 A waiting period in which no fluctuation is executed is set. In this case, it is advisable to execute the failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed even though the guidance notification is executed. Further, in the case where the ball is won (passed) through the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is immediately executed, the above-mentioned failure effect is also obtained when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out. Should be configured to perform.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the same effect mode when the special figure 2 lottery is missed and when the waiting period of the special figure 2 lottery is set. Then, if the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the waiting period elapses is a small hit, a small hit is won from the above-described failure effect. It may be configured to execute an effect (revival effect) for switching to an effect mode indicating that it has been done. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that allows the player to hold expectations until the end.

The waiting period of the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted by using the various techniques used in each control example described above, and the various techniques used in each control example may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, in the case of performing a right-handed game based on the winning per universal figure, or in the case of performing a small hit game based on the small hit winning, as in each control example described above, the ball has a specific winning opening. There is a case where a prize is not passed (passed) to the (second prize hole 640, V prize hole 650a). Also in this case, the effect mode (for example, see FIG. 324(b)) described in the fifth control example may be displayed. Further, even when the jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery, a predetermined timing, for example, a timing at which a ball fired by a right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guide notification mode is displayed It may be configured to execute the pseudo-failure effect after about 1 second) or when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650a (about 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed).

In the above-described modified example, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the jackpot game with a plurality of triggers, the player is informed that the condition for executing the jackpot game is established (in this modified example, “right hit notification”). By making the period from when the jackpot game actually executed to the same regardless of the trigger until the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is executed in advance for the player. While notifying, because it is configured to make it difficult to understand at what occasion the big hit game is executed, which game mode of the big hit game is actually executed, or the game state after the big hit game ends As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment that makes the player predict which game state is set.

In addition, the notification mode for notifying that the condition capable of executing the jackpot game is satisfied is not limited to the configuration of this modified example, for example, the effect mode of the variation effect executed corresponding to each symbol variation, It may be set to an effect mode that indicates that a condition capable of executing the jackpot game is established, and the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is executed to when the jackpot game is actually executed is unified. If it is possible to do so, the notification timing and notification mode may be set appropriately.

Further, when using the opportunity to execute the big hit game through the small hit game, no matter which timing during the small hit game the ball wins the V winning opening 650a, it is predetermined after the small hit game is started. It is preferable that the jackpot game is executed after a certain amount of time has elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to further unify the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 which uses a configuration for setting the type of the jackpot game to be executed later (jackpot type) when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650a in which the balls can be won, and the balls winning the V winning opening 650a are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates) on the upstream side. A distribution movable member is provided, and the distribution movable member is configured to be movable according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game, so that the shake in the V winning opening 650a is started after the small hitting game is started. The sphere passes through a specific region (V gate) that differs depending on the time required for the sphere to reach the minute movable member. Then, by configuring so that the jackpot type in which a big opening game is set in which a different opening period is set when each particular area (V gate) is passed, each particular area (V gate) is set Even when using a configuration in which the jackpot game is executed based on the passage of, the timing when the specific winning opening 65 is opened in the jackpot game may be unified.

<Regarding examples of performance control when power is cut off in each control example>
Next, among various effects executed in each control example described above, a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variation game, general figure variation game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed in the main control device 110. The control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the case where the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the period effect (series effect, final fluctuation effect) that is executed over the period will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example, the control processing content (various information stored in the RAM 203) of the main control device 110 is the same even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. While the information is configured to be able to be temporarily held (backed up), the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted for the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 (various information stored in the RAM 223). It is configured to be erased in some cases.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the above-described period effect based on the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 (the power-off state. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted (when the power is restored), it becomes impossible to read what period of time the presentation was performed immediately before the power failure state. There was a problem that the period production could not be restarted.

Therefore, in the present correspondence example, it is configured to set the return command indicating the game situation at power recovery in the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 356) (set after C910 in FIG. 356), As the command at the time of returning, whether there is a special figure change, whether there is a general figure change, current game state, presence of big hit game, presence of small hit game, presence of right hit notification, remaining period until the game state shifts A command including each piece of information is set, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-described return command, the current state (at the time of power restoration) is a state in which a period effect can be executed (power interruption). A determination process (pre-power cut effect determination process) for determining whether or not the period effect may have been executed immediately before) is configured to be executable.

Then, in the pre-power interruption effect determination process, when it is determined that the current time period effect cannot be executed (for example, during the big hit game), the effect corresponding to the command output from the main control device 110 is executed. In the pre-power cut effect determination process, if it is determined that the current state is in a state in which the period effect can be executed, the period effect is restarted later based on the command output from the main control device 110. It is configured to set a preparation processing state and display a comment during production preparation indicating to the player that production may resume.

Then, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, the command including the small hit type information indicating the small hit prize (universal long open per game) in which a series of effects are executed as a hit related command from the main control device 110. When it is determined that the small hit game is output, the period effect is restarted from the start of the small hit game. With this configuration, the main controller 110 performs different game control (special figure variation game, general figure variation game, small hit game, big hit game) over a plurality of periods to be performed during the period effect. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of (series production, final variation production), it is possible to prevent the entire production of the period from being discarded.

Further, in the present correspondence example, even if the execution condition of the new effect (period effect) is satisfied while the preparation processing state is set, there is a limiting means for restricting the execution of the new effect (period effect). doing. That is, the restart process of the effect (period effect) that was executed before the power interruption is configured to be executed with priority over the process of newly executing the effect (period effect) after the power restoration. With this configuration, the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player can be prioritized and executed, so that the player can be provided with an effect that is not uncomfortable. .. In addition, when the production mode of the production (period production) that is being executed before the power interruption and the production mode of the production (period production) newly set irrespective of the production (period production) are combined, the game is played. It is possible to reliably prevent the production result that is advantageous to the person.

Further, in the state in which the preparation processing state is set, it is possible that the production (period production) may have been executed immediately before the power interruption each time various commands received from the main control device 110 are received. It is configured to repeatedly execute the determination process for determining whether or not there is, and based on the determination result, when it is determined that the production (period production) cannot be executed immediately before the power interruption, It is configured to delete the comment during the preparation for production, which indicates that the production (period production) may be resumed to the player, and execute the normal control processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

Furthermore, if the state in which the preparation processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main control unit 110 reaches 10 seconds after power restoration, 20 seconds), It is determined that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the disconnection cannot be restarted, and the player is not allowed to restart the effect (period effect) before the power interruption (for example, a display mode). , "Comment of "all effect contents before power failure has been invalidated"" is displayed, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

With this configuration, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, it is possible to notify the player that the effect could not be restarted. Before the power failure, a mission effect such as "A big hit if a reach of 3 occurs within 10 revolutions!" is executed, and after the power is restored, regardless of the effect contents that were being executed before the power failure, the "reach of 3" is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by executing "." Further, in order to solve the above-described problems, a predetermined period after power recovery (for example, a maximum period in which a mission effect can be set (the number of special figure changes is 30 times, etc.)) may overlap with the effect result in the mission effect. It may be configured such that the effect mode is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission for establishing any of specific reach modes (e.g., reach of "3", "5", "7") as a mission effect can be set, a predetermined value after power recovery is set. In the period, if the result of the special drawing lottery is out of the configuration, it is configured so that the above-mentioned specific reach mode is not set. It is better to configure so that it can be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the effect within the limited range even within the predetermined period after power restoration. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, since a specific reach mode can be set, a mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power interruption, Even if a "3 reach" happens to occur within a predetermined period after power recovery, the lottery result is a win, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the control examples described above, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery and a big hit game (symbol big hit game) When the small hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol and the opportunity (first opportunity) to be executed, the game ball is in a specific area during the small hit game (the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game (Fig. A gaming machine having two triggers, a trigger (second trigger) in which a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in 315). However, it is not limited to this, as a trigger for the bonus game (big hit game) that gives the player an advantage, the big hit game (symbol big hit game) is executed by winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery. The technique of each control example described above may be diverted to the gaming machine having only the opportunity (first opportunity) to be performed.

Further, in each control example described above, the normal state as a gaming state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) and time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), Although it is configured to be able to set, without being limited to this, it is possible to set a high probability state of the special symbol with a high winning probability of the special symbol after the jackpot game is finished, and the probability change state (high of the special symbol) Probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) or latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) may be settable.

Then, when a specific game state (latent probability state) is set as the game state, a specific special map lottery (special map 2 lottery) can be executed more easily than when other game states are set (special game lottery). Figure 2 Make it easier to win a ball to the starting port that triggers the execution of the lottery, or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently present the small hit game based on the small hit prize of the special figure 2 lottery The game to be played may be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play a game in which many prize balls can be obtained without winning the jackpot in the special drawing lottery, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fifth to tenth control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution triggers for executing the jackpot game is used, and specifically, the first special symbol. (Special figure 1) The first big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning the big hit by the lottery, and the small hit by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is executed based on the small win It has a second jackpot execution trigger that is triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 315) that is open to the small hitting game. In addition, as a special figure fluctuation execution opportunity for executing the special symbol lottery, the first special figure fluctuation execution opportunity triggered by winning the ball in the first winning opening 64, and passing the ball through the through gate 67. Draw a normal symbol (universal figure) by doing this, the ball to the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 315) that is opened by the per-university game that is executed when you win the ordinary figure lottery And a second special figure variation execution trigger triggered by winning the prize. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed through various game processes according to the establishment of each jackpot execution trigger and each special figure variation execution trigger. With such a configuration, the player can be made to perform the jackpot game through various game processes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-described fifth control example, from one game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (ball winning to the second winning opening 640 that triggers execution of special drawing 2 lottery), that one game When the transition condition to transition to another gaming state (normal state) where it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than the state is fulfilled, the acquisition guide notification for acquiring the specific lottery right during one gaming state is executed However, by making it easy to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another game state, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game until the end of one game state. However, it is not limited to this, for example, if during the jackpot game, if it is easier to obtain a specific lottery right than the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over, the winning guide notification during the jackpot game May be performed, and a specific lottery may be easily performed after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, the easiness of acquiring a specific lottery right may be changed by changing the easiness of winning a ball to a winning slot (starting winning slot) that is a specific lottery right. By making the length of the set period different, the ease of acquiring the specific lottery right during the gaming state may be made different.

Further, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right is made different between one gaming state and another gaming state, but the privilege given to the player It is only necessary that the contents of the game can be changed in different game states based on the privilege obtained during one game state with different degrees. For example, balls can be stored (retained) in a predetermined area of the game board 13. A storage member (storing member) is provided, and it is configured to make it easier to store the balls in the storage member when one game state is set than when the other game state is set. Then, in other gaming states, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with the balls stored in the storage member than to play the game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Is also good.

In each control example described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described as an example of various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode having the same purpose effect. All that is required is a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect for notifying the player by voice, and a player using various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies.

In addition, as various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, a notification effect that allows the player to surely understand the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly notifies the content are used. The suggestive effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described as an example of various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode having the same purpose effect. All that is required is a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect for notifying the player by voice, and a player using various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies.

In addition, as various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, a notification effect that allows the player to surely understand the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly notifies the content are used. The suggestive effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (big hit probability) (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, without being limited to this, for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of kinds of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is set. The main controller 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six setting values of 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value “1” is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value “6” is set. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol, may be configured to be different according to the set value, high probability of the special symbol Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be changed according to the set value.

Further, according to the setting value described above, not only the jackpot probability, for example, different selection ratio of each jackpot type, different probability of winning a small hit, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The varying time may be different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or a jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific setting value is set is provided, and a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed or not. The player may pay attention to determine the set value that is currently set.

Furthermore, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (a command for indicating a lottery result) or a command for indicating a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (a command for indicating a fluctuation time) When received, the currently set setting value may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect based on the discrimination result may be executed. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously performing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using the configuration that can set the above-mentioned set value, for each set value so that the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol can be changed according to the set value Various parameters may be specified, or a particular game state in which the special lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a particular set value is a special one when the predetermined set value is different from the particular set value. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is easy to be executed, or the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (bonus game content It is a concept including that the small hit game content and the game state set after the big hit game are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution ratio are unified according to the type of special drawing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state transition destination and transition distribution ratio are determined according to the game state. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game play, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, the probability change state is a specification that continues until a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery is executed to shift to a normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and the lottery It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability change state is shifted to the normal game state by winning. In this case, as a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous probability variation state, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that terminates the probability variation state, or the probability of a transition from the probability variation state to the normal game state is made different. You may choose to do so.

In addition, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, and among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the time saving is performed when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a certain number of times of change. If the end condition is satisfied, that is, if the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and if the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small prize is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, if the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, at a different timing, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to be able to be shifted to the low probability state.

Using this configuration, for example, when the variation number end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the winning number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is advisable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled so that the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hitting game.

As a result, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even when the time saving state ends based on the same special symbol fluctuation, the variation time of the special symbol and the time when the small hit game is executed are combined. Can change the timing of ending the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that has been established. Further, depending on the time saving end condition to be established, even during the small hitting game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance, It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different durations for the small hit game are provided, and even if the winning number end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning number end condition is satisfied. It is advisable to give different benefits to the person. As a result, not only the type of the time saving end condition that has been established, but also the more detailed contents of the time saving end condition can be of interest to the player.

Further, in this case, even when the winning number end condition is satisfied, there are a case where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and a case where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small hit game is ended. It is better to configure so that As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the embodiment described above, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of times of change of the special symbol, and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit. Although the process of determining and executing separately, is used, but not limited to this, centrally manage the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol, and the time saving end condition established It is also possible to use a configuration in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on.

In each of the control examples described above, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or when it is decreased, respectively), a holding sphere number command is issued. The case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the control examples described above, the winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball inlet 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction or L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in various motions or changed in addition to the symbols. It also includes an effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for indicating the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the main symbol displayed on the player and the display means for displaying the sub symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game is executed aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left side area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. Although the left-handed game aiming at is executed, the target area of the game board 13 may be changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, while in the normal state. The right-handed game may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that games in different game states can be executed while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation, but other configurations It is also possible to use, and it is possible to determine whether the player has operated by tilting to the left or right or front and back, and operating means configured in the form of a lever, or when the player has touched or approached It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the control examples described above, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the voice lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute the process, the process is not limited to this and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. The processing may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, one control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

In each control example described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described as an example of various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode having the same purpose effect. All that is required is a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect for notifying the player by voice, and a player using various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies.

In addition, as various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, a notification effect that allows the player to surely understand the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly notifies the content are used. The suggestive effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described as an example of various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode having the same purpose effect. All that is required is a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect for notifying the player by voice, and a player using various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies.

In addition, as various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, a notification effect that allows the player to surely understand the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly notifies the content are used. The suggestive effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (big hit probability) (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, without being limited to this, for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of kinds of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is set. The main controller 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six setting values of 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value “1” is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value “6” is set. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol, may be configured to be different according to the set value, high probability of the special symbol Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be changed according to the set value.

Further, according to the setting value described above, not only the jackpot probability, for example, different selection ratio of each jackpot type, different probability of winning a small hit, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The varying time may be different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or a jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific setting value is set is provided, and a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed or not. The player may pay attention to determine the set value that is currently set.

Furthermore, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (a command for indicating a lottery result) or a command for indicating a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (a command for indicating a fluctuation time) When received, the currently set setting value may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect based on the discrimination result may be executed. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously performing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using the configuration that can set the above-mentioned set value, for each set value so that the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol can be changed according to the set value Various parameters may be specified, or a particular game state in which the special lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a particular set value is a special one when the predetermined set value is different from the particular set value. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is easy to be executed, or the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (bonus game content It is a concept including that the small hit game content and the game state set after the big hit game are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution ratio are unified according to the type of special drawing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state transition destination and transition distribution ratio are determined according to the game state. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game play, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, the probability change state is a specification that continues until a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery is executed to shift to a normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and the lottery It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability change state is shifted to the normal game state by winning. In this case, as a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous probability variation state, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that terminates the probability variation state, or the probability of a transition from the probability variation state to the normal game state is made different. You may choose to do so.

In addition, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, and among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the time saving is performed when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a certain number of times of change. If the end condition is satisfied, that is, if the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and if the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small prize is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, if the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, at a different timing, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to be able to be shifted to the low probability state.

Using this configuration, for example, when the variation number end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the winning number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is advisable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled so that the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hitting game.

As a result, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even when the time saving state ends based on the same special symbol fluctuation, the variation time of the special symbol and the time when the small hit game is executed are combined. Can change the timing of ending the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that has been established. Further, depending on the time saving end condition to be established, even during the small hitting game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance, It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different durations for the small hit game are provided, and even if the winning number end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning number end condition is satisfied. It is advisable to give different benefits to the person. As a result, not only the type of the time saving end condition that has been established, but also the more detailed contents of the time saving end condition can be of interest to the player.

Further, in this case, even when the winning number end condition is satisfied, there are a case where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and a case where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small hit game is ended. It is better to configure so that As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the embodiment described above, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of times of change of the special symbol, and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit. Although the process of determining and executing separately, is used, but not limited to this, centrally manage the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol, and the time saving end condition established It is also possible to use a configuration in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on.

In each of the control examples described above, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or when it is decreased, respectively), a holding sphere number command is issued. The case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the control examples described above, the winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball inlet 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction or L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in various motions or changed in addition to the symbols. It also includes an effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for indicating the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the main symbol displayed on the player and the display means for displaying the sub symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game is executed aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left side area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. Although the left-handed game aiming at is executed, the target area of the game board 13 may be changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, while in the normal state. The right-handed game may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that games in different game states can be executed while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation, but other configurations It is also possible to use, and it is possible to determine whether the player has operated by tilting to the left or right or front and back, and operating means configured in the form of a lever, or when the player has touched or approached It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the control examples described above, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the voice lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute the process, the process is not limited to this and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. The processing may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, one control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

In the above-described first control example, when it is determined that the player is operating the operating means as the determining means for determining whether the player is operating the operating means within one operation valid period, the player is A first discriminating means (for example, a button image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a manner showing that the button is being pressed) for informing that the operating means is being operated ( When it is determined that the operating means is being operated, it is determined whether or not the effect mode (for example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG) is changed. Second determining means (determination performed only at a specific timing within the operation valid period). In other words, the technical idea is to set a plurality of operation valid periods in duplicate. This technical idea is not limited to the one used in the above-described first control example, and for example, the above-mentioned second determining means within the first operation effective period in which the above-mentioned first determining means is executed. It is not necessary to set the second operation valid period in which is executed, and at least a part may be configured to overlap.

In addition, one second operation effective period may be set among a plurality of types of second operation effective periods with respect to one first operation effective period. Thereby, when the first operation effective period and the second operation effective period are set to overlap with each other, the player is predicted at what timing of the first operation effective period the second operation effective period is set. It can provide the enjoyment.

In the above-described first control example, when the period in which the probability variation state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the variation time of the special symbol variation is shorter than before. By making the time easy to select, there is a technical idea that improves the time efficiency of the game (special symbol lottery), but this technical idea is not limited to the contents of the first control example, for example It may be applied in a state in which a game state other than the state is set. Further, in order to improve the time efficiency of the game (special symbol lottery) only during the period from the setting of the specific game state to the lapse of a predetermined period, a short variation time may be easily selected. good. In addition, in the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (for example, a small win), a short variable time may be easily selected and the period may be set.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the time saving state ends (immediately after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state), the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state continues without ending. The fluctuation pattern scenario and the fluctuation pattern table may be configured such that the fluctuation time is likely to be the same as the fluctuation time. With this configuration, rather than notifying the player that the time saving state has ended immediately after the time saving state has ended, a predetermined period of time has passed since the game state transitioned from the time saving state to the normal state. After that, that is, based on the fact that the variation pattern of the variation time that cannot be selected when the time saving state continues, the player can be informed that the time saving state has ended.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. In this case, for example, it is executed immediately after the time saving state ends (immediately after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state) in the period of the maximum holding number (4) of the special figure 2 holding acquired at the end of the time saving state. It is advisable to define the content of the variation pattern scenario and the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the special symbol variation is easily the same as the variation time of the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state continues without ending.

Further, in the case of using the above-mentioned configuration, as long as the variation pattern of the same variation time as in the time saving state is continuously selected, even after the game state shifts to the normal state, the effect executed in the time saving state It may be configured to execute the same effect. This allows the player to play a game during the time saving period that is longer than the actual time saving state.

Further, in the first control example described above, it is configured such that either the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type in which the normal state is set is set. It may be provided. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the gaming state set after the jackpot game is a time saving state or a probability variation state, a high probability state of the normal symbol after the jackpot game is finished (probability variation state, time saving state). ) Is set, at least until a period in which the time saving state can end, the same variation time is configured to be easily selected, and the variation state of the special symbol variation to be executed causes the player to play the state. Is suppressed from being grasped.

Then, in the effect (additional effect of the lucky points) executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the specific effect result is notified (when the lucky point reaches 100P), the current game state changes suddenly. The effect (invincible zone (FIG. 129(a))) for informing the player of the state is configured to be executed. The effect content of the addition effect of the lucky points is determined every time the special symbol lottery is executed, and the timing at which the specific effect result is notified is indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to comprehend at which timing the player is informed that the probability variation state is informed, and to continue the game while expecting the player to set the probability variation state. Can be done.

However, if a high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, at least until the time period when the time saving state can be ended, the same variation time is likely to be selected. Since it is configured, it is necessary to set the effect period for executing the battle effect even when the probability change state is notified promptly (even when the invincible zone is set). Therefore, in the above-described first control example, the player is provided with a sense of security by informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player will not be defeated in the battle production during the invincible zone. The battle effect executed during the invincible zone may be a wasteful battle effect, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, after the invincible zone is set, when the variation time (60 seconds) in which the battle effect is executed is determined, the variation time is 5 seconds. Or, it is configured to repeatedly execute the effect of the effect period of 10 seconds, and it is possible to execute the pseudo-variable effect that makes it appear as if the special symbol fluctuation is being executed a plurality of times in one special symbol fluctuation. Good to do. More specifically, it may be configured to execute the effect executed during the shortened zone effect.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of effects are configured by being configured to prohibit the execution of a new additional effect during the execution period of the additional effect (see FIGS. 121 and 122) executed during the jackpot game. Has a technical idea that it is executed redundantly and that the player is not provided with a production that is difficult to understand as a whole, but this technical idea may be diverted to other situations, For example, when a determination unit capable of determining the number (type) of effects being executed is provided, and the number (type) of effects being redundantly executed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 3), It may be configured to prohibit the execution of a new effect. That is, the technology is not limited to the technique of prohibiting execution of a new specific effect during a period in which the specific effect is being executed. In addition, as the condition for prohibiting the execution of a new effect, not only the condition that is satisfied only by the number (type) of effects that are purely executed but also the content of the effect being executed and the newly executed effect A condition that is satisfied based on the content of the effect may be used, and for example, with a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects in which information regarding a specific element (for example, jackpot game content) is provided to the player. If so, if the effect being executed is an advantageous effect having a high advantage degree with respect to a specific element, it is executed when it is determined that the content of the newly executed effect is less advantageous than the effect being performed. May be prohibited.

Further, in the above-described first control example, for the effect executed during the jackpot game, it is configured such that new additional effect execution is prohibited during the effect execution period, but other than during the jackpot game. The same technical idea may be applied to the effects executed in the period, for example, the same technical idea may be applied to the special symbol variation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery. It is good, and the same technical idea may be applied to the pre-reading effect period executed across a plurality of special symbol variation periods. In this case, even if the execution condition of the new prefetching effect is satisfied during the prefetching effect period, it is possible to prohibit the new prefetching effect from being executed, so that the prefetching effect is executed in duplicate, It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to determine which look-ahead effect suggests which special symbol lottery result.

In the above-described second control example, when the execution condition of the new additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the condition (content) of the satisfaction is stored, and the new additional effect is stored. When it becomes possible to execute, the execution of a new effect is prohibited by variably determining the effect mode of the additional effect based on the stored status (content). Even during the period, it has the technical idea of allowing the player to enthusiastically play the game in order to establish the execution condition of the production, but this technical idea may be used for other productions, for example, prefetching. During production, a new execution condition for prefetching performance (for example, a condition that can be established when a ball is inserted into the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 640 and a special symbol hold is newly acquired) is established. By doing so, the effect mode of the effect to be executed after the pre-reading effect that is being executed may be varied.

Further, in the above-described second control example, in the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, according to the number of conditions for executing the new additional effect, the degree of advantage to the player in the effect to be executed later. Is configured to be variable, and specifically, it is most advantageous when the number of conditions for execution of a new additional effect reaches a predetermined number in a period during which execution of a new additional effect is prohibited. However, it is not limited to this, but when the execution condition of the new additional effect is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed, and it is most advantageous when the lottery is won. The effect may be configured to be easily executed.

Next, the technical idea regarding the technology described in each control example described above will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 in each control example described above executes a lottery having at least two or more lottery results (e.g., winning or losing), and when the lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., winning), a game is played. It is configured such that a privilege (for example, winning game) that is advantageous to the player is given. Then, as a type of lottery to be executed, special symbols (for example, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) lottery and normal symbol lottery can be executed. The lottery described above has a technical idea of a determination means for determining the acquired value (random number value) and a technical idea of a determination means for determining which of the lottery results is.

Here, as the technical idea of the determination means, in addition to the contents described above, for example, when setting various effect modes set by the voice lamp control device 113, one effect mode is selected from a plurality of effect modes. The technical idea of the discrimination means includes a configuration for discriminating information (various random number values, setting states of various flags, information of various storage (storage) areas, etc.) referred to for determination. Further, the technical idea of the determination means is not limited to the configuration for determining the lottery result based on the acquired value as described above, and is specified when, for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed a specific area. The configuration of the determination means, that is, the configuration of determining the determination result, that is, the configuration that determines the game result that is advantageous to the player when some condition is satisfied, and the configuration that determines only the specific determination result Included in thought.

In addition, the privilege that is advantageous to the player is, of course, one that provides the player with a game situation in which a prize ball is easily acquired, such as a winning game executed when a specific lottery result is obtained. , A condition for setting a situation where a specific lottery result is likely to occur (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a normal symbol), or an execution condition of a lottery is easily satisfied (for example, , Which makes it easier for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 associated with the electric accessory 640). Furthermore, by facilitating the player's understanding of the current game situation through various effect modes set by various control processes executed by the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to advantageously allow the player to advance the game. For example, the above-described various presentation modes are also concepts included in the privilege. In addition, in terms of a concept different from the game purpose of winning a prize ball, various effect modes having a low probability of being set by various control processes of the voice lamp control device 113 are set (is easily set). Providing to the player an effect that cannot be normally seen (difficult to see) also corresponds to an advantageous privilege.

Note that in this case, if the advantage provided to the player is more advantageous than the case where the benefit is not provided, the advantage is considered to be advantageous. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of privilege types (for example, the first privilege and the second privilege), no matter which privilege is granted, compared to the case where no privilege is granted. Then, if the player has an element that is advantageous to the player, all the benefits are advantages that are advantageous to the player. Further, if there are elements that are relatively comparable to the first benefit and the second benefit, and if there are elements that have a different degree of advantage to the player as the elements to be compared, one of the benefits is better than the other benefit. It becomes a concept with the other privilege that is advantageous. Further, each of the first privilege and the second privilege is composed of a plurality of elements (for example, the first element and the second element), and for the first element, the first privilege is more advantageous than the second privilege. Is high, and the second element is configured so that the second element has a higher degree of advantage than the first element, the one element is defined as one of the elements that is advantageous. Alternatively, it is possible to define only the privilege on the side having a greater degree of advantage for the entire element as an advantage.

The above-mentioned technical idea for "advantageous" is not limited to the privilege type, and is applicable to all expressions of "advantageous" and "disadvantageous" used in each control example described above. For example, the advantage degree may be defined based on the above definition for each of a plurality of game states (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, latent probability state) after the jackpot game is over, or a plurality of types of game states may be defined. For each of the lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery, the ordinary symbol lottery), the degree of advantage may be defined based on the above definition.

In each control example described above, in order to show the lottery result, a special symbol or a normal symbol is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 or the second symbol display device 84, or a third symbol corresponding to the variable display. Although there is one that uses a configuration in which the third symbol and the fourth symbol are variably displayed on the symbol display device 81, various symbols that are variably displayed correspond to the identification information for indicating the lottery result. Further, the identification information only needs to be configured so that the player can identify whether or not the variable display is being executed and the lottery result, and is not limited to the display mode imitating numbers, and the color and lighting (flashing). ) The identification information also corresponds to whether the player can distinguish whether or not the variable display is being executed and the lottery result, depending on the combination of locations.

In addition, in each of the control examples described above, a plurality of (for example, three) symbol arrays configured from a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, nine types of third symbols imitating the numbers “1” to “9”). Provided, in each symbol row, the position displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to change the identification information (variable display), but the identification information is used. The variable display indicates the period until the player is notified of the result of the executed lottery, and unlike the configuration of each control example described above, for example, the identification information of 1 is always displayed. However, by changing the display position, it is possible to show the player that the lottery result is in the period until it is notified, and repeatedly display and non-display (lighting, extinguishing) one piece of identification information. By doing so, the player may be informed that it is in the period until the lottery result is notified. That is, by setting a dynamic display mode that is different from the state in which the identification information is stopped and displayed, it is possible to notify the player that the period until the notification of the lottery result is in progress. Good.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, regarding the contents of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 (contents of effects executed by the effect executing means), display effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. However, other than "display" using a configuration other than the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and various decorative accessories). The effects (sound effects, lighting effects, movable effects) of this mode are similarly executed. Therefore, at least the display effect, the sound effect, the lighting effect, and the movable effect correspond to the effect executed by the effect executing means.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a probability variation state) is selected from a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probability, for example, as a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) that is determined when it becomes a jackpot according to the setting. May be. That is, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is determined according to the setting, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the proportion of jackpots with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is changed according to the setting, or jackpots with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) are decided. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the degree of advantage for each setting is changed by changing the ratio depending on the setting. In addition, for example, a jackpot to which a large number of shortening times (for example, 100 times) is determined after the jackpot is changed may be changed according to the setting, or a jackpot to which a small number of shortening times (for example, 0 times) is awarded. The rate at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot is over, the proportion of the jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability changing state) is changed according to the setting, or an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a normal state). ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured so that it can be set in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. Then, in the setting 6, when the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot of 6 rounds is decided at a rate of 2%, whereas in the other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is decided only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With such a configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is allowed to play while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in the setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 times of shortening times are given after the jackpot ends may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type that the jackpot (or a character inside the jackpot) operates with an operation pattern different from other jackpot types. The jackpot type may be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the determined rate is high). Also, in the case of changing the combination of the jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability variation state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. The more the jackpot probability is increased, the better. This configuration, especially in the probability change state, tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the probability variation state wins the next big jackpot, and by applying to a type of gaming machine with a high probability of a small hit in the probability variation state, the high setting advantage The sex can be enhanced. That is, if the probability of a big win in the probability changing state is low, the number of lottery until the next big win tends to increase, so that the chance of winning a prize ball also increases. Therefore, in the probability changing state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. As an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying a symbol after variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

Moreover, you may comprise so that the structure of each said embodiment and each control example may be implemented, combining all or one part.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<The point where the ball passing through the route forming means becomes a blind spot for the means to be passed>
The game ball includes a path forming means configured to flow down, and a passing means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means is a view in a predetermined direction. It is characterized in that it comprises a displaceable means which can be arranged at a position overlapping at least a part of the first game ball on the front side of the first game ball flowing down the path forming means on the upstream side of the passed means. A gaming machine AA1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the game is configured with a big winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize by the decorative plate 302. Machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the decorative plate 302 is configured such that it is difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431. There was a possibility that the player could feel unsatisfied because he could not respond to the game mode of playing. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in a portion related to the game ball shooting operation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route forming means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. To be done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball can be easily seen, it becomes easy to confirm the flow down of the first game ball and determine whether to continue or stop the game ball launch operation. It can be improved in relevant areas.

The mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

The mode of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting slot) related to a lottery of symbols, a prize ball entrance related to payout of prize balls, or a game ball that can pass through. The means of is also good.

In the gaming machine AA1, the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball, the gaming machine AA2.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passed means, so that the displaceable means As compared with the case where another decorative member is prepared, the material cost and the design cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AA2, the path forming means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of disposing the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball. ..

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine AA2, the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and therefore, in the front view, At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the game ball.

In the gaming machine AA3, the front-back direction path is the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path forming means at a firing interval set in a launcher. A gaming machine AA4, wherein the gaming ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA3, it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball with the second gaming ball when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the route forming means while keeping the firing interval. It is possible to achieve the effect. This can cause a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

In the gaming machine AA3 or AA4, the front-rear direction component of the front-rear direction path is arranged closer to the center of the game area than the rear-face constituent component is, the game machine AA5.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA3 or AA4, it is possible to configure the front-rear direction path as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed, so the first gaming ball Can be easily hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfolding can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA5, the front side constituent portion is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the passed means, the gaming machine AA6.

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA5, a similar blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are to each other, the more the blindfold effect can be improved, but the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight. When the game balls are arranged, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the length of the interval.

In any of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6, the route forming means is a front-back direction route formed with a front-back width length capable of disposing the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball, and the front-back direction thereof. A gaming machine AA7, characterized in that it has a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows game balls to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the gaming ball flowing down the left-right direction path, so that the player can be the passing means. On the other hand, not only when the passing means is visually recognized with the line of sight that does not shift to the left and right, but also when the line of sight shifts to the left and right and the line of sight is seen, a blinding effect can be produced. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner of entering the ball into the passed device regardless of the direction of the line of sight of the player (a blindfold effect can be produced in all directions).

This action remarkably occurs by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with the wall portion. That is, in the configuration in which the left and right one sides are sealed by the wall portion, the wall portions are blindfolded on the left and right one sides, so that it is possible to easily form a state in which the field to be passed does not pass.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, the route forming means includes a first downflow route in which a game ball passes through the passed means in a first mode, and a second route in which a game ball passes in a second mode. And a flow-down path of, and regardless of which flow-down path of the path forming means the first game ball flows down, at least a part of the predetermined displaceable means can be visually recognized. A gaming machine AA8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine AA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flow-down mode of the game ball flowing down the route forming means regardless of whether or not the passed-through means has passed. , The attention to the game ball flowing down the route forming means can be improved.

It should be noted that the first aspect and the second aspect are not limited at all. For example, the flow direction of the sphere may be different, or the detection sensor through which the sphere passes may be different.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, a branching unit that divides the flow direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passed unit is provided, and the branch unit includes a switching unit that switches the flow direction of the received game ball, The game machine AA9, wherein the route forming means is a game ball whose flow-down path is divided by the branching means, and the game ball reaching the switching means flows down the same path for a predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine AA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, the gaming ball reaching the switching means flows down the same route for a predetermined section, so that the gaming ball reaching the switching means immediately follows. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the flow down of the game ball, as compared with the case where the flow down mode corresponds to the flow down path of. This can improve the player's attention to the game ball.

In the gaming machine AA9, the path forming means includes a projecting portion projecting on the flowing down game ball side, and the projecting portion acts on the branching of the game ball in the branching means. Machine AA10.

According to the gaming machine AA10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA9, the projecting portion can act on the branching of the game ball, so that, for example, compared to the case where the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body, the structure The durability of can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion, and the first projecting portion. 2. The gaming machine AA11, wherein the protruding amount of the second protruding portion is different from the protruding amount of the second protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine AA11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the gaming ball and the impact of the second projecting portion on the gaming ball are determined according to the flow-down mode of the gaming ball. Can be different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, it is possible to cause the action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

<Points where a sphere passing through the route forming means appeals to the passing means>
The game ball includes a path forming means configured to flow down, and a passing means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means is more than the passed means. A gaming machine AB1 characterized by comprising a predetermined portion that constitutes an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more prominent side than the passed means, and being capable of guiding a game ball to the passed means.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the state of the winning component 300, there is a gaming machine in which the game ball flows down a position that is off the decorative plate 302, or the game ball flows down while being hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, See Open 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the highly visible game balls that fall off the decorative plate 302 and flow down are rather configured to flow off the ball detection holes 431 and be hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since a part of the game ball that flows down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the degree of profit that the player can obtain. This can be wasteful, which may cause players dissatisfaction. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in that the flow-down mode of the game ball after receiving the attention is meaningful.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AB1, since the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passed means, the degree of improvement in the attention power to the game ball, It can be associated with the game ball passing through the passed means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion will pass the means to be passed, and thus it is possible to improve the point that it is worth paying attention to the game ball after the attention is paid.

Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and reduce the possibility that the player misses the fact that the game ball is heading to the passing means. be able to.

The mode of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting slot) related to a lottery of symbols, a prize ball entrance related to payout of prize balls, or a game ball that can pass through. The means of is also good.

In addition, the aspect on the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the side of the display device that attracts the player's attention, on the winning opening side or on the starting opening side, on the front side (front side) that is easily visible to the player, or on the specific entrance. Directly connected to the stage (mainly where the game ball temporarily stays at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) side as a part where the line of sight tends to gather as a place where the probability of entering the ball is noticeably high V winning opening side, ball lending device side as an operation target, production operation button side, the range where the game ball that has deviated from the entrance is flowing down (the range where the player regrets and chases eyes) The bright side or the other side may be used as switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so that it is relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine AB1, the route forming means includes a second predetermined portion that makes the game ball entering the route forming means less noticeable than when entering the ball, and the predetermined portion is larger than the second predetermined portion. A gaming machine AB2, which is arranged on a conspicuous side.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AB1, before the gaming ball that has entered the route forming means flows down the predetermined portion, the attention is lowered in the second predetermined portion to flow down the predetermined portion. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.

In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the predetermined portion is provided with a section in which the flow speed of the game ball is different, a gaming machine AB3.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the effect of gathering the line of sight of the player can be improved as compared with the case where there is no difference in the flow velocity of the game ball.

In the gaming machine AB3, the second downflow speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first downflow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. A gaming machine AB4.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the route forming means reaches a predetermined portion.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, the predetermined portion is provided with a section in which a displacement speed of a game ball in a predetermined direction is different, and a gaming machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction is different regardless of the actual flow velocity of the gaming ball Since it can be configured, the player's line of sight can be easily gathered at a predetermined location and the eyes can be diverted from other portions by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction at any given location. ..

It should be noted that the manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is different is not limited at all. For example, in the case of displacing on a straight line arranged in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction in a front view, it may be different between displacing on a straight line having a front-rear direction component, or on a straight line, It may be different from the case of displacing in a curved shape or a meandering shape, or may be different.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5, it is provided with an introducing means configured to be able to introduce a game ball to the path forming means, and the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine AB6.

According to the gaming machine AB6, it is possible to secure the visibility of the introducing means in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the visibility of the introducing means and the improvement of the attention of the game ball that has a high possibility of passing through the passed means.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, a game ball on the front side of the route forming means is provided with an avoiding means configured to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passed means or the predetermined portion. A gaming machine AB7.

According to the gaming machine AB7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down on the front side of the route forming means, and the flow path of the game ball is directed toward the passing means. Since the avoidance means for avoiding is provided, the size of the game area can be ensured and the visibility of the game ball toward the passed means can be ensured at the same time.

In addition, the flow-down mode of the game ball affected by the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that flows down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or one that flows down while avoiding a straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or a game ball heading toward the means to be passed. Based on the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down avoiding the front position of the position, or may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the last position and the position of the player's eyes. Good or anything else.

In the gaming machine AB7, the path forming means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change a state between a receiving state in which the game ball flowing down can be received and a non-receiving state in which it cannot be received, and the receiving state changing means is In the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, the game ball AB8 that has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state can be guided to the route forming means side. ..

According to the gaming machine AB8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB7, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down so as to be bridged after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passed means. You can

In the gaming machine AB7 or AB8, it is provided above the passed means in a front view and includes partition means for partitioning the game area. The partition means is configured such that the game ball can flow down on the left and right outer sides. Characteristic gaming machine AB9.

According to the gaming machine AB9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB7 or AB8, the partition means can prevent the situation in which the game ball flows down the front position of the passed means, so that the visibility toward the passed means can be improved. It can be easily secured.

The mode of the partitioning means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes the lower surface of the game ball, or may be a ball entrance forming means that allows the game ball to enter. The partitioning means may be a shape (appearance) fixed means or a shape (appearance) variable means.

In the gaming machine AB9, the path forming means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change a receiving state in which the flowing down game ball can be received and a non-receiving state in which the game ball cannot be received, and the receiving means in the partitioning means. The game machine AB10 is characterized in that a portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide a game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the gaming machine AB10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AB9, it is possible to make the partitioning means receive a game ball in the middle of being received by the receiving state changing means by pushing it into the receiving state changing means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the game ball, which has slipped in the middle of being received, deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

For example, a special winning device including an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces in the left-right direction axis is assumed as the receiving state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the partitioning means. .. The game ball that has reached the special winning opening just before closing the opening/closing plate is often sandwiched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and the edge forming direction ( Slide sideways in the direction of the axis of rotation of the open/close plate.

Since the game ball after sliding sideways can reach any position in the range of formation of the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate, if at least a part of the opening/closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, it slides sideways. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball will fall to the front side and then pass through the front position of the means to be passed, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

If it is not possible to avoid dropping the game ball to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to dispose the opening/closing plate while avoiding the front view position of the passed device, so that the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate decreases. become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AB10, it is possible to easily avoid that the game ball after skidding falls to the front side of the opening/closing plate, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, the game ball flowing down the route forming means and the game ball flowing down the front side of the route forming means are configured to flow down in a similar flow manner. A gaming machine AB11.

According to the gaming machine AB11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, the gaming ball that may flow down the route forming means and pass through the passed means, and the front side of the route forming means may flow down. By making it difficult to distinguish between the game balls that do not pass through the means to be passed, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls that flow down the route forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the case where the game ball easily enters the route forming means and the case where the game ball does not easily enter from the game ball flowing down near the route forming means.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, there is provided a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the sphere flowing down the predetermined portion, the gaming machine AB12.

According to the gaming machine AB12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the sphere flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the sphere becomes difficult to see.

<Points to secure the route length to the V passage in a space-saving manner>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passing means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the path forming means, and a first state in which a game ball can flow down to the passed means. A state switching unit configured to be switchable between a second state different from the first state, and the path forming unit includes a delay unit that delays vertical displacement of the game ball. A gaming machine AC1 configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the means to be passed.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit 75 configured to be movable left and right is arranged in a flow path of the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 12, and the distribution unit 75 allows the distribution of the game ball. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the flow direction (see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is indispensable to operate the sorting unit 75 for a short period of time in order to prevent erroneous winning of a prize in the specific area 73 and ball catching by the sorting unit 75, and depending on the player. There was a case where the behavior of the minute part 75 was distrusted and the game could not be continued with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this, it is assumed that the flow path length from the second special winning opening 12 to the distribution unit 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution unit 75 from directly below the second special winning opening 12 to a position near the left and right central portions of the game area (near the first special winning opening 10), the second special winning opening 12 It is possible to secure a long flow path length to the distribution unit 75. Therefore, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second special winning opening 12 to the first special winning opening 10. In this range, the freedom of designing the game area is increased. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is limited in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AC1, since the route forming means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the route forming means in front view is shortened to save space, the route forming means can be inserted into the route forming means. It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the game ball that has been ball passes through the means to be passed.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passed-through means can be set a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route forming means. An erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device for switching whether to enter the constituent means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating in a busy manner. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The mode of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is configured in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path that causes the game ball to flow down in the flow-down path having a front-back direction component may be used.

In the gaming machine AC1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down path is such that the flow-down path toward the front side flows down compared to the flow-down path toward the back side. A gaming machine AC2, which is configured to have a large acceleration.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to secure a long period for allowing the player to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined downflow route.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined downflow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined downflow path on the game sphere side may be designed.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down path is compared with a flow-down path in which the front-side flow-down path is maintained while maintaining the front-back position. A gaming machine AC3, which is configured to increase the acceleration of the flowing game ball.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, it is possible to secure a long period in which the player visually recognizes the gaming ball flowing on the front side. As a result, the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow-down path can be easily improved.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined downflow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined downflow path on the game sphere side may be designed.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined downflow paths, and the predetermined downflow path is located at a front position arranged in front of the passed-through means when viewed from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine AC4 configured to pass through.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, when the gaming ball is arranged at the front position, the visibility in the vicinity of the passed means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the range near the means to be passed.

In the gaming machine AC4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured, and the gaming machine AC5.

According to the gaming machine AC5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, it is possible to hide at least a part of the back game balls by the front game balls. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side of the game ball on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. ..

In this case, when the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined flow-down path is short, it is possible to configure the state where the game balls are always arranged at any one of the front positions, so that the pass-through means is invisible. It will be possible.

In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner in a top view.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the vertical width required for disposing the path forming means having the same length can be shortened.

Further, as compared with the case where the folded path is formed, it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall, so that the strength of the flow path can be improved, and compared with the folded path that is folded at 180 degrees, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will be clogged.

The gaming machine AC7 according to any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, wherein the path forming means includes a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the lateral width of the route forming means can be suppressed, so that the pair of route forming means is symmetrically configured with the suppressed lateral width. You can

The gaming machine AC8 according to any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, wherein the passed means is arranged obliquely downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

According to the gaming machine AC8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, it is possible to easily fit the passed-through means and the ball receiving portion of the route forming means in the sight of the player visually recognized from the front side. ..

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the route forming means is a first receiving means configured to receive a game ball and a means different from the first receiving means and configured to receive the game ball. And a second receiving means, which is configured so that a profit obtained by a player is changed depending on a mode of receiving the game balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine AC9.

According to the gaming machine AC9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to always receive the game ball, and further, the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of accepting the game ball of the second accepting means, the attention to the game ball can be improved.

The mode of accepting the game balls is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the game balls are accepted only in the first receiving means, a mode in which the game balls are accepted only in the second receiving means, or a predetermined number is received by the first receiving means and the second receiving is accepted A mode in which a predetermined number of devices can be received may be used. Further, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means is different or a mode in which the ball entry position is different.

In the gaming machine AC9, the change in the profit obtained by the player is limited to one of the first receiving means and the second receiving means to receive the game ball, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A gaming machine AC10, which is produced depending on whether or not a gaming ball is received in both.

According to the gaming machine AC10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch a game ball in a predetermined launch mode, depending on how the profit obtained by the player is set. ..

It should be noted that the profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, it may be easy to recognize the game ball flowing down, or profit related to the game obtained by the game ball flowing down (payout of prize balls, acquisition of jackpots, game state after the jackpot becomes a probable state, It may be that the game state becomes a normal state (falls down).

In the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, the path forming means is symmetrical from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means, and is left-right symmetrical.

According to the gaming machine AC11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer disadvantages regardless of which of the left and right is used to shoot the gaming ball.

In any one of the gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the path forming means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change a state between a receiving state in which a flowing down game ball can be received and a non-receiving state in which it cannot be received, The game machine AC12 is characterized in that the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of state change.

According to the gaming machine AC12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance status change means or the mode of the state change. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profit obtained by the player.

In the gaming machine AC12, the mode of state change of the receiving state changing means is configured by a plurality of types, the game machine AC13.

According to the game machine AC13, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine AC12, even when the game balls are being fired in a constant firing mode, the mode of receiving the game balls into the first receiving means and the second receiving means Can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted from the state change state of the acceptance state change means.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that moves in parallel with the downflow direction of the sphere>
A path forming means that allows the game ball to flow down, a passing means that allows the game ball that flows down the path forming means to pass through, an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced into the path forming means, and A state switching means configured to be able to change the state with a non-introducing state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, and the state switching means is such that the direction of displacement generated in the state change is the flow down of the game ball. A gaming machine XA1 characterized by being configured to be along a direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a big winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of the game sphere toward the ball detection hole 431 (for example, see JP-A-2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the flow-down direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning component 300 are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the opening/closing operation is completed without the opening/closing being involved in the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the displacement direction of the state switching means is configured to be along the downflow direction of the game ball, the state is in a state where the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence so as to change the rolling mode of the game ball. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right with the game ball on top, the forward direction of rolling rotation with respect to the game ball Since the load to rotate is given, the game ball can be accelerated.

On the contrary, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the left while the game ball is on the top, the rolling rotation of the game ball Since the load for rotating in the opposite direction is given, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Also, when the state switching means slides so as to grab the lower end of the rolling game ball, the load is exerted on the game ball not only in the rolling direction of the game ball but also in the component orthogonal to the rolling direction. Therefore, it is possible to cause the change of the flow-down mode of the game ball to be complicated and irregular.

Due to the influence of these game balls on the flow-down mode, the flow-down mode of the ball riding on the state switching means at the time of the opening/closing operation of the state switching means can be variously changed, so that the player who sees the game ball gets bored. Without having to focus on the game.

Further, the arrangement relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship may be such that it rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or the positional relationship may be such that it opposes the game ball in the downflow direction and collides with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in a direction opposing the downflow direction of the game ball, and the game ball may be configured to rebound, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the downflow direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. May be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

In the gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA1, it is possible to cause the game ball to rotate by changing the state of the state switching means.

In the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the state switching means includes a changing means that changes a load direction in a direction intersecting with the displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, it is possible to release the load given from the gaming ball during the displacement of the state switching means, and to reduce the load given to the state switching means. ..

<Points for opening/closing member for flowing the ball in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass through, an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced to the passed means, and And a state switching means configured to be able to change the state of the non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, and the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured so that the gaming ball can be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a big winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of the game sphere toward the ball detection hole 431 (for example, see JP-A-2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it projects to the front side, but when it retracts to the rear side, it does not contact the game ball and falls freely. Will not be shown. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow down of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of retracting to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion or the like) that guides the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, and to guide the flow of the game ball. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduction state or the non-introduction state, so that it is dedicated to guiding the downflow route of the game ball. Since no member is required, the number of necessary components (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game balls in the flowing direction in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set leftward and rightward with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, in front view, while the displacement of the game ball is only slightly recognized before being guided by the state switching means, the difference in direction (maximum difference) after the guidance by the state switching means is started is maximized. Can be planned.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guide operation by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be disposed on a movable member included in the state switching means, or the guide portion is disposed on a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball is guided to the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state where it is close to or abutting easily.

When the guide part is arranged on the movable member, the design is not limited to guidance after the state switching between the introduction state and the non-introduction state is completed, and a design considering the influence on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. Preferably.

For example, when the state switching means is provided with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposing the downflow direction of the game ball, a surface (a flat surface, a curved surface, etc.) that is inclined with respect to the downflow direction rather than providing a planar wall portion orthogonal to the downflow direction. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward by providing the wall portion having the shape. This makes it easy to avoid backflow of the game ball.

In the gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by the displacement in the third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction, and the gaming machine XB2. ..

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means due to the load applied from the guided gaming ball.

In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path forming means includes a pair of left and right paths, and the state switching means includes a pair of guide portions that can receive game balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the pair of guides. In the section, a gaming machine XB3, wherein the first direction and the second direction are symmetrically configured.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, it is possible to complicate the flow path of the gaming ball. Further, in the pair of guide portions, the first direction and the second direction are respectively formed symmetrically, so that the displacement received by the state switching means by the load received from the game ball by the pair of guide portions is symmetrical left and right. be able to.

Accordingly, for example, when the game balls are inserted into the pair of left and right paths in a substantially equal number, the placement of the state switching means can be easily made uniform by the load received by the guide portion from the game balls.

In the gaming machine XB3, the state switching means includes an overhanging portion formed to overhang in a direction intersecting with the third direction.

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3, the contact area with another member can be reduced by the overhang portion, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, the state switching means is provided with abutting means configured to be capable of abutting in the introduced state or the non-introduced state, and by abutting with the abutting means, the lateral direction of the state switching means A gaming machine XB5 characterized by being capable of correcting displacement.

According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, the load from the gaming ball can be received from either the left or the right direction, so that the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to be disordered in the displacement mode, comes into contact It can be restored in an orderly manner by the action of the means.

<Separation, inversion, coalescence, and rotation are a series of operations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a surface to be visually recognized changes, the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in the displacement of a predetermined mode, the first displacement A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be displaced relative to each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a rotary base 214 arranged at a tip end portion of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable a plurality of times (for example, see JP-A-2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, since the surface seen by the player is the same, it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the visible surface of the displacing means can be changed along with the displacement, so that the attention to the displacing means can be maintained.

Further, the relative displacement of the first displacing member and the second displacing member can change the appearance of the displacing means, so that attention to the displacing means can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the displacement of the predetermined mode is a first displacement that causes the first displacement member and the second displacement member to approach and separate from each other on the basis of a collecting portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged, and the first displacement member and the first displacement member. A game machine D2, wherein the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement that rotates based on the gathering portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, it is possible to easily dynamically cause a relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, as the displacement based on the gathering portion, the displacement between the first displacing member and the second displacing member is likely to be reduced at the terminal end where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest with only the first displacement. Where the 1st displacing member and the 2nd displacing member stop and are visible, there is a possibility that the effect may be reduced. However, by mixing the 2nd displacement, it is possible to cause a displacement in the rotational direction even at the end portion. Therefore, the staging effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which a visually recognized surface of the displacing means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by inverting the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. It can be done.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixing is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A game machine D4, which operates in a direction in which displacement of a member is limited.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixing acts in a direction to limit the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to the fixing The displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed in consideration of the above.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission toward the gear, when a mechanical displacement occurs when shape deformation is not added, if a load related to fixation is added, the elastic change of the member due to that load becomes apparent. As a result, it is possible to delay the displacement timing of the member.

Further, the degree of fixing may be different depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the action of fixing differs depending on the side on which the player is visually recognized, it is possible to provide strength to the degree of fixing on the side on which the player is visually recognized.

Thereby, for example, with respect to the inverted surface of the same displacement means, one surface is easily united so as to be visually recognized integrally, and the other surface is loosely combined so as to be easily visually recognized in a state where relative displacement is easily performed. You can

Further, for example, the first displacement member and the second displacement member may be configured so that the degree of suction differs for each fixed position, thereby forming a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. it can.

It should be noted that the mode in which adsorption is possible is not limited at all. For example, an adhesive tape may be used for adhesion, or the attraction between the magnet and the metal part may be used. Further, the first reversing member or the second reversing member may be designed so that, for example, a fixing screw or a screw is used as the metal portion attracted to the magnet.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, is displaced in a forward direction in a first displacement mode and in a reverse direction to the first direction. The gaming machine D5 is configured to be displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since the predetermined mode is added as the displacement mode, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement unit when retracting the displacement unit. As a result, it is possible to reduce the attention force of the displacement means at the time of retreat, and thus it is possible to relatively improve the attention force of the displacement means that is displaced at the effect position.

In the conventional machine, since the rotation mode is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after projecting by projecting to the effect position (position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area), before retreating to the retracted position (position outside the liquid crystal display area) It was necessary to rotate again multiple times in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight is likely to be gathered on the member retracted from the presentation position.

The displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, it may be rotational displacement or linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may extend over a plurality of planes, or may be three-dimensional.

In the gaming machine D5, the displacing means includes a releasing means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount, the gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a light emitting unit that emits light toward the displacement unit is provided, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the The gaming machine D7, wherein the second displacing member is configured so that the visually recognizable aspect of the light from the light emitting means can be changed depending on whether the visually recognized surface is one side or the other side.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Can be changed.

For example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as individually emitting light, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. Can be changed with.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means is provided, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Characteristic game machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowable can be detected by the detection means, so that the displacement means does not collide with the surrounding structure portion during the displacement. It can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detection means, the displacement mode including the enlargement/reduction after the displacement from the effect position to the retracted position is performed to some extent. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress an increase in the attention force on the displacement means, as compared with the case where displacement is performed from the start of displacement when the displacement from the effect position to the retracted position is performed in a displacement mode including enlargement/reduction. ..

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detecting means for detecting the state of the displacing means is provided, and the detecting means is configured to be able to detect two or more numerical values for the displacement of the displacing means. Gaming machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detecting means provided can be reduced. Various types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, it may be a numerical value for each arrangement or posture of different movable members, or may be a numerical value involved in the change of the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detecting means is not limited at all. For example, by disposing the detection means on the displacement proximal end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have a side facing toward the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one surface toward the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be capable of reversing operation between the surface orientation and the other surface orientation. The displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other, while the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D10, which is configured to be indistinguishable.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the states of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. It is possible to maintain a high expectation of the player for the occurrence of.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by disposing the displacement means having a plurality of visually recognized surfaces>
Displacement means including a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means is in a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible, depending on the arrangement. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversing operation unit 71 that is configured to be reversible and that can change the appearance that is visible to the player by changing the visible surface (for example, a gaming machine. , JP-A-2016-153095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversing operation of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, and therefore the line of sight of the player cannot be changed due to the change in the visually recognized surface. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacing means switches between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with an opening portion that opens the displacing means so that the displacing means can be visually recognized, and the displacing means is configured such that the opening portion side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the player who visually recognizes the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is arranged closer to the back side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening than in the case where it is arranged on the center side of the opening. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion, the displacement means can be largely visually recognized on the front side, while the displacement means is located on the edge side of the opening portion. It is possible to reduce the movement of the line of sight when viewing the displacement means when it is arranged. This makes it possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. A gaming machine E4, characterized in that, in a state in which the surfaces are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to visually recognize.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, different character or graphic is given to each of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the displacement means is provided. Different characters and figures can be visually recognized by the player visually recognizing, and it is difficult to visually recognize the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set which are not intended to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the displacement means from disappearing.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and low expectations are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed. When a character or a graphic indicating that the expectation of being a jackpot is high is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a jackpot can be expected through the displacing means regardless of the arrangement of the displacing means. You can check the high and low. In this case, even after the displacing means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, it is possible to maintain the display of the expectation of a big hit by the displacing means. Even, it is possible to continue visually recognizing the display of the expectation of the jackpot.

It should be noted that the mode of making it difficult to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a surface different from the player side (a rear side surface, a left and right outer surface, etc.), or the visibility may be reduced by blocking with a blocking means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that is visually recognized does not easily recognize the first visible surface and the second visible surface during operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first visible surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that is visually recognized (before confirmation). And it can be made easy to avoid predicting the set of the 2nd visible surface. As a result, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

Note that the mode in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are less likely to be recognized during the switching operation described above is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to be recognized, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part may be configured so as to be coupled and separated. It may be made difficult to recognize by operating the part and the other part in a separated state, or it may be made difficult to be recognized by making a relatively dark part by setting the brightness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the form of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion is viewed, and the other is directed toward the back side so as not to be viewed. It may be configured as described above, or it may be configured to operate in a state in which those parts and the other part can be visually recognized at the same time, but they are misaligned and visually recognized.

In the gaming machine E5, an opening portion that opens the displacement means so as to be visible is provided, and the switching operation is executed in a state in which the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. Amusement machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching operation, and it is possible to improve the attention to the switching operation.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side and the other faces the side different from the front side during the switching operation. Playing machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is made visible during operation, and the whole is made invisible. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize possible surfaces.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, a second displacing unit configured to be able to shield at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacing unit is provided with the second displacing unit. 1. A gaming machine E8, which is configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing a visible surface.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the second visible surface by the second displacing means, so that the effect position of the displacing means can be changed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction view between the first visible surface and the second visible surface in accordance with the displacement. A gaming machine E9 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in the predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the game is played. It is possible to arbitrarily change the surface that is easily visible, without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

In the gaming machine E9, the posture of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state, the gaming machine E10.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. it can.

In the gaming machine E9 or E10, an auxiliary means is provided that can be arranged close to the displacement means, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means in the first state, and the displacement means in the second state. Is a game machine E11 which is arranged apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9 or E10, a state in which the auxiliary means is disposed in the vicinity of the displacement means and visually recognized integrally and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separately visually recognized are provided. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacement means gives to the player.

The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the displacement means is separately visible. ..

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between displacing means and auxiliary means to be visually recognized as one body or separately, so that there are variations in the visible state with respect to the number of members. Can be increased.

<Point at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the arrangement means at the same point is different in each section>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, arranging means in which the first portion is arranged in the displacing means, and supporting means for supporting the second portion of the arranging means are provided. The gaming machine F1 is configured so that the disposition of the second portion with respect to the first portion during displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a tiltable displaceable base arm 220, a swinging accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the swinging accessory 211 is rotated. There is a drive motor 222 for generating a driving force for, and there is a game machine configured to be able to rotate the rotating accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, JP-A-2016-116782). See the bulletin). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the pivotal accessory 211 is apt to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the pivotal accessory 211 is rotated during the tilt displacement of the base arm 220, a problem may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotary accessory 211 is rotationally displaced while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the disposing means is supported by the displacing means and the supporting means at at least two points, and the two supporting points are relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacing means. Since the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion can be controlled by the support means, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. You can Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

The mode of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means in a manner in which displacement is limited, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Further, the control by the supporting means is not limited to the electronic control, and includes mechanical control such as restricting (guided) the displacement of the second portion by the wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the first section and the second section, and the support means is provided with the second portion when the displacement means displaces the first section. And a second range that supports the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the second portion is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2, wherein a direction and a direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arranging means can be made different, and the support means is the second. Since the change of the displacement direction of the portion is allowed, the displacement of the disposing means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means includes a restricting portion that restricts the displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to limit the displacement of the second portion at the boundary position (limitation portion) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the larger displacement side to the smaller displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

The mode of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with reference to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or the second portion may be pushed.

The mode of the limiting unit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which the displacement resistance of the second portion is set to increase or decrease, or a mode in which the displacement direction of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the disposing means in the second section with the displacement means as a reference. The game machine F4 is configured such that the relative displacement amount of the above is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arranging means based on the displacing means in the first section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, a section in which the relative displacement amount of the arranging means with respect to the displacing means becomes small can be formed at the displacing intermediate position of the displacing means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacing means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacing means and the arranging means can be easily visually recognized, and as a result, the displacing means and the arranging means can be visually recognized integrally. The number of easy positions can be increased.

The gaming machine F5 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, wherein the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion based on the displacement speed of the first portion can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the disposing means on the support means side. Since it is possible to change, it is possible to configure an operation effect in which the displacement speed of the arranging means can be varied by simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means.

The gaming machine F6 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, wherein the support means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second part from rebounding, and it is possible to easily stop the disposing means at the displacement end early.

The method of preventing the second part from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the displacement end (for example, the displacement amount of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. A method of restricting the displacement of the second portion by a shape device such as erecting a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion when the first portion is stopped may be used.

Further, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased without being limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the displacement end of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by an urging force of a coil spring or the like. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the supporting means includes a displacement locus of displacement of the second portion due to displacement of the first portion, and of the second portion when the first portion stops at the displacement end. A gaming machine F7, characterized in that the displacement locus of the displacement is configured to intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F6, by the supporting means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, the first portion when the first portion is stopped It is possible to reduce the return displacement (bound) of the second portion.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7 is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the disposing means, and the supported means is a relative displacement amount of the disposing means based on the displacement means. A gaming machine F8, which is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the supported means that is displaced jointly with the arranging means can perform a complicated effect.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the displacing means may be displaced so as to run in parallel with the arranging means on a predetermined plane on which the arranging means is displaced, or the displacing manner of the arranging means at a position apart from the predetermined plane on which the arranging means is displaced (for example, , A displacement mode different from the slide displacement mode on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement mode around a predetermined axis).

It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the disposing means relating to the displacement amount of the disposing means is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed, or the displacement may be performed while maintaining the posture.

In the gaming machine F8, the second portion includes a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting a displacement locus of the first portion while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the relative displacement amount of the second portion with respect to the first portion changes and returns while the first portion is displaced (for example, after increasing). It is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the displacement amount of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

In the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the disposing means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacing means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to that of the displacement means with the disposing means interposed. This makes it possible to give the player the illusion that the supported means is displaced by its own drive means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arranging means is provided with an attitude changing means for changing the attitude so as to switch the surface facing the player side between the first surface and the second surface according to the displacement of itself. The attitude changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in an attitude facing the player side in a state in which the second portion is arranged at the displacement end. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first portion or the second surface of the attitude changing means is directed to the player side, so that the second portion becomes the displacement end. Since the player can recognize the arrival, it is possible to easily comprehend the end of the effect operation by the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, an electric wire is configured to be inserted into the arranging means through the second part, the electric wire is arranged inside and fixed to the second part. The apparatus further comprises an arranging unit, the arranging unit having an opening through which the electric wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electric wiring with a peripheral portion formed around the electric wiring. A gaming machine F12 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from coming into contact with the peripheral portion.

The arranging means may be configured as means for combining the plurality of members when the second portion is composed of a plurality of members, or when another member is arranged in the second portion. It may be configured as a means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.

<Characteristic A group> (Production stock)
A discriminating means capable of discriminating, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and for indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means In the gaming machine having the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Then, a decision means that can decide to execute the effect by the effect execution means, a restricting means that can restrict the execution of a new effect, and the new restricting means that is restricted by the restricting means. Storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the execution of the effect determined by the determining means during a period during which the execution of the effect is regulated, and information stored in the storage means when a specific condition is satisfied. And a production control means capable of causing the production executing means to execute the production corresponding to the game machine A1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, there has been proposed one in which a notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance is executed before the result of the lottery is notified (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). 2013-090780). However, if a plurality of suggestive effects are executed repeatedly, there is a problem that a notice effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a demand to improve the entertainment of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, since the execution of the effect determined by the determining unit is stored in the storage unit even during the period when the execution of the effect is restricted by the restricting unit, the execution of the effect is restricted by the restricting unit. Even so, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the number of times of execution of the production decreases and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1, the restricting means restricts execution of the effect corresponding to a period during which a specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A1, when a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, a new effect is not executed, so the player can know that the specific effect has been executed. The effect is that it can be easily notified.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, an acquisition unit that can acquire the information determined by the determination unit, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination performed by the determination unit And a pre-determination unit capable of performing a determination based on the information previously stored in the storage unit, wherein the effect execution unit is the specific determination unit based on the determination result by the pre-determination unit. An amusement machine A3, which is configured to be able to execute an effect.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, execution of a new effect is restricted during a period in which a specific effect based on the determination result by the pre-determination means is being executed. Has an effect that it can be easily informed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the privilege game is executed, the game ball has a variable ball entering means that can be changed to an open state in which the ball can enter, and the determining means includes: A gaming machine A4, which is configured to be able to determine execution of an effect based on a game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, since the effect is executed based on the fact that the player has entered the variable ball entering means, the player is motivated to enter the variable ball entering means. The effect is that it can be increased.

<Feature B group> (production history control)
A discriminating means capable of discriminating, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and for indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means When the identification information is displayed, a game machine having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and executed by the effect executing means And a storage unit capable of storing, as history information, information corresponding to the effect determined by the determining unit, the determining unit comprising: A gaming machine B1 configured to be able to determine the effect based on the history information.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, it is proposed that the effect of the effect is enhanced by enabling execution of a plurality of types of advance notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance before the lottery result is notified. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, if the suggestive effect of the same content is continuously executed, there is a problem that the notice effect which is difficult for the player to understand is executed and the effect of the effect is reduced, and the effect of the effect is suppressed from being reduced. There was a demand for further improvement in the fun of playing games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to prevent the deviation of the effect to be executed and the like, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine B1 has mode display means capable of displaying on the display means a mode for showing an effect corresponding to at least a part of the history information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the player can identify the history of the executed effect, and it is possible to easily predict the effect that will be executed next.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific effect is configured to be executable by the effect executing means when the history information becomes specific history information, the game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the specific history information is obtained, the specific effect is executed, so that the type of effect to be executed can be made interesting. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming machine B4 is provided with a regulation unit that regulates the execution of a new production while the production is being performed by the production execution unit.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the execution of new production is restricted during the period when the production is being executed, so that the production is excessively executed. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

<Characteristic C group> (Management of performance content)
In a gaming machine having a first control means capable of executing a game control and a second control means capable of executing a game control based on a control signal from the first control means, The first control means has first counter means capable of updating the first counter based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second control means is output based on the satisfaction of the first condition. Based on the counter value of the second counter means, which is capable of updating the second counter based on the satisfaction of the second condition that is satisfied when the first control signal is received. When the display means for displaying the information, the identifying means for identifying the numerical information corresponding to the information displayed on the display means, and the identification result by the identifying means are the specific identification results, the first counter A gaming machine C1 comprising: an updating means capable of updating the information displayed on the display means based on the counter value of the means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, there has been proposed one that executes an effect in which information indicating the lottery result is provided to the player step by step (for example, Patent Document: JP2013-090780A). .. However, when there is a difference in the stage information managed between the control means for setting the effect contents and the control means for displaying the effect result, an unintended effect is executed and the player's There was a problem that the willingness to play was reduced. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the information displayed based on the second counter value is in a state corresponding to the specific identification result, the information is updated based on the counter value of the first counter means. Even if the counter values counted by the counter means and the second counter means are deviated from each other, the information displayed on the display means can be corrected to the value counted by the first counter means. ..

In the gaming machine C1, when the information is updated based on the result of the specific identification, the counter value of the second counter means is updated so as to correspond to the counter value of the first counter means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C2, there is an effect that the correction can be performed so as to be synchronized even when a difference occurs between the counter values of the first counter means and the second counter means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the information displayed based on the counter value of the second counter means is configured such that information corresponding to the counter value determined with the value of the counter value as the upper limit can be displayed. The second control means is determined by the number-of-times information determination means capable of determining the number-of-times information to be added to the information displayed on the display means based on a predetermined lottery, and the number-of-times information determination means. A gaming machine C3, comprising: variable means capable of varying the information corresponding to a value obtained by adding the number-of-times information.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is difficult to understand the actual counter value of the second counter means and the information is added to change the information. There is an effect that it can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (Check period set within the valid period of operation)
In a gaming machine having operation means operable by a player and effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, an effective period setting means capable of setting an effective period, Specific period setting means for setting a specific period within the effective period set by the effective period setting means, and operation determination means capable of determining whether the operating means has been operated within the specific period The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute an effect based on the operation determining means determining that the operation has been performed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it is suggested that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified by operating the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to limit the period for discriminating the operation of the operating means to a specific period and reduce the control load.

In the gaming machine D1, the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set a plurality of the specific periods, the gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, a plurality of specific periods are set, so that the player can increase the chances of operating the game machine, and the effect of not producing the effect can be suppressed. is there.

In the gaming machine D2, the specific period setting means sets a plurality of intervals for setting the specific period in a first period, the gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, the specific period is set at equal intervals, so that it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the effect by operating the operation means at equal intervals after the effect is executed. There is an effect that a player can provide a game that is easy to understand.

In the gaming machine D3, the first period is configured to be longer than a shortest period in which the player can operate the operating means twice and shorter than a shortest period in which the player can operate the operating means three times. Gaming machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D3, a plurality of effects can be easily executed by operating the operation means while maintaining the operation state, and the operation state can be maintained in the first period or less. There is an effect that it is possible to maintain execution of the effect even when the state of releasing and operating again is maintained.

<Feature E group> (Point number control)
In a gaming machine having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance, and an informing means capable of notifying specific information when a specific performance is executed by the performance executing means, numerical information is provided as the performance. Display means capable of being displayed, determining means capable of determining the numerical information displayed on the display means, and information corresponding to the total of the numerical information displayed on the display means, A gaming machine E1 comprising: total information display means capable of being displayed on the display; and restriction means capable of restricting the total value from becoming predetermined information.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there has been proposed one in which an effect value is variably displayed a plurality of times, and a notice effect is executed in which information regarding the lottery result is informed according to the finally displayed effect value (for example, Patent Document: JP2013-090780A). Publication). However, in the process of changing the effect value, there is a problem that a specific value (for example, “77” that reminds the player of winning) is displayed, which gives a misunderstanding to the player. .. There was a demand for further improvement in the fun of playing games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the regulation means regulates that the total value becomes the predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being notified to the player, and the information to notify the player. There is an effect that can be limited.

In the gaming machine E1, the determining means is configured to be able to determine a plurality of numerical information, and the gaming machine determines whether the combination of the plurality of numerical information determined by the determining means is a specific combination. When the combination determination means determines a specific combination, the regulation means has a discriminable combination determination means, and the predetermined information is obtained by summing the plurality of determined numerical information. A gaming machine E2, which is configured to be capable of determining whether or not

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, it is possible to reduce the control load by limiting the control means to determine whether or not to restrict when the numerical information of a specific combination is determined. There is an effect that can be.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 is provided with a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player when specific information is displayed on the display unit by the total information display unit. A gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, expectation can be given to the displayed numerical information so that specific information is displayed on the display means. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

<Feature F group> (Special variable period control)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information is moved by the dynamic display means. Dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period to be dynamically displayed, and executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a possible privilege game executing means, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is determined from a predetermined dynamic display period when a specific condition is satisfied. Control means that can be controlled as described above, first information giving means that can give the first information to the player when the predetermined dynamic display period is decided, and the first information thereof. A first information type deciding unit capable of deciding the type of the first information given by the giving unit, and becomes advantageous information for the player when the first information satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being configured as described above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a configuration in which the player can be informed of the lottery result by varying the length of the variation time of the symbols indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-39398). In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is necessary to execute a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed from a plurality of times with respect to the determined variation time, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. The object is to solve the problems and the like illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the first information is given in correspondence with the dynamic display of the identification information when the specific condition is satisfied, not only the determination result notified by the identification information but also the given first information is given. There is an effect that it is possible to make an interest in whether one piece of information satisfies a predetermined condition and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F1, when the privilege game is executed, it has a setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and the second game state. A gaming machine F2, wherein the first information is configured to be capable of satisfying a predetermined condition when is set.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the first information satisfies the predetermined condition, the player can identify that the second gaming state is set, and the interest of the game is improved. The effect is that it can be done.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the determination control means determines the predetermined dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. Machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, a predetermined dynamic display period can be continuously determined until the end condition is satisfied, and the opportunity to give the first information is short-term. There is an effect that many can be added in the meantime.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a plurality of dynamic display modes are set corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the first information giving means is A gaming machine F4, wherein the first information is added when a specific dynamic display mode corresponding to a predetermined dynamic display period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first information is added by executing the specific dynamic display mode, so that the specific dynamic display mode is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to expect that the game is played, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

<Characteristic G group> (Short fluctuation over a predetermined number of times)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information is moved by the dynamic display means. Dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period to be dynamically displayed, and executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a possible privilege game execution means, a first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means. , A second dynamic display period group configured to facilitate determination of a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period group, and a dynamic display period storage unit in which at least the second dynamic display period group is set, and the specific condition is satisfied. In this case, a count means capable of counting information corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a first count value in a period in which counting is performed by the count means. In the above case, the gaming machine G1 is characterized by further comprising: determination control means capable of determining the dynamic display period from the second dynamic display period group. ..

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a configuration in which the player can be informed of the lottery result by varying the length of the variation time of the symbols indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-39398). In such a conventional type gaming machine, since it is configured to execute various effects depending on the length of the variation time, it is configured to enhance the effect of the effect by determining the variation time of a predetermined time or more. It had been. However, if the period in which the winning is not won continues for a long time, the number of winning lots per unit period is decreased each time a long fluctuation time is determined, which lowers the player's willingness to play and early in the game. There was a problem of getting tired of. The object is to solve the problems and the like illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine G1, by counting the first count value or more by the counting means, the short dynamic display period can be easily determined, and the gaming efficiency can be increased and varied for the player who plays for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine G1, when the privilege game is executed, a first game state and a setting means that can set a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, and a game ball can be entered. When the second game state is set by the first state and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and the setting means, the second game state is set. , The setting means capable of setting the variable ball entering means more easily to be changed from the second state to the first state than when the first gaming state is set, and the counting means The gaming machine G2, which starts counting based on the setting of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G2, after the period in which it is easy to enter the variable ball entering means becomes a certain period or more, the gaming efficiency is switched to be higher, so that the player is excessive. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the advantage.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when the second game state is set, it is possible to set a high probability that the determination means has a high probability of being determined as the specific determination result, and the counting means. The game machine G3, wherein the second game state is set, and when the high probability is not set, the count is ended based on the fact that the first count value is reached.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect to be exerted on the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming efficiency is highly variable in the state where the high probability is set, so that the period during which the bonus game is executed after the first count value is executed. The effect is that it can be shortened.

When the specific condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit is controllable to determine from the predetermined dynamic display period, and the predetermined control unit. When the dynamic display period is determined, it is possible to determine the first information assigning unit that can assign the first information to the player and the type of the first information assigned by the first information assigning unit. A first information type determining means, which is configured to become information that is advantageous to the player when the first information satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine G1.

<Characteristic H group> (derived stock production)
A discriminating means capable of discriminating, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and for indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means When the identification information of is displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect and a new effect execution A gaming machine H1 comprising: a restricting means capable of restricting, and a period determining means capable of determining a restricting period for restricting execution of the new effect by the restricting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, there has been proposed one in which a notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance is executed before the result of the lottery is notified (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). 2013-090780). However, if a plurality of suggestive effects are executed repeatedly, there is a problem that a notice effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a demand to improve the entertainment of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, since it is possible to change the period during which the execution of the effect is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the execution of the effect is restricted. There is an effect that the interest of can be improved.

<Feature group I> (production history control)
A discriminating means capable of discriminating, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and for indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means In the gaming machine having the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information of is displayed, the effect executing means capable of executing one effect from a plurality of kinds of effects. , A privilege that is advantageous to the player is given based on a determination means capable of determining the one effect executed by the effect execution means, and the order of the one effect determined by the determination means. A gaming machine B1 having a possible privilege granting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, it is proposed that the effect of the effect is enhanced by enabling execution of a plurality of types of advance notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance before the lottery result is notified. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, if the suggestive effect of the same content is continuously executed, there is a problem that the notice effect which is difficult for the player to understand is executed and the effect of the effect is reduced, and the effect of the effect is suppressed from being reduced. There was a demand for further improvement in the fun of playing games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, it is possible to change the privilege granted depending on the order of the effects to be executed, so that the player can be interested in the process of the effects to be executed, and the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that you can.

<Characteristic J group> (derivative content management derivative)
In a gaming machine having a second control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, the first control means is based on establishment of a first condition. The second control means has a first counter means capable of updating the first counter and a period discriminating means capable of discriminating the remaining period of the first period, and the second control means is based on the establishment of the first condition. Second counter means capable of updating the second counter on the basis of the satisfaction of the second condition that is satisfied when the first control signal that can be output is received, and the counter of the second counter means. When the display means for displaying information based on the value, the identifying means capable of identifying the numerical information corresponding to the information displayed on the display means, and the identification result by the identifying means is a specific identification result, A gaming machine J1 comprising: a determination means capable of determining an update mode of information displayed on the display means based on a determination result by the period determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, there has been proposed one that executes an effect in which information indicating the lottery result is provided to the player step by step (for example, Patent Document: JP2013-090780A). .. However, when there is a difference in the stage information managed between the control means for setting the effect contents and the control means for displaying the effect result, an unintended effect is executed and the player's There was a problem that the willingness to play was reduced. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine J1, the information is updated based on the remaining period of the first period. Therefore, even when the counter values counted by the first counter unit and the second counter unit are misaligned, the display unit is displayed. There is an effect that the information displayed on the screen can be properly corrected within the remaining period.

<Characteristic K group> (Derivation of check period setting within operation valid period)
In a gaming machine having operation means operable by a player and effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, an effective period setting means capable of setting an effective period, It is possible to discriminate whether the operation means has been operated within the specific period and the operation content notification means for indicating the operation content to the operation means within the effective period set by the effective period setting means. The operation content notifying means can notify the operation content different from the operation content being informed when the first condition is satisfied while the valid period is set. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it is suggested that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified by operating the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the operation content informed by the operation content informing means can be changed in the middle, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that you can.

<Feature L group> (Derivation of point number control)
In a gaming machine having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance, and an informing means capable of notifying specific information when a specific performance is executed by the performance executing means, numerical information is provided as the performance. Display means capable of being displayed, determining means capable of determining the numerical information displayed on the display means, and information corresponding to the total of the numerical information displayed on the display means, Total information display means that can be displayed on the display, and regulation means that can regulate the execution of the effect that displays the numerical information determined by the determination means when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there has been proposed one in which an effect value is variably displayed a plurality of times, and a notice effect is executed in which information regarding the lottery result is informed according to the finally displayed effect value (for example, Patent Document: JP2013-090780A). Publication). However, in the process of changing the effect value, there is a problem that a specific value (for example, “77” that reminds the player of winning) is displayed, which gives a misunderstanding to the player. .. There was a demand for further improvement in the fun of playing games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the regulation means regulates that the total value becomes the predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the predetermined information, and to notify the player of the information. There is an effect that can be limited.

<Characteristics M group> (Countermeasures when small hits are confirmed)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. In this case, determination means capable of executing the determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result specific to the display means is stopped. In a game having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during a period in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A special admission means that enables a ball, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific entrance means can enter, and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area The privilege granting means for granting, the privilege class determining means for determining the class of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the privilege determined by the privilege class determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. A notification means for notifying the notification information that allows the player to identify the type of the information, and if the emission by the emission means is stopped for a predetermined period or more after the notification information is notified by the notification means, the specific input A game machine M1 characterized by having means for making it difficult to enter the ball means.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous depending on the type of the winning game. The type of this winning game is known to maintain fairness of the game by notifying in a predetermined notifying mode when notifying by displaying the lottery result by a symbol or the like. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, by hitting the game ball into a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, the winning game is further executed and the game set thereafter. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of hit game being executed first, it is determined whether or not the type of hit that gives the player a disadvantageous game state, and a specific entrance or specific area. There is a possibility that disadvantages on the side of the game store may increase due to the fact that the game method is carried out so that the game balls do not enter.

The gaming machine M1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming shop side.

According to the gaming machine M1, when the player tries to avoid being given a specific privilege type by confirming the notification information indicating the type of privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, another privilege type Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the specific entering means, so that there is an effect that the disadvantage on the side of the game shop can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from among different dynamic display modes in which a pseudo stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped is combined. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine M2, the final stop timing of the identification information becomes difficult to understand by being temporarily stopped in the pseudo stop mode, and when the specific privilege game is executed, the game ball is moved to the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the game method for avoiding entering the game.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the gaming machine M3 is characterized by having variable control means for varying a rate of entry into the specific area according to the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine M1 or M2, the rate of entering the specific area can be varied depending on the type of privilege game to be executed, so the probability of entering the specific area The effect is that the can be easily controlled.

<Feature N group> (Direct hit part 2)
There are a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means The second privilege different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game that are advantageous to the player when the mode determining unit and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display unit. In a game having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered while the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means. And a specific area in which the game ball entered in the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, when the game ball enters the specific area, the game When the second privilege game is being executed, the privilege granting means grants the player a second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not the player has entered the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time of entering the specific entering means. A gaming machine N1 having,.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous depending on the type of the winning game. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the effect up to the winning game is only performed, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early.

The gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of playing at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect not only that the identification information indicates a specific determination result but also whether or not to enter the specific area by the effect, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the game machine N1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects, the game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect execution means switches to a specific effect and executes the game if the game ball does not enter even after a preset period has passed in the specific area. A gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the player does not enter the specific area, the player can switch to the specific effect, which is effective for the player to not enter the specific area. There is an effect that can be notified.

<Characteristic P group> (A delay device is installed on the top of the V attacker to prevent choro strokes)
There are a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means The mode determining means and the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means are provided. In the game, a specific ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter while the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means, and a specification that a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter the ball. A region, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining unit that determines the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting unit , When the identification information is stopped and displayed, an informing means for informing information regarding the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, and a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine P1 comprising: adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of a game ball guided to a specific ball entering means for a predetermined period.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous depending on the type of the winning game. The type of this winning game is known to maintain fairness of the game by notifying in a predetermined notifying mode when notifying by displaying the lottery result by a symbol or the like. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, by hitting the game ball into a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, the winning game is further executed and the game set thereafter. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of hit game being executed first, it is determined whether or not the type of hit that gives the player a disadvantageous game state, and a specific entrance or specific area. There is a possibility that disadvantages on the side of the game store may increase due to the fact that the game method is carried out so that the game balls do not enter.

The gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming shop side.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the flow-down amount for the predetermined period guided to the specific ball entering means is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the informing means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether to make a ball.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area, a launching strength varying means capable of varying a launching strength emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game sphere that flows down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjustment means causes the game ball that flows down the second flow path to be the specific entrance ball. A gaming machine P2, characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio between a specific flow path that allows the player to enter the means and a flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific player.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls guided to the specific ball entering means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area, a launch strength varying means capable of varying a launch strength emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means transfers the game ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine P3 having a rolling means capable of moving and discharging the game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the adjusting means allows the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer to be rolled, so that the player may stop firing the gaming ball. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until when the specific ball entry means becomes available to enter the second flow path And a gaming machine P4, which is configured to be shorter than a period from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the specific ball entering means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, in order to enter the specific ball entering means, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a game method in which the special game is not allowed to enter the special game.

<Characteristic Q group> (choro strike countermeasure 2)
There are a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means The mode determining means and the privilege game executing means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means are provided. In the game, a specific ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter while the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means, and a specification that a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter the ball. A region, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining unit that determines the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting unit , Adjusting means for reducing the flow-down amount of the game ball guided to the specific ball entering means to a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period. Amusement machine Q1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous depending on the type of the winning game. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the game method of playing the game so that the game ball does not enter the specific entrance or the specific area is performed, which may increase the disadvantage on the side of the game store. was there.

The gaming machine Q1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming shop side.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the flow-down amount for the predetermined period guided to the specific ball entering means is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the informing means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether to make a ball.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area, a launch strength varying means capable of varying a launch strength emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game sphere that flows down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjustment means causes the game ball that flows down the second flow path to be the specific entrance ball. A game machine Q2, wherein the game machine Q2 distributes a specific flow path that can enter the means and a flow path that makes it difficult to enter the specific entrance means at a predetermined ratio.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls that are guided to the specific entrance means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area, a launch strength varying means capable of varying a launch strength emitted by the launching means by a player's operation, and a game ball capable of flowing down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3 having a rolling means capable of moving and discharging the game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, since the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, it is assumed that the player has stopped firing the game ball. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means becomes available to enter the second flow path And a gaming machine Q4, which is configured to be shorter than a period from when the game ball is shot to when the game ball reaches the specific ball entering means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, in order to enter the specific ball entering means, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a game method that does not allow the special game to enter the special game.

<Characteristic R group> (Direction up to V passage in small hit and direct hit)
There are a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means The second privilege different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game that are advantageous to the player when the mode determining unit and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display unit. In a game having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered while the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means. And a specific area in which the game ball entered in the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, when the game ball enters the specific area, the game When the second privilege game is being executed, the privilege granting means grants the player a second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not the player has entered the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time of entering the specific entering means. , And the effect executing means executes a suggesting effect that suggests that the method of launching the game ball is switched stepwise before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed and a state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous depending on the type of the winning game. (For example, JP 2012-147965A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the effect up to the winning game is only performed, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early.

The gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of playing at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect not only that the identification information indicates a specific determination result but also whether or not to enter the specific area by the effect, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine R1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects, the gaming machine R2.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect execution means switches to a specific effect and executes the game if the game ball does not enter even after a preset period has passed in the specific area. Gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the player does not enter the specific area, the player can switch to the specific effect, which is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. There is an effect that can be notified.

<Characteristic S group> (Switching between two types of control, small hit and symbol hit)
There are a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means The second privilege different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game that are advantageous to the player when the mode determining unit and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display unit. In a game having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered while the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game executing means. And a specific area in which the game ball entered in the specific ball entering means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, when the game ball enters the specific area, the game When the second privilege game is being executed, the privilege granting means grants the player a second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not the player has entered the specific area. And a first state in which a guide path for guiding the game ball entering the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to guide to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the guide path is set by the switching means, and when the second privilege game is executed, A gaming machine S1 comprising: setting means for setting second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous, and a specific entrance or identification during the winning game. It has been proposed that a game ball is entered into the area so that a bonus such as a winning game is further executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, further interest in the game has been demanded.

The gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the taxiway can be switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player a guiding mode to a different specific area, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine S1, the gaming machine S2 is characterized in that it is switched to the first state by switching the guide path according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1, the taxiway is switched to the first state by the second switching information. Therefore, in the second privilege game, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the specific area. Even if it is the second privilege game, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player feel as if the second privilege is granted by entering the specific area.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information is set with a plurality of different pieces of information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guiding state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic T group> (2 types switch between small hit and symbol hit)
There are a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a judging means capable of executing a judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for showing a judgment result by the judging means. Display means to be displayed, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means The second privilege different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game that are advantageous to the player when the mode determining unit and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display unit. In a game having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. And a specific area in which the game ball that entered the specific ball means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, when the game ball enters the specific area, the game When the second privilege game is being executed, the privilege granting means grants the player a second privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not the player has entered the specific area. And a first state in which a guide path for guiding the game ball entering the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to guide to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the guide path is set by the switching means, and when the second privilege game is executed, A gaming machine T1 comprising: a setting means for setting second switching information for switching the taxiway to the first state.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine executes a lottery by entering a game ball into a starting opening provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous, and a specific entrance or identification during the winning game. It has been proposed that a game ball is entered into the area so that a bonus such as a winning game is further executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, further interest in the game has been demanded.

The gaming machine P1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the taxiway can be switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player a guiding mode to a different specific area, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine T1, the game ball up to the specific area by a different guide path between a case of switching to the first state by the second switching information and a case of switching to the first state by the first switching information. A gaming machine T2 characterized by being guided.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect that the gaming machine T1 has, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired early because the player is guided to a specific area by different guidance.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information is set with a plurality of different pieces of information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guiding state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic group U> (Set the production mode based on the length of the period from special 2 prize to special 2 fluctuation)
When the first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination unit that executes the first determination, the acquisition unit that acquires the acquisition information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit are set to a predetermined value. A storage unit capable of storing a number as an upper limit, a second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage unit when a second determination condition is satisfied, and the first determination Dynamic identification means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the means or the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means for a predetermined period. In the gaming machine, the dynamic display of the second identification information is not started while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied. Based on the period effect executing means for executing the period effect on the basis of the period and the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. And a production mode setting means for setting a production mode in the period production executed by the period production execution means based on the determination result of the period production means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a plurality of starting openings are provided and different lottery is executed depending on the starting openings into which the game balls enter. Then, there is one that executes a suggestive effect that suggests the result of a win/loss lottery executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered each starting opening (for example, JP-A-2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, when the winning/winning lottery is being executed based on the entry of the game ball into one of the starting openings, when the gaming ball is entered into the other starting opening, the winning or failing execution is being performed. It is possible to prevent the player from excessively executing the winning/winning lottery by preventing the new winning/winning lottery from being executed until the lottery ends.

However, the period from the entry of the game ball into one of the starting openings to the execution of the win/loss selection (indication production) based on that entry is based on the entry of the gaming ball into the other starting opening. Since it depends on the status of the winning/loss lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting opening, a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the winning/winning lottery executed based on the entry is executed. If the period until it becomes long becomes longer, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestion effect based on the ball is being executed, the effect effect of the suggestive effect is lowered, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect that can suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

According to the gaming machine U1, the production of the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the length of the period from the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, it is possible to execute the period effect that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The gaming machine U1 has a remaining period determination means for determining the remaining dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determination means is the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means. A gaming machine U2, characterized in that the period is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U1, based on the remaining dynamic display period of the first identification information that is being executed by the period determining means, the second identification information is established after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Since the period until the dynamic display of is started can be determined, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute the period effect according to the actual content of the game and to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the acquisition information, and the period determination means applies the predetermined start condition after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A gaming machine U3 for determining the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started based on the acquired information that satisfies a start condition.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is period determination. Since it is determined by the means, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute the period effect according to the actual content of the game and to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing unit includes at least a period from the acquisition unit acquiring the acquisition information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquisition information. A gaming machine U4, characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U3, at least the acquisition unit acquires the acquired information as a performance period in which the period effect is executed, and then the second identification information based on the acquired information is dynamically used. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual game situation during the period corresponding to the actual game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the game machine U1 or U2 has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is easily satisfied, and the period determination means is defined by the specific game execution means. This is for determining a period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, and the period effect executing means at least after the predetermined execution condition is satisfied. A gaming machine U5, wherein the period effect is executed in an effect period including a period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the period effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, when the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means, a dynamic display determining means capable of determining whether the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display determining means. When the first identification information is determined not to be dynamically displayed, a second period determination means for determining a second period different from the period determination means is included, and the second period determination is performed. The means determines a period from the acquisition of the acquisition information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquisition information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine U6 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing when the determination can be performed by the period determination means, the second timing is different from the timing. The determination of the period determination means can be executed. Therefore, the period from the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information can be determined at a plurality of timings, so that the period effect according to the actual game content is executed. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means, as the period effect, a first period effect executed in a predetermined first period, and the second period effected after the first period. A game machine U7, characterized in that at least a second period effect executed in the period effect is executed, and the effect mode setting means sets an effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determining means, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period effect can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, when the determination result by the period determination unit is a specific determination result, the effect mode setting unit is a part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect. A gaming machine U8 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are produced. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is being executed or the second period effect is being executed for the player. It can be difficult to understand. Therefore, even when the period determining unit determines that the second period is long, it is possible to execute the period effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

<Characteristic group V> (When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the general map long open suggestion effect is executed)
A variable ball entering means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. Discriminating means for discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied based on the fact that a ball is thrown, and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a determination means for performing a determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination according to the determination condition for a predetermined period, Based on the effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the effect execution means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, in the case of doing, an effect for indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode is executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting opening provided on a game board surface, the game is won or missed in a first lottery, and if the lottery result is a win, a player There was a game in which a privilege game that was advantageous to the game was executed. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting opening, and when the winning ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting opening. There are things that make it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestion effect, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the game ball can be easily inserted into the starting opening. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, when the suggestion effect is executed, the player stops the firing of the game ball, and the effect mode in which the game is restarted based on the effect result of the suggestion effect is a win-winning effect mode. In this case, the game is stopped until the suggestive effect is finished, the game is restarted in accordance with the timing when the movable member is moved, or when the suggestive effect's effect mode is highly likely to be out of sync. Until the suggestive effect is finished, the game ball is entered into one of the starting openings until the winning/winning lottery (indicative effect) based on the entry is executed to the other starting opening. Since it depends on the situation of the winning/winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, the result of the winning/winning lottery executed based on the entry after the game ball enters the starting opening If the period until the suggestive effect for indicating is extended becomes longer, it becomes difficult for the player to know which incoming ball is based on the suggestive effect, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced. However, there was a problem that the willingness to play decreased. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect that can suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to notify that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game for satisfying the effect condition, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means, a first type corresponding to the first specific game that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantage that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game There is a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to two specific games, and the effect execution means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the effect is produced by the effect executing means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, condition determination means capable of determining whether or not the effect condition is satisfied, and specific identification information for indicating a result of the determination executed by the determination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. A display means, wherein the condition determination means determines that the effect condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the effect condition can be established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player is motivated to play the specific identification information dynamically. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine V3, it is determined whether the execution information indicating that the determination has been performed by the determination means is held, and whether the execution information held by the information holding means satisfies a valid condition. When the effective condition determining means determines that the effective condition is satisfied, the effective condition determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be satisfied while the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if the game in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed is performed, even if the timing at which the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed occurs, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect execution means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be stably executed to the player who is eagerly playing the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In either the gaming machine V3 or V4, an acquisition unit that can acquire the acquisition information when the acquisition condition is satisfied, and a storage unit that can store the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit up to a predetermined number. And the determination means performs the determination based on the acquisition information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means includes the acquisition means. Performs the first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquisition information, and executes the second condition determination based on the determination being performed by the determination means. A gaming machine, which executes the effect when it is determined that the effect condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition judgment or the result of the second condition judgment. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine V3 or V4, it is possible to determine the establishment of the effect condition at a plurality of timings by the condition determining means. Therefore, for the player who is playing the game eagerly Therefore, there is an effect that the production can be stably performed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V5, the effect execution means is capable of executing, as the effect, a timing notification effect that notifies the timing when the variable ball entering means is in the first state. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine V1 or V5, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing when the variable ball entering means is in the first state by the effect executed by the effect executing means Since it is notified to the person, there is an effect that the game can be motivated to perform the effect by the effect executing means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo-timing notification effect for notifying a timing different from the timing when the variable ball entering means is in the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized in that

The gaming machine V7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V6. That is, when the effect condition is not satisfied, a timing different from the timing when the variable ball entering means is in the first state is notified, so that the game in which only the determination condition is satisfied without satisfying the effect condition is played. This has the effect of allowing the player to play a disadvantageous game.

The gaming machine V8, wherein in any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more easily satisfied than the effect condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is easier to be satisfied than the performance condition, and thus the game is more enthusiastically performed to satisfy the performance condition. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristic group W> (In the small win during small working hours reduction, there is a higher probability than in the distribution ratio during short working hours that the advantageous small winning prize is announced)
An acquisition unit that acquires the acquisition information based on establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that can store the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit up to a predetermined number, and if a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, A discriminating means for discriminating based on the acquired information stored in the storing means, and a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discriminating result of the discriminating means is the first discriminating result, A gaming machine having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game which is advantageous to the player over the first privilege game when the second judgment result is different from the first judgment result, The game state setting means capable of setting a first game state after the end of the first privilege game or the second privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and the acquisition information stored in the storage means, During the first game state, a pre-determination means for performing a pre-determination before the determination based on the acquired information, and a suggestive effect for showing that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed. And a game execution state setting means, wherein the game state setting means is based on the fact that a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in a state in which the first game state is set, and the first game state. Is for setting a different second game state, and the effect executing means is configured to perform the determination based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquisition information for which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine W1 characterized by being capable of executing suggestive effects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting opening provided on a game board surface, the game is won or missed in a first lottery, and if the lottery result is a win, a player There was a game in which a privilege game that was advantageous to the game was executed. Further, there is one in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege game is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). Further, in recent game machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) in which a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a probable variation state) is set after the jackpot game ends is low. There is one that suppresses the gambling performance of the game by setting (for example, 65% or less).

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a player wins a win (for example, a big hit or a small hit) in a state where an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is again set after the hit game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous game state, and the motivation for the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, the first bonus game or the second bonus game, which is more advantageous than the first bonus game, is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination, by the suggestive effect executed during the first game state. Is suggested. Then, since the suggestion effect can be executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. It can be easier to suggest that. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to have a sense of expectation that the suggestive effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means is provided before the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied is to indicate the second determination result. The gaming machine W1 characterized in that the pre-article discrimination result is easier to execute the suggestion effect than the pre-discrimination result for indicating the first discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine W2, the preliminary determination result corresponding to the acquired information that is determined after the second gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the ending condition of the first gaming state indicates the second determination result. In this case, the suggestive effect is more likely to be executed by the effect executing means than when the first determination result is shown. As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the result of the judgment by the judgment means executed during the first game state, the judgment means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second privilege game is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to have a sense of expectation that the suggestive effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, there is a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio in which the result of the judgment by the judging means is the first judgment result and a ratio in which the second judgment result is the second judgment result. , When the second game state is set, the ratio of the second determination result is set to be higher than when the first game state is set. Gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine W1, it is possible to make the second determination result easier in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second privilege game is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to have a sense of expectation that the suggestive effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the effect execution means uses the period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information, which has been subjected to the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, as the production period. A game machine W4 characterized by being capable of executing suggestive effects.

According to W4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestion production is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information determined in advance is executed as the production period, so the production effect There is an effect that can increase.

<Characteristic X group> (When the condition for shifting from the time saving state to the normal state is satisfied, a notification for executing many Toku-zu 2 changes in the normal state is executed during the time saving state)
An acquisition unit that acquires the acquisition information based on establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that can store the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit up to a predetermined number, and if a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A game having an executing means, a first gaming state in which the obtaining means easily obtains the obtained information, a second gaming state that is harder to obtain than the first gaming state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and the game state setting means stores the second game state in the storage means. A storage number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored, and a notification mode setting capable of setting a notification mode based on the determination result of the storage number determination means in a state where the first game state is set. Means and notification executing means capable of executing the notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, wherein the notification mode setting means stores the memory at least at a specific timing of the first gaming state. A gaming machine X1 characterized in that the notification mode is set on the basis of the discrimination result of the number discriminating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a game win/win is selected by lot, and if the result of the lot is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is one in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege game is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). Further, in such a gaming machine, when a specific game state is set, a specific starting opening is provided that makes it easier to enter the ball than when other gaming states are set, and the game is set in the specific starting opening. When the lottery based on the ball entered is executed, it is configured so that the privilege game with a higher degree of advantage can be executed more easily than when the game ball enters the other starting opening, and further specified There is a configuration in which the right of the lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number. In the gaming machine configured in this manner, when the specific gaming state is set, the player can efficiently perform the lottery executed based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the specific starting opening. As a result, the player can motivate the player to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the ending condition of the specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific starting opening. Therefore, as the end of the specific game state approaches, the player There was a problem that the player's willingness to play decreased. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to set the mode of the notification executed by the notification executing means according to the number of storages of the acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for changing the number of stored pieces of acquired information so that the notification execution means executes various modes of the notification operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine X1, the notification execution means executes acquisition suggestion notification that suggests acquisition of the acquisition information during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is the storage number determination means. According to the above, the gaming machine X2 is configured to set a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification when it is determined that the acquired information stored in the storage unit is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X1, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed when the number of pieces of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period in the first gaming state is less than or equal to a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, when the number of pieces of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period in the first gaming state is larger than a predetermined number, for example, when the storage means stores the maximum number of pieces of acquired information, acquisition suggestion is suggested. Since the notification can be configured not to be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the contents of the notification executed by the notification executing means.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, based on the discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the discrimination executed by the discriminating means in the state where the first game state is set, and the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means. A transition condition determining unit that determines whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification executing unit is configured to perform the transition condition after the transition condition determining unit determines that the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine X3, wherein the notification effect is executed within the specific period.

The gaming machine X3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X2. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the player is allowed to play the game for acquiring the acquired information within a limited period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the last period when the first game state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means at least. A second period effect that is executed during the second period, based on the determination result of the memory number determination means at the end timing of the first period, in the first period. And a second period effect executing means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characteristic game machine X4.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of pieces of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine X4, the number of pieces of acquisition information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period is set, and the acquisition information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period ends And an increase number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period, and the period effect mode setting means determines the increase number. A gaming machine X5, characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X4, the production mode of the second period production is set based on the number of pieces of acquired information stored during the first period, so the first period is set. By adjusting the number of stored pieces of acquired information at a certain time point by varying the number of pieces of acquired information stored in the first period, it is possible to change the effect mode of the second period effect. .. Therefore, different effects can be executed according to the contents of the game executed by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine X4 or X5, the gaming machine X4 or X5 has a pre-judging means for pre-judging the acquired information stored in the storage means before the judgment based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. The game machine X6 is characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X5, it is possible to set the rendering mode of the second period rendering based on the result of the preliminary determination of the acquired information stored in the storage means. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to make more interesting by the second period effect.

In the gaming machine X6, the second period effect executing means is a case where the determination result of the executing determination means is other than the specific determination result, and the determination result of the pre-determination means indicates the specific determination result. If it is shown, the second period effect is executed until the determination result of the determination means based on the acquired information that is the specific determination result is notified. Amusement machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X6, when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result, the effect execution means is used until the identification information corresponding to the preliminary determination is stopped and displayed. The performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be watched for the effect executed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means provides a suggestion effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the pre-determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine X7, it is suggested that the determination result of the pre-determination means is a specific determination result by the suggestive presentation mode until the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which determination has resulted in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Set a plurality of time saving end conditions and give different benefits according to the established time saving end conditions)
Determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and privilege game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. , A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is easily executed and a second game state in which the discrimination is harder to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting means In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state on the basis of at least that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the first game state is set. As a condition, a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition, and the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means being satisfied. A privilege granting unit capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the above, the privilege granting unit grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege A gaming machine Y1 characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is granted when a transition condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting opening provided on a game board surface, the game is won or missed in a first lottery, and if the lottery result is a win, a player There was a game in which a privilege game that was advantageous to the game was executed. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting opening, and when the winning ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting opening. There are things that make it easier. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in the above gaming machine, when the specific game state is set, the variable period of the second lottery is set to be shorter than when the other game state is set, so that the specific game state is set. The second lottery is configured to be executed more during the period when is set.

However, since the variable period of the second lottery set during the specific game state is constant, the game becomes monotonous during the specific game state, which lowers the player's willingness to play. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first gaming state in which it is easy to obtain the acquired information is set, among the plurality of shifting conditions for shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it depends on the established shifting condition. Benefits can be given. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the first game state ends without getting the privilege even though the first game state is set, and thus the first game state is set to the player. There is an effect that the game for setting can be motivated and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Y1, the transition condition setting means sets the condition that is satisfied on the basis that the number of times of determination made by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. 1. A gaming machine Y2, which is set as one transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit on the number of times of determination by the determination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set, so that it is excessive for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the award being given.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, a variable ball entry means that can be varied between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a predetermined execution And a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entering means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period when a condition is satisfied, and the determining means is the variable ball entering means. The determination is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more easily executed than the second game state. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means grants a game state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first game state, as the first benefit given when the first transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Y4 characterized in that.

In the gaming machine Y4, a determination means capable of executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period. And a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the predetermined execution condition is that the identification information is a specific display. The dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the first privilege is granted than when the first privilege is not granted. A gaming machine Y5 characterized by facilitating setting of a dynamic display period.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means performs a determination result of the determination means executed in a state where the first game state is set, which is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine Y6, characterized in that a condition that is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number is set as the second transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state according to the determination result of the determining means executed during the period when the first gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the first gaming state continues can be made indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the first gaming state to continue for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (eg, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)

Claims (1)

A determination means capable of performing determination,
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means,
A gaming machine having a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means,
Production execution means capable of executing one production from a plurality of types of production,
Determining means capable of determining the one effect executed by the effect executing means,
A gaming machine comprising: a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege advantageous to a player based on the order of the one effect determined by the determining unit.

Images